From 362b077f0a088ec6b2dd07668b2891262c8b7bc6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: CSRG Date: Thu, 14 Jul 1988 07:32:42 -0800 Subject: [PATCH] BSD 4_3_Tahoe development Work on file usr/man/cat1/adb.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/apply.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/as.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/atq.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/atrm.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/at.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/ar.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/addbib.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/apropos.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/awk.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/calendar.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/cat.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/cal.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/cc.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/binmail.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/biff.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/cb.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/bc.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/basename.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/colrm.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/checknr.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/colcrt.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/clear.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/cmp.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/col.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/chmod.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/cd.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/chgrp.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/cp.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/crypt.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/uncompress.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/zcat.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/comm.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/compress.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/csh.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/limit.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/dbx.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/date.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/dd.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/dc.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/deroff.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/df.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/ctags.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/diffh.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/du.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/diff.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/diff3.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/diction.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/echo.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/ed.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/explain.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/ex.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/f77.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/expand.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/checkeq.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/expr.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/error.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/efl.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/edit.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/unexpand.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/eqn.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/neqn.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/finger.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/fp.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/fpr.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/fold.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/false.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/fmt.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/file.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/graph.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/from.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/gprof.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/egrep.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/grep.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/gcore.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/ftp.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/fgrep.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/fsplit.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/indent.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/iostat.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/head.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/hostid.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/install.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/hostname.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/intro.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/groups.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/kill.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/last.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/join.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/leave.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/learn.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/ld.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/lastcomm.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/logger.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/lock.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/lisp.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/lint.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/ln.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/login.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/liszt.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/lex.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/indxbib.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/lpr.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/lptest.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/lprm.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/lorder.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/lpq.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/lookbib.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/look.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/lxref.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/man.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/Mail.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/make.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/mail.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/m4.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/ls.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/mesg.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/more.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/mkdir.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/mset.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/mkdep.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/mkstr.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/page.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/mt.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/mv.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/nm.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/nohup.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/nice.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/newaliases.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/msgs.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/netstat.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/chsh.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/pix.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/passwd.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/pc.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/chfn.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/nroff.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/od.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/pi.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/pdx.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/pagesize.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/prof.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/plot.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/pr.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/pmerge.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/ps.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/printenv.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/pwd.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/ptx.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/rcp.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/pxref.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/pxp.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/px.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/ratfor.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/ranlib.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/quota.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/roffbib.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/rm.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/rev.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/rdist.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/rmail.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/rlogin.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/refer.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/rmdir.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/rsh.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/script.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/ruptime.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/sccs.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/rwho.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/sed.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/sendbug.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/spell.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/for.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/sleep.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/size.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/case.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/soelim.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/spellin.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/sh.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/sort.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/sortbib.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/spellout.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/while.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/if.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/style.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/strings.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/strip.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/su.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/spline.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/sum.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/split.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/stty.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/struct.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/systat.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/symorder.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/sysline.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/tcopy.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/tabs.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/tail.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/talk.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/tee.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/tar.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/tbl.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/tc.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/cu.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/tftp.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/tn3270.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/tip.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/time.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/telnet.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/tk.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/test.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/tset.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/tp.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/touch.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/troff.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/true.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/tr.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/tsort.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/reset.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/unifdef.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/ul.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/uniq.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/uucp.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/users.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/units.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/tty.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/uptime.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/vgrind.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/vacation.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/uux.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/uusend.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/uulog.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/uuname.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/uuencode.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/uuq.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/uudecode.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/w.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/wait.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/vi.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/vmstat.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/vlp.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/wc.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/wall.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/whoami.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/whatis.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/whois.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/who.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/which.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/whereis.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/xget.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/enroll.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/yacc.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/xstr.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/yes.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/xsend.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/write.0 Work on file usr/man/cat1/window.0 Synthesized-from: CSRG/cd2/4.3tahoe --- usr/man/cat1/Mail.0 | 726 +++++++++++++ usr/man/cat1/adb.0 | 528 ++++++++++ usr/man/cat1/addbib.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/apply.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/apropos.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/ar.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/as.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/at.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/atq.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/atrm.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/awk.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/basename.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/bc.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/biff.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/binmail.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/cal.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/calendar.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/case.0 | 594 +++++++++++ usr/man/cat1/cat.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/cb.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/cc.0 | 264 +++++ usr/man/cat1/cd.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/checkeq.0 | 246 +++++ usr/man/cat1/checknr.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/chfn.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/chgrp.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/chmod.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/chsh.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/clear.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/cmp.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/col.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/colcrt.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/colrm.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/comm.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/compress.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/cp.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/crypt.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/csh.0 | 2046 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ usr/man/cat1/ctags.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/cu.0 | 396 +++++++ usr/man/cat1/date.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/dbx.0 | 594 +++++++++++ usr/man/cat1/dc.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/dd.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/deroff.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/df.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/diction.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/diff.0 | 264 +++++ usr/man/cat1/diff3.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/diffh.0 | 264 +++++ usr/man/cat1/du.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/echo.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/ed.0 | 594 +++++++++++ usr/man/cat1/edit.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/efl.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/egrep.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/enroll.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/eqn.0 | 246 +++++ usr/man/cat1/error.0 | 264 +++++ usr/man/cat1/ex.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/expand.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/explain.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/expr.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/f77.0 | 264 +++++ usr/man/cat1/false.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/fgrep.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/file.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/finger.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/fmt.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/fold.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/for.0 | 594 +++++++++++ usr/man/cat1/fp.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/fpr.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/from.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/fsplit.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/ftp.0 | 792 ++++++++++++++ usr/man/cat1/gcore.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/gprof.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/graph.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/grep.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/groups.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/head.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/hostid.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/hostname.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/if.0 | 594 +++++++++++ usr/man/cat1/indent.0 | 396 +++++++ usr/man/cat1/indxbib.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/install.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/intro.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/iostat.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/join.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/kill.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/last.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/lastcomm.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/ld.0 | 264 +++++ usr/man/cat1/learn.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/leave.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/lex.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/limit.0 | 2046 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ usr/man/cat1/lint.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/lisp.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/liszt.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/ln.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/lock.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/logger.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/login.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/look.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/lookbib.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/lorder.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/lpq.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/lpr.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/lprm.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/lptest.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/ls.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/lxref.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/m4.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/mail.0 | 726 +++++++++++++ usr/man/cat1/make.0 | 264 +++++ usr/man/cat1/man.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/mesg.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/mkdep.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/mkdir.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/mkstr.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/more.0 | 330 ++++++ usr/man/cat1/mset.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/msgs.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/mt.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/mv.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/neqn.0 | 246 +++++ usr/man/cat1/netstat.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/newaliases.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/nice.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/nm.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/nohup.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/nroff.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/od.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/page.0 | 330 ++++++ usr/man/cat1/pagesize.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/passwd.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/pc.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/pdx.0 | 330 ++++++ usr/man/cat1/pi.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/pix.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/plot.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/pmerge.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/pr.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/printenv.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/prof.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/ps.0 | 264 +++++ usr/man/cat1/ptx.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/pwd.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/px.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/pxp.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/pxref.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/quota.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/ranlib.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/ratfor.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/rcp.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/rdist.0 | 396 +++++++ usr/man/cat1/refer.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/reset.0 | 396 +++++++ usr/man/cat1/rev.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/rlogin.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/rm.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/rmail.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/rmdir.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/roffbib.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/rsh.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/ruptime.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/rwho.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/sccs.0 | 264 +++++ usr/man/cat1/script.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/sed.0 | 264 +++++ usr/man/cat1/sendbug.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/sh.0 | 594 +++++++++++ usr/man/cat1/size.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/sleep.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/soelim.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/sort.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/sortbib.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/spell.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/spellin.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/spellout.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/spline.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/split.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/strings.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/strip.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/struct.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/stty.0 | 264 +++++ usr/man/cat1/style.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/su.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/sum.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/symorder.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/sysline.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/systat.0 | 462 +++++++++ usr/man/cat1/tabs.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/tail.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/talk.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/tar.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/tbl.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/tc.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/tcopy.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/tee.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/telnet.0 | 396 +++++++ usr/man/cat1/test.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/tftp.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/time.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/tip.0 | 396 +++++++ usr/man/cat1/tk.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/tn3270.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/touch.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/tp.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/tr.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/troff.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/true.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/tset.0 | 396 +++++++ usr/man/cat1/tsort.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/tty.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/ul.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/uncompress.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/unexpand.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/unifdef.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/uniq.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/units.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/uptime.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/users.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/uucp.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/uudecode.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/uuencode.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/uulog.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/uuname.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/uuq.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/uusend.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/uux.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/vacation.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/vgrind.0 | 198 ++++ usr/man/cat1/vi.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/vlp.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/vmstat.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/w.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/wait.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/wall.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/wc.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/whatis.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/whereis.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/which.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/while.0 | 594 +++++++++++ usr/man/cat1/who.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/whoami.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/whois.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/window.0 | 726 +++++++++++++ usr/man/cat1/write.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/xget.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/xsend.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/xstr.0 | 132 +++ usr/man/cat1/yacc.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/yes.0 | 66 ++ usr/man/cat1/zcat.0 | 198 ++++ 258 files changed, 41526 insertions(+) create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/Mail.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/adb.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/addbib.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/apply.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/apropos.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/ar.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/as.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/at.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/atq.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/atrm.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/awk.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/basename.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/bc.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/biff.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/binmail.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/cal.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/calendar.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/case.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/cat.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/cb.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/cc.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/cd.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/checkeq.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/checknr.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/chfn.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/chgrp.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/chmod.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/chsh.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/clear.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/cmp.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/col.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/colcrt.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/colrm.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/comm.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/compress.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/cp.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/crypt.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/csh.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/ctags.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/cu.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/date.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/dbx.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/dc.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/dd.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/deroff.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/df.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/diction.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/diff.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/diff3.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/diffh.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/du.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/echo.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/ed.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/edit.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/efl.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/egrep.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/enroll.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/eqn.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/error.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/ex.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/expand.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/explain.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/expr.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/f77.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/false.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/fgrep.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/file.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/finger.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/fmt.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/fold.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/for.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/fp.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/fpr.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/from.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/fsplit.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/ftp.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/gcore.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/gprof.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/graph.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/grep.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/groups.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/head.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/hostid.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/hostname.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/if.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/indent.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/indxbib.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/install.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/intro.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/iostat.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/join.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/kill.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/last.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/lastcomm.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/ld.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/learn.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/leave.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/lex.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/limit.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/lint.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/lisp.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/liszt.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/ln.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/lock.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/logger.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/login.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/look.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/lookbib.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/lorder.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/lpq.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/lpr.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/lprm.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/lptest.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/ls.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/lxref.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/m4.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/mail.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/make.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/man.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/mesg.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/mkdep.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/mkdir.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/mkstr.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/more.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/mset.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/msgs.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/mt.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/mv.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/neqn.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/netstat.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/newaliases.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/nice.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/nm.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/nohup.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/nroff.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/od.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/page.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/pagesize.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/passwd.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/pc.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/pdx.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/pi.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/pix.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/plot.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/pmerge.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/pr.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/printenv.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/prof.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/ps.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/ptx.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/pwd.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/px.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/pxp.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/pxref.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/quota.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/ranlib.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/ratfor.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/rcp.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/rdist.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/refer.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/reset.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/rev.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/rlogin.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/rm.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/rmail.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/rmdir.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/roffbib.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/rsh.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/ruptime.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/rwho.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/sccs.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/script.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/sed.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/sendbug.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/sh.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/size.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/sleep.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/soelim.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/sort.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/sortbib.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/spell.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/spellin.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/spellout.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/spline.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/split.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/strings.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/strip.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/struct.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/stty.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/style.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/su.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/sum.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/symorder.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/sysline.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/systat.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/tabs.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/tail.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/talk.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/tar.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/tbl.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/tc.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/tcopy.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/tee.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/telnet.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/test.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/tftp.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/time.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/tip.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/tk.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/tn3270.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/touch.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/tp.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/tr.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/troff.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/true.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/tset.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/tsort.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/tty.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/ul.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/uncompress.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/unexpand.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/unifdef.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/uniq.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/units.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/uptime.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/users.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/uucp.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/uudecode.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/uuencode.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/uulog.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/uuname.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/uuq.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/uusend.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/uux.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/vacation.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/vgrind.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/vi.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/vlp.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/vmstat.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/w.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/wait.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/wall.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/wc.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/whatis.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/whereis.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/which.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/while.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/who.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/whoami.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/whois.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/window.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/write.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/xget.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/xsend.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/xstr.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/yacc.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/yes.0 create mode 100644 usr/man/cat1/zcat.0 diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/Mail.0 b/usr/man/cat1/Mail.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4a1548589f --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/Mail.0 @@ -0,0 +1,726 @@ + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + mail - send and receive mail + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + mmaaiill [ --vv ] [ --ii ] [ --nn ] [ --ss subject ] [ user ... ] + mmaaiill [ --vv ] [ --ii ] [ --nn ] --ff [ name ] + mmaaiill [ --vv ] [ --ii ] [ --nn ] --uu user + +IINNTTRROODDUUCCTTIIOONN + _M_a_i_l is a intelligent mail processing system, which has a + command syntax reminiscent of _e_d with lines replaced by mes- + sages. + + The --vv flag puts mail into verbose mode; the details of + delivery are displayed on the users terminal. The --ii flag + causes tty interrupt signals to be ignored. This is particu- + larly useful when using _m_a_i_l on noisy phone lines. The --nn + flag inhibits the reading of /usr/lib/Mail.rc. + + _S_e_n_d_i_n_g _m_a_i_l. To send a message to one or more people, _m_a_i_l + can be invoked with arguments which are the names of people + to whom the mail will be sent. You are then expected to + type in your message, followed by an EOT (control-D) at the + beginning of a line. A subject may be specified on the com- + mand line by using the --ss flag. (Only the first argument + after the --ss flag is used as a subject; be careful to quote + subjects containing spaces.) The section below, labeled + _R_e_p_l_y_i_n_g _t_o _o_r _o_r_i_g_i_n_a_t_i_n_g _m_a_i_l, describes some features of + _m_a_i_l available to help you compose your letter. + + _R_e_a_d_i_n_g _m_a_i_l. In normal usage _m_a_i_l is given no arguments + and checks your mail out of the post office, then prints out + a one line header of each message there. The current mes- + sage is initially the first message (numbered 1) and can be + printed using the pprriinntt command (which can be abbreviated + pp). You can move among the messages much as you move + between lines in _e_d, with the commands `+' and `-' moving + backwards and forwards, and simple numbers. + + _D_i_s_p_o_s_i_n_g _o_f _m_a_i_l. After examining a message you can ddeelleettee + (dd) the message or rreeppllyy (rr) to it. Deletion causes the + _m_a_i_l program to forget about the message. This is not + irreversible; the message can be uunnddeelleetteedd (uu) by giving its + number, or the _m_a_i_l session can be aborted by giving the + eexxiitt (xx) command. Deleted messages will, however, usually + disappear never to be seen again. + + _S_p_e_c_i_f_y_i_n_g _m_e_s_s_a_g_e_s. Commands such as pprriinntt and ddeelleettee can + be given a list of message numbers as arguments to apply to + a number of messages at once. Thus ``delete 1 2'' deletes + messages 1 and 2, while ``delete 1-5'' deletes messages 1 + through 5. The special name ``*'' addresses all messages, + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 1 + + + + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + + and ``$'' addresses the last message; thus the command ttoopp + which prints the first few lines of a message could be used + in ``top *'' to print the first few lines of all messages. + + _R_e_p_l_y_i_n_g _t_o _o_r _o_r_i_g_i_n_a_t_i_n_g _m_a_i_l. You can use the rreeppllyy com- + mand to set up a response to a message, sending it back to + the person who it was from. Text you then type in, up to an + end-of-file, defines the contents of the message. While you + are composing a message, _m_a_i_l treats lines beginning with + the character `~' specially. For instance, typing ``~m'' + (alone on a line) will place a copy of the current message + into the response right shifting it by a tabstop. Other + escapes will set up subject fields, add and delete reci- + pients to the message and allow you to escape to an editor + to revise the message or to a shell to run some commands. + (These options are given in the summary below.) + + _E_n_d_i_n_g _a _m_a_i_l _p_r_o_c_e_s_s_i_n_g _s_e_s_s_i_o_n. You can end a _m_a_i_l ses- + sion with the qquuiitt (qq) command. Messages which have been + examined go to your _m_b_o_x file unless they have been deleted + in which case they are discarded. Unexamined messages go + back to the post office. The --ff option causes _m_a_i_l to read + in the contents of your _m_b_o_x (or the specified file) for + processing; when you qquuiitt, _m_a_i_l writes undeleted messages + back to this file. The --uu flag is a short way of doing + "mail --ff /usr/spool/mail/user". + + _P_e_r_s_o_n_a_l _a_n_d _s_y_s_t_e_m_w_i_d_e _d_i_s_t_r_i_b_u_t_i_o_n _l_i_s_t_s. It is also pos- + sible to create a personal distribution lists so that, for + instance, you can send mail to ``cohorts'' and have it go to + a group of people. Such lists can be defined by placing a + line like + + alias cohorts bill ozalp jkf mark kridle@ucbcory + + in the file .mailrc in your home directory. The current + list of such aliases can be displayed with the aalliiaass ((aa)) + command in _m_a_i_l. System wide distribution lists can be + created by editing /usr/lib/aliases, see _a_l_i_a_s_e_s(5) and + _s_e_n_d_m_a_i_l(8); these are kept in a different syntax. In mail + you send, personal aliases will be expanded in mail sent to + others so that they will be able to rreeppllyy to the recipients. + System wide _a_l_i_a_s_e_s are not expanded when the mail is sent, + but any reply returned to the machine will have the system + wide alias expanded as all mail goes through _s_e_n_d_m_a_i_l. + + _N_e_t_w_o_r_k _m_a_i_l (_A_R_P_A, _U_U_C_P, _B_e_r_k_n_e_t) See _m_a_i_l_a_d_d_r(_7) for a + description of network addresses. + + _M_a_i_l has a number of options which can be set in the ._m_a_i_l_r_c + file to alter its behavior; thus ``set askcc'' enables the + ``askcc'' feature. (These options are summarized below.) + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 2 + + + + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + +SSUUMMMMAARRYY + (Adapted from the `Mail Reference Manual') + + Each command is typed on a line by itself, and may take + arguments following the command word. The command need not + be typed in its entirety - the first command which matches + the typed prefix is used. For commands which take message + lists as arguments, if no message list is given, then the + next message forward which satisfies the command's require- + ments is used. If there are no messages forward of the + current message, the search proceeds backwards, and if there + are no good messages at all, _m_a_i_l types ``No applicable mes- + sages'' and aborts the command. + + -- Goes to the previous message and prints it out. + If given a numeric argument _n, goes to the _n-th + previous message and prints it. + + ?? Prints a brief summary of commands. + + !! Executes the UNIX shell command which follows. + + PPrriinntt (PP) Like pprriinntt but also prints out ignored + header fields. See also pprriinntt , iiggnnoorree and + rreettaaiinn.. + + RReeppllyy (RR) Reply to originator. Does not reply to other + recipients of the original message. + + TTyyppee (TT) Identical to the PPrriinntt command. + + aalliiaass (aa) With no arguments, prints out all + currently-defined aliases. With one argument, + prints out that alias. With more than one argu- + ment, creates an new or changes an on old alias. + + aalltteerrnnaatteess (aalltt) The aalltteerrnnaatteess command is useful if you + have accounts on several machines. It can be + used to inform _m_a_i_l that the listed addresses + are really you. When you rreeppllyy to messages, _m_a_i_l + will not send a copy of the message to any of + the addresses listed on the _a_l_t_e_r_n_a_t_e_s list. If + the aalltteerrnnaatteess command is given with no argu- + ment, the current set of alternate names is + displayed. + + cchhddiirr (cc) Changes the user's working directory to that + specified, if given. If no directory is given, + then changes to the user's login directory. + + ccooppyy (ccoo) The ccooppyy command does the same thing that + ssaavvee does, except that it does not mark the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 3 + + + + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + + messages it is used on for deletion when you + quit. + + ddeelleettee (dd) Takes a list of messages as argument and + marks them all as deleted. Deleted messages + will not be saved in _m_b_o_x, nor will they be + available for most other commands. + + ddpp (also ddtt) Deletes the current message and prints + the next message. If there is no next message, + _m_a_i_l says ``at EOF.'' + + eeddiitt (ee) Takes a list of messages and points the text + editor at each one in turn. On return from the + editor, the message is read back in. + + eexxiitt (eexx or xx) Effects an immediate return to the + Shell without modifying the user's system mail- + box, his _m_b_o_x file, or his edit file in --ff. + + ffiillee (ffii) The same as ffoollddeerr. + + ffoollddeerrss List the names of the folders in your folder + directory. + + ffoollddeerr (ffoo) The ffoollddeerr command switches to a new mail + file or folder. With no arguments, it tells you + which file you are currently reading. If you + give it an argument, it will write out changes + (such as deletions) you have made in the current + file and read in the new file. Some special con- + ventions are recognized for the name. # means + the previous file, % means your system mailbox, + %user means user's system mailbox, & means your + ~/mbox file, and +folder means a file in your + folder directory. + + ffrroomm (ff) Takes a list of messages and prints their + message headers. + + hheeaaddeerrss (hh) Lists the current range of headers, which is + an 18 message group. If a ``+'' argument is + given, then the next 18 message group is + printed, and if a ``-'' argument is given, the + previous 18 message group is printed. + + hheellpp A synonym for ? + + hhoolldd (hhoo, also pprreesseerrvvee) Takes a message list and + marks each message therein to be saved in the + user's system mailbox instead of in _m_b_o_x. Does + not override the ddeelleettee command. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 4 + + + + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + + iiggnnoorree NN..BB..:: _I_g_n_o_r_e has been superseded by _r_e_t_a_i_n. + Add the list of header fields named to the + _i_g_n_o_r_e_d _l_i_s_t. Header fields in the ignore list + are not printed on your terminal when you print + a message. This command is very handy for + suppression of certain machine-generated header + fields. The TTyyppee and PPrriinntt commands can be used + to print a message in its entirety, including + ignored fields. If iiggnnoorree is executed with no + arguments, it lists the current set of ignored + fields. + + mmaaiill (mm) Takes as argument login names and distribu- + tion group names and sends mail to those people. + + mmbbooxx Indicate that a list of messages be sent to _m_b_o_x + in your home directory when you quit. This is + the default action for messages if you do _n_o_t + have the _h_o_l_d option set. + + nneexxtt (nn like ++ or CR) Goes to the next message in + sequence and types it. With an argument list, + types the next matching message. + + pprreesseerrvvee (pprree) A synonym for hhoolldd. + + pprriinntt (pp) Takes a message list and types out each mes- + sage on the user's terminal. + + qquuiitt (qq) Terminates the session, saving all + undeleted, unsaved messages in the user's _m_b_o_x + file in his login directory, preserving all mes- + sages marked with hhoolldd or pprreesseerrvvee or never + referenced in his system mailbox, and removing + all other messages from his system mailbox. If + new mail has arrived during the session, the + message ``You have new mail'' is given. If + given while editing a mailbox file with the --ff + flag, then the edit file is rewritten. A return + to the Shell is effected, unless the rewrite of + edit file fails, in which case the user can + escape with the eexxiitt command. + + rreeppllyy (rr) Takes a message list and sends mail to the + sender and all recipients of the specified mes- + sage. The default message must not be deleted. + + rreessppoonndd A synonym for rreeppllyy. + + rreettaaiinn Add the list of header fields named to the + _r_e_t_a_i_n_e_d _l_i_s_t. Only the header fields in the + retain list are shown on your terminal when you + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 5 + + + + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + + print a message. All other header fields are + suppressed. The TTyyppee and PPrriinntt commands can be + used to print a message in its entirety. If + rreettaaiinn is executed with no arguments, it lists + the current set of retained fields. + + ssaavvee (ss) Takes a message list and a filename and + appends each message in turn to the end of the + file. The filename in quotes, followed by the + line count and character count is echoed on the + user's terminal. + + sseett (ssee) With no arguments, prints all variable + values. Otherwise, sets option. Arguments are + of the form ``option=value'' (no space before or + after =) or ``option.'' + + sshheellll (sshh) Invokes an interactive version of the + shell. + + ssiizzee Takes a message list and prints out the size in + characters of each message. + + ssoouurrccee (ssoo) The ssoouurrccee command reads _m_a_i_l commands from + a file. + + ttoopp Takes a message list and prints the top few + lines of each. The number of lines printed is + controlled by the variable ttoopplliinneess and defaults + to five. + + ttyyppee (tt) A synonym for pprriinntt. + + uunnaalliiaass Takes a list of names defined by aalliiaass commands + and discards the remembered groups of users. + The group names no longer have any significance. + + uunnddeelleettee (uu) Takes a message list and marks each message + as _n_o_t being deleted. + + uunnrreeaadd (UU) Takes a message list and marks each message + as _n_o_t having been read. + + uunnsseett Takes a list of option names and discards their + remembered values; the inverse of sseett. + + vviissuuaall (vv) Takes a message list and invokes the display + editor on each message. + + wwrriittee (ww) Similar to ssaavvee, except that _o_n_l_y the mes- + sage body (_w_i_t_h_o_u_t the header) is saved. + Extremely useful for such tasks as sending and + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 6 + + + + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + + receiving source program text over the message + system. + + xxiitt (xx) A synonym for eexxiitt. + + zz _M_a_i_l presents message headers in windowfuls as + described under the hheeaaddeerrss command. You can + move _m_a_i_l's attention forward to the next window + with the zz command. Also, you can move to the + previous window by using zz--. + + Here is a summary of the tilde escapes, which are used when + composing messages to perform special functions. Tilde + escapes are only recognized at the beginning of lines. The + name ``tilde escape'' is somewhat of a misnomer since the + actual escape character can be set by the option eessccaappee.. + + ~~!!command Execute the indicated shell command, then return + to the message. + + ~~bb name ... Add the given names to the list of carbon copy + recipients but do not make the names visible in + the Cc: line ("blind" carbon copy). + + ~~cc name ... Add the given names to the list of carbon copy + recipients. + + ~~dd Read the file ``dead.letter'' from your home + directory into the message. + + ~~ee Invoke the text editor on the message collected + so far. After the editing session is finished, + you may continue appending text to the message. + + ~~ff messages Read the named messages into the message being + sent. If no messages are specified, read in the + current message. + + ~~hh Edit the message header fields by typing each + one in turn and allowing the user to append text + to the end or modify the field by using the + current terminal erase and kill characters. + + ~~mm messages Read the named messages into the message being + sent, shifted right one tab. If no messages are + specified, read the current message. + + ~~pp Print out the message collected so far, prefaced + by the message header fields. + + ~~qq Abort the message being sent, copying the mes- + sage to ``dead.letter'' in your home directory + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 7 + + + + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + + if ssaavvee is set. + + ~~rr filename Read the named file into the message. + + ~~ss string Cause the named string to become the current + subject field. + + ~~tt name ... Add the given names to the direct recipient + list. + + ~~vv Invoke an alternate editor (defined by the + VISUAL option) on the message collected so far. + Usually, the alternate editor will be a screen + editor. After you quit the editor, you may + resume appending text to the end of your mes- + sage. + + ~~ww filename Write the message onto the named file. + + ~~||command Pipe the message through the command as a + filter. If the command gives no output or ter- + minates abnormally, retain the original text of + the message. The command _f_m_t(1) is often used + as _c_o_m_m_a_n_d to rejustify the message. + + ~~~~string Insert the string of text in the message pre- + faced by a single ~. If you have changed the + escape character, then you should double that + character in order to send it. + + Options are controlled via the sseett and uunnsseett commands. + Options may be either binary, in which case it is only sig- + nificant to see whether they are set or not; or string, in + which case the actual value is of interest. The binary + options include the following: + + aappppeenndd Causes messages saved in _m_b_o_x to be appended + to the end rather than prepended. (This is + set in /usr/lib/Mail.rc on version 7 sys- + tems.) + + aasskk Causes _m_a_i_l to prompt you for the subject of + each message you send. If you respond with + simply a newline, no subject field will be + sent. + + aasskkcccc Causes you to be prompted for additional car- + bon copy recipients at the end of each mes- + sage. Responding with a newline indicates + your satisfaction with the current list. + + aauuttoopprriinntt Causes the ddeelleettee command to behave like ddpp - + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 8 + + + + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + + thus, after deleting a message, the next one + will be typed automatically. + + ddeebbuugg Setting the binary option _d_e_b_u_g is the same + as specifying --dd on the command line and + causes _m_a_i_l to output all sorts of informa- + tion useful for debugging _m_a_i_l. + + ddoott The binary option _d_o_t causes _m_a_i_l to inter- + pret a period alone on a line as the termina- + tor of a message you are sending. + + hhoolldd This option is used to hold messages in the + system mailbox by default. + + iiggnnoorree Causes interrupt signals from your terminal + to be ignored and echoed as @'s. + + iiggnnoorreeeeooff An option related to _d_o_t is _i_g_n_o_r_e_e_o_f which + makes _m_a_i_l refuse to accept a control-d as + the end of a message. _I_g_n_o_r_e_e_o_f also applies + to _m_a_i_l command mode. + + mmeettoooo Usually, when a group is expanded that con- + tains the sender, the sender is removed from + the expansion. Setting this option causes + the sender to be included in the group. + + nnoossaavvee Normally, when you abort a message with two + RUBOUT, _m_a_i_l copies the partial letter to the + file ``dead.letter'' in your home directory. + Setting the binary option _n_o_s_a_v_e prevents + this. + + RReeppllyyaallll Reverses the sense of _r_e_p_l_y and _R_e_p_l_y com- + mands. + + qquuiieett Suppresses the printing of the version when + first invoked. + + vveerrbboossee Setting the option _v_e_r_b_o_s_e is the same as + using the --vv flag on the command line. When + mail runs in verbose mode, the actual + delivery of messages is displayed on he users + terminal. + + The following options have string values: + + EDITOR Pathname of the text editor to use in the + eeddiitt command and ~e escape. If not defined, + then a default editor is used. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 9 + + + + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + + PAGER Pathname of the program to use in the mmoorree + command or when _c_r_t variable is set. A + default paginator is used if this option is + not defined. + + SHELL Pathname of the shell to use in the !! command + and the ~! escape. A default shell is used + if this option is not defined. + + VISUAL Pathname of the text editor to use in the + vviissuuaall command and ~v escape. + + ccrrtt The valued option _c_r_t is used as a threshold + to determine how long a message must be + before PPAAGGEERR is used to read it. + + eessccaappee If defined, the first character of this + option gives the character to use in the + place of ~ to denote escapes. + + ffoollddeerr The name of the directory to use for storing + folders of messages. If this name begins with + a `/', _m_a_i_l considers it to be an absolute + pathname; otherwise, the folder directory is + found relative to your home directory. + + rreeccoorrdd If defined, gives the pathname of the file + used to record all outgoing mail. If not + defined, then outgoing mail is not so saved. + + ttoopplliinneess If defined, gives the number of lines of a + message to be printed out with the ttoopp com- + mand; normally, the first five lines are + printed. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/spool/mail/* post office + ~/mbox your old mail + ~/.mailrc file giving initial mail commands + /tmp/R# temporary for editor escape + /usr/lib/Mail.help* help files + /usr/lib/Mail.rc system initialization file + Message* temporary for editing messages + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + binmail(1), fmt(1), newaliases(1), aliases(5), + mailaddr(7), sendmail(8) + `The Mail Reference Manual' + +BBUUGGSS + There are many flags that are not documented here. Most are + not useful to the general user. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 10 + + + + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + + Usually, _m_a_i_l is just a link to _M_a_i_l, which can be confus- + ing. + +AAUUTTHHOORR + Kurt Shoens + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 11 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/adb.0 b/usr/man/cat1/adb.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..542668487c --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/adb.0 @@ -0,0 +1,528 @@ + + + +ADB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ADB(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + adb - debugger + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + aaddbb [--ww] [ --kk ] [ --IIdir ] [ objfil [ corfil ] ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _A_d_b is a general purpose debugging program. It may be used + to examine files and to provide a controlled environment for + the execution of UNIX programs. + + _O_b_j_f_i_l is normally an executable program file, preferably + containing a symbol table; if not then the symbolic features + of _a_d_b cannot be used although the file can still be exam- + ined. The default for _o_b_j_f_i_l is aa..oouutt.. _C_o_r_f_i_l is assumed to + be a core image file produced after executing _o_b_j_f_i_l; the + default for _c_o_r_f_i_l is ccoorree.. + + Requests to _a_d_b are read from the standard input and + responses are to the standard output. If the --ww flag is + present then both _o_b_j_f_i_l and _c_o_r_f_i_l are created if necessary + and opened for reading and writing so that files can be + modified using _a_d_b. + + The --kk option makes _a_d_b do UNIX kernel memory mapping; it + should be used when _c_o_r_e is a UNIX crash dump or /_d_e_v/_m_e_m. + + The --II option specifies a directory where files to be read + with $< or $<< (see below) will be sought; the default is + /_u_s_r/_l_i_b/_a_d_b. + + _A_d_b ignores QUIT; INTERRUPT causes return to the next _a_d_b + command. + + In general requests to _a_d_b are of the form + + [_a_d_d_r_e_s_s] [, _c_o_u_n_t] [_c_o_m_m_a_n_d] [;] + + If _a_d_d_r_e_s_s is present then _d_o_t is set to _a_d_d_r_e_s_s. Initially + _d_o_t is set to 0. For most commands _c_o_u_n_t specifies how many + times the command will be executed. The default _c_o_u_n_t is 1. + _A_d_d_r_e_s_s and _c_o_u_n_t are expressions. + + The interpretation of an address depends on the context it + is used in. If a subprocess is being debugged then + addresses are interpreted in the usual way in the address + space of the subprocess. If the operating system is being + debugged either post-mortem or using the special file + /_d_e_v/_m_e_m to interactive examine and/or modify memory the + maps are set to map the kernel virtual addresses which start + at 0x80000000 (on the VAX). ADDRESSES. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +ADB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ADB(1) + + + +EEXXPPRREESSSSIIOONNSS + .. The value of _d_o_t. + + + The value of _d_o_t incremented by the current incre- + ment. + + ^ The value of _d_o_t decremented by the current incre- + ment. + + " The last _a_d_d_r_e_s_s typed. + + _i_n_t_e_g_e_r + A number. The prefixes 0o and 0O ("zero oh") force + interpretation in octal radix; the prefixes 0t and 0T + force interpretation in decimal radix; the prefixes + 0x and 0X force interpretation in hexadecimal radix. + Thus 0o20 = 0t16 = 0x10 = sixteen. If no prefix + appears, then the _d_e_f_a_u_l_t _r_a_d_i_x is used; see the $d + command. The default radix is initially hexadecimal. + The hexadecimal digits are 0123456789abcdefABCDEF + with the obvious values. Note that a hexadecimal + number whose most significant digit would otherwise + be an alphabetic character must have a 0x (or 0X) + prefix (or a leading zero if the default radix is + hexadecimal). + + _i_n_t_e_g_e_r.._f_r_a_c_t_i_o_n + A 32 bit floating point number. + + '_c_c_c_c' The ASCII value of up to 4 characters. \ may be used + to escape a '. + + < _n_a_m_e The value of _n_a_m_e, which is either a variable name or + a register name. _A_d_b maintains a number of variables + (see VARIABLES) named by single letters or digits. + If _n_a_m_e is a register name then the value of the + register is obtained from the system header in _c_o_r_- + _f_i_l. The register names are those printed by the $r + command. + + _s_y_m_b_o_l A _s_y_m_b_o_l is a sequence of upper or lower case + letters, underscores or digits, not starting with a + digit. The backslash character \\ may be used to + escape other characters. The value of the _s_y_m_b_o_l is + taken from the symbol table in _o_b_j_f_i_l. An initial _ + will be prepended to _s_y_m_b_o_l if needed. + + _ _s_y_m_b_o_l + In C, the `true name' of an external symbol begins + with _. It may be necessary to utter this name to + distinguish it from internal or hidden variables of a + program. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + + + + +ADB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ADB(1) + + + + _r_o_u_t_i_n_e.._n_a_m_e + The address of the variable _n_a_m_e in the specified C + routine. Both _r_o_u_t_i_n_e and _n_a_m_e are _s_y_m_b_o_l_s. If _n_a_m_e + is omitted the value is the address of the most + recently activated C stack frame corresponding to + _r_o_u_t_i_n_e. (This form is currently broken on the VAX; + local variables can be examined only with _d_b_x(1).) + + (_e_x_p) The value of the expression _e_x_p. + + MMoonnaaddiicc ooppeerraattoorrss + + *_e_x_p The contents of the location addressed by _e_x_p in _c_o_r_- + _f_i_l. + + @_e_x_p The contents of the location addressed by _e_x_p in + _o_b_j_f_i_l. + + -_e_x_p Integer negation. + + ~_e_x_p Bitwise complement. + + #_e_x_p Logical negation. + + DDyyaaddiicc ooppeerraattoorrss are left associative and are less binding + than monadic operators. + + _e_1+_e_2 Integer addition. + + _e_1-_e_2 Integer subtraction. + + _e_1*_e_2 Integer multiplication. + + _e_1%_e_2 Integer division. + + _e_1&_e_2 Bitwise conjunction. + + _e_1|_e_2 Bitwise disjunction. + + _e_1#_e_2 _E_1 rounded up to the next multiple of _e_2. + +CCOOMMMMAANNDDSS + Most commands consist of a verb followed by a modifier or + list of modifiers. The following verbs are available. (The + commands `?' and `/' may be followed by `*'; see ADDRESSES + for further details.) + + ?_f Locations starting at _a_d_d_r_e_s_s in _o_b_j_f_i_l are printed + according to the format _f. _d_o_t is incremented by the + sum of the increments for each format letter (q.v.). + + /_f Locations starting at _a_d_d_r_e_s_s in _c_o_r_f_i_l are printed + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 3 + + + + + + +ADB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ADB(1) + + + + according to the format _f and _d_o_t is incremented as for + `?'. + + =_f The value of _a_d_d_r_e_s_s itself is printed in the styles + indicated by the format _f. (For ii format `?' is + printed for the parts of the instruction that reference + subsequent words.) + + A _f_o_r_m_a_t consists of one or more characters that specify a + style of printing. Each format character may be preceded by + a decimal integer that is a repeat count for the format + character. While stepping through a format _d_o_t is incre- + mented by the amount given for each format letter. If no + format is given then the last format is used. The format + letters available are as follows. + + oo 2 Print 2 bytes in octal. All octal numbers output + by _a_d_b are preceded by 0. + OO 4 Print 4 bytes in octal. + qq 2 Print in signed octal. + QQ 4 Print long signed octal. + dd 2 Print in decimal. + DD 4 Print long decimal. + xx 2 Print 2 bytes in hexadecimal. + XX 4 Print 4 bytes in hexadecimal. + uu 2 Print as an unsigned decimal number. + UU 4 Print long unsigned decimal. + ff 4 Print the 32 bit value as a floating point number. + FF 8 Print double floating point. + bb 1 Print the addressed byte in octal. + cc 1 Print the addressed character. + CC 1 Print the addressed character using the standard + escape convention where control characters are + printed as ^X and the delete character is printed + as ^?. + ss _n Print the addressed characters until a zero char- + acter is reached. + SS _n Print a string using the ^_X escape convention (see + CC above). _n is the length of the string including + its zero terminator. + YY 4 Print 4 bytes in date format (see _c_t_i_m_e(3)). + ii n Print as machine instructions. _n is the number of + bytes occupied by the instruction. This style of + printing causes variables 1 and 2 to be set to the + offset parts of the source and destination respec- + tively. + aa 0 Print the value of _d_o_t in symbolic form. Symbols + are checked to ensure that they have an appropri- + ate type as indicated below. + + / local or global data symbol + ? local or global text symbol + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 4 + + + + + + +ADB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ADB(1) + + + + = local or global absolute symbol + + pp 4 Print the addressed value in symbolic form using + the same rules for symbol lookup as aa. + tt 0 When preceded by an integer tabs to the next + appropriate tab stop. For example, 88tt moves to + the next 8-space tab stop. + rr 0 Print a space. + nn 0 Print a newline. + ""......"" 0 + Print the enclosed string. + ^^ _D_o_t is decremented by the current increment. + Nothing is printed. + + _D_o_t is incremented by 1. Nothing is printed. + - _D_o_t is decremented by 1. Nothing is printed. + + newline + Repeat the previous command with a _c_o_u_n_t of 1. + + [??//]ll _v_a_l_u_e _m_a_s_k + Words starting at _d_o_t are masked with _m_a_s_k and compared + with _v_a_l_u_e until a match is found. If LL is used then + the match is for 4 bytes at a time instead of 2. If no + match is found then _d_o_t is unchanged; otherwise _d_o_t is + set to the matched location. If _m_a_s_k is omitted then + -1 is used. + + [??//]ww _v_a_l_u_e ... + Write the 2-byte _v_a_l_u_e into the addressed location. If + the command is WW, write 4 bytes. Odd addresses are not + allowed when writing to the subprocess address space. + + [??//]mm _b_1 _e_1 _f_1[??//] + New values for (_b_1, _e_1, _f_1) are recorded. If less than + three expressions are given then the remaining map + parameters are left unchanged. If the `?' or `/' is + followed by `*' then the second segment (_b_2,_e_2,_f_2) of + the mapping is changed. If the list is terminated by + `?' or `/' then the file (_o_b_j_f_i_l or _c_o_r_f_i_l respec- + tively) is used for subsequent requests. (So that, for + example, `/m?' will cause `/' to refer to _o_b_j_f_i_l.) + + >>_n_a_m_e + _D_o_t is assigned to the variable or register named. + + !! A shell (/bin/sh) is called to read the rest of the + line following `!'. + + $_m_o_d_i_f_i_e_r + Miscellaneous commands. The available _m_o_d_i_f_i_e_r_s are: + + <<_f Read commands from the file _f. If this command is + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 5 + + + + + + +ADB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ADB(1) + + + + executed in a file, further commands in the file + are not seen. If _f is omitted, the current input + stream is terminated. If a _c_o_u_n_t is given, and is + zero, the command will be ignored. The value of + the count will be placed in variable _9 before the + first command in _f is executed. + <<<<_f Similar to << except it can be used in a file of + commands without causing the file to be closed. + Variable _9 is saved during the execution of this + command, and restored when it completes. There is + a (small) finite limit to the number of <<<< files + that can be open at once. + >>_f Append output to the file _f, which is created if + it does not exist. If _f is omitted, output is + returned to the terminal. + ?? Print process id, the signal which caused stoppage + or termination, as well as the registers as $$rr. + This is the default if _m_o_d_i_f_i_e_r is omitted. + rr Print the general registers and the instruction + addressed by ppcc. _D_o_t is set to ppcc. + bb Print all breakpoints and their associated counts + and commands. + cc C stack backtrace. If _a_d_d_r_e_s_s is given then it is + taken as the address of the current frame instead + of the contents of the frame-pointer register. If + CC is used then the names and (32 bit) values of + all automatic and static variables are printed for + each active function. (broken on the VAX). If + _c_o_u_n_t is given then only the first _c_o_u_n_t frames + are printed. + dd Set the default radix to _a_d_d_r_e_s_s and report the + new value. Note that _a_d_d_r_e_s_s is interpreted in + the (old) current radix. Thus "10$d" never + changes the default radix. To make decimal the + default radix, use "0t10$d". + ee The names and values of external variables are + printed. + ww Set the page width for output to _a_d_d_r_e_s_s (default + 80). + ss Set the limit for symbol matches to _a_d_d_r_e_s_s + (default 255). + oo All integers input are regarded as octal. + qq Exit from _a_d_b. + vv Print all non zero variables in octal. + mm Print the address map. + pp (_K_e_r_n_e_l _d_e_b_u_g_g_i_n_g) Change the current kernel + memory mapping to map the designated uusseerr ssttrruucc-- + ttuurree to the address given by the symbol __u. The + _a_d_d_r_e_s_s argument is the address of the user's user + page table entries (on the VAX). + + ::_m_o_d_i_f_i_e_r + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 6 + + + + + + +ADB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ADB(1) + + + + Manage a subprocess. Available modifiers are: + + bb_c Set breakpoint at _a_d_d_r_e_s_s. The breakpoint is exe- + cuted _c_o_u_n_t-1 times before causing a stop. Each + time the breakpoint is encountered the command _c + is executed. If this command is omitted or sets + _d_o_t to zero then the breakpoint causes a stop. + + dd Delete breakpoint at _a_d_d_r_e_s_s. + + rr Run _o_b_j_f_i_l as a subprocess. If _a_d_d_r_e_s_s is given + explicitly then the program is entered at this + point; otherwise the program is entered at its + standard entry point. _c_o_u_n_t specifies how many + breakpoints are to be ignored before stopping. + Arguments to the subprocess may be supplied on the + same line as the command. An argument starting + with < or > causes the standard input or output to + be established for the command. + + cc_s The subprocess is continued with signal _s, see + _s_i_g_v_e_c(2). If _a_d_d_r_e_s_s is given then the subpro- + cess is continued at this address. If no signal + is specified then the signal that caused the sub- + process to stop is sent. Breakpoint skipping is + the same as for rr. + + ss_s As for cc except that the subprocess is single + stepped _c_o_u_n_t times. If there is no current sub- + process then _o_b_j_f_i_l is run as a subprocess as for + rr. In this case no signal can be sent; the + remainder of the line is treated as arguments to + the subprocess. + + kk The current subprocess, if any, is terminated. + +VVAARRIIAABBLLEESS + _A_d_b provides a number of variables. Named variables are set + initially by _a_d_b but are not used subsequently. Numbered + variables are reserved for communication as follows. + + 0 The last value printed. + 1 The last offset part of an instruction source. + 2 The previous value of variable 1. + 9 The count on the last $< or $<< command. + + On entry the following are set from the system header in the + _c_o_r_f_i_l. If _c_o_r_f_i_l does not appear to be a ccoorree file then + these values are set from _o_b_j_f_i_l. + + b The base address of the data segment. + d The data segment size. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 7 + + + + + + +ADB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ADB(1) + + + + e The entry point. + m The `magic' number (0407, 0410 or 0413). + s The stack segment size. + t The text segment size. + +AADDDDRREESSSSEESS + The address in a file associated with a written address is + determined by a mapping associated with that file. Each + mapping is represented by two triples (_b_1, _e_1, _f_1) and (_b_2, + _e_2, _f_2) and the _f_i_l_e _a_d_d_r_e_s_s corresponding to a written + _a_d_d_r_e_s_s is calculated as follows. + + _b_1<__a_d_d_r_e_s_s<_e_1 => _f_i_l_e _a_d_d_r_e_s_s=_a_d_d_r_e_s_s+_f_1-_b_1, otherwise, + + _b_2<__a_d_d_r_e_s_s<_e_2 => _f_i_l_e _a_d_d_r_e_s_s=_a_d_d_r_e_s_s+_f_2-_b_2, + + otherwise, the requested _a_d_d_r_e_s_s is not legal. In some + cases (e.g. for programs with separated I and D space) the + two segments for a file may overlap. If a ?? or // is fol- + lowed by an ** then only the second triple is used. + + The initial setting of both mappings is suitable for normal + aa..oouutt and ccoorree files. If either file is not of the kind + expected then, for that file, _b_1 is set to 0, _e_1 is set to + the maximum file size and _f_1 is set to 0; in this way the + whole file can be examined with no address translation. + +FFIILLEESS + a.out + core + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + cc(1), dbx(1), ptrace(2), a.out(5), core(5) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + `Adb' when there is no current command or format. Comments + about inaccessible files, syntax errors, abnormal termina- + tion of commands, etc. Exit status is 0, unless last com- + mand failed or returned nonzero status. + +BBUUGGSS + Since no shell is invoked to interpret the arguments of the + ::rr command, the customary wild-card and variable expansions + cannot occur. + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 8 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/addbib.0 b/usr/man/cat1/addbib.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8d104fa800 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/addbib.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +ADDBIB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ADDBIB(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + addbib - create or extend bibliographic database + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + aaddddbbiibb [ --pp promptfile ] [ --aa ] database + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + When this program starts up, answering ``y'' to the initial + ``Instructions?'' prompt yields directions; typing ``n'' or + RETURN skips them. _A_d_d_b_i_b then prompts for various biblio- + graphic fields, reads responses from the terminal, and sends + output records to a _d_a_t_a_b_a_s_e. A null response (just RETURN) + means to leave out that field. A minus sign (-) means to go + back to the previous field. A trailing backslash allows a + field to be continued on the next line. The repeating + ``Continue?'' prompt allows the user either to resume by + typing ``y'' or RETURN, to quit the current session by typ- + ing ``n'' or ``q'', or to edit the _d_a_t_a_b_a_s_e with any system + editor (_v_i, _e_x, _e_d_i_t, _e_d). + + The --aa option suppresses prompting for an abstract; asking + for an abstract is the default. Abstracts are ended with a + CTRL-d. The --pp option causes _a_d_d_b_i_b to use a new prompting + skeleton, defined in _p_r_o_m_p_t_f_i_l_e. This file should contain + prompt strings, a tab, and the key-letters to be written to + the _d_a_t_a_b_a_s_e. + + The most common key-letters and their meanings are given + below. _A_d_d_b_i_b insulates you from these key-letters, since + it gives you prompts in English, but if you edit the + bibliography file later on, you will need to know this + information. + + %A Author's name + %B Book containing article referenced + %C City (place of publication) + %D Date of publication + %E Editor of book containing article referenced + %F Footnote number or label (supplied by _r_e_f_e_r) + %G Government order number + %H Header commentary, printed before reference + %I Issuer (publisher) + %J Journal containing article + %K Keywords to use in locating reference + %L Label field used by --kk option of _r_e_f_e_r + %M Bell Labs Memorandum (undefined) + %N Number within volume + %O Other commentary, printed at end of reference + %P Page number(s) + %Q Corporate or Foreign Author (unreversed) + %R Report, paper, or thesis (unpublished) + %S Series title + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +ADDBIB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ADDBIB(1) + + + + %T Title of article or book + %V Volume number + %X Abstract - used by _r_o_f_f_b_i_b, not by _r_e_f_e_r + %Y,Z ignored by _r_e_f_e_r + + Except for `A', each field should be given just once. Only + relevant fields should be supplied. An example is: + + %A Bill Tuthill + %T Refer - A Bibliography System + %I Computing Services + %C Berkeley + %D 1982 + %O UNX 4.3.5. + + +FFIILLEESS + promptfile optional file to define prompting + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + refer(1), sortbib(1), roffbib(1), indxbib(1), lookbib(1) + +AAUUTTHHOORRSS + Al Stangenberger, Bill Tuthill + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/apply.0 b/usr/man/cat1/apply.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7349682b96 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/apply.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +APPLY(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual APPLY(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + apply - apply a command to a set of arguments + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + aappppllyy [ --aa_c ] [ --_n ] command args ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _A_p_p_l_y runs the named _c_o_m_m_a_n_d on each argument _a_r_g in turn. + Normally arguments are chosen singly; the optional number _n + specifies the number of arguments to be passed to _c_o_m_m_a_n_d. + If _n is zero, _c_o_m_m_a_n_d is run without arguments once for each + _a_r_g. Character sequences of the form %_d in _c_o_m_m_a_n_d, where _d + is a digit from 1 to 9, are replaced by the _d'th following + unused _a_r_g. If any such sequences occur, _n is ignored, and + the number of arguments passed to _c_o_m_m_a_n_d is the maximum + value of _d in _c_o_m_m_a_n_d. The character `%' may be changed by + the --aa option. + + Examples: + apply echo * + is similar to ls(1); + apply -2 cmp a1 b1 a2 b2 ... + compares the `a' files to the `b' files; + apply -0 who 1 2 3 4 5 + runs who(1) 5 times; and + apply 'ln %1 /usr/joe' * + links all files in the current directory to the directory + /usr/joe. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + sh(1) + +AAUUTTHHOORR + Rob Pike + +BBUUGGSS + Shell metacharacters in _c_o_m_m_a_n_d may have bizarre effects; it + is best to enclose complicated commands in single quotes + ' '. + + There is no way to pass a literal `%2' if `%' is the argu- + ment expansion character. + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/apropos.0 b/usr/man/cat1/apropos.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4157c42a57 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/apropos.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +APROPOS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual APROPOS(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + apropos - locate commands by keyword lookup + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + aapprrooppooss [ --MM _p_a_t_h ] keyword ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _A_p_r_o_p_o_s shows which manual pages contain instances of any of + the given _k_e_y_w_o_r_d(s) in their title line. Each word is con- + sidered separately and case of letters is ignored. Words + which are part of other words are considered; when looking + for compile, _a_p_r_o_p_o_s will also find all instances of ``com- + piler''. + + If the line output by _a_p_r_o_p_o_s starts ``name(section) ...'' + you can enter ``man section name'' to get its documentation. + + Normally _a_p_r_o_p_o_s checks in a standard location (/usr/man) + for its database ``whatis''. This can be changed by supply- + ing a _p_a_t_h (a la the Bourne shell) with the --MM flag. This + search path must be a colon (``:'') separated list of direc- + tories which _a_p_r_o_p_o_s will search for files named ``whatis''. + The path can also be set with the environmental variable + _M_A_N_P_A_T_H. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/man/whatis data base + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + man(1), whatis(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 30, 1987 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/ar.0 b/usr/man/cat1/ar.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c3bec4f9f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/ar.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +AR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual AR(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + ar - archive and library maintainer + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + aarr key [ posname ] afile name ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _A_r maintains groups of files combined into a single archive + file. Its main use is to create and update library files as + used by the loader. It can be used, though, for any similar + purpose. NN..BB:: This version of _a_r uses a ASCII-format + archive which is portable among the various machines running + UNIX. Programs for dealing with older formats are avail- + able: see _a_r_c_v(8). + + _K_e_y is one character from the set ddrrqqttppmmxx,, optionally con- + catenated with one or more of vvuuaaiibbcclloo.. _A_f_i_l_e is the archive + file. The _n_a_m_e_s are constituent files in the archive file. + The meanings of the _k_e_y characters are: + + dd Delete the named files from the archive file. + + rr Replace the named files in the archive file. If the + optional character uu is used with rr,, then only those + files with `last-modified' dates later than the archive + files are replaced. If an optional positioning charac- + ter from the set aabbii is used, then the _p_o_s_n_a_m_e argument + must be present and specifies that new files are to be + placed after (aa) or before (bb or ii) _p_o_s_n_a_m_e. Otherwise + new files are placed at the end. + + qq Quickly append the named files to the end of the + archive file. Optional positioning characters are + invalid. The command does not check whether the added + members are already in the archive. Useful only to + avoid quadratic behavior when creating a large archive + piece-by-piece. + + tt Print a table of contents of the archive file. If no + names are given, all files in the archive are tabled. + If names are given, only those files are tabled. + + pp Print the named files in the archive. + + mm Move the named files to the end of the archive. If a + positioning character is present, then the _p_o_s_n_a_m_e + argument must be present and, as in rr,, specifies where + the files are to be moved. + + xx Extract the named files. If no names are given, all + files in the archive are extracted. In neither case + does xx alter the archive file. Normally the `last- + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +AR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual AR(1) + + + + modified' date of each extracted file is the date when + it is extracted. However, if oo is used, the `last- + modified' date is reset to the date recorded in the + archive. + + vv Verbose. Under the verbose option, _a_r gives a file- + by-file description of the making of a new archive file + from the old archive and the constituent files. When + used with tt,, it gives a long listing of all information + about the files. When used with pp, it precedes each + file with a name. + + cc Create. Normally _a_r will create _a_f_i_l_e when it needs + to. The create option suppresses the normal message + that is produced when _a_f_i_l_e is created. + + ll Local. Normally _a_r places its temporary files in the + directory /tmp. This option causes them to be placed + in the local directory. + +FFIILLEESS + /tmp/v* temporaries + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + lorder(1), ld(1), ranlib(1), ar(5), arcv(8) + +BBUUGGSS + If the same file is mentioned twice in an argument list, it + may be put in the archive twice. + + The `last-modified' date of a file will not be altered by + the oo option if the user is not the owner of the extracted + file, or the super-user. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/as.0 b/usr/man/cat1/as.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..09030350dd --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/as.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +AS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual AS(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + as - VAX-11 assembler + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + aass [ --aa11--1166 ] [ [ --dd112244 ] [ --LL ] [ --WW ] [ --VV ] [ --JJ ] [ --RR ] + [ --tt directory ] [ --oo objfile ] [ name ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _A_s assembles the named files, or the standard input if no + file name is specified. The available flags are: + + --aa Specifies the alignment of procedures and data blocks. + It is given as a power of two; thus an alignment of 3 + causes alignment on an eight byte boundary. The + default is --aa22.. + + --dd Specifies the number of bytes to be assembled for + offsets which involve forward or external references, + and which have sizes unspecified in the assembly + language. The default is --dd44.. + + --LL Save defined labels beginning with a `L', which are + normally discarded to save space in the resultant sym- + bol table. The compilers generate such temporary + labels. + + --VV Use virtual memory for some intermediate storage, + rather than a temporary file. + + --WW Do not complain about errors. + + --JJ Use long branches to resolve jumps when byte- + displacement branches are insufficient. This must be + used when a compiler-generated assembly contains + branches of more than 32k bytes. + + --RR Make initialized data segments read-only, by con- + catenating them to the text segments. This obviates + the need to run editor scripts on assembly code to make + initialized data read-only and shared. + + --tt Specifies a directory to receive the temporary file, + other than the default /tmp. + + All undefined symbols in the assembly are treated as global. + + The output of the assembly is left on the file _o_b_j_f_i_l_e; if + that is omitted, _a._o_u_t is used. + +FFIILLEESS + /tmp/as* default temporary files + a.out default resultant object file + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 8, 1986 1 + + + + + + +AS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual AS(1) + + + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + ld(1), nm(1), adb(1), dbx(1), a.out(5) + Auxiliary documentation _A_s_s_e_m_b_l_e_r _R_e_f_e_r_e_n_c_e _M_a_n_u_a_l. + +AAUUTTHHOORRSS + John F. Reiser + Robert R. Henry + +BBUUGGSS + --JJ should be eliminated; the assembler should automatically + choose among byte, word and long branches. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 8, 1986 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/at.0 b/usr/man/cat1/at.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c1a7376f67 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/at.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +AT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual AT(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + at - execute commands at a later time + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + aatt [[ --cc ]] [[ --ss ]] [[ --mm ]] time [ day ] [ file ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _A_t spools away a copy of the named _f_i_l_e to be used as input + to _s_h(1) or _c_s_h(1). If the --cc flag (for (_c_s_h(1))) or the --ss + flag (for (_s_h(1))) is specified, then that shell will be + used to execute the job; if no shell is specified, the + current environment shell is used. If no file name is + specified, _a_t prompts for commands from standard input until + a ^D is typed. + + If the --mm flag is specified, mail will be sent to the user + after the job has been run. If errors occur during execution + of the job, then a copy of the error diagnostics will be + sent to the user. If no errors occur, then a short message + is sent informing the user that no errors occurred. + + The format of the spool file is as follows: A four line + header that includes the owner of the job, the name of the + job, the shell used to run the job, and whether mail will be + set after the job is executed. The header is followed by a + _c_d command to the current directory and a _u_m_a_s_k command to + set the modes on any files created by the job. Then _a_t + copies all relevant environment variables to the spool file. + When the script is run, it uses the user and group ID of the + creator of the spool file. + + The _t_i_m_e is 1 to 4 digits, with an optional following `A', + `P', `N' or `M' for AM, PM, noon or midnight. One and two + digit numbers are taken to be hours, three and four digits + to be hours and minutes. If no letters follow the digits, a + 24 hour clock time is understood. + + The optional _d_a_y is either (1) a month name followed by a + day number, or (2) a day of the week; if the word `week' + follows, invocation is moved seven days further off. Names + of months and days may be recognizably truncated. Examples + of legitimate commands are + + at 8am jan 24 + at -c -m 1530 fr week + at -s -m 1200n week + + _A_t programs are executed by periodic execution of the com- + mand /usr/lib/atrun from _c_r_o_n(8). The granularity of _a_t + depends upon the how often atrun is executed. + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 March 20, 1986 1 + + + + + + +AT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual AT(1) + + + + Error output is lost unless redirected or the -_m flag is + requested, in which case a copy of the errors is sent to the + user via _m_a_i_l(1). + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/spool/at spooling area + /usr/spool/at/yy.ddd.hhhh.* job file + /usr/spool/at/past directory where jobs are executed from + /usr/spool/at/lasttimedone last time atrun was run + /usr/lib/atrun executor (run by cron(8)) + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + atq(1), atrm(1), calendar(1), sleep(1), cron(8) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Complains about various syntax errors and times out of + range. + +BBUUGGSS + Due to the granularity of the execution of /_u_s_r/_l_i_b/_a_t_r_u_n, + there may be bugs in scheduling things almost exactly 24 + hours into the future. + + If the system crashes, mail is not sent to the user inform- + ing them that the job was not completed. + + Sometimes old spool files are not removed from the directory + /usr/spool/at/past. This is usually due to a system crash, + and requires that they be removed by hand. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 March 20, 1986 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/atq.0 b/usr/man/cat1/atq.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..695bb46808 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/atq.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +ATQ(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ATQ(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + atq - print the queue of jobs waiting to be run + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + aattqq [ -c ] [ -n ] [ name ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _A_t_q prints the queue of jobs that are waiting to be run at a + later date. These jobs were created with the _a_t(1) command. + With no flags, the queue is sorted in the order that the + jobs will be executed. + + If the --cc flag is used, the queue is sorted by the time that + the _a_t command was given. + + The --nn flag prints only the total number of files that are + currently in the queue. + + If a name(s) is provided, only those files belonging to that + user(s) are displayed. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/spool/at spool area + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + at(1), atrm(1), cron(8) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/atrm.0 b/usr/man/cat1/atrm.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2fbbbd3ce9 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/atrm.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +ATRM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ATRM(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + atrm - remove jobs spooled by at + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + aattrrmm [ -f ] [ -i ] [-] [[ job #] [ name ]... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _A_t_r_m removes jobs that were created with the _a_t(1) command. + With the -- flag, all jobs belonging to the person invoking + _a_t_r_m are removed. If a job number(s) is specified, _a_t_r_m + attempts to remove only that job number(s). + + If the --ff flag is used, all information regarding the remo- + val of the specified jobs is suppressed. If the --ii flag is + used, _a_t_r_m asks if a job should be removed; a response of + 'y' causes the job to be removed. + + If a user(s) name is specified, all jobs belonging to that + user(s) are removed. This form of invoking _a_t_r_m is useful + only to the super-user. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/spool/at spool area + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + at(1), atq(1), cron(8) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/awk.0 b/usr/man/cat1/awk.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..02e163b046 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/awk.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +AWK(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual AWK(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + awk - pattern scanning and processing language + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + aawwkk [ --FF_c ] [ prog ] [ file ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _A_w_k scans each input _f_i_l_e for lines that match any of a set + of patterns specified in _p_r_o_g. With each pattern in _p_r_o_g + there can be an associated action that will be performed + when a line of a _f_i_l_e matches the pattern. The set of pat- + terns may appear literally as _p_r_o_g, or in a file specified + as --ff _f_i_l_e. + + Files are read in order; if there are no files, the standard + input is read. The file name `-' means the standard input. + Each line is matched against the pattern portion of every + pattern-action statement; the associated action is performed + for each matched pattern. + + An input line is made up of fields separated by white space. + (This default can be changed by using FS, _v_i_d_e _i_n_f_r_a.) The + fields are denoted $1, $2, ... ; $0 refers to the entire + line. + + A pattern-action statement has the form + + pattern { action } + + A missing { action } means print the line; a missing pattern + always matches. + + An action is a sequence of statements. A statement can be + one of the following: + + if ( conditional ) statement [ else statement ] + while ( conditional ) statement + for ( expression ; conditional ; expression ) statement + break + continue + { [ statement ] ... } + variable = expression + print [ expression-list ] [ >expression ] + printf format [ , expression-list ] [ >expression ] + next # skip remaining patterns on this input line + exit # skip the rest of the input + + Statements are terminated by semicolons, newlines or right + braces. An empty expression-list stands for the whole line. + Expressions take on string or numeric values as appropriate, + and are built using the operators +, -, *, /, %, and con- + catenation (indicated by a blank). The C operators ++, --, + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +AWK(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual AWK(1) + + + + +=, -=, *=, /=, and %= are also available in expressions. + Variables may be scalars, array elements (denoted x[i]) or + fields. Variables are initialized to the null string. + Array subscripts may be any string, not necessarily numeric; + this allows for a form of associative memory. String con- + stants are quoted "...". + + The _p_r_i_n_t statement prints its arguments on the standard + output (or on a file if >_f_i_l_e is present), separated by the + current output field separator, and terminated by the output + record separator. The _p_r_i_n_t_f statement formats its expres- + sion list according to the format (see _p_r_i_n_t_f(3S)). + + The built-in function _l_e_n_g_t_h returns the length of its argu- + ment taken as a string, or of the whole line if no argument. + There are also built-in functions _e_x_p, _l_o_g, _s_q_r_t, and _i_n_t. + The last truncates its argument to an integer. + _s_u_b_s_t_r(_s, _m, _n) returns the _n-character substring of _s that + begins at position _m. The function + _s_p_r_i_n_t_f(_f_m_t, _e_x_p_r, _e_x_p_r, ...) formats the expressions + according to the _p_r_i_n_t_f(3S) format given by _f_m_t and returns + the resulting string. + + Patterns are arbitrary Boolean combinations (!, ||, &&, and + parentheses) of regular expressions and relational expres- + sions. Regular expressions must be surrounded by slashes + and are as in _e_g_r_e_p. Isolated regular expressions in a pat- + tern apply to the entire line. Regular expressions may also + occur in relational expressions. + + A pattern may consist of two patterns separated by a comma; + in this case, the action is performed for all lines between + an occurrence of the first pattern and the next occurrence + of the second. + + A relational expression is one of the following: + + expression matchop regular-expression + expression relop expression + + where a relop is any of the six relational operators in C, + and a matchop is either ~ (for contains) or !~ (for does not + contain). A conditional is an arithmetic expression, a + relational expression, or a Boolean combination of these. + + The special patterns BEGIN and END may be used to capture + control before the first input line is read and after the + last. BEGIN must be the first pattern, END the last. + + A single character _c may be used to separate the fields by + starting the program with + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + + + + +AWK(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual AWK(1) + + + + BEGIN { FS = "c" } + + or by using the --FF_c option. + + Other variable names with special meanings include NF, the + number of fields in the current record; NR, the ordinal + number of the current record; FILENAME, the name of the + current input file; OFS, the output field separator (default + blank); ORS, the output record separator (default newline); + and OFMT, the output format for numbers (default "%.6g"). + +EEXXAAMMPPLLEESS + Print lines longer than 72 characters: + + length > 72 + + Print first two fields in opposite order: + + { print $2, $1 } + + Add up first column, print sum and average: + + { s += $1 } + END { print "sum is", s, " average is", s/NR } + + Print fields in reverse order: + + { for (i = NF; i > 0; --i) print $i } + + Print all lines between start/stop pairs: + + /start/, /stop/ + + Print all lines whose first field is different from previous + one: + + $1 != prev { print; prev = $1 } + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + lex(1), sed(1) + A. V. Aho, B. W. Kernighan, P. J. Weinberger, _A_w_k - _a _p_a_t_- + _t_e_r_n _s_c_a_n_n_i_n_g _a_n_d _p_r_o_c_e_s_s_i_n_g _l_a_n_g_u_a_g_e + +BBUUGGSS + There are no explicit conversions between numbers and + strings. To force an expression to be treated as a number + add 0 to it; to force it to be treated as a string concaten- + ate "" to it. + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/basename.0 b/usr/man/cat1/basename.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7297c45909 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/basename.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +BASENAME(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual BASENAME(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + basename - strip filename affixes + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + bbaasseennaammee string [ suffix ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _B_a_s_e_n_a_m_e deletes any prefix ending in `/' and the _s_u_f_f_i_x, if + present in _s_t_r_i_n_g, from _s_t_r_i_n_g, and prints the result on the + standard output. It is normally used inside substitution + marks ` ` in shell procedures. + + This shell procedure invoked with the argument + /_u_s_r/_s_r_c/_b_i_n/_c_a_t._c compiles the named file and moves the + output to _c_a_t in the current directory: + + cc $1 + mv a.out `basename $1 .c` + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + sh(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/bc.0 b/usr/man/cat1/bc.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..23bbc2e399 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/bc.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +BC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual BC(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + bc - arbitrary-precision arithmetic language and calculator + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + bbcc [ --cc ] [ --ll ] [ file ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _B_c is an interactive processor for a language which resem- + bles C but provides unlimited precision arithmetic. It + takes input from any files given, then reads the standard + input. The --ll argument stands for the name of an arbitrary + precision math library. The syntax for _b_c programs is as + follows; L means letter a-z, E means expression, S means + statement. + + Comments + are enclosed in /* and */. + + Names + simple variables: L + array elements: L [ E ] + The words `ibase', `obase', and `scale' + + Other operands + arbitrarily long numbers with optional sign and + decimal point. + ( E ) + sqrt ( E ) + length ( E ) number of significant decimal digits + scale ( E ) number of digits right of decimal point + L ( E , ... , E ) + + Operators + + - * / % ^ (% is remainder; ^ is power) + ++ -- (prefix and postfix; apply to names) + == <= >= != < > + = += -= *= /= %= ^= + + Statements + E + { S ; ... ; S } + if ( E ) S + while ( E ) S + for ( E ; E ; E ) S + null statement + break + quit + + Function definitions + define L ( L ,..., L ) { + auto L, ... , L + S; ... S + + + +Printed 7/9/88 July 28, 1987 1 + + + + + + +BC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual BC(1) + + + + return ( E ) + } + + Functions in --ll math library + s(x) sine + c(x) cosine + e(x) exponential + l(x) log + a(x) arctangent + j(n,x) Bessel function + + All function arguments are passed by value. + + The value of a statement that is an expression is printed + unless the main operator is an assignment. Either semi- + colons or newlines may separate statements. Assignment to + _s_c_a_l_e influences the number of digits to be retained on + arithmetic operations in the manner of _d_c(1). Assignments + to _i_b_a_s_e or _o_b_a_s_e set the input and output number radix + respectively. + + The same letter may be used as an array, a function, and a + simple variable simultaneously. All variables are global to + the program. `Auto' variables are pushed down during func- + tion calls. When using arrays as function arguments or + defining them as automatic variables empty square brackets + must follow the array name. + + For example + + scale = 20 + define e(x){ + auto a, b, c, i, s + a = 1 + b = 1 + s = 1 + for(i=1; 1==1; i++){ + a = a*x + b = b*i + c = a/b + if(c == 0) return(s) + s = s+c + } + } + + defines a function to compute an approximate value of the + exponential function and + + for(i=1; i<=10; i++) e(i) + + prints approximate values of the exponential function of the + first ten integers. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 July 28, 1987 2 + + + + + + +BC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual BC(1) + + + + _B_c is actually a preprocessor for _d_c(1), which it invokes + automatically, unless the --cc (compile only) option is + present. In this case the _d_c input is sent to the standard + output instead. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/lib/lib.b mathematical library + dc(1) desk calculator proper + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + dc(1) + L. L. Cherry and R. Morris, _B_C - _A_n _a_r_b_i_t_r_a_r_y _p_r_e_c_i_s_i_o_n + _d_e_s_k-_c_a_l_c_u_l_a_t_o_r _l_a_n_g_u_a_g_e + +BBUUGGSS + No &&, ||, or ! operators. + _F_o_r statement must have all three E's. + _Q_u_i_t is interpreted when read, not when executed. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 July 28, 1987 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/biff.0 b/usr/man/cat1/biff.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2569bf20ab --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/biff.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +BIFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual BIFF(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + biff - be notified if mail arrives and who it is from + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + bbiiffff [ yynn ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _B_i_f_f informs the system whether you want to be notified when + mail arrives during the current terminal session. The com- + mand + + bbiiffff yy + + enables notification; the command + + bbiiffff nn + + disables it. When mail notification is enabled, the header + and first few lines of the message will be printed on your + screen whenever mail arrives. A ``biff y'' command is often + included in the file ._l_o_g_i_n or ._p_r_o_f_i_l_e to be executed at + each login. + + _B_i_f_f operates asynchronously. For synchronous notification + use the MAIL variable of _s_h(1) or the _m_a_i_l variable of + _c_s_h(1). + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + csh(1), sh(1), mail(1), comsat(8C) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/binmail.0 b/usr/man/cat1/binmail.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2297819ae4 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/binmail.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +BINMAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual BINMAIL(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + binmail - send or receive mail among users + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + //bbiinn//mmaaiill [ ++ ] [ --ii ] [ person ] ... + //bbiinn//mmaaiill [[ ++ ]] [ --ii ] --ff file + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + Note: This is the old version 7 UNIX system mail program. + The default _m_a_i_l command is described in _M_a_i_l(1), and its + binary is in the directory /_u_s_r/_u_c_b. + + _m_a_i_l with no argument prints a user's mail, message-by- + message, in last-in, first-out order; the optional argument + ++ displays the mail messages in first-in, first-out order. + For each message, it reads a line from the standard input to + direct disposition of the message. + + newline + Go on to next message. + + d Delete message and go on to the next. + + p Print message again. + + - Go back to previous message. + + s [ _f_i_l_e ] ... + Save the message in the named _f_i_l_e_s (`mbox' default). + + w [ _f_i_l_e ] ... + Save the message, without a header, in the named _f_i_l_e_s + (`mbox' default). + + m [ _p_e_r_s_o_n ] ... + Mail the message to the named _p_e_r_s_o_n_s (yourself is + default). + + EOT (control-D) + Put unexamined mail back in the mailbox and stop. + + q Same as EOT. + + !_c_o_m_m_a_n_d + Escape to the Shell to do _c_o_m_m_a_n_d. + + * Print a command summary. + + An interrupt normally terminates the _m_a_i_l command; the mail + file is unchanged. The optional argument --ii tells _m_a_i_l to + continue after interrupts. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +BINMAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual BINMAIL(1) + + + + When _p_e_r_s_o_n_s are named, _m_a_i_l takes the standard input up to + an end-of-file (or a line with just `.') and adds it to each + _p_e_r_s_o_n'_s `mail' file. The message is preceded by the + sender's name and a postmark. Lines that look like post- + marks are prepended with `>'. A _p_e_r_s_o_n is usually a user + name recognized by _l_o_g_i_n(1). To denote a recipient on a + remote system, prefix _p_e_r_s_o_n by the system name and exclama- + tion mark (see _u_u_c_p(1C)). + + The --ff option causes the named file, for example, `mbox', to + be printed as if it were the mail file. + + When a user logs in he is informed of the presence of mail. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/passwd to identify sender and locate persons + /usr/spool/mail/* incoming mail for user * + mbox saved mail + /tmp/ma* temp file + /usr/spool/mail/*.lock lock for mail directory + dead.letter unmailable text + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + Mail(1), write(1), uucp(1C), uux(1C), xsend(1), sendmail(8) + +BBUUGGSS + Race conditions sometimes result in a failure to remove a + lock file. + + Normally anybody can read your mail, unless it is sent by + _x_s_e_n_d(1). An installation can overcome this by making _m_a_i_l + a set-user-id command that owns the mail directory. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/cal.0 b/usr/man/cat1/cal.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..75862e49be --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/cal.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +CAL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CAL(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + cal - print calendar + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ccaall [ month ] [ year ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _C_a_l prints a calendar for the specified year. If a month is + also specified, a calendar just for that month is printed. + If no arguments are given, a calendar for the current month + is printed. _Y_e_a_r can be between 1 and 9999. The _m_o_n_t_h is a + number between 1 and 12. The calendar produced is that for + England and her colonies. + + Try September 1752. + +BBUUGGSS + The year is always considered to start in January even + though this is historically naive. + Beware that `cal 78' refers to the early Christian era, not + the 20th century. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 28, 1987 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/calendar.0 b/usr/man/cat1/calendar.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..093b4a02ba --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/calendar.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +CALENDAR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CALENDAR(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + calendar - reminder service + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ccaalleennddaarr [ - ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _C_a_l_e_n_d_a_r consults the file `calendar' in the current direc- + tory and prints out lines that contain today's or tomorrow's + date anywhere in the line. Most reasonable month-day dates + such as `Dec. 7,' `december 7,' `12/7,' etc., are recog- + nized, but not `7 December' or `7/12'. If you give the + month as ``*'' with a date, i.e. ``* 1'', that day in any + month will do. On weekends `tomorrow' extends through Mon- + day. + + When an argument is present, _c_a_l_e_n_d_a_r does its job for every + user who has a file `calendar' in his login directory and + sends him any positive results by _m_a_i_l(1). Normally this is + done daily in the wee hours under control of _c_r_o_n(8). + + The file `calendar' is first run through the ``C'' prepro- + cessor, /_l_i_b/_c_p_p, to include any other calendar files speci- + fied with the usual ``#include'' syntax. Included calendars + will usually be shared by all users, maintained and docu- + mented by the local administration. + +FFIILLEESS + calendar + /usr/lib/calendar to figure out today's and tomorrow's dates + /etc/passwd + /tmp/cal* + /lib/cpp, egrep, sed, mail as subprocesses + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + at(1), cron(8), mail(1) + +BBUUGGSS + _C_a_l_e_n_d_a_r'_s extended idea of `tomorrow' doesn't account for + holidays. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/case.0 b/usr/man/cat1/case.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..faac4cd331 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/case.0 @@ -0,0 +1,594 @@ + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + sh, for, case, if, while, ::, .., break, continue, cd, eval, + exec, exit, export, login, read, readonly, set, shift, + times, trap, umask, wait - command language + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + sshh [ --cceeiikknnrrssttuuvvxx ] [ arg ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_h is a command programming language that executes commands + read from a terminal or a file. See iinnvvooccaattiioonn for the + meaning of arguments to the shell. + + CCoommmmaannddss.. + A _s_i_m_p_l_e-_c_o_m_m_a_n_d is a sequence of non blank _w_o_r_d_s separated + by blanks (a blank is a ttaabb or a ssppaaccee). The first word + specifies the name of the command to be executed. Except as + specified below the remaining words are passed as arguments + to the invoked command. The command name is passed as argu- + ment 0 (see _e_x_e_c_v_e(2)). The _v_a_l_u_e of a simple-command is + its exit status if it terminates normally or 200+_s_t_a_t_u_s if + it terminates abnormally (see _s_i_g_v_e_c(2) for a list of status + values). + + A _p_i_p_e_l_i_n_e is a sequence of one or more _c_o_m_m_a_n_d_s separated + by ||.. The standard output of each command but the last is + connected by a _p_i_p_e(2) to the standard input of the next + command. Each command is run as a separate process; the + shell waits for the last command to terminate. + + A _l_i_s_t is a sequence of one or more _p_i_p_e_l_i_n_e_s separated by + ;;, &&, &&&& or |||| and optionally terminated by ;; or &&. ;; and && + have equal precedence which is lower than that of &&&& and ||||, + &&&& and |||| also have equal precedence. A semicolon causes + sequential execution; an ampersand causes the preceding + _p_i_p_e_l_i_n_e to be executed without waiting for it to finish. + The symbol &&&& (||||) causes the _l_i_s_t following to be executed + only if the preceding _p_i_p_e_l_i_n_e returns a zero (non zero) + value. Newlines may appear in a _l_i_s_t, instead of semi- + colons, to delimit commands. + + A _c_o_m_m_a_n_d is either a simple-command or one of the follow- + ing. The value returned by a command is that of the last + simple-command executed in the command. + + ffoorr _n_a_m_e [iinn _w_o_r_d ...] ddoo _l_i_s_t ddoonnee + Each time a ffoorr command is executed _n_a_m_e is set to the + next word in the ffoorr word list. If iinn _w_o_r_d ... is + omitted, iinn ""$$@@"" is assumed. Execution ends when there + are no more words in the list. + + ccaassee _w_o_r_d iinn [_p_a_t_t_e_r_n [ || _p_a_t_t_e_r_n ] ... )) _l_i_s_t ;;;;] ... eessaacc + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + A ccaassee command executes the _l_i_s_t associated with the + first pattern that matches _w_o_r_d. The form of the pat- + terns is the same as that used for file name genera- + tion. + + iiff _l_i_s_t tthheenn _l_i_s_t [eelliiff _l_i_s_t tthheenn _l_i_s_t] ... [eellssee _l_i_s_t] ffii + The _l_i_s_t following iiff is executed and if it returns + zero the _l_i_s_t following tthheenn is executed. Otherwise, + the _l_i_s_t following eelliiff is executed and if its value is + zero the _l_i_s_t following tthheenn is executed. Failing that + the eellssee _l_i_s_t is executed. + + wwhhiillee _l_i_s_t [ddoo _l_i_s_t] ddoonnee + A wwhhiillee command repeatedly executes the wwhhiillee _l_i_s_t and + if its value is zero executes the ddoo _l_i_s_t; otherwise + the loop terminates. The value returned by a wwhhiillee + command is that of the last executed command in the ddoo + _l_i_s_t. uunnttiill may be used in place of wwhhiillee to negate the + loop termination test. + + (( _l_i_s_t )) + Execute _l_i_s_t in a subshell. + + {{ _l_i_s_t }} + _l_i_s_t is simply executed. + + The following words are only recognized as the first word of + a command and when not quoted. + + iiff tthheenn eellssee eelliiff ffii ccaassee iinn eessaacc ffoorr wwhhiillee uunnttiill ddoo + ddoonnee {{ }} + + CCoommmmaanndd ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonn.. + The standard output from a command enclosed in a pair of + back quotes (````) may be used as part or all of a word; + trailing newlines are removed. + + PPaarraammeetteerr ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonn.. + The character $$ is used to introduce substitutable parame- + ters. Positional parameters may be assigned values by sseett. + Variables may be set by writing + + _n_a_m_e==_v_a_l_u_e [ _n_a_m_e==_v_a_l_u_e ] ... + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r}} + A _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is a sequence of letters, digits or under- + scores (a _n_a_m_e), a digit, or any of the characters ** @@ + ## ?? -- $$ !!.. The value, if any, of the parameter is sub- + stituted. The braces are required only when _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r + is followed by a letter, digit, or underscore that is + not to be interpreted as part of its name. If _p_a_r_a_m_e_- + _t_e_r is a digit, it is a positional parameter. If + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is ** or @@ then all the positional parameters, + starting with $$11, are substituted separated by spaces. + $$00 is set from argument zero when the shell is invoked. + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r-_w_o_r_d}} + If _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is set, substitute its value; otherwise + substitute _w_o_r_d. + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r=_w_o_r_d}} + If _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is not set, set it to _w_o_r_d; the value of + the parameter is then substituted. Positional parame- + ters may not be assigned to in this way. + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r?_w_o_r_d}} + If _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is set, substitute its value; otherwise, + print _w_o_r_d and exit from the shell. If _w_o_r_d is omit- + ted, a standard message is printed. + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r+_w_o_r_d}} + If _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is set, substitute _w_o_r_d; otherwise substi- + tute nothing. + + In the above _w_o_r_d is not evaluated unless it is to be used + as the substituted string. (So that, for example, echo + ${d-'pwd'} will only execute _p_w_d if _d is unset.) + + The following _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s are automatically set by the shell. + + ## The number of positional parameters in decimal. + -- Options supplied to the shell on invocation or by + sseett. + ?? The value returned by the last executed command in + decimal. + $$ The process number of this shell. + !! The process number of the last background command + invoked. + + The following _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s are used but not set by the shell. + + HHOOMMEE The default argument (home directory) for the ccdd + command. + PPAATTHH The search path for commands (see eexxeeccuuttiioonn). + MMAAIILL If this variable is set to the name of a mail + file, the shell informs the user of the arrival of + mail in the specified file. + PPSS11 Primary prompt string, by default '$ '. + PPSS22 Secondary prompt string, by default '> '. + IIFFSS Internal field separators, normally ssppaaccee, ttaabb, + and nneewwlliinnee. IIFFSS is ignored if _s_h is running as + root or if the effective user id differs from the + real user id. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + BBllaannkk iinntteerrpprreettaattiioonn.. + After parameter and command substitution, any results of + substitution are scanned for internal field separator char- + acters (those found in $$IIFFSS) and split into distinct argu- + ments where such characters are found. Explicit null argu- + ments ("" or '') are retained. Implicit null arguments + (those resulting from _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s that have no values) are + removed. + + FFiillee nnaammee ggeenneerraattiioonn.. + Following substitution, each command word is scanned for the + characters **, ?? and [[.. If one of these characters appears, + the word is regarded as a pattern. The word is replaced + with alphabetically sorted file names that match the pat- + tern. If no file name is found that matches the pattern, + the word is left unchanged. The character .. at the start of + a file name or immediately following a //, and the character + //, must be matched explicitly. + + ** Matches any string, including the null string. + ?? Matches any single character. + [[......]] + Matches any one of the characters enclosed. A pair of + characters separated by -- matches any character lexi- + cally between the pair. + + QQuuoottiinngg.. + The following characters have a special meaning to the shell + and cause termination of a word unless quoted. + + ;; && (( )) || << >> nneewwlliinnee ssppaaccee ttaabb + + A character may be _q_u_o_t_e_d by preceding it with a \\.. \\nneeww-- + lliinnee is ignored. All characters enclosed between a pair of + quote marks (''''), except a single quote, are quoted. Inside + double quotes ("""") parameter and command substitution occurs + and \\ quotes the characters \\ '' "" and $$. + + ""$$**"" is equivalent to ""$$11 $$22 ......"" whereas + ""$$@@"" is equivalent to ""$$11"" ""$$22"" ...... .. + + PPrroommppttiinngg.. + When used interactively, the shell prompts with the value of + PS1 before reading a command. If at any time a newline is + typed and further input is needed to complete a command, the + secondary prompt ($$PPSS22) is issued. + + IInnppuutt oouuttppuutt.. + Before a command is executed its input and output may be + redirected using a special notation interpreted by the + shell. The following may appear anywhere in a simple- + command or may precede or follow a _c_o_m_m_a_n_d and are not + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + passed on to the invoked command. Substitution occurs + before _w_o_r_d or _d_i_g_i_t is used. + + <_w_o_r_d + Use file _w_o_r_d as standard input (file descriptor 0). + + >_w_o_r_d + Use file _w_o_r_d as standard output (file descriptor 1). + If the file does not exist, it is created; otherwise it + is truncated to zero length. + + >>_w_o_r_d + Use file _w_o_r_d as standard output. If the file exists, + output is appended (by seeking to the end); otherwise + the file is created. + + <<_w_o_r_d + The shell input is read up to a line the same as _w_o_r_d, + or end of file. The resulting document becomes the + standard input. If any character of _w_o_r_d is quoted, no + interpretation is placed upon the characters of the + document; otherwise, parameter and command substitution + occurs, \\nneewwlliinnee is ignored, and \\ is used to quote the + characters \\ $$ '' and the first character of _w_o_r_d. + + <&_d_i_g_i_t + The standard input is duplicated from file descriptor + _d_i_g_i_t; see _d_u_p(2). Similarly for the standard output + using >. + + <&- The standard input is closed. Similarly for the stan- + dard output using >. + + If one of the above is preceded by a digit, the file + descriptor created is that specified by the digit (instead + of the default 0 or 1). For example, + + ... 2>&1 + + creates file descriptor 2 to be a duplicate of file descrip- + tor 1. + + If a command is followed by && then the default standard + input for the command is the empty file (/dev/null). Other- + wise, the environment for the execution of a command con- + tains the file descriptors of the invoking shell as modified + by input output specifications. + + EEnnvviirroonnmmeenntt.. + The environment is a list of name-value pairs that is passed + to an executed program in the same way as a normal argument + list; see _e_x_e_c_v_e(2) and _e_n_v_i_r_o_n(7). The shell interacts + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 5 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + with the environment in several ways. On invocation, the + shell scans the environment and creates a _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r for each + name found, giving it the corresponding value. Executed + commands inherit the same environment. If the user modifies + the values of these _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s or creates new ones, none of + these affects the environment unless the eexxppoorrtt command is + used to bind the shell's _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r to the environment. The + environment seen by any executed command is thus composed of + any unmodified name-value pairs originally inherited by the + shell, plus any modifications or additions, all of which + must be noted in eexxppoorrtt commands. + + The environment for any _s_i_m_p_l_e-_c_o_m_m_a_n_d may be augmented by + prefixing it with one or more assignments to _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s. + Thus these two lines are equivalent + + TERM=450 cmd args + (export TERM; TERM=450; cmd args) + + If the --kk flag is set, _a_l_l keyword arguments are placed in + the environment, even if the occur after the command name. + The following prints 'a=b c' and 'c': + echo a=b c + set -k + echo a=b c + + SSiiggnnaallss.. + The INTERRUPT and QUIT signals for an invoked command are + ignored if the command is followed by &&; otherwise signals + have the values inherited by the shell from its parent. + (But see also ttrraapp..) + + EExxeeccuuttiioonn.. + Each time a command is executed the above substitutions are + carried out. Except for the 'special commands' listed below + a new process is created and an attempt is made to execute + the command via an _e_x_e_c_v_e(2). + + The shell parameter $$PPAATTHH defines the search path for the + directory containing the command. Each alternative direc- + tory name is separated by a colon (::). The default path is + :://bbiinn:://uussrr//bbiinn. If the command name contains a /, the + search path is not used. Otherwise, each directory in the + path is searched for an executable file. If the file has + execute permission but is not an _a._o_u_t file, it is assumed + to be a file containing shell commands. A subshell (i.e., a + separate process) is spawned to read it. A parenthesized + command is also executed in a subshell. + + SSppeecciiaall ccoommmmaannddss.. + The following commands are executed in the shell process and + except where specified no input output redirection is + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 6 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + permitted for such commands. + + ## For non-interactive shells, everything following the ## + is treated as a comment, i.e. the rest of the line is + ignored. For interactive shells, the ## has no special + effect. + + :: No effect; the command does nothing. + .. _f_i_l_e + Read and execute commands from _f_i_l_e and return. The + search path $$PPAATTHH is used to find the directory con- + taining _f_i_l_e. + bbrreeaakk [_n] + Exit from the enclosing ffoorr or wwhhiillee loop, if any. If + _n is specified, break _n levels. + ccoonnttiinnuuee [_n] + Resume the next iteration of the enclosing ffoorr or wwhhiillee + loop. If _n is specified, resume at the _n-th enclosing + loop. + ccdd [_a_r_g] + Change the current directory to _a_r_g. The shell parame- + ter $$HHOOMMEE is the default _a_r_g. + eevvaall [_a_r_g ...] + The arguments are read as input to the shell and the + resulting command(s) executed. + eexxeecc [_a_r_g ...] + The command specified by the arguments is executed in + place of this shell without creating a new process. + Input output arguments may appear and if no other argu- + ments are given cause the shell input output to be + modified. + eexxiitt [_n] + Causes a non interactive shell to exit with the exit + status specified by _n. If _n is omitted, the exit status + is that of the last command executed. (An end of file + will also exit from the shell.) + eexxppoorrtt [_n_a_m_e ...] + The given names are marked for automatic export to the + _e_n_v_i_r_o_n_m_e_n_t of subsequently-executed commands. If no + arguments are given, a list of exportable names is + printed. + llooggiinn [_a_r_g ...] + Equivalent to 'exec login arg ...'. + rreeaadd _n_a_m_e ... + One line is read from the standard input; successive + words of the input are assigned to the variables _n_a_m_e + in order, with leftover words to the last variable. + The return code is 0 unless the end-of-file is encoun- + tered. + rreeaaddoonnllyy [_n_a_m_e ...] + The given names are marked readonly and the values of + the these names may not be changed by subsequent + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 7 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + assignment. If no arguments are given, a list of all + readonly names is printed. + sseett [--eekknnppttuuvvxx [_a_r_g ...]] + --ee If non interactive, exit immediately if a command + fails. + --kk All keyword arguments are placed in the environment + for a command, not just those that precede the com- + mand name. + --nn Read commands but do not execute them. + --tt Exit after reading and executing one command. + --uu Treat unset variables as an error when substituting. + --vv Print shell input lines as they are read. + --xx Print commands and their arguments as they are exe- + cuted. + -- Turn off the --xx and --vv options. + + These flags can also be used upon invocation of the + shell. The current set of flags may be found in $$--. + + Remaining arguments are positional parameters and are + assigned, in order, to $$11, $$22, etc. If no arguments + are given, the values of all names are printed. + + sshhiifftt + The positional parameters from $$22... are renamed $$11... + + ttiimmeess + Print the accumulated user and system times for + processes run from the shell. + + ttrraapp [_a_r_g] [_n] ... + _A_r_g is a command to be read and executed when the shell + receives signal(s) _n. (Note that _a_r_g is scanned once + when the trap is set and once when the trap is taken.) + Trap commands are executed in order of signal number. + If _a_r_g is absent, all trap(s) _n are reset to their ori- + ginal values. If _a_r_g is the null string, this signal + is ignored by the shell and by invoked commands. If _n + is 0, the command _a_r_g is executed on exit from the + shell, otherwise upon receipt of signal _n as numbered + in _s_i_g_v_e_c(2). _T_r_a_p with no arguments prints a list of + commands associated with each signal number. + + uummaasskk [ _n_n_n ] + The user file creation mask is set to the octal value + _n_n_n (see _u_m_a_s_k(2)). If _n_n_n is omitted, the current + value of the mask is printed. + + wwaaiitt [_n] + Wait for the specified process and report its termina- + tion status. If _n is not given, all currently active + child processes are waited for. The return code from + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 8 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + this command is that of the process waited for. + + IInnvvooccaattiioonn.. + If the first character of argument zero is --, commands are + read from $$HHOOMMEE//..pprrooffiillee, if such a file exists. Commands + are then read as described below. The following flags are + interpreted by the shell when it is invoked. + --cc _s_t_r_i_n_g If the --cc flag is present, commands are read from + _s_t_r_i_n_g. + --ss If the --ss flag is present or if no arguments + remain then commands are read from the standard + input. Shell output is written to file descrip- + tor 2. + --ii If the --ii flag is present or if the shell input + and output are attached to a terminal (as told by + _g_t_t_y) then this shell is _i_n_t_e_r_a_c_t_i_v_e. In this + case the terminate signal SIGTERM (see _s_i_g_v_e_c(2)) + is ignored (so that 'kill 0' does not kill an + interactive shell) and the interrupt signal SIG- + INT is caught and ignored (so that wwaaiitt is inter- + ruptible). In all cases SIGQUIT is ignored by + the shell. + + The remaining flags and arguments are described under the + sseett command. + +FFIILLEESS + $HOME/..profile + /tmp/sh* + /dev/null + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + csh(1), test(1), execve(2), environ(7) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Errors detected by the shell, such as syntax errors cause + the shell to return a non zero exit status. If the shell is + being used non interactively then execution of the shell + file is abandoned. Otherwise, the shell returns the exit + status of the last command executed (see also eexxiitt). + +BBUUGGSS + If << is used to provide standard input to an asynchronous + process invoked by &, the shell gets mixed up about naming + the input document. A garbage file /tmp/sh* is created, and + the shell complains about not being able to find the file by + another name. + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 9 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/cat.0 b/usr/man/cat1/cat.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..135f3fc781 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/cat.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +CAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CAT(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + cat - catenate and print + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ccaatt [ --bbeennssttuuvv ] file ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _C_a_t reads each _f_i_l_e in sequence and displays it on the stan- + dard output. Thus + + cat file + + displays the file on the standard output, and + + cat file1 file2 >file3 + + concatenates the first two files and places the result on + the third. + + If no input file is given, or if the argument `-' is encoun- + tered, _c_a_t reads from the standard input file. Output is + buffered in the block size recommended by _s_t_a_t(2) unless the + standard output is a terminal, when it is line buffered. + The --uu option makes the output completely unbuffered. + + The --nn option displays the output lines preceded by lines + numbers, numbered sequentially from 1. Specifying the --bb + option with the --nn option omits the line numbers from blank + lines. + + The --ss option crushes out multiple adjacent empty lines so + that the output is displayed single spaced. + + The --vv option displays non-printing characters so that they + are visible. Control characters print like ^X for control- + x; the delete character (octal 0177) prints as ^?. Non- + ascii characters (with the high bit set) are printed as M- + (for meta) followed by the character of the low 7 bits. A + --ee option may be given with the --vv option, which displays a + `$' character at the end of each line. Specifying the --tt + option with the --vv option displays tab characters as ^I. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + cp(1), ex(1), more(1), pr(1), tail(1) + +BBUUGGSS + Beware of `cat a b >a' and `cat a b >b', which destroy the + input files before reading them. + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 29, 1987 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/cb.0 b/usr/man/cat1/cb.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1552c63b61 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/cb.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +CB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CB(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + cb - C program beautifier + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ccbb + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _C_b places a copy of the C program from the standard input on + the standard output with spacing and indentation that + displays the structure of the program. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/cc.0 b/usr/man/cat1/cc.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6f9022f7dd --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/cc.0 @@ -0,0 +1,264 @@ + + + +CC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CC(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + cc - C compiler + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + cccc [ option ] ... file ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _C_c is the UNIX C compiler. _C_c accepts several types of + arguments: + + Arguments whose names end with `.c' are taken to be C source + programs; they are compiled, and each object program is left + on the file whose name is that of the source with `.o' sub- + stituted for `.c'. The `.o' file is normally deleted, how- + ever, if a single C program is compiled and loaded all at + one go. + + In the same way, arguments whose names end with `.s' are + taken to be assembly source programs and are assembled, pro- + ducing a `.o' file. + + The following options are interpreted by _c_c. See _l_d(1) for + load-time options. + + --cc Suppress the loading phase of the compilation, and + force an object file to be produced even if only one + program is compiled. + + --gg Have the compiler produce additional symbol table + information for _d_b_x(1). Also pass the --llgg flag to + _l_d(1). + + --ggoo Have the compiler produce additional symbol table + information for the obsolete debugger _s_d_b(1). Also + pass the --llgg flag to _l_d(1). + + --ww Suppress warning diagnostics. + + --pp Arrange for the compiler to produce code which + counts the number of times each routine is called. + If loading takes place, replace the standard startup + routine by one which automatically calls _m_o_n_i_t_o_r(3) + at the start and arranges to write out a _m_o_n._o_u_t + file at normal termination of execution of the + object program. An execution profile can then be + generated by use of _p_r_o_f(1). + + --ppgg Causes the compiler to produce counting code in the + manner of --pp,, but invokes a run-time recording + mechanism that keeps more extensive statistics and + produces a _g_m_o_n._o_u_t file at normal termination. + Also, a profiling library is searched, in lieu of + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 7, 1985 1 + + + + + + +CC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CC(1) + + + + the standard C library. An execution profile can + then be generated by use of _g_p_r_o_f(1). + + --OO Invoke an object-code improver. + + --RR Passed on to _a_s, making initialized variables shared + and read-only. + + --SS Compile the named C programs, and leave the + assembler-language output on corresponding files + suffixed `.s'. + + --MM Run only the macro preprocessor on the named C pro- + grams, requesting it to generate Makefile dependen- + cies and send the result to the standard output. + + --EE Run only the macro preprocessor on the named C pro- + grams, and send the result to the standard output. + + --CC prevent the macro preprocessor from eliding com- + ments. + + --oo _o_u_t_p_u_t + Name the final output file _o_u_t_p_u_t. If this option + is used the file `a.out' will be left undisturbed. + + --DD_n_a_m_e=_d_e_f + --DD_n_a_m_e Define the _n_a_m_e to the preprocessor, as if by + `#define'. If no definition is given, the name is + defined as "1". + + --UU_n_a_m_e Remove any initial definition of _n_a_m_e. + + --II_d_i_r `#include' files whose names do not begin with `/' + are always sought first in the directory of the _f_i_l_e + argument, then in directories named in --II options, + then in directories on a standard list. + + --LL_d_i_r Library archives are sought first in directories + named in --LL options, then in directories on a stan- + dard list. + + --ff Use an alternate compiler which does not convert + expressions involving only floats to double. This + does not conform to the standard which states that + all intermediate results should be converted to dou- + ble but does provide a speed improvement for pro- + grams which don't require full double precision. + This option also makes rreeggiisstteerr ffllooaatt variables work + appropriately. + + --BB_s_t_r_i_n_g + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 7, 1985 2 + + + + + + +CC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CC(1) + + + + Find substitute compiler passes in the files named + _s_t_r_i_n_g with the suffixes cpp, ccom and c2. If + _s_t_r_i_n_g is empty, use a standard backup version. + + --tt[pp001122] + Find only the designated compiler passes in the + files whose names are constructed by a --BB option. + In the absence of a --BB option, the _s_t_r_i_n_g is taken + to be `/usr/c/'. + + Other arguments are taken to be either loader option argu- + ments, or C-compatible object programs, typically produced + by an earlier _c_c run, or perhaps libraries of C-compatible + routines. These programs, together with the results of any + compilations specified, are loaded (in the order given) to + produce an executable program with name aa..oouutt.. + +FFIILLEESS + file.c input file + file.o object file + a.out loaded output + /tmp/ctm? temporary + /lib/cpp preprocessor + /lib/ccom compiler + /lib/sccom compiler for single precision floats + /usr/c/occom backup compiler + /usr/c/ocpp backup preprocessor + /lib/c2 optional optimizer + /lib/crt0.o runtime startoff + /lib/mcrt0.o startoff for profiling + /usr/lib/gcrt0.ostartoff for gprof-profiling + /lib/libc.a standard library, see _i_n_t_r_o(3) + /usr/lib/libc_p.aprofiling library, see _i_n_t_r_o(3) + /usr/include standard directory for `#include' files + mon.out file produced for analysis by _p_r_o_f(1) + gmon.out file produced for analysis by _g_p_r_o_f(1) + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + B. W. Kernighan and D. M. Ritchie, _T_h_e _C _P_r_o_g_r_a_m_m_i_n_g + _L_a_n_g_u_a_g_e, Prentice-Hall, 1978 + B. W. Kernighan, _P_r_o_g_r_a_m_m_i_n_g _i_n _C-_a _t_u_t_o_r_i_a_l + D. M. Ritchie, _C _R_e_f_e_r_e_n_c_e _M_a_n_u_a_l + monitor(3), prof(1), gprof(1), adb(1), ld(1), dbx(1), as(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + The diagnostics produced by C itself are intended to be + self-explanatory. Occasional messages may be produced by + the assembler or loader. + +BBUUGGSS + The compiler currently ignores advice to put cchhaarr, uunnssiiggnneedd + cchhaarr, sshhoorrtt, uunnssiiggnneedd sshhoorrtt, ffllooaatt, or ddoouubbllee variables in + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 7, 1985 3 + + + + + + +CC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CC(1) + + + + registers, except as noted above. It previously produced + poor, and in some cases incorrect, code for such declara- + tions. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 7, 1985 4 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/cd.0 b/usr/man/cat1/cd.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fef3218a2e --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/cd.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +CD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CD(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + cd - change working directory + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ccdd directory + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _D_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y becomes the new working directory. The process + must have execute (search) permission in _d_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y. + + Because a new process is created to execute each command, _c_d + would be ineffective if it were written as a normal command. + It is therefore recognized and executed by the shells. In + _c_s_h(1) you may specify a list of directories in which _d_i_r_e_c_- + _t_o_r_y is to be sought as a subdirectory if it is not a sub- + directory of the current directory; see the description of + the _c_d_p_a_t_h variable in _c_s_h(1). + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + csh(1), sh(1), pwd(1), chdir(2) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/checkeq.0 b/usr/man/cat1/checkeq.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ee497f20d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/checkeq.0 @@ -0,0 +1,246 @@ + + + +EQN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EQN(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + eqn, neqn, checkeq - typeset mathematics + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + eeqqnn [ --ddxy ] [ --ppn ] [ --ssn ] [ --ffn ] [ file ] ... + cchheecckkeeqq [ file ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _E_q_n is a troff(1) preprocessor for typesetting mathematics + on a Graphic Systems phototypesetter, _n_e_q_n on terminals. + Usage is almost always + + eqn file ... | troff + neqn file ... | nroff + + If no files are specified, these programs reads from the + standard input. A line beginning with `.EQ' marks the start + of an equation; the end of an equation is marked by a line + beginning with `.EN'. Neither of these lines is altered, so + they may be defined in macro packages to get centering, + numbering, etc. It is also possible to set two characters + as `delimiters'; subsequent text between delimiters is also + treated as _e_q_n input. Delimiters may be set to characters _x + and _y with the command-line argument --dd_x_y or (more commonly) + with `delim _x_y' between .EQ and .EN. The left and right + delimiters may be identical. Delimiters are turned off by + `delim off'. All text that is neither between delimiters + nor between .EQ and .EN is passed through untouched. + + The program _c_h_e_c_k_e_q reports missing or unbalanced delimiters + and .EQ/.EN pairs. + + Tokens within _e_q_n are separated by spaces, tabs, newlines, + braces, double quotes, tildes or circumflexes. Braces {} + are used for grouping; generally speaking, anywhere a single + character like _x could appear, a complicated construction + enclosed in braces may be used instead. Tilde ~ represents + a full space in the output, circumflex ^ half as much. + + Subscripts and superscripts are produced with the keywords + ssuubb and ssuupp.. Thus _x _s_u_b _i makes _x_i, _a _s_u_b _i _s_u_p _2 produces + _a_i + 2 + , and _e _s_u_p {_x _s_u_p _2 + _y _s_u_p _2} gives _e + _x2+_y2 + . + + + Fractions are made with oovveerr: _a _o_v_e_r _b yields + _b + + _a_. + + + ssqqrrtt makes square roots: _1 _o_v_e_r _s_q_r_t {_a_x _s_u_p _2 +_b_x+_c} + + results in + v/~~~~~~~~_a_x + 2 + +_b_x+_c + + 1_________ . + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 1 + + + + + + +EQN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EQN(1) + + + + The keywords ffrroomm and ttoo introduce lower and upper limits on + + arbitrary things: + _n->oo + lim + 0 + _>_~ + _n + _x_i is made with _l_i_m _f_r_o_m {_n-> _i_n_f } + + _s_u_m _f_r_o_m _0 _t_o _n _x _s_u_b _i. + + Left and right brackets, braces, etc., of the right height + are made with lleefftt and rriigghhtt:: _l_e_f_t [ _x _s_u_p _2 + _y _s_u_p _2 _o_v_e_r + + _a_l_p_h_a _r_i_g_h_t ] ~=~_1 produces + | + | + | + _x + 2 + + + _o( + + _y + 2 + __ + | + | + | + = 1. The rriigghhtt clause + + is optional. Legal characters after lleefftt and rriigghhtt are + braces, brackets, bars, cc and ff for ceiling and floor, and + "" for nothing at all (useful for a right-side-only + bracket). + + Vertical piles of things are made with ppiillee, llppiillee, ccppiillee, + + and rrppiillee: _p_i_l_e {_a _a_b_o_v_e _b _a_b_o_v_e _c} produces + _c + _b + _a + + . There can + + be an arbitrary number of elements in a pile. llppiillee left- + justifies, ppiillee and ccppiillee center, with different vertical + spacing, and rrppiillee right justifies. + + Matrices are made with mmaattrriixx: _m_a_t_r_i_x { _l_c_o_l { _x _s_u_b _i _a_b_o_v_e + + _y _s_u_b _2 } _c_c_o_l { _1 _a_b_o_v_e _2 } } produces + _y2 + + _x_i + + + 2 + + 1 + + . In addition, + + there is rrccooll for a right-justified column. + + Diacritical marks are made with ddoott, ddoottddoott, hhaatt, ttiillddee, + bbaarr, vveecc, ddyyaadd, and uunnddeerr: _x _d_o_t = _f(_t) _b_a_r is _x.=_f(_t)~~~~, _y + _d_o_t_d_o_t _b_a_r ~=~ _n _u_n_d_e_r is _y..~ = _n_, and _x _v_e_c ~=~ _y _d_y_a_d is + _x->= _y<-->. + + Sizes and font can be changed with ssiizzee _n or ssiizzee ++___n, rroommaann, + iittaalliicc, bboolldd, and ffoonntt _n. Size and fonts can be changed glo- + bally in a document by ggssiizzee _n and ggffoonntt _n, or by the + command-line arguments --ss_n and --ff_n. + + Normally subscripts and superscripts are reduced by 3 point + sizes from the previous size; this may be changed by the + command-line argument --pp_n. + + Successive display arguments can be lined up. Place mmaarrkk + before the desired lineup point in the first equation; place + lliinneeuupp at the place that is to line up vertically in subse- + quent equations. + + Shorthands may be defined or existing keywords redefined + with ddeeffiinnee: _d_e_f_i_n_e _t_h_i_n_g % _r_e_p_l_a_c_e_m_e_n_t % defines a new + token called _t_h_i_n_g which will be replaced by _r_e_p_l_a_c_e_m_e_n_t + + + +Printed 7/9/88 2 + + + + + + +EQN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EQN(1) + + + + whenever it appears thereafter. The % may be any character + that does not occur in _r_e_p_l_a_c_e_m_e_n_t. + + Keywords like _s_u_m (_>_~) _i_n_t () _i_n_f (oo) and shorthands like >= + (>_) -> (->), and != (=/) are recognized. Greek letters are + spelled out in the desired case, as in _a_l_p_h_a or _G_A_M_M_A. + Mathematical words like sin, cos, log are made Roman + automatically. _T_r_o_f_f(1) four-character escapes like \(bs () + can be used anywhere. Strings enclosed in double quotes + "..." are passed through untouched; this permits keywords to + be entered as text, and can be used to communicate with + _t_r_o_f_f when all else fails. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + troff(1), tbl(1), ms(7), eqnchar(7) + B. W. Kernighan and L. L. Cherry, _T_y_p_e_s_e_t_t_i_n_g _M_a_t_h_e_m_a_t_i_c_s- + _U_s_e_r'_s _G_u_i_d_e + J. F. Ossanna, _N_R_O_F_F/_T_R_O_F_F _U_s_e_r'_s _M_a_n_u_a_l + +BBUUGGSS + To embolden digits, parens, etc., it is necessary to quote + them, as in `bold "12.3"'. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/checknr.0 b/usr/man/cat1/checknr.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b61f5f3d11 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/checknr.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +CHECKNR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CHECKNR(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + checknr - check nroff/troff files + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + cchheecckknnrr [ --ss ] [ --ff ] [ --aa.x1.y1.x2.y2. ... .xn.yn ] [ + --cc.x1.x2.x3 ... .xn ] [ _f_i_l_e ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _C_h_e_c_k_n_r checks a list of _n_r_o_f_f(1) or _t_r_o_f_f(1) input files + for certain kinds of errors involving mismatched opening and + closing delimiters and unknown commands. If no files are + specified, _c_h_e_c_k_n_r checks the standard input. Delimeters + checked are: + + (1) Font changes using \fx ... \fP. + + (2) Size changes using \sx ... \s0. + + (3) Macros that come in open ... close forms, for example, + the .TS and .TE macros which must always come in pairs. + + _C_h_e_c_k_n_r knows about the _m_s(7) and _m_e(7) macro packages. + + Additional pairs of macros can be added to the list using + the --aa option. This must be followed by groups of six char- + acters, each group defining a pair of macros. The six char- + acters are a period, the first macro name, another period, + and the second macro name. For example, to define a pair + .BS and .ES, use -aa.BS.ES + + The --cc option defines commands which would otherwise be com- + plained about as undefined. + + The --ff option requests _c_h_e_c_k_n_r to ignore \f font changes. + + The --ss option requests _c_h_e_c_k_n_r to ignore \s size changes. + + _C_h_e_c_k_n_r is intended to be used on documents that are + prepared with _c_h_e_c_k_n_r in mind, much the same as _l_i_n_t. It + expects a certain document writing style for \f and \s com- + mands, in that each \fx must be terminated with \fP and each + \sx must be terminated with \s0. While it will work to + directly go into the next font or explicitly specify the + original font or point size, and many existing documents + actually do this, such a practice will produce complaints + from _c_h_e_c_k_n_r. Since it is probably better to use the \fP and + \s0 forms anyway, you should think of this as a contribution + to your document preparation style. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + nroff(1), troff(1), checkeq(1), ms(7), me(7) + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1 + + + + + + +CHECKNR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CHECKNR(1) + + + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Complaints about unmatched delimiters. + Complaints about unrecognized commands. + Various complaints about the syntax of commands. + +BBUUGGSS + There is no way to define a 1 character macro name using --aa. + Does not correctly recognize certain reasonable constructs, + such as conditionals. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/chfn.0 b/usr/man/cat1/chfn.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..aef47817e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/chfn.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +PASSWD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PASSWD(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + chfn, chsh, passwd - change password file information + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ppaasssswwdd [ --ff ] [ --ss ] [ name ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + This command changes (or installs) a password, login shell + (--ss option), or GECOS information field (--ff option) associ- + ated with the user _n_a_m_e (your own name by default). + + When altering a password, the program prompts for the + current password and then for the new one. The caller must + supply both. The new password must be typed twice to fore- + stall mistakes. + + New passwords must be at least four characters long if they + use a sufficiently rich alphabet and at least six characters + long if monocase. These rules are relaxed if you are + insistent enough. + + Only the owner of the name or the super-user may change a + password; the owner must prove he knows the old password. + + When altering a login shell, _p_a_s_s_w_d displays the current + login shell and then prompts for the new one. The new login + shell must be one of the approved shells listed in + /_e_t_c/_s_h_e_l_l_s unless you are the super-user. If /_e_t_c/_s_h_e_l_l_s + does not exist, the only shells that may be specified are + /_b_i_n/_s_h and /_b_i_n/_c_s_h. + + The super-user may change anyone's login shell; normal users + may only change their own login shell. + + When altering the GECOS information field, _p_a_s_s_w_d displays + the current information, broken into fields, as interpreted + by the _f_i_n_g_e_r(1) program, among others, and prompts for new + values. These fields include a user's ``real life'' name, + office room number, office phone number, and home phone + number. Included in each prompt is a default value, which + is enclosed between brackets. The default value is accepted + simply by typing a carriage return. To enter a blank field, + the word ``none'' may be typed. Below is a sample run: + + NNaammee [[BBiiffff SSttuuddsswwoorrtthh IIII]]:: + RRoooomm nnuummbbeerr ((EExxss:: 559977EE oorr 119977CC)) [[]]:: 521E + OOffffiiccee PPhhoonnee ((EExx:: 11663322)) [[]]:: 1863 + HHoommee PPhhoonnee ((EExx:: 998877553322)) [[55777711554466]]:: none + + + _P_a_s_s_w_d allows phone numbers to be entered with or without + hyphens. It is a good idea to run _f_i_n_g_e_r after changing the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 1 + + + + + + +PASSWD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PASSWD(1) + + + + GECOS information to make sure everything is setup properly. + + The super-user may change anyone's GECOS information; normal + users may only change their own. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/passwd The file containing all of this information + /etc/shells The list of approved shells + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + login(1), finger(1), passwd(5), crypt(3) + Robert Morris and Ken Thompson, _U_N_I_X _p_a_s_s_w_o_r_d _s_e_c_u_r_i_t_y + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/chgrp.0 b/usr/man/cat1/chgrp.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3cbe333d82 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/chgrp.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +CHGRP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CHGRP(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + chgrp - change group + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + cchhggrrpp [ --RRff ] group file ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _C_h_g_r_p changes the group-ID of the _f_i_l_e_s to _g_r_o_u_p. The group + may be either a decimal GID or a group name found in the + group-ID file. + + The user invoking _c_h_g_r_p must belong to the specified group + and be the owner of the file, or be the super-user. + + No errors, except for usage errors, are reported when the --ff + (force) option is given. + + When the --RR option is given, _c_h_g_r_p recursively descends its + directory arguments setting the specified group-ID. When + symbolic links are encountered, their group is changed, but + they are not traversed. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + chown(1), chown(2), passwd(5), group(5) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 21, 1988 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/chmod.0 b/usr/man/cat1/chmod.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f7581da910 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/chmod.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +CHMOD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CHMOD(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + chmod - change mode + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + cchhmmoodd [ --RRff ] mode file ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + The mode of each named file is changed according to _m_o_d_e, + which may be absolute or symbolic. An absolute _m_o_d_e is an + octal number constructed from the OR of the following modes: + + 4000 set user ID on execution + 2000 set group ID on execution + 1000 sticky bit, see _c_h_m_o_d(2) + 0400 read by owner + 0200 write by owner + 0100 execute (search in directory) by owner + 0070 read, write, execute (search) by group + 0007 read, write, execute (search) by others + + A symbolic _m_o_d_e has the form: + + [_w_h_o] _o_p _p_e_r_m_i_s_s_i_o_n [_o_p _p_e_r_m_i_s_s_i_o_n] ... + + The _w_h_o part is a combination of the letters uu (for user's + permissions), gg (group) and oo (other). The letter aa stands + for all, or uuggoo.. If _w_h_o is omitted, the default is _a but + the setting of the file creation mask (see umask(2)) is + taken into account. + + _O_p can be ++ to add _p_e_r_m_i_s_s_i_o_n to the file's mode, -- to take + away _p_e_r_m_i_s_s_i_o_n and == to assign _p_e_r_m_i_s_s_i_o_n absolutely (all + other bits will be reset). + + _P_e_r_m_i_s_s_i_o_n is any combination of the letters rr (read), ww + (write), xx (execute), XX (set execute only if file is a + directory or some other execute bit is set), ss (set owner or + group id) and tt (save text - sticky). Letters uu, gg, or oo + indicate that _p_e_r_m_i_s_s_i_o_n is to be taken from the current + mode. Omitting _p_e_r_m_i_s_s_i_o_n is only useful with == to take away + all permissions. + + When the --RR option is given, _c_h_m_o_d recursively descends its + directory arguments setting the mode for each file as + described above. When symbolic links are encountered, their + mode is not changed and they are not traversed. + + If the --ff option is given, _c_h_m_o_d will not complain if it + fails to change the mode on a file. + +EEXXAAMMPPLLEESS + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 22, 1986 1 + + + + + + +CHMOD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CHMOD(1) + + + + The first example denies write permission to others, the + second makes a file executable by all if it is executable by + anyone: + + chmod o-w file + chmod +X file + + Multiple symbolic modes separated by commas may be given. + Operations are performed in the order specified. The letter + ss is only useful with uu or gg.. + + Only the owner of a file (or the super-user) may change its + mode. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + ls(1), chmod(2), stat(2), umask(2), chown(8) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 22, 1986 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/chsh.0 b/usr/man/cat1/chsh.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..aef47817e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/chsh.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +PASSWD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PASSWD(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + chfn, chsh, passwd - change password file information + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ppaasssswwdd [ --ff ] [ --ss ] [ name ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + This command changes (or installs) a password, login shell + (--ss option), or GECOS information field (--ff option) associ- + ated with the user _n_a_m_e (your own name by default). + + When altering a password, the program prompts for the + current password and then for the new one. The caller must + supply both. The new password must be typed twice to fore- + stall mistakes. + + New passwords must be at least four characters long if they + use a sufficiently rich alphabet and at least six characters + long if monocase. These rules are relaxed if you are + insistent enough. + + Only the owner of the name or the super-user may change a + password; the owner must prove he knows the old password. + + When altering a login shell, _p_a_s_s_w_d displays the current + login shell and then prompts for the new one. The new login + shell must be one of the approved shells listed in + /_e_t_c/_s_h_e_l_l_s unless you are the super-user. If /_e_t_c/_s_h_e_l_l_s + does not exist, the only shells that may be specified are + /_b_i_n/_s_h and /_b_i_n/_c_s_h. + + The super-user may change anyone's login shell; normal users + may only change their own login shell. + + When altering the GECOS information field, _p_a_s_s_w_d displays + the current information, broken into fields, as interpreted + by the _f_i_n_g_e_r(1) program, among others, and prompts for new + values. These fields include a user's ``real life'' name, + office room number, office phone number, and home phone + number. Included in each prompt is a default value, which + is enclosed between brackets. The default value is accepted + simply by typing a carriage return. To enter a blank field, + the word ``none'' may be typed. Below is a sample run: + + NNaammee [[BBiiffff SSttuuddsswwoorrtthh IIII]]:: + RRoooomm nnuummbbeerr ((EExxss:: 559977EE oorr 119977CC)) [[]]:: 521E + OOffffiiccee PPhhoonnee ((EExx:: 11663322)) [[]]:: 1863 + HHoommee PPhhoonnee ((EExx:: 998877553322)) [[55777711554466]]:: none + + + _P_a_s_s_w_d allows phone numbers to be entered with or without + hyphens. It is a good idea to run _f_i_n_g_e_r after changing the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 1 + + + + + + +PASSWD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PASSWD(1) + + + + GECOS information to make sure everything is setup properly. + + The super-user may change anyone's GECOS information; normal + users may only change their own. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/passwd The file containing all of this information + /etc/shells The list of approved shells + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + login(1), finger(1), passwd(5), crypt(3) + Robert Morris and Ken Thompson, _U_N_I_X _p_a_s_s_w_o_r_d _s_e_c_u_r_i_t_y + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/clear.0 b/usr/man/cat1/clear.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..146cee59b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/clear.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +CLEAR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CLEAR(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + clear - clear terminal screen + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + cclleeaarr + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _C_l_e_a_r clears your screen if this is possible. It looks in + the environment for the terminal type and then in + /_e_t_c/_t_e_r_m_c_a_p to figure out how to clear the screen. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/termcap terminal capability data base + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/cmp.0 b/usr/man/cat1/cmp.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e8db5bda6d --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/cmp.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +CMP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CMP(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + cmp - compare two files + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ccmmpp [ --ll ] [ --ss ] file1 file2 [ skip1 ] [ skip2 ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + The two files are compared. (If _f_i_l_e_1 is `-', the standard + input is used.) With no options, _c_m_p makes no comment if + the files are the same; if they differ, it reports the byte + and line number at which the difference occurred, or, that + one file is an initial subsequence of the other. _S_k_i_p_1 and + _s_k_i_p_2 are initial byte offsets into _f_i_l_e_1 and _f_i_l_e_2 respec- + tively, and may be either octal or decimal; a leading ``0'' + denotes octal. + + Options: + + --ss Print nothing for differing files; set exit codes + only. + + --ll Print the byte number (in decimal) and the differing + bytes (in octal) for all differences between the two + files. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + diff(1), comm(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Exit code 0 is returned for identical files, 1 for different + files, and 2 for an inaccessible or missing argument, or a + system error. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 November 18, 1987 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/col.0 b/usr/man/cat1/col.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e53dfddb76 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/col.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +COL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COL(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + col - filter reverse line feeds + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ccooll [ --bbffhh ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _C_o_l reads the standard input and writes the standard output. + It performs the line overlays implied by reverse line feeds + (ESC-7 in ASCII) and by forward and reverse half line feeds + (ESC-9 and ESC-8). _C_o_l is particularly useful for filtering + multicolumn output made with the `.rt' command of _n_r_o_f_f and + output resulting from use of the _t_b_l(1) preprocessor. + + Although _c_o_l accepts half line motions in its input, it nor- + mally does not emit them on output. Instead, text that + would appear between lines is moved to the next lower full + line boundary. This treatment can be suppressed by the --ff + (fine) option; in this case the output from _c_o_l may contain + forward half line feeds (ESC-9), but will still never con- + tain either kind of reverse line motion. + + If the --bb option is given, _c_o_l assumes that the output dev- + ice in use is not capable of backspacing. In this case, if + several characters are to appear in the same place, only the + last one read will be taken. + + The control characters SO (ASCII code 017), and SI (016) are + assumed to start and end text in an alternate character set. + The character set (primary or alternate) associated with + each printing character read is remembered; on output, SO + and SI characters are generated where necessary to maintain + the correct treatment of each character. + + If the --hh option is given, _c_o_l converts white space to tabs + to shorten printing time. + + All control characters are removed from the input except + space, backspace, tab, return, newline, ESC (033) followed + by one of 7, 8, 9, SI, SO, and VT (013). This last charac- + ter is an alternate form of full reverse line feed, for com- + patibility with some other hardware conventions. All other + non-printing characters are ignored. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + troff(1), tbl(1) + +BBUUGGSS + Can't back up more than 128 lines. + No more than 800 characters, including backspaces, on a + line. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 16, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/colcrt.0 b/usr/man/cat1/colcrt.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cf8e5fe923 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/colcrt.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +COLCRT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COLCRT(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + colcrt - filter nroff output for CRT previewing + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ccoollccrrtt [ -- ] [ --22 ] [ file ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _C_o_l_c_r_t provides virtual half-line and reverse line feed + sequences for terminals without such capability, and on + which overstriking is destructive. Half-line characters and + underlining (changed to dashing `-') are placed on new lines + in between the normal output lines. + + The optional -- suppresses all underlining. It is especially + useful for previewing _a_l_l_b_o_x_e_d tables from _t_b_l(1). + + The option --22 causes all half-lines to be printed, effec- + tively double spacing the output. Normally, a minimal space + output format is used which will suppress empty lines. The + program never suppresses two consecutive empty lines, how- + ever. The --22 option is useful for sending output to the + line printer when the output contains superscripts and sub- + scripts which would otherwise be invisible. + + A typical use of _c_o_l_c_r_t would be + + tbl exum2.n | nroff -ms | colcrt - | more + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + nroff/troff(1), col(1), more(1), ul(1) + +BBUUGGSS + Should fold underlines onto blanks even with the `--' option + so that a true underline character would show; if we did + this, however, _c_o_l_c_r_t wouldn't get rid of _c_u'_d underlining + completely. + + Can't back up more than 102 lines. + + General overstriking is lost; as a special case `|' over- + struck with `-' or underline becomes `+'. + + Lines are trimmed to 132 characters. + + Some provision should be made for processing superscripts + and subscripts in documents which are already double-spaced. + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/colrm.0 b/usr/man/cat1/colrm.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..af40ffed64 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/colrm.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +COLRM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COLRM(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + colrm - remove columns from a file + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ccoollrrmm [ startcol [ endcol ] ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _C_o_l_r_m removes selected columns from a file. Input is taken + from standard input. Output is sent to standard output. + + If called with one parameter the columns of each line will + be removed starting with the specified column. If called + with two parameters the columns from the first column to the + last column will be removed. + + Column numbering starts with column 1. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + expand(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/comm.0 b/usr/man/cat1/comm.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1fd11075ee --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/comm.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +COMM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COMM(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + comm - select or reject lines common to two sorted files + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ccoommmm [ -- [ 112233 ] ] file1 file2 + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _C_o_m_m reads _f_i_l_e_1 and _f_i_l_e_2, which should be ordered in ASCII + collating sequence, and produces a three column output: + lines only in _f_i_l_e_1; lines only in _f_i_l_e_2; and lines in both + files. The filename `-' means the standard input. + + Flags 1, 2, or 3 suppress printing of the corresponding + column. Thus ccoommmm --1122 prints only the lines common to the + two files; ccoommmm --2233 prints only lines in the first file but + not in the second; ccoommmm --112233 is a no-op. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + cmp(1), diff(1), uniq(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/compress.0 b/usr/man/cat1/compress.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ef84c3c2e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/compress.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +COMPRESS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COMPRESS(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + compress, uncompress, zcat - compress and expand data + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ccoommpprreessss [ --ff ] [ --vv ] [ --cc ] [ --bb _b_i_t_s ] [ _n_a_m_e ... ] + uunnccoommpprreessss [ --ff ] [ --vv ] [ --cc ] [ _n_a_m_e ... ] + zzccaatt [ _n_a_m_e ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _C_o_m_p_r_e_s_s reduces the size of the named files using adaptive + Lempel-Ziv coding. Whenever possible, each file is replaced + by one with the extension ..ZZ,, while keeping the same owner- + ship modes, access and modification times. If no files are + specified, the standard input is compressed to the standard + output. Compressed files can be restored to their original + form using _u_n_c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s or _z_c_a_t. + + The --ff option will force compression of _n_a_m_e, even if it + does not actually shrink or the corresponding _n_a_m_e.Z file + already exists. Except when run in the background under + /_b_i_n/_s_h, if --ff is not given the user is prompted as to + whether an existing _n_a_m_e.Z file should be overwritten. + + The --cc (``cat'') option makes _c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s/_u_n_c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s write to + the standard output; no files are changed. The nondestruc- + tive behavior of _z_c_a_t is identical to that of _u_n_c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s --cc.. + + _C_o_m_p_r_e_s_s uses the modified Lempel-Ziv algorithm popularized + in "A Technique for High Performance Data Compression", + Terry A. Welch, _I_E_E_E _C_o_m_p_u_t_e_r, vol. 17, no. 6 (June 1984), + pp. 8-19. Common substrings in the file are first replaced + by 9-bit codes 257 and up. When code 512 is reached, the + algorithm switches to 10-bit codes and continues to use more + bits until the limit specified by the --bb flag is reached + (default 16). _B_i_t_s must be between 9 and 16. The default + can be changed in the source to allow _c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s to be run on + a smaller machine. + + After the _b_i_t_s limit is attained, _c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s periodically + checks the compression ratio. If it is increasing, _c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s + continues to use the existing code dictionary. However, if + the compression ratio decreases, _c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s discards the table + of substrings and rebuilds it from scratch. This allows the + algorithm to adapt to the next "block" of the file. + + Note that the --bb flag is omitted for _u_n_c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s, since the + _b_i_t_s parameter specified during compression is encoded + within the output, along with a magic number to ensure that + neither decompression of random data nor recompression of + compressed data is attempted. + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 11, 1986 1 + + + + + + +COMPRESS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COMPRESS(1) + + + + The amount of compression obtained depends on the size of + the input, the number of _b_i_t_s per code, and the distribution + of common substrings. Typically, text such as source code + or English is reduced by 50-60%. Compression is generally + much better than that achieved by Huffman coding (as used in + _p_a_c_k), or adaptive Huffman coding (_c_o_m_p_a_c_t), and takes less + time to compute. + + The --vv option causes the printing of the percentage reduc- + tion of each file. + + If an error occurs, exit status is 1, else if the last file + was not compressed because it became larger, the status is + 2; else the status is 0. + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Usage: compress [-fvc] [-b maxbits] [file ...] + Invalid options were specified on the command line. + Missing maxbits + Maxbits must follow --bb. + _f_i_l_e: not in compressed format + The file specified to _u_n_c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s has not been + compressed. + _f_i_l_e: compressed with _x_x bits, can only handle _y_y bits + _F_i_l_e was compressed by a program that could deal + with more _b_i_t_s than the compress code on this + machine. Recompress the file with smaller _b_i_t_s. + _f_i_l_e: already has .Z suffix -- no change + The file is assumed to be already compressed. + Rename the file and try again. + _f_i_l_e: filename too long to tack on .Z + The file cannot be compressed because its name is + longer than 12 characters. Rename and try again. + This message does not occur on BSD systems. + _f_i_l_e already exists; do you wish to overwrite (y or n)? + Respond "y" if you want the output file to be + replaced; "n" if not. + uncompress: corrupt input + A SIGSEGV violation was detected which usually means + that the input file is corrupted. + Compression: _x_x._x_x% + Percentage of the input saved by compression. + (Relevant only for --vv.) + -- not a regular file: unchanged + When the input file is not a regular file, (e.g. a + directory), it is left unaltered. + -- has _x_x other links: unchanged + The input file has links; it is left unchanged. See + _l_n(1) for more information. + -- file unchanged + No savings is achieved by compression. The input + remains virgin. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 11, 1986 2 + + + + + + +COMPRESS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COMPRESS(1) + + + +BBUUGGSS + Although compressed files are compatible between machines + with large memory, --bb12 should be used for file transfer to + architectures with a small process data space (64KB or less, + as exhibited by the DEC PDP series, the Intel 80286, etc.) + + _c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s should be more flexible about the existence of the + `.Z' suffix. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 11, 1986 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/cp.0 b/usr/man/cat1/cp.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..99a591c0a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/cp.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +CP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CP(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + cp - copy + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ccpp [ --iipp ] file1 file2 + + ccpp [ --iipprr ] file ... directory + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _F_i_l_e_1 is copied onto _f_i_l_e_2. By default, the mode and owner + of _f_i_l_e_2 are preserved if it already existed; otherwise the + mode of the source file modified by the current _u_m_a_s_k(2) is + used. The --pp option causes _c_p to attempt to preserve + (duplicate) in its copies the modification times and modes + of the source files, ignoring the present _u_m_a_s_k. + + In the second form, one or more _f_i_l_e_s are copied into the + _d_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y with their original file-names. + + _C_p refuses to copy a file onto itself. + + If the --ii option is specified, _c_p will prompt the user with + the name of the file whenever the copy will cause an old + file to be overwritten. An answer of 'y' will cause _c_p to + continue. Any other answer will prevent it from overwriting + the file. + + If the --rr option is specified and any of the source files + are directories, _c_p copies each subtree rooted at that name; + in this case the destination must be a directory. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + cat(1), mv(1), rcp(1C) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 8, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/crypt.0 b/usr/man/cat1/crypt.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..55afeb2201 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/crypt.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +CRYPT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CRYPT(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + crypt - encode/decode + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ccrryypptt [ password ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _C_r_y_p_t reads from the standard input and writes on the stan- + dard output. The _p_a_s_s_w_o_r_d is a key that selects a particu- + lar transformation. If no _p_a_s_s_w_o_r_d is given, _c_r_y_p_t demands + a key from the terminal and turns off printing while the key + is being typed in. _C_r_y_p_t encrypts and decrypts with the + same key: + + crypt key cypher + crypt key ' `(' `)' form separate words. If doubled in `&&', + `||', `<<' or `>>' these pairs form single words. These + parser metacharacters may be made part of other words, or + prevented their special meaning, by preceding them with `\'. + A newline preceded by a `\' is equivalent to a blank. + + In addition strings enclosed in matched pairs of quotations, + `'', ``' or `"', form parts of a word; metacharacters in + these strings, including blanks and tabs, do not form + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 1 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + separate words. These quotations have semantics to be + described subsequently. Within pairs of `'' or `"' charac- + ters a newline preceded by a `\' gives a true newline char- + acter. + + When the shell's input is not a terminal, the character `#' + introduces a comment which continues to the end of the input + line. It is prevented this special meaning when preceded by + `\' and in quotations using ``', `'', and `"'. + + CCoommmmaannddss + + A simple command is a sequence of words, the first of which + specifies the command to be executed. A simple command or a + sequence of simple commands separated by `|' characters + forms a pipeline. The output of each command in a pipeline + is connected to the input of the next. Sequences of pipe- + lines may be separated by `;', and are then executed sequen- + tially. A sequence of pipelines may be executed without + immediately waiting for it to terminate by following it with + an `&'. + + Any of the above may be placed in `(' `)' to form a simple + command (which may be a component of a pipeline, etc.) It is + also possible to separate pipelines with `||' or `&&' indi- + cating, as in the C language, that the second is to be exe- + cuted only if the first fails or succeeds respectively. (See + _E_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n_s.) + + JJoobbss + + The shell associates a _j_o_b with each pipeline. It keeps a + table of current jobs, printed by the _j_o_b_s command, and + assigns them small integer numbers. When a job is started + asynchronously with `&', the shell prints a line which looks + like: + + [1] 1234 + + indicating that the job which was started asynchronously was + job number 1 and had one (top-level) process, whose process + id was 1234. + + If you are running a job and wish to do something else you + may hit the key ^^ZZ (control-Z) which sends a STOP signal to + the current job. The shell will then normally indicate that + the job has been `Stopped', and print another prompt. You + can then manipulate the state of this job, putting it in the + background with the _b_g command, or run some other commands + and then eventually bring the job back into the foreground + with the foreground command _f_g. A ^^ZZ takes effect immedi- + ately and is like an interrupt in that pending output and + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 2 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + unread input are discarded when it is typed. There is + another special key ^^YY which does not generate a STOP signal + until a program attempts to _r_e_a_d(2) it. This can usefully + be typed ahead when you have prepared some commands for a + job which you wish to stop after it has read them. + + A job being run in the background will stop if it tries to + read from the terminal. Background jobs are normally + allowed to produce output, but this can be disabled by giv- + ing the command ``stty tostop''. If you set this tty + option, then background jobs will stop when they try to pro- + duce output like they do when they try to read input. + + There are several ways to refer to jobs in the shell. The + character `%' introduces a job name. If you wish to refer + to job number 1, you can name it as `%1'. Just naming a job + brings it to the foreground; thus `%1' is a synonym for `fg + %1', bringing job 1 back into the foreground. Similarly + saying `%1 &' resumes job 1 in the background. Jobs can + also be named by prefixes of the string typed in to start + them, if these prefixes are unambiguous, thus `%ex' would + normally restart a suspended _e_x(1) job, if there were only + one suspended job whose name began with the string `ex'. It + is also possible to say `%?string' which specifies a job + whose text contains _s_t_r_i_n_g, if there is only one such job. + + The shell maintains a notion of the current and previous + jobs. In output pertaining to jobs, the current job is + marked with a `+' and the previous job with a `-'. The + abbreviation `%+' refers to the current job and `%-' refers + to the previous job. For close analogy with the syntax of + the _h_i_s_t_o_r_y mechanism (described below), `%%' is also a + synonym for the current job. + + SSttaattuuss rreeppoorrttiinngg + + This shell learns immediately whenever a process changes + state. It normally informs you whenever a job becomes + blocked so that no further progress is possible, but only + just before it prints a prompt. This is done so that it + does not otherwise disturb your work. If, however, you set + the shell variable _n_o_t_i_f_y, the shell will notify you immedi- + ately of changes of status in background jobs. There is + also a shell command _n_o_t_i_f_y which marks a single process so + that its status changes will be immediately reported. By + default _n_o_t_i_f_y marks the current process; simply say + `notify' after starting a background job to mark it. + + When you try to leave the shell while jobs are stopped, you + will be warned that `You have stopped jobs.' You may use + the _j_o_b_s command to see what they are. If you do this or + immediately try to exit again, the shell will not warn you a + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 3 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + second time, and the suspended jobs will be terminated. + + FFiillee NNaammee CCoommpplleettiioonn + + When the file name completion feature is enabled by setting + the shell variable _f_i_l_e_c (see sseett), _c_s_h will interactively + complete file names and user names from unique prefixes, + when they are input from the terminal followed by the escape + character (the escape key, or control-[). For example, if + the current directory looks like + DSC.OLD bin cmd lib xmpl.c + DSC.NEW chaosnet cmtest mail xmpl.o + bench class dev mbox xmpl.out + and the input is + % vi ch + _c_s_h will complete the prefix ``ch'' to the only matching + file name ``chaosnet'', changing the input line to + % vi chaosnet + However, given + % vi D + _c_s_h will only expand the input to + % vi DSC. + and will sound the terminal bell to indicate that the expan- + sion is incomplete, since there are two file names matching + the prefix ``D''. + + If a partial file name is followed by the end-of-file char- + acter (usually control-D), then, instead of completing the + name, _c_s_h will list all file names matching the prefix. For + example, the input + % vi D + causes all files beginning with ``D'' to be listed: + DSC.NEW DSC.OLD + while the input line remains unchanged. + + The same system of escape and end-of-file can also be used + to expand partial user names, if the word to be completed + (or listed) begins with the character ``~''. For example, + typing + cd ~ro + may produce the expansion + cd ~root + + The use of the terminal bell to signal errors or multiple + matches can be inhibited by setting the variable _n_o_b_e_e_p. + + Normally, all files in the particular directory are candi- + dates for name completion. Files with certain suffixes can + be excluded from consideration by setting the variable _f_i_g_- + _n_o_r_e to the list of suffixes to be ignored. Thus, if _f_i_g_- + _n_o_r_e is set by the command + % set fignore = (.o .out) + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 4 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + then typing + % vi x + would result in the completion to + % vi xmpl.c + ignoring the files "xmpl.o" and "xmpl.out". However, if the + only completion possible requires not ignoring these suf- + fixes, then they are not ignored. In addition, _f_i_g_n_o_r_e does + not affect the listing of file names by control-D. All + files are listed regardless of their suffixes. + + SSuubbssttiittuuttiioonnss + + We now describe the various transformations the shell per- + forms on the input in the order in which they occur. + + HHiissttoorryy ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonnss + + History substitutions place words from previous command + input as portions of new commands, making it easy to repeat + commands, repeat arguments of a previous command in the + current command, or fix spelling mistakes in the previous + command with little typing and a high degree of confidence. + History substitutions begin with the character `!' and may + begin aannyywwhheerree in the input stream (with the proviso that + they ddoo nnoott nest.) This `!' may be preceded by an `\' to + prevent its special meaning; for convenience, a `!' is + passed unchanged when it is followed by a blank, tab, new- + line, `=' or `('. (History substitutions also occur when an + input line begins with `^'. This special abbreviation will + be described later.) Any input line which contains history + substitution is echoed on the terminal before it is executed + as it could have been typed without history substitution. + + Commands input from the terminal which consist of one or + more words are saved on the history list. The history sub- + stitutions reintroduce sequences of words from these saved + commands into the input stream. The size of which is con- + trolled by the _h_i_s_t_o_r_y variable; the previous command is + always retained, regardless of its value. Commands are num- + bered sequentially from 1. + + For definiteness, consider the following output from the + _h_i_s_t_o_r_y command: + + 9 write michael + 10 ex write.c + 11 cat oldwrite.c + 12 diff *write.c + + The commands are shown with their event numbers. It is not + usually necessary to use event numbers, but the current + event number can be made part of the _p_r_o_m_p_t by placing an + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 5 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + `!' in the prompt string. + + With the current event 13 we can refer to previous events by + event number `!11', relatively as in `!-2' (referring to the + same event), by a prefix of a command word as in `!d' for + event 12 or `!wri' for event 9, or by a string contained in + a word in the command as in `!?mic?' also referring to event + 9. These forms, without further modification, simply rein- + troduce the words of the specified events, each separated by + a single blank. As a special case `!!' refers to the previ- + ous command; thus `!!' alone is essentially a _r_e_d_o. + + To select words from an event we can follow the event + specification by a `:' and a designator for the desired + words. The words of an input line are numbered from 0, the + first (usually command) word being 0, the second word (first + argument) being 1, etc. The basic word designators are: + + 0 first (command) word + _n _n'th argument + ^ first argument, i.e. `1' + $ last argument + % word matched by (immediately preceding) ?_s? search + _x-_y range of words + -_y abbreviates `0-_y' + * abbreviates `^-$', or nothing if only 1 word in event + _x* abbreviates `_x-$' + _x- like `_x*' but omitting word `$' + + The `:' separating the event specification from the word + designator can be omitted if the argument selector begins + with a `^', `$', `*' `-' or `%'. After the optional word + designator can be placed a sequence of modifiers, each pre- + ceded by a `:'. The following modifiers are defined: + + h Remove a trailing pathname component, leaving the head. + r Remove a trailing `.xxx' component, leaving the root name. + e Remove all but the extension `.xxx' part. + s/_l/_r/ Substitute _l for _r + t Remove all leading pathname components, leaving the tail. + & Repeat the previous substitution. + g Apply the change globally, prefixing the above, e.g. `g&'. + p Print the new command line but do not execute it. + q Quote the substituted words, preventing further substitutions. + x Like q, but break into words at blanks, tabs and newlines. + + Unless preceded by a `g' the modification is applied only to + the first modifiable word. With substitutions, it is an + error for no word to be applicable. + + The left hand side of substitutions are not regular expres- + sions in the sense of the editors, but rather strings. Any + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 6 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + character may be used as the delimiter in place of `/'; a + `\' quotes the delimiter into the _l and _r strings. The + character `&' in the right hand side is replaced by the text + from the left. A `\' quotes `&' also. A null _l uses the + previous string either from a _l or from a contextual scan + string _s in `!?_s?'. The trailing delimiter in the substitu- + tion may be omitted if a newline follows immediately as may + the trailing `?' in a contextual scan. + + A history reference may be given without an event specifica- + tion, e.g. `!$'. In this case the reference is to the pre- + vious command unless a previous history reference occurred + on the same line in which case this form repeats the previ- + ous reference. Thus `!?foo?^ !$' gives the first and last + arguments from the command matching `?foo?'. + + A special abbreviation of a history reference occurs when + the first non-blank character of an input line is a `^'. + This is equivalent to `!:s^' providing a convenient short- + hand for substitutions on the text of the previous line. + Thus `^lb^lib' fixes the spelling of `lib' in the previous + command. Finally, a history substitution may be surrounded + with `{' and `}' if necessary to insulate it from the char- + acters which follow. Thus, after `ls -ld ~paul' we might do + `!{l}a' to do `ls -ld ~paula', while `!la' would look for a + command starting `la'. + + QQuuoottaattiioonnss wwiitthh '' aanndd "" + + The quotation of strings by `'' and `"' can be used to + prevent all or some of the remaining substitutions. Strings + enclosed in `'' are prevented any further interpretation. + Strings enclosed in `"' may be expanded as described below. + + In both cases the resulting text becomes (all or part of) a + single word; only in one special case (see _C_o_m_m_a_n_d _S_u_b_s_t_i_t_i_- + _t_i_o_n below) does a `"' quoted string yield parts of more + than one word; `'' quoted strings never do. + + AAlliiaass ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonn + + The shell maintains a list of aliases which can be esta- + blished, displayed and modified by the _a_l_i_a_s and _u_n_a_l_i_a_s + commands. After a command line is scanned, it is parsed + into distinct commands and the first word of each command, + left-to-right, is checked to see if it has an alias. If it + does, then the text which is the alias for that command is + reread with the history mechanism available as though that + command were the previous input line. The resulting words + replace the command and argument list. If no reference is + made to the history list, then the argument list is left + unchanged. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 7 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + Thus if the alias for `ls' is `ls -l' the command `ls /usr' + would map to `ls -l /usr', the argument list here being + undisturbed. Similarly if the alias for `lookup' was `grep + !^ /etc/passwd' then `lookup bill' would map to `grep bill + /etc/passwd'. + + If an alias is found, the word transformation of the input + text is performed and the aliasing process begins again on + the reformed input line. Looping is prevented if the first + word of the new text is the same as the old by flagging it + to prevent further aliasing. Other loops are detected and + cause an error. + + Note that the mechanism allows aliases to introduce parser + metasyntax. Thus we can `alias print 'pr \!* | lpr'' to + make a command which _p_r'_s its arguments to the line printer. + + VVaarriiaabbllee ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonn + + The shell maintains a set of variables, each of which has as + value a list of zero or more words. Some of these variables + are set by the shell or referred to by it. For instance, + the _a_r_g_v variable is an image of the shell's argument list, + and words of this variable's value are referred to in spe- + cial ways. + + The values of variables may be displayed and changed by + using the _s_e_t and _u_n_s_e_t commands. Of the variables referred + to by the shell a number are toggles; the shell does not + care what their value is, only whether they are set or not. + For instance, the _v_e_r_b_o_s_e variable is a toggle which causes + command input to be echoed. The setting of this variable + results from the --vv command line option. + + Other operations treat variables numerically. The `@' com- + mand permits numeric calculations to be performed and the + result assigned to a variable. Variable values are, how- + ever, always represented as (zero or more) strings. For the + purposes of numeric operations, the null string is con- + sidered to be zero, and the second and subsequent words of + multiword values are ignored. + + After the input line is aliased and parsed, and before each + command is executed, variable substitution is performed + keyed by `$' characters. This expansion can be prevented by + preceding the `$' with a `\' except within `"'s where it + aallwwaayyss occurs, and within `''s where it nneevveerr occurs. + Strings quoted by ``' are interpreted later (see _C_o_m_m_a_n_d + _s_u_b_s_t_i_t_u_t_i_o_n below) so `$' substitution does not occur there + until later, if at all. A `$' is passed unchanged if fol- + lowed by a blank, tab, or end-of-line. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 8 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + Input/output redirections are recognized before variable + expansion, and are variable expanded separately. Otherwise, + the command name and entire argument list are expanded + together. It is thus possible for the first (command) word + to this point to generate more than one word, the first of + which becomes the command name, and the rest of which become + arguments. + + Unless enclosed in `"' or given the `:q' modifier the + results of variable substitution may eventually be command + and filename substituted. Within `"', a variable whose + value consists of multiple words expands to a (portion of) a + single word, with the words of the variables value separated + by blanks. When the `:q' modifier is applied to a substitu- + tion the variable will expand to multiple words with each + word separated by a blank and quoted to prevent later com- + mand or filename substitution. + + The following metasequences are provided for introducing + variable values into the shell input. Except as noted, it + is an error to reference a variable which is not set. + + $name + ${name} + Are replaced by the words of the value of variable + _n_a_m_e, each separated by a blank. Braces insulate _n_a_m_e + from following characters which would otherwise be part + of it. Shell variables have names consisting of up to + 20 letters and digits starting with a letter. The + underscore character is considered a letter. + If _n_a_m_e is not a shell variable, but is set in the + environment, then that value is returned (but :: modif- + iers and the other forms given below are not available + in this case). + + $name[selector] + ${name[selector]} + May be used to select only some of the words from the + value of _n_a_m_e. The selector is subjected to `$' substi- + tution and may consist of a single number or two + numbers separated by a `-'. The first word of a vari- + ables value is numbered `1'. If the first number of a + range is omitted it defaults to `1'. If the last + member of a range is omitted it defaults to `$#name'. + The selector `*' selects all words. It is not an error + for a range to be empty if the second argument is omit- + ted or in range. + + $#name + ${#name} + Gives the number of words in the variable. This is + useful for later use in a `[selector]'. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 9 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + $0 + Substitutes the name of the file from which command + input is being read. An error occurs if the name is + not known. + + $number + ${number} + Equivalent to `$argv[number]'. + + $* + Equivalent to `$argv[*]'. + + The modifiers `:e', `:h', `:t', `:r', `:q' and `:x' may be + applied to the substitutions above as may `:gh', `:gt' and + `:gr'. If braces `{' '}' appear in the command form then + the modifiers must appear within the braces. TThhee ccuurrrreenntt + iimmpplleemmeennttaattiioonn aalllloowwss oonnllyy oonnee ``::'' mmooddiiffiieerr oonn eeaacchh ``$$'' + eexxppaannssiioonn.. + + The following substitutions may not be modified with `:' + modifiers. + + $?name + ${?name} + Substitutes the string `1' if name is set, `0' if it is + not. + + $?0 + Substitutes `1' if the current input filename is known, + `0' if it is not. + + $$ + Substitute the (decimal) process number of the (parent) + shell. + + $< + Substitutes a line from the standard input, with no + further interpretation thereafter. It can be used to + read from the keyboard in a shell script. + + CCoommmmaanndd aanndd ffiilleennaammee ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonn + + The remaining substitutions, command and filename substitu- + tion, are applied selectively to the arguments of builtin + commands. This means that portions of expressions which are + not evaluated are not subjected to these expansions. For + commands which are not internal to the shell, the command + name is substituted separately from the argument list. This + occurs very late, after input-output redirection is per- + formed, and in a child of the main shell. + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 10 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + CCoommmmaanndd ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonn + + Command substitution is indicated by a command enclosed in + ``'. The output from such a command is normally broken into + separate words at blanks, tabs and newlines, with null words + being discarded, this text then replacing the original + string. Within `"'s, only newlines force new words; blanks + and tabs are preserved. + + In any case, the single final newline does not force a new + word. Note that it is thus possible for a command substitu- + tion to yield only part of a word, even if the command out- + puts a complete line. + + FFiilleennaammee ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonn + + If a word contains any of the characters `*', `?', `[' or + `{' or begins with the character `~', then that word is a + candidate for filename substitution, also known as `glob- + bing'. This word is then regarded as a pattern, and + replaced with an alphabetically sorted list of file names + which match the pattern. In a list of words specifying + filename substitution it is an error for no pattern to match + an existing file name, but it is not required for each pat- + tern to match. Only the metacharacters `*', `?' and `[' + imply pattern matching, the characters `~' and `{' being + more akin to abbreviations. + + In matching filenames, the character `.' at the beginning of + a filename or immediately following a `/', as well as the + character `/' must be matched explicitly. The character `*' + matches any string of characters, including the null string. + The character `?' matches any single character. The + sequence `[...]' matches any one of the characters enclosed. + Within `[...]', a pair of characters separated by `-' + matches any character lexically between the two. + + The character `~' at the beginning of a filename is used to + refer to home directories. Standing alone, i.e. `~' it + expands to the invokers home directory as reflected in the + value of the variable _h_o_m_e. When followed by a name consist- + ing of letters, digits and `-' characters the shell searches + for a user with that name and substitutes their home direc- + tory; thus `~ken' might expand to `/usr/ken' and + `~ken/chmach' to `/usr/ken/chmach'. If the character `~' is + followed by a character other than a letter or `/' or + appears not at the beginning of a word, it is left undis- + turbed. + + The metanotation `a{b,c,d}e' is a shorthand for `abe ace + ade'. Left to right order is preserved, with results of + matches being sorted separately at a low level to preserve + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 11 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + this order. This construct may be nested. Thus + `~source/s1/{oldls,ls}.c' expands to `/usr/source/s1/oldls.c + /usr/source/s1/ls.c' whether or not these files exist + without any chance of error if the home directory for + `source' is `/usr/source'. Similarly `../{memo,*box}' might + expand to `../memo ../box ../mbox'. (Note that `memo' was + not sorted with the results of matching `*box'.) As a spe- + cial case `{', `}' and `{}' are passed undisturbed. + + IInnppuutt//oouuttppuutt + + The standard input and standard output of a command may be + redirected with the following syntax: + + < name + Open file _n_a_m_e (which is first variable, command and + filename expanded) as the standard input. + + << word + Read the shell input up to a line which is identical to + _w_o_r_d. _W_o_r_d is not subjected to variable, filename or + command substitution, and each input line is compared + to _w_o_r_d before any substitutions are done on this input + line. Unless a quoting `\', `"', `'' or ``' appears in + _w_o_r_d variable and command substitution is performed on + the intervening lines, allowing `\' to quote `$', `\' + and ``'. Commands which are substituted have all + blanks, tabs, and newlines preserved, except for the + final newline which is dropped. The resultant text is + placed in an anonymous temporary file which is given to + the command as standard input. + + > name + >! name + >& name + >&! name + The file _n_a_m_e is used as standard output. If the file + does not exist then it is created; if the file exists, + its is truncated, its previous contents being lost. + + If the variable _n_o_c_l_o_b_b_e_r is set, then the file must + not exist or be a character special file (e.g. a termi- + nal or `/dev/null') or an error results. This helps + prevent accidental destruction of files. In this case + the `!' forms can be used and suppress this check. + + The forms involving `&' route the diagnostic output + into the specified file as well as the standard output. + _N_a_m_e is expanded in the same way as `<' input filenames + are. + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 12 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + >> name + >>& name + >>! name + >>&! name + Uses file _n_a_m_e as standard output like `>' but places + output at the end of the file. If the variable + _n_o_c_l_o_b_b_e_r is set, then it is an error for the file not + to exist unless one of the `!' forms is given. Other- + wise similar to `>'. + + A command receives the environment in which the shell was + invoked as modified by the input-output parameters and the + presence of the command in a pipeline. Thus, unlike some + previous shells, commands run from a file of shell commands + have no access to the text of the commands by default; + rather they receive the original standard input of the + shell. The `<<' mechanism should be used to present inline + data. This permits shell command scripts to function as + components of pipelines and allows the shell to block read + its input. Note that the default standard input for a com- + mand run detached is nnoott modified to be the empty file + `/dev/null'; rather the standard input remains as the origi- + nal standard input of the shell. If this is a terminal and + if the process attempts to read from the terminal, then the + process will block and the user will be notified (see JJoobbss + above). + + Diagnostic output may be directed through a pipe with the + standard output. Simply use the form `|&' rather than just + `|'. + + EExxpprreessssiioonnss + + A number of the builtin commands (to be described subse- + quently) take expressions, in which the operators are simi- + lar to those of C, with the same precedence. These expres- + sions appear in the @, _e_x_i_t, _i_f, and _w_h_i_l_e commands. The + following operators are available: + + || && | ^ & == != =~ !~ <= >= < > << >> + + - * / % ! ~ ( ) + + Here the precedence increases to the right, `==' `!=' `=~' + and `!~', `<=' `>=' `<' and `>', `<<' and `>>', `+' and `-', + `*' `/' and `%' being, in groups, at the same level. The + `==' `!=' `=~' and `!~' operators compare their arguments as + strings; all others operate on numbers. The operators `=~' + and `!~' are like `!=' and `==' except that the right hand + side is a _p_a_t_t_e_r_n (containing, e.g. `*'s, `?'s and instances + of `[...]') against which the left hand operand is matched. + This reduces the need for use of the _s_w_i_t_c_h statement in + shell scripts when all that is really needed is pattern + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 13 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + matching. + + Strings which begin with `0' are considered octal numbers. + Null or missing arguments are considered `0'. The result of + all expressions are strings, which represent decimal + numbers. It is important to note that no two components of + an expression can appear in the same word; except when adja- + cent to components of expressions which are syntactically + significant to the parser (`&' `|' `<' `>' `(' `)') they + should be surrounded by spaces. + + Also available in expressions as primitive operands are com- + mand executions enclosed in `{' and `}' and file enquiries + of the form `-_l name' where _l is one of: + + r read access + w write access + x execute access + e existence + o ownership + z zero size + f plain file + d directory + + The specified name is command and filename expanded and then + tested to see if it has the specified relationship to the + real user. If the file does not exist or is inaccessible + then all enquiries return false, i.e. `0'. Command execu- + tions succeed, returning true, i.e. `1', if the command + exits with status 0, otherwise they fail, returning false, + i.e. `0'. If more detailed status information is required + then the command should be executed outside of an expression + and the variable _s_t_a_t_u_s examined. + + CCoonnttrrooll ffllooww + + The shell contains a number of commands which can be used to + regulate the flow of control in command files (shell + scripts) and (in limited but useful ways) from terminal + input. These commands all operate by forcing the shell to + reread or skip in its input and, due to the implementation, + restrict the placement of some of the commands. + + The _f_o_r_e_a_c_h, _s_w_i_t_c_h, and _w_h_i_l_e statements, as well as the + _i_f-_t_h_e_n-_e_l_s_e form of the _i_f statement require that the major + keywords appear in a single simple command on an input line + as shown below. + + If the shell's input is not seekable, the shell buffers up + input whenever a loop is being read and performs seeks in + this internal buffer to accomplish the rereading implied by + the loop. (To the extent that this allows, backward goto's + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 14 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + will succeed on non-seekable inputs.) + + BBuuiillttiinn ccoommmmaannddss + + Builtin commands are executed within the shell. If a buil- + tin command occurs as any component of a pipeline except the + last then it is executed in a subshell. + + aalliiaass + aalliiaass name + aalliiaass name wordlist + The first form prints all aliases. The second form + prints the alias for name. The final form assigns the + specified _w_o_r_d_l_i_s_t as the alias of _n_a_m_e; _w_o_r_d_l_i_s_t is + command and filename substituted. _N_a_m_e is not allowed + to be _a_l_i_a_s or _u_n_a_l_i_a_s. + + aalllloocc + Shows the amount of dynamic memory acquired, broken + down into used and free memory. With an argument shows + the number of free and used blocks in each size + category. The categories start at size 8 and double at + each step. This command's output may vary across sys- + tem types, since systems other than the VAX may use a + different memory allocator. + + bbgg + bbgg %%job ... + Puts the current or specified jobs into the background, + continuing them if they were stopped. + + bbrreeaakk + Causes execution to resume after the _e_n_d of the nearest + enclosing _f_o_r_e_a_c_h or _w_h_i_l_e. The remaining commands on + the current line are executed. Multi-level breaks are + thus possible by writing them all on one line. + + bbrreeaakkssww + Causes a break from a _s_w_i_t_c_h, resuming after the _e_n_d_s_w. + + ccaassee label: + A label in a _s_w_i_t_c_h statement as discussed below. + + ccdd + ccdd name + cchhddiirr + cchhddiirr name + Change the shell's working directory to directory _n_a_m_e. + If no argument is given then change to the home direc- + tory of the user. + If _n_a_m_e is not found as a subdirectory of the current + directory (and does not begin with `/', `./' or `../'), + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 15 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + then each component of the variable _c_d_p_a_t_h is checked + to see if it has a subdirectory _n_a_m_e. Finally, if all + else fails but _n_a_m_e is a shell variable whose value + begins with `/', then this is tried to see if it is a + directory. + + ccoonnttiinnuuee + Continue execution of the nearest enclosing _w_h_i_l_e or + _f_o_r_e_a_c_h. The rest of the commands on the current line + are executed. + + ddeeffaauulltt:: + Labels the default case in a _s_w_i_t_c_h statement. The + default should come after all _c_a_s_e labels. + + ddiirrss + Prints the directory stack; the top of the stack is at + the left, the first directory in the stack being the + current directory. + + eecchhoo wordlist + eecchhoo --nn wordlist + The specified words are written to the shells standard + output, separated by spaces, and terminated with a new- + line unless the --nn option is specified. + + eellssee + eenndd + eennddiiff + eennddssww + See the description of the _f_o_r_e_a_c_h, _i_f, _s_w_i_t_c_h, and + _w_h_i_l_e statements below. + + eevvaall arg ... + (As in _s_h(1).) The arguments are read as input to the + shell and the resulting command(s) executed in the con- + text of the current shell. This is usually used to + execute commands generated as the result of command or + variable substitution, since parsing occurs before + these substitutions. See _t_s_e_t(1) for an example of + using _e_v_a_l. + + eexxeecc command + The specified command is executed in place of the + current shell. + + eexxiitt + eexxiitt(expr) + The shell exits either with the value of the _s_t_a_t_u_s + variable (first form) or with the value of the speci- + fied _e_x_p_r (second form). + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 16 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + ffgg + ffgg %%job ... + Brings the current or specified jobs into the fore- + ground, continuing them if they were stopped. + + ffoorreeaacchh name (wordlist) + ... + eenndd + The variable _n_a_m_e is successively set to each member of + _w_o_r_d_l_i_s_t and the sequence of commands between this com- + mand and the matching _e_n_d are executed. (Both _f_o_r_e_a_c_h + and _e_n_d must appear alone on separate lines.) + + The builtin command _c_o_n_t_i_n_u_e may be used to continue + the loop prematurely and the builtin command _b_r_e_a_k to + terminate it prematurely. When this command is read + from the terminal, the loop is read up once prompting + with `?' before any statements in the loop are exe- + cuted. If you make a mistake typing in a loop at the + terminal you can rub it out. + + gglloobb wordlist + Like _e_c_h_o but no `\' escapes are recognized and words + are delimited by null characters in the output. Useful + for programs which wish to use the shell to filename + expand a list of words. + + ggoottoo word + The specified _w_o_r_d is filename and command expanded to + yield a string of the form `label'. The shell rewinds + its input as much as possible and searches for a line + of the form `label:' possibly preceded by blanks or + tabs. Execution continues after the specified line. + + hhaasshhssttaatt + Print a statistics line indicating how effective the + internal hash table has been at locating commands (and + avoiding _e_x_e_c's). An _e_x_e_c is attempted for each com- + ponent of the _p_a_t_h where the hash function indicates a + possible hit, and in each component which does not + begin with a `/'. + + hhiissttoorryy + hhiissttoorryy _n + hhiissttoorryy --rr _n + hhiissttoorryy --hh _n + Displays the history event list; if _n is given only the + _n most recent events are printed. The --rr option rev- + erses the order of printout to be most recent first + rather than oldest first. The --hh option causes the + history list to be printed without leading numbers. + This is used to produce files suitable for sourceing + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 17 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + using the -h option to _s_o_u_r_c_e. + + iiff (expr) command + If the specified expression evaluates true, then the + single _c_o_m_m_a_n_d with arguments is executed. Variable + substitution on _c_o_m_m_a_n_d happens early, at the same time + it does for the rest of the _i_f command. _C_o_m_m_a_n_d must + be a simple command, not a pipeline, a command list, or + a parenthesized command list. Input/output redirection + occurs even if _e_x_p_r is false, when command is nnoott exe- + cuted (this is a bug). + + iiff (expr) tthheenn + ... + eellssee iiff (expr2) tthheenn + ... + eellssee + ... + eennddiiff + If the specified _e_x_p_r is true then the commands to the + first _e_l_s_e are executed; otherwise if _e_x_p_r_2 is true + then the commands to the second _e_l_s_e are executed, etc. + Any number of _e_l_s_e-_i_f pairs are possible; only one + _e_n_d_i_f is needed. The _e_l_s_e part is likewise optional. + (The words _e_l_s_e and _e_n_d_i_f must appear at the beginning + of input lines; the _i_f must appear alone on its input + line or after an _e_l_s_e.) + + jjoobbss + jjoobbss --ll + Lists the active jobs; given the --ll options lists pro- + cess id's in addition to the normal information. + + kkiillll %%job + kkiillll --sig %%job ... + kkiillll pid + kkiillll --sig pid ... + kkiillll --ll + Sends either the TERM (terminate) signal or the speci- + fied signal to the specified jobs or processes. Sig- + nals are either given by number or by names (as given + in /_u_s_r/_i_n_c_l_u_d_e/_s_i_g_n_a_l._h, stripped of the prefix + ``SIG''). The signal names are listed by ``kill -l''. + There is no default, saying just `kill' does not send a + signal to the current job. If the signal being sent is + TERM (terminate) or HUP (hangup), then the job or pro- + cess will be sent a CONT (continue) signal as well. + + lliimmiitt + lliimmiitt _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e + lliimmiitt _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e _m_a_x_i_m_u_m-_u_s_e + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 18 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + lliimmiitt --hh + lliimmiitt --hh _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e + lliimmiitt --hh _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e _m_a_x_i_m_u_m-_u_s_e + Limits the consumption by the current process and each + process it creates to not individually exceed _m_a_x_i_m_u_m- + _u_s_e on the specified _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e. If no _m_a_x_i_m_u_m-_u_s_e is + given, then the current limit is printed; if no + _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e is given, then all limitations are given. If + the --hh flag is given, the hard limits are used instead + of the current limits. The hard limits impose a ceil- + ing on the values of the current limits. Only the + super-user may raise the hard limits, but a user may + lower or raise the current limits within the legal + range. + + Resources controllable currently include _c_p_u_t_i_m_e (the + maximum number of cpu-seconds to be used by each pro- + cess), _f_i_l_e_s_i_z_e (the largest single file which can be + created), _d_a_t_a_s_i_z_e (the maximum growth of the + data+stack region via _s_b_r_k(2) beyond the end of the + program text), _s_t_a_c_k_s_i_z_e (the maximum size of the + automatically-extended stack region), and _c_o_r_e_d_u_m_p_s_i_z_e + (the size of the largest core dump that will be + created). + + The _m_a_x_i_m_u_m-_u_s_e may be given as a (floating point or + integer) number followed by a scale factor. For all + limits other than _c_p_u_t_i_m_e the default scale is `k' or + `kilobytes' (1024 bytes); a scale factor of `m' or + `megabytes' may also be used. For _c_p_u_t_i_m_e the default + scaling is `seconds', while `m' for minutes or `h' for + hours, or a time of the form `mm:ss' giving minutes and + seconds may be used. + + For both _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e names and scale factors, unambiguous + prefixes of the names suffice. + + llooggiinn + Terminate a login shell, replacing it with an instance + of //bbiinn//llooggiinn.. This is one way to log off, included for + compatibility with _s_h(1). + + llooggoouutt + Terminate a login shell. Especially useful if + _i_g_n_o_r_e_e_o_f is set. + + nniiccee + nniiccee +number + nniiccee command + nniiccee +number command + The first form sets the scheduling priority for this + shell to 4. The second form sets the priority to the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 19 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + given number. The final two forms run command at + priority 4 and _n_u_m_b_e_r respectively. The greater the + number, the less cpu the process will get. The super- + user may specify negative priority by using `nice + -number ...'. Command is always executed in a sub- + shell, and the restrictions placed on commands in sim- + ple _i_f statements apply. + + nnoohhuupp + nnoohhuupp command + The first form can be used in shell scripts to cause + hangups to be ignored for the remainder of the script. + The second form causes the specified command to be run + with hangups ignored. All processes detached with `&' + are effectively _n_o_h_u_p'_e_d. + + nnoottiiffyy + nnoottiiffyy %%job ... + Causes the shell to notify the user asynchronously when + the status of the current or specified jobs changes; + normally notification is presented before a prompt. + This is automatic if the shell variable _n_o_t_i_f_y is set. + + oonniinnttrr + oonniinnttrr - + oonniinnttrr label + Control the action of the shell on interrupts. The + first form restores the default action of the shell on + interrupts which is to terminate shell scripts or to + return to the terminal command input level. The second + form `onintr -' causes all interrupts to be ignored. + The final form causes the shell to execute a `goto + label' when an interrupt is received or a child process + terminates because it was interrupted. + + In any case, if the shell is running detached and + interrupts are being ignored, all forms of _o_n_i_n_t_r have + no meaning and interrupts continue to be ignored by the + shell and all invoked commands. + + ppooppdd + ppooppdd +n + Pops the directory stack, returning to the new top + directory. With an argument `+_n' discards the _nth + entry in the stack. The elements of the directory + stack are numbered from 0 starting at the top. + + ppuusshhdd + ppuusshhdd name + ppuusshhdd +n + With no arguments, _p_u_s_h_d exchanges the top two elements + of the directory stack. Given a _n_a_m_e argument, _p_u_s_h_d + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 20 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + changes to the new directory (ala _c_d) and pushes the + old current working directory (as in _c_s_w) onto the + directory stack. With a numeric argument, rotates the + _nth argument of the directory stack around to be the + top element and changes to it. The members of the + directory stack are numbered from the top starting at + 0. + + rreehhaasshh + Causes the internal hash table of the contents of the + directories in the _p_a_t_h variable to be recomputed. + This is needed if new commands are added to directories + in the _p_a_t_h while you are logged in. This should only + be necessary if you add commands to one of your own + directories, or if a systems programmer changes the + contents of one of the system directories. + + rreeppeeaatt count command + The specified _c_o_m_m_a_n_d which is subject to the same res- + trictions as the _c_o_m_m_a_n_d in the one line _i_f statement + above, is executed _c_o_u_n_t times. I/O redirections occur + exactly once, even if _c_o_u_n_t is 0. + + sseett + sseett name + sseett name=word + sseett name[index]=word + sseett name=(wordlist) + The first form of the command shows the value of all + shell variables. Variables which have other than a + single word as value print as a parenthesized word + list. The second form sets _n_a_m_e to the null string. + The third form sets _n_a_m_e to the single _w_o_r_d. The fourth + form sets the _i_n_d_e_x'_t_h component of name to word; this + component must already exist. The final form sets _n_a_m_e + to the list of words in _w_o_r_d_l_i_s_t. In all cases the + value is command and filename expanded. + + These arguments may be repeated to set multiple values + in a single set command. Note however, that variable + expansion happens for all arguments before any setting + occurs. + + sseetteennvv + sseetteennvv name value + sseetteennvv name + The first form lists all current environment variables. + The last form sets the value of environment variable + _n_a_m_e to be _v_a_l_u_e, a single string. The second form + sets _n_a_m_e to an empty string. The most commonly used + environment variable USER, TERM, and PATH are automati- + cally imported to and exported from the _c_s_h variables + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 21 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + _u_s_e_r, _t_e_r_m, and _p_a_t_h; there is no need to use _s_e_t_e_n_v + for these. + + sshhiifftt + sshhiifftt variable + The members of _a_r_g_v are shifted to the left, discarding + _a_r_g_v[_1]. It is an error for _a_r_g_v not to be set or to + have less than one word as value. The second form per- + forms the same function on the specified variable. + + ssoouurrccee name + ssoouurrccee --hh name + The shell reads commands from _n_a_m_e. _S_o_u_r_c_e commands may + be nested; if they are nested too deeply the shell may + run out of file descriptors. An error in a _s_o_u_r_c_e at + any level terminates all nested _s_o_u_r_c_e commands. Nor- + mally input during _s_o_u_r_c_e commands is not placed on the + history list; the -h option causes the commands to be + placed in the history list without being executed. + + ssttoopp + ssttoopp %%job ... + Stops the current or specified job which is executing + in the background. + + ssuussppeenndd + Causes the shell to stop in its tracks, much as if it + had been sent a stop signal with ^^ZZ. This is most + often used to stop shells started by _s_u(1). + + sswwiittcchh (string) + ccaassee str1: + ... + bbrreeaakkssww + ... + ddeeffaauulltt:: + ... + bbrreeaakkssww + eennddssww + Each case label is successively matched, against the + specified _s_t_r_i_n_g which is first command and filename + expanded. The file metacharacters `*', `?' and `[...]' + may be used in the case labels, which are variable + expanded. If none of the labels match before a + `default' label is found, then the execution begins + after the default label. Each case label and the + default label must appear at the beginning of a line. + The command _b_r_e_a_k_s_w causes execution to continue after + the _e_n_d_s_w. Otherwise control may fall through case + labels and default labels as in C. If no label matches + and there is no default, execution continues after the + _e_n_d_s_w. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 22 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + ttiimmee + ttiimmee command + With no argument, a summary of time used by this shell + and its children is printed. If arguments are given + the specified simple command is timed and a time sum- + mary as described under the _t_i_m_e variable is printed. + If necessary, an extra shell is created to print the + time statistic when the command completes. + + uummaasskk + uummaasskk value + The file creation mask is displayed (first form) or set + to the specified value (second form). The mask is + given in octal. Common values for the mask are 002 + giving all access to the group and read and execute + access to others or 022 giving all access except no + write access for users in the group or others. + + uunnaalliiaass pattern + All aliases whose names match the specified pattern are + discarded. Thus all aliases are removed by `unalias + *'. It is not an error for nothing to be _u_n_a_l_i_a_s_e_d. + + uunnhhaasshh + Use of the internal hash table to speed location of + executed programs is disabled. + + uunnlliimmiitt + uunnlliimmiitt _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e + uunnlliimmiitt --hh + uunnlliimmiitt --hh _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e + Removes the limitation on _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e. If no _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e is + specified, then all _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e limitations are removed. + If --hh is given, the corresponding hard limits are + removed. Only the super-user may do this. + + uunnsseett pattern + All variables whose names match the specified pattern + are removed. Thus all variables are removed by `unset + *'; this has noticeably distasteful side-effects. It + is not an error for nothing to be _u_n_s_e_t. + + uunnsseetteennvv pattern + Removes all variables whose name match the specified + pattern from the environment. See also the _s_e_t_e_n_v com- + mand above and _p_r_i_n_t_e_n_v(1). + + wwaaiitt + All background jobs are waited for. It the shell is + interactive, then an interrupt can disrupt the wait, at + which time the shell prints names and job numbers of + all jobs known to be outstanding. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 23 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + wwhhiillee (expr) + ... + eenndd + While the specified expression evaluates non-zero, the + commands between the _w_h_i_l_e and the matching end are + evaluated. _B_r_e_a_k and _c_o_n_t_i_n_u_e may be used to terminate + or continue the loop prematurely. (The _w_h_i_l_e and _e_n_d + must appear alone on their input lines.) Prompting + occurs here the first time through the loop as for the + _f_o_r_e_a_c_h statement if the input is a terminal. + + %%job + Brings the specified job into the foreground. + + %%job && + Continues the specified job in the background. + + @@ + @@ name = expr + @@ name[index] = expr + The first form prints the values of all the shell vari- + ables. The second form sets the specified _n_a_m_e to the + value of _e_x_p_r. If the expression contains `<', `>', `&' + or `|' then at least this part of the expression must + be placed within `(' `)'. The third form assigns the + value of _e_x_p_r to the _i_n_d_e_x'_t_h argument of _n_a_m_e. Both + _n_a_m_e and its _i_n_d_e_x'_t_h component must already exist. + + The operators `*=', `+=', etc are available as in C. + The space separating the name from the assignment + operator is optional. Spaces are, however, mandatory + in separating components of _e_x_p_r which would otherwise + be single words. + + Special postfix `++' and `--' operators increment and + decrement _n_a_m_e respectively, i.e. `@ i++'. + + PPrree--ddeeffiinneedd aanndd eennvviirroonnmmeenntt vvaarriiaabblleess + + The following variables have special meaning to the shell. + Of these, _a_r_g_v, _c_w_d, _h_o_m_e, _p_a_t_h, _p_r_o_m_p_t, _s_h_e_l_l and _s_t_a_t_u_s + are always set by the shell. Except for _c_w_d and _s_t_a_t_u_s this + setting occurs only at initialization; these variables will + not then be modified unless this is done explicitly by the + user. + + This shell copies the environment variable USER into the + variable _u_s_e_r, TERM into _t_e_r_m, and HOME into _h_o_m_e, and + copies these back into the environment whenever the normal + shell variables are reset. The environment variable PATH is + likewise handled; it is not necessary to worry about its + setting other than in the file ._c_s_h_r_c as inferior _c_s_h + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 24 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + processes will import the definition of _p_a_t_h from the + environment, and re-export it if you then change it. + + aarrggvv Set to the arguments to the shell, it is from + this variable that positional parameters are + substituted, i.e. `$1' is replaced by + `$argv[1]', etc. + + ccddppaatthh Gives a list of alternate directories + searched to find subdirectories in _c_h_d_i_r com- + mands. + + ccwwdd The full pathname of the current directory. + + eecchhoo Set when the --xx command line option is given. + Causes each command and its arguments to be + echoed just before it is executed. For non- + builtin commands all expansions occur before + echoing. Builtin commands are echoed before + command and filename substitution, since + these substitutions are then done selec- + tively. + + ffiilleecc Enable file name completion. + + hhiissttcchhaarrss Can be given a string value to change the + characters used in history substitution. The + first character of its value is used as the + history substitution character, replacing the + default character !. The second character of + its value replaces the character |^ in quick + substitutions. + + hhiissttoorryy Can be given a numeric value to control the + size of the history list. Any command which + has been referenced in this many events will + not be discarded. Too large values of _h_i_s_- + _t_o_r_y may run the shell out of memory. The + last executed command is always saved on the + history list. + + hhoommee The home directory of the invoker, initial- + ized from the environment. The filename + expansion of `~~' refers to this variable. + + iiggnnoorreeeeooff If set the shell ignores end-of-file from + input devices which are terminals. This + prevents shells from accidentally being + killed by control-D's. + + mmaaiill The files where the shell checks for mail. + This is done after each command completion + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 25 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + which will result in a prompt, if a specified + interval has elapsed. The shell says `You + have new mail.' if the file exists with an + access time not greater than its modify time. + + If the first word of the value of _m_a_i_l is + numeric it specifies a different mail check- + ing interval, in seconds, than the default, + which is 10 minutes. + + If multiple mail files are specified, then + the shell says `New mail in _n_a_m_e' when there + is mail in the file _n_a_m_e. + + nnoocclloobbbbeerr As described in the section on _I_n_p_u_t/_o_u_t_p_u_t, + restrictions are placed on output redirection + to insure that files are not accidentally + destroyed, and that `>>' redirections refer + to existing files. + + nnoogglloobb If set, filename expansion is inhibited. + This is most useful in shell scripts which + are not dealing with filenames, or after a + list of filenames has been obtained and + further expansions are not desirable. + + nnoonnoommaattcchh If set, it is not an error for a filename + expansion to not match any existing files; + rather the primitive pattern is returned. It + is still an error for the primitive pattern + to be malformed, i.e. `echo [' still gives + an error. + + nnoottiiffyy If set, the shell notifies asynchronously of + job completions. The default is to rather + present job completions just before printing + a prompt. + + ppaatthh Each word of the path variable specifies a + directory in which commands are to be sought + for execution. A null word specifies the + current directory. If there is no _p_a_t_h vari- + able then only full path names will execute. + The usual search path is `.', `/bin' and + `/usr/bin', but this may vary from system to + system. For the super-user the default + search path is `/etc', `/bin' and `/usr/bin'. + A shell which is given neither the --cc nor the + --tt option will normally hash the contents of + the directories in the _p_a_t_h variable after + reading ._c_s_h_r_c, and each time the _p_a_t_h vari- + able is reset. If new commands are added to + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 26 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + these directories while the shell is active, + it may be necessary to give the _r_e_h_a_s_h or the + commands may not be found. + + pprroommpptt The string which is printed before each com- + mand is read from an interactive terminal + input. If a `!' appears in the string it + will be replaced by the current event number + unless a preceding `\' is given. Default is + `% ', or `# ' for the super-user. + + ssaavveehhiisstt is given a numeric value to control the + number of entries of the history list that + are saved in ~/.history when the user logs + out. Any command which has been referenced + in this many events will be saved. During + start up the shell sources ~/.history into + the history list enabling history to be saved + across logins. Too large values of _s_a_v_e_h_i_s_t + will slow down the shell during start up. + + sshheellll The file in which the shell resides. This is + used in forking shells to interpret files + which have execute bits set, but which are + not executable by the system. (See the + description of _N_o_n-_b_u_i_l_t_i_n _C_o_m_m_a_n_d _E_x_e_c_u_t_i_o_n + below.) Initialized to the (system-dependent) + home of the shell. + + ssttaattuuss The status returned by the last command. If + it terminated abnormally, then 0200 is added + to the status. Builtin commands which fail + return exit status `1', all other builtin + commands set status `0'. + + ttiimmee Controls automatic timing of commands. If + set, then any command which takes more than + this many cpu seconds will cause a line giv- + ing user, system, and real times and a utili- + zation percentage which is the ratio of user + plus system times to real time to be printed + when it terminates. + + vveerrbboossee Set by the --vv command line option, causes the + words of each command to be printed after + history substitution. + + NNoonn--bbuuiillttiinn ccoommmmaanndd eexxeeccuuttiioonn + + When a command to be executed is found to not be a builtin + command the shell attempts to execute the command via + _e_x_e_c_v_e(2). Each word in the variable _p_a_t_h names a directory + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 27 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + from which the shell will attempt to execute the command. + If it is given neither a --cc nor a --tt option, the shell will + hash the names in these directories into an internal table + so that it will only try an _e_x_e_c in a directory if there is + a possibility that the command resides there. This greatly + speeds command location when a large number of directories + are present in the search path. If this mechanism has been + turned off (via _u_n_h_a_s_h), or if the shell was given a --cc or + --tt argument, and in any case for each directory component of + _p_a_t_h which does not begin with a `/', the shell concatenates + with the given command name to form a path name of a file + which it then attempts to execute. + + Parenthesized commands are always executed in a subshell. + Thus `(cd ; pwd) ; pwd' prints the _h_o_m_e directory; leaving + you where you were (printing this after the home directory), + while `cd ; pwd' leaves you in the _h_o_m_e directory. + Parenthesized commands are most often used to prevent _c_h_d_i_r + from affecting the current shell. + + If the file has execute permissions but is not an executable + binary to the system, then it is assumed to be a file con- + taining shell commands and a new shell is spawned to read + it. + + If there is an _a_l_i_a_s for _s_h_e_l_l then the words of the alias + will be prepended to the argument list to form the shell + command. The first word of the _a_l_i_a_s should be the full + path name of the shell (e.g. `$shell'). Note that this is a + special, late occurring, case of _a_l_i_a_s substitution, and + only allows words to be prepended to the argument list + without modification. + + AArrgguummeenntt lliisstt pprroocceessssiinngg + + If argument 0 to the shell is `-' then this is a login + shell. The flag arguments are interpreted as follows: + + --bb This flag forces a ``break'' from option processing, + causing any further shell arguments to be treated as + non-option arguments. The remaining arguments will not + be interpreted as shell options. This may be used to + pass options to a shell script without confusion or + possible subterfuge. The shell will not run a set-user + ID script without this option. + + --cc Commands are read from the (single) following argument + which must be present. Any remaining arguments are + placed in _a_r_g_v. + + --ee The shell exits if any invoked command terminates + abnormally or yields a non-zero exit status. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 28 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + --ff The shell will start faster, because it will neither + search for nor execute commands from the file `.cshrc' + in the invoker's home directory. + + --ii The shell is interactive and prompts for its top-level + input, even if it appears to not be a terminal. Shells + are interactive without this option if their inputs and + outputs are terminals. + + --nn Commands are parsed, but not executed. This aids in + syntactic checking of shell scripts. + + --ss Command input is taken from the standard input. + + --tt A single line of input is read and executed. A `\' may + be used to escape the newline at the end of this line + and continue onto another line. + + --vv Causes the _v_e_r_b_o_s_e variable to be set, with the effect + that command input is echoed after history substitu- + tion. + + --xx Causes the _e_c_h_o variable to be set, so that commands + are echoed immediately before execution. + + --VV Causes the _v_e_r_b_o_s_e variable to be set even before + `.cshrc' is executed. + + --XX Is to --xx as --VV is to --vv.. + + After processing of flag arguments, if arguments remain but + none of the --cc,, --ii,, --ss,, or --tt options was given, the first + argument is taken as the name of a file of commands to be + executed. The shell opens this file, and saves its name for + possible resubstitution by `$0'. Since many systems use + either the standard version 6 or version 7 shells whose + shell scripts are not compatible with this shell, the shell + will execute such a `standard' shell if the first character + of a script is not a `#', i.e. if the script does not start + with a comment. Remaining arguments initialize the variable + _a_r_g_v. + + SSiiggnnaall hhaannddlliinngg + + The shell normally ignores _q_u_i_t signals. Jobs running + detached (either by `&' or the _b_g or %%...... && commands) are + immune to signals generated from the keyboard, including + hangups. Other signals have the values which the shell + inherited from its parent. The shells handling of inter- + rupts and terminate signals in shell scripts can be con- + trolled by _o_n_i_n_t_r. Login shells catch the _t_e_r_m_i_n_a_t_e signal; + otherwise this signal is passed on to children from the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 29 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + state in the shell's parent. In no case are interrupts + allowed when a login shell is reading the file `.logout'. + +AAUUTTHHOORR + William Joy. Job control and directory stack features first + implemented by J.E. Kulp of I.I.A.S.A, Laxenburg, Austria, + with different syntax than that used now. File name comple- + tion code written by Ken Greer, HP Labs. + +FFIILLEESS + ~/.cshrc Read at beginning of execution by each shell. + ~/.login Read by login shell, after `.cshrc' at login. + ~/.logout Read by login shell, at logout. + /bin/sh Standard shell, for shell scripts not starting with a `#'. + /tmp/sh* Temporary file for `<<'. + /etc/passwd Source of home directories for `~name'. + +LLIIMMIITTAATTIIOONNSS + Words can be no longer than 1024 characters. The system + limits argument lists to 10240 characters. The number of + arguments to a command which involves filename expansion is + limited to 1/6'th the number of characters allowed in an + argument list. Command substitutions may substitute no more + characters than are allowed in an argument list. To detect + looping, the shell restricts the number of _a_l_i_a_s substitu- + tions on a single line to 20. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + sh(1), access(2), execve(2), fork(2), killpg(2), pipe(2), + sigvec(2), umask(2), setrlimit(2), wait(2), tty(4), + a.out(5), environ(7), `An introduction to the C shell' + +BBUUGGSS + When a command is restarted from a stop, the shell prints + the directory it started in if this is different from the + current directory; this can be misleading (i.e. wrong) as + the job may have changed directories internally. + + Shell builtin functions are not stoppable/restartable. Com- + mand sequences of the form `a ; b ; c' are also not handled + gracefully when stopping is attempted. If you suspend `b', + the shell will then immediately execute `c'. This is espe- + cially noticeable if this expansion results from an _a_l_i_a_s. + It suffices to place the sequence of commands in ()'s to + force it to a subshell, i.e. `( a ; b ; c )'. + + Control over tty output after processes are started is prim- + itive; perhaps this will inspire someone to work on a good + virtual terminal interface. In a virtual terminal interface + much more interesting things could be done with output con- + trol. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 30 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + Alias substitution is most often used to clumsily simulate + shell procedures; shell procedures should be provided rather + than aliases. + + Commands within loops, prompted for by `?', are not placed + in the _h_i_s_t_o_r_y list. Control structure should be parsed + rather than being recognized as built-in commands. This + would allow control commands to be placed anywhere, to be + combined with `|', and to be used with `&' and `;' metasyn- + tax. + + It should be possible to use the `:' modifiers on the output + of command substitutions. All and more than one `:' modif- + ier should be allowed on `$' substitutions. + + The way the ffiilleecc facility is implemented is ugly and expen- + sive. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 31 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/ctags.0 b/usr/man/cat1/ctags.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..12a7bc2640 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/ctags.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +CTAGS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CTAGS(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + ctags - create a tags file + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ccttaaggss [ --BBFFaaddttuuwwvvxx ] [ --ff _t_a_g_s_f_i_l_e ] name ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _C_t_a_g_s makes a tags file for _e_x(1) from the specified C, Pas- + cal, Fortran, YACC, lex, and lisp sources. A tags file + gives the locations of specified objects in a group of + files. Each line of the tags file contains the object name, + the file in which it is defined, and a search pattern for + the object definition, separated by white-space. Using the + _t_a_g_s file, _e_x(1) can quickly locate these object defini- + tions. Depending on the options provided to _c_t_a_g_s, objects + will consist of subroutines, typedefs, defines, structs, + enums and unions. + + Yacc and lex files each have a special tag. _Y_y_p_a_r_s_e is the + start of the second section of the yacc file, and _y_y_l_e_x is + the start of the second section of the lex file. + + If the --xx flag is given, _c_t_a_g_s produces a list of object + names, the line number and file name on which each is + defined, as well as the text of that line and prints this on + the standard output. This is a simple index which can be + printed out as an off-line readable function index. + + If the --vv flag is given, an index of the form expected by + _v_g_r_i_n_d(1) is produced on the standard output. This listing + contains the object name, file name, and page number (assum- + ing 64 line pages). Since the output will be sorted into + lexicographic order, it may be desired to run the output + through ssoorrtt --ff. Sample use: + ctags -v files | sort -f > index + vgrind -x index + + Normally _c_t_a_g_s places the tag descriptions in a file called + _t_a_g_s; this may be overridden with the --ff option. + + Files whose names end in ..cc or ..hh are assumed to be C source + files and are searched for C style routine and macro defini- + tions. Files whose names end in ..yy are assumed to be YACC + source files. Files whose names end in ..ll are assumed to be + lisp files if their first non-blank character is `;', `(', + or `[', otherwise, they are treated as lex files. Other + files are first examined to see if they contain any Pascal + or Fortran routine definitions, and, if not, are searched + for C style definitions. + + Other options are: + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 March 16, 1987 1 + + + + + + +CTAGS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CTAGS(1) + + + + --FF use forward searching patterns (/.../) (the default). + + --BB use backward searching patterns (?...?). + + --aa append to _t_a_g_s file. + + --dd create tags for #_d_e_f_i_n_e_s that don't take arguments; + #_d_e_f_i_n_e_s that take arguments are tagged automatically. + + --tt create tags for typedefs, structs, unions, and enums. + + --ww suppress warning diagnostics. + + --uu update the specified files in the _t_a_g_s file, that is, + all references to them are deleted, and the new values + are appended to the file. (Beware: this option is + implemented in a way which is rather slow; it is usu- + ally faster to simply rebuild the _t_a_g_s file.) + + The tag _m_a_i_n is treated specially in C programs. The tag + formed is created by prepending _M to the name of the file, + with the trailing ..cc and any leading pathname components + removed. This makes use of _c_t_a_g_s practical in directories + with more than one program. + +FFIILLEESS + tags default output tags file + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + _C_t_a_g_s exits with a value of 1 if an error occurred, where + duplicate objects are not considered errors, 0 otherwise. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + ex(1), vi(1) + +AAUUTTHHOORR + Ken Arnold; FORTRAN added by Jim Kleckner; Bill Joy added + Pascal and --xx, replacing _c_x_r_e_f; C typedefs added by Ed + Pelegri-Llopart. + +BBUUGGSS + Recognition of ffuunnccttiioonnss, ssuubbrroouuttiinneess and pprroocceedduurreess for + FORTRAN and Pascal is done is a very simpleminded way. No + attempt is made to deal with block structure; if you have + two Pascal procedures in different blocks with the same name + you lose. _C_t_a_g_s doesn't understand about Pascal types. + + The method of deciding whether to look for C, Pascal or FOR- + TRAN functions is a hack. + + _C_t_a_g_s relies on the input being well formed, and any syntac- + tical errors will completely confuse it. It also finds some + + + +Printed 7/9/88 March 16, 1987 2 + + + + + + +CTAGS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CTAGS(1) + + + + legal syntax confusing; for example, as it doesn't under- + stand #_i_f_d_e_f's, (incidentally, that's a feature, not a bug) + any code with unbalanced braces inside #_i_f_d_e_f's will cause + it to become somewhat disoriented. In a similar fashion, + multiple line changes within a definition will cause it to + enter the last line of the object, rather than the first, as + the searching pattern. The last line of multiple line + _t_y_p_e_d_e_f's will similarly be noted. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 March 16, 1987 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/cu.0 b/usr/man/cat1/cu.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3cb1c859d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/cu.0 @@ -0,0 +1,396 @@ + + + +TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C) + + + +NNAAMMEE + tip, cu - connect to a remote system + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttiipp [ --vv ] [ --_s_p_e_e_d ] system-name + ttiipp [ --vv ] [ --_s_p_e_e_d ] phone-number + ccuu phone-number [ --tt ] [ --ss _s_p_e_e_d ] [ --aa _a_c_u ] [ --ll _l_i_n_e ] + [ --## ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_i_p and _c_u establish a full-duplex connection to another + machine, giving the appearance of being logged in directly + on the remote cpu. It goes without saying that you must + have a login on the machine (or equivalent) to which you + wish to connect. The preferred interface is _t_i_p. The _c_u + interface is included for those people attached to the + ``call UNIX'' command of version 7. This manual page + describes only _t_i_p. + + Typed characters are normally transmitted directly to the + remote machine (which does the echoing as well). A tilde + (`~') appearing as the first character of a line is an + escape signal; the following are recognized: + + ~~^^DD ~~.. Drop the connection and exit (you may still be + logged in on the remote machine). + + ~~cc [_n_a_m_e] + Change directory to name (no argument implies + change to your home directory). + + ~~!! Escape to a shell (exiting the shell will return + you to tip). + + ~~>> Copy file from local to remote. _T_i_p prompts for + the name of a local file to transmit. + + ~~<< Copy file from remote to local. _T_i_p prompts first + for the name of the file to be sent, then for a + command to be executed on the remote machine. + + ~~pp _f_r_o_m [ _t_o ] + Send a file to a remote UNIX host. The put com- + mand causes the remote UNIX system to run the com- + mand string ``cat > 'to''', while _t_i_p sends it the + ``from'' file. If the ``to'' file isn't specified + the ``from'' file name is used. This command is + actually a UNIX specific version of the ``~>'' + command. + + ~~tt _f_r_o_m [ _t_o ] + Take a file from a remote UNIX host. As in the put + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1 + + + + + + +TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C) + + + + command the ``to'' file defaults to the ``from'' + file name if it isn't specified. The remote host + executes the command string ``cat 'from';echo ^A'' + to send the file to _t_i_p. + + ~~|| Pipe the output from a remote command to a local + UNIX process. The command string sent to the + local UNIX system is processed by the shell. + + ~~$$ Pipe the output from a local UNIX process to the + remote host. The command string sent to the local + UNIX system is processed by the shell. + + ~~## Send a BREAK to the remote system. For systems + which don't support the necessary _i_o_c_t_l call the + break is simulated by a sequence of line speed + changes and DEL characters. + + ~~ss Set a variable (see the discussion below). + + ~~^^ZZ Stop _t_i_p (only available with job control). + + ~~^^YY Stop only the ``local side'' of _t_i_p (only avail- + able with job control); the ``remote side'' of + _t_i_p, the side that displays output from the remote + host, is left running. + + ~~?? Get a summary of the tilde escapes + + + _T_i_p uses the file /etc/remote to find how to reach a partic- + ular system and to find out how it should operate while + talking to the system; refer to _r_e_m_o_t_e(5) for a full + description. Each system has a default baud rate with which + to establish a connection. If this value is not suitable, + the baud rate to be used may be specified on the command + line, e.g. ``tip -300 mds''. + + When _t_i_p establishes a connection it sends out a connection + message to the remote system; the default value, if any, is + defined in /etc/remote. + + When _t_i_p prompts for an argument (e.g. during setup of a + file transfer) the line typed may be edited with the stan- + dard erase and kill characters. A null line in response to + a prompt, or an interrupt, will abort the dialogue and + return you to the remote machine. + + _T_i_p guards against multiple users connecting to a remote + system by opening modems and terminal lines with exclusive + access, and by honoring the locking protocol used by + _u_u_c_p(1C). + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2 + + + + + + +TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C) + + + + During file transfers _t_i_p provides a running count of the + number of lines transferred. When using the ~> and ~< com- + mands, the ``eofread'' and ``eofwrite'' variables are used + to recognize end-of-file when reading, and specify end-of- + file when writing (see below). File transfers normally + depend on tandem mode for flow control. If the remote sys- + tem does not support tandem mode, ``echocheck'' may be set + to indicate _t_i_p should synchronize with the remote system on + the echo of each transmitted character. + + When _t_i_p must dial a phone number to connect to a system it + will print various messages indicating its actions. _T_i_p + supports the DEC DN-11 and Racal-Vadic 831 auto-call-units; + the DEC DF02 and DF03, Ventel 212+, Racal-Vadic 3451, and + Bizcomp 1031 and 1032 integral call unit/modems. + + VVAARRIIAABBLLEESS + + _T_i_p maintains a set of _v_a_r_i_a_b_l_e_s which control its opera- + tion. Some of these variable are read-only to normal users + (root is allowed to change anything of interest). Variables + may be displayed and set through the ``s'' escape. The syn- + tax for variables is patterned after _v_i(1) and _M_a_i_l(1). + Supplying ``all'' as an argument to the set command displays + all variables readable by the user. Alternatively, the user + may request display of a particular variable by attaching a + `?' to the end. For example ``escape?'' displays the + current escape character. + + Variables are numeric, string, character, or boolean values. + Boolean variables are set merely by specifying their name; + they may be reset by prepending a `!' to the name. Other + variable types are set by concatenating an `=' and the + value. The entire assignment must not have any blanks in + it. A single set command may be used to interrogate as well + as set a number of variables. Variables may be initialized + at run time by placing set commands (without the ``~s'' pre- + fix in a file ._t_i_p_r_c in one's home directory). The --vv + option causes _t_i_p to display the sets as they are made. + Certain common variables have abbreviations. The following + is a list of common variables, their abbreviations, and + their default values. + + bbeeaauuttiiffyy + (bool) Discard unprintable characters when a session is + being scripted; abbreviated _b_e. + + bbaauuddrraattee + (num) The baud rate at which the connection was esta- + blished; abbreviated _b_a. + + ddiiaallttiimmeeoouutt + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3 + + + + + + +TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C) + + + + (num) When dialing a phone number, the time (in + seconds) to wait for a connection to be established; + abbreviated _d_i_a_l. + + eecchhoocchheecckk + (bool) Synchronize with the remote host during file + transfer by waiting for the echo of the last character + transmitted; default is _o_f_f. + + eeooffrreeaadd + (str) The set of characters which signify and end-of- + tranmission during a ~< file transfer command; abbrevi- + ated _e_o_f_r. + + eeooffwwrriittee + (str) The string sent to indicate end-of-transmission + during a ~> file transfer command; abbreviated _e_o_f_w. + + eeooll + (str) The set of characters which indicate an end-of- + line. _T_i_p will recognize escape characters only after + an end-of-line. + + eessccaappee + (char) The command prefix (escape) character; abbrevi- + ated _e_s; default value is `~'. + + eexxcceeppttiioonnss + (str) The set of characters which should not be dis- + carded due to the beautification switch; abbreviated + _e_x; default value is ``\t\n\f\b''. + + ffoorrccee + (char) The character used to force literal data + transmission; abbreviated _f_o; default value is `^P'. + + ffrraammeessiizzee + (num) The amount of data (in bytes) to buffer between + file system writes when receiving files; abbreviated + _f_r. + + hhoosstt + (str) The name of the host to which you are connected; + abbreviated _h_o. + + pprroommpptt + (char) The character which indicates and end-of-line on + the remote host; abbreviated _p_r; default value is `\n'. + This value is used to synchronize during data + transfers. The count of lines transferred during a + file transfer command is based on recipt of this char- + acter. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4 + + + + + + +TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C) + + + + rraaiissee + (bool) Upper case mapping mode; abbreviated _r_a; default + value is _o_f_f. When this mode is enabled, all lower + case letters will be mapped to upper case by _t_i_p for + transmission to the remote machine. + + rraaiisseecchhaarr + (char) The input character used to toggle upper case + mapping mode; abbreviated _r_c; default value is `^A'. + + rreeccoorrdd + (str) The name of the file in which a session script is + recorded; abbreviated _r_e_c; default value is + ``tip.record''. + + ssccrriipptt + (bool) Session scripting mode; abbreviated _s_c; default + is _o_f_f. When _s_c_r_i_p_t is _t_r_u_e, _t_i_p will record every- + thing transmitted by the remote machine in the script + record file specified in _r_e_c_o_r_d. If the _b_e_a_u_t_i_f_y + switch is on, only printable ASCII characters will be + included in the script file (those characters betwee + 040 and 0177). The variable _e_x_c_e_p_t_i_o_n_s is used to + indicate characters which are an exception to the nor- + mal beautification rules. + + ttaabbeexxppaanndd + (bool) Expand tabs to spaces during file transfers; + abbreviated _t_a_b; default value is _f_a_l_s_e. Each tab is + expanded to 8 spaces. + + vveerrbboossee + (bool) Verbose mode; abbreviated _v_e_r_b; default is _t_r_u_e. + When verbose mode is enabled, _t_i_p prints messages while + dialing, shows the current number of lines transferred + during a file transfer operations, and more. + + SSHHEELLLL + (str) The name of the shell to use for the ~! command; + default value is ``/bin/sh'', or taken from the + environment. + + HHOOMMEE + (str) The home directory to use for the ~c command; + default value is taken from the environment. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/remote global system descriptions + /etc/phones global phone number data base + ${REMOTE} private system descriptions + ${PHONES} private phone numbers + ~/.tiprc initialization file. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 5 + + + + + + +TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C) + + + + /usr/spool/uucp/LCK..* lock file to avoid conflicts with _u_u_c_p + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Diagnostics are, hopefully, self explanatory. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + remote(5), phones(5) + +BBUUGGSS + The full set of variables is undocumented and should, prob- + ably, be paired down. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 6 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/date.0 b/usr/man/cat1/date.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ed5b7457b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/date.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +DATE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DATE(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + date - print and set the date + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ddaattee [-nu] [-d dst] [-t minutes_west] [yymmddhhmm [..ss] ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + If no arguments are given, the current date and time are + printed. Providing an argument will set the desired date; + only the superuser can set the date. The -_d and -_t flags set + the kernel's values for daylight savings time and minutes + west of GMT. If _d_s_t is non-zero, future calls to _g_e_t_t_i_m_e_o_f_- + _d_a_y(2) will return a non-zero _t_z__d_s_t_t_i_m_e. _M_i_n_u_t_e_s__w_e_s_t pro- + vides the number of minutes returned by future calls to _g_e_t_- + _t_i_m_e_o_f_d_a_y(2) in _t_z__m_i_n_u_t_e_s_w_e_s_t. The -_u flag is used to + display or set the date in GMT (universal) time. _y_y + represents the last two digits of the year; the first _m_m is + the month number; _d_d is the day number; _h_h is the hour + number (24 hour system); the second _m_m is the minute number; + .._s_s is optional and represents the seconds. For example: + + date 8506131627 + + sets the date to June 13 1985, 4:27 PM. The year, month and + day may be omitted; the default values will be the current + ones. The system operates in GMT. _D_a_t_e takes care of the + conversion to and from local standard and daylight-saving + time. + + If _t_i_m_e_d(_8) is running to synchronize the clocks of machines + in a local area network, _d_a_t_e sets the time globally on all + those machines unless the --nn option is given. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/adm/wtmp to record time-setting. In /usr/adm/messages, + _d_a_t_e records the name of the user setting the time. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + gettimeofday(2), utmp(5), timed(8), + _T_S_P: _T_h_e _T_i_m_e _S_y_n_c_h_r_o_n_i_z_a_t_i_o_n _P_r_o_t_o_c_o_l _f_o_r _U_N_I_X _4._3_B_S_D, R. + Gusella and S. Zatti + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Exit status is 0 on success, 1 on complete failure to set + the date, and 2 on successfully setting the local date but + failing globally. + + Occasionally, when _t_i_m_e_d synchronizes the time on many + hosts, the setting of a new time value may require more than + a few seconds. On these occasions, _d_a_t_e prints: `Network + time being set'. The message `Communication error with + timed' occurs when the communication between _d_a_t_e and _t_i_m_e_d + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 1, 1987 1 + + + + + + +DATE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DATE(1) + + + + fails. + +BBUUGGSS + The system attempts to keep the date in a format closely + compatible with VMS. VMS, however, uses local time (rather + than GMT) and does not understand daylight-saving time. + Thus, if you use both UNIX and VMS, VMS will be running on + GMT. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 1, 1987 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/dbx.0 b/usr/man/cat1/dbx.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..abe0a5b5da --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/dbx.0 @@ -0,0 +1,594 @@ + + + +DBX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DBX(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + dbx - debugger + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ddbbxx [ --rr ] [ --ii ] [ --kk ] [ --II _d_i_r ] [ --cc _f_i_l_e ] [ _o_b_j_f_i_l_e [ + _c_o_r_e_d_u_m_p ]] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _D_b_x is a tool for source level debugging and execution of + programs under UNIX. The _o_b_j_f_i_l_e is an object file produced + by a compiler with the appropriate flag (usually ``-g'') + specified to produce symbol information in the object file. + Currently, _c_c(1), _f_7_7(1), _p_c(1), and the DEC Western + Research Laboratory Modula-2 compiler, _m_o_d(l), produce the + appropriate source information. The machine level facili- + ties of _d_b_x can be used on any program. + + The object file contains a symbol table that includes the + name of the all the source files translated by the compiler + to create it. These files are available for perusal while + using the debugger. + + If a file named ``core'' exists in the current directory or + a _c_o_r_e_d_u_m_p file is specified, _d_b_x can be used to examine the + state of the program when it faulted. + + If the file ``.dbxinit'' exists in the current directory + then the debugger commands in it are executed. _D_b_x also + checks for a ``.dbxinit'' in the user's home directory if + there isn't one in the current directory. + + The command line options and their meanings are: + + --rr Execute _o_b_j_f_i_l_e immediately. If it terminates suc- + cessfully _d_b_x exits. Otherwise the reason for ter- + mination will be reported and the user offered the + option of entering the debugger or letting the pro- + gram fault. _D_b_x will read from ``/dev/tty'' when --rr + is specified and standard input is not a terminal. + + --ii Force _d_b_x to act as though standard input is a ter- + minal. + + --kk Map memory addresses, useful for kernel debugging. + + --II _d_i_r Add _d_i_r to the list of directories that are searched + when looking for a source file. Normally _d_b_x looks + for source files in the current directory and in the + directory where _o_b_j_f_i_l_e is located. The directory + search path can also be set with the uussee command. + + --cc _f_i_l_e Execute the _d_b_x commands in the _f_i_l_e before reading + + + +Printed 7/9/88 January 12, 1986 1 + + + + + + +DBX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DBX(1) + + + + from standard input. + + + Unless --rr is specified, _d_b_x just prompts and waits for a + command. + + EExxeeccuuttiioonn aanndd TTrraacciinngg CCoommmmaannddss + + + rruunn [_a_r_g_s] [<< _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e] [>> _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e] + rreerruunn [_a_r_g_s] [<< _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e] [>> _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e] + Start executing _o_b_j_f_i_l_e, passing _a_r_g_s as command line + arguments; << or >> can be used to redirect input or out- + put in the usual manner. When rreerruunn is used without + any arguments the previous argument list is passed to + the program; otherwise it is identical to rruunn. If + _o_b_j_f_i_l_e has been written since the last time the sym- + bolic information was read in, _d_b_x will read in the new + information. + + ttrraaccee [iinn _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e/_f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n] [iiff _c_o_n_d_i_t_i_o_n] + ttrraaccee _s_o_u_r_c_e-_l_i_n_e-_n_u_m_b_e_r [iiff _c_o_n_d_i_t_i_o_n] + ttrraaccee _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e/_f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n [iinn _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e/_f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n] [iiff _c_o_n_d_i_t_i_o_n] + ttrraaccee _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n aatt _s_o_u_r_c_e-_l_i_n_e-_n_u_m_b_e_r [iiff _c_o_n_d_i_t_i_o_n] + ttrraaccee _v_a_r_i_a_b_l_e [iinn _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e/_f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n] [iiff _c_o_n_d_i_t_i_o_n] + Have tracing information printed when the program is + executed. A number is associated with the command that + is used to turn the tracing off (see the ddeelleettee com- + mand). + + The first argument describes what is to be traced. If + it is a _s_o_u_r_c_e-_l_i_n_e-_n_u_m_b_e_r, then the line is printed + immediately prior to being executed. Source line + numbers in a file other than the current one must be + preceded by the name of the file in quotes and a colon, + e.g. "mumble.p":17. + + If the argument is a procedure or function name then + every time it is called, information is printed telling + what routine called it, from what source line it was + called, and what parameters were passed to it. In + addition, its return is noted, and if it's a function + then the value it is returning is also printed. + + If the argument is an _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n with an aatt clause then + the value of the expression is printed whenever the + identified source line is reached. + + If the argument is a variable then the name and value + of the variable is printed whenever it changes. Execu- + tion is substantially slower during this form of trac- + ing. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 January 12, 1986 2 + + + + + + +DBX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DBX(1) + + + + If no argument is specified then all source lines are + printed before they are executed. Execution is sub- + stantially slower during this form of tracing. + + The clause ``iinn _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e/_f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n'' restricts tracing + information to be printed only while executing inside + the given procedure or function. + + _C_o_n_d_i_t_i_o_n is a boolean expression and is evaluated + prior to printing the tracing information; if it is + false then the information is not printed. + + ssttoopp iiff _c_o_n_d_i_t_i_o_n + ssttoopp aatt _s_o_u_r_c_e-_l_i_n_e-_n_u_m_b_e_r [iiff _c_o_n_d_i_t_i_o_n] + ssttoopp iinn _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e/_f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n [iiff _c_o_n_d_i_t_i_o_n] + ssttoopp _v_a_r_i_a_b_l_e [iiff _c_o_n_d_i_t_i_o_n] + Stop execution when the given line is reached, pro- + cedure or function called, variable changed, or condi- + tion true. + + ssttaattuuss [>> _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e] + Print out the currently active ttrraaccee and ssttoopp commands. + + ddeelleettee _c_o_m_m_a_n_d-_n_u_m_b_e_r ... + The traces or stops corresponding to the given numbers + are removed. The numbers associated with traces and + stops are printed by the ssttaattuuss command. + + ccaattcchh _n_u_m_b_e_r + ccaattcchh _s_i_g_n_a_l-_n_a_m_e + iiggnnoorree _n_u_m_b_e_r + iiggnnoorree _s_i_g_n_a_l-_n_a_m_e + Start or stop trapping a signal before it is sent to + the program. This is useful when a program being + debugged handles signals such as interrupts. A signal + may be specified by number or by a name (e.g., SIGINT). + Signal names are case insensitive and the ``SIG'' pre- + fix is optional. By default all signals are trapped + except SIGCONT, SIGCHILD, SIGALRM and SIGKILL. + + ccoonntt _i_n_t_e_g_e_r + ccoonntt _s_i_g_n_a_l-_n_a_m_e + Continue execution from where it stopped. If a signal + is specified, the process continues as though it + received the signal. Otherwise, the process is contin- + ued as though it had not been stopped. + + Execution cannot be continued if the process has ``fin- + ished'', that is, called the standard procedure ``exit''. + _D_b_x does not allow the process to exit, thereby letting the + user to examine the program state. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 January 12, 1986 3 + + + + + + +DBX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DBX(1) + + + + sstteepp Execute one source line. + + nneexxtt Execute up to the next source line. The difference + between this and sstteepp is that if the line contains a + call to a procedure or function the sstteepp command will + stop at the beginning of that block, while the nneexxtt + command will not. + + rreettuurrnn [_p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e] + Continue until a return to _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e is executed, or + until the current procedure returns if none is speci- + fied. + + ccaallll _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e(_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s) + Execute the object code associated with the named pro- + cedure or function. + + + PPrriinnttiinngg VVaarriiaabblleess aanndd EExxpprreessssiioonnss + + + Names are resolved first using the static scope of the + current function, then using the dynamic scope if the name + is not defined in the static scope. If static and dynamic + searches do not yield a result, an arbitrary symbol is + chosen and the message ``[using _q_u_a_l_i_f_i_e_d _n_a_m_e]'' is + printed. The name resolution procedure may be overridden by + qualifying an identifier with a block name, e.g., + ``_m_o_d_u_l_e._v_a_r_i_a_b_l_e''. For C, source files are treated as + modules named by the file name without ``.c''. + + Expressions are specified with an approximately common sub- + set of C and Pascal (or equivalently Modula-2) syntax. + Indirection can be denoted using either a prefix ``*'' or a + postfix ``^'' and array expressions are subscripted by + brackets (``[ ]''). The field reference operator (``.'') + can be used with pointers as well as records, making the C + operator ``->'' unnecessary (although it is supported). + + Types of expressions are checked; the type of an expression + may be overridden by using ``_t_y_p_e-_n_a_m_e(_e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n)''. When + there is no corresponding named type the special constructs + ``&_t_y_p_e-_n_a_m_e'' and ``$$_t_a_g-_n_a_m_e'' can be used to represent a + pointer to a named type or C structure tag. + + + aassssiiggnn _v_a_r_i_a_b_l_e == _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n + Assign the value of the expression to the variable. + + dduummpp [_p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e] [>> _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e] + Print the names and values of variables in the given + procedure, or the current one if none is specified. If + + + +Printed 7/9/88 January 12, 1986 4 + + + + + + +DBX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DBX(1) + + + + the procedure given is ``.'', then the all active vari- + ables are dumped. + + pprriinntt _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n [,, _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n ...] + Print out the values of the expressions. + + wwhhaattiiss _n_a_m_e + Print the declaration of the given name, which may be + qualified with block names as above. + + wwhhiicchh _i_d_e_n_t_i_f_i_e_r + Print the full qualification of the given identifer, + i.e. the outer blocks that the identifier is associ- + ated with. + + uupp [_c_o_u_n_t] + ddoowwnn [_c_o_u_n_t] + Move the current function, which is used for resolving + names, up or down the stack _c_o_u_n_t levels. The default + _c_o_u_n_t is 1. + + wwhheerree + Print out a list of the active procedures and function. + + wwhheerreeiiss _i_d_e_n_t_i_f_i_e_r + Print the full qualification of all the symbols whose + name matches the given identifier. The order in which + the symbols are printed is not meaningful. + + + AAcccceessssiinngg SSoouurrccee FFiilleess + + + /_r_e_g_u_l_a_r _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n[/] + ?_r_e_g_u_l_a_r _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n[?] + Search forward or backward in the current source file + for the given pattern. + + eeddiitt [_f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e] + eeddiitt _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e/_f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n-_n_a_m_e + Invoke an editor on _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e or the current source file + if none is specified. If a _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e or _f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n name + is specified, the editor is invoked on the file that + contains it. Which editor is invoked by default + depends on the installation. The default can be over- + ridden by setting the environment variable EDITOR to + the name of the desired editor. + + ffiillee [_f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e] + Change the current source file name to _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e. If + none is specified then the current source file name is + printed. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 January 12, 1986 5 + + + + + + +DBX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DBX(1) + + + + ffuunncc [_p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e/_f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n] + Change the current function. If none is specified then + print the current function. Changing the current func- + tion implicitly changes the current source file to the + one that contains the function; it also changes the + current scope used for name resolution. + + lliisstt [_s_o_u_r_c_e-_l_i_n_e-_n_u_m_b_e_r [,, _s_o_u_r_c_e-_l_i_n_e-_n_u_m_b_e_r]] + lliisstt _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e/_f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n + List the lines in the current source file from the + first line number to the second inclusive. If no lines + are specified, the next 10 lines are listed. If the + name of a procedure or function is given lines _n-_k to + _n+_k are listed where _n is the first statement in the + procedure or function and _k is small. + + uussee _d_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y-_l_i_s_t + Set the list of directories to be searched when looking + for source files. + + + CCoommmmaanndd AAlliiaasseess aanndd VVaarriiaabblleess + + + aalliiaass _n_a_m_e _n_a_m_e + aalliiaass _n_a_m_e ``_s_t_r_i_n_g'' + aalliiaass _n_a_m_e (_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s) ``_s_t_r_i_n_g'' + When commands are processed, dbx first checks to see if + the word is an alias for either a command or a string. + If it is an alias, then dbx treats the input as though + the corresponding string (with values substituted for + any parameters) had been entered. For example, to + define an alias ``rr'' for the command ``rerun'', one + can say + + alias rr rerun + + To define an alias called ``b'' that sets a stop at a + particular line one can say + + alias b(x) ``stop at x'' + + Subsequently, the command ``b(12)'' will expand to + ``stop at 12''. + + sseett _n_a_m_e [= _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n] + The sseett command defines values for debugger variables. + The names of these variables cannot conflict with names + in the program being debugged, and are expanded to the + corresponding expression within other commands. The + following variables have a special meaning: + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 January 12, 1986 6 + + + + + + +DBX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DBX(1) + + + + $frame + Setting this variable to an address causes dbx + to use the stack frame pointed to by the + address for doing stack traces and accessing + local variables. This facility is of particu- + lar use for kernel debugging. + + $hexchars + $hexints + $hexoffsets + $hexstrings + When set, dbx prints out out characters, + integers, offsets from registers, or character + pointers respectively in hexadecimal. + + $listwindow + The value of this variable specifies the number + of lines to list around a function or when the + lliisstt command is given without any parameters. + Its default value is 10. + + $mapaddrs + Setting (unsetting) this variable causes dbx to + start (stop) mapping addresses. As with + ``$frame'', this is useful for kernel debug- + ging. + + $unsafecall + $unsafeassign + When ``$unsafecall'' is set, strict type check- + ing is turned off for arguments to subroutine + or function calls (_e._g. in the ccaallll statement). + When ``$unsafeassign'' is set, strict type + checking between the two sides of an aassssiiggnn + statement is turned off. These variables + should be used only with great care, because + they severely limit dbx's usefulness for + detecting errors. + + uunnaalliiaass _n_a_m_e + Remove the alias with the given name. + + uunnsseett _n_a_m_e + Delete the debugger variable associated with _n_a_m_e. + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 January 12, 1986 7 + + + + + + +DBX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DBX(1) + + + + MMaacchhiinnee LLeevveell CCoommmmaannddss + + + ttrraacceeii [_a_d_d_r_e_s_s] [iiff _c_o_n_d] + ttrraacceeii [_v_a_r_i_a_b_l_e] [aatt _a_d_d_r_e_s_s] [iiff _c_o_n_d] + ssttooppii [_a_d_d_r_e_s_s] [iiff _c_o_n_d] + ssttooppii [aatt] [_a_d_d_r_e_s_s] [iiff _c_o_n_d] + Turn on tracing or set a stop using a machine instruc- + tion address. + + sstteeppii + nneexxttii + Single step as in sstteepp or nneexxtt, but do a single + instruction rather than source line. + + _a_d_d_r_e_s_s ,,_a_d_d_r_e_s_s// [_m_o_d_e] + _a_d_d_r_e_s_s // [_c_o_u_n_t] [_m_o_d_e] + Print the contents of memory starting at the first + _a_d_d_r_e_s_s and continuing up to the second _a_d_d_r_e_s_s or + until _c_o_u_n_t items are printed. If the address is + ``.'', the address following the one printed most + recently is used. The _m_o_d_e specifies how memory is to + be printed; if it is omitted the previous mode speci- + fied is used. The initial mode is ``X''. The follow- + ing modes are supported: + + ii print the machine instruction + dd print a short word in decimal + DD print a long word in decimal + oo print a short word in octal + OO print a long word in octal + xx print a short word in hexadecimal + XX print a long word in hexadecimal + bb print a byte in octal + cc print a byte as a character + ss print a string of characters terminated by a null + byte + ff print a single precision real number + gg print a double precision real number + + + Symbolic addresses are specified by preceding the name with + an ``&''. Registers are denoted by ``$rN'' where N is the + number of the register. Addresses may be expressions made + up of other addresses and the operators ``+'', ``-'', and + indirection (unary ``*''). + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 January 12, 1986 8 + + + + + + +DBX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DBX(1) + + + + MMiisscceellllaanneeoouuss CCoommmmaannddss + + + ggrriippee + Invoke a mail program to send a message to the person + in charge of _d_b_x. + + hheellpp Print out a synopsis of _d_b_x commands. + + qquuiitt Exit _d_b_x. + + sshh _c_o_m_m_a_n_d-_l_i_n_e + Pass the command line to the shell for execution. The + SHELL environment variable determines which shell is + used. + + ssoouurrccee _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e + Read _d_b_x commands from the given _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e. + +FFIILLEESS + a.out object file + .dbxinit initial commands + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + cc(1), f77(1), pc(1), mod(l) + +CCOOMMMMEENNTTSS + _D_b_x suffers from the same ``multiple include'' malady as did + _s_d_b. If you have a program consisting of a number of object + files and each is built from source files that include + header files, the symbolic information for the header files + is replicated in each object file. Since about one debugger + start-up is done for each link, having the linker (ld) re- + organize the symbol information would not save much time, + though it would reduce some of the disk space used. + + This problem is an artifact of the unrestricted semantics of + #include's in C; for example an include file can contain + static declarations that are separate entities for each file + in which they are included. However, even with Modula-2 + there is a substantial amount of duplication of symbol + information necessary for inter-module type checking. + + Some problems remain with the support for individual + languages. Fortran problems include: inability to assign to + logical, logical*2, complex and double complex variables; + inability to represent parameter constants which are not + type integer or real; peculiar representation for the values + of dummy procedures (the value shown for a dummy procedure + is actually the first few bytes of the procedure text; to + find the location of the procedure, use ``&'' to take the + address of the variable). + + + +Printed 7/9/88 January 12, 1986 9 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/dc.0 b/usr/man/cat1/dc.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2f1d075e39 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/dc.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +DC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DC(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + dc - desk calculator + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ddcc [ file ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _D_c is an arbitrary precision arithmetic package. Ordinarily + it operates on decimal integers, but one may specify an + input base, output base, and a number of fractional digits + to be maintained. The overall structure of _d_c is a stacking + (reverse Polish) calculator. If an argument is given, input + is taken from that file until its end, then from the stan- + dard input. The following constructions are recognized: + + number + The value of the number is pushed on the stack. A + number is an unbroken string of the digits 0-9. It + may be preceded by an underscore _ to input a negative + number. Numbers may contain decimal points. + + + - / * % ^ + The top two values on the stack are added (+), sub- + tracted (-), multiplied (*), divided (/), remaindered + (%), or exponentiated (^). The two entries are popped + off the stack; the result is pushed on the stack in + their place. Any fractional part of an exponent is + ignored. + + ss_x The top of the stack is popped and stored into a + register named _x, where _x may be any character. If + the ss is capitalized, _x is treated as a stack and the + value is pushed on it. + + ll_x The value in register _x is pushed on the stack. The + register _x is not altered. All registers start with + zero value. If the ll is capitalized, register _x is + treated as a stack and its top value is popped onto + the main stack. + + dd The top value on the stack is duplicated. + + pp The top value on the stack is printed. The top value + remains unchanged. PP interprets the top of the stack + as an ascii string, removes it, and prints it. + + ff All values on the stack and in registers are printed. + + qq exits the program. If executing a string, the recur- + sion level is popped by two. If qq is capitalized, the + top value on the stack is popped and the string execu- + tion level is popped by that value. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +DC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DC(1) + + + + xx treats the top element of the stack as a character + string and executes it as a string of dc commands. + + XX replaces the number on the top of the stack with its + scale factor. + + [[ ...... ]] + puts the bracketed ascii string onto the top of the + stack. + + <_x >_x =_x + The top two elements of the stack are popped and com- + pared. Register _x is executed if they obey the stated + relation. + + vv replaces the top element on the stack by its square + root. Any existing fractional part of the argument is + taken into account, but otherwise the scale factor is + ignored. + + !! interprets the rest of the line as a UNIX command. + + cc All values on the stack are popped. + + ii The top value on the stack is popped and used as the + number radix for further input. II pushes the input + base on the top of the stack. + + oo The top value on the stack is popped and used as the + number radix for further output. + + OO pushes the output base on the top of the stack. + + kk the top of the stack is popped, and that value is used + as a non-negative scale factor: the appropriate number + of places are printed on output, and maintained during + multiplication, division, and exponentiation. The + interaction of scale factor, input base, and output + base will be reasonable if all are changed together. + + zz The stack level is pushed onto the stack. + + ZZ replaces the number on the top of the stack with its + length. + + ?? A line of input is taken from the input source (usu- + ally the terminal) and executed. + + ;; :: are used by _b_c for array operations. + + An example which prints the first ten values of n! is + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + + + + +DC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DC(1) + + + + [la1+dsa*pla10>y]sy + 0sa1 + lyx + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + bc(1), which is a preprocessor for _d_c providing infix nota- + tion and a C-like syntax which implements functions and rea- + sonable control structures for programs. + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + `x is unimplemented' where x is an octal number. + `stack empty' for not enough elements on the stack to do + what was asked. + `Out of space' when the free list is exhausted (too many + digits). + `Out of headers' for too many numbers being kept around. + `Out of pushdown' for too many items on the stack. + `Nesting Depth' for too many levels of nested execution. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/dd.0 b/usr/man/cat1/dd.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..33960f4fcf --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/dd.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +DD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DD(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + dd - convert and copy a file + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + dddd [option=value] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _D_d copies the specified input file to the specified output + with possible conversions. The standard input and output + are used by default. The input and output block size may be + specified to take advantage of raw physical I/O. + + _o_p_t_i_o_n _v_a_l_u_e_s + if= input file name; standard input is default + of= output file name; standard output is default + ibs=_n input block size _n bytes (default 512) + obs=_n output block size (default 512) + bs=_n set both input and output block size, + superseding _i_b_s and _o_b_s; also, if no conver- + sion is specified, it is particularly effi- + cient since no copy need be done + cbs=_n conversion buffer size + skip=_n skip _n input records before starting copy + files=_n copy _n input files before terminating (makes + sense only where input is a magtape or simi- + lar device). + seek=_n seek _n records from beginning of output file + before copying + count=_n copy only _n input records + conv=ascii convert EBCDIC to ASCII + ebcdic convert ASCII to EBCDIC + ibm slightly different map of ASCII to EBCDIC + block convert variable length records to fixed + length + unblock convert fixed length records to variable + length + lcase map alphabetics to lower case + ucase map alphabetics to upper case + swab swap every pair of bytes + noerror do not stop processing on an error + sync pad every input record to _i_b_s + ... , ... several comma-separated conversions + + Where sizes are specified, a number of bytes is expected. A + number may end with kk,, bb or ww to specify multiplication by + 1024, 512, or 2 respectively; a pair of numbers may be + separated by xx to indicate a product. + + _C_b_s is used only if _a_s_c_i_i, _u_n_b_l_o_c_k, _e_b_c_d_i_c, _i_b_m, or _b_l_o_c_k + conversion is specified. In the first two cases, _c_b_s char- + acters are placed into the conversion buffer, any specified + character mapping is done, trailing blanks trimmed and new- + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +DD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DD(1) + + + + line added before sending the line to the output. In the + latter three cases, characters are read into the conversion + buffer, and blanks added to make up an output record of size + _c_b_s. + + After completion, _d_d reports the number of whole and partial + input and output blocks. + + For example, to read an EBCDIC tape blocked ten 80-byte + EBCDIC card images per record into the ASCII file _x: + + + dd if=/dev/rmt0 of=x ibs=800 cbs=80 conv=ascii,lcase + + Note the use of raw magtape. _D_d is especially suited to I/O + on the raw physical devices because it allows reading and + writing in arbitrary record sizes. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + cp(1), tr(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + f+p records in(out): numbers of full and partial records + read(written) + +BBUUGGSS + The ASCII/EBCDIC conversion tables are taken from the 256 + character standard in the CACM Nov, 1968. The `ibm' conver- + sion, while less blessed as a standard, corresponds better + to certain IBM print train conventions. There is no univer- + sal solution. + One must specify ``conv=noerror,sync'' when copying raw + disks with bad sectors to insure _d_d stays synchronized. + + Certain combinations of arguments to _c_o_n_v= are permitted. + However, the _b_l_o_c_k or _u_n_b_l_o_c_k option cannot be combined with + _a_s_c_i_i, _e_b_c_d_i_c or _i_b_m. Invalid combinations _s_i_l_e_n_t_l_y _i_g_n_o_r_e + all but the last mutually-exclusive keyword. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/deroff.0 b/usr/man/cat1/deroff.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..86d83c78ba --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/deroff.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +DEROFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DEROFF(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + deroff - remove nroff, troff, tbl and eqn constructs + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ddeerrooffff [ --ww ] file ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _D_e_r_o_f_f reads each file in sequence and removes all _n_r_o_f_f and + _t_r_o_f_f command lines, backslash constructions, macro defini- + tions, _e_q_n constructs (between `.EQ' and `.EN' lines or + between delimiters), and table descriptions and writes the + remainder on the standard output. _D_e_r_o_f_f follows chains of + included files (`.so' and `.nx' commands); if a file has + already been included, a `.so' is ignored and a `.nx' ter- + minates execution. If no input file is given, _d_e_r_o_f_f reads + from the standard input file. + + If the --ww flag is given, the output is a word list, one + `word' (string of letters, digits, and apostrophes, begin- + ning with a letter; apostrophes are removed) per line, and + all other characters ignored. Otherwise, the output follows + the original, with the deletions mentioned above. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + troff(1), eqn(1), tbl(1) + +BBUUGGSS + _D_e_r_o_f_f is not a complete _t_r_o_f_f interpreter, so it can be + confused by subtle constructs. Most errors result in too + much rather than too little output. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/df.0 b/usr/man/cat1/df.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5be5fc8711 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/df.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +DF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DF(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + df - disk free + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ddff [ --ii ] [ filesystem ... ] [ file ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _D_f prints out the amount of free disk space available on the + specified _f_i_l_e_s_y_s_t_e_m, e.g. ``/dev/rp0a'', or on the filesys- + tem in which the specified _f_i_l_e, e.g. ``$HOME'', is con- + tained. If no file system is specified, the free space on + all of the normally mounted file systems is printed. The + reported numbers are in kilobytes. + + Other options are: + + --ii Report also the number of inodes which are used and + free. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/fstab list of normally mounted filesystems + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + fstab(5), icheck(8), quot(8) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/diction.0 b/usr/man/cat1/diction.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7166a2a2f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/diction.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +DICTION(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DICTION(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + diction, explain - print wordy sentences; thesaurus for dic- + tion + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ddiiccttiioonn [ --mmll ] [ --mmmm ] [ --nn ] [ --ff pfile ] file ... + eexxppllaaiinn + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _D_i_c_t_i_o_n finds all sentences in a document that contain + phrases from a data base of bad or wordy diction. Each + phrase is bracketed with [ ]. Because _d_i_c_t_i_o_n runs _d_e_r_o_f_f + before looking at the text, formatting header files should + be included as part of the input. The default macro package + --mmss may be overridden with the flag --mmmm.. The flag --mmll which + causes ddeerrooffff to skip lists, should be used if the document + contains many lists of non-sentences. The user may supply + her/his own pattern file to be used in addition to the + default file with --ff _p_f_i_l_e. If the flag --nn is also supplied + the default file will be suppressed. + + _E_x_p_l_a_i_n is an interactive thesaurus for the phrases found by + diction. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + deroff(1) + +BBUUGGSS + Use of non-standard formatting macros may cause incorrect + sentence breaks. In particular, _d_i_c_t_i_o_n doesn't grok --mmee.. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/diff.0 b/usr/man/cat1/diff.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2b38135d01 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/diff.0 @@ -0,0 +1,264 @@ + + + +DIFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DIFF(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + diff - differential file and directory comparator + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ddiiffff [ --ll ] [ --rr ] [ --ss ] [ --cceeffhhnn ] [ --bbiiwwtt ] dir1 dir2 + ddiiffff [ --cceeffhhnn ]] [[ --bbiiwwtt ] file1 file2 + ddiiffff [ --DD_s_t_r_i_n_g ] [ --bbiiww ] file1 file2 + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + If both arguments are directories, _d_i_f_f sorts the contents + of the directories by name, and then runs the regular file + _d_i_f_f algorithm (described below) on text files which are + different. Binary files which differ, common subdirec- + tories, and files which appear in only one directory are + listed. Options when comparing directories are: + + --ll long output format; each text file _d_i_f_f is piped + through _p_r(1) to paginate it, other differences are + remembered and summarized after all text file differ- + ences are reported. + + --rr causes application of _d_i_f_f recursively to common sub- + directories encountered. + + --ss causes _d_i_f_f to report files which are the same, which + are otherwise not mentioned. + + --SSnnaammee + starts a directory _d_i_f_f in the middle beginning with + file _n_a_m_e. + + When run on regular files, and when comparing text files + which differ during directory comparison, _d_i_f_f tells what + lines must be changed in the files to bring them into agree- + ment. Except in rare circumstances, _d_i_f_f finds a smallest + sufficient set of file differences. If neither _f_i_l_e_1 nor + _f_i_l_e_2 is a directory, then either may be given as `-', in + which case the standard input is used. If _f_i_l_e_1 is a direc- + tory, then a file in that directory whose file-name is the + same as the file-name of _f_i_l_e_2 is used (and vice versa). + + There are several options for output format; the default + output format contains lines of these forms: + + _n_1 a _n_3,_n_4 + _n_1,_n_2 d _n_3 + _n_1,_n_2 c _n_3,_n_4 + + These lines resemble _e_d commands to convert _f_i_l_e_1 into + _f_i_l_e_2. The numbers after the letters pertain to _f_i_l_e_2. In + fact, by exchanging `a' for `d' and reading backward one may + ascertain equally how to convert _f_i_l_e_2 into _f_i_l_e_1. As in + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 19, 1986 1 + + + + + + +DIFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DIFF(1) + + + + _e_d, identical pairs where _n_1 = _n_2 or _n_3 = _n_4 are abbreviated + as a single number. + + Following each of these lines come all the lines that are + affected in the first file flagged by `<', then all the + lines that are affected in the second file flagged by `>'. + + Except for --bb,, --ww,, --ii or --tt which may be given with any of + the others, the following options are mutually exclusive: + + --ee produces a script of _a, _c and _d commands for the + editor _e_d, which will recreate _f_i_l_e_2 from _f_i_l_e_1. + In connection with --ee, the following shell program + may help maintain multiple versions of a file. + Only an ancestral file ($1) and a chain of + version-to-version _e_d scripts ($2,$3,...) made by + _d_i_f_f need be on hand. A `latest version' appears + on the standard output. + + (shift; cat $*; echo '1,$p') | ed - $1 + + Extra commands are added to the output when compar- + ing directories with --ee,, so that the result is a + _s_h(1) script for converting text files which are + common to the two directories from their state in + _d_i_r_1 to their state in _d_i_r_2. + + --ff produces a script similar to that of --ee,, not useful + with _e_d, and in the opposite order. + + --nn produces a script similar to that of --ee,, but in the + opposite order and with a count of changed lines on + each insert or delete command. This is the form + used by _r_c_s_d_i_f_f(1). + + --cc produces a diff with lines of context. The default + is to present 3 lines of context and may be + changed, e.g to 10, by --cc1100. With --cc the output + format is modified slightly: the output beginning + with identification of the files involved and their + creation dates and then each change is separated by + a line with a dozen *'s. The lines removed from + _f_i_l_e_1 are marked with `- '; those added to _f_i_l_e_2 + are marked `+ '. Lines which are changed from one + file to the other are marked in both files with + with `! '. + + Changes which lie within lines of each + other are grouped together on output. (This is a + change from the previous ``diff -c'' but the + resulting output is usually much easier to inter- + pret.) + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 19, 1986 2 + + + + + + +DIFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DIFF(1) + + + + --hh does a fast, half-hearted job. It works only when + changed stretches are short and well separated, but + does work on files of unlimited length. + + --DDssttrriinngg causes _d_i_f_f to create a merged version of _f_i_l_e_1 and + _f_i_l_e_2 on the standard output, with C preprocessor + controls included so that a compilation of the + result without defining _s_t_r_i_n_g is equivalent to + compiling _f_i_l_e_1, while defining _s_t_r_i_n_g will yield + _f_i_l_e_2. + + --bb causes trailing blanks (spaces and tabs) to be + ignored, and other strings of blanks to compare + equal. + + --ww is similar to --bb but causes whitespace (blanks and + tabs) to be totally ignored. E.g., + ``if ( a == b )'' will compare equal to + ``if(a==b)''. + + --ii ignores the case of letters. E.g., ``A'' will com- + pare equal to ``a''. + + --tt will expand tabs in output lines. Normal or --cc + output adds character(s) to the front of each line + which may screw up the indentation of the original + source lines and make the output listing difficult + to interpret. This option will preserve the origi- + nal source's indentation. + +FFIILLEESS + /tmp/d????? + /usr/lib/diffh for --hh + /bin/diff for directory diffs + /bin/pr + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + cmp(1), cc(1), comm(1), ed(1), diff3(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Exit status is 0 for no differences, 1 for some, 2 for trou- + ble. + +BBUUGGSS + Editing scripts produced under the --ee or --ff option are naive + about creating lines consisting of a single `..'. + + When comparing directories with the --bb,, --ww or --ii options + specified, _d_i_f_f first compares the files ala _c_m_p, and then + decides to run the _d_i_f_f algorithm if they are not equal. + This may cause a small amount of spurious output if the + files then turn out to be identical because the only + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 19, 1986 3 + + + + + + +DIFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DIFF(1) + + + + differences are insignificant blank string or case differ- + ences. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 19, 1986 4 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/diff3.0 b/usr/man/cat1/diff3.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..82bf9718bc --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/diff3.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +DIFF3(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DIFF3(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + diff3 - 3-way differential file comparison + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ddiiffff33 [ --eexxEEXX33 ] file1 file2 file3 + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _D_i_f_f_3 compares three versions of a file, and publishes + disagreeing ranges of text flagged with these codes: + + ==== all three files differ + + ====1 _f_i_l_e_1 is different + + ====2 _f_i_l_e_2 is different + + ====3 _f_i_l_e_3 is different + + The type of change suffered in converting a given range of a + given file to some other is indicated in one of these ways: + + _f :: _n_1 aa Text is to be appended after line number _n_1 + in file _f, where _f = 1, 2, or 3. + + _f :: _n_1 ,, _n_2 cc Text is to be changed in the range line _n_1 + to line _n_2. If _n_1 = _n_2, the range may be + abbreviated to _n_1. + + The original contents of the range follows immediately after + a cc indication. When the contents of two files are identi- + cal, the contents of the lower-numbered file is suppressed. + + Under the --ee option, _d_i_f_f_3 publishes a script for the editor + _e_d that will incorporate into _f_i_l_e_1 all changes between + _f_i_l_e_2 and _f_i_l_e_3, _i._e. the changes that normally would be + flagged ==== and ====3. Option --xx (--33) produces a script to + incorporate only changes flagged ==== (====3). The follow- + ing command will apply the resulting script to `file1'. + + (cat script; echo '1,$p') | ed - file1 + + The --EE and --XX are similar to --ee and --xx, respectively, but + treat overlapping changes (i.e., changes that would be + flagged with ==== in the normal listing) differently. The + overlapping lines from both files will be inserted by the + edit script, bracketed by "<<<<<<" and ">>>>>>" lines. + + For example, suppose lines 7-8 are changed in both file1 and + file2. Applying the edit script generated by the command + "diff3 -E file1 file2 file3" + to file1 results in the file: + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 August 20, 1985 1 + + + + + + +DIFF3(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DIFF3(1) + + + + lines 1-6 + of file1 + <<<<<<< file1 + lines 7-8 + of file1 + ======= + lines 7-8 + of file3 + >>>>>>> file3 + rest of file1 + + The --EE option is used by RCS _m_e_r_g_e(1) to insure that over- + lapping changes in the merged files are preserved and + brought to someone's attention. + +FFIILLEESS + /tmp/d3????? + /usr/lib/diff3 + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + diff(1) + +BBUUGGSS + Text lines that consist of a single `.' will defeat --ee.. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 August 20, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/diffh.0 b/usr/man/cat1/diffh.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2b38135d01 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/diffh.0 @@ -0,0 +1,264 @@ + + + +DIFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DIFF(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + diff - differential file and directory comparator + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ddiiffff [ --ll ] [ --rr ] [ --ss ] [ --cceeffhhnn ] [ --bbiiwwtt ] dir1 dir2 + ddiiffff [ --cceeffhhnn ]] [[ --bbiiwwtt ] file1 file2 + ddiiffff [ --DD_s_t_r_i_n_g ] [ --bbiiww ] file1 file2 + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + If both arguments are directories, _d_i_f_f sorts the contents + of the directories by name, and then runs the regular file + _d_i_f_f algorithm (described below) on text files which are + different. Binary files which differ, common subdirec- + tories, and files which appear in only one directory are + listed. Options when comparing directories are: + + --ll long output format; each text file _d_i_f_f is piped + through _p_r(1) to paginate it, other differences are + remembered and summarized after all text file differ- + ences are reported. + + --rr causes application of _d_i_f_f recursively to common sub- + directories encountered. + + --ss causes _d_i_f_f to report files which are the same, which + are otherwise not mentioned. + + --SSnnaammee + starts a directory _d_i_f_f in the middle beginning with + file _n_a_m_e. + + When run on regular files, and when comparing text files + which differ during directory comparison, _d_i_f_f tells what + lines must be changed in the files to bring them into agree- + ment. Except in rare circumstances, _d_i_f_f finds a smallest + sufficient set of file differences. If neither _f_i_l_e_1 nor + _f_i_l_e_2 is a directory, then either may be given as `-', in + which case the standard input is used. If _f_i_l_e_1 is a direc- + tory, then a file in that directory whose file-name is the + same as the file-name of _f_i_l_e_2 is used (and vice versa). + + There are several options for output format; the default + output format contains lines of these forms: + + _n_1 a _n_3,_n_4 + _n_1,_n_2 d _n_3 + _n_1,_n_2 c _n_3,_n_4 + + These lines resemble _e_d commands to convert _f_i_l_e_1 into + _f_i_l_e_2. The numbers after the letters pertain to _f_i_l_e_2. In + fact, by exchanging `a' for `d' and reading backward one may + ascertain equally how to convert _f_i_l_e_2 into _f_i_l_e_1. As in + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 19, 1986 1 + + + + + + +DIFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DIFF(1) + + + + _e_d, identical pairs where _n_1 = _n_2 or _n_3 = _n_4 are abbreviated + as a single number. + + Following each of these lines come all the lines that are + affected in the first file flagged by `<', then all the + lines that are affected in the second file flagged by `>'. + + Except for --bb,, --ww,, --ii or --tt which may be given with any of + the others, the following options are mutually exclusive: + + --ee produces a script of _a, _c and _d commands for the + editor _e_d, which will recreate _f_i_l_e_2 from _f_i_l_e_1. + In connection with --ee, the following shell program + may help maintain multiple versions of a file. + Only an ancestral file ($1) and a chain of + version-to-version _e_d scripts ($2,$3,...) made by + _d_i_f_f need be on hand. A `latest version' appears + on the standard output. + + (shift; cat $*; echo '1,$p') | ed - $1 + + Extra commands are added to the output when compar- + ing directories with --ee,, so that the result is a + _s_h(1) script for converting text files which are + common to the two directories from their state in + _d_i_r_1 to their state in _d_i_r_2. + + --ff produces a script similar to that of --ee,, not useful + with _e_d, and in the opposite order. + + --nn produces a script similar to that of --ee,, but in the + opposite order and with a count of changed lines on + each insert or delete command. This is the form + used by _r_c_s_d_i_f_f(1). + + --cc produces a diff with lines of context. The default + is to present 3 lines of context and may be + changed, e.g to 10, by --cc1100. With --cc the output + format is modified slightly: the output beginning + with identification of the files involved and their + creation dates and then each change is separated by + a line with a dozen *'s. The lines removed from + _f_i_l_e_1 are marked with `- '; those added to _f_i_l_e_2 + are marked `+ '. Lines which are changed from one + file to the other are marked in both files with + with `! '. + + Changes which lie within lines of each + other are grouped together on output. (This is a + change from the previous ``diff -c'' but the + resulting output is usually much easier to inter- + pret.) + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 19, 1986 2 + + + + + + +DIFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DIFF(1) + + + + --hh does a fast, half-hearted job. It works only when + changed stretches are short and well separated, but + does work on files of unlimited length. + + --DDssttrriinngg causes _d_i_f_f to create a merged version of _f_i_l_e_1 and + _f_i_l_e_2 on the standard output, with C preprocessor + controls included so that a compilation of the + result without defining _s_t_r_i_n_g is equivalent to + compiling _f_i_l_e_1, while defining _s_t_r_i_n_g will yield + _f_i_l_e_2. + + --bb causes trailing blanks (spaces and tabs) to be + ignored, and other strings of blanks to compare + equal. + + --ww is similar to --bb but causes whitespace (blanks and + tabs) to be totally ignored. E.g., + ``if ( a == b )'' will compare equal to + ``if(a==b)''. + + --ii ignores the case of letters. E.g., ``A'' will com- + pare equal to ``a''. + + --tt will expand tabs in output lines. Normal or --cc + output adds character(s) to the front of each line + which may screw up the indentation of the original + source lines and make the output listing difficult + to interpret. This option will preserve the origi- + nal source's indentation. + +FFIILLEESS + /tmp/d????? + /usr/lib/diffh for --hh + /bin/diff for directory diffs + /bin/pr + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + cmp(1), cc(1), comm(1), ed(1), diff3(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Exit status is 0 for no differences, 1 for some, 2 for trou- + ble. + +BBUUGGSS + Editing scripts produced under the --ee or --ff option are naive + about creating lines consisting of a single `..'. + + When comparing directories with the --bb,, --ww or --ii options + specified, _d_i_f_f first compares the files ala _c_m_p, and then + decides to run the _d_i_f_f algorithm if they are not equal. + This may cause a small amount of spurious output if the + files then turn out to be identical because the only + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 19, 1986 3 + + + + + + +DIFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DIFF(1) + + + + differences are insignificant blank string or case differ- + ences. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 19, 1986 4 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/du.0 b/usr/man/cat1/du.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a4a34e48aa --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/du.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +DU(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DU(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + du - summarize disk usage + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + dduu [ --ss ] [ --aa ] [ name ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _D_u gives the number of kilobytes contained in all files and, + recursively, directories within each specified directory or + file _n_a_m_e. If _n_a_m_e is missing, `..' is used. + + The argument --ss causes only the grand total to be given. + The argument --aa causes an entry to be generated for each + file. Absence of either causes an entry to be generated for + each directory only. + + A file which has two links to it is only counted once. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + df(1), quot(8) + +BBUUGGSS + Non-directories given as arguments (not under --aa option) are + not listed. + If there are too many distinct linked files, _d_u counts the + excess files multiply. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/echo.0 b/usr/man/cat1/echo.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..658b20a268 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/echo.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +ECHO(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ECHO(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + echo - echo arguments + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + eecchhoo [ --nn ] [ arg ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _E_c_h_o writes its arguments separated by blanks and terminated + by a newline on the standard output. If the flag --nn is + used, no newline is added to the output. + + _E_c_h_o is useful for producing diagnostics in shell programs + and for writing constant data on pipes. To send diagnostics + to the standard error file, do `echo ... 1>&2'. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/ed.0 b/usr/man/cat1/ed.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d632214352 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/ed.0 @@ -0,0 +1,594 @@ + + + +ED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ED(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + ed - text editor + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + eedd [ -- ] [ --xx ] [ name ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _E_d is the standard text editor. + + If a _n_a_m_e argument is given, _e_d simulates an _e command (see + below) on the named file; that is to say, the file is read + into _e_d'_s buffer so that it can be edited. If --xx is + present, an _x command is simulated first to handle an + encrypted file. The optional -- suppresses the printing of + explanatory output and should be used when the standard + input is an editor script. + + _E_d operates on a copy of any file it is editing; changes + made in the copy have no effect on the file until a _w + (write) command is given. The copy of the text being edited + resides in a temporary file called the _b_u_f_f_e_r. + + Commands to _e_d have a simple and regular structure: zero or + more _a_d_d_r_e_s_s_e_s followed by a single character _c_o_m_m_a_n_d, pos- + sibly followed by parameters to the command. These + addresses specify one or more lines in the buffer. Missing + addresses are supplied by default. + + In general, only one command may appear on a line. Certain + commands allow the addition of text to the buffer. While _e_d + is accepting text, it is said to be in _i_n_p_u_t _m_o_d_e. In this + mode, no commands are recognized; all input is merely col- + lected. Input mode is left by typing a period `..' alone at + the beginning of a line. + + _E_d supports a limited form of _r_e_g_u_l_a_r _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n notation. + A regular expression specifies a set of strings of charac- + ters. A member of this set of strings is said to be _m_a_t_c_h_e_d + by the regular expression. In the following specification + for regular expressions the word `character' means any char- + acter but newline. + + 1. Any character except a special character matches + itself. Special characters are the regular expression + delimiter plus \[.. and sometimes ^*$. + + 2. A .. matches any character. + + 3. A \ followed by any character except a digit or () + matches that character. + + 4. A nonempty string _s bracketed [_s] (or [^_s]) matches any + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +ED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ED(1) + + + + character in (or not in) _s. In _s, \ has no special + meaning, and ] may only appear as the first letter. A + substring _a-_b, with _a and _b in ascending ASCII order, + stands for the inclusive range of ASCII characters. + + 5. A regular expression of form 1-4 followed by * matches + a sequence of 0 or more matches of the regular expres- + sion. + + 6. A regular expression, _x, of form 1-8, bracketed \(_x\) + matches what _x matches. + + 7. A \ followed by a digit _n matches a copy of the string + that the bracketed regular expression beginning with + the _nth \( matched. + + 8. A regular expression of form 1-8, _x, followed by a reg- + ular expression of form 1-7, _y matches a match for _x + followed by a match for _y, with the _x match being as + long as possible while still permitting a _y match. + + 9. A regular expression of form 1-8 preceded by ^ (or fol- + lowed by $), is constrained to matches that begin at + the left (or end at the right) end of a line. + + 10. A regular expression of form 1-9 picks out the longest + among the leftmost matches in a line. + + 11. An empty regular expression stands for a copy of the + last regular expression encountered. + + Regular expressions are used in addresses to specify lines + and in one command (see _s below) to specify a portion of a + line which is to be replaced. If it is desired to use one + of the regular expression metacharacters as an ordinary + character, that character may be preceded by `\'. This also + applies to the character bounding the regular expression + (often `/') and to `\' itself. + + To understand addressing in _e_d it is necessary to know that + at any time there is a _c_u_r_r_e_n_t _l_i_n_e. Generally speaking, the + current line is the last line affected by a command; how- + ever, the exact effect on the current line is discussed + under the description of the command. Addresses are con- + structed as follows. + + 1. The character `..' addresses the current line. + + 2. The character `$' addresses the last line of the + buffer. + + 3. A decimal number _n addresses the _n-th line of the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + + + + +ED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ED(1) + + + + buffer. + + 4. `'_x' addresses the line marked with the name _x, which + must be a lower-case letter. Lines are marked with the + _k command described below. + + 5. A regular expression enclosed in slashes `/' addresses + the line found by searching forward from the current + line and stopping at the first line containing a string + that matches the regular expression. If necessary the + search wraps around to the beginning of the buffer. + + 6. A regular expression enclosed in queries `?' addresses + the line found by searching backward from the current + line and stopping at the first line containing a string + that matches the regular expression. If necessary the + search wraps around to the end of the buffer. + + 7. An address followed by a plus sign `+' or a minus sign + `-' followed by a decimal number specifies that address + plus (resp. minus) the indicated number of lines. The + plus sign may be omitted. + + 8. If an address begins with `+' or `-' the addition or + subtraction is taken with respect to the current line; + e.g. `-5' is understood to mean `..-5'. + + 9. If an address ends with `+' or `-', then 1 is added + (resp. subtracted). As a consequence of this rule and + rule 8, the address `-' refers to the line before the + current line. Moreover, trailing `+' and `-' charac- + ters have cumulative effect, so `--' refers to the + current line less 2. + + 10. To maintain compatibility with earlier versions of the + editor, the character `^' in addresses is equivalent to + `-'. + + Commands may require zero, one, or two addresses. Commands + which require no addresses regard the presence of an address + as an error. Commands which accept one or two addresses + assume default addresses when insufficient are given. If + more addresses are given than such a command requires, the + last one or two (depending on what is accepted) are used. + + Addresses are separated from each other typically by a comma + `,,'. They may also be separated by a semicolon `;;'. In + this case the current line `..' is set to the previous + address before the next address is interpreted. This + feature can be used to determine the starting line for for- + ward and backward searches (`/', `?'). The second address + of any two-address sequence must correspond to a line + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 3 + + + + + + +ED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ED(1) + + + + following the line corresponding to the first address. The + special form `%' is an abbreviation for the address pair + `1,$'. + + In the following list of _e_d commands, the default addresses + are shown in parentheses. The parentheses are not part of + the address, but are used to show that the given addresses + are the default. + + As mentioned, it is generally illegal for more than one com- + mand to appear on a line. However, most commands may be + suffixed by `p' or by `l', in which case the current line is + either printed or listed respectively in the way discussed + below. Commands may also be suffixed by `n', meaning the + output of the command is to be line numbered. These suf- + fixes may be combined in any order. + + (..)a + + .. + The append command reads the given text and appends it + after the addressed line. `..' is left on the last line + input, if there were any, otherwise at the addressed + line. Address `0' is legal for this command; text is + placed at the beginning of the buffer. + + (.., ..)c + + .. + The change command deletes the addressed lines, then + accepts input text which replaces these lines. `..' is + left at the last line input; if there were none, it is + left at the line preceding the deleted lines. + + (.., ..)d + The delete command deletes the addressed lines from the + buffer. The line originally after the last line + deleted becomes the current line; if the lines deleted + were originally at the end, the new last line becomes + the current line. + + e filename + The edit command causes the entire contents of the + buffer to be deleted, and then the named file to be + read in. `..' is set to the last line of the buffer. + The number of characters read is typed. `filename' is + remembered for possible use as a default file name in a + subsequent _r or _w command. If `filename' is missing, + the remembered name is used. + + E filename + This command is the same as _e, except that no + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 4 + + + + + + +ED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ED(1) + + + + diagnostic results when no _w has been given since the + last buffer alteration. + + f filename + The filename command prints the currently remembered + file name. If `filename' is given, the currently + remembered file name is changed to `filename'. + + (1,$)g/regular expression/command list + In the global command, the first step is to mark every + line which matches the given regular expression. Then + for every such line, the given command list is executed + with `..' initially set to that line. A single command + or the first of multiple commands appears on the same + line with the global command. All lines of a multi- + line list except the last line must be ended with `\'. + _A, _i, and _c commands and associated input are permit- + ted; the `..' terminating input mode may be omitted if + it would be on the last line of the command list. The + commands _g and _v are not permitted in the command list. + + (..)i + + + .. + This command inserts the given text before the + addressed line. `..' is left at the last line input, + or, if there were none, at the line before the + addressed line. This command differs from the _a com- + mand only in the placement of the text. + + (.., ..+1)j + This command joins the addressed lines into a single + line; intermediate newlines simply disappear. `..' is + left at the resulting line. + + ( .. )k_x + The mark command marks the addressed line with name _x, + which must be a lower-case letter. The address form + `'_x' then addresses this line. + + (.., ..)l + The list command prints the addressed lines in an unam- + biguous way: non-graphic characters are printed in + two-digit octal, and long lines are folded. The _l com- + mand may be placed on the same line after any non-i/o + command. + + (.., ..)m_a + The move command repositions the addressed lines after + the line addressed by _a. The last of the moved lines + becomes the current line. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 5 + + + + + + +ED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ED(1) + + + + (.., ..)p + The print command prints the addressed lines. `..' is + left at the last line printed. The _p command may be + placed on the same line after any non-i/o command. + + (.., ..)P + This command is a synonym for _p. + + q The quit command causes _e_d to exit. No automatic write + of a file is done. + + Q This command is the same as _q, except that no diagnos- + tic results when no _w has been given since the last + buffer alteration. + + ($)r filename + The read command reads in the given file after the + addressed line. If no file name is given, the remem- + bered file name, if any, is used (see _e and _f com- + mands). The file name is remembered if there was no + remembered file name already. Address `0' is legal for + _r and causes the file to be read at the beginning of + the buffer. If the read is successful, the number of + characters read is typed. `..' is left at the last line + read in from the file. + + ( .., ..)s/regular expression/replacement/ or, + ( .., ..)s/regular expression/replacement/g + The substitute command searches each addressed line for + an occurrence of the specified regular expression. On + each line in which a match is found, all matched + strings are replaced by the replacement specified, if + the global replacement indicator `g' appears after the + command. If the global indicator does not appear, only + the first occurrence of the matched string is replaced. + It is an error for the substitution to fail on all + addressed lines. Any punctuation character may be used + instead of `/' to delimit the regular expression and + the replacement. `..' is left at the last line substi- + tuted. + + An ampersand `&' appearing in the replacement is + replaced by the string matching the regular expression. + The special meaning of `&' in this context may be + suppressed by preceding it by `\'. The characters `_\_n' + where _n is a digit, are replaced by the text matched by + the _n-th regular subexpression enclosed between `\(' + and `\)'. When nested, parenthesized subexpressions + are present, _n is determined by counting occurrences of + `\(' starting from the left. + + Lines may be split by substituting new-line characters + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 6 + + + + + + +ED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ED(1) + + + + into them. The new-line in the replacement string must + be escaped by preceding it by `\'. + + One or two trailing delimiters may be omitted, implying + the `p' suffix. The special form `s' followed by _n_o + delimiters repeats the most recent substitute command + on the addressed lines. The `s' may be followed by the + letters rr (use the most recent regular expression for + the left hand side, instead of the most recent left + hand side of a substitute command), pp (complement the + setting of the _p suffix from the previous substitu- + tion), or gg (complement the setting of the _g suffix). + These letters may be combined in any order. + + (.., ..)t_a + This command acts just like the _m command, except that + a copy of the addressed lines is placed after address _a + (which may be 0). `..' is left on the last line of the + copy. + + (.., ..)u + The undo command restores the buffer to it's state + before the most recent buffer modifying command. The + current line is also restored. Buffer modifying com- + mands are _a, _c, _d, _g, _i, _k, and _v. For purposes of + undo, _g and _v are considered to be a single buffer + modifying command. Undo is its own inverse. + + When _e_d runs out of memory (at about 8000 lines on any + 16 bit mini-computer such as the PDP-11) This full undo + is not possible, and _u can only undo the effect of the + most recent substitute on the current line. This res- + tricted undo also applies to editor scripts when _e_d is + invoked with the -- option. + + (1, $)v/regular expression/command list + This command is the same as the global command _g except + that the command list is executed _g with `..' initially + set to every line _e_x_c_e_p_t those matching the regular + expression. + + (1, $)w filename + The write command writes the addressed lines onto the + given file. If the file does not exist, it is created. + The file name is remembered if there was no remembered + file name already. If no file name is given, the + remembered file name, if any, is used (see _e and _f com- + mands). `..' is unchanged. If the command is success- + ful, the number of characters written is printed. + + (1, $)W filename + This command is the same as _w, except that the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 7 + + + + + + +ED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ED(1) + + + + addressed lines are appended to the file. + + (1, $)wq filename + This command is the same as _w except that afterwards a + _q command is done, exiting the editor after the file is + written. + + x A key string is demanded from the standard input. + Later _r, _e and _w commands will encrypt and decrypt the + text with this key by the algorithm of _c_r_y_p_t(1). An + explicitly empty key turns off encryption. + (..+1)z or, + (..+1)z_n + This command scrolls through the buffer starting at the + addressed line. 22 (or _n, if given) lines are printed. + The last line printed becomes the current line. The + value _n is sticky, in that it becomes the default for + future _z commands. + + ($)= The line number of the addressed line is typed. `..' is + unchanged by this command. + + ! + The remainder of the line after the `!' is sent to + _s_h(1) to be interpreted as a command. `..' is + unchanged. + + (..+1,..+1) + An address alone on a line causes the addressed line to + be printed. A blank line alone is equivalent to + `.+1p'; it is useful for stepping through text. If two + addresses are present with no intervening semicolon, _e_d + prints the range of lines. If they are separated by a + semicolon, the second line is printed. + + If an interrupt signal (ASCII DEL) is sent, _e_d prints + `?interrupted' and returns to its command level. + + Some size limitations: 512 characters per line, 256 charac- + ters per global command list, 64 characters per file name, + and, on mini computers, 128K characters in the temporary + file. The limit on the number of lines depends on the + amount of core: each line takes 2 words. + + When reading a file, _e_d discards ASCII NUL characters and + all characters after the last newline. It refuses to read + files containing non-ASCII characters. + +FFIILLEESS + /tmp/e* + edhup: work is saved here if terminal hangs up + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 8 + + + + + + +ED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ED(1) + + + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + B. W. Kernighan, _A _T_u_t_o_r_i_a_l _I_n_t_r_o_d_u_c_t_i_o_n _t_o _t_h_e _E_D _T_e_x_t _E_d_i_- + _t_o_r + B. W. Kernighan, _A_d_v_a_n_c_e_d _e_d_i_t_i_n_g _o_n _U_N_I_X + ex(1), sed(1), crypt(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + `?name' for inaccessible file; `?self-explanatory message' + for other errors. + + To protect against throwing away valuable work, a _q or _e + command is considered to be in error, unless a _w has + occurred since the last buffer change. A second _q or _e will + be obeyed regardless. + +BBUUGGSS + The _l command mishandles DEL. + The _u_n_d_o command causes marks to be lost on affected lines. + The _x command, --xx option, and special treatment of hangups + only work on UNIX. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 9 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/edit.0 b/usr/man/cat1/edit.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e7b39e5939 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/edit.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +EX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EX(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + ex, edit - text editor + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + eexx [ -- ] [ --vv ] [ --tt tag ] [ --rr ] [ ++_c_o_m_m_a_n_d ] [ --ll ] name + ... + eeddiitt [ ex options ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _E_x is the root of a family of editors: _e_d_i_t, _e_x and _v_i. _E_x + is a superset of _e_d, with the most notable extension being a + display editing facility. Display based editing is the + focus of _v_i. + + If you have not used _e_d, or are a casual user, you will find + that the editor _e_d_i_t is convenient for you. It avoids some + of the complexities of _e_x used mostly by systems programmers + and persons very familiar with _e_d. + + If you have a CRT terminal, you may wish to use a display + based editor; in this case see _v_i(1), which is a command + which focuses on the display editing portion of _e_x. + +DDOOCCUUMMEENNTTAATTIIOONN + The document _E_d_i_t: _A _t_u_t_o_r_i_a_l (USD:14) provides a comprehen- + sive introduction to _e_d_i_t assuming no previous knowledge of + computers or the UNIX system. + + The _E_x _R_e_f_e_r_e_n_c_e _M_a_n_u_a_l - _V_e_r_s_i_o_n _3._7 (USD:16) is a + comprehensive and complete manual for the command mode + features of _e_x, but you cannot learn to use the editor by + reading it. For an introduction to more advanced forms of + editing using the command mode of _e_x see the editing docu- + ments written by Brian Kernighan for the editor _e_d; the + material in the introductory and advanced documents works + also with _e_x. + + _A_n _I_n_t_r_o_d_u_c_t_i_o_n _t_o _D_i_s_p_l_a_y _E_d_i_t_i_n_g _w_i_t_h _V_i (USD:15) intro- + duces the display editor _v_i and provides reference material + on _v_i. In addition, the _V_i _Q_u_i_c_k _R_e_f_e_r_e_n_c_e card summarizes + the commands of _v_i in a useful, functional way, and is use- + ful with the _I_n_t_r_o_d_u_c_t_i_o_n. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/lib/ex?.?strings error messages + /usr/lib/ex?.?recover recover command + /usr/lib/ex?.?preserve preserve command + /etc/termcap describes capabilities of terminals + ~/.exrc editor startup file + /tmp/Ex_n_n_n_n_n editor temporary + /tmp/Rx_n_n_n_n_n named buffer temporary + /usr/preserve preservation directory + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 1 + + + + + + +EX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EX(1) + + + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + awk(1), ed(1), grep(1), sed(1), grep(1), vi(1), termcap(5), + environ(7) + +AAUUTTHHOORR + Originally written by William Joy + Mark Horton has maintained the editor since version 2.7, + adding macros, support for many unusual terminals, and other + features such as word abbreviation mode. + +BBUUGGSS + The _u_n_d_o command causes all marks to be lost on lines + changed and then restored if the marked lines were changed. + + _U_n_d_o never clears the buffer modified condition. + + The _z command prints a number of logical rather than physi- + cal lines. More than a screen full of output may result if + long lines are present. + + File input/output errors don't print a name if the command + line ``--'' option is used. + + There is no easy way to do a single scan ignoring case. + + The editor does not warn if text is placed in named buffers + and not used before exiting the editor. + + Null characters are discarded in input files, and cannot + appear in resultant files. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/efl.0 b/usr/man/cat1/efl.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1e7bd1f741 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/efl.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +EFL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EFL(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + efl - Extended Fortran Language + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + eeffll [ option ... ] [ filename ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _E_f_l compiles a program written in the EFL language into + clean Fortran. _E_f_l provides the same control flow con- + structs as does _r_a_t_f_o_r(1), which are essentially identical + to those in C: + + statement grouping with braces; + decision-making with if, if-else, and switch-case; + while, for, Fortran do, repeat, and repeat...until + loops; multi-level break and next. In addition, EFL + has C-like data structures, and more uniform and con- + venient input/output syntax, generic functions. EFL + also provides some syntactic sugar to make programs + easier to read and write: + + free form input: + multiple statements/line; automatic continuation state- + ment label names (not just numbers), + + comments: + # this is a comment + + translation of relationals: + >, >=, etc., become .GT., .GE., etc. + + return (expression) + returns expression to caller from function + + define: + define name replacement + + include: + include filename + + The Efl command option --ww suppresses warning messages. The + option --CC causes comments to be copied through to the For- + tran output (default); --## prevents comments from being + copied through. If a command argument contains an embedded + equal sign, that argument is treated as if it had appeared + in an ooppttiioonn statement at the beginning of the program. _E_f_l + is best used with _f_7_7(1). + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + f77(1), ratfor(1). + S. I. Feldman, _T_h_e _P_r_o_g_r_a_m_m_i_n_g _L_a_n_g_u_a_g_e _E_F_L, Bell Labs Com- + puting Science Technical Report #78. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/egrep.0 b/usr/man/cat1/egrep.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..272e038945 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/egrep.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +GREP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GREP(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + grep, egrep, fgrep - search a file for a pattern + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ggrreepp [ option ] ... expression [ file ] ... + + eeggrreepp [ option ] ... [ expression ] [ file ] ... + + ffggrreepp [ option ] ... [ strings ] [ file ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + Commands of the _g_r_e_p family search the input _f_i_l_e_s (standard + input default) for lines matching a pattern. Normally, each + line found is copied to the standard output. _G_r_e_p patterns + are limited regular expressions in the style of _e_x(1); it + uses a compact nondeterministic algorithm. _E_g_r_e_p patterns + are full regular expressions; it uses a fast deterministic + algorithm that sometimes needs exponential space. _F_g_r_e_p + patterns are fixed strings; it is fast and compact. The + following options are recognized. + + --vv All lines but those matching are printed. + + --xx (Exact) only lines matched in their entirety are + printed (_f_g_r_e_p only). + + --cc Only a count of matching lines is printed. + + --ll The names of files with matching lines are listed + (once) separated by newlines. + + --nn Each line is preceded by its relative line number in + the file. + + --bb Each line is preceded by the block number on which it + was found. This is sometimes useful in locating disk + block numbers by context. + + --hh Never print filename headers with output lines. + + --oo Always print filename headers with output lines. + + --ii The case of letters is ignored in making comparisons - + that is, upper and lower case are considered identical. + + --ss Silent mode. Nothing is printed (except error mes- + sages). This is useful for checking the error status. + + --ww The expression is searched for as a word (as if sur- + rounded by `\<' and `\>', see _e_x(1).) (_g_r_e_p only) + + --ee _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n + + + +Printed 7/9/88 October 8, 1987 1 + + + + + + +GREP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GREP(1) + + + + Same as a simple _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n argument, but useful when + the _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n begins with a -. + + --ff _f_i_l_e + The regular expression (_e_g_r_e_p) or string list (_f_g_r_e_p) + is taken from the _f_i_l_e. + + In all cases the file name is shown if there is more than + one input file. Care should be taken when using the charac- + ters $ * [ ^ | ( ) and \ in the _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n as they are also + meaningful to the Shell. It is safest to enclose the entire + _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n argument in single quotes ' '. + + _F_g_r_e_p searches for lines that contain one of the (newline- + separated) _s_t_r_i_n_g_s. + + _E_g_r_e_p accepts extended regular expressions. In the follow- + ing description `character' excludes newline: + + A \ followed by a single character other than newline + matches that character. + + The character ^ matches the beginning of a line. + + The character $ matches the end of a line. + + A .. (period) matches any character. + + A single character not otherwise endowed with special + meaning matches that character. + + A string enclosed in brackets [] matches any single + character from the string. Ranges of ASCII character + codes may be abbreviated as in `a-z0-9'. A ] may occur + only as the first character of the string. A literal - + must be placed where it can't be mistaken as a range + indicator. + + A regular expression followed by an * (asterisk) + matches a sequence of 0 or more matches of the regular + expression. A regular expression followed by a + + (plus) matches a sequence of 1 or more matches of the + regular expression. A regular expression followed by a + ? (question mark) matches a sequence of 0 or 1 matches + of the regular expression. + + Two regular expressions concatenated match a match of + the first followed by a match of the second. + + Two regular expressions separated by | or newline match + either a match for the first or a match for the second. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 October 8, 1987 2 + + + + + + +GREP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GREP(1) + + + + A regular expression enclosed in parentheses matches a + match for the regular expression. + + The order of precedence of operators at the same parenthesis + level is [] then *+? then concatenation then | and newline. + + Ideally there should be only one _g_r_e_p, but we don't know a + single algorithm that spans a wide enough range of space- + time tradeoffs. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + ex(1), sed(1), sh(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Exit status is 0 if any matches are found, 1 if none, 2 for + syntax errors or inaccessible files. + +BBUUGGSS + Lines are limited to 256 characters; longer lines are trun- + cated. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 October 8, 1987 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/enroll.0 b/usr/man/cat1/enroll.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..af0c4a9bcc --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/enroll.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +XSEND(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual XSEND(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + xsend, xget, enroll - secret mail + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + xxsseenndd person + xxggeett + eennrroollll + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + These commands implement a secure communication channel; it + is like _m_a_i_l(1), but no one can read the messages except the + intended recipient. The method embodies a public-key cryp- + tosystem using knapsacks. + + To receive messages, use _e_n_r_o_l_l; it asks you for a password + that you must subsequently quote in order to receive secret + mail. + + To receive secret mail, use _x_g_e_t. It asks for your pass- + word, then gives you the messages. + + To send secret mail, use _x_s_e_n_d in the same manner as the + ordinary mail command. (However, it will accept only one + target). A message announcing the receipt of secret mail is + also sent by ordinary mail. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/spool/secretmail/*.key: keys + /usr/spool/secretmail/*.[0-9]: messages + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + mail (1) + +BBUUGGSS + It should be integrated with ordinary mail. The announce- + ment of secret mail makes traffic analysis possible. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/eqn.0 b/usr/man/cat1/eqn.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ee497f20d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/eqn.0 @@ -0,0 +1,246 @@ + + + +EQN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EQN(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + eqn, neqn, checkeq - typeset mathematics + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + eeqqnn [ --ddxy ] [ --ppn ] [ --ssn ] [ --ffn ] [ file ] ... + cchheecckkeeqq [ file ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _E_q_n is a troff(1) preprocessor for typesetting mathematics + on a Graphic Systems phototypesetter, _n_e_q_n on terminals. + Usage is almost always + + eqn file ... | troff + neqn file ... | nroff + + If no files are specified, these programs reads from the + standard input. A line beginning with `.EQ' marks the start + of an equation; the end of an equation is marked by a line + beginning with `.EN'. Neither of these lines is altered, so + they may be defined in macro packages to get centering, + numbering, etc. It is also possible to set two characters + as `delimiters'; subsequent text between delimiters is also + treated as _e_q_n input. Delimiters may be set to characters _x + and _y with the command-line argument --dd_x_y or (more commonly) + with `delim _x_y' between .EQ and .EN. The left and right + delimiters may be identical. Delimiters are turned off by + `delim off'. All text that is neither between delimiters + nor between .EQ and .EN is passed through untouched. + + The program _c_h_e_c_k_e_q reports missing or unbalanced delimiters + and .EQ/.EN pairs. + + Tokens within _e_q_n are separated by spaces, tabs, newlines, + braces, double quotes, tildes or circumflexes. Braces {} + are used for grouping; generally speaking, anywhere a single + character like _x could appear, a complicated construction + enclosed in braces may be used instead. Tilde ~ represents + a full space in the output, circumflex ^ half as much. + + Subscripts and superscripts are produced with the keywords + ssuubb and ssuupp.. Thus _x _s_u_b _i makes _x_i, _a _s_u_b _i _s_u_p _2 produces + _a_i + 2 + , and _e _s_u_p {_x _s_u_p _2 + _y _s_u_p _2} gives _e + _x2+_y2 + . + + + Fractions are made with oovveerr: _a _o_v_e_r _b yields + _b + + _a_. + + + ssqqrrtt makes square roots: _1 _o_v_e_r _s_q_r_t {_a_x _s_u_p _2 +_b_x+_c} + + results in + v/~~~~~~~~_a_x + 2 + +_b_x+_c + + 1_________ . + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 1 + + + + + + +EQN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EQN(1) + + + + The keywords ffrroomm and ttoo introduce lower and upper limits on + + arbitrary things: + _n->oo + lim + 0 + _>_~ + _n + _x_i is made with _l_i_m _f_r_o_m {_n-> _i_n_f } + + _s_u_m _f_r_o_m _0 _t_o _n _x _s_u_b _i. + + Left and right brackets, braces, etc., of the right height + are made with lleefftt and rriigghhtt:: _l_e_f_t [ _x _s_u_p _2 + _y _s_u_p _2 _o_v_e_r + + _a_l_p_h_a _r_i_g_h_t ] ~=~_1 produces + | + | + | + _x + 2 + + + _o( + + _y + 2 + __ + | + | + | + = 1. The rriigghhtt clause + + is optional. Legal characters after lleefftt and rriigghhtt are + braces, brackets, bars, cc and ff for ceiling and floor, and + "" for nothing at all (useful for a right-side-only + bracket). + + Vertical piles of things are made with ppiillee, llppiillee, ccppiillee, + + and rrppiillee: _p_i_l_e {_a _a_b_o_v_e _b _a_b_o_v_e _c} produces + _c + _b + _a + + . There can + + be an arbitrary number of elements in a pile. llppiillee left- + justifies, ppiillee and ccppiillee center, with different vertical + spacing, and rrppiillee right justifies. + + Matrices are made with mmaattrriixx: _m_a_t_r_i_x { _l_c_o_l { _x _s_u_b _i _a_b_o_v_e + + _y _s_u_b _2 } _c_c_o_l { _1 _a_b_o_v_e _2 } } produces + _y2 + + _x_i + + + 2 + + 1 + + . In addition, + + there is rrccooll for a right-justified column. + + Diacritical marks are made with ddoott, ddoottddoott, hhaatt, ttiillddee, + bbaarr, vveecc, ddyyaadd, and uunnddeerr: _x _d_o_t = _f(_t) _b_a_r is _x.=_f(_t)~~~~, _y + _d_o_t_d_o_t _b_a_r ~=~ _n _u_n_d_e_r is _y..~ = _n_, and _x _v_e_c ~=~ _y _d_y_a_d is + _x->= _y<-->. + + Sizes and font can be changed with ssiizzee _n or ssiizzee ++___n, rroommaann, + iittaalliicc, bboolldd, and ffoonntt _n. Size and fonts can be changed glo- + bally in a document by ggssiizzee _n and ggffoonntt _n, or by the + command-line arguments --ss_n and --ff_n. + + Normally subscripts and superscripts are reduced by 3 point + sizes from the previous size; this may be changed by the + command-line argument --pp_n. + + Successive display arguments can be lined up. Place mmaarrkk + before the desired lineup point in the first equation; place + lliinneeuupp at the place that is to line up vertically in subse- + quent equations. + + Shorthands may be defined or existing keywords redefined + with ddeeffiinnee: _d_e_f_i_n_e _t_h_i_n_g % _r_e_p_l_a_c_e_m_e_n_t % defines a new + token called _t_h_i_n_g which will be replaced by _r_e_p_l_a_c_e_m_e_n_t + + + +Printed 7/9/88 2 + + + + + + +EQN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EQN(1) + + + + whenever it appears thereafter. The % may be any character + that does not occur in _r_e_p_l_a_c_e_m_e_n_t. + + Keywords like _s_u_m (_>_~) _i_n_t () _i_n_f (oo) and shorthands like >= + (>_) -> (->), and != (=/) are recognized. Greek letters are + spelled out in the desired case, as in _a_l_p_h_a or _G_A_M_M_A. + Mathematical words like sin, cos, log are made Roman + automatically. _T_r_o_f_f(1) four-character escapes like \(bs () + can be used anywhere. Strings enclosed in double quotes + "..." are passed through untouched; this permits keywords to + be entered as text, and can be used to communicate with + _t_r_o_f_f when all else fails. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + troff(1), tbl(1), ms(7), eqnchar(7) + B. W. Kernighan and L. L. Cherry, _T_y_p_e_s_e_t_t_i_n_g _M_a_t_h_e_m_a_t_i_c_s- + _U_s_e_r'_s _G_u_i_d_e + J. F. Ossanna, _N_R_O_F_F/_T_R_O_F_F _U_s_e_r'_s _M_a_n_u_a_l + +BBUUGGSS + To embolden digits, parens, etc., it is necessary to quote + them, as in `bold "12.3"'. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/error.0 b/usr/man/cat1/error.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cd46d6c034 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/error.0 @@ -0,0 +1,264 @@ + + + +ERROR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ERROR(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + error - analyze and disperse compiler error messages + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + eerrrroorr [ --nn ] [ --ss ] [ --qq ] [ --vv ] [ --tt suffixlist ] [ --II + ignorefile ] [ name ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _E_r_r_o_r analyzes and optionally disperses the diagnostic error + messages produced by a number of compilers and language pro- + cessors to the source file and line where the errors + occurred. It can replace the painful, traditional methods + of scribbling abbreviations of errors on paper, and permits + error messages and source code to be viewed simultaneously + without machinations of multiple windows in a screen editor. + + _E_r_r_o_r looks at the error messages, either from the specified + file _n_a_m_e or from the standard input, and attempts to deter- + mine which language processor produced each error message, + determines the source file and line number to which the + error message refers, determines if the error message is to + be ignored or not, and inserts the (possibly slightly modi- + fied) error message into the source file as a comment on the + line preceding to which the line the error message refers. + Error messages which can't be categorized by language pro- + cessor or content are not inserted into any file, but are + sent to the standard output. _E_r_r_o_r touches source files + only after all input has been read. By specifying the --qq + query option, the user is asked to confirm any potentially + dangerous (such as touching a file) or verbose action. Oth- + erwise _e_r_r_o_r proceeds on its merry business. If the --tt + touch option and associated suffix list is given, _e_r_r_o_r will + restrict itself to touch only those files with suffices in + the suffix list. Error also can be asked (by specifying --vv)) + to invoke _v_i(1) on the files in which error messages were + inserted; this obviates the need to remember the names of + the files with errors. + + _E_r_r_o_r is intended to be run with its standard input con- + nected via a pipe to the error message source. Some + language processors put error messages on their standard + error file; others put their messages on the standard out- + put. Hence, both error sources should be piped together + into _e_r_r_o_r. For example, when using the _c_s_h syntax, + + make -s lint |& error -q -v + + will analyze all the error messages produced by whatever + programs _m_a_k_e runs when making lint. + + _E_r_r_o_r knows about the error messages produced by: _m_a_k_e, _c_c, + _c_p_p, _c_c_o_m, _a_s, _l_d, _l_i_n_t, _p_i, _p_c, _f_7_7, and _D_E_C _W_e_s_t_e_r_n + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1 + + + + + + +ERROR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ERROR(1) + + + + _R_e_s_e_a_r_c_h _M_o_d_u_l_a-_2. _E_r_r_o_r knows a standard format for error + messages produced by the language processors, so is sensi- + tive to changes in these formats. For all languages except + _P_a_s_c_a_l, error messages are restricted to be on one line. + Some error messages refer to more than one line in more than + one files; _e_r_r_o_r will duplicate the error message and insert + it at all of the places referenced. + + _E_r_r_o_r will do one of six things with error messages. + + _s_y_n_c_h_r_o_n_i_z_e + Some language processors produce short errors + describing which file it is processing. _E_r_r_o_r + uses these to determine the file name for + languages that don't include the file name in each + error message. These synchronization messages are + consumed entirely by _e_r_r_o_r. + + _d_i_s_c_a_r_d Error messages from _l_i_n_t that refer to one of the + two _l_i_n_t libraries, /_u_s_r/_l_i_b/_l_l_i_b-_l_c and + /_u_s_r/_l_i_b/_l_l_i_b-_p_o_r_t are discarded, to prevent + accidently touching these libraries. Again, these + error messages are consumed entirely by _e_r_r_o_r. + + _n_u_l_l_i_f_y Error messages from _l_i_n_t can be nullified if they + refer to a specific function, which is known to + generate diagnostics which are not interesting. + Nullified error messages are not inserted into the + source file, but are written to the standard out- + put. The names of functions to ignore are taken + from either the file named ._e_r_r_o_r_r_c in the users's + home directory, or from the file named by the --II + option. If the file does not exist, no error mes- + sages are nullified. If the file does exist, + there must be one function name per line. + + _n_o_t _f_i_l_e _s_p_e_c_i_f_i_c + Error messages that can't be intuited are grouped + together, and written to the standard output + before any files are touched. They will not be + inserted into any source file. + + _f_i_l_e _s_p_e_c_i_f_i_c + Error message that refer to a specific file, but + to no specific line, are written to the standard + output when that file is touched. + + _t_r_u_e _e_r_r_o_r_s + Error messages that can be intuited are candidates + for insertion into the file to which they refer. + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2 + + + + + + +ERROR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ERROR(1) + + + + Only true error messages are candidates for inserting into + the file they refer to. Other error messages are consumed + entirely by _e_r_r_o_r or are written to the standard output. + _E_r_r_o_r inserts the error messages into the source file on the + line preceding the line the language processor found in + error. Each error message is turned into a one line comment + for the language, and is internally flagged with the string + ``###'' at the beginning of the error, and ``%%%'' at the + end of the error. This makes pattern searching for errors + easier with an editor, and allows the messages to be easily + removed. In addition, each error message contains the + source line number for the line the message refers to. A + reasonably formatted source program can be recompiled with + the error messages still in it, without having the error + messages themselves cause future errors. For poorly format- + ted source programs in free format languages, such as C or + Pascal, it is possible to insert a comment into another com- + ment, which can wreak havoc with a future compilation. To + avoid this, programs with comments and source on the same + line should be formatted so that language statements appear + before comments. + + Options available with _e_r_r_o_r are: + + --nn Do _n_o_t touch any files; all error messages are sent to + the standard output. + + --qq The user is _q_u_e_r_i_e_d whether s/he wants to touch the + file. A ``y'' or ``n'' to the question is necessary to + continue. Absence of the --qq option implies that all + referenced files (except those referring to discarded + error messages) are to be touched. + + --vv After all files have been touched, overlay the visual + editor _v_i with it set up to edit all files touched, and + positioned in the first touched file at the first + error. If _v_i can't be found, try _e_x or _e_d from stan- + dard places. + + --tt Take the following argument as a suffix list. Files + whose suffixes do not appear in the suffix list are not + touched. The suffix list is dot separated, and ``*'' + wildcards work. Thus the suffix list: + + ".c.y.foo*.h" + + allows _e_r_r_o_r to touch files ending with ``.c'', ``.y'', + ``.foo*'' and ``.y''. + + --ss Print out _s_t_a_t_i_s_t_i_c_s regarding the error categoriza- + tion. Not too useful. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3 + + + + + + +ERROR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ERROR(1) + + + + _E_r_r_o_r catches interrupt and terminate signals, and if in the + insertion phase, will orderly terminate what it is doing. + +AAUUTTHHOORR + Robert Henry + +FFIILLEESS + ~/.errorrc function names to ignore for _l_i_n_t error + messages + /dev/tty user's teletype + +BBUUGGSS + Opens the teletype directly to do user querying. + + Source files with links make a new copy of the file with + only one link to it. + + Changing a language processor's format of error messages may + cause _e_r_r_o_r to not understand the error message. + + _E_r_r_o_r, since it is purely mechanical, will not filter out + subsequent errors caused by `floodgating' initiated by one + syntactically trivial error. Humans are still much better + at discarding these related errors. + + Pascal error messages belong after the lines affected (error + puts them before). The alignment of the `|' marking the + point of error is also disturbed by _e_r_r_o_r. + + _E_r_r_o_r was designed for work on CRT's at reasonably high + speed. It is less pleasant on slow speed terminals, and has + never been used on hardcopy terminals. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/ex.0 b/usr/man/cat1/ex.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e7b39e5939 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/ex.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +EX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EX(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + ex, edit - text editor + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + eexx [ -- ] [ --vv ] [ --tt tag ] [ --rr ] [ ++_c_o_m_m_a_n_d ] [ --ll ] name + ... + eeddiitt [ ex options ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _E_x is the root of a family of editors: _e_d_i_t, _e_x and _v_i. _E_x + is a superset of _e_d, with the most notable extension being a + display editing facility. Display based editing is the + focus of _v_i. + + If you have not used _e_d, or are a casual user, you will find + that the editor _e_d_i_t is convenient for you. It avoids some + of the complexities of _e_x used mostly by systems programmers + and persons very familiar with _e_d. + + If you have a CRT terminal, you may wish to use a display + based editor; in this case see _v_i(1), which is a command + which focuses on the display editing portion of _e_x. + +DDOOCCUUMMEENNTTAATTIIOONN + The document _E_d_i_t: _A _t_u_t_o_r_i_a_l (USD:14) provides a comprehen- + sive introduction to _e_d_i_t assuming no previous knowledge of + computers or the UNIX system. + + The _E_x _R_e_f_e_r_e_n_c_e _M_a_n_u_a_l - _V_e_r_s_i_o_n _3._7 (USD:16) is a + comprehensive and complete manual for the command mode + features of _e_x, but you cannot learn to use the editor by + reading it. For an introduction to more advanced forms of + editing using the command mode of _e_x see the editing docu- + ments written by Brian Kernighan for the editor _e_d; the + material in the introductory and advanced documents works + also with _e_x. + + _A_n _I_n_t_r_o_d_u_c_t_i_o_n _t_o _D_i_s_p_l_a_y _E_d_i_t_i_n_g _w_i_t_h _V_i (USD:15) intro- + duces the display editor _v_i and provides reference material + on _v_i. In addition, the _V_i _Q_u_i_c_k _R_e_f_e_r_e_n_c_e card summarizes + the commands of _v_i in a useful, functional way, and is use- + ful with the _I_n_t_r_o_d_u_c_t_i_o_n. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/lib/ex?.?strings error messages + /usr/lib/ex?.?recover recover command + /usr/lib/ex?.?preserve preserve command + /etc/termcap describes capabilities of terminals + ~/.exrc editor startup file + /tmp/Ex_n_n_n_n_n editor temporary + /tmp/Rx_n_n_n_n_n named buffer temporary + /usr/preserve preservation directory + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 1 + + + + + + +EX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EX(1) + + + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + awk(1), ed(1), grep(1), sed(1), grep(1), vi(1), termcap(5), + environ(7) + +AAUUTTHHOORR + Originally written by William Joy + Mark Horton has maintained the editor since version 2.7, + adding macros, support for many unusual terminals, and other + features such as word abbreviation mode. + +BBUUGGSS + The _u_n_d_o command causes all marks to be lost on lines + changed and then restored if the marked lines were changed. + + _U_n_d_o never clears the buffer modified condition. + + The _z command prints a number of logical rather than physi- + cal lines. More than a screen full of output may result if + long lines are present. + + File input/output errors don't print a name if the command + line ``--'' option is used. + + There is no easy way to do a single scan ignoring case. + + The editor does not warn if text is placed in named buffers + and not used before exiting the editor. + + Null characters are discarded in input files, and cannot + appear in resultant files. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/expand.0 b/usr/man/cat1/expand.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c7e7d328ce --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/expand.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +EXPAND(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EXPAND(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + expand, unexpand - expand tabs to spaces, and vice versa + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + eexxppaanndd [ -tabstop ] [ -tab1,tab2,...,tabn ] [ file ... ] + uunneexxppaanndd [ --aa ] [ file ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _E_x_p_a_n_d processes the named files or the standard input writ- + ing the standard output with tabs changed into blanks. + Backspace characters are preserved into the output and + decrement the column count for tab calculations. _E_x_p_a_n_d is + useful for pre-processing character files (before sorting, + looking at specific columns, etc.) that contain tabs. + + If a single _t_a_b_s_t_o_p argument is given, then tabs are set + _t_a_b_s_t_o_p spaces apart instead of the default 8. If multiple + tabstops are given then the tabs are set at those specific + columns. + + _U_n_e_x_p_a_n_d puts tabs back into the data from the standard + input or the named files and writes the result on the stan- + dard output. By default, only leading blanks and tabs are + reconverted to maximal strings of tabs. If the --aa option is + given, then tabs are inserted whenever they would compress + the resultant file by replacing two or more characters. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/explain.0 b/usr/man/cat1/explain.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7166a2a2f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/explain.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +DICTION(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DICTION(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + diction, explain - print wordy sentences; thesaurus for dic- + tion + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ddiiccttiioonn [ --mmll ] [ --mmmm ] [ --nn ] [ --ff pfile ] file ... + eexxppllaaiinn + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _D_i_c_t_i_o_n finds all sentences in a document that contain + phrases from a data base of bad or wordy diction. Each + phrase is bracketed with [ ]. Because _d_i_c_t_i_o_n runs _d_e_r_o_f_f + before looking at the text, formatting header files should + be included as part of the input. The default macro package + --mmss may be overridden with the flag --mmmm.. The flag --mmll which + causes ddeerrooffff to skip lists, should be used if the document + contains many lists of non-sentences. The user may supply + her/his own pattern file to be used in addition to the + default file with --ff _p_f_i_l_e. If the flag --nn is also supplied + the default file will be suppressed. + + _E_x_p_l_a_i_n is an interactive thesaurus for the phrases found by + diction. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + deroff(1) + +BBUUGGSS + Use of non-standard formatting macros may cause incorrect + sentence breaks. In particular, _d_i_c_t_i_o_n doesn't grok --mmee.. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/expr.0 b/usr/man/cat1/expr.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..eca65532c8 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/expr.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +EXPR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EXPR(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + expr - evaluate arguments as an expression + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + eexxpprr arg ...... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + The arguments are taken as an expression. After evaluation, + the result is written on the standard output. Each token of + the expression is a separate argument. + + The operators and keywords are listed below. The list is in + order of increasing precedence, with equal precedence opera- + tors grouped. + + _e_x_p_r | _e_x_p_r + yields the first _e_x_p_r if it is neither null nor `0', + otherwise yields the second _e_x_p_r. + + _e_x_p_r & _e_x_p_r + yields the first _e_x_p_r if neither _e_x_p_r is null or `0', + otherwise yields `0'. + + _e_x_p_r _r_e_l_o_p _e_x_p_r + where _r_e_l_o_p _i_s _o_n_e _o_f < <= = != >= >, yields `1' if the + indicated comparison is true, `0' if false. The com- + parison is numeric if both _e_x_p_r are integers, otherwise + lexicographic. + + _e_x_p_r + _e_x_p_r + _e_x_p_r - _e_x_p_r + addition or subtraction of the arguments. + + _e_x_p_r * _e_x_p_r + _e_x_p_r / _e_x_p_r + _e_x_p_r % _e_x_p_r + multiplication, division, or remainder of the argu- + ments. + + _e_x_p_r : _e_x_p_r + The matching operator compares the string first argu- + ment with the regular expression second argument; regu- + lar expression syntax is the same as that of _e_d(1). + The \\((......\\)) pattern symbols can be used to select a + portion of the first argument. Otherwise, the matching + operator yields the number of characters matched (`0' + on failure). + + ( _e_x_p_r ) + parentheses for grouping. + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +EXPR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EXPR(1) + + + + Examples: + + To add 1 to the Shell variable _a: + + a=`expr $a + 1` + + To find the filename part (least significant part) of the + pathname stored in variable _a, which may or may not contain + `/': + + expr $a : '.*/\(.*\)' '|' $a + + Note the quoted Shell metacharacters. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + sh(1), test(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + _E_x_p_r returns the following exit codes: + + 0 if the expression is neither null nor `0', + 1 if the expression is null or `0', + 2 for invalid expressions. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/f77.0 b/usr/man/cat1/f77.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ab3a1ad2e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/f77.0 @@ -0,0 +1,264 @@ + + + +F77(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual F77(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + f77 - Fortran 77 compiler + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ff7777 [ option ] ... file ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _F_7_7 is the UNIX Fortran 77 compiler. It accepts several + types of arguments: + + Arguments whose names end with `.f' are taken to be Fortran + 77 source programs; they are compiled, and each object pro- + gram is left on the file in the current directory whose name + is that of the source with `.o' substituted for '.f'. + + Arguments whose names end with `.F' are also taken to be + Fortran 77 source programs; these are first processed by the + C preprocessor before being compiled by _f_7_7. + + Arguments whose names end with `.r' or `.e' are taken to be + Ratfor or EFL source programs respectively; these are first + transformed by the appropriate preprocessor, then compiled + by f77. + + Arguments whose names end with `.c' or `.s' are taken to be + C or assembly source programs and are compiled or assembled, + producing a `.o' file. + + The following options have the same meaning as in _c_c(1). + See _l_d(1) for load-time options. + + --cc Suppress loading and produce `.o' files for each source + file. + + --gg Produce additional symbol table information for _d_b_x(1) + and pass the --llgg flag to _l_d(1) so that on abnormal ter- + minations, the memory image is written to file _c_o_r_e. + Incompatible with --OO. + + --oo output + Name the final output file _o_u_t_p_u_t instead of `a.out'. + + --pp Prepare object files for profiling, see _p_r_o_f(1). + + --ppgg Causes the compiler to produce counting code in the + manner of --pp,, but invokes a run-time recording mechan- + ism that keeps more extensive statistics and produces a + _g_m_o_n._o_u_t file at normal termination. An execution pro- + file can then be generated by use of _g_p_r_o_f(1). + + --ww Suppress all warning messages. If the option is + `-w66', only Fortran 66 compatibility warnings are + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1 + + + + + + +F77(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual F77(1) + + + + suppressed. + + --DD_n_a_m_e=_d_e_f + + --DD_n_a_m_e + Define the _n_a_m_e to the C preprocessor, as if by + `#define'. If no definition is given, the name is + defined as "1". (`.F' suffix files only). + + --II_d_i_r + `#include' files whose names do not begin with `/' are + always sought first in the directory of the _f_i_l_e argu- + ment, then in directories named in --II options, then in + directories on a standard list. (`.F' suffix files + only). + + --OO Invoke an object-code optimizer. Incompatible with --gg. + + --SS Compile the named programs, and leave the assembler- + language output on corresponding files suffixed `.s'. + (No `.o' is created.). + + The following options are peculiar to _f_7_7. + + --dd Used for debugging the compiler. + + --ii22 On machines which support short integers, make the + default integer constants and variables short. (--ii44 is + the standard value of this option). All logical quanti- + ties will be short. + + --qq Suppress printing of file names and program unit names + during compilation. + + --mm Apply the M4 preprocessor to each `.r' file before + transforming it with the Ratfor or EFL preprocessor. + + --oonneettrriipp + + --11 Compile DO loops that are performed at least once if + reached. (Fortran 77 DO loops are not performed at all + if the upper limit is smaller than the lower limit.) + + --rr88 Treat all floating point variables, constants, func- + tions and intrinsics as double precision and all com- + plex quantities as double complex. + + --uu Make the default type of a variable `undefined' rather + than using the default Fortran rules. + + --vv Print the version number of the compiler, and the name + of each pass as it executes. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2 + + + + + + +F77(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual F77(1) + + + + --CC Compile code to check that subscripts are within + declared array bounds. For multi-dimensional arrays, + only the equivalent linear subscript is checked. + + --FF Apply the C preprocessor to `.F' files, and the EFL, or + Ratfor preprocessors to `.e' and `.r' files, put the + result in the file with the suffix changed to `.f', but + do not compile. + + --EE_x Use the string _x as an EFL option in processing `.e' + files. + + --RR_x Use the string _x as a Ratfor option in processing `.r' + files. + + --NN[qqxxssccnn]_n_n_n + Make static tables in the compiler bigger. The compiler + will complain if it overflows its tables and suggest + you apply one or more of these flags. These flags have + the following meanings: + + qq Maximum number of equivalenced variables. Default + is 150. + + xx Maximum number of external names (common block + names, subroutine and function names). Default is + 200. + + ss Maximum number of statement numbers. Default is + 401. + + cc Maximum depth of nesting for control statements + (e.g. DO loops). Default is 20. + + nn Maximum number of identifiers. Default is 1009. + + --UU Do not convert upper case letters to lower case. The + default is to convert Fortran programs to lower case + except within character string constants. + + Other arguments are taken to be either loader option argu- + ments, or F77-compatible object programs, typically produced + by an earlier run, or perhaps libraries of F77-compatible + routines. These programs, together with the results of any + compilations specified, are loaded (in the order given) to + produce an executable program with name `a.out'. + + Programs compiled with _f_7_7 produce memory dumps in file _c_o_r_e + upon abnormal termination if the --gg flag was specified dur- + ing loading. If the environment variable _f_7_7__d_u_m_p__f_l_a_g is + set to a value beginning with yy or nn, dumps for abnormal + terminations are respectively forced or suppressed. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3 + + + + + + +F77(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual F77(1) + + + +FFIILLEESS + file.[fFresc] input file + file.o object file + a.out loaded output + /usr/lib/f77pass1 compiler + /lib/f1 pass 2 + /lib/c2 optional optimizer + /lib/cpp C preprocessor + /usr/lib/libF77.a intrinsic function library + /usr/lib/libI77.a Fortran I/O library + /usr/lib/libU77.a UNIX interface library + /usr/lib/libm.a math library + /lib/libc.a C library, see section 3 + /usr/lib/libF77_p.a profiling intrinsic function library + /usr/lib/libI77_p.a profiling Fortran I/O library + /usr/lib/libU77_p.a profiling UNIX interface library + /usr/lib/libm_p.a profiling math library + /usr/lib/libc_p.a profiling C library, see section 3 + mon.out file produced for analysis by prof(1). + gmon.out file produced for analysis by gprof(1). + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + S. I. Feldman, P. J. Weinberger, J. Berkman, _A _P_o_r_t_a_b_l_e _F_o_r_- + _t_r_a_n _7_7 _C_o_m_p_i_l_e_r + D. L. Wasley, J. Berkman, _I_n_t_r_o_d_u_c_t_i_o_n _t_o _t_h_e _f_7_7 _I/_O + _L_i_b_r_a_r_y + fpr(1), fsplit(1), ld(1), ar(1), ranlib(1), dbx(1), + intro(3f) + efl(1), ratfor(1), struct(1), prof(1), gprof(1), cc(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + The diagnostics produced by _f_7_7 itself are intended to be + self-explanatory. Occasional messages may be produced by + the loader. + +BBUUGGSS + Files longer than about 50,000 lines must be split up to be + compiled. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/false.0 b/usr/man/cat1/false.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b0e431fd84 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/false.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +FALSE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FALSE(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + false, true - provide truth values + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttrruuee + + ffaallssee + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_r_u_e and _f_a_l_s_e are usually used in a Bourne shell script. + They test for the appropriate status "true" or "false" + before running (or failing to run) a list of commands. + +EEXXAAMMPPLLEE + + while false + do + command list + done + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + csh(1), sh(1), true(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + _F_a_l_s_e has exit status nonzero. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/fgrep.0 b/usr/man/cat1/fgrep.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..272e038945 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/fgrep.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +GREP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GREP(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + grep, egrep, fgrep - search a file for a pattern + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ggrreepp [ option ] ... expression [ file ] ... + + eeggrreepp [ option ] ... [ expression ] [ file ] ... + + ffggrreepp [ option ] ... [ strings ] [ file ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + Commands of the _g_r_e_p family search the input _f_i_l_e_s (standard + input default) for lines matching a pattern. Normally, each + line found is copied to the standard output. _G_r_e_p patterns + are limited regular expressions in the style of _e_x(1); it + uses a compact nondeterministic algorithm. _E_g_r_e_p patterns + are full regular expressions; it uses a fast deterministic + algorithm that sometimes needs exponential space. _F_g_r_e_p + patterns are fixed strings; it is fast and compact. The + following options are recognized. + + --vv All lines but those matching are printed. + + --xx (Exact) only lines matched in their entirety are + printed (_f_g_r_e_p only). + + --cc Only a count of matching lines is printed. + + --ll The names of files with matching lines are listed + (once) separated by newlines. + + --nn Each line is preceded by its relative line number in + the file. + + --bb Each line is preceded by the block number on which it + was found. This is sometimes useful in locating disk + block numbers by context. + + --hh Never print filename headers with output lines. + + --oo Always print filename headers with output lines. + + --ii The case of letters is ignored in making comparisons - + that is, upper and lower case are considered identical. + + --ss Silent mode. Nothing is printed (except error mes- + sages). This is useful for checking the error status. + + --ww The expression is searched for as a word (as if sur- + rounded by `\<' and `\>', see _e_x(1).) (_g_r_e_p only) + + --ee _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n + + + +Printed 7/9/88 October 8, 1987 1 + + + + + + +GREP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GREP(1) + + + + Same as a simple _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n argument, but useful when + the _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n begins with a -. + + --ff _f_i_l_e + The regular expression (_e_g_r_e_p) or string list (_f_g_r_e_p) + is taken from the _f_i_l_e. + + In all cases the file name is shown if there is more than + one input file. Care should be taken when using the charac- + ters $ * [ ^ | ( ) and \ in the _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n as they are also + meaningful to the Shell. It is safest to enclose the entire + _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n argument in single quotes ' '. + + _F_g_r_e_p searches for lines that contain one of the (newline- + separated) _s_t_r_i_n_g_s. + + _E_g_r_e_p accepts extended regular expressions. In the follow- + ing description `character' excludes newline: + + A \ followed by a single character other than newline + matches that character. + + The character ^ matches the beginning of a line. + + The character $ matches the end of a line. + + A .. (period) matches any character. + + A single character not otherwise endowed with special + meaning matches that character. + + A string enclosed in brackets [] matches any single + character from the string. Ranges of ASCII character + codes may be abbreviated as in `a-z0-9'. A ] may occur + only as the first character of the string. A literal - + must be placed where it can't be mistaken as a range + indicator. + + A regular expression followed by an * (asterisk) + matches a sequence of 0 or more matches of the regular + expression. A regular expression followed by a + + (plus) matches a sequence of 1 or more matches of the + regular expression. A regular expression followed by a + ? (question mark) matches a sequence of 0 or 1 matches + of the regular expression. + + Two regular expressions concatenated match a match of + the first followed by a match of the second. + + Two regular expressions separated by | or newline match + either a match for the first or a match for the second. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 October 8, 1987 2 + + + + + + +GREP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GREP(1) + + + + A regular expression enclosed in parentheses matches a + match for the regular expression. + + The order of precedence of operators at the same parenthesis + level is [] then *+? then concatenation then | and newline. + + Ideally there should be only one _g_r_e_p, but we don't know a + single algorithm that spans a wide enough range of space- + time tradeoffs. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + ex(1), sed(1), sh(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Exit status is 0 if any matches are found, 1 if none, 2 for + syntax errors or inaccessible files. + +BBUUGGSS + Lines are limited to 256 characters; longer lines are trun- + cated. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 October 8, 1987 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/file.0 b/usr/man/cat1/file.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..236618bfea --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/file.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +FILE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FILE(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + file - determine file type + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ffiillee file ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _F_i_l_e performs a series of tests on each argument in an + attempt to classify it. If an argument appears to be ascii, + _f_i_l_e examines the first 512 bytes and tries to guess its + language. + +BBUUGGSS + It often makes mistakes. In particular it often suggests + that command files are C programs. + + Does not recognize Pascal or LISP. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/finger.0 b/usr/man/cat1/finger.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7fd78b31a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/finger.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +FINGER(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FINGER(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + finger - user information lookup program + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ffiinnggeerr [ options ] name ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + By default _f_i_n_g_e_r lists the login name, full name, terminal + name and write status (as a `*' before the terminal name if + write permission is denied), idle time, login time, and + office location and phone number (if they are known) for + each current UNIX user. (Idle time is minutes if it is a + single integer, hours and minutes if a ':' is present, or + days and hours if a 'd' is present.) + + A longer format also exists and is used by _f_i_n_g_e_r whenever a + list of people's names is given. (Account names as well as + first and last names of users are accepted.) This format is + multi-line, and includes all the information described above + as well as the user's home directory and login shell, any + plan which the person has placed in the file ._p_l_a_n in their + home directory, and the project on which they are working + from the file ._p_r_o_j_e_c_t also in the home directory. + + _F_i_n_g_e_r may be used to lookup users on a remote machine. The + format is to specify the user as ``user@host.'' If the user + name is left off, the standard format listing is provided on + the remote machine. + + _F_i_n_g_e_r options include: + + --mm Match arguments only on user name. + + --ll Force long output format. + + --pp Suppress printing of the ._p_l_a_n files + + --ss Force short output format. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/utmp who file + /etc/passwd for users names, offices, ... + /usr/adm/lastlog last login times + ~/.plan plans + ~/.project projects + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + chfn(1), w(1), who(1) + +AAUUTTHHOORR + Earl T. Cohen + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 1 + + + + + + +FINGER(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FINGER(1) + + + +BBUUGGSS + Only the first line of the ._p_r_o_j_e_c_t file is printed. + + The encoding of the gcos field is UCB dependent - it knows + that an office `197MC' is `197M Cory Hall', and that `529BE' + is `529B Evans Hall'. It also knows that a four digit + office phone number should have a ``x2-'' prepended. + + There is no way to pass arguments to the remote machine as + _f_i_n_g_e_r uses an internet standard port. + + A user information data base is in the works and will radi- + cally alter the way the information that _f_i_n_g_e_r uses is + stored. Finger will require extensive modification when + this is implemented. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/fmt.0 b/usr/man/cat1/fmt.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..110392c2cd --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/fmt.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +FMT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FMT(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + fmt - simple text formatter + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ffmmtt [ name ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _F_m_t is a simple text formatter which reads the concatenation + of input files (or standard input if none are given) and + produces on standard output a version of its input with + lines as close to 72 characters long as possible. The spac- + ing at the beginning of the input lines is preserved in the + output, as are blank lines and interword spacing. + + _F_m_t is meant to format mail messages prior to sending, but + may also be useful for other simple tasks. For instance, + within visual mode of the _e_x editor (e.g. _v_i) the command + !}fmt + will reformat a paragraph, evening the lines. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + nroff(1), mail(1) + +AAUUTTHHOORR + Kurt Shoens + +BBUUGGSS + The program was designed to be simple and fast - for more + complex operations, the standard text processors are likely + to be more appropriate. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/fold.0 b/usr/man/cat1/fold.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cb86678709 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/fold.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +FOLD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FOLD(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + fold - fold long lines for finite width output device + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ffoolldd [ -width ] [ file ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _F_o_l_d is a filter which will fold the contents of the speci- + fied files, or the standard input if no files are specified, + breaking the lines to have maximum width _w_i_d_t_h. The default + for _w_i_d_t_h is 80. _W_i_d_t_h should be a multiple of 8 if tabs + are present, or the tabs should be expanded using _e_x_p_a_n_d(1) + before coming to _f_o_l_d. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + expand(1) + +BBUUGGSS + If underlining is present it may be messed up by folding. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/for.0 b/usr/man/cat1/for.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..faac4cd331 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/for.0 @@ -0,0 +1,594 @@ + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + sh, for, case, if, while, ::, .., break, continue, cd, eval, + exec, exit, export, login, read, readonly, set, shift, + times, trap, umask, wait - command language + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + sshh [ --cceeiikknnrrssttuuvvxx ] [ arg ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_h is a command programming language that executes commands + read from a terminal or a file. See iinnvvooccaattiioonn for the + meaning of arguments to the shell. + + CCoommmmaannddss.. + A _s_i_m_p_l_e-_c_o_m_m_a_n_d is a sequence of non blank _w_o_r_d_s separated + by blanks (a blank is a ttaabb or a ssppaaccee). The first word + specifies the name of the command to be executed. Except as + specified below the remaining words are passed as arguments + to the invoked command. The command name is passed as argu- + ment 0 (see _e_x_e_c_v_e(2)). The _v_a_l_u_e of a simple-command is + its exit status if it terminates normally or 200+_s_t_a_t_u_s if + it terminates abnormally (see _s_i_g_v_e_c(2) for a list of status + values). + + A _p_i_p_e_l_i_n_e is a sequence of one or more _c_o_m_m_a_n_d_s separated + by ||.. The standard output of each command but the last is + connected by a _p_i_p_e(2) to the standard input of the next + command. Each command is run as a separate process; the + shell waits for the last command to terminate. + + A _l_i_s_t is a sequence of one or more _p_i_p_e_l_i_n_e_s separated by + ;;, &&, &&&& or |||| and optionally terminated by ;; or &&. ;; and && + have equal precedence which is lower than that of &&&& and ||||, + &&&& and |||| also have equal precedence. A semicolon causes + sequential execution; an ampersand causes the preceding + _p_i_p_e_l_i_n_e to be executed without waiting for it to finish. + The symbol &&&& (||||) causes the _l_i_s_t following to be executed + only if the preceding _p_i_p_e_l_i_n_e returns a zero (non zero) + value. Newlines may appear in a _l_i_s_t, instead of semi- + colons, to delimit commands. + + A _c_o_m_m_a_n_d is either a simple-command or one of the follow- + ing. The value returned by a command is that of the last + simple-command executed in the command. + + ffoorr _n_a_m_e [iinn _w_o_r_d ...] ddoo _l_i_s_t ddoonnee + Each time a ffoorr command is executed _n_a_m_e is set to the + next word in the ffoorr word list. If iinn _w_o_r_d ... is + omitted, iinn ""$$@@"" is assumed. Execution ends when there + are no more words in the list. + + ccaassee _w_o_r_d iinn [_p_a_t_t_e_r_n [ || _p_a_t_t_e_r_n ] ... )) _l_i_s_t ;;;;] ... eessaacc + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + A ccaassee command executes the _l_i_s_t associated with the + first pattern that matches _w_o_r_d. The form of the pat- + terns is the same as that used for file name genera- + tion. + + iiff _l_i_s_t tthheenn _l_i_s_t [eelliiff _l_i_s_t tthheenn _l_i_s_t] ... [eellssee _l_i_s_t] ffii + The _l_i_s_t following iiff is executed and if it returns + zero the _l_i_s_t following tthheenn is executed. Otherwise, + the _l_i_s_t following eelliiff is executed and if its value is + zero the _l_i_s_t following tthheenn is executed. Failing that + the eellssee _l_i_s_t is executed. + + wwhhiillee _l_i_s_t [ddoo _l_i_s_t] ddoonnee + A wwhhiillee command repeatedly executes the wwhhiillee _l_i_s_t and + if its value is zero executes the ddoo _l_i_s_t; otherwise + the loop terminates. The value returned by a wwhhiillee + command is that of the last executed command in the ddoo + _l_i_s_t. uunnttiill may be used in place of wwhhiillee to negate the + loop termination test. + + (( _l_i_s_t )) + Execute _l_i_s_t in a subshell. + + {{ _l_i_s_t }} + _l_i_s_t is simply executed. + + The following words are only recognized as the first word of + a command and when not quoted. + + iiff tthheenn eellssee eelliiff ffii ccaassee iinn eessaacc ffoorr wwhhiillee uunnttiill ddoo + ddoonnee {{ }} + + CCoommmmaanndd ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonn.. + The standard output from a command enclosed in a pair of + back quotes (````) may be used as part or all of a word; + trailing newlines are removed. + + PPaarraammeetteerr ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonn.. + The character $$ is used to introduce substitutable parame- + ters. Positional parameters may be assigned values by sseett. + Variables may be set by writing + + _n_a_m_e==_v_a_l_u_e [ _n_a_m_e==_v_a_l_u_e ] ... + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r}} + A _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is a sequence of letters, digits or under- + scores (a _n_a_m_e), a digit, or any of the characters ** @@ + ## ?? -- $$ !!.. The value, if any, of the parameter is sub- + stituted. The braces are required only when _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r + is followed by a letter, digit, or underscore that is + not to be interpreted as part of its name. If _p_a_r_a_m_e_- + _t_e_r is a digit, it is a positional parameter. If + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is ** or @@ then all the positional parameters, + starting with $$11, are substituted separated by spaces. + $$00 is set from argument zero when the shell is invoked. + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r-_w_o_r_d}} + If _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is set, substitute its value; otherwise + substitute _w_o_r_d. + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r=_w_o_r_d}} + If _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is not set, set it to _w_o_r_d; the value of + the parameter is then substituted. Positional parame- + ters may not be assigned to in this way. + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r?_w_o_r_d}} + If _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is set, substitute its value; otherwise, + print _w_o_r_d and exit from the shell. If _w_o_r_d is omit- + ted, a standard message is printed. + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r+_w_o_r_d}} + If _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is set, substitute _w_o_r_d; otherwise substi- + tute nothing. + + In the above _w_o_r_d is not evaluated unless it is to be used + as the substituted string. (So that, for example, echo + ${d-'pwd'} will only execute _p_w_d if _d is unset.) + + The following _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s are automatically set by the shell. + + ## The number of positional parameters in decimal. + -- Options supplied to the shell on invocation or by + sseett. + ?? The value returned by the last executed command in + decimal. + $$ The process number of this shell. + !! The process number of the last background command + invoked. + + The following _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s are used but not set by the shell. + + HHOOMMEE The default argument (home directory) for the ccdd + command. + PPAATTHH The search path for commands (see eexxeeccuuttiioonn). + MMAAIILL If this variable is set to the name of a mail + file, the shell informs the user of the arrival of + mail in the specified file. + PPSS11 Primary prompt string, by default '$ '. + PPSS22 Secondary prompt string, by default '> '. + IIFFSS Internal field separators, normally ssppaaccee, ttaabb, + and nneewwlliinnee. IIFFSS is ignored if _s_h is running as + root or if the effective user id differs from the + real user id. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + BBllaannkk iinntteerrpprreettaattiioonn.. + After parameter and command substitution, any results of + substitution are scanned for internal field separator char- + acters (those found in $$IIFFSS) and split into distinct argu- + ments where such characters are found. Explicit null argu- + ments ("" or '') are retained. Implicit null arguments + (those resulting from _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s that have no values) are + removed. + + FFiillee nnaammee ggeenneerraattiioonn.. + Following substitution, each command word is scanned for the + characters **, ?? and [[.. If one of these characters appears, + the word is regarded as a pattern. The word is replaced + with alphabetically sorted file names that match the pat- + tern. If no file name is found that matches the pattern, + the word is left unchanged. The character .. at the start of + a file name or immediately following a //, and the character + //, must be matched explicitly. + + ** Matches any string, including the null string. + ?? Matches any single character. + [[......]] + Matches any one of the characters enclosed. A pair of + characters separated by -- matches any character lexi- + cally between the pair. + + QQuuoottiinngg.. + The following characters have a special meaning to the shell + and cause termination of a word unless quoted. + + ;; && (( )) || << >> nneewwlliinnee ssppaaccee ttaabb + + A character may be _q_u_o_t_e_d by preceding it with a \\.. \\nneeww-- + lliinnee is ignored. All characters enclosed between a pair of + quote marks (''''), except a single quote, are quoted. Inside + double quotes ("""") parameter and command substitution occurs + and \\ quotes the characters \\ '' "" and $$. + + ""$$**"" is equivalent to ""$$11 $$22 ......"" whereas + ""$$@@"" is equivalent to ""$$11"" ""$$22"" ...... .. + + PPrroommppttiinngg.. + When used interactively, the shell prompts with the value of + PS1 before reading a command. If at any time a newline is + typed and further input is needed to complete a command, the + secondary prompt ($$PPSS22) is issued. + + IInnppuutt oouuttppuutt.. + Before a command is executed its input and output may be + redirected using a special notation interpreted by the + shell. The following may appear anywhere in a simple- + command or may precede or follow a _c_o_m_m_a_n_d and are not + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + passed on to the invoked command. Substitution occurs + before _w_o_r_d or _d_i_g_i_t is used. + + <_w_o_r_d + Use file _w_o_r_d as standard input (file descriptor 0). + + >_w_o_r_d + Use file _w_o_r_d as standard output (file descriptor 1). + If the file does not exist, it is created; otherwise it + is truncated to zero length. + + >>_w_o_r_d + Use file _w_o_r_d as standard output. If the file exists, + output is appended (by seeking to the end); otherwise + the file is created. + + <<_w_o_r_d + The shell input is read up to a line the same as _w_o_r_d, + or end of file. The resulting document becomes the + standard input. If any character of _w_o_r_d is quoted, no + interpretation is placed upon the characters of the + document; otherwise, parameter and command substitution + occurs, \\nneewwlliinnee is ignored, and \\ is used to quote the + characters \\ $$ '' and the first character of _w_o_r_d. + + <&_d_i_g_i_t + The standard input is duplicated from file descriptor + _d_i_g_i_t; see _d_u_p(2). Similarly for the standard output + using >. + + <&- The standard input is closed. Similarly for the stan- + dard output using >. + + If one of the above is preceded by a digit, the file + descriptor created is that specified by the digit (instead + of the default 0 or 1). For example, + + ... 2>&1 + + creates file descriptor 2 to be a duplicate of file descrip- + tor 1. + + If a command is followed by && then the default standard + input for the command is the empty file (/dev/null). Other- + wise, the environment for the execution of a command con- + tains the file descriptors of the invoking shell as modified + by input output specifications. + + EEnnvviirroonnmmeenntt.. + The environment is a list of name-value pairs that is passed + to an executed program in the same way as a normal argument + list; see _e_x_e_c_v_e(2) and _e_n_v_i_r_o_n(7). The shell interacts + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 5 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + with the environment in several ways. On invocation, the + shell scans the environment and creates a _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r for each + name found, giving it the corresponding value. Executed + commands inherit the same environment. If the user modifies + the values of these _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s or creates new ones, none of + these affects the environment unless the eexxppoorrtt command is + used to bind the shell's _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r to the environment. The + environment seen by any executed command is thus composed of + any unmodified name-value pairs originally inherited by the + shell, plus any modifications or additions, all of which + must be noted in eexxppoorrtt commands. + + The environment for any _s_i_m_p_l_e-_c_o_m_m_a_n_d may be augmented by + prefixing it with one or more assignments to _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s. + Thus these two lines are equivalent + + TERM=450 cmd args + (export TERM; TERM=450; cmd args) + + If the --kk flag is set, _a_l_l keyword arguments are placed in + the environment, even if the occur after the command name. + The following prints 'a=b c' and 'c': + echo a=b c + set -k + echo a=b c + + SSiiggnnaallss.. + The INTERRUPT and QUIT signals for an invoked command are + ignored if the command is followed by &&; otherwise signals + have the values inherited by the shell from its parent. + (But see also ttrraapp..) + + EExxeeccuuttiioonn.. + Each time a command is executed the above substitutions are + carried out. Except for the 'special commands' listed below + a new process is created and an attempt is made to execute + the command via an _e_x_e_c_v_e(2). + + The shell parameter $$PPAATTHH defines the search path for the + directory containing the command. Each alternative direc- + tory name is separated by a colon (::). The default path is + :://bbiinn:://uussrr//bbiinn. If the command name contains a /, the + search path is not used. Otherwise, each directory in the + path is searched for an executable file. If the file has + execute permission but is not an _a._o_u_t file, it is assumed + to be a file containing shell commands. A subshell (i.e., a + separate process) is spawned to read it. A parenthesized + command is also executed in a subshell. + + SSppeecciiaall ccoommmmaannddss.. + The following commands are executed in the shell process and + except where specified no input output redirection is + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 6 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + permitted for such commands. + + ## For non-interactive shells, everything following the ## + is treated as a comment, i.e. the rest of the line is + ignored. For interactive shells, the ## has no special + effect. + + :: No effect; the command does nothing. + .. _f_i_l_e + Read and execute commands from _f_i_l_e and return. The + search path $$PPAATTHH is used to find the directory con- + taining _f_i_l_e. + bbrreeaakk [_n] + Exit from the enclosing ffoorr or wwhhiillee loop, if any. If + _n is specified, break _n levels. + ccoonnttiinnuuee [_n] + Resume the next iteration of the enclosing ffoorr or wwhhiillee + loop. If _n is specified, resume at the _n-th enclosing + loop. + ccdd [_a_r_g] + Change the current directory to _a_r_g. The shell parame- + ter $$HHOOMMEE is the default _a_r_g. + eevvaall [_a_r_g ...] + The arguments are read as input to the shell and the + resulting command(s) executed. + eexxeecc [_a_r_g ...] + The command specified by the arguments is executed in + place of this shell without creating a new process. + Input output arguments may appear and if no other argu- + ments are given cause the shell input output to be + modified. + eexxiitt [_n] + Causes a non interactive shell to exit with the exit + status specified by _n. If _n is omitted, the exit status + is that of the last command executed. (An end of file + will also exit from the shell.) + eexxppoorrtt [_n_a_m_e ...] + The given names are marked for automatic export to the + _e_n_v_i_r_o_n_m_e_n_t of subsequently-executed commands. If no + arguments are given, a list of exportable names is + printed. + llooggiinn [_a_r_g ...] + Equivalent to 'exec login arg ...'. + rreeaadd _n_a_m_e ... + One line is read from the standard input; successive + words of the input are assigned to the variables _n_a_m_e + in order, with leftover words to the last variable. + The return code is 0 unless the end-of-file is encoun- + tered. + rreeaaddoonnllyy [_n_a_m_e ...] + The given names are marked readonly and the values of + the these names may not be changed by subsequent + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 7 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + assignment. If no arguments are given, a list of all + readonly names is printed. + sseett [--eekknnppttuuvvxx [_a_r_g ...]] + --ee If non interactive, exit immediately if a command + fails. + --kk All keyword arguments are placed in the environment + for a command, not just those that precede the com- + mand name. + --nn Read commands but do not execute them. + --tt Exit after reading and executing one command. + --uu Treat unset variables as an error when substituting. + --vv Print shell input lines as they are read. + --xx Print commands and their arguments as they are exe- + cuted. + -- Turn off the --xx and --vv options. + + These flags can also be used upon invocation of the + shell. The current set of flags may be found in $$--. + + Remaining arguments are positional parameters and are + assigned, in order, to $$11, $$22, etc. If no arguments + are given, the values of all names are printed. + + sshhiifftt + The positional parameters from $$22... are renamed $$11... + + ttiimmeess + Print the accumulated user and system times for + processes run from the shell. + + ttrraapp [_a_r_g] [_n] ... + _A_r_g is a command to be read and executed when the shell + receives signal(s) _n. (Note that _a_r_g is scanned once + when the trap is set and once when the trap is taken.) + Trap commands are executed in order of signal number. + If _a_r_g is absent, all trap(s) _n are reset to their ori- + ginal values. If _a_r_g is the null string, this signal + is ignored by the shell and by invoked commands. If _n + is 0, the command _a_r_g is executed on exit from the + shell, otherwise upon receipt of signal _n as numbered + in _s_i_g_v_e_c(2). _T_r_a_p with no arguments prints a list of + commands associated with each signal number. + + uummaasskk [ _n_n_n ] + The user file creation mask is set to the octal value + _n_n_n (see _u_m_a_s_k(2)). If _n_n_n is omitted, the current + value of the mask is printed. + + wwaaiitt [_n] + Wait for the specified process and report its termina- + tion status. If _n is not given, all currently active + child processes are waited for. The return code from + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 8 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + this command is that of the process waited for. + + IInnvvooccaattiioonn.. + If the first character of argument zero is --, commands are + read from $$HHOOMMEE//..pprrooffiillee, if such a file exists. Commands + are then read as described below. The following flags are + interpreted by the shell when it is invoked. + --cc _s_t_r_i_n_g If the --cc flag is present, commands are read from + _s_t_r_i_n_g. + --ss If the --ss flag is present or if no arguments + remain then commands are read from the standard + input. Shell output is written to file descrip- + tor 2. + --ii If the --ii flag is present or if the shell input + and output are attached to a terminal (as told by + _g_t_t_y) then this shell is _i_n_t_e_r_a_c_t_i_v_e. In this + case the terminate signal SIGTERM (see _s_i_g_v_e_c(2)) + is ignored (so that 'kill 0' does not kill an + interactive shell) and the interrupt signal SIG- + INT is caught and ignored (so that wwaaiitt is inter- + ruptible). In all cases SIGQUIT is ignored by + the shell. + + The remaining flags and arguments are described under the + sseett command. + +FFIILLEESS + $HOME/..profile + /tmp/sh* + /dev/null + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + csh(1), test(1), execve(2), environ(7) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Errors detected by the shell, such as syntax errors cause + the shell to return a non zero exit status. If the shell is + being used non interactively then execution of the shell + file is abandoned. Otherwise, the shell returns the exit + status of the last command executed (see also eexxiitt). + +BBUUGGSS + If << is used to provide standard input to an asynchronous + process invoked by &, the shell gets mixed up about naming + the input document. A garbage file /tmp/sh* is created, and + the shell complains about not being able to find the file by + another name. + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 9 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/fp.0 b/usr/man/cat1/fp.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..79ab10c152 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/fp.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +FP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FP(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + fp - Functional Programming language compiler/interpreter + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ffpp + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _F_p is an interpreter/compiler that implements the applica- + tive language proposed by John Backus. It is written in + FFRRAANNZZ LLIISSPP. + + In a functional programming language intent is expressed in + a mathematical style devoid of assignment statements and + variables. Functions compute by value only; there are no + side-effects since the result of a computation depends + solely on the inputs. + + _F_p "programs" consist of _f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n_a_l _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n_s - primitive + and user-defined _f_p functions combined by _f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n_a_l _f_o_r_m_s. + These forms take functional arguments and return functional + results. For example, the composition operator '@' takes + two functional arguments and returns a function which + represents their composition. + + There exists a single operation in _f_p - _a_p_p_l_i_c_a_t_i_o_n. This + operation causes the system to evaluate the indicated func- + tion using the single argument as input (all functions are + monadic). + +GGEETTTTIINNGG SSTTAARRTTEEDD + _F_p invokes the system. _F_p compiles functions into _l_i_s_p(1) + source code; _l_i_s_p(1) interprets this code (the user may com- + pile this code using the liszt (1) compiler to gain a factor + of 10 in performance). _C_o_n_t_r_o_l _D exits back to the shell. + _B_r_e_a_k terminates any computation in progress and resets any + open file units. )_h_e_l_p provides a short summary of all user + commands. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/ucb/lisp the FRANZ LISP interpreter + /usr/ucb/liszt the liszt compiler + /usr/doc/fp the User's Guide + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + lisp(1), liszt(1). + + _T_h_e _B_e_r_k_e_l_e_y _F_P _u_s_e_r'_s _m_a_n_u_a_l, available on-line. The + language is described in the August 1978 issue of _C_A_C_M + (Turing award lecture by John Backus). + +BBUUGGSS + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +FP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FP(1) + + + + If a non-terminating function is applied as the result of + loading a file, then control is returned to the user immedi- + ately, everything after that position in the file is + ignored. + + FP incorrectly marks the location of a syntax error on + large, multi-line function definitions or applications. + +AAUUTTHHOORR + Scott B. Baden + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/fpr.0 b/usr/man/cat1/fpr.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c541c716cd --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/fpr.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +FPR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FPR(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + fpr - print Fortran file + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ffpprr + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _F_p_r is a filter that transforms files formatted according to + Fortran's carriage control conventions into files formatted + according to UNIX line printer conventions. + + _F_p_r copies its input onto its output, replacing the carriage + control characters with characters that will produce the + intended effects when printed using _l_p_r(1). The first char- + acter of each line determines the vertical spacing as fol- + lows: + + +---------------+--------------------------------+ + | Character | Vertical Space Before Printing | + |---------------+--------------------------------| + | Blank | One line | + | 0 | Two lines | + | 1 | To first line of next page | + | + | No advance | + +---------------+--------------------------------+ + + + A blank line is treated as if its first character is a + blank. A blank that appears as a carriage control character + is deleted. A zero is changed to a newline. A one is + changed to a form feed. The effects of a "+" are simulated + using backspaces. + +EEXXAAMMPPLLEESS + a.out | fpr | lpr + + fpr < f77.output | lpr + +BBUUGGSS + Results are undefined for input lines longer than 170 char- + acters. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/from.0 b/usr/man/cat1/from.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ebaf5a51d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/from.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +FROM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FROM(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + from - who is my mail from? + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ffrroomm [ --ss sender ] [ user ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _F_r_o_m prints out the mail header lines in your mailbox file + to show you who your mail is from. If _u_s_e_r is specified, + then _u_s_e_r's mailbox is examined instead of your own. If the + -s option is given, then only headers for mail sent by + _s_e_n_d_e_r are printed. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/spool/mail/* + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + biff(1), mail(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 20, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/fsplit.0 b/usr/man/cat1/fsplit.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..842a771adb --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/fsplit.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +FSPLIT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FSPLIT(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + fsplit - split a multi-routine Fortran file into individual + files + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ffsspplliitt [ --ee efile] ... [ file ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + FFsspplliitt takes as input either a file or standard input con- + taining Fortran source code. It attempts to split the input + into separate routine files of the form _n_a_m_e._f, where _n_a_m_e + is the name of the program unit (e.g. function, subroutine, + block data or program). The name for unnamed block data + subprograms has the form _b_l_k_d_t_a_N_N_N._f where NNN is three + digits and a file of this name does not already exist. For + unnamed main programs the name has the form _m_a_i_n_N_N_N._f. If + there is an error in classifying a program unit, or if + _n_a_m_e._f already exists, the program unit will be put in a + file of the form _z_z_z_N_N_N._f where _z_z_z_N_N_N._f does not already + exist. + + Normally each subprogram unit is split into a separate file. + When the -_e option is used, only the specified subprogram + units are split into separate files. E.g.: + fsplit -e readit -e doit prog.f + will split readit and doit into separate files. + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + If names specified via the -_e option are not found, a diag- + nostic is written to _s_t_a_n_d_a_r_d _e_r_r_o_r. + +AAUUTTHHOORR + Asa Romberger and Jerry Berkman + +BBUUGGSS + _F_s_p_l_i_t assumes the subprogram name is on the first noncom- + ment line of the subprogram unit. Nonstandard source for- + mats may confuse _f_s_p_l_i_t. + + It is hard to use -_e for unnamed main programs and block + data subprograms since you must predict the created file + name. + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/ftp.0 b/usr/man/cat1/ftp.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3ce3b44885 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/ftp.0 @@ -0,0 +1,792 @@ + + + +FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C) + + + +NNAAMMEE + ftp - ARPANET file transfer program + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ffttpp [ --vv ] [ --dd ] [ --ii ] [ --nn ] [ --gg ] [ hhoosstt ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _F_t_p is the user interface to the ARPANET standard File + Transfer Protocol. The program allows a user to transfer + files to and from a remote network site. + + The client host with which _f_t_p is to communicate may be + specified on the command line. If this is done, _f_t_p will + immediately attempt to establish a connection to an FTP + server on that host; otherwise, _f_t_p will enter its command + interpreter and await instructions from the user. When _f_t_p + is awaiting commands from the user the prompt "ftp>" is pro- + vided to the user. The following commands are recognized by + _f_t_p: + + !! [ _c_o_m_m_a_n_d [ _a_r_g_s ] ] + Invoke an interactive shell on the local machine. If + there are arguments, the first is taken to be a command + to execute directly, with the rest of the arguments as + its arguments. + + $$ _m_a_c_r_o-_n_a_m_e [ _a_r_g_s ] + Execute the macro _m_a_c_r_o-_n_a_m_e that was defined with the + mmaaccddeeff command. Arguments are passed to the macro + unglobbed. + + aaccccoouunntt [ _p_a_s_s_w_d ] + Supply a supplemental password required by a remote + system for access to resources once a login has been + successfully completed. If no argument is included, + the user will be prompted for an account password in a + non-echoing input mode. + + aappppeenndd _l_o_c_a_l-_f_i_l_e [ _r_e_m_o_t_e-_f_i_l_e ] + Append a local file to a file on the remote machine. + If _r_e_m_o_t_e-_f_i_l_e is left unspecified, the local file name + is used in naming the remote file after being altered + by any _n_t_r_a_n_s or _n_m_a_p setting. File transfer uses the + current settings for _t_y_p_e, _f_o_r_m_a_t, _m_o_d_e, and _s_t_r_u_c_t_u_r_e. + + aasscciiii + Set the file transfer _t_y_p_e to network ASCII. This is + the default type. + + bbeellll Arrange that a bell be sounded after each file transfer + command is completed. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C) + + + + bbiinnaarryy + Set the file transfer _t_y_p_e to support binary image + transfer. + + bbyyee Terminate the FTP session with the remote server and + exit _f_t_p. An end of file will also terminate the ses- + sion and exit. + + ccaassee Toggle remote computer file name case mapping during + mmggeett commands. When ccaassee is on (default is off), + remote computer file names with all letters in upper + case are written in the local directory with the + letters mapped to lower case. + + ccdd _r_e_m_o_t_e-_d_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y + Change the working directory on the remote machine to + _r_e_m_o_t_e-_d_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y. + + ccdduupp Change the remote machine working directory to the + parent of the current remote machine working directory. + + cclloossee + Terminate the FTP session with the remote server, and + return to the command interpreter. Any defined macros + are erased. + + ccrr Toggle carriage return stripping during ascii type file + retrieval. Records are denoted by a carriage + return/linefeed sequence during ascii type file + transfer. When ccrr is on (the default), carriage + returns are stripped from this sequence to conform with + the UNIX single linefeed record delimiter. Records on + non-UNIX remote systems may contain single linefeeds; + when an ascii type transfer is made, these linefeeds + may be distinguished from a record delimiter only when + ccrr is off. + + ddeelleettee _r_e_m_o_t_e-_f_i_l_e + Delete the file _r_e_m_o_t_e-_f_i_l_e on the remote machine. + + ddeebbuugg [ _d_e_b_u_g-_v_a_l_u_e ] + Toggle debugging mode. If an optional _d_e_b_u_g-_v_a_l_u_e is + specified it is used to set the debugging level. When + debugging is on, _f_t_p prints each command sent to the + remote machine, preceded by the string "-->". + + ddiirr [ _r_e_m_o_t_e-_d_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y ] [ _l_o_c_a_l-_f_i_l_e ] + Print a listing of the directory contents in the direc- + tory, _r_e_m_o_t_e-_d_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y, and, optionally, placing the + output in _l_o_c_a_l-_f_i_l_e. If interactive prompting is on, + _f_t_p will prompt the user to verify that the last argu- + ment is indeed the target local file for receiving ddiirr + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + + + + +FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C) + + + + output. If no directory is specified, the current + working directory on the remote machine is used. If no + local file is specified, or _l_o_c_a_l-_f_i_l_e is --, output + comes to the terminal. + + ddiissccoonnnneecctt + A synonym for cclloossee. + + ffoorrmm _f_o_r_m_a_t + Set the file transfer _f_o_r_m to _f_o_r_m_a_t. The default for- + mat is "file". + + ggeett _r_e_m_o_t_e-_f_i_l_e [ _l_o_c_a_l-_f_i_l_e ] + Retrieve the _r_e_m_o_t_e-_f_i_l_e and store it on the local + machine. If the local file name is not specified, it + is given the same name it has on the remote machine, + subject to alteration by the current _c_a_s_e, _n_t_r_a_n_s, and + _n_m_a_p settings. The current settings for _t_y_p_e, _f_o_r_m, + _m_o_d_e, and _s_t_r_u_c_t_u_r_e are used while transferring the + file. + + gglloobb Toggle filename expansion for mmddeelleettee, mmggeett and mmppuutt. + If globbing is turned off with gglloobb, the file name + arguments are taken literally and not expanded. Glob- + bing for mmppuutt is done as in ccsshh(1). For mmddeelleettee and + mmggeett, each remote file name is expanded separately on + the remote machine and the lists are not merged. + Expansion of a directory name is likely to be different + from expansion of the name of an ordinary file: the + exact result depends on the foreign operating system + and ftp server, and can be previewed by doing + `mmllss _r_e_m_o_t_e-_f_i_l_e_s --'. Note: mmggeett and mmppuutt are not + meant to transfer entire directory subtrees of files. + That can be done by transferring a ttaarr(1) archive of + the subtree (in binary mode). + + hhaasshh Toggle hash-sign (``#'') printing for each data block + transferred. The size of a data block is 1024 bytes. + + hheellpp [ _c_o_m_m_a_n_d ] + Print an informative message about the meaning of _c_o_m_- + _m_a_n_d. If no argument is given, _f_t_p prints a list of + the known commands. + + llccdd [ _d_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y ] + Change the working directory on the local machine. If + no _d_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y is specified, the user's home directory is + used. + + llss [ _r_e_m_o_t_e-_d_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y ] [ _l_o_c_a_l-_f_i_l_e ] + Print an abbreviated listing of the contents of a + directory on the remote machine. If _r_e_m_o_t_e-_d_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 3 + + + + + + +FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C) + + + + is left unspecified, the current working directory is + used. If interactive prompting is on, _f_t_p will prompt + the user to verify that the last argument is indeed the + target local file for receiving llss output. If no local + file is specified, or if _l_o_c_a_l-_f_i_l_e is --, the output is + sent to the terminal. + + mmaaccddeeff _m_a_c_r_o-_n_a_m_e + Define a macro. Subsequent lines are stored as the + macro _m_a_c_r_o-_n_a_m_e; a null line (consecutive newline + characters in a file or carriage returns from the ter- + minal) terminates macro input mode. There is a limit + of 16 macros and 4096 total characters in all defined + macros. Macros remain defined until a cclloossee command is + executed. The macro processor interprets '$' and '\' + as special characters. A '$' followed by a number (or + numbers) is replaced by the corresponding argument on + the macro invocation command line. A '$' followed by + an 'i' signals that macro processor that the executing + macro is to be looped. On the first pass '$i' is + replaced by the first argument on the macro invocation + command line, on the second pass it is replaced by the + second argument, and so on. A '\' followed by any + character is replaced by that character. Use the '\' + to prevent special treatment of the '$'. + + mmddeelleettee [ _r_e_m_o_t_e-_f_i_l_e_s ] + Delete the _r_e_m_o_t_e-_f_i_l_e_s on the remote machine. + + mmddiirr _r_e_m_o_t_e-_f_i_l_e_s _l_o_c_a_l-_f_i_l_e + Like ddiirr, except multiple remote files may be speci- + fied. If interactive prompting is on, _f_t_p will prompt + the user to verify that the last argument is indeed the + target local file for receiving mmddiirr output. + + mmggeett _r_e_m_o_t_e-_f_i_l_e_s + Expand the _r_e_m_o_t_e-_f_i_l_e_s on the remote machine and do a + ggeett for each file name thus produced. See gglloobb for + details on the filename expansion. Resulting file + names will then be processed according to _c_a_s_e, _n_t_r_a_n_s, + and _n_m_a_p settings. Files are transferred into the + local working directory, which can be changed with + `llccdd directory'; new local directories can be created + with `!! mkdir directory'. + + mmkkddiirr _d_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y-_n_a_m_e + Make a directory on the remote machine. + + mmllss _r_e_m_o_t_e-_f_i_l_e_s _l_o_c_a_l-_f_i_l_e + Like llss, except multiple remote files may be specified. + If interactive prompting is on, _f_t_p will prompt the + user to verify that the last argument is indeed the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 4 + + + + + + +FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C) + + + + target local file for receiving mmllss output. + + mmooddee [ _m_o_d_e-_n_a_m_e ] + Set the file transfer _m_o_d_e to _m_o_d_e-_n_a_m_e. The default + mode is "stream" mode. + + mmppuutt _l_o_c_a_l-_f_i_l_e_s + Expand wild cards in the list of local files given as + arguments and do a ppuutt for each file in the resulting + list. See gglloobb for details of filename expansion. + Resulting file names will then be processed according + to _n_t_r_a_n_s and _n_m_a_p settings. + + nnmmaapp [ _i_n_p_a_t_t_e_r_n _o_u_t_p_a_t_t_e_r_n ] + Set or unset the filename mapping mechanism. If no + arguments are specified, the filename mapping mechanism + is unset. If arguments are specified, remote filenames + are mapped during mmppuutt commands and ppuutt commands issued + without a specified remote target filename. If argu- + ments are specified, local filenames are mapped during + mmggeett commands and ggeett commands issued without a speci- + fied local target filename. This command is useful + when connecting to a non-UNIX remote computer with dif- + ferent file naming conventions or practices. The map- + ping follows the pattern set by _i_n_p_a_t_t_e_r_n and _o_u_t_p_a_t_- + _t_e_r_n. _I_n_p_a_t_t_e_r_n is a template for incoming filenames + (which may have already been processed according to the + nnttrraannss and ccaassee settings). Variable templating is + accomplished by including the sequences '$1', '$2', + ..., '$9' in _i_n_p_a_t_t_e_r_n. Use '\' to prevent this spe- + cial treatment of the '$' character. All other charac- + ters are treated literally, and are used to determine + the nnmmaapp _i_n_p_a_t_t_e_r_n variable values. For exmaple, given + _i_n_p_a_t_t_e_r_n $1.$2 and the remote file name "mydata.data", + $1 would have the value "mydata", and $2 would have the + value "data". The _o_u_t_p_a_t_t_e_r_n determines the resulting + mapped filename. The sequences '$1', '$2', ...., '$9' + are replaced by any value resulting from the _i_n_p_a_t_t_e_r_n + template. The sequence '$0' is replace by the original + filename. Additionally, the sequence '[_s_e_q_1,_s_e_q_2]' is + replaced by _s_e_q_1 if _s_e_q_1 is not a null string; other- + wise it is replaced by _s_e_q_2. For example, the command + "nmap $1.$2.$3 [$1,$2].[$2,file]" would yield the out- + put filename "myfile.data" for input filenames + "myfile.data" and "myfile.data.old", "myfile.file" for + the input filename "myfile", and "myfile.myfile" for + the input filename ".myfile". Spaces may be included + in _o_u_t_p_a_t_t_e_r_n, as in the example: nmap $1 |sed "s/ + *$//" > $1 . Use the '\' character to prevent special + treatment of the '$', '[', ']', and ',' characters. + + nnttrraannss [ _i_n_c_h_a_r_s [ _o_u_t_c_h_a_r_s ] ] + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 5 + + + + + + +FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C) + + + + Set or unset the filename character translation mechan- + ism. If no arguments are specified, the filename char- + acter translation mechanism is unset. If arguments are + specified, characters in remote filenames are + translated during mmppuutt commands and ppuutt commands issued + without a specified remote target filename. If argu- + ments are specified, characters in local filenames are + translated during mmggeett commands and ggeett commands issued + without a specified local target filename. This com- + mand is useful when connecting to a non-UNIX remote + computer with different file naming conventions or + practices. Characters in a filename matching a charac- + ter in _i_n_c_h_a_r_s are replaced with the corresponding + character in _o_u_t_c_h_a_r_s. If the character's position in + _i_n_c_h_a_r_s is longer than the length of _o_u_t_c_h_a_r_s, the + character is deleted from the file name. + + ooppeenn _h_o_s_t [ _p_o_r_t ] + Establish a connection to the specified _h_o_s_t FTP + server. An optional port number may be supplied, in + which case, _f_t_p will attempt to contact an FTP server + at that port. If the _a_u_t_o-_l_o_g_i_n option is on + (default), _f_t_p will also attempt to automatically log + the user in to the FTP server (see below). + + pprroommpptt + Toggle interactive prompting. Interactive prompting + occurs during multiple file transfers to allow the user + to selectively retrieve or store files. If prompting + is turned off (default is on), any mmggeett or mmppuutt will + transfer all files, and any mmddeelleettee will delete all + files. + + pprrooxxyy _f_t_p-_c_o_m_m_a_n_d + Execute an ftp command on a secondary control connec- + tion. This command allows simultaneous connection to + two remote ftp servers for transferring files between + the two servers. The first pprrooxxyy command should be an + ooppeenn, to establish the secondary control connection. + Enter the command "proxy ?" to see other ftp commands + executable on the secondary connection. The following + commands behave differently when prefaced by pprrooxxyy: + ooppeenn will not define new macros during the auto-login + process, cclloossee will not erase existing macro defini- + tions, ggeett and mmggeett transfer files from the host on the + primary control connection to the host on the secondary + control connection, and ppuutt, mmppuutt, and aappppeenndd transfer + files from the host on the secondary control connection + to the host on the primary control connection. Third + party file transfers depend upon support of the ftp + protocol PASV command by the server on the secondary + control connection. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 6 + + + + + + +FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C) + + + + ppuutt _l_o_c_a_l-_f_i_l_e [ _r_e_m_o_t_e-_f_i_l_e ] + Store a local file on the remote machine. If _r_e_m_o_t_e- + _f_i_l_e is left unspecified, the local file name is used + after processing according to any _n_t_r_a_n_s or _n_m_a_p set- + tings in naming the remote file. File transfer uses + the current settings for _t_y_p_e, _f_o_r_m_a_t, _m_o_d_e, and _s_t_r_u_c_- + _t_u_r_e. + + ppwwdd Print the name of the current working directory on the + remote machine. + + qquuiitt A synonym for bbyyee. + + qquuoottee _a_r_g_1 _a_r_g_2 ... + The arguments specified are sent, verbatim, to the + remote FTP server. + + rreeccvv _r_e_m_o_t_e-_f_i_l_e [ _l_o_c_a_l-_f_i_l_e ] + A synonym for get. + + rreemmootteehheellpp [ _c_o_m_m_a_n_d-_n_a_m_e ] + Request help from the remote FTP server. If a + _c_o_m_m_a_n_d-_n_a_m_e is specified it is supplied to the server + as well. + + rreennaammee [ _f_r_o_m ] [ _t_o ] + Rename the file _f_r_o_m on the remote machine, to the file + _t_o. + + rreesseett + Clear reply queue. This command re-synchronizes + command/reply sequencing with the remote ftp server. + Resynchronization may be neccesary following a viola- + tion of the ftp protocol by the remote server. + + rrmmddiirr _d_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y-_n_a_m_e + Delete a directory on the remote machine. + + rruunniiqquuee + Toggle storing of files on the local system with unique + filenames. If a file already exists with a name equal + to the target local filename for a ggeett or mmggeett command, + a ".1" is appended to the name. If the resulting name + matches another existing file, a ".2" is appended to + the original name. If this process continues up to + ".99", an error message is printed, and the transfer + does not take place. The generated unique filename + will be reported. Note that rruunniiqquuee will not affect + local files generated from a shell command (see below). + The default value is off. + + sseenndd _l_o_c_a_l-_f_i_l_e [ _r_e_m_o_t_e-_f_i_l_e ] + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 7 + + + + + + +FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C) + + + + A synonym for put. + + sseennddppoorrtt + Toggle the use of PORT commands. By default, _f_t_p will + attempt to use a PORT command when establishing a con- + nection for each data transfer. The use of PORT com- + mands can prevent delays when performing multiple file + transfers. If the PORT command fails, _f_t_p will use the + default data port. When the use of PORT commands is + disabled, no attempt will be made to use PORT commands + for each data transfer. This is useful for certain FTP + implementations which do ignore PORT commands but, + incorrectly, indicate they've been accepted. + + ssttaattuuss + Show the current status of _f_t_p. + + ssttrruucctt [ _s_t_r_u_c_t-_n_a_m_e ] + Set the file transfer _s_t_r_u_c_t_u_r_e to _s_t_r_u_c_t-_n_a_m_e. By + default "stream" structure is used. + + ssuunniiqquuee + Toggle storing of files on remote machine under unique + file names. Remote ftp server must support ftp proto- + col STOU command for successful completion. The remote + server will report unique name. Default value is off. + + tteenneexx + Set the file transfer type to that needed to talk to + TENEX machines. + + ttrraaccee + Toggle packet tracing. + + ttyyppee [ _t_y_p_e-_n_a_m_e ] + Set the file transfer _t_y_p_e to _t_y_p_e-_n_a_m_e. If no type is + specified, the current type is printed. The default + type is network ASCII. + + uusseerr _u_s_e_r-_n_a_m_e [ _p_a_s_s_w_o_r_d ] [ _a_c_c_o_u_n_t ] + Identify yourself to the remote FTP server. If the + password is not specified and the server requires it, + _f_t_p will prompt the user for it (after disabling local + echo). If an account field is not specified, and the + FTP server requires it, the user will be prompted for + it. If an account field is specified, an account com- + mand will be relayed to the remote server after the + login sequence is completed if the remote server did + not require it for logging in. Unless _f_t_p is invoked + with "auto-login" disabled, this process is done + automatically on initial connection to the FTP server. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 8 + + + + + + +FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C) + + + + vveerrbboossee + Toggle verbose mode. In verbose mode, all responses + from the FTP server are displayed to the user. In + addition, if verbose is on, when a file transfer com- + pletes, statistics regarding the efficiency of the + transfer are reported. By default, verbose is on. + + ?? [ _c_o_m_m_a_n_d ] + A synonym for help. + + Command arguments which have embedded spaces may be quoted + with quote (") marks. + +AABBOORRTTIINNGG AA FFIILLEE TTRRAANNSSFFEERR + To abort a file transfer, use the terminal interrupt key + (usually Ctrl-C). Sending transfers will be immediately + halted. Receiving transfers will be halted by sending a ftp + protocol ABOR command to the remote server, and discarding + any further data received. The speed at which this is + accomplished depends upon the remote server's support for + ABOR processing. If the remote server does not support the + ABOR command, an "ftp>" prompt will not appear until the + remote server has completed sending the requested file. + + The terminal interrupt key sequence will be ignored when _f_t_p + has completed any local processing and is awaiting a reply + from the remote server. A long delay in this mode may + result from the ABOR processing described above, or from + unexpected behavior by the remote server, including viola- + tions of the ftp protocol. If the delay results from unex- + pected remote server behavior, the local _f_t_p program must be + killed by hand. + +FFIILLEE NNAAMMIINNGG CCOONNVVEENNTTIIOONNSS + Files specified as arguments to _f_t_p commands are processed + according to the following rules. + + 1) If the file name "-" is specified, the ssttddiinn (for read- + ing) or ssttddoouutt (for writing) is used. + + 2) If the first character of the file name is "|", the + remainder of the argument is interpreted as a shell + command. _F_t_p then forks a shell, using _p_o_p_e_n(3) with + the argument supplied, and reads (writes) from the + stdout (stdin). If the shell command includes spaces, + the argument must be quoted; e.g. ""| ls -lt"". A par- + ticularly useful example of this mechanism is: "dir + |more". + + 3) Failing the above checks, if ``globbing'' is enabled, + local file names are expanded according to the rules + used in the _c_s_h(1); c.f. the _g_l_o_b command. If the _f_t_p + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 9 + + + + + + +FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C) + + + + command expects a single local file ( .e.g. ppuutt), only + the first filename generated by the "globbing" opera- + tion is used. + + 4) For mmggeett commands and ggeett commands with unspecified + local file names, the local filename is the remote + filename, which may be altered by a ccaassee, nnttrraannss, or + nnmmaapp setting. The resulting filename may then be + altered if rruunniiqquuee is on. + + 5) For mmppuutt commands and ppuutt commands with unspecified + remote file names, the remote filename is the local + filename, which may be altered by a nnttrraannss or nnmmaapp set- + ting. The resulting filename may then be altered by + the remote server if ssuunniiqquuee is on. + +FFIILLEE TTRRAANNSSFFEERR PPAARRAAMMEETTEERRSS + The FTP specification specifies many parameters which may + affect a file transfer. The _t_y_p_e may be one of "ascii", + "image" (binary), "ebcdic", and "local byte size" (for PDP- + 10's and PDP-20's mostly). _F_t_p supports the ascii and image + types of file transfer, plus local byte size 8 for tteenneexx + mode transfers. + + _F_t_p supports only the default values for the remaining file + transfer parameters: _m_o_d_e, _f_o_r_m, and _s_t_r_u_c_t. + +OOPPTTIIOONNSS + Options may be specified at the command line, or to the com- + mand interpreter. + + The --vv (verbose on) option forces _f_t_p to show all responses + from the remote server, as well as report on data transfer + statistics. + + The --nn option restrains _f_t_p from attempting "auto-login" + upon initial connection. If auto-login is enabled, _f_t_p will + check the ._n_e_t_r_c (see below) file in the user's home direc- + tory for an entry describing an account on the remote + machine. If no entry exists, _f_t_p will prompt for the remote + machine login name (default is the user identity on the + local machine), and, if necessary, prompt for a password and + an account with which to login. + + The --ii option turns off interactive prompting during multi- + ple file transfers. + + The --dd option enables debugging. + + The --gg option disables file name globbing. + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 10 + + + + + + +FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C) + + + +TTHHEE ..nneettrrcc FFIILLEE + The .netrc file contains login and initialization informa- + tion used by the auto-login process. It resides in the + user's home directory. The following tokens are recognized; + they may be separated by spaces, tabs, or new-lines: + + mmaacchhiinnee _n_a_m_e + Identify a remote machine name. The auto-login process + searches the .netrc file for a mmaacchhiinnee token that + matches the remote machine specified on the _f_t_p command + line or as an ooppeenn command argument. Once a match is + made, the subsequent .netrc tokens are processed, stop- + ping when the end of file is reached or another mmaacchhiinnee + token is encountered. + + llooggiinn _n_a_m_e + Identify a user on the remote machine. If this token + is present, the auto-login process will initiate a + login using the specified name. + + ppaasssswwoorrdd _s_t_r_i_n_g + Supply a password. If this token is present, the + auto-login process will supply the specified string if + the remote server requires a password as part of the + login process. Note that if this token is present in + the .netrc file, _f_t_p will abort the auto-login process + if the .netrc is readable by anyone besides the user. + + aaccccoouunntt _s_t_r_i_n_g + Supply an additional account password. If this token + is present, the auto-login process will supply the + specified string if the remote server requires an addi- + tional account password, or the auto-login process will + initiate an ACCT command if it does not. + + mmaaccddeeff _n_a_m_e + Define a macro. This token functions like the _f_t_p mmaacc-- + ddeeff command functions. A macro is defined with the + specified name; its contents begin with the next .netrc + line and continue until a null line (consecutive new- + line characters) is encountered. If a macro named _i_n_i_t + is defined, it is automatically executed as the last + step in the auto-login process. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + ftpd(8) + +BBUUGGSS + Correct execution of many commands depends upon proper + behavior by the remote server. + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 11 + + + + + + +FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C) + + + + An error in the treatment of carriage returns in the 4.2BSD + UNIX ascii-mode transfer code has been corrected. This + correction may result in incorrect transfers of binary files + to and from 4.2BSD servers using the ascii type. Avoid this + problem by using the binary image type. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 12 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/gcore.0 b/usr/man/cat1/gcore.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f62b0363d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/gcore.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +GCORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GCORE(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + gcore - get core images of running processes + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ggccoorree process-id ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _G_c_o_r_e creates a core image of each specified process, suit- + able for use with _a_d_b(1) or _d_b_x(1). + +FFIILLEESS + core. core images + +BBUUGGSS + Paging activity that occurs while _g_c_o_r_e is running may cause + the program to become confused. For best results, the + desired processes should be stopped. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/gprof.0 b/usr/man/cat1/gprof.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..68060cb6c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/gprof.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +GPROF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GPROF(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + gprof - display call graph profile data + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ggpprrooff [ options ] [ a.out [ gmon.out ... ] ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _g_p_r_o_f produces an execution profile of C, Pascal, or For- + tran77 programs. The effect of called routines is incor- + porated in the profile of each caller. The profile data is + taken from the call graph profile file (_g_m_o_n._o_u_t default) + which is created by programs that are compiled with the --ppgg + option of _c_c, _p_c, and _f_7_7. The --ppgg option also links in + versions of the library routines that are compiled for pro- + filing. The symbol table in the named object file (_a._o_u_t + default) is read and correlated with the call graph profile + file. If more than one profile file is specified, the _g_p_r_o_f + output shows the sum of the profile information in the given + profile files. + + _G_p_r_o_f calculates the amount of time spent in each routine. + Next, these times are propagated along the edges of the call + graph. Cycles are discovered, and calls into a cycle are + made to share the time of the cycle. The first listing + shows the functions sorted according to the time they + represent including the time of their call graph descen- + dents. Below each function entry is shown its (direct) call + graph children, and how their times are propagated to this + function. A similar display above the function shows how + this function's time and the time of its descendents is pro- + pagated to its (direct) call graph parents. + + Cycles are also shown, with an entry for the cycle as a + whole and a listing of the members of the cycle and their + contributions to the time and call counts of the cycle. + + Second, a flat profile is given, similar to that provided by + _p_r_o_f(1). This listing gives the total execution times, the + call counts, the number of milliseconds per call in the rou- + tine itself, and the number of milliseconds per call in the + routine itself including its descendents. + + Finally, an index of the function names is provided. + + The following options are available: + + --aa suppresses the printing of statically declared func- + tions. If this option is given, all relevant informa- + tion about the static function (_e._g., time samples, + calls to other functions, calls from other functions) + belongs to the function loaded just before the static + function in the _a._o_u_t file. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 1 + + + + + + +GPROF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GPROF(1) + + + + --bb suppresses the printing of a description of each field + in the profile. + + --cc the static call graph of the program is discovered by a + heuristic that examines the text space of the object + file. Static-only parents or children are shown with + call counts of 0. + + --ee _n_a_m_e + suppresses the printing of the graph profile entry for + routine _n_a_m_e and all its descendants (unless they have + other ancestors that aren't suppressed). More than one + --ee option may be given. Only one _n_a_m_e may be given + with each --ee option. + + --EE _n_a_m_e + suppresses the printing of the graph profile entry for + routine _n_a_m_e (and its descendants) as --ee, above, and + also excludes the time spent in _n_a_m_e (and its descen- + dants) from the total and percentage time computations. + (For example, --EE _m_c_o_u_n_t --EE _m_c_l_e_a_n_u_p is the default.) + + --ff _n_a_m_e + prints the graph profile entry of only the specified + routine _n_a_m_e and its descendants. More than one --ff + option may be given. Only one _n_a_m_e may be given with + each --ff option. + + --FF _n_a_m_e + prints the graph profile entry of only the routine _n_a_m_e + and its descendants (as --ff,, above) and also uses only + the times of the printed routines in total time and + percentage computations. More than one --FF option may + be given. Only one _n_a_m_e may be given with each --FF + option. The --FF option overrides the --EE option. + + --kk _f_r_o_m_n_a_m_e _t_o_n_a_m_e + will delete any arcs from routine _f_r_o_m_n_a_m_e to routine + _t_o_n_a_m_e. This can be used to break undesired cycles. + More than one --kk option may be given. Only one pair of + routine names may be given with each --kk option. + + --ss a profile file _g_m_o_n._s_u_m is produced that represents the + sum of the profile information in all the specified + profile files. This summary profile file may be given + to later executions of gprof (probably also with a --ss) + to accumulate profile data across several runs of an + _a._o_u_t file. + + --zz displays routines that have zero usage (as shown by + call counts and accumulated time). This is useful with + the --cc option for discovering which routines were never + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 2 + + + + + + +GPROF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GPROF(1) + + + + called. + +FFIILLEESS + _a._o_u_t the namelist and text space. + _g_m_o_n._o_u_t dynamic call graph and profile. + _g_m_o_n._s_u_m summarized dynamic call graph and profile. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + monitor(3), profil(2), cc(1), prof(1) + ``gprof: A Call Graph Execution Profiler'', by Graham, S.L., + Kessler, P.B., McKusick, M.K.; _P_r_o_c_e_e_d_i_n_g_s _o_f _t_h_e _S_I_G_P_L_A_N + '_8_2 _S_y_m_p_o_s_i_u_m _o_n _C_o_m_p_i_l_e_r _C_o_n_s_t_r_u_c_t_i_o_n, SIGPLAN Notices, + Vol. 17, No. 6, pp. 120-126, June 1982. + +BBUUGGSS + Beware of quantization errors. The granularity of the sam- + pling is shown, but remains statistical at best. We assume + that the time for each execution of a function can be + expressed by the total time for the function divided by the + number of times the function is called. Thus the time pro- + pagated along the call graph arcs to the function's parents + is directly proportional to the number of times that arc is + traversed. + + Parents that are not themselves profiled will have the time + of their profiled children propagated to them, but they will + appear to be spontaneously invoked in the call graph list- + ing, and will not have their time propagated further. Simi- + larly, signal catchers, even though profiled, will appear to + be spontaneous (although for more obscure reasons). Any + profiled children of signal catchers should have their times + propagated properly, unless the signal catcher was invoked + during the execution of the profiling routine, in which case + all is lost. + + The profiled program must call _e_x_i_t(2) or return normally + for the profiling information to be saved in the gmon.out + file. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/graph.0 b/usr/man/cat1/graph.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0accd5d258 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/graph.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +GRAPH(1G) UNIX Programmer's Manual GRAPH(1G) + + + +NNAAMMEE + graph - draw a graph + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ggrraapphh [ option ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _G_r_a_p_h with no options takes pairs of numbers from the stan- + dard input as abscissas and ordinates of a graph. Succes- + sive points are connected by straight lines. The graph is + encoded on the standard output for display by the _p_l_o_t(1G) + filters. + + If the coordinates of a point are followed by a nonnumeric + string, that string is printed as a label beginning on the + point. Labels may be surrounded with quotes "...", in which + case they may be empty or contain blanks and numbers; labels + never contain newlines. + + The following options are recognized, each as a separate + argument. + + --aa Supply abscissas automatically (they are missing from + the input); spacing is given by the next argument + (default 1). A second optional argument is the start- + ing point for automatic abscissas (default 0 or lower + limit given by --xx). + + --bb Break (disconnect) the graph after each label in the + input. + + --cc Character string given by next argument is default + label for each point. + + --gg Next argument is grid style, 0 no grid, 1 frame with + ticks, 2 full grid (default). + + --ll Next argument is label for graph. + + --mm Next argument is mode (style) of connecting lines: 0 + disconnected, 1 connected (default). Some devices give + distinguishable line styles for other small integers. + + --ss Save screen, don't erase before plotting. + + --xx [ ll ] + If ll is present, x axis is logarithmic. Next 1 (or 2) + arguments are lower (and upper) _x limits. Third argu- + ment, if present, is grid spacing on _x axis. Normally + these quantities are determined automatically. + + --yy [ ll ] + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +GRAPH(1G) UNIX Programmer's Manual GRAPH(1G) + + + + Similarly for _y. + + --hh Next argument is fraction of space for height. + + --ww Similarly for width. + + --rr Next argument is fraction of space to move right before + plotting. + + --uu Similarly to move up before plotting. + + --tt Transpose horizontal and vertical axes. (Option --xx now + applies to the vertical axis.) + + A legend indicating grid range is produced with a grid + unless the --ss option is present. + + If a specified lower limit exceeds the upper limit, the axis + is reversed. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + spline(1G), plot(1G) + +BBUUGGSS + _G_r_a_p_h stores all points internally and drops those for which + there isn't room. + Segments that run out of bounds are dropped, not windowed. + Logarithmic axes may not be reversed. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/grep.0 b/usr/man/cat1/grep.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..272e038945 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/grep.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +GREP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GREP(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + grep, egrep, fgrep - search a file for a pattern + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ggrreepp [ option ] ... expression [ file ] ... + + eeggrreepp [ option ] ... [ expression ] [ file ] ... + + ffggrreepp [ option ] ... [ strings ] [ file ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + Commands of the _g_r_e_p family search the input _f_i_l_e_s (standard + input default) for lines matching a pattern. Normally, each + line found is copied to the standard output. _G_r_e_p patterns + are limited regular expressions in the style of _e_x(1); it + uses a compact nondeterministic algorithm. _E_g_r_e_p patterns + are full regular expressions; it uses a fast deterministic + algorithm that sometimes needs exponential space. _F_g_r_e_p + patterns are fixed strings; it is fast and compact. The + following options are recognized. + + --vv All lines but those matching are printed. + + --xx (Exact) only lines matched in their entirety are + printed (_f_g_r_e_p only). + + --cc Only a count of matching lines is printed. + + --ll The names of files with matching lines are listed + (once) separated by newlines. + + --nn Each line is preceded by its relative line number in + the file. + + --bb Each line is preceded by the block number on which it + was found. This is sometimes useful in locating disk + block numbers by context. + + --hh Never print filename headers with output lines. + + --oo Always print filename headers with output lines. + + --ii The case of letters is ignored in making comparisons - + that is, upper and lower case are considered identical. + + --ss Silent mode. Nothing is printed (except error mes- + sages). This is useful for checking the error status. + + --ww The expression is searched for as a word (as if sur- + rounded by `\<' and `\>', see _e_x(1).) (_g_r_e_p only) + + --ee _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n + + + +Printed 7/9/88 October 8, 1987 1 + + + + + + +GREP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GREP(1) + + + + Same as a simple _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n argument, but useful when + the _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n begins with a -. + + --ff _f_i_l_e + The regular expression (_e_g_r_e_p) or string list (_f_g_r_e_p) + is taken from the _f_i_l_e. + + In all cases the file name is shown if there is more than + one input file. Care should be taken when using the charac- + ters $ * [ ^ | ( ) and \ in the _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n as they are also + meaningful to the Shell. It is safest to enclose the entire + _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n argument in single quotes ' '. + + _F_g_r_e_p searches for lines that contain one of the (newline- + separated) _s_t_r_i_n_g_s. + + _E_g_r_e_p accepts extended regular expressions. In the follow- + ing description `character' excludes newline: + + A \ followed by a single character other than newline + matches that character. + + The character ^ matches the beginning of a line. + + The character $ matches the end of a line. + + A .. (period) matches any character. + + A single character not otherwise endowed with special + meaning matches that character. + + A string enclosed in brackets [] matches any single + character from the string. Ranges of ASCII character + codes may be abbreviated as in `a-z0-9'. A ] may occur + only as the first character of the string. A literal - + must be placed where it can't be mistaken as a range + indicator. + + A regular expression followed by an * (asterisk) + matches a sequence of 0 or more matches of the regular + expression. A regular expression followed by a + + (plus) matches a sequence of 1 or more matches of the + regular expression. A regular expression followed by a + ? (question mark) matches a sequence of 0 or 1 matches + of the regular expression. + + Two regular expressions concatenated match a match of + the first followed by a match of the second. + + Two regular expressions separated by | or newline match + either a match for the first or a match for the second. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 October 8, 1987 2 + + + + + + +GREP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GREP(1) + + + + A regular expression enclosed in parentheses matches a + match for the regular expression. + + The order of precedence of operators at the same parenthesis + level is [] then *+? then concatenation then | and newline. + + Ideally there should be only one _g_r_e_p, but we don't know a + single algorithm that spans a wide enough range of space- + time tradeoffs. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + ex(1), sed(1), sh(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Exit status is 0 if any matches are found, 1 if none, 2 for + syntax errors or inaccessible files. + +BBUUGGSS + Lines are limited to 256 characters; longer lines are trun- + cated. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 October 8, 1987 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/groups.0 b/usr/man/cat1/groups.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..df0d43a188 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/groups.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +GROUPS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GROUPS(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + groups - show group memberships + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ggrroouuppss [[uusseerr]] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + The _g_r_o_u_p_s command shows the groups to which you or the + optionally specified user belong. Each user belongs to a + group specified in the password file /_e_t_c/_p_a_s_s_w_d and possi- + bly to other groups as specified in the file /_e_t_c/_g_r_o_u_p. If + you do not own a file but belong to the group which it is + owned by then you are granted group access to the file. + + When a new file is created it is given the group of the con- + taining directory. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + setgroups(2) + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/passwd, /etc/group + +BBUUGGSS + More groups should be allowed. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/head.0 b/usr/man/cat1/head.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fb7b8f036f --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/head.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +HEAD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual HEAD(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + head - give first few lines + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + hheeaadd [ --count ] [ file ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + This filter gives the first _c_o_u_n_t lines of each of the + specified files, or of the standard input. If _c_o_u_n_t is + omitted it defaults to 10. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + tail(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/hostid.0 b/usr/man/cat1/hostid.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bb0ead30ce --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/hostid.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +HOSTID(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual HOSTID(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + hhoossttiidd - set or print identifier of current host system + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + hhoossttiidd [hexnum or internet address] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _H_o_s_t_i_d prints the identifier of the current host in hexade- + cimal. This numeric value is expected to be unique across + all hosts and is commonly set to the host's Internet + address. The super-user can set the hostid by giving a hex- + adecimal argument or the hostname; this is usually done in + the startup script /_e_t_c/_n_e_t_s_t_a_r_t. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + gethostid(2), sethostid(2) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 July 9, 1988 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/hostname.0 b/usr/man/cat1/hostname.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..32865d916b --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/hostname.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +HOSTNAME(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual HOSTNAME(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + hhoossttnnaammee - set or print name of current host system + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + hhoossttnnaammee [-s] [nameofhost] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _H_o_s_t_n_a_m_e prints the name of the current host. The super- + user can set the hostname by supplying an argument; this is + usually done in the network initialization script + /_e_t_c/_n_e_t_s_t_a_r_t, normally run at boot time. The -_s option + trims any domain information from the printed name. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + gethostname(2), sethostname(2) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 July 9, 1988 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/if.0 b/usr/man/cat1/if.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..faac4cd331 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/if.0 @@ -0,0 +1,594 @@ + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + sh, for, case, if, while, ::, .., break, continue, cd, eval, + exec, exit, export, login, read, readonly, set, shift, + times, trap, umask, wait - command language + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + sshh [ --cceeiikknnrrssttuuvvxx ] [ arg ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_h is a command programming language that executes commands + read from a terminal or a file. See iinnvvooccaattiioonn for the + meaning of arguments to the shell. + + CCoommmmaannddss.. + A _s_i_m_p_l_e-_c_o_m_m_a_n_d is a sequence of non blank _w_o_r_d_s separated + by blanks (a blank is a ttaabb or a ssppaaccee). The first word + specifies the name of the command to be executed. Except as + specified below the remaining words are passed as arguments + to the invoked command. The command name is passed as argu- + ment 0 (see _e_x_e_c_v_e(2)). The _v_a_l_u_e of a simple-command is + its exit status if it terminates normally or 200+_s_t_a_t_u_s if + it terminates abnormally (see _s_i_g_v_e_c(2) for a list of status + values). + + A _p_i_p_e_l_i_n_e is a sequence of one or more _c_o_m_m_a_n_d_s separated + by ||.. The standard output of each command but the last is + connected by a _p_i_p_e(2) to the standard input of the next + command. Each command is run as a separate process; the + shell waits for the last command to terminate. + + A _l_i_s_t is a sequence of one or more _p_i_p_e_l_i_n_e_s separated by + ;;, &&, &&&& or |||| and optionally terminated by ;; or &&. ;; and && + have equal precedence which is lower than that of &&&& and ||||, + &&&& and |||| also have equal precedence. A semicolon causes + sequential execution; an ampersand causes the preceding + _p_i_p_e_l_i_n_e to be executed without waiting for it to finish. + The symbol &&&& (||||) causes the _l_i_s_t following to be executed + only if the preceding _p_i_p_e_l_i_n_e returns a zero (non zero) + value. Newlines may appear in a _l_i_s_t, instead of semi- + colons, to delimit commands. + + A _c_o_m_m_a_n_d is either a simple-command or one of the follow- + ing. The value returned by a command is that of the last + simple-command executed in the command. + + ffoorr _n_a_m_e [iinn _w_o_r_d ...] ddoo _l_i_s_t ddoonnee + Each time a ffoorr command is executed _n_a_m_e is set to the + next word in the ffoorr word list. If iinn _w_o_r_d ... is + omitted, iinn ""$$@@"" is assumed. Execution ends when there + are no more words in the list. + + ccaassee _w_o_r_d iinn [_p_a_t_t_e_r_n [ || _p_a_t_t_e_r_n ] ... )) _l_i_s_t ;;;;] ... eessaacc + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + A ccaassee command executes the _l_i_s_t associated with the + first pattern that matches _w_o_r_d. The form of the pat- + terns is the same as that used for file name genera- + tion. + + iiff _l_i_s_t tthheenn _l_i_s_t [eelliiff _l_i_s_t tthheenn _l_i_s_t] ... [eellssee _l_i_s_t] ffii + The _l_i_s_t following iiff is executed and if it returns + zero the _l_i_s_t following tthheenn is executed. Otherwise, + the _l_i_s_t following eelliiff is executed and if its value is + zero the _l_i_s_t following tthheenn is executed. Failing that + the eellssee _l_i_s_t is executed. + + wwhhiillee _l_i_s_t [ddoo _l_i_s_t] ddoonnee + A wwhhiillee command repeatedly executes the wwhhiillee _l_i_s_t and + if its value is zero executes the ddoo _l_i_s_t; otherwise + the loop terminates. The value returned by a wwhhiillee + command is that of the last executed command in the ddoo + _l_i_s_t. uunnttiill may be used in place of wwhhiillee to negate the + loop termination test. + + (( _l_i_s_t )) + Execute _l_i_s_t in a subshell. + + {{ _l_i_s_t }} + _l_i_s_t is simply executed. + + The following words are only recognized as the first word of + a command and when not quoted. + + iiff tthheenn eellssee eelliiff ffii ccaassee iinn eessaacc ffoorr wwhhiillee uunnttiill ddoo + ddoonnee {{ }} + + CCoommmmaanndd ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonn.. + The standard output from a command enclosed in a pair of + back quotes (````) may be used as part or all of a word; + trailing newlines are removed. + + PPaarraammeetteerr ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonn.. + The character $$ is used to introduce substitutable parame- + ters. Positional parameters may be assigned values by sseett. + Variables may be set by writing + + _n_a_m_e==_v_a_l_u_e [ _n_a_m_e==_v_a_l_u_e ] ... + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r}} + A _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is a sequence of letters, digits or under- + scores (a _n_a_m_e), a digit, or any of the characters ** @@ + ## ?? -- $$ !!.. The value, if any, of the parameter is sub- + stituted. The braces are required only when _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r + is followed by a letter, digit, or underscore that is + not to be interpreted as part of its name. If _p_a_r_a_m_e_- + _t_e_r is a digit, it is a positional parameter. If + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is ** or @@ then all the positional parameters, + starting with $$11, are substituted separated by spaces. + $$00 is set from argument zero when the shell is invoked. + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r-_w_o_r_d}} + If _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is set, substitute its value; otherwise + substitute _w_o_r_d. + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r=_w_o_r_d}} + If _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is not set, set it to _w_o_r_d; the value of + the parameter is then substituted. Positional parame- + ters may not be assigned to in this way. + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r?_w_o_r_d}} + If _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is set, substitute its value; otherwise, + print _w_o_r_d and exit from the shell. If _w_o_r_d is omit- + ted, a standard message is printed. + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r+_w_o_r_d}} + If _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is set, substitute _w_o_r_d; otherwise substi- + tute nothing. + + In the above _w_o_r_d is not evaluated unless it is to be used + as the substituted string. (So that, for example, echo + ${d-'pwd'} will only execute _p_w_d if _d is unset.) + + The following _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s are automatically set by the shell. + + ## The number of positional parameters in decimal. + -- Options supplied to the shell on invocation or by + sseett. + ?? The value returned by the last executed command in + decimal. + $$ The process number of this shell. + !! The process number of the last background command + invoked. + + The following _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s are used but not set by the shell. + + HHOOMMEE The default argument (home directory) for the ccdd + command. + PPAATTHH The search path for commands (see eexxeeccuuttiioonn). + MMAAIILL If this variable is set to the name of a mail + file, the shell informs the user of the arrival of + mail in the specified file. + PPSS11 Primary prompt string, by default '$ '. + PPSS22 Secondary prompt string, by default '> '. + IIFFSS Internal field separators, normally ssppaaccee, ttaabb, + and nneewwlliinnee. IIFFSS is ignored if _s_h is running as + root or if the effective user id differs from the + real user id. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + BBllaannkk iinntteerrpprreettaattiioonn.. + After parameter and command substitution, any results of + substitution are scanned for internal field separator char- + acters (those found in $$IIFFSS) and split into distinct argu- + ments where such characters are found. Explicit null argu- + ments ("" or '') are retained. Implicit null arguments + (those resulting from _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s that have no values) are + removed. + + FFiillee nnaammee ggeenneerraattiioonn.. + Following substitution, each command word is scanned for the + characters **, ?? and [[.. If one of these characters appears, + the word is regarded as a pattern. The word is replaced + with alphabetically sorted file names that match the pat- + tern. If no file name is found that matches the pattern, + the word is left unchanged. The character .. at the start of + a file name or immediately following a //, and the character + //, must be matched explicitly. + + ** Matches any string, including the null string. + ?? Matches any single character. + [[......]] + Matches any one of the characters enclosed. A pair of + characters separated by -- matches any character lexi- + cally between the pair. + + QQuuoottiinngg.. + The following characters have a special meaning to the shell + and cause termination of a word unless quoted. + + ;; && (( )) || << >> nneewwlliinnee ssppaaccee ttaabb + + A character may be _q_u_o_t_e_d by preceding it with a \\.. \\nneeww-- + lliinnee is ignored. All characters enclosed between a pair of + quote marks (''''), except a single quote, are quoted. Inside + double quotes ("""") parameter and command substitution occurs + and \\ quotes the characters \\ '' "" and $$. + + ""$$**"" is equivalent to ""$$11 $$22 ......"" whereas + ""$$@@"" is equivalent to ""$$11"" ""$$22"" ...... .. + + PPrroommppttiinngg.. + When used interactively, the shell prompts with the value of + PS1 before reading a command. If at any time a newline is + typed and further input is needed to complete a command, the + secondary prompt ($$PPSS22) is issued. + + IInnppuutt oouuttppuutt.. + Before a command is executed its input and output may be + redirected using a special notation interpreted by the + shell. The following may appear anywhere in a simple- + command or may precede or follow a _c_o_m_m_a_n_d and are not + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + passed on to the invoked command. Substitution occurs + before _w_o_r_d or _d_i_g_i_t is used. + + <_w_o_r_d + Use file _w_o_r_d as standard input (file descriptor 0). + + >_w_o_r_d + Use file _w_o_r_d as standard output (file descriptor 1). + If the file does not exist, it is created; otherwise it + is truncated to zero length. + + >>_w_o_r_d + Use file _w_o_r_d as standard output. If the file exists, + output is appended (by seeking to the end); otherwise + the file is created. + + <<_w_o_r_d + The shell input is read up to a line the same as _w_o_r_d, + or end of file. The resulting document becomes the + standard input. If any character of _w_o_r_d is quoted, no + interpretation is placed upon the characters of the + document; otherwise, parameter and command substitution + occurs, \\nneewwlliinnee is ignored, and \\ is used to quote the + characters \\ $$ '' and the first character of _w_o_r_d. + + <&_d_i_g_i_t + The standard input is duplicated from file descriptor + _d_i_g_i_t; see _d_u_p(2). Similarly for the standard output + using >. + + <&- The standard input is closed. Similarly for the stan- + dard output using >. + + If one of the above is preceded by a digit, the file + descriptor created is that specified by the digit (instead + of the default 0 or 1). For example, + + ... 2>&1 + + creates file descriptor 2 to be a duplicate of file descrip- + tor 1. + + If a command is followed by && then the default standard + input for the command is the empty file (/dev/null). Other- + wise, the environment for the execution of a command con- + tains the file descriptors of the invoking shell as modified + by input output specifications. + + EEnnvviirroonnmmeenntt.. + The environment is a list of name-value pairs that is passed + to an executed program in the same way as a normal argument + list; see _e_x_e_c_v_e(2) and _e_n_v_i_r_o_n(7). The shell interacts + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 5 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + with the environment in several ways. On invocation, the + shell scans the environment and creates a _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r for each + name found, giving it the corresponding value. Executed + commands inherit the same environment. If the user modifies + the values of these _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s or creates new ones, none of + these affects the environment unless the eexxppoorrtt command is + used to bind the shell's _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r to the environment. The + environment seen by any executed command is thus composed of + any unmodified name-value pairs originally inherited by the + shell, plus any modifications or additions, all of which + must be noted in eexxppoorrtt commands. + + The environment for any _s_i_m_p_l_e-_c_o_m_m_a_n_d may be augmented by + prefixing it with one or more assignments to _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s. + Thus these two lines are equivalent + + TERM=450 cmd args + (export TERM; TERM=450; cmd args) + + If the --kk flag is set, _a_l_l keyword arguments are placed in + the environment, even if the occur after the command name. + The following prints 'a=b c' and 'c': + echo a=b c + set -k + echo a=b c + + SSiiggnnaallss.. + The INTERRUPT and QUIT signals for an invoked command are + ignored if the command is followed by &&; otherwise signals + have the values inherited by the shell from its parent. + (But see also ttrraapp..) + + EExxeeccuuttiioonn.. + Each time a command is executed the above substitutions are + carried out. Except for the 'special commands' listed below + a new process is created and an attempt is made to execute + the command via an _e_x_e_c_v_e(2). + + The shell parameter $$PPAATTHH defines the search path for the + directory containing the command. Each alternative direc- + tory name is separated by a colon (::). The default path is + :://bbiinn:://uussrr//bbiinn. If the command name contains a /, the + search path is not used. Otherwise, each directory in the + path is searched for an executable file. If the file has + execute permission but is not an _a._o_u_t file, it is assumed + to be a file containing shell commands. A subshell (i.e., a + separate process) is spawned to read it. A parenthesized + command is also executed in a subshell. + + SSppeecciiaall ccoommmmaannddss.. + The following commands are executed in the shell process and + except where specified no input output redirection is + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 6 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + permitted for such commands. + + ## For non-interactive shells, everything following the ## + is treated as a comment, i.e. the rest of the line is + ignored. For interactive shells, the ## has no special + effect. + + :: No effect; the command does nothing. + .. _f_i_l_e + Read and execute commands from _f_i_l_e and return. The + search path $$PPAATTHH is used to find the directory con- + taining _f_i_l_e. + bbrreeaakk [_n] + Exit from the enclosing ffoorr or wwhhiillee loop, if any. If + _n is specified, break _n levels. + ccoonnttiinnuuee [_n] + Resume the next iteration of the enclosing ffoorr or wwhhiillee + loop. If _n is specified, resume at the _n-th enclosing + loop. + ccdd [_a_r_g] + Change the current directory to _a_r_g. The shell parame- + ter $$HHOOMMEE is the default _a_r_g. + eevvaall [_a_r_g ...] + The arguments are read as input to the shell and the + resulting command(s) executed. + eexxeecc [_a_r_g ...] + The command specified by the arguments is executed in + place of this shell without creating a new process. + Input output arguments may appear and if no other argu- + ments are given cause the shell input output to be + modified. + eexxiitt [_n] + Causes a non interactive shell to exit with the exit + status specified by _n. If _n is omitted, the exit status + is that of the last command executed. (An end of file + will also exit from the shell.) + eexxppoorrtt [_n_a_m_e ...] + The given names are marked for automatic export to the + _e_n_v_i_r_o_n_m_e_n_t of subsequently-executed commands. If no + arguments are given, a list of exportable names is + printed. + llooggiinn [_a_r_g ...] + Equivalent to 'exec login arg ...'. + rreeaadd _n_a_m_e ... + One line is read from the standard input; successive + words of the input are assigned to the variables _n_a_m_e + in order, with leftover words to the last variable. + The return code is 0 unless the end-of-file is encoun- + tered. + rreeaaddoonnllyy [_n_a_m_e ...] + The given names are marked readonly and the values of + the these names may not be changed by subsequent + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 7 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + assignment. If no arguments are given, a list of all + readonly names is printed. + sseett [--eekknnppttuuvvxx [_a_r_g ...]] + --ee If non interactive, exit immediately if a command + fails. + --kk All keyword arguments are placed in the environment + for a command, not just those that precede the com- + mand name. + --nn Read commands but do not execute them. + --tt Exit after reading and executing one command. + --uu Treat unset variables as an error when substituting. + --vv Print shell input lines as they are read. + --xx Print commands and their arguments as they are exe- + cuted. + -- Turn off the --xx and --vv options. + + These flags can also be used upon invocation of the + shell. The current set of flags may be found in $$--. + + Remaining arguments are positional parameters and are + assigned, in order, to $$11, $$22, etc. If no arguments + are given, the values of all names are printed. + + sshhiifftt + The positional parameters from $$22... are renamed $$11... + + ttiimmeess + Print the accumulated user and system times for + processes run from the shell. + + ttrraapp [_a_r_g] [_n] ... + _A_r_g is a command to be read and executed when the shell + receives signal(s) _n. (Note that _a_r_g is scanned once + when the trap is set and once when the trap is taken.) + Trap commands are executed in order of signal number. + If _a_r_g is absent, all trap(s) _n are reset to their ori- + ginal values. If _a_r_g is the null string, this signal + is ignored by the shell and by invoked commands. If _n + is 0, the command _a_r_g is executed on exit from the + shell, otherwise upon receipt of signal _n as numbered + in _s_i_g_v_e_c(2). _T_r_a_p with no arguments prints a list of + commands associated with each signal number. + + uummaasskk [ _n_n_n ] + The user file creation mask is set to the octal value + _n_n_n (see _u_m_a_s_k(2)). If _n_n_n is omitted, the current + value of the mask is printed. + + wwaaiitt [_n] + Wait for the specified process and report its termina- + tion status. If _n is not given, all currently active + child processes are waited for. The return code from + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 8 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + this command is that of the process waited for. + + IInnvvooccaattiioonn.. + If the first character of argument zero is --, commands are + read from $$HHOOMMEE//..pprrooffiillee, if such a file exists. Commands + are then read as described below. The following flags are + interpreted by the shell when it is invoked. + --cc _s_t_r_i_n_g If the --cc flag is present, commands are read from + _s_t_r_i_n_g. + --ss If the --ss flag is present or if no arguments + remain then commands are read from the standard + input. Shell output is written to file descrip- + tor 2. + --ii If the --ii flag is present or if the shell input + and output are attached to a terminal (as told by + _g_t_t_y) then this shell is _i_n_t_e_r_a_c_t_i_v_e. In this + case the terminate signal SIGTERM (see _s_i_g_v_e_c(2)) + is ignored (so that 'kill 0' does not kill an + interactive shell) and the interrupt signal SIG- + INT is caught and ignored (so that wwaaiitt is inter- + ruptible). In all cases SIGQUIT is ignored by + the shell. + + The remaining flags and arguments are described under the + sseett command. + +FFIILLEESS + $HOME/..profile + /tmp/sh* + /dev/null + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + csh(1), test(1), execve(2), environ(7) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Errors detected by the shell, such as syntax errors cause + the shell to return a non zero exit status. If the shell is + being used non interactively then execution of the shell + file is abandoned. Otherwise, the shell returns the exit + status of the last command executed (see also eexxiitt). + +BBUUGGSS + If << is used to provide standard input to an asynchronous + process invoked by &, the shell gets mixed up about naming + the input document. A garbage file /tmp/sh* is created, and + the shell complains about not being able to find the file by + another name. + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 9 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/indent.0 b/usr/man/cat1/indent.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e657df283b --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/indent.0 @@ -0,0 +1,396 @@ + + + +INDENT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual INDENT(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + indent - indent and format C program source + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + iinnddeenntt [ _i_n_p_u_t-_f_i_l_e [ _o_u_t_p_u_t-_f_i_l_e ] ] [ --bbaadd | --nnbbaadd ] + [ --bbaapp | --nnbbaapp ] [ --bbbbbb | --nnbbbbbb ] [ --bbcc | --nnbbcc ] + [ --bbll | --bbrr ] [ --cc_n ] [ --ccdd_n ] [ --ccddbb | --nnccddbb ] + [ --ccee | --nnccee ] [ --ccii_n ] [ --ccllii_n ] [ --dd_n ] [ --ddii_n ] + [ --ddjj | --nnddjj ] [ --eeii | --nneeii ] [ --ffcc11 | --nnffcc11 ] + [ --ii_n ] [ --iipp | --nniipp ] [ --ll_n ] [ --llcc_n ] + [ --llpp | --nnllpp ] [ --nnpprroo ] [ --ppccss | --nnppccss ] + [ --ppss | --nnppss ] [ --ppssll | --nnppssll ] [ --sscc | --nnsscc ] + [ --ssoobb | --nnssoobb ] [ --sstt ] [ --ttrrooffff ] [ --vv | --nnvv ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _I_n_d_e_n_t is a CC program formatter. It reformats the CC program + in the _i_n_p_u_t-_f_i_l_e according to the switches. The switches + which can be specified are described below. They may appear + before or after the file names. + + NNOOTTEE: If you only specify an _i_n_p_u_t-_f_i_l_e, the formatting is + done `in-place', that is, the formatted file is written back + into _i_n_p_u_t-_f_i_l_e and a backup copy of _i_n_p_u_t-_f_i_l_e is written + in the current directory. If _i_n_p_u_t-_f_i_l_e is named + `/blah/blah/file', the backup file is named file._B_A_K. + + If _o_u_t_p_u_t-_f_i_l_e is specified, _i_n_d_e_n_t checks to make sure it + is different from _i_n_p_u_t-_f_i_l_e. + +OOPPTTIIOONNSS + The options listed below control the formatting style + imposed by _i_n_d_e_n_t. + + --bbaadd,--nnbbaadd If --bbaadd is specified, a blank line is forced + after every block of declarations. Default: + --nnbbaadd. + + --bbaapp,--nnbbaapp If --bbaapp is specified, a blank line is forced + after every procedure body. Default: --nnbbaapp.. + + --bbbbbb,--nnbbbbbb If --bbbbbb is specified, a blank line is forced + before every block comment. Default: --nnbbbbbb.. + + --bbcc,--nnbbcc If --bbcc is specified, then a newline is forced + after each comma in a declaration. --nnbbcc turns + off this option. The default is --nnbbcc. + + --bbrr,--bbll Specifying --bbll lines up compound statements + like this: + if (...) + { + code + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 10, 1985 1 + + + + + + +INDENT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual INDENT(1) + + + + } + Specifying --bbrr (the default) makes them look + like this: + if (...) { + code + } + + --cc_n The column in which comments on code start. + The default is 33. + + --ccdd_n The column in which comments on declarations + start. The default is for these comments to + start in the same column as those on code. + + --ccddbb,--nnccddbb Enables (disables) the placement of comment + delimiters on blank lines. With this option + enabled, comments look like this: + /* + * this is a comment + */ + Rather than like this: + /* this is a comment */ + This only affects block comments, not com- + ments to the right of code. The default is + --ccddbb. + + --ccee,--nnccee Enables (disables) forcing `else's to cuddle + up to the immediately preceding `}'. The + default is --ccee. + + --ccii_n Sets the continuation indent to be _n. Con- + tinuation lines will be indented that far + from the beginning of the first line of the + statement. Parenthesized expressions have + extra indentation added to indicate the nest- + ing, unless --llpp is in effect. --ccii defaults + to the same value as --ii. + + --ccllii_n Causes case labels to be indented _n tab stops + to the right of the containing sswwiittcchh state- + ment. --ccllii00..55 causes case labels to be + indented half a tab stop. The default is + --ccllii00. (This is the only option that takes a + fractional argument.) + + --dd_n Controls the placement of comments which are + not to the right of code. Specifying --dd11 + means that such comments are placed one + indentation level to the left of code. The + default --dd00 lines up these comments with the + code. See the section on comment indentation + below. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 10, 1985 2 + + + + + + +INDENT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual INDENT(1) + + + + --ddii_n Specifies the indentation, in character posi- + tions, from a declaration keyword to the fol- + lowing identifier. The default is --ddii1166. + + --ddjj,--nnddjj --ddjj left justifies declarations. --nnddjj + indents declarations the same as code. The + default is --nnddjj. + + --eeii,--nneeii Enables (disables) special eellssee--iiff process- + ing. If enabled, iiffs following eellssees will + have the same indentation as the preceding iiff + statement. The default is --eeii. + + --ffcc11,--nnffcc11 Enables (disables) the formatting of comments + that start in column 1. Often, comments + whose leading `/' is in column 1 have been + carefully hand formatted by the programmer. + In such cases, --nnffcc11 should be used. The + default is --ffcc11. + + --ii_n The number of spaces for one indentation + level. The default is 8. + + --iipp,--nniipp Enables (disables) the indentation of parame- + ter declarations from the left margin. The + default is --iipp. + + --ll_n Maximum length of an output line. The + default is 78. + + --llpp,--nnllpp Lines up code surrounded by parenthesis in + continuation lines. If a line has a left + paren which is not closed on that line, then + continuation lines will be lined up to start + at the character position just after the left + paren. For example, here is how a piece of + continued code looks with --nnllpp in effect: + p1 = first_procedure(second_procedure(p2, p3), + third_procedure(p4, p5)); + With --llpp in effect (the default) the code + looks somewhat clearer: + p1 = first_procedure(second_procedure(p2, p3), + third_procedure(p4, p5)); + Inserting two more newlines we get: + p1 = first_procedure(second_procedure(p2, + p3), + third_procedure(p4, + p5)); + + --nnpprroo Causes the profile files, `./.indent.pro' and + `~/.indent.pro', to be ignored. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 10, 1985 3 + + + + + + +INDENT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual INDENT(1) + + + + --ppccss,--nnppccss If true (--ppccss) all procedure calls will have + a space inserted between the name and the + `('. The default is --nnppccss. + + --ppss,--nnppss If true (--ppss) the pointer following operator + `->' will be surrounded by spaces on either + side. The default is --nnppss. + + --ppssll,--nnppssll If true (--ppssll) the names of procedures being + defined are placed in column 1 - their types, + if any, will be left on the previous lines. + The default is --ppssll. + + --sscc,--nnsscc Enables (disables) the placement of asterisks + (`*'s) at the left edge of all comments. The + default is --sscc. + + --ssoobb,--nnssoobb If --ssoobb is specified, indent will swallow + optional blank lines. You can use this to + get rid of blank lines after declarations. + Default: --nnssoobb. + + --sstt Causes iinnddeenntt to take its input from stdin, + and put its output to stdout. + + --TT_t_y_p_e_n_a_m_e Adds _t_y_p_e_n_a_m_e to the list of type keywords. + Names accumulate: --TT can be specified more + than once. You need to specify all the + typenames that appear in your program that + are defined by ttyyppeeddeeffs - nothing will be + harmed if you miss a few, but the program + won't be formatted as nicely as it should. + This sounds like a painful thing to have to + do, but it's really a symptom of a problem in + C: ttyyppeeddeeff causes a syntactic change in the + language and _i_n_d_e_n_t can't find all ttyyppeeddeeffs. + + --ttrrooffff Causes iinnddeenntt to format the program for pro- + cessing by troff. It will produce a fancy + listing in much the same spirit as vvggrriinndd. + If the output file is not specified, the + default is standard output, rather than for- + matting in place. + + --vv,--nnvv --vv turns on `verbose' mode; --nnvv turns it off. + When in verbose mode, _i_n_d_e_n_t reports when it + splits one line of input into two or more + lines of output, and gives some size statis- + tics at completion. The default is --nnvv. + +FFUURRTTHHEERR DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 10, 1985 4 + + + + + + +INDENT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual INDENT(1) + + + + You may set up your own `profile' of defaults to _i_n_d_e_n_t by + creating a file called .._i_n_d_e_n_t.._p_r_o in either your login + directory and/or the current directory and including what- + ever switches you like. Switches in `.indent.pro' in the + current directory override those in your login directory + (with the exception of --TT type definitions, which just accu- + mulate). If _i_n_d_e_n_t is run and a profile file exists, then + it is read to set up the program's defaults. The switches + should be separated by spaces, tabs or newlines. Switches + on the command line, however, override profile switches. + + CCoommmmeennttss + + `_B_o_x' _c_o_m_m_e_n_t_s. _I_n_d_e_n_t assumes that any comment with a dash + or star immediately after the start of comment (that is, + `/*-' or `/**') is a comment surrounded by a box of stars. + Each line of such a comment is left unchanged, except that + its indentation may be adjusted to account for the change in + indentation of the first line of the comment. + + _S_t_r_a_i_g_h_t _t_e_x_t. All other comments are treated as straight + text. _I_n_d_e_n_t fits as many words (separated by blanks, tabs, + or newlines) on a line as possible. Blank lines break para- + graphs. + + CCoommmmeenntt iinnddeennttaattiioonn + + If a comment is on a line with code it is started in the + `comment column', which is set by the --cc_n command line + parameter. Otherwise, the comment is started at _n indenta- + tion levels less than where code is currently being placed, + where _n is specified by the --dd_n command line parameter. If + the code on a line extends past the comment column, the com- + ment starts further to the right, and the right margin may + be automatically extended in extreme cases. + + PPrreepprroocceessssoorr lliinneess + + In general, _i_n_d_e_n_t leaves preprocessor lines alone. The + only reformatting that it will do is to straighten up trail- + ing comments. It leaves embedded comments alone. Condi- + tional compilation (##iiffddeeff......##eennddiiff) is recognized and + _i_n_d_e_n_t attempts to correctly compensate for the syntactic + peculiarities introduced. + + CC ssyynnttaaxx + + _I_n_d_e_n_t understands a substantial amount about the syntax of + C, but it has a `forgiving' parser. It attempts to cope + with the usual sorts of incomplete and misformed syntax. In + particular, the use of macros like: + #define forever for(;;) + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 10, 1985 5 + + + + + + +INDENT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual INDENT(1) + + + + is handled properly. + +FFIILLEESS + ./.indent.pro profile file + ~/.indent.pro profile file + +BBUUGGSS + _I_n_d_e_n_t has even more switches than _l_s. + + A common mistake that often causes grief is typing: + indent *.c + to the shell in an attempt to indent all the CC programs in a + directory. This is probably a bug, not a feature. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 10, 1985 6 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/indxbib.0 b/usr/man/cat1/indxbib.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..aa85ff5825 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/indxbib.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +LOOKBIB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LOOKBIB(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + indxbib, lookbib - build inverted index for a bibliography, + find references in a bibliography + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + iinnddxxbbiibb database ... + llooookkbbiibb [ --nn ] database + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _I_n_d_x_b_i_b makes an inverted index to the named _d_a_t_a_b_a_s_e_s (or + files) for use by _l_o_o_k_b_i_b(1) and _r_e_f_e_r(1). These files con- + tain bibliographic references (or other kinds of informa- + tion) separated by blank lines. + + A bibliographic reference is a set of lines, constituting + fields of bibliographic information. Each field starts on a + line beginning with a ``%'', followed by a key-letter, then + a blank, and finally the contents of the field, which may + continue until the next line starting with ``%''. + + _I_n_d_x_b_i_b is a shell script that calls /usr/lib/refer/mkey and + /usr/lib/refer/inv. The first program, _m_k_e_y, truncates + words to 6 characters, and maps upper case to lower case. + It also discards words shorter than 3 characters, words + among the 100 most common English words, and numbers (dates) + < 1900 or > 2000. These parameters can be changed; see page + 4 of the _R_e_f_e_r document by Mike Lesk. The second program, + _i_n_v, creates an entry file (.ia), a posting file (.ib), and + a tag file (.ic), all in the working directory. + + _L_o_o_k_b_i_b uses an inverted index made by _i_n_d_x_b_i_b to find sets + of bibliographic references. It reads keywords typed after + the ``>'' prompt on the terminal, and retrieves records con- + taining all these keywords. If nothing matches, nothing is + returned except another ``>'' prompt. + + _L_o_o_k_b_i_b will ask if you need instructions, and will print + some brief information if you reply ``y''. The ``-n'' flag + turns off the prompt for instructions. + + It is possible to search multiple databases, as long as they + have a common index made by _i_n_d_x_b_i_b. In that case, only the + first argument given to _i_n_d_x_b_i_b is specified to _l_o_o_k_b_i_b. + + If _l_o_o_k_b_i_b does not find the index files (the .i[abc] + files), it looks for a reference file with the same name as + the argument, without the suffixes. It creates a file with + a '.ig' suffix, suitable for use with _f_g_r_e_p. It then uses + this fgrep file to find references. This method is simpler + to use, but the .ig file is slower to use than the .i[abc] + files, and does not allow the use of multiple reference + files. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +LOOKBIB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LOOKBIB(1) + + + +FFIILLEESS + _x.ia, _x.ib, _x.ic, where _x is the first argument, or if these + are not present, then _x.ig, _x + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + refer(1), addbib(1), sortbib(1), roffbib(1), lookbib(1) + +BBUUGGSS + Probably all dates should be indexed, since many disciplines + refer to literature written in the 1800s or earlier. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/install.0 b/usr/man/cat1/install.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ca7f43d179 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/install.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +INSTALL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual INSTALL(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + install - install binaries + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + iinnssttaallll [ --cc ] [ --mm mode ] [ --oo owner ] [ --gg group ] [ --ss ] + file1 file2; or file1 ... fileN directory + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + The file(s) are moved (or copied if the --cc option is speci- + fied) to the target file or directory. If the destination + is a directory, then the _f_i_l_e is moved into _d_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y with + its original file-name. If the target file already exists, + it is overwritten. + + The mode is set to 755; the --mm option may be used to specify + an alternate mode. + + The --oo and --gg options may be used to specify an owner and/or + group, respectively. + + The --ss option causes the file to be stripped. It is an + error to attempt to strip a file not in the _a._o_u_t format, + but not to attempt to strip a file that has already been + stripped. + + _I_n_s_t_a_l_l refuses to move a file onto itself. + + Installing ``/dev/null'' creates an empty file. + +RREETTUURRNN VVAALLUUEE + Upon successful completion a value of 0 is returned. Other- + wise, a value of 1 is returned. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + chgrp(1), chmod(1), cp(1), mv(1), strip(1), a.out(5), + chown(8) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 July 9, 1988 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/intro.0 b/usr/man/cat1/intro.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..97c0be2183 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/intro.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +INTRO(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual INTRO(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + intro - introduction to commands + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + This section describes publicly accessible commands in + alphabetic order. Certain distinctions of purpose are made + in the headings: + + (1) Commands of general utility. + + (1C) Commands for communication with other systems. + + (1G) Commands used primarily for graphics and computer-aided + design. + + N.B.: Commands related to system maintenance used to appear + in section 1 manual pages and were distinguished by (1M) at + the top of the page. These manual pages now appear in sec- + tion 8. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + Section (6) for computer games. + + _H_o_w _t_o _g_e_t _s_t_a_r_t_e_d, in the Introduction. + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Upon termination each command returns two bytes of status, + one supplied by the system giving the cause for termination, + and (in the case of `normal' termination) one supplied by + the program, see _w_a_i_t and _e_x_i_t(2). The former byte is 0 for + normal termination, the latter is customarily 0 for success- + ful execution, nonzero to indicate troubles such as errone- + ous parameters, bad or inaccessible data, or other inability + to cope with the task at hand. It is called variously `exit + code', `exit status' or `return code', and is described only + where special conventions are involved. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/iostat.0 b/usr/man/cat1/iostat.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0ddbe7d276 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/iostat.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +IOSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual IOSTAT(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + iostat - report I/O statistics + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + iioossttaatt [ drives ] [ interval [ count ] ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _I_o_s_t_a_t iteratively reports the number of characters read and + written to terminals per second, and, for each disk, the + number of transfers per second, kilobytes transferred per + second, and the milliseconds per average seek. It also + gives the percentage of time the system has spent in user + mode, in user mode running low priority (niced) processes, + in system mode, and idling. + + To compute this information, for each disk, seeks and data + transfer completions and number of words transferred are + counted; for terminals collectively, the number of input and + output characters are counted. Also, each sixtieth of a + second, the state of each disk is examined and a tally is + made if the disk is active. From these numbers and given + the transfer rates of the devices it is possible to deter- + mine average seek times for each device. + + The optional _i_n_t_e_r_v_a_l argument causes _i_o_s_t_a_t to report once + each _i_n_t_e_r_v_a_l seconds. The first report is for all time + since a reboot and each subsequent report is for the last + interval only. + + The optional _c_o_u_n_t argument restricts the number of reports. + + If more than 4 disk drives are configured in the system, + _i_o_s_t_a_t displays only the first 4 drives, with priority given + to Massbus disk drives (i.e. if both Unibus and Massbus + drives are present and the total number of drives exceeds 4, + then some number of Unibus drives will not be displayed in + favor of the Massbus drives). To force _i_o_s_t_a_t to display + specific drives, their names may be supplied on the command + line. + +FFIILLEESS + /dev/kmem + /vmunix + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + vmstat(1) + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/join.0 b/usr/man/cat1/join.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ea52acd3ee --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/join.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +JOIN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual JOIN(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + join - relational database operator + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + jjooiinn [ options ] file1 file2 + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _J_o_i_n forms, on the standard output, a join of the two rela- + tions specified by the lines of _f_i_l_e_1 and _f_i_l_e_2. If _f_i_l_e_1 + is `-', the standard input is used. + + _F_i_l_e_1 and _f_i_l_e_2 must be sorted in increasing ASCII collating + sequence on the fields on which they are to be joined, nor- + mally the first in each line. + + There is one line in the output for each pair of lines in + _f_i_l_e_1 and _f_i_l_e_2 that have identical join fields. The output + line normally consists of the common field, then the rest of + the line from _f_i_l_e_1, then the rest of the line from _f_i_l_e_2. + + Fields are normally separated by blank, tab or newline. In + this case, multiple separators count as one, and leading + separators are discarded. + + These options are recognized: + + --aa_n In addition to the normal output, produce a line for + each unpairable line in file _n, where _n is 1 or 2. + + --ee _s Replace empty output fields by string _s. + + --jj_n _m + Join on the _mth field of file _n. If _n is missing, use + the _mth field in each file. + + --oo _l_i_s_t + Each output line comprises the fields specified in + _l_i_s_t, each element of which has the form _n._m, where _n + is a file number and _m is a field number. + + --tt_c Use character _c as a separator (tab character). Every + appearance of _c in a line is significant. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + sort(1), comm(1), awk(1) + +BBUUGGSS + With default field separation, the collating sequence is + that of _s_o_r_t -_b; with --tt, the sequence is that of a plain + sort. + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +JOIN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual JOIN(1) + + + + The conventions of _j_o_i_n, _s_o_r_t, _c_o_m_m, _u_n_i_q, _l_o_o_k and _a_w_k(1) + are wildly incongruous. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/kill.0 b/usr/man/cat1/kill.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5c9a455fc8 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/kill.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +KILL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual KILL(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + kill - terminate a process with extreme prejudice + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + kkiillll [ --sig ] processid ... + kkiillll --ll + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _K_i_l_l sends the TERM (terminate, 15) signal to the specified + processes. If a signal name or number preceded by `-' is + given as first argument, that signal is sent instead of ter- + minate (see _s_i_g_v_e_c(2)). The signal names are listed by + `kill -l', and are as given in /_u_s_r/_i_n_c_l_u_d_e/_s_i_g_n_a_l._h, + stripped of the common SIG prefix. + + The terminate signal will kill processes that do not catch + the signal; `kill -9 ...' is a sure kill, as the KILL (9) + signal cannot be caught. By convention, if process number 0 + is specified, all members in the process group (i.e. + processes resulting from the current login) are signaled + (but beware: this works only if you use _s_h(1); not if you + use _c_s_h(1).) Negative process numbers also have special + meanings; see _k_i_l_l(2) for details. + + The killed processes must belong to the current user unless + he is the super-user. + + The process number of an asynchronous process started with + `&' is reported by the shell. Process numbers can also be + found by using _p_s(1). _K_i_l_l is a built-in to _c_s_h(1); it + allows job specifiers of the form ``%...'' as arguments so + process id's are not as often used as _k_i_l_l arguments. See + _c_s_h(1) for details. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + csh(1), ps(1), kill(2), sigvec(2) + +BBUUGGSS + A replacement for ``kill 0'' for _c_s_h(1) users should be pro- + vided. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 20, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/last.0 b/usr/man/cat1/last.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c5b5701d5c --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/last.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +LAST(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LAST(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + last - indicate last logins of users and ttys + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + llaasstt [-#] [-f file] [-h host] [-t tty] [user ...] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _L_a_s_t will list the sessions of specified _u_s_e_r_s, _t_t_y_s, and + _h_o_s_t_s, in reverse time order. Each line of output contains + the user name, the tty from which the session was conducted, + any hostname, the start and stop times for the session, and + the duration of the session. If the session is still con- + tinuing or was cut short by a crash or shutdown, _l_a_s_t will + so indicate. + + _L_a_s_t reads the file _f_i_l_e, or by default, /_u_s_r/_a_d_m/_w_t_m_p. The + --## option limits the report to ## lines. + + Other arguments specify _u_s_e_r_s, _t_t_y_s or _h_o_s_t_s of interest. + Tty names may be given fully or abbreviated, e.g., ``last -t + 03'' is equivalent to ``last -t tty03''. Host names may be + internet numbers. If multiple arguments are given, the + information which applies to any of the arguments is + printed, e.g., ``last root -t console'' would list all of + ``root's'' sessions as well as all sessions on the console + terminal. If no users, hostnames or terminals are specified, + _l_a_s_t prints a record of all logins and logouts. + + The pseudo-user rreebboooott logs in at reboots of the system, + thus ``last reboot'' will give an indication of mean time + between reboot. + + If _l_a_s_t is interrupted, it indicates to what date the search + has progressed. If interrupted with a quit signal _l_a_s_t + indicates how far the search has progressed and then contin- + ues. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/adm/wtmp login data base + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + lastcomm(1), utmp(5), ac(8) + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 10, 1987 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/lastcomm.0 b/usr/man/cat1/lastcomm.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a68ea52862 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/lastcomm.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +LASTCOMM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LASTCOMM(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + lastcomm - show last commands executed in reverse order + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + llaassttccoommmm [ -f file ] [ command name ] ... [user name] ... + [terminal name] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _L_a_s_t_c_o_m_m gives information on previously executed commands. + With no arguments, _l_a_s_t_c_o_m_m prints information about all the + commands recorded during the current accounting file's life- + time. The -_f option causes _l_a_s_t_c_o_m_m to read from a file + other than the default accounting file. If called with + arguments, only accounting entries with a matching command + name, user name, or terminal name are printed. So, for + example, + lastcomm a.out root ttyd0 + would produce a listing of all the executions of commands + named _a._o_u_t by user _r_o_o_t on the terminal _t_t_y_d_0. + + For each process entry, the following are printed. + The name of the user who ran the process. + Flags, as accumulated by the accounting facilities in + the system. + The command name under which the process was called. + The amount of cpu time used by the process (in + seconds). + The time the process exited. + + The flags are encoded as follows: ``S'' indicates the com- + mand was executed by the super-user, ``F'' indicates the + command ran after a fork, but without a following _e_x_e_c, + ``C'' indicates the command was run in PDP-11 compatibility + mode (VAX only), ``D'' indicates the command terminated with + the generation of a _c_o_r_e file, and ``X'' indicates the com- + mand was terminated with a signal. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/adm/acct + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + last(1), sigvec(2), acct(8), core(5) + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 March 8, 1988 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/ld.0 b/usr/man/cat1/ld.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c5e899c6e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/ld.0 @@ -0,0 +1,264 @@ + + + +LD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LD(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + ld - link editor + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + lldd [ option ] ... file ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _L_d combines several object programs into one, resolves + external references, and searches libraries. In the sim- + plest case several object _f_i_l_e_s are given, and _l_d combines + them, producing an object module which can be either exe- + cuted or become the input for a further _l_d run. (In the + latter case, the --rr option must be given to preserve the + relocation bits.) The output of _l_d is left on aa..oouutt. This + file is made executable only if no errors occurred during + the load. + + The argument routines are concatenated in the order speci- + fied. The entry point of the output is the beginning of the + first routine (unless the --ee option is specified). + + If any argument is a library, it is searched exactly once at + the point it is encountered in the argument list. Only + those routines defining an unresolved external reference are + loaded. If a routine from a library references another rou- + tine in the library, and the library has not been processed + by _r_a_n_l_i_b(1), the referenced routine must appear after the + referencing routine in the library. Thus the order of pro- + grams within libraries may be important. The first member + of a library should be a file named `__.SYMDEF', which is + understood to be a dictionary for the library as produced by + _r_a_n_l_i_b(1); the dictionary is searched iteratively to satisfy + as many references as possible. + + The symbols `_etext', `_edata' and `_end' (`etext', `edata' + and `end' in C) are reserved, and if referred to, are set to + the first location above the program, the first location + above initialized data, and the first location above all + data respectively. It is erroneous to define these symbols. + + _L_d understands several options. Except for --ll, they should + appear before the file names. + + --AA This option specifies incremental loading, i.e. link- + ing is to be done in a manner so that the resulting + object may be read into an already executing program. + The next argument is the name of a file whose symbol + table will be taken as a basis on which to define addi- + tional symbols. Only newly linked material will be + entered into the text and data portions of aa..oouutt,, but + the new symbol table will reflect every symbol defined + before and after the incremental load. This argument + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 8, 1986 1 + + + + + + +LD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LD(1) + + + + must appear before any other object file in the argu- + ment list. The --TT option may be used as well, and will + be taken to mean that the newly linked segment will + commence at the corresponding address (which must be a + multiple of 1024). The default value is the old value + of _end. + + --DD Take the next argument as a hexadecimal number and pad + the data segment with zero bytes to the indicated + length. + + --dd Force definition of common storage even if the --rr flag + is present. + + --ee The following argument is taken to be the name of the + entry point of the loaded program; location 0 is the + default. + + --LL_d_i_r + Add _d_i_r to the list of directories in which libraries + are searched for. Directories specified with --LL are + searched before the standard directories. + + --ll_x This option is an abbreviation for the library name + `lib_x.a', where _x is a string. _L_d searches for + libraries first in any directories specified with --LL + options, then in the standard directories `/lib', + `/usr/lib', and `/usr/local/lib'. A library is + searched when its name is encountered, so the placement + of a --ll is significant. + + --MM produce a primitive load map, listing the names of the + files which will be loaded. + + --NN Do not make the text portion read only or sharable. + (Use "magic number" 0407.) + + --nn Arrange (by giving the output file a 0410 "magic + number") that when the output file is executed, the + text portion will be read-only and shared among all + users executing the file. This involves moving the + data areas up to the first possible 1024 byte boundary + following the end of the text. + + --oo The _n_a_m_e argument after --oo is used as the name of the + _l_d output file, instead of aa..oouutt. + + --rr Generate relocation bits in the output file so that it + can be the subject of another _l_d run. This flag also + prevents final definitions from being given to common + symbols, and suppresses the `undefined symbol' diagnos- + tics. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 8, 1986 2 + + + + + + +LD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LD(1) + + + + --SS `Strip' the output by removing all symbols except + locals and globals. + + --ss `Strip' the output, that is, remove the symbol table + and relocation bits to save space (but impair the use- + fulness of the debuggers). This information can also + be removed by _s_t_r_i_p(1). + + --TT The next argument is a hexadecimal number which sets + the text segment origin. The default origin is 0. + + --tt ("trace") Print the name of each file as it is pro- + cessed. + + --uu Take the following argument as a symbol and enter it as + undefined in the symbol table. This is useful for + loading wholly from a library, since initially the sym- + bol table is empty and an unresolved reference is + needed to force the loading of the first routine. + + --XX Save local symbols except for those whose names begin + with `L'. This option is used by _c_c(1) to discard + internally-generated labels while retaining symbols + local to routines. + + --xx Do not preserve local (non-.globl) symbols in the out- + put symbol table; only enter external symbols. This + option saves some space in the output file. + + --yy_s_y_m + Indicate each file in which _s_y_m appears, its type and + whether the file defines or references it. Many such + options may be given to trace many symbols. (It is + usually necessary to begin _s_y_m with an `_', as external + C, FORTRAN and Pascal variables begin with under- + scores.) + + --zz Arrange for the process to be loaded on demand from the + resulting executable file (413 format) rather than + preloaded. This is the default. Results in a 1024 + byte header on the output file followed by a text and + data segment each of which have size a multiple of 1024 + bytes (being padded out with nulls in the file if + necessary). With this format the first few BSS segment + symbols may actually appear (from the output of + _s_i_z_e(1)) to live in the data segment; this to avoid + wasting the space resulting from data segment size + roundup. + +FFIILLEESS + /lib/lib*.a libraries + /usr/lib/lib*.a more libraries + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 8, 1986 3 + + + + + + +LD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LD(1) + + + + /usr/local/lib/lib*.a still more libraries + a.out output file + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + as(1), ar(1), cc(1), ranlib(1) + +BBUUGGSS + There is no way to force data to be page aligned. _L_d pads + images which are to be demand loaded from the file system to + the next page boundary to avoid a bug in the system. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 8, 1986 4 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/learn.0 b/usr/man/cat1/learn.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..90a715657c --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/learn.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +LEARN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LEARN(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + learn - computer aided instruction about UNIX + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + lleeaarrnn [ --directory ] [ subject [ lesson ] ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _L_e_a_r_n gives Computer Aided Instruction courses and practice + in the use of UNIX, the C Shell, and the Berkeley text edi- + tors. To get started simply type lleeaarrnn. If you had used + _l_e_a_r_n before and left your last session without completing a + subject, the program will use information in $HOME/.learnrc + to start you up in the same place you left off. Your first + time through, _l_e_a_r_n will ask questions to find out what you + want to do. Some questions may be bypassed by naming a _s_u_b_- + _j_e_c_t, and more yet by naming a _l_e_s_s_o_n. You may enter the + _l_e_s_s_o_n as a number that _l_e_a_r_n gave you in a previous ses- + sion. If you do not know the lesson number, you may enter + the _l_e_s_s_o_n as a word, and _l_e_a_r_n will look for the first les- + son containing it. If the _l_e_s_s_o_n is `--', _l_e_a_r_n prompts for + each lesson; this is useful for debugging. + + The _s_u_b_j_e_c_t's presently handled are + + files + editor + vi + morefiles + macros + eqn + C + + There are a few special commands. The command `bye' ter- + minates a _l_e_a_r_n session and `where' tells you of your pro- + gress, with `where m' telling you more. The command `again' + re-displays the text of the lesson and `again _l_e_s_s_o_n' lets + you review _l_e_s_s_o_n. There is no way for _l_e_a_r_n to tell you + the answers it expects in English, however, the command + `hint' prints the last part of the lesson script used to + evaluate a response, while `hint m' prints the whole lesson + script. This is useful for debugging lessons and might pos- + sibly give you an idea about what it expects. + + The --_d_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y option allows one to exercise a script in a + nonstandard place. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/lib/learn subtree for all dependent directories and + files + /usr/tmp/pl* playpen directories + $HOME/.learnrc startup information + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 15, 1986 1 + + + + + + +LEARN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LEARN(1) + + + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + csh(1), ex(1) + B. W. Kernighan and M. E. Lesk, _L_E_A_R_N - _C_o_m_p_u_t_e_r-_A_i_d_e_d + _I_n_s_t_r_u_c_t_i_o_n _o_n _U_N_I_X + +BBUUGGSS + The main strength of _l_e_a_r_n, that it asks the student to use + the real UNIX, also makes possible baffling mistakes. It is + helpful, especially for nonprogrammers, to have a UNIX ini- + tiate near at hand during the first sessions. + + Occasionally lessons are incorrect, sometimes because the + local version of a command operates in a non-standard way. + Occasionally a lesson script does not recognize all the dif- + ferent correct responses, in which case the `hint' command + may be useful. Such lessons may be skipped with the `skip' + command, but it takes some sophistication to recognize the + situation. + + To find a _l_e_s_s_o_n given as a word, _l_e_a_r_n does a simple + _f_g_r_e_p(1) through the lessons. It is unclear whether this + sort of subject indexing is better than none. + + Spawning a new shell is required for each of many user and + internal functions. + + The `vi' lessons are provided separately from the others. + To use them see your system administrator. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 15, 1986 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/leave.0 b/usr/man/cat1/leave.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..db791ec77d --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/leave.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +LEAVE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LEAVE(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + leave - remind you when you have to leave + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + lleeaavvee [ [+]hhmm ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _L_e_a_v_e waits until the specified time, then reminds you that + you have to leave. You are reminded 5 minutes and 1 minute + before the actual time, at the time, and every minute + thereafter. When you log off, _l_e_a_v_e exits just before it + would have printed the next message. + + The time of day is in the form hhmm where hh is a time in + hours (on a 12 or 24 hour clock). All times are converted + to a 12 hour clock, and assumed to be in the next 12 hours. + + If the time is preceeded by `+', the alarm will go off in + hours and minutes from the current time. + + If no argument is given, _l_e_a_v_e prompts with "When do you + have to leave?". A reply of newline causes _l_e_a_v_e to exit, + otherwise the reply is assumed to be a time. This form is + suitable for inclusion in a ._l_o_g_i_n or ._p_r_o_f_i_l_e. + + Leave ignores interrupts, quits, and terminates. To get rid + of it you should either log off or use ``kill -9'' giving + its process id. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + calendar(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/lex.0 b/usr/man/cat1/lex.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a6a8926df2 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/lex.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +LEX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LEX(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + lex - generator of lexical analysis programs + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + lleexx [ --ttvvffnn ] [ file ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _L_e_x generates programs to be used in simple lexical analyis + of text. The input _f_i_l_e_s (standard input default) contain + regular expressions to be searched for, and actions written + in C to be executed when expressions are found. + + A C source program, 'lex.yy.c' is generated, to be compiled + thus: + + cc lex.yy.c -ll + + This program, when run, copies unrecognized portions of the + input to the output, and executes the associated C action + for each regular expression that is recognized. + + The options have the following meanings. + + --tt Place the result on the standard output instead of in + file "lex.yy.c". + + --vv Print a one-line summary of statistics of the generated + analyzer. + + --nn Opposite of --vv; --nn is default. + + --ff "Faster" compilation: don't bother to pack the result- + ing tables; limited to small programs. + +EEXXAAMMPPLLEE + lex lexcommands + + would draw _l_e_x instructions from the file _l_e_x_c_o_m_m_a_n_d_s, and + place the output in _l_e_x._y_y._c + + + %% + [A-Z] putchar(yytext[0]+'a'-'A'); + [ ]+$ ; + [ ]+ putchar(' '); + + is an example of a _l_e_x program that would be put into a _l_e_x + command file. This program converts upper case to lower, + removes blanks at the end of lines, and replaces multiple + blanks by single blanks. + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 14, 1986 1 + + + + + + +LEX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LEX(1) + + + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + yacc(1), sed(1) + M. E. Lesk and E. Schmidt, _L_E_X - _L_e_x_i_c_a_l _A_n_a_l_y_z_e_r _G_e_n_e_r_a_t_o_r + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 14, 1986 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/limit.0 b/usr/man/cat1/limit.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..02bf962140 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/limit.0 @@ -0,0 +1,2046 @@ + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + csh - a shell (command interpreter) with C-like syntax + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ccsshh [ --cceeffiinnssttvvVVxxXX ] [ arg ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _C_s_h is a first implementation of a command language inter- + preter incorporating a history mechanism (see HHiissttoorryy SSuubb-- + ssttiittuuttiioonnss), job control facilities (see JJoobbss), interactive + file name and user name completion (see FFiillee NNaammee CCoommppllee-- + ttiioonn), and a C-like syntax. So as to be able to use its job + control facilities, users of _c_s_h must (and automatically) + use the new tty driver fully described in _t_t_y(4). This new + tty driver allows generation of interrupt characters from + the keyboard to tell jobs to stop. See _s_t_t_y(1) for details + on setting options in the new tty driver. + + An instance of _c_s_h begins by executing commands from the + file `.cshrc' in the _h_o_m_e directory of the invoker. If this + is a login shell then it also executes commands from the + file `.login' there. It is typical for users on crt's to + put the command ``stty crt'' in their ._l_o_g_i_n file, and to + also invoke _t_s_e_t(1) there. + + In the normal case, the shell will then begin reading com- + mands from the terminal, prompting with `% '. Processing of + arguments and the use of the shell to process files contain- + ing command scripts will be described later. + + The shell then repeatedly performs the following actions: a + line of command input is read and broken into _w_o_r_d_s. This + sequence of words is placed on the command history list and + then parsed. Finally each command in the current line is + executed. + + When a login shell terminates it executes commands from the + file `.logout' in the users home directory. + + LLeexxiiccaall ssttrruuccttuurree + + The shell splits input lines into words at blanks and tabs + with the following exceptions. The characters `&' `|' `;' + `<' `>' `(' `)' form separate words. If doubled in `&&', + `||', `<<' or `>>' these pairs form single words. These + parser metacharacters may be made part of other words, or + prevented their special meaning, by preceding them with `\'. + A newline preceded by a `\' is equivalent to a blank. + + In addition strings enclosed in matched pairs of quotations, + `'', ``' or `"', form parts of a word; metacharacters in + these strings, including blanks and tabs, do not form + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 1 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + separate words. These quotations have semantics to be + described subsequently. Within pairs of `'' or `"' charac- + ters a newline preceded by a `\' gives a true newline char- + acter. + + When the shell's input is not a terminal, the character `#' + introduces a comment which continues to the end of the input + line. It is prevented this special meaning when preceded by + `\' and in quotations using ``', `'', and `"'. + + CCoommmmaannddss + + A simple command is a sequence of words, the first of which + specifies the command to be executed. A simple command or a + sequence of simple commands separated by `|' characters + forms a pipeline. The output of each command in a pipeline + is connected to the input of the next. Sequences of pipe- + lines may be separated by `;', and are then executed sequen- + tially. A sequence of pipelines may be executed without + immediately waiting for it to terminate by following it with + an `&'. + + Any of the above may be placed in `(' `)' to form a simple + command (which may be a component of a pipeline, etc.) It is + also possible to separate pipelines with `||' or `&&' indi- + cating, as in the C language, that the second is to be exe- + cuted only if the first fails or succeeds respectively. (See + _E_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n_s.) + + JJoobbss + + The shell associates a _j_o_b with each pipeline. It keeps a + table of current jobs, printed by the _j_o_b_s command, and + assigns them small integer numbers. When a job is started + asynchronously with `&', the shell prints a line which looks + like: + + [1] 1234 + + indicating that the job which was started asynchronously was + job number 1 and had one (top-level) process, whose process + id was 1234. + + If you are running a job and wish to do something else you + may hit the key ^^ZZ (control-Z) which sends a STOP signal to + the current job. The shell will then normally indicate that + the job has been `Stopped', and print another prompt. You + can then manipulate the state of this job, putting it in the + background with the _b_g command, or run some other commands + and then eventually bring the job back into the foreground + with the foreground command _f_g. A ^^ZZ takes effect immedi- + ately and is like an interrupt in that pending output and + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 2 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + unread input are discarded when it is typed. There is + another special key ^^YY which does not generate a STOP signal + until a program attempts to _r_e_a_d(2) it. This can usefully + be typed ahead when you have prepared some commands for a + job which you wish to stop after it has read them. + + A job being run in the background will stop if it tries to + read from the terminal. Background jobs are normally + allowed to produce output, but this can be disabled by giv- + ing the command ``stty tostop''. If you set this tty + option, then background jobs will stop when they try to pro- + duce output like they do when they try to read input. + + There are several ways to refer to jobs in the shell. The + character `%' introduces a job name. If you wish to refer + to job number 1, you can name it as `%1'. Just naming a job + brings it to the foreground; thus `%1' is a synonym for `fg + %1', bringing job 1 back into the foreground. Similarly + saying `%1 &' resumes job 1 in the background. Jobs can + also be named by prefixes of the string typed in to start + them, if these prefixes are unambiguous, thus `%ex' would + normally restart a suspended _e_x(1) job, if there were only + one suspended job whose name began with the string `ex'. It + is also possible to say `%?string' which specifies a job + whose text contains _s_t_r_i_n_g, if there is only one such job. + + The shell maintains a notion of the current and previous + jobs. In output pertaining to jobs, the current job is + marked with a `+' and the previous job with a `-'. The + abbreviation `%+' refers to the current job and `%-' refers + to the previous job. For close analogy with the syntax of + the _h_i_s_t_o_r_y mechanism (described below), `%%' is also a + synonym for the current job. + + SSttaattuuss rreeppoorrttiinngg + + This shell learns immediately whenever a process changes + state. It normally informs you whenever a job becomes + blocked so that no further progress is possible, but only + just before it prints a prompt. This is done so that it + does not otherwise disturb your work. If, however, you set + the shell variable _n_o_t_i_f_y, the shell will notify you immedi- + ately of changes of status in background jobs. There is + also a shell command _n_o_t_i_f_y which marks a single process so + that its status changes will be immediately reported. By + default _n_o_t_i_f_y marks the current process; simply say + `notify' after starting a background job to mark it. + + When you try to leave the shell while jobs are stopped, you + will be warned that `You have stopped jobs.' You may use + the _j_o_b_s command to see what they are. If you do this or + immediately try to exit again, the shell will not warn you a + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 3 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + second time, and the suspended jobs will be terminated. + + FFiillee NNaammee CCoommpplleettiioonn + + When the file name completion feature is enabled by setting + the shell variable _f_i_l_e_c (see sseett), _c_s_h will interactively + complete file names and user names from unique prefixes, + when they are input from the terminal followed by the escape + character (the escape key, or control-[). For example, if + the current directory looks like + DSC.OLD bin cmd lib xmpl.c + DSC.NEW chaosnet cmtest mail xmpl.o + bench class dev mbox xmpl.out + and the input is + % vi ch + _c_s_h will complete the prefix ``ch'' to the only matching + file name ``chaosnet'', changing the input line to + % vi chaosnet + However, given + % vi D + _c_s_h will only expand the input to + % vi DSC. + and will sound the terminal bell to indicate that the expan- + sion is incomplete, since there are two file names matching + the prefix ``D''. + + If a partial file name is followed by the end-of-file char- + acter (usually control-D), then, instead of completing the + name, _c_s_h will list all file names matching the prefix. For + example, the input + % vi D + causes all files beginning with ``D'' to be listed: + DSC.NEW DSC.OLD + while the input line remains unchanged. + + The same system of escape and end-of-file can also be used + to expand partial user names, if the word to be completed + (or listed) begins with the character ``~''. For example, + typing + cd ~ro + may produce the expansion + cd ~root + + The use of the terminal bell to signal errors or multiple + matches can be inhibited by setting the variable _n_o_b_e_e_p. + + Normally, all files in the particular directory are candi- + dates for name completion. Files with certain suffixes can + be excluded from consideration by setting the variable _f_i_g_- + _n_o_r_e to the list of suffixes to be ignored. Thus, if _f_i_g_- + _n_o_r_e is set by the command + % set fignore = (.o .out) + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 4 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + then typing + % vi x + would result in the completion to + % vi xmpl.c + ignoring the files "xmpl.o" and "xmpl.out". However, if the + only completion possible requires not ignoring these suf- + fixes, then they are not ignored. In addition, _f_i_g_n_o_r_e does + not affect the listing of file names by control-D. All + files are listed regardless of their suffixes. + + SSuubbssttiittuuttiioonnss + + We now describe the various transformations the shell per- + forms on the input in the order in which they occur. + + HHiissttoorryy ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonnss + + History substitutions place words from previous command + input as portions of new commands, making it easy to repeat + commands, repeat arguments of a previous command in the + current command, or fix spelling mistakes in the previous + command with little typing and a high degree of confidence. + History substitutions begin with the character `!' and may + begin aannyywwhheerree in the input stream (with the proviso that + they ddoo nnoott nest.) This `!' may be preceded by an `\' to + prevent its special meaning; for convenience, a `!' is + passed unchanged when it is followed by a blank, tab, new- + line, `=' or `('. (History substitutions also occur when an + input line begins with `^'. This special abbreviation will + be described later.) Any input line which contains history + substitution is echoed on the terminal before it is executed + as it could have been typed without history substitution. + + Commands input from the terminal which consist of one or + more words are saved on the history list. The history sub- + stitutions reintroduce sequences of words from these saved + commands into the input stream. The size of which is con- + trolled by the _h_i_s_t_o_r_y variable; the previous command is + always retained, regardless of its value. Commands are num- + bered sequentially from 1. + + For definiteness, consider the following output from the + _h_i_s_t_o_r_y command: + + 9 write michael + 10 ex write.c + 11 cat oldwrite.c + 12 diff *write.c + + The commands are shown with their event numbers. It is not + usually necessary to use event numbers, but the current + event number can be made part of the _p_r_o_m_p_t by placing an + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 5 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + `!' in the prompt string. + + With the current event 13 we can refer to previous events by + event number `!11', relatively as in `!-2' (referring to the + same event), by a prefix of a command word as in `!d' for + event 12 or `!wri' for event 9, or by a string contained in + a word in the command as in `!?mic?' also referring to event + 9. These forms, without further modification, simply rein- + troduce the words of the specified events, each separated by + a single blank. As a special case `!!' refers to the previ- + ous command; thus `!!' alone is essentially a _r_e_d_o. + + To select words from an event we can follow the event + specification by a `:' and a designator for the desired + words. The words of an input line are numbered from 0, the + first (usually command) word being 0, the second word (first + argument) being 1, etc. The basic word designators are: + + 0 first (command) word + _n _n'th argument + ^ first argument, i.e. `1' + $ last argument + % word matched by (immediately preceding) ?_s? search + _x-_y range of words + -_y abbreviates `0-_y' + * abbreviates `^-$', or nothing if only 1 word in event + _x* abbreviates `_x-$' + _x- like `_x*' but omitting word `$' + + The `:' separating the event specification from the word + designator can be omitted if the argument selector begins + with a `^', `$', `*' `-' or `%'. After the optional word + designator can be placed a sequence of modifiers, each pre- + ceded by a `:'. The following modifiers are defined: + + h Remove a trailing pathname component, leaving the head. + r Remove a trailing `.xxx' component, leaving the root name. + e Remove all but the extension `.xxx' part. + s/_l/_r/ Substitute _l for _r + t Remove all leading pathname components, leaving the tail. + & Repeat the previous substitution. + g Apply the change globally, prefixing the above, e.g. `g&'. + p Print the new command line but do not execute it. + q Quote the substituted words, preventing further substitutions. + x Like q, but break into words at blanks, tabs and newlines. + + Unless preceded by a `g' the modification is applied only to + the first modifiable word. With substitutions, it is an + error for no word to be applicable. + + The left hand side of substitutions are not regular expres- + sions in the sense of the editors, but rather strings. Any + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 6 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + character may be used as the delimiter in place of `/'; a + `\' quotes the delimiter into the _l and _r strings. The + character `&' in the right hand side is replaced by the text + from the left. A `\' quotes `&' also. A null _l uses the + previous string either from a _l or from a contextual scan + string _s in `!?_s?'. The trailing delimiter in the substitu- + tion may be omitted if a newline follows immediately as may + the trailing `?' in a contextual scan. + + A history reference may be given without an event specifica- + tion, e.g. `!$'. In this case the reference is to the pre- + vious command unless a previous history reference occurred + on the same line in which case this form repeats the previ- + ous reference. Thus `!?foo?^ !$' gives the first and last + arguments from the command matching `?foo?'. + + A special abbreviation of a history reference occurs when + the first non-blank character of an input line is a `^'. + This is equivalent to `!:s^' providing a convenient short- + hand for substitutions on the text of the previous line. + Thus `^lb^lib' fixes the spelling of `lib' in the previous + command. Finally, a history substitution may be surrounded + with `{' and `}' if necessary to insulate it from the char- + acters which follow. Thus, after `ls -ld ~paul' we might do + `!{l}a' to do `ls -ld ~paula', while `!la' would look for a + command starting `la'. + + QQuuoottaattiioonnss wwiitthh '' aanndd "" + + The quotation of strings by `'' and `"' can be used to + prevent all or some of the remaining substitutions. Strings + enclosed in `'' are prevented any further interpretation. + Strings enclosed in `"' may be expanded as described below. + + In both cases the resulting text becomes (all or part of) a + single word; only in one special case (see _C_o_m_m_a_n_d _S_u_b_s_t_i_t_i_- + _t_i_o_n below) does a `"' quoted string yield parts of more + than one word; `'' quoted strings never do. + + AAlliiaass ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonn + + The shell maintains a list of aliases which can be esta- + blished, displayed and modified by the _a_l_i_a_s and _u_n_a_l_i_a_s + commands. After a command line is scanned, it is parsed + into distinct commands and the first word of each command, + left-to-right, is checked to see if it has an alias. If it + does, then the text which is the alias for that command is + reread with the history mechanism available as though that + command were the previous input line. The resulting words + replace the command and argument list. If no reference is + made to the history list, then the argument list is left + unchanged. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 7 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + Thus if the alias for `ls' is `ls -l' the command `ls /usr' + would map to `ls -l /usr', the argument list here being + undisturbed. Similarly if the alias for `lookup' was `grep + !^ /etc/passwd' then `lookup bill' would map to `grep bill + /etc/passwd'. + + If an alias is found, the word transformation of the input + text is performed and the aliasing process begins again on + the reformed input line. Looping is prevented if the first + word of the new text is the same as the old by flagging it + to prevent further aliasing. Other loops are detected and + cause an error. + + Note that the mechanism allows aliases to introduce parser + metasyntax. Thus we can `alias print 'pr \!* | lpr'' to + make a command which _p_r'_s its arguments to the line printer. + + VVaarriiaabbllee ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonn + + The shell maintains a set of variables, each of which has as + value a list of zero or more words. Some of these variables + are set by the shell or referred to by it. For instance, + the _a_r_g_v variable is an image of the shell's argument list, + and words of this variable's value are referred to in spe- + cial ways. + + The values of variables may be displayed and changed by + using the _s_e_t and _u_n_s_e_t commands. Of the variables referred + to by the shell a number are toggles; the shell does not + care what their value is, only whether they are set or not. + For instance, the _v_e_r_b_o_s_e variable is a toggle which causes + command input to be echoed. The setting of this variable + results from the --vv command line option. + + Other operations treat variables numerically. The `@' com- + mand permits numeric calculations to be performed and the + result assigned to a variable. Variable values are, how- + ever, always represented as (zero or more) strings. For the + purposes of numeric operations, the null string is con- + sidered to be zero, and the second and subsequent words of + multiword values are ignored. + + After the input line is aliased and parsed, and before each + command is executed, variable substitution is performed + keyed by `$' characters. This expansion can be prevented by + preceding the `$' with a `\' except within `"'s where it + aallwwaayyss occurs, and within `''s where it nneevveerr occurs. + Strings quoted by ``' are interpreted later (see _C_o_m_m_a_n_d + _s_u_b_s_t_i_t_u_t_i_o_n below) so `$' substitution does not occur there + until later, if at all. A `$' is passed unchanged if fol- + lowed by a blank, tab, or end-of-line. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 8 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + Input/output redirections are recognized before variable + expansion, and are variable expanded separately. Otherwise, + the command name and entire argument list are expanded + together. It is thus possible for the first (command) word + to this point to generate more than one word, the first of + which becomes the command name, and the rest of which become + arguments. + + Unless enclosed in `"' or given the `:q' modifier the + results of variable substitution may eventually be command + and filename substituted. Within `"', a variable whose + value consists of multiple words expands to a (portion of) a + single word, with the words of the variables value separated + by blanks. When the `:q' modifier is applied to a substitu- + tion the variable will expand to multiple words with each + word separated by a blank and quoted to prevent later com- + mand or filename substitution. + + The following metasequences are provided for introducing + variable values into the shell input. Except as noted, it + is an error to reference a variable which is not set. + + $name + ${name} + Are replaced by the words of the value of variable + _n_a_m_e, each separated by a blank. Braces insulate _n_a_m_e + from following characters which would otherwise be part + of it. Shell variables have names consisting of up to + 20 letters and digits starting with a letter. The + underscore character is considered a letter. + If _n_a_m_e is not a shell variable, but is set in the + environment, then that value is returned (but :: modif- + iers and the other forms given below are not available + in this case). + + $name[selector] + ${name[selector]} + May be used to select only some of the words from the + value of _n_a_m_e. The selector is subjected to `$' substi- + tution and may consist of a single number or two + numbers separated by a `-'. The first word of a vari- + ables value is numbered `1'. If the first number of a + range is omitted it defaults to `1'. If the last + member of a range is omitted it defaults to `$#name'. + The selector `*' selects all words. It is not an error + for a range to be empty if the second argument is omit- + ted or in range. + + $#name + ${#name} + Gives the number of words in the variable. This is + useful for later use in a `[selector]'. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 9 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + $0 + Substitutes the name of the file from which command + input is being read. An error occurs if the name is + not known. + + $number + ${number} + Equivalent to `$argv[number]'. + + $* + Equivalent to `$argv[*]'. + + The modifiers `:e', `:h', `:t', `:r', `:q' and `:x' may be + applied to the substitutions above as may `:gh', `:gt' and + `:gr'. If braces `{' '}' appear in the command form then + the modifiers must appear within the braces. TThhee ccuurrrreenntt + iimmpplleemmeennttaattiioonn aalllloowwss oonnllyy oonnee ``::'' mmooddiiffiieerr oonn eeaacchh ``$$'' + eexxppaannssiioonn.. + + The following substitutions may not be modified with `:' + modifiers. + + $?name + ${?name} + Substitutes the string `1' if name is set, `0' if it is + not. + + $?0 + Substitutes `1' if the current input filename is known, + `0' if it is not. + + $$ + Substitute the (decimal) process number of the (parent) + shell. + + $< + Substitutes a line from the standard input, with no + further interpretation thereafter. It can be used to + read from the keyboard in a shell script. + + CCoommmmaanndd aanndd ffiilleennaammee ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonn + + The remaining substitutions, command and filename substitu- + tion, are applied selectively to the arguments of builtin + commands. This means that portions of expressions which are + not evaluated are not subjected to these expansions. For + commands which are not internal to the shell, the command + name is substituted separately from the argument list. This + occurs very late, after input-output redirection is per- + formed, and in a child of the main shell. + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 10 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + CCoommmmaanndd ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonn + + Command substitution is indicated by a command enclosed in + ``'. The output from such a command is normally broken into + separate words at blanks, tabs and newlines, with null words + being discarded, this text then replacing the original + string. Within `"'s, only newlines force new words; blanks + and tabs are preserved. + + In any case, the single final newline does not force a new + word. Note that it is thus possible for a command substitu- + tion to yield only part of a word, even if the command out- + puts a complete line. + + FFiilleennaammee ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonn + + If a word contains any of the characters `*', `?', `[' or + `{' or begins with the character `~', then that word is a + candidate for filename substitution, also known as `glob- + bing'. This word is then regarded as a pattern, and + replaced with an alphabetically sorted list of file names + which match the pattern. In a list of words specifying + filename substitution it is an error for no pattern to match + an existing file name, but it is not required for each pat- + tern to match. Only the metacharacters `*', `?' and `[' + imply pattern matching, the characters `~' and `{' being + more akin to abbreviations. + + In matching filenames, the character `.' at the beginning of + a filename or immediately following a `/', as well as the + character `/' must be matched explicitly. The character `*' + matches any string of characters, including the null string. + The character `?' matches any single character. The + sequence `[...]' matches any one of the characters enclosed. + Within `[...]', a pair of characters separated by `-' + matches any character lexically between the two. + + The character `~' at the beginning of a filename is used to + refer to home directories. Standing alone, i.e. `~' it + expands to the invokers home directory as reflected in the + value of the variable _h_o_m_e. When followed by a name consist- + ing of letters, digits and `-' characters the shell searches + for a user with that name and substitutes their home direc- + tory; thus `~ken' might expand to `/usr/ken' and + `~ken/chmach' to `/usr/ken/chmach'. If the character `~' is + followed by a character other than a letter or `/' or + appears not at the beginning of a word, it is left undis- + turbed. + + The metanotation `a{b,c,d}e' is a shorthand for `abe ace + ade'. Left to right order is preserved, with results of + matches being sorted separately at a low level to preserve + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 11 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + this order. This construct may be nested. Thus + `~source/s1/{oldls,ls}.c' expands to `/usr/source/s1/oldls.c + /usr/source/s1/ls.c' whether or not these files exist + without any chance of error if the home directory for + `source' is `/usr/source'. Similarly `../{memo,*box}' might + expand to `../memo ../box ../mbox'. (Note that `memo' was + not sorted with the results of matching `*box'.) As a spe- + cial case `{', `}' and `{}' are passed undisturbed. + + IInnppuutt//oouuttppuutt + + The standard input and standard output of a command may be + redirected with the following syntax: + + < name + Open file _n_a_m_e (which is first variable, command and + filename expanded) as the standard input. + + << word + Read the shell input up to a line which is identical to + _w_o_r_d. _W_o_r_d is not subjected to variable, filename or + command substitution, and each input line is compared + to _w_o_r_d before any substitutions are done on this input + line. Unless a quoting `\', `"', `'' or ``' appears in + _w_o_r_d variable and command substitution is performed on + the intervening lines, allowing `\' to quote `$', `\' + and ``'. Commands which are substituted have all + blanks, tabs, and newlines preserved, except for the + final newline which is dropped. The resultant text is + placed in an anonymous temporary file which is given to + the command as standard input. + + > name + >! name + >& name + >&! name + The file _n_a_m_e is used as standard output. If the file + does not exist then it is created; if the file exists, + its is truncated, its previous contents being lost. + + If the variable _n_o_c_l_o_b_b_e_r is set, then the file must + not exist or be a character special file (e.g. a termi- + nal or `/dev/null') or an error results. This helps + prevent accidental destruction of files. In this case + the `!' forms can be used and suppress this check. + + The forms involving `&' route the diagnostic output + into the specified file as well as the standard output. + _N_a_m_e is expanded in the same way as `<' input filenames + are. + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 12 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + >> name + >>& name + >>! name + >>&! name + Uses file _n_a_m_e as standard output like `>' but places + output at the end of the file. If the variable + _n_o_c_l_o_b_b_e_r is set, then it is an error for the file not + to exist unless one of the `!' forms is given. Other- + wise similar to `>'. + + A command receives the environment in which the shell was + invoked as modified by the input-output parameters and the + presence of the command in a pipeline. Thus, unlike some + previous shells, commands run from a file of shell commands + have no access to the text of the commands by default; + rather they receive the original standard input of the + shell. The `<<' mechanism should be used to present inline + data. This permits shell command scripts to function as + components of pipelines and allows the shell to block read + its input. Note that the default standard input for a com- + mand run detached is nnoott modified to be the empty file + `/dev/null'; rather the standard input remains as the origi- + nal standard input of the shell. If this is a terminal and + if the process attempts to read from the terminal, then the + process will block and the user will be notified (see JJoobbss + above). + + Diagnostic output may be directed through a pipe with the + standard output. Simply use the form `|&' rather than just + `|'. + + EExxpprreessssiioonnss + + A number of the builtin commands (to be described subse- + quently) take expressions, in which the operators are simi- + lar to those of C, with the same precedence. These expres- + sions appear in the @, _e_x_i_t, _i_f, and _w_h_i_l_e commands. The + following operators are available: + + || && | ^ & == != =~ !~ <= >= < > << >> + + - * / % ! ~ ( ) + + Here the precedence increases to the right, `==' `!=' `=~' + and `!~', `<=' `>=' `<' and `>', `<<' and `>>', `+' and `-', + `*' `/' and `%' being, in groups, at the same level. The + `==' `!=' `=~' and `!~' operators compare their arguments as + strings; all others operate on numbers. The operators `=~' + and `!~' are like `!=' and `==' except that the right hand + side is a _p_a_t_t_e_r_n (containing, e.g. `*'s, `?'s and instances + of `[...]') against which the left hand operand is matched. + This reduces the need for use of the _s_w_i_t_c_h statement in + shell scripts when all that is really needed is pattern + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 13 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + matching. + + Strings which begin with `0' are considered octal numbers. + Null or missing arguments are considered `0'. The result of + all expressions are strings, which represent decimal + numbers. It is important to note that no two components of + an expression can appear in the same word; except when adja- + cent to components of expressions which are syntactically + significant to the parser (`&' `|' `<' `>' `(' `)') they + should be surrounded by spaces. + + Also available in expressions as primitive operands are com- + mand executions enclosed in `{' and `}' and file enquiries + of the form `-_l name' where _l is one of: + + r read access + w write access + x execute access + e existence + o ownership + z zero size + f plain file + d directory + + The specified name is command and filename expanded and then + tested to see if it has the specified relationship to the + real user. If the file does not exist or is inaccessible + then all enquiries return false, i.e. `0'. Command execu- + tions succeed, returning true, i.e. `1', if the command + exits with status 0, otherwise they fail, returning false, + i.e. `0'. If more detailed status information is required + then the command should be executed outside of an expression + and the variable _s_t_a_t_u_s examined. + + CCoonnttrrooll ffllooww + + The shell contains a number of commands which can be used to + regulate the flow of control in command files (shell + scripts) and (in limited but useful ways) from terminal + input. These commands all operate by forcing the shell to + reread or skip in its input and, due to the implementation, + restrict the placement of some of the commands. + + The _f_o_r_e_a_c_h, _s_w_i_t_c_h, and _w_h_i_l_e statements, as well as the + _i_f-_t_h_e_n-_e_l_s_e form of the _i_f statement require that the major + keywords appear in a single simple command on an input line + as shown below. + + If the shell's input is not seekable, the shell buffers up + input whenever a loop is being read and performs seeks in + this internal buffer to accomplish the rereading implied by + the loop. (To the extent that this allows, backward goto's + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 14 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + will succeed on non-seekable inputs.) + + BBuuiillttiinn ccoommmmaannddss + + Builtin commands are executed within the shell. If a buil- + tin command occurs as any component of a pipeline except the + last then it is executed in a subshell. + + aalliiaass + aalliiaass name + aalliiaass name wordlist + The first form prints all aliases. The second form + prints the alias for name. The final form assigns the + specified _w_o_r_d_l_i_s_t as the alias of _n_a_m_e; _w_o_r_d_l_i_s_t is + command and filename substituted. _N_a_m_e is not allowed + to be _a_l_i_a_s or _u_n_a_l_i_a_s. + + aalllloocc + Shows the amount of dynamic memory acquired, broken + down into used and free memory. With an argument shows + the number of free and used blocks in each size + category. The categories start at size 8 and double at + each step. This command's output may vary across sys- + tem types, since systems other than the VAX may use a + different memory allocator. + + bbgg + bbgg %%job ... + Puts the current or specified jobs into the background, + continuing them if they were stopped. + + bbrreeaakk + Causes execution to resume after the _e_n_d of the nearest + enclosing _f_o_r_e_a_c_h or _w_h_i_l_e. The remaining commands on + the current line are executed. Multi-level breaks are + thus possible by writing them all on one line. + + bbrreeaakkssww + Causes a break from a _s_w_i_t_c_h, resuming after the _e_n_d_s_w. + + ccaassee label: + A label in a _s_w_i_t_c_h statement as discussed below. + + ccdd + ccdd name + cchhddiirr + cchhddiirr name + Change the shell's working directory to directory _n_a_m_e. + If no argument is given then change to the home direc- + tory of the user. + If _n_a_m_e is not found as a subdirectory of the current + directory (and does not begin with `/', `./' or `../'), + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 15 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + then each component of the variable _c_d_p_a_t_h is checked + to see if it has a subdirectory _n_a_m_e. Finally, if all + else fails but _n_a_m_e is a shell variable whose value + begins with `/', then this is tried to see if it is a + directory. + + ccoonnttiinnuuee + Continue execution of the nearest enclosing _w_h_i_l_e or + _f_o_r_e_a_c_h. The rest of the commands on the current line + are executed. + + ddeeffaauulltt:: + Labels the default case in a _s_w_i_t_c_h statement. The + default should come after all _c_a_s_e labels. + + ddiirrss + Prints the directory stack; the top of the stack is at + the left, the first directory in the stack being the + current directory. + + eecchhoo wordlist + eecchhoo --nn wordlist + The specified words are written to the shells standard + output, separated by spaces, and terminated with a new- + line unless the --nn option is specified. + + eellssee + eenndd + eennddiiff + eennddssww + See the description of the _f_o_r_e_a_c_h, _i_f, _s_w_i_t_c_h, and + _w_h_i_l_e statements below. + + eevvaall arg ... + (As in _s_h(1).) The arguments are read as input to the + shell and the resulting command(s) executed in the con- + text of the current shell. This is usually used to + execute commands generated as the result of command or + variable substitution, since parsing occurs before + these substitutions. See _t_s_e_t(1) for an example of + using _e_v_a_l. + + eexxeecc command + The specified command is executed in place of the + current shell. + + eexxiitt + eexxiitt(expr) + The shell exits either with the value of the _s_t_a_t_u_s + variable (first form) or with the value of the speci- + fied _e_x_p_r (second form). + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 16 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + ffgg + ffgg %%job ... + Brings the current or specified jobs into the fore- + ground, continuing them if they were stopped. + + ffoorreeaacchh name (wordlist) + ... + eenndd + The variable _n_a_m_e is successively set to each member of + _w_o_r_d_l_i_s_t and the sequence of commands between this com- + mand and the matching _e_n_d are executed. (Both _f_o_r_e_a_c_h + and _e_n_d must appear alone on separate lines.) + + The builtin command _c_o_n_t_i_n_u_e may be used to continue + the loop prematurely and the builtin command _b_r_e_a_k to + terminate it prematurely. When this command is read + from the terminal, the loop is read up once prompting + with `?' before any statements in the loop are exe- + cuted. If you make a mistake typing in a loop at the + terminal you can rub it out. + + gglloobb wordlist + Like _e_c_h_o but no `\' escapes are recognized and words + are delimited by null characters in the output. Useful + for programs which wish to use the shell to filename + expand a list of words. + + ggoottoo word + The specified _w_o_r_d is filename and command expanded to + yield a string of the form `label'. The shell rewinds + its input as much as possible and searches for a line + of the form `label:' possibly preceded by blanks or + tabs. Execution continues after the specified line. + + hhaasshhssttaatt + Print a statistics line indicating how effective the + internal hash table has been at locating commands (and + avoiding _e_x_e_c's). An _e_x_e_c is attempted for each com- + ponent of the _p_a_t_h where the hash function indicates a + possible hit, and in each component which does not + begin with a `/'. + + hhiissttoorryy + hhiissttoorryy _n + hhiissttoorryy --rr _n + hhiissttoorryy --hh _n + Displays the history event list; if _n is given only the + _n most recent events are printed. The --rr option rev- + erses the order of printout to be most recent first + rather than oldest first. The --hh option causes the + history list to be printed without leading numbers. + This is used to produce files suitable for sourceing + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 17 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + using the -h option to _s_o_u_r_c_e. + + iiff (expr) command + If the specified expression evaluates true, then the + single _c_o_m_m_a_n_d with arguments is executed. Variable + substitution on _c_o_m_m_a_n_d happens early, at the same time + it does for the rest of the _i_f command. _C_o_m_m_a_n_d must + be a simple command, not a pipeline, a command list, or + a parenthesized command list. Input/output redirection + occurs even if _e_x_p_r is false, when command is nnoott exe- + cuted (this is a bug). + + iiff (expr) tthheenn + ... + eellssee iiff (expr2) tthheenn + ... + eellssee + ... + eennddiiff + If the specified _e_x_p_r is true then the commands to the + first _e_l_s_e are executed; otherwise if _e_x_p_r_2 is true + then the commands to the second _e_l_s_e are executed, etc. + Any number of _e_l_s_e-_i_f pairs are possible; only one + _e_n_d_i_f is needed. The _e_l_s_e part is likewise optional. + (The words _e_l_s_e and _e_n_d_i_f must appear at the beginning + of input lines; the _i_f must appear alone on its input + line or after an _e_l_s_e.) + + jjoobbss + jjoobbss --ll + Lists the active jobs; given the --ll options lists pro- + cess id's in addition to the normal information. + + kkiillll %%job + kkiillll --sig %%job ... + kkiillll pid + kkiillll --sig pid ... + kkiillll --ll + Sends either the TERM (terminate) signal or the speci- + fied signal to the specified jobs or processes. Sig- + nals are either given by number or by names (as given + in /_u_s_r/_i_n_c_l_u_d_e/_s_i_g_n_a_l._h, stripped of the prefix + ``SIG''). The signal names are listed by ``kill -l''. + There is no default, saying just `kill' does not send a + signal to the current job. If the signal being sent is + TERM (terminate) or HUP (hangup), then the job or pro- + cess will be sent a CONT (continue) signal as well. + + lliimmiitt + lliimmiitt _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e + lliimmiitt _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e _m_a_x_i_m_u_m-_u_s_e + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 18 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + lliimmiitt --hh + lliimmiitt --hh _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e + lliimmiitt --hh _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e _m_a_x_i_m_u_m-_u_s_e + Limits the consumption by the current process and each + process it creates to not individually exceed _m_a_x_i_m_u_m- + _u_s_e on the specified _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e. If no _m_a_x_i_m_u_m-_u_s_e is + given, then the current limit is printed; if no + _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e is given, then all limitations are given. If + the --hh flag is given, the hard limits are used instead + of the current limits. The hard limits impose a ceil- + ing on the values of the current limits. Only the + super-user may raise the hard limits, but a user may + lower or raise the current limits within the legal + range. + + Resources controllable currently include _c_p_u_t_i_m_e (the + maximum number of cpu-seconds to be used by each pro- + cess), _f_i_l_e_s_i_z_e (the largest single file which can be + created), _d_a_t_a_s_i_z_e (the maximum growth of the + data+stack region via _s_b_r_k(2) beyond the end of the + program text), _s_t_a_c_k_s_i_z_e (the maximum size of the + automatically-extended stack region), and _c_o_r_e_d_u_m_p_s_i_z_e + (the size of the largest core dump that will be + created). + + The _m_a_x_i_m_u_m-_u_s_e may be given as a (floating point or + integer) number followed by a scale factor. For all + limits other than _c_p_u_t_i_m_e the default scale is `k' or + `kilobytes' (1024 bytes); a scale factor of `m' or + `megabytes' may also be used. For _c_p_u_t_i_m_e the default + scaling is `seconds', while `m' for minutes or `h' for + hours, or a time of the form `mm:ss' giving minutes and + seconds may be used. + + For both _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e names and scale factors, unambiguous + prefixes of the names suffice. + + llooggiinn + Terminate a login shell, replacing it with an instance + of //bbiinn//llooggiinn.. This is one way to log off, included for + compatibility with _s_h(1). + + llooggoouutt + Terminate a login shell. Especially useful if + _i_g_n_o_r_e_e_o_f is set. + + nniiccee + nniiccee +number + nniiccee command + nniiccee +number command + The first form sets the scheduling priority for this + shell to 4. The second form sets the priority to the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 19 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + given number. The final two forms run command at + priority 4 and _n_u_m_b_e_r respectively. The greater the + number, the less cpu the process will get. The super- + user may specify negative priority by using `nice + -number ...'. Command is always executed in a sub- + shell, and the restrictions placed on commands in sim- + ple _i_f statements apply. + + nnoohhuupp + nnoohhuupp command + The first form can be used in shell scripts to cause + hangups to be ignored for the remainder of the script. + The second form causes the specified command to be run + with hangups ignored. All processes detached with `&' + are effectively _n_o_h_u_p'_e_d. + + nnoottiiffyy + nnoottiiffyy %%job ... + Causes the shell to notify the user asynchronously when + the status of the current or specified jobs changes; + normally notification is presented before a prompt. + This is automatic if the shell variable _n_o_t_i_f_y is set. + + oonniinnttrr + oonniinnttrr - + oonniinnttrr label + Control the action of the shell on interrupts. The + first form restores the default action of the shell on + interrupts which is to terminate shell scripts or to + return to the terminal command input level. The second + form `onintr -' causes all interrupts to be ignored. + The final form causes the shell to execute a `goto + label' when an interrupt is received or a child process + terminates because it was interrupted. + + In any case, if the shell is running detached and + interrupts are being ignored, all forms of _o_n_i_n_t_r have + no meaning and interrupts continue to be ignored by the + shell and all invoked commands. + + ppooppdd + ppooppdd +n + Pops the directory stack, returning to the new top + directory. With an argument `+_n' discards the _nth + entry in the stack. The elements of the directory + stack are numbered from 0 starting at the top. + + ppuusshhdd + ppuusshhdd name + ppuusshhdd +n + With no arguments, _p_u_s_h_d exchanges the top two elements + of the directory stack. Given a _n_a_m_e argument, _p_u_s_h_d + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 20 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + changes to the new directory (ala _c_d) and pushes the + old current working directory (as in _c_s_w) onto the + directory stack. With a numeric argument, rotates the + _nth argument of the directory stack around to be the + top element and changes to it. The members of the + directory stack are numbered from the top starting at + 0. + + rreehhaasshh + Causes the internal hash table of the contents of the + directories in the _p_a_t_h variable to be recomputed. + This is needed if new commands are added to directories + in the _p_a_t_h while you are logged in. This should only + be necessary if you add commands to one of your own + directories, or if a systems programmer changes the + contents of one of the system directories. + + rreeppeeaatt count command + The specified _c_o_m_m_a_n_d which is subject to the same res- + trictions as the _c_o_m_m_a_n_d in the one line _i_f statement + above, is executed _c_o_u_n_t times. I/O redirections occur + exactly once, even if _c_o_u_n_t is 0. + + sseett + sseett name + sseett name=word + sseett name[index]=word + sseett name=(wordlist) + The first form of the command shows the value of all + shell variables. Variables which have other than a + single word as value print as a parenthesized word + list. The second form sets _n_a_m_e to the null string. + The third form sets _n_a_m_e to the single _w_o_r_d. The fourth + form sets the _i_n_d_e_x'_t_h component of name to word; this + component must already exist. The final form sets _n_a_m_e + to the list of words in _w_o_r_d_l_i_s_t. In all cases the + value is command and filename expanded. + + These arguments may be repeated to set multiple values + in a single set command. Note however, that variable + expansion happens for all arguments before any setting + occurs. + + sseetteennvv + sseetteennvv name value + sseetteennvv name + The first form lists all current environment variables. + The last form sets the value of environment variable + _n_a_m_e to be _v_a_l_u_e, a single string. The second form + sets _n_a_m_e to an empty string. The most commonly used + environment variable USER, TERM, and PATH are automati- + cally imported to and exported from the _c_s_h variables + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 21 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + _u_s_e_r, _t_e_r_m, and _p_a_t_h; there is no need to use _s_e_t_e_n_v + for these. + + sshhiifftt + sshhiifftt variable + The members of _a_r_g_v are shifted to the left, discarding + _a_r_g_v[_1]. It is an error for _a_r_g_v not to be set or to + have less than one word as value. The second form per- + forms the same function on the specified variable. + + ssoouurrccee name + ssoouurrccee --hh name + The shell reads commands from _n_a_m_e. _S_o_u_r_c_e commands may + be nested; if they are nested too deeply the shell may + run out of file descriptors. An error in a _s_o_u_r_c_e at + any level terminates all nested _s_o_u_r_c_e commands. Nor- + mally input during _s_o_u_r_c_e commands is not placed on the + history list; the -h option causes the commands to be + placed in the history list without being executed. + + ssttoopp + ssttoopp %%job ... + Stops the current or specified job which is executing + in the background. + + ssuussppeenndd + Causes the shell to stop in its tracks, much as if it + had been sent a stop signal with ^^ZZ. This is most + often used to stop shells started by _s_u(1). + + sswwiittcchh (string) + ccaassee str1: + ... + bbrreeaakkssww + ... + ddeeffaauulltt:: + ... + bbrreeaakkssww + eennddssww + Each case label is successively matched, against the + specified _s_t_r_i_n_g which is first command and filename + expanded. The file metacharacters `*', `?' and `[...]' + may be used in the case labels, which are variable + expanded. If none of the labels match before a + `default' label is found, then the execution begins + after the default label. Each case label and the + default label must appear at the beginning of a line. + The command _b_r_e_a_k_s_w causes execution to continue after + the _e_n_d_s_w. Otherwise control may fall through case + labels and default labels as in C. If no label matches + and there is no default, execution continues after the + _e_n_d_s_w. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 22 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + ttiimmee + ttiimmee command + With no argument, a summary of time used by this shell + and its children is printed. If arguments are given + the specified simple command is timed and a time sum- + mary as described under the _t_i_m_e variable is printed. + If necessary, an extra shell is created to print the + time statistic when the command completes. + + uummaasskk + uummaasskk value + The file creation mask is displayed (first form) or set + to the specified value (second form). The mask is + given in octal. Common values for the mask are 002 + giving all access to the group and read and execute + access to others or 022 giving all access except no + write access for users in the group or others. + + uunnaalliiaass pattern + All aliases whose names match the specified pattern are + discarded. Thus all aliases are removed by `unalias + *'. It is not an error for nothing to be _u_n_a_l_i_a_s_e_d. + + uunnhhaasshh + Use of the internal hash table to speed location of + executed programs is disabled. + + uunnlliimmiitt + uunnlliimmiitt _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e + uunnlliimmiitt --hh + uunnlliimmiitt --hh _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e + Removes the limitation on _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e. If no _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e is + specified, then all _r_e_s_o_u_r_c_e limitations are removed. + If --hh is given, the corresponding hard limits are + removed. Only the super-user may do this. + + uunnsseett pattern + All variables whose names match the specified pattern + are removed. Thus all variables are removed by `unset + *'; this has noticeably distasteful side-effects. It + is not an error for nothing to be _u_n_s_e_t. + + uunnsseetteennvv pattern + Removes all variables whose name match the specified + pattern from the environment. See also the _s_e_t_e_n_v com- + mand above and _p_r_i_n_t_e_n_v(1). + + wwaaiitt + All background jobs are waited for. It the shell is + interactive, then an interrupt can disrupt the wait, at + which time the shell prints names and job numbers of + all jobs known to be outstanding. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 23 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + wwhhiillee (expr) + ... + eenndd + While the specified expression evaluates non-zero, the + commands between the _w_h_i_l_e and the matching end are + evaluated. _B_r_e_a_k and _c_o_n_t_i_n_u_e may be used to terminate + or continue the loop prematurely. (The _w_h_i_l_e and _e_n_d + must appear alone on their input lines.) Prompting + occurs here the first time through the loop as for the + _f_o_r_e_a_c_h statement if the input is a terminal. + + %%job + Brings the specified job into the foreground. + + %%job && + Continues the specified job in the background. + + @@ + @@ name = expr + @@ name[index] = expr + The first form prints the values of all the shell vari- + ables. The second form sets the specified _n_a_m_e to the + value of _e_x_p_r. If the expression contains `<', `>', `&' + or `|' then at least this part of the expression must + be placed within `(' `)'. The third form assigns the + value of _e_x_p_r to the _i_n_d_e_x'_t_h argument of _n_a_m_e. Both + _n_a_m_e and its _i_n_d_e_x'_t_h component must already exist. + + The operators `*=', `+=', etc are available as in C. + The space separating the name from the assignment + operator is optional. Spaces are, however, mandatory + in separating components of _e_x_p_r which would otherwise + be single words. + + Special postfix `++' and `--' operators increment and + decrement _n_a_m_e respectively, i.e. `@ i++'. + + PPrree--ddeeffiinneedd aanndd eennvviirroonnmmeenntt vvaarriiaabblleess + + The following variables have special meaning to the shell. + Of these, _a_r_g_v, _c_w_d, _h_o_m_e, _p_a_t_h, _p_r_o_m_p_t, _s_h_e_l_l and _s_t_a_t_u_s + are always set by the shell. Except for _c_w_d and _s_t_a_t_u_s this + setting occurs only at initialization; these variables will + not then be modified unless this is done explicitly by the + user. + + This shell copies the environment variable USER into the + variable _u_s_e_r, TERM into _t_e_r_m, and HOME into _h_o_m_e, and + copies these back into the environment whenever the normal + shell variables are reset. The environment variable PATH is + likewise handled; it is not necessary to worry about its + setting other than in the file ._c_s_h_r_c as inferior _c_s_h + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 24 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + processes will import the definition of _p_a_t_h from the + environment, and re-export it if you then change it. + + aarrggvv Set to the arguments to the shell, it is from + this variable that positional parameters are + substituted, i.e. `$1' is replaced by + `$argv[1]', etc. + + ccddppaatthh Gives a list of alternate directories + searched to find subdirectories in _c_h_d_i_r com- + mands. + + ccwwdd The full pathname of the current directory. + + eecchhoo Set when the --xx command line option is given. + Causes each command and its arguments to be + echoed just before it is executed. For non- + builtin commands all expansions occur before + echoing. Builtin commands are echoed before + command and filename substitution, since + these substitutions are then done selec- + tively. + + ffiilleecc Enable file name completion. + + hhiissttcchhaarrss Can be given a string value to change the + characters used in history substitution. The + first character of its value is used as the + history substitution character, replacing the + default character !. The second character of + its value replaces the character |^ in quick + substitutions. + + hhiissttoorryy Can be given a numeric value to control the + size of the history list. Any command which + has been referenced in this many events will + not be discarded. Too large values of _h_i_s_- + _t_o_r_y may run the shell out of memory. The + last executed command is always saved on the + history list. + + hhoommee The home directory of the invoker, initial- + ized from the environment. The filename + expansion of `~~' refers to this variable. + + iiggnnoorreeeeooff If set the shell ignores end-of-file from + input devices which are terminals. This + prevents shells from accidentally being + killed by control-D's. + + mmaaiill The files where the shell checks for mail. + This is done after each command completion + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 25 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + which will result in a prompt, if a specified + interval has elapsed. The shell says `You + have new mail.' if the file exists with an + access time not greater than its modify time. + + If the first word of the value of _m_a_i_l is + numeric it specifies a different mail check- + ing interval, in seconds, than the default, + which is 10 minutes. + + If multiple mail files are specified, then + the shell says `New mail in _n_a_m_e' when there + is mail in the file _n_a_m_e. + + nnoocclloobbbbeerr As described in the section on _I_n_p_u_t/_o_u_t_p_u_t, + restrictions are placed on output redirection + to insure that files are not accidentally + destroyed, and that `>>' redirections refer + to existing files. + + nnoogglloobb If set, filename expansion is inhibited. + This is most useful in shell scripts which + are not dealing with filenames, or after a + list of filenames has been obtained and + further expansions are not desirable. + + nnoonnoommaattcchh If set, it is not an error for a filename + expansion to not match any existing files; + rather the primitive pattern is returned. It + is still an error for the primitive pattern + to be malformed, i.e. `echo [' still gives + an error. + + nnoottiiffyy If set, the shell notifies asynchronously of + job completions. The default is to rather + present job completions just before printing + a prompt. + + ppaatthh Each word of the path variable specifies a + directory in which commands are to be sought + for execution. A null word specifies the + current directory. If there is no _p_a_t_h vari- + able then only full path names will execute. + The usual search path is `.', `/bin' and + `/usr/bin', but this may vary from system to + system. For the super-user the default + search path is `/etc', `/bin' and `/usr/bin'. + A shell which is given neither the --cc nor the + --tt option will normally hash the contents of + the directories in the _p_a_t_h variable after + reading ._c_s_h_r_c, and each time the _p_a_t_h vari- + able is reset. If new commands are added to + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 26 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + these directories while the shell is active, + it may be necessary to give the _r_e_h_a_s_h or the + commands may not be found. + + pprroommpptt The string which is printed before each com- + mand is read from an interactive terminal + input. If a `!' appears in the string it + will be replaced by the current event number + unless a preceding `\' is given. Default is + `% ', or `# ' for the super-user. + + ssaavveehhiisstt is given a numeric value to control the + number of entries of the history list that + are saved in ~/.history when the user logs + out. Any command which has been referenced + in this many events will be saved. During + start up the shell sources ~/.history into + the history list enabling history to be saved + across logins. Too large values of _s_a_v_e_h_i_s_t + will slow down the shell during start up. + + sshheellll The file in which the shell resides. This is + used in forking shells to interpret files + which have execute bits set, but which are + not executable by the system. (See the + description of _N_o_n-_b_u_i_l_t_i_n _C_o_m_m_a_n_d _E_x_e_c_u_t_i_o_n + below.) Initialized to the (system-dependent) + home of the shell. + + ssttaattuuss The status returned by the last command. If + it terminated abnormally, then 0200 is added + to the status. Builtin commands which fail + return exit status `1', all other builtin + commands set status `0'. + + ttiimmee Controls automatic timing of commands. If + set, then any command which takes more than + this many cpu seconds will cause a line giv- + ing user, system, and real times and a utili- + zation percentage which is the ratio of user + plus system times to real time to be printed + when it terminates. + + vveerrbboossee Set by the --vv command line option, causes the + words of each command to be printed after + history substitution. + + NNoonn--bbuuiillttiinn ccoommmmaanndd eexxeeccuuttiioonn + + When a command to be executed is found to not be a builtin + command the shell attempts to execute the command via + _e_x_e_c_v_e(2). Each word in the variable _p_a_t_h names a directory + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 27 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + from which the shell will attempt to execute the command. + If it is given neither a --cc nor a --tt option, the shell will + hash the names in these directories into an internal table + so that it will only try an _e_x_e_c in a directory if there is + a possibility that the command resides there. This greatly + speeds command location when a large number of directories + are present in the search path. If this mechanism has been + turned off (via _u_n_h_a_s_h), or if the shell was given a --cc or + --tt argument, and in any case for each directory component of + _p_a_t_h which does not begin with a `/', the shell concatenates + with the given command name to form a path name of a file + which it then attempts to execute. + + Parenthesized commands are always executed in a subshell. + Thus `(cd ; pwd) ; pwd' prints the _h_o_m_e directory; leaving + you where you were (printing this after the home directory), + while `cd ; pwd' leaves you in the _h_o_m_e directory. + Parenthesized commands are most often used to prevent _c_h_d_i_r + from affecting the current shell. + + If the file has execute permissions but is not an executable + binary to the system, then it is assumed to be a file con- + taining shell commands and a new shell is spawned to read + it. + + If there is an _a_l_i_a_s for _s_h_e_l_l then the words of the alias + will be prepended to the argument list to form the shell + command. The first word of the _a_l_i_a_s should be the full + path name of the shell (e.g. `$shell'). Note that this is a + special, late occurring, case of _a_l_i_a_s substitution, and + only allows words to be prepended to the argument list + without modification. + + AArrgguummeenntt lliisstt pprroocceessssiinngg + + If argument 0 to the shell is `-' then this is a login + shell. The flag arguments are interpreted as follows: + + --bb This flag forces a ``break'' from option processing, + causing any further shell arguments to be treated as + non-option arguments. The remaining arguments will not + be interpreted as shell options. This may be used to + pass options to a shell script without confusion or + possible subterfuge. The shell will not run a set-user + ID script without this option. + + --cc Commands are read from the (single) following argument + which must be present. Any remaining arguments are + placed in _a_r_g_v. + + --ee The shell exits if any invoked command terminates + abnormally or yields a non-zero exit status. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 28 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + --ff The shell will start faster, because it will neither + search for nor execute commands from the file `.cshrc' + in the invoker's home directory. + + --ii The shell is interactive and prompts for its top-level + input, even if it appears to not be a terminal. Shells + are interactive without this option if their inputs and + outputs are terminals. + + --nn Commands are parsed, but not executed. This aids in + syntactic checking of shell scripts. + + --ss Command input is taken from the standard input. + + --tt A single line of input is read and executed. A `\' may + be used to escape the newline at the end of this line + and continue onto another line. + + --vv Causes the _v_e_r_b_o_s_e variable to be set, with the effect + that command input is echoed after history substitu- + tion. + + --xx Causes the _e_c_h_o variable to be set, so that commands + are echoed immediately before execution. + + --VV Causes the _v_e_r_b_o_s_e variable to be set even before + `.cshrc' is executed. + + --XX Is to --xx as --VV is to --vv.. + + After processing of flag arguments, if arguments remain but + none of the --cc,, --ii,, --ss,, or --tt options was given, the first + argument is taken as the name of a file of commands to be + executed. The shell opens this file, and saves its name for + possible resubstitution by `$0'. Since many systems use + either the standard version 6 or version 7 shells whose + shell scripts are not compatible with this shell, the shell + will execute such a `standard' shell if the first character + of a script is not a `#', i.e. if the script does not start + with a comment. Remaining arguments initialize the variable + _a_r_g_v. + + SSiiggnnaall hhaannddlliinngg + + The shell normally ignores _q_u_i_t signals. Jobs running + detached (either by `&' or the _b_g or %%...... && commands) are + immune to signals generated from the keyboard, including + hangups. Other signals have the values which the shell + inherited from its parent. The shells handling of inter- + rupts and terminate signals in shell scripts can be con- + trolled by _o_n_i_n_t_r. Login shells catch the _t_e_r_m_i_n_a_t_e signal; + otherwise this signal is passed on to children from the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 29 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + state in the shell's parent. In no case are interrupts + allowed when a login shell is reading the file `.logout'. + +AAUUTTHHOORR + William Joy. Job control and directory stack features first + implemented by J.E. Kulp of I.I.A.S.A, Laxenburg, Austria, + with different syntax than that used now. File name comple- + tion code written by Ken Greer, HP Labs. + +FFIILLEESS + ~/.cshrc Read at beginning of execution by each shell. + ~/.login Read by login shell, after `.cshrc' at login. + ~/.logout Read by login shell, at logout. + /bin/sh Standard shell, for shell scripts not starting with a `#'. + /tmp/sh* Temporary file for `<<'. + /etc/passwd Source of home directories for `~name'. + +LLIIMMIITTAATTIIOONNSS + Words can be no longer than 1024 characters. The system + limits argument lists to 10240 characters. The number of + arguments to a command which involves filename expansion is + limited to 1/6'th the number of characters allowed in an + argument list. Command substitutions may substitute no more + characters than are allowed in an argument list. To detect + looping, the shell restricts the number of _a_l_i_a_s substitu- + tions on a single line to 20. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + sh(1), access(2), execve(2), fork(2), killpg(2), pipe(2), + sigvec(2), umask(2), setrlimit(2), wait(2), tty(4), + a.out(5), environ(7), `An introduction to the C shell' + +BBUUGGSS + When a command is restarted from a stop, the shell prints + the directory it started in if this is different from the + current directory; this can be misleading (i.e. wrong) as + the job may have changed directories internally. + + Shell builtin functions are not stoppable/restartable. Com- + mand sequences of the form `a ; b ; c' are also not handled + gracefully when stopping is attempted. If you suspend `b', + the shell will then immediately execute `c'. This is espe- + cially noticeable if this expansion results from an _a_l_i_a_s. + It suffices to place the sequence of commands in ()'s to + force it to a subshell, i.e. `( a ; b ; c )'. + + Control over tty output after processes are started is prim- + itive; perhaps this will inspire someone to work on a good + virtual terminal interface. In a virtual terminal interface + much more interesting things could be done with output con- + trol. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 30 + + + + + + +CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1) + + + + Alias substitution is most often used to clumsily simulate + shell procedures; shell procedures should be provided rather + than aliases. + + Commands within loops, prompted for by `?', are not placed + in the _h_i_s_t_o_r_y list. Control structure should be parsed + rather than being recognized as built-in commands. This + would allow control commands to be placed anywhere, to be + combined with `|', and to be used with `&' and `;' metasyn- + tax. + + It should be possible to use the `:' modifiers on the output + of command substitutions. All and more than one `:' modif- + ier should be allowed on `$' substitutions. + + The way the ffiilleecc facility is implemented is ugly and expen- + sive. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 31 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/lint.0 b/usr/man/cat1/lint.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..89369afc18 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/lint.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +LINT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LINT(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + lint - a C program verifier + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + lliinntt [ --aabbcchhnnppuuvvxx ] file ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _L_i_n_t attempts to detect features of the C program _f_i_l_e_s + which are likely to be bugs, or non-portable, or wasteful. + It also checks the type usage of the program more strictly + than the compilers. Among the things which are currently + found are unreachable statements, loops not entered at the + top, automatic variables declared and not used, and logical + expressions whose value is constant. Moreover, the usage of + functions is checked to find functions which return values + in some places and not in others, functions called with + varying numbers of arguments, and functions whose values are + not used. + + By default, it is assumed that all the _f_i_l_e_s are to be + loaded together; they are checked for mutual compatibility. + Function definitions for certain libraries are available to + _l_i_n_t; these libraries are referred to by a conventional + name, such as `-lm', in the style of _l_d(1). Arguments end- + ing in ._l_n are also treated as library files. To create + lint libraries, use the --CC option: + + lint -Cfoo files . . . + + where _f_i_l_e_s are the C sources of library _f_o_o. The result is + a file _l_l_i_b-_l_f_o_o._l_n in the correct library format suitable + for linting programs using _f_o_o. + + Any number of the options in the following list may be used. + The --DD, --UU, and --II options of _c_c(1) are also recognized as + separate arguments. + + pp Attempt to check portability to the _I_B_M and _G_C_O_S + dialects of C. + + hh Apply a number of heuristic tests to attempt to intuit + bugs, improve style, and reduce waste. + + bb Report _b_r_e_a_k statements that cannot be reached. (This + is not the default because, unfortunately, most _l_e_x and + many _y_a_c_c outputs produce dozens of such comments.) + + vv Suppress complaints about unused arguments in func- + tions. + + xx Report variables referred to by extern declarations, + but never used. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 March 17, 1986 1 + + + + + + +LINT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LINT(1) + + + + aa Report assignments of long values to int variables. + + cc Complain about casts which have questionable portabil- + ity. + + uu Do not complain about functions and variables used and + not defined, or defined and not used (this is suitable + for running _l_i_n_t on a subset of files out of a larger + program). + + nn Do not check compatibility against the standard + library. + + zz Do not complain about structures that are never defined + (e.g. using a structure pointer without knowing its + contents.). + + _E_x_i_t(2) and other functions which do not return are not + understood; this causes various lies. + + Certain conventional comments in the C source will change + the behavior of _l_i_n_t: + + /*NOTREACHED*/ + at appropriate points stops comments about unreachable + code. + + /*VARARGS_n*/ + suppresses the usual checking for variable numbers of + arguments in the following function declaration. The + data types of the first _n arguments are checked; a + missing _n is taken to be 0. + + /*NOSTRICT*/ + shuts off strict type checking in the next expression. + + /*ARGSUSED*/ + turns on the --vv option for the next function. + + /*LINTLIBRARY*/ + at the beginning of a file shuts off complaints about + unused functions in this file. + +AAUUTTHHOORR + S.C. Johnson. Lint library construction implemented by + Edward Wang. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/lib/lint/lint[12] programs + /usr/lib/lint/llib-lc.ln declarations for standard func- + tions + /usr/lib/lint/llib-lc human readable version of above + + + +Printed 7/9/88 March 17, 1986 2 + + + + + + +LINT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LINT(1) + + + + /usr/lib/lint/llib-port.ln declarations for portable func- + tions + /usr/lib/lint/llib-port human readable . . . + llib-l*.ln library created with --CC + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + cc(1) + S. C. Johnson, _L_i_n_t, _a _C _P_r_o_g_r_a_m _C_h_e_c_k_e_r + +BBUUGGSS + There are some things you just ccaann''tt get lint to shut up + about. + + /*NOSTRICT*/ is not implemented in the current version + (alas). + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 March 17, 1986 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/lisp.0 b/usr/man/cat1/lisp.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..83353c4a84 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/lisp.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +LISP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LISP(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + lisp - lisp interpreter + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + lliisspp + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _L_i_s_p is a lisp interpreter for a dialect which closely + resembles MIT's MACLISP. This lisp, known as FRANZ LISP, + features an I/O facility which allows the user to change the + input and output syntax, add macro characters, and maintain + compatibility with upper-case only lisp systems; infinite + precision integer arithmetic, and an error facility which + allows the user to trap system errors in many different + ways. Interpreted functions may be mixed with code compiled + by _l_i_s_z_t(1) and both may be debugged using the ``Joseph Lis- + ter'' trace package. A _l_i_s_p containing compiled and inter- + preted code may be dumped into a file for later use. + + There are too many functions to list here; one should refer + to the manuals listed below. + +AAUUTTHHOORRSS + An early version was written by Jeff Levinsky, Mike Curry, + and John Breedlove. Keith Sklower wrote and is maintaining + the current version, with the assistance of John Foderaro. + The garbage collector was implemented by Bill Rowan. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/lib/lisp/trace.l Joseph Lister trace package + /usr/lib/lisp/toplevel.ltop level read-eval-print loop + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + liszt(1), lxref(1) + `FRANZ LISP Manual, Version 1' by John K. Foderaro + MACLISP Manual + +BBUUGGSS + The error system is in a state of flux and not all error + messages are as informative as they could be. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/liszt.0 b/usr/man/cat1/liszt.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..425b39e7c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/liszt.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +LISZT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LISZT(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + liszt - compile a Franz Lisp program + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + lliisszztt [ --mmppqqrruuwwxxCCQQSSTT ] [ --ee form ] [ --oo objfile ] [ name ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _L_i_s_z_t takes a file whose names ends in `.l' and compiles the + FRANZ LISP code there leaving an object program on the file + whose name is that of the source with `.o' substituted for + `.l'. + + The following options are interpreted by _l_i_s_z_t. + + --ee Evaluate the given form before compilation begins. + + --mm Compile a MACLISP file, by changing the readtable to + conform to MACLISP syntax and including a macro-defined + compatibility package. + + --oo Put the object code in the specified file, rather than + the default `.o' file. + + --pp places profiling code at the beginning of each non- + local function. If the lisp system is also created + with profiling in it, this allows function calling fre- + quency to be determined (see _p_r_o_f(1).) + + --qq Only print warning and error messages. Compilation + statistics and notes on correct but unusual constructs + will not be printed. + + --rr place bootstrap code at the beginning of the object + file, which when the object file is executed will cause + a lisp system to be invoked and the object file fasl'ed + in. + + --uu Compile a UCI-lispfile, by changing the readtable to + conform to UCI-Lisp syntax and including a macro- + defined compatibility package. + + --ww Suppress warning diagnostics. + + --xx Create a lisp cross reference file with the same name + as the source file but with `.x' appended. The pro- + gram _l_x_r_e_f(1) reads this file and creates a human read- + able cross reference listing. + + --CC put comments in the assembler output of the compiler. + Useful for debugging the compiler. + + --QQ Print compilation statistics and warn of strange + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +LISZT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LISZT(1) + + + + constructs. This is the default. + + --SS Compile the named program and leave the assembler- + language output on the corresponding file suffixed + `.s'. This will also prevent the assembler language + file from being assembled. + + --TT send the assembler output to standard output. + + If no source file is specified, then the compiler will run + interactively. You will find yourself talking to the + _l_i_s_p(1) top-level command interpreter. You can compile a + file by using the function _l_i_s_z_t (an nlambda) with the same + arguments as you use on the command line. For example to + compile `foo', a MACLISP file, you would use: + + (liszt -m foo) + + Note that _l_i_s_z_t supplies the ``.l'' extension for you. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/lib/lisp/machacks.lMACLISP compatibility package + /usr/lib/lisp/syscall.l macro definitions of Unix system calls + /usr/lib/lisp/ucifnc.l UCI Lisp compatibility package + +AAUUTTHHOORR + John Foderaro + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + lisp(1), lxref(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/ln.0 b/usr/man/cat1/ln.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0e35d30991 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/ln.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +LN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LN(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + ln - make links + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + llnn [ --ss ] sourcename [ targetname ] + llnn [ --ss ] sourcename1 sourcename2 [ sourcename3 ... ] tar- + getdirectory + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + A link is a directory entry referring to a file; the same + file (together with its size, all its protection informa- + tion, etc.) may have several links to it. There are two + kinds of links: hard links and symbolic links. + + By default _l_n makes hard links. A hard link to a file is + indistinguishable from the original directory entry; any + changes to a file are effective independent of the name used + to reference the file. Hard links may not refer to direc- + tories (unless the proper incantations are supplied) and may + not span file systems. + + The --ss option causes _l_n to create symbolic links. A sym- + bolic link contains the name of the file to which it is + linked. The referenced file is used when an _o_p_e_n(2) opera- + tion is performed on the link. A _s_t_a_t(2) on a symbolic link + will return the linked-to file; an _l_s_t_a_t(2) must be done to + obtain information about the link. The _r_e_a_d_l_i_n_k(2) call may + be used to read the contents of a symbolic link. Symbolic + links may span file systems and may refer to directories. + + Given one or two arguments, _l_n creates a link to an existing + file _s_o_u_r_c_e_n_a_m_e. If _t_a_r_g_e_t_n_a_m_e is given, the link has that + name; _t_a_r_g_e_t_n_a_m_e may also be a directory in which to place + the link; otherwise it is placed in the current directory. + If only the directory is specified, the link will be made to + the last component of _s_o_u_r_c_e_n_a_m_e. + + Given more than two arguments, _l_n makes links in _t_a_r_g_e_t_- + _d_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y to all the named source files. The links made + will have the same name as the files being linked to. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + rm(1), cp(1), mv(1), link(2), readlink(2), stat(2), sym- + link(2) + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 November 26, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/lock.0 b/usr/man/cat1/lock.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..40bde259d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/lock.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +LOCK(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LOCK(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + lock - reserve a terminal + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + lloocckk [ --pp ] [ --nnuummbbeerr ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _L_o_c_k requests a password from the user, reads it again for + verification and then it will normally not relinquish the + terminal until the password is repeated. There are three + other conditions under which it will terminate: it accepts + the password for root as an alternative to the one given by + the user, it will timeout after some interval of time, and + it may be killed by somebody with the appropriate permis- + sion. The default time limit is 15 minutes but it may be + changed with the -_n_u_m_b_e_r option where _n_u_m_b_e_r is the time + limit in minutes. The -_p option has _l_o_c_k use the user's + standard password instead of requesting another one. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 26, 1987 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/logger.0 b/usr/man/cat1/logger.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8202d686cb --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/logger.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +LOGGER(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LOGGER(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + logger - make entries in the system log + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + llooggggeerr [ --tt tag ] [ --pp pri ] [ --ii ] [ --ff file ] [ message + ... ] + +AARRGGUUMMEENNTTSS + --tt _t_a_g Mark every line in the log with the specified + _t_a_g. + + --pp _p_r_i Enter the message with the specified priority. + The priority may be specified numerically or as + a ``facility.level'' pair. For example, ``-p + local3.info'' logs the message(s) as + _i_n_f_ormational level in the _l_o_c_a_l_3 facility. The + default is ``user.notice.'' + + --ii Log the process id of the logger process with + each line. + + --ff _f_i_l_e Log the specified file. + + message The message to log; if not specified, and the --ff + flag is not provided, standard input is logged. + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _L_o_g_g_e_r provides a program interface to the _s_y_s_l_o_g(3) system + log module. + +EEXXAAMMPPLLEESS + logger System rebooted + + logger -p local0.notice -t HOSTIDM -f /dev/idmc + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + syslog(3), syslogd(8) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 July 9, 1988 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/login.0 b/usr/man/cat1/login.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..97cc227f12 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/login.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +LOGIN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LOGIN(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + login - sign on + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + llooggiinn [ --pp ] [ username ] + llooggiinn [ --pp ] [ --hh hostname ] [ --ff ] [ username ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + The _l_o_g_i_n command is used when a user initially signs on. + It may also be used at any time to change from one user to + another. This case is the one summarized first above and + described here. See "How to Get Started" for how to connect + initially. The invocation of _l_o_g_i_n for initial sign-on is + made by a system program or server using the latter form of + the command and is described below. + + If _l_o_g_i_n is invoked without an argument, it asks for a user + name, and, if appropriate, a password. Echoing is turned + off (if possible) during the typing of the password, so it + will not appear on the written record of the session. + + After a successful login, accounting files are updated and + the user is informed of the existence of mail. The message + of the day is printed, as is the time of his last login. + Both are suppressed if he has a ".hushlogin" file in his + home directory; this is mostly used to make life easier for + non-human users, such as _u_u_c_p. + + _L_o_g_i_n initializes the user and group IDs and the working + directory, then executes a command interpreter (usually + _c_s_h(1)) according to specifications found in a password + file. Argument 0 of the command interpreter is the name of + the command interpreter with a leading dash ("-"). + + Login also modifies the environment _e_n_v_i_r_o_n(7) with informa- + tion specifying home directory, command interpreter, termi- + nal type (if available) and user name. The `-p' argument + causes the remainder of the environment to be preserved, + otherwise any previous environment is discarded. + + If the file /etc/nologin exists, _l_o_g_i_n prints its contents + on the user's terminal and exits. This is used by _s_h_u_t_- + _d_o_w_n(8) to stop users logging in when the system is about to + go down. + + Login is recognized by _s_h(1) and _c_s_h(1) and executed + directly (without forking). + + There are several additional options to _l_o_g_i_n for use at + initial login. With one exception, these options are avail- + able only to the superuser. The --hh option is used by + _t_e_l_n_e_t_d(8C) and other servers to list the host from which + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 14, 1987 1 + + + + + + +LOGIN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LOGIN(1) + + + + the connection was received. The --ff option is used with a + username on the command line to indicate that proper authen- + tication has already been done and that no password need be + requested. This option may be used by the superuser or by + the user specified on the command line. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/utmp accounting + /usr/adm/wtmp accounting + /usr/spool/mail/* mail + /etc/motd message-of-the-day + /etc/passwd password file + /etc/nologin stops logins + .hushlogin makes login quieter + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + mail(1), passwd(1), rlogin(1), getpass(3), passwd(5), + utmp(5), environ(7), init(8), getty(8), shutdown(8), + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + "Login incorrect," if the name or the password is bad. + "No Shell", "cannot open password file", "no directory": + consult a programming counselor. + +BBUUGGSS + An undocumented option, --rr is used by the remote login + server, _r_l_o_g_i_n_d(8) to force _l_o_g_i_n to enter into an initial + connection protocol. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 14, 1987 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/look.0 b/usr/man/cat1/look.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d24fe32f86 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/look.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +LOOK(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LOOK(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + look - find lines in a sorted list + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + llooookk [ --ddff ] string [ file ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _L_o_o_k consults a sorted _f_i_l_e and prints all lines that begin + with _s_t_r_i_n_g. It uses binary search. + + The options dd and ff affect comparisons as in _s_o_r_t(1): + + dd `Dictionary' order: only letters, digits, tabs and + blanks participate in comparisons. + + ff Fold. Upper case letters compare equal to lower case. + + If no _f_i_l_e is specified, /_u_s_r/_d_i_c_t/_w_o_r_d_s is assumed with + collating sequence --ddff.. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/dict/words + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + sort(1), grep(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/lookbib.0 b/usr/man/cat1/lookbib.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..aa85ff5825 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/lookbib.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +LOOKBIB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LOOKBIB(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + indxbib, lookbib - build inverted index for a bibliography, + find references in a bibliography + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + iinnddxxbbiibb database ... + llooookkbbiibb [ --nn ] database + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _I_n_d_x_b_i_b makes an inverted index to the named _d_a_t_a_b_a_s_e_s (or + files) for use by _l_o_o_k_b_i_b(1) and _r_e_f_e_r(1). These files con- + tain bibliographic references (or other kinds of informa- + tion) separated by blank lines. + + A bibliographic reference is a set of lines, constituting + fields of bibliographic information. Each field starts on a + line beginning with a ``%'', followed by a key-letter, then + a blank, and finally the contents of the field, which may + continue until the next line starting with ``%''. + + _I_n_d_x_b_i_b is a shell script that calls /usr/lib/refer/mkey and + /usr/lib/refer/inv. The first program, _m_k_e_y, truncates + words to 6 characters, and maps upper case to lower case. + It also discards words shorter than 3 characters, words + among the 100 most common English words, and numbers (dates) + < 1900 or > 2000. These parameters can be changed; see page + 4 of the _R_e_f_e_r document by Mike Lesk. The second program, + _i_n_v, creates an entry file (.ia), a posting file (.ib), and + a tag file (.ic), all in the working directory. + + _L_o_o_k_b_i_b uses an inverted index made by _i_n_d_x_b_i_b to find sets + of bibliographic references. It reads keywords typed after + the ``>'' prompt on the terminal, and retrieves records con- + taining all these keywords. If nothing matches, nothing is + returned except another ``>'' prompt. + + _L_o_o_k_b_i_b will ask if you need instructions, and will print + some brief information if you reply ``y''. The ``-n'' flag + turns off the prompt for instructions. + + It is possible to search multiple databases, as long as they + have a common index made by _i_n_d_x_b_i_b. In that case, only the + first argument given to _i_n_d_x_b_i_b is specified to _l_o_o_k_b_i_b. + + If _l_o_o_k_b_i_b does not find the index files (the .i[abc] + files), it looks for a reference file with the same name as + the argument, without the suffixes. It creates a file with + a '.ig' suffix, suitable for use with _f_g_r_e_p. It then uses + this fgrep file to find references. This method is simpler + to use, but the .ig file is slower to use than the .i[abc] + files, and does not allow the use of multiple reference + files. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +LOOKBIB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LOOKBIB(1) + + + +FFIILLEESS + _x.ia, _x.ib, _x.ic, where _x is the first argument, or if these + are not present, then _x.ig, _x + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + refer(1), addbib(1), sortbib(1), roffbib(1), lookbib(1) + +BBUUGGSS + Probably all dates should be indexed, since many disciplines + refer to literature written in the 1800s or earlier. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/lorder.0 b/usr/man/cat1/lorder.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c1f704e29a --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/lorder.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +LORDER(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LORDER(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + lorder - find ordering relation for an object library + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + lloorrddeerr file ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + The input is one or more object or library archive (see + _a_r(1)) _f_i_l_e_s. The standard output is a list of pairs of + object file names, meaning that the first file of the pair + refers to external identifiers defined in the second. The + output may be processed by _t_s_o_r_t(1) to find an ordering of a + library suitable for one-pass access by _l_d(1). + + This brash one-liner intends to build a new library from + existing `.o' files. + + ar cr library `lorder *.o | tsort` + + The need for lorder may be vitiated by use of _r_a_n_l_i_b(1), + which converts an ordered archive into a randomly accessed + library. + +FFIILLEESS + *symref, *symdef + nm(1), sed(1), sort(1), join(1) + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + tsort(1), ld(1), ar(1), ranlib(1) + +BBUUGGSS + The names of object files, in and out of libraries, must end + with `.o'; nonsense results otherwise. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/lpq.0 b/usr/man/cat1/lpq.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a69a291d9f --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/lpq.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +LPQ(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LPQ(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + lpq - spool queue examination program + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + llppqq [ -l ] [ -Pprinter ] [ job # ... ] [ user ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _l_p_q examines the spooling area used by _l_p_d(8) for printing + files on the line printer, and reports the status of the + specified jobs or all jobs associated with a user. _l_p_q + invoked without any arguments reports on any jobs currently + in the queue. A --PP flag may be used to specify a particular + printer, otherwise the default line printer is used (or the + value of the PRINTER variable in the environment). All other + arguments supplied are interpreted as user names or job + numbers to filter out only those jobs of interest. + + For each job submitted (i.e. invocation of _l_p_r(1)) _l_p_q + reports the user's name, current rank in the queue, the + names of files comprising the job, the job identifier (a + number which may be supplied to _l_p_r_m(1) for removing a + specific job), and the total size in bytes. The --ll option + causes information about each of the files comprising the + job to be printed. Normally, only as much information as + will fit on one line is displayed. Job ordering is depen- + dent on the algorithm used to scan the spooling directory + and is supposed to be FIFO (First in First Out). File names + comprising a job may be unavailable (when _l_p_r(1) is used as + a sink in a pipeline) in which case the file is indicated as + ``(standard input)". + + If _l_p_q warns that there is no daemon present (i.e. due to + some malfunction), the _l_p_c(8) command can be used to restart + the printer daemon. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/termcap for manipulating the screen for repeated display + /etc/printcap to determine printer characteristics + /usr/spool/* the spooling directory, as determined from printcap + /usr/spool/*/cf* control files specifying jobs + /usr/spool/*/lock the lock file to obtain the currently active job + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + lpr(1), lprm(1), lpc(8), lpd(8) + +BBUUGGSS + Due to the dynamic nature of the information in the spooling + directory lpq may report unreliably. Output formatting is + sensitive to the line length of the terminal; this can + results in widely spaced columns. + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 30, 1987 1 + + + + + + +LPQ(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LPQ(1) + + + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Unable to open various files. The lock file being mal- + formed. Garbage files when there is no daemon active, but + files in the spooling directory. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 30, 1987 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/lpr.0 b/usr/man/cat1/lpr.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b2ff10d475 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/lpr.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +LPR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LPR(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + lpr - off line print + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + llpprr [ --PP_p_r_i_n_t_e_r ] [ --##_n_u_m ] [ --CC _c_l_a_s_s ] [ --JJ _j_o_b ] [ --TT + _t_i_t_l_e ] [ --ii [ _n_u_m_c_o_l_s ]] [ --11223344 _f_o_n_t ] [ --ww_n_u_m ] [ + --ppllttnnddggvvccffrrmmhhss ] [ name ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + LLpprr uses a spooling daemon to print the named files when + facilities become available. If no names appear, the stan- + dard input is assumed. The --PP option may be used to force + output to a specific printer. Normally, the default printer + is used (site dependent), or the value of the environment + variable PRINTER is used. + + The following single letter options are used to notify the + line printer spooler that the files are not standard text + files. The spooling daemon will use the appropriate filters + to print the data accordingly. + + --pp Use _p_r(1) to format the files (equivalent to _p_r_i_n_t). + + --ll Use a filter which allows control characters to be + printed and suppresses page breaks. + + --tt The files are assumed to contain data from _t_r_o_f_f(1) + (cat phototypesetter commands). + + --nn The files are assumed to contain data from _d_i_t_r_o_f_f + (device independent troff). + + --dd The files are assumed to contain data from _t_e_x(l) (DVI + format from Stanford). + + --gg The files are assumed to contain standard plot data as + produced by the _p_l_o_t(3X) routines (see also _p_l_o_t(1G) + for the filters used by the printer spooler). + + --vv The files are assumed to contain a raster image for + devices like the Benson Varian. + + --cc The files are assumed to contain data produced by + _c_i_f_p_l_o_t(l). + + --ff Use a filter which interprets the first character of + each line as a standard FORTRAN carriage control char- + acter. + + The remaining single letter options have the following mean- + ing. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +LPR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LPR(1) + + + + --rr Remove the file upon completion of spooling or upon + completion of printing (with the --ss option). + + --mm Send mail upon completion. + + --hh Suppress the printing of the burst page. + + --ss Use symbolic links. Usually files are copied to the + spool directory. + + The --CC option takes the following argument as a job classif- + ication for use on the burst page. For example, + + lpr -C EECS foo.c + + causes the system name (the name returned by _h_o_s_t_n_a_m_e(1)) to + be replaced on the burst page by EECS, and the file foo.c to + be printed. + + The --JJ option takes the following argument as the job name + to print on the burst page. Normally, the first file's name + is used. + + The --TT option uses the next argument as the title used by + _p_r(1) instead of the file name. + + To get multiple copies of output, use the --##_n_u_m option, + where _n_u_m is the number of copies desired of each file + named. For example, + + lpr -#3 foo.c bar.c more.c + + would result in 3 copies of the file foo.c, followed by 3 + copies of the file bar.c, etc. On the other hand, + + cat foo.c bar.c more.c | lpr -#3 + + will give three copies of the concatenation of the files. + + The --ii option causes the output to be indented. If the next + argument is numeric, it is used as the number of blanks to + be printed before each line; otherwise, 8 characters are + printed. + + The --ww option takes the immediately following number to be + the page width for _p_r. + + The --ss option will use _s_y_m_l_i_n_k(2) to link data files rather + than trying to copy them so large files can be printed. + This means the files should not be modified or removed until + they have been printed. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + + + + +LPR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LPR(1) + + + + The option --11223344 Specifies a font to be mounted on font + position _i. The daemon will construct a ._r_a_i_l_m_a_g file + referencing /_u_s_r/_l_i_b/_v_f_o_n_t/_n_a_m_e._s_i_z_e. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/passwd personal identification + /etc/printcap printer capabilities data base + /usr/lib/lpd* line printer daemons + /usr/spool/* directories used for spooling + /usr/spool/*/cf* daemon control files + /usr/spool/*/df* data files specified in "cf" files + /usr/spool/*/tf* temporary copies of "cf" files + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + lpq(1), lprm(1), pr(1), symlink(2), printcap(5), lpc(8), + lpd(8) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + If you try to spool too large a file, it will be truncated. + _L_p_r will object to printing binary files. If a user other + than root prints a file and spooling is disabled, _l_p_r will + print a message saying so and will not put jobs in the + queue. If a connection to _l_p_d on the local machine cannot + be made, _l_p_r will say that the daemon cannot be started. + Diagnostics may be printed in the daemon's log file regard- + ing missing spool files by _l_p_d. + +BBUUGGSS + Fonts for _t_r_o_f_f and _t_e_x reside on the host with the printer. + It is currently not possible to use local font libraries. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/lprm.0 b/usr/man/cat1/lprm.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..943a190415 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/lprm.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +LPRM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LPRM(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + lprm - remove jobs from the line printer spooling queue + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + llpprrmm [ --PP_p_r_i_n_t_e_r ] [ -- ] [ job # ... ] [ user ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _L_p_r_m will remove a job, or jobs, from a printer's spool + queue. Since the spooling directory is protected from + users, using _l_p_r_m is normally the only method by which a + user may remove a job. + + _L_p_r_m without any arguments will delete the currently active + job if it is owned by the user who invoked _l_p_r_m. + + If the -- flag is specified, _l_p_r_m will remove all jobs which + a user owns. If the super-user employs this flag, the spool + queue will be emptied entirely. The owner is determined by + the user's login name and host name on the machine where the + _l_p_r command was invoked. + + Specifying a user's name, or list of user names, will cause + _l_p_r_m to attempt to remove any jobs queued belonging to that + user (or users). This form of invoking _l_p_r_m is useful only + to the super-user. + + A user may dequeue an individual job by specifying its job + number. This number may be obtained from the _l_p_q(1) pro- + gram, e.g. + + % lpq -l + + 1st: ken [job #013ucbarpa] + (standard input) 100 bytes + % lprm 13 + + _L_p_r_m will announce the names of any files it removes and is + silent if there are no jobs in the queue which match the + request list. + + _L_p_r_m will kill off an active daemon, if necessary, before + removing any spooling files. If a daemon is killed, a new + one is automatically restarted upon completion of file remo- + vals. + + The --PP option may be usd to specify the queue associated + with a specific printer (otherwise the default printer, or + the value of the PRINTER variable in the environment is + used). + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/printcap printer characteristics file + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +LPRM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LPRM(1) + + + + /usr/spool/* spooling directories + /usr/spool/*/lock lock file used to obtain the pid of the current + daemon and the job number of the currently active job + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + lpr(1), lpq(1), lpd(8) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + ``Permission denied" if the user tries to remove files other + than his own. + +BBUUGGSS + Since there are race conditions possible in the update of + the lock file, the currently active job may be incorrectly + identified. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/lptest.0 b/usr/man/cat1/lptest.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6c3370208b --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/lptest.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +LPTEST(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LPTEST(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + lptest - generate lineprinter ripple pattern + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + llpptteesstt [ lleennggtthh [ ccoouunntt ] ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _L_p_t_e_s_t writes the traditional "ripple test" pattern on stan- + dard output. In 96 lines, this pattern will print all 96 + printable ASCII characters in each position. While origi- + nally created to test printers, it is quite useful for test- + ing terminals, driving terminal ports for debugging pur- + poses, or any other task where a quick supply of random data + is needed. + + The _l_e_n_g_t_h argument specifies the output line length if the + the default length of 79 is inappropriate. + + The _c_o_u_n_t argument specifies the number of output lines to + be generated if the default count of 200 is inappropriate. + Note that if _c_o_u_n_t is to be specified, _l_e_n_g_t_h must be also + be specified. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO +BBUUGGSS + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/ls.0 b/usr/man/cat1/ls.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6c9fd87e88 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/ls.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +LS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LS(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + ls - list contents of directory + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + llss [ --aaccddffggiillqqrrssttuu11AACCLLFFRR ] name ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + For each directory argument, _l_s lists the contents of the + directory; for each file argument, _l_s repeats its name and + any other information requested. By default, the output is + sorted alphabetically. When no argument is given, the + current directory is listed. When several arguments are + given, the arguments are first sorted appropriately, but + file arguments are processed before directories and their + contents. + + There are a large number of options: + + --ll List in long format, giving mode, number of links, + owner, size in bytes, and time of last modification for + each file. (See below.) If the file is a special file + the size field will instead contain the major and minor + device numbers. If the file is a symbolic link the + pathname of the linked-to file is printed preceded by + ``->''. + + --gg Include the group ownership of the file in a long out- + put. + + --tt Sort by time modified (latest first) instead of by + name. + + --aa List all entries; in the absence of this option, + entries whose names begin with a period (..) are _n_o_t + listed. + + --ss Give size in kilobytes of each file. + + --dd If argument is a directory, list only its name; often + used with --ll to get the status of a directory. + + --LL If argument is a symbolic link, list the file or direc- + tory the link references rather than the link itself. + + --rr Reverse the order of sort to get reverse alphabetic or + oldest first as appropriate. + + --uu Use time of last access instead of last modification + for sorting (with the --tt option) and/or printing (with + the --ll option). + + --cc Use time when file status was last changed for sorting + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 1 + + + + + + +LS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LS(1) + + + + or printing. + + --ii For each file, print the i-number in the first column + of the report. + + --ff Force each argument to be interpreted as a directory + and list the name found in each slot. This option + turns off --ll,, --tt,, --ss,, and --rr,, and turns on --aa;; the + order is the order in which entries appear in the + directory. + + --FF cause directories to be marked with a trailing `/', + sockets with a trailing `=', symbolic links with a + trailing `@', and executable files with a trailing `*'. + + --RR recursively list subdirectories encountered. + + --11 force one entry per line output format; this is the + default when output is not to a terminal. + + --CC force multi-column output; this is the default when + output is to a terminal. + + --qq force printing of non-graphic characters in file names + as the character `?'; this is the default when output + is to a terminal. + + The mode printed under the --ll option contains 11 characters + which are interpreted as follows: the first character is + + dd if the entry is a directory; + bb if the entry is a block-type special file; + cc if the entry is a character-type special file; + ll if the entry is a symbolic link; + ss if the entry is a socket, or + -- if the entry is a plain file. + + The next 9 characters are interpreted as three sets of three + bits each. The first set refers to owner permissions; the + next refers to permissions to others in the same user-group; + and the last to all others. Within each set the three char- + acters indicate permission respectively to read, to write, + or to execute the file as a program. For a directory, `exe- + cute' permission is interpreted to mean permission to search + the directory. The permissions are indicated as follows: + + rr if the file is readable; + ww if the file is writable; + xx if the file is executable; + -- if the indicated permission is not granted. + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 2 + + + + + + +LS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LS(1) + + + + The group-execute permission character is given as ss if the + file has the set-group-id bit set; likewise the user-execute + permission character is given as ss if the file has the set- + user-id bit set. These are given as SS (capitalized) if the + corresponding execute permission is NOT set. + + The last character of the mode (normally `x' or `-') is tt if + the 1000 bit of the mode is on. See _c_h_m_o_d(1) for the mean- + ing of this mode. This is given as TT (capitalized) if the + corresponding execute permission is NOT set. + + When the sizes of the files in a directory are listed, a + total count of blocks, including indirect blocks is printed. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/passwd to get user id's for `ls -l'. + /etc/group to get group id's for `ls -g'. + +BBUUGGSS + Newline and tab are considered printing characters in file + names. + + The output device is assumed to be 80 columns wide. + + The option setting based on whether the output is a teletype + is undesirable as ``ls -s'' is much different than + ``ls -s | lpr''. On the other hand, not doing this setting + would make old shell scripts which used _l_s almost certain + losers. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/lxref.0 b/usr/man/cat1/lxref.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e67662f222 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/lxref.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +LXREF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LXREF(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + lxref - lisp cross reference program + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + llxxrreeff [ --NN ] xref-file ... [ --aa source-file ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _L_x_r_e_f reads cross reference file(s) written by the lisp com- + piler _l_i_s_z_t and prints a cross reference listing on the + standard output. _L_i_s_z_t will create a cross reference file + during compilation when it is given the --xx switch. Cross + reference files usually end in `.x' and consequently _l_x_r_e_f + will append a `.x' to the file names given if necessary. + The first option to _l_x_r_e_f is a decimal integer, N, which + sets the _i_g_n_o_r_e_l_e_v_e_l. If a function is called more than + _i_g_n_o_r_e_l_e_v_e_l times, the cross reference listing will just + print the number of calls instead of listing each one of + them. The default for _i_g_n_o_r_e_l_e_v_e_l is 50. + + The --aa option causes _l_x_r_e_f to put limited cross reference + information in the sources named. _l_x_r_e_f will scan the + source and when it comes across a definition of a function + (that is a line beginning with `(_d_e_f' it will preceed that + line with a list of the functions which call this function, + written as a comment preceeded by `;.. ' . All existing + lines beginning with `;.. ' will be removed from the file. + If the source file contains a line beginning `;.-' then this + will disable this annotation process from this point on + until a `;.+' is seen (however, lines beginning with `;.. ' + will continue to be deleted). After the annoation is done, + the original file `_f_o_o._l' is renamed to " `#._f_o_o._l'" and the + new file with annotation is named `_f_o_o._l' + +AAUUTTHHOORR + John Foderaro + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + lisp(1), liszt(1) + +BBUUGGSS + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/m4.0 b/usr/man/cat1/m4.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ace9da023a --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/m4.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +M4(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual M4(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + m4 - macro processor + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + mm44 [ files ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _M_4 is a macro processor intended as a front end for Ratfor, + C, and other languages. Each of the argument files is pro- + cessed in order; if there are no arguments, or if an argu- + ment is `-', the standard input is read. The processed text + is written on the standard output. + + Macro calls have the form + + name(arg1,arg2, . . . , argn) + + The `(' must immediately follow the name of the macro. If a + defined macro name is not followed by a `(', it is deemed to + have no arguments. Leading unquoted blanks, tabs, and new- + lines are ignored while collecting arguments. Potential + macro names consist of alphabetic letters, digits, and + underscore `_', where the first character is not a digit. + + Left and right single quotes (`') are used to quote strings. + The value of a quoted string is the string stripped of the + quotes. + + When a macro name is recognized, its arguments are collected + by searching for a matching right parenthesis. Macro + evaluation proceeds normally during the collection of the + arguments, and any commas or right parentheses which happen + to turn up within the value of a nested call are as effec- + tive as those in the original input text. After argument + collection, the value of the macro is pushed back onto the + input stream and rescanned. + + _M_4 makes available the following built-in macros. They may + be redefined, but once this is done the original meaning is + lost. Their values are null unless otherwise stated. + + ddeeffiinnee The second argument is installed as the value of + the macro whose name is the first argument. Each + occurrence of $_n in the replacement text, where _n + is a digit, is replaced by the _n-th argument. + Argument 0 is the name of the macro; missing argu- + ments are replaced by the null string. + + uunnddeeffiinnee removes the definition of the macro named in its + argument. + + iiffddeeff If the first argument is defined, the value is the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +M4(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual M4(1) + + + + second argument, otherwise the third. If there is + no third argument, the value is null. The word + _u_n_i_x is predefined on UNIX versions of _m_4. + + cchhaannggeeqquuoottee + Change quote characters to the first and second + arguments. _C_h_a_n_g_e_q_u_o_t_e without arguments restores + the original values (i.e., `'). + + ddiivveerrtt _M_4 maintains 10 output streams, numbered 0-9. The + final output is the concatenation of the streams + in numerical order; initially stream 0 is the + current stream. The _d_i_v_e_r_t macro changes the + current output stream to its (digit-string) argu- + ment. Output diverted to a stream other than 0 + through 9 is discarded. + + uunnddiivveerrtt causes immediate output of text from diversions + named as arguments, or all diversions if no argu- + ment. Text may be undiverted into another diver- + sion. Undiverting discards the diverted text. + + ddiivvnnuumm returns the value of the current output stream. + + ddnnll reads and discards characters up to and including + the next newline. + + iiffeellssee has three or more arguments. If the first argu- + ment is the same string as the second, then the + value is the third argument. If not, and if there + are more than four arguments, the process is + repeated with arguments 4, 5, 6 and 7. Otherwise, + the value is either the fourth string, or, if it + is not present, null. + + iinnccrr returns the value of its argument incremented by + 1. The value of the argument is calculated by + interpreting an initial digit-string as a decimal + number. + + eevvaall evaluates its argument as an arithmetic expres- + sion, using 32-bit arithmetic. Operators include + +, -, *, /, %, ^ (exponentiation); relationals; + parentheses. + + lleenn returns the number of characters in its argument. + + iinnddeexx returns the position in its first argument where + the second argument begins (zero origin), or -1 if + the second argument does not occur. + + ssuubbssttrr returns a substring of its first argument. The + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + + + + +M4(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual M4(1) + + + + second argument is a zero origin number selecting + the first character; the third argument indicates + the length of the substring. A missing third + argument is taken to be large enough to extend to + the end of the first string. + + ttrraannsslliitt transliterates the characters in its first argu- + ment from the set given by the second argument to + the set given by the third. No abbreviations are + permitted. + + iinncclluuddee returns the contents of the file named in the + argument. + + ssiinncclluuddee is identical to _i_n_c_l_u_d_e, except that it says noth- + ing if the file is inaccessible. + + ssyyssccmmdd executes the UNIX command given in the first argu- + ment. No value is returned. + + mmaakkeetteemmpp fills in a string of XXXXX in its argument with + the current process id. + + eerrrrpprriinntt prints its argument on the diagnostic output file. + + dduummppddeeff prints current names and definitions, for the + named items, or for all if no arguments are given. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + B. W. Kernighan and D. M. Ritchie, _T_h_e _M_4 _M_a_c_r_o _P_r_o_c_e_s_s_o_r + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/mail.0 b/usr/man/cat1/mail.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4a1548589f --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/mail.0 @@ -0,0 +1,726 @@ + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + mail - send and receive mail + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + mmaaiill [ --vv ] [ --ii ] [ --nn ] [ --ss subject ] [ user ... ] + mmaaiill [ --vv ] [ --ii ] [ --nn ] --ff [ name ] + mmaaiill [ --vv ] [ --ii ] [ --nn ] --uu user + +IINNTTRROODDUUCCTTIIOONN + _M_a_i_l is a intelligent mail processing system, which has a + command syntax reminiscent of _e_d with lines replaced by mes- + sages. + + The --vv flag puts mail into verbose mode; the details of + delivery are displayed on the users terminal. The --ii flag + causes tty interrupt signals to be ignored. This is particu- + larly useful when using _m_a_i_l on noisy phone lines. The --nn + flag inhibits the reading of /usr/lib/Mail.rc. + + _S_e_n_d_i_n_g _m_a_i_l. To send a message to one or more people, _m_a_i_l + can be invoked with arguments which are the names of people + to whom the mail will be sent. You are then expected to + type in your message, followed by an EOT (control-D) at the + beginning of a line. A subject may be specified on the com- + mand line by using the --ss flag. (Only the first argument + after the --ss flag is used as a subject; be careful to quote + subjects containing spaces.) The section below, labeled + _R_e_p_l_y_i_n_g _t_o _o_r _o_r_i_g_i_n_a_t_i_n_g _m_a_i_l, describes some features of + _m_a_i_l available to help you compose your letter. + + _R_e_a_d_i_n_g _m_a_i_l. In normal usage _m_a_i_l is given no arguments + and checks your mail out of the post office, then prints out + a one line header of each message there. The current mes- + sage is initially the first message (numbered 1) and can be + printed using the pprriinntt command (which can be abbreviated + pp). You can move among the messages much as you move + between lines in _e_d, with the commands `+' and `-' moving + backwards and forwards, and simple numbers. + + _D_i_s_p_o_s_i_n_g _o_f _m_a_i_l. After examining a message you can ddeelleettee + (dd) the message or rreeppllyy (rr) to it. Deletion causes the + _m_a_i_l program to forget about the message. This is not + irreversible; the message can be uunnddeelleetteedd (uu) by giving its + number, or the _m_a_i_l session can be aborted by giving the + eexxiitt (xx) command. Deleted messages will, however, usually + disappear never to be seen again. + + _S_p_e_c_i_f_y_i_n_g _m_e_s_s_a_g_e_s. Commands such as pprriinntt and ddeelleettee can + be given a list of message numbers as arguments to apply to + a number of messages at once. Thus ``delete 1 2'' deletes + messages 1 and 2, while ``delete 1-5'' deletes messages 1 + through 5. The special name ``*'' addresses all messages, + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 1 + + + + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + + and ``$'' addresses the last message; thus the command ttoopp + which prints the first few lines of a message could be used + in ``top *'' to print the first few lines of all messages. + + _R_e_p_l_y_i_n_g _t_o _o_r _o_r_i_g_i_n_a_t_i_n_g _m_a_i_l. You can use the rreeppllyy com- + mand to set up a response to a message, sending it back to + the person who it was from. Text you then type in, up to an + end-of-file, defines the contents of the message. While you + are composing a message, _m_a_i_l treats lines beginning with + the character `~' specially. For instance, typing ``~m'' + (alone on a line) will place a copy of the current message + into the response right shifting it by a tabstop. Other + escapes will set up subject fields, add and delete reci- + pients to the message and allow you to escape to an editor + to revise the message or to a shell to run some commands. + (These options are given in the summary below.) + + _E_n_d_i_n_g _a _m_a_i_l _p_r_o_c_e_s_s_i_n_g _s_e_s_s_i_o_n. You can end a _m_a_i_l ses- + sion with the qquuiitt (qq) command. Messages which have been + examined go to your _m_b_o_x file unless they have been deleted + in which case they are discarded. Unexamined messages go + back to the post office. The --ff option causes _m_a_i_l to read + in the contents of your _m_b_o_x (or the specified file) for + processing; when you qquuiitt, _m_a_i_l writes undeleted messages + back to this file. The --uu flag is a short way of doing + "mail --ff /usr/spool/mail/user". + + _P_e_r_s_o_n_a_l _a_n_d _s_y_s_t_e_m_w_i_d_e _d_i_s_t_r_i_b_u_t_i_o_n _l_i_s_t_s. It is also pos- + sible to create a personal distribution lists so that, for + instance, you can send mail to ``cohorts'' and have it go to + a group of people. Such lists can be defined by placing a + line like + + alias cohorts bill ozalp jkf mark kridle@ucbcory + + in the file .mailrc in your home directory. The current + list of such aliases can be displayed with the aalliiaass ((aa)) + command in _m_a_i_l. System wide distribution lists can be + created by editing /usr/lib/aliases, see _a_l_i_a_s_e_s(5) and + _s_e_n_d_m_a_i_l(8); these are kept in a different syntax. In mail + you send, personal aliases will be expanded in mail sent to + others so that they will be able to rreeppllyy to the recipients. + System wide _a_l_i_a_s_e_s are not expanded when the mail is sent, + but any reply returned to the machine will have the system + wide alias expanded as all mail goes through _s_e_n_d_m_a_i_l. + + _N_e_t_w_o_r_k _m_a_i_l (_A_R_P_A, _U_U_C_P, _B_e_r_k_n_e_t) See _m_a_i_l_a_d_d_r(_7) for a + description of network addresses. + + _M_a_i_l has a number of options which can be set in the ._m_a_i_l_r_c + file to alter its behavior; thus ``set askcc'' enables the + ``askcc'' feature. (These options are summarized below.) + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 2 + + + + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + +SSUUMMMMAARRYY + (Adapted from the `Mail Reference Manual') + + Each command is typed on a line by itself, and may take + arguments following the command word. The command need not + be typed in its entirety - the first command which matches + the typed prefix is used. For commands which take message + lists as arguments, if no message list is given, then the + next message forward which satisfies the command's require- + ments is used. If there are no messages forward of the + current message, the search proceeds backwards, and if there + are no good messages at all, _m_a_i_l types ``No applicable mes- + sages'' and aborts the command. + + -- Goes to the previous message and prints it out. + If given a numeric argument _n, goes to the _n-th + previous message and prints it. + + ?? Prints a brief summary of commands. + + !! Executes the UNIX shell command which follows. + + PPrriinntt (PP) Like pprriinntt but also prints out ignored + header fields. See also pprriinntt , iiggnnoorree and + rreettaaiinn.. + + RReeppllyy (RR) Reply to originator. Does not reply to other + recipients of the original message. + + TTyyppee (TT) Identical to the PPrriinntt command. + + aalliiaass (aa) With no arguments, prints out all + currently-defined aliases. With one argument, + prints out that alias. With more than one argu- + ment, creates an new or changes an on old alias. + + aalltteerrnnaatteess (aalltt) The aalltteerrnnaatteess command is useful if you + have accounts on several machines. It can be + used to inform _m_a_i_l that the listed addresses + are really you. When you rreeppllyy to messages, _m_a_i_l + will not send a copy of the message to any of + the addresses listed on the _a_l_t_e_r_n_a_t_e_s list. If + the aalltteerrnnaatteess command is given with no argu- + ment, the current set of alternate names is + displayed. + + cchhddiirr (cc) Changes the user's working directory to that + specified, if given. If no directory is given, + then changes to the user's login directory. + + ccooppyy (ccoo) The ccooppyy command does the same thing that + ssaavvee does, except that it does not mark the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 3 + + + + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + + messages it is used on for deletion when you + quit. + + ddeelleettee (dd) Takes a list of messages as argument and + marks them all as deleted. Deleted messages + will not be saved in _m_b_o_x, nor will they be + available for most other commands. + + ddpp (also ddtt) Deletes the current message and prints + the next message. If there is no next message, + _m_a_i_l says ``at EOF.'' + + eeddiitt (ee) Takes a list of messages and points the text + editor at each one in turn. On return from the + editor, the message is read back in. + + eexxiitt (eexx or xx) Effects an immediate return to the + Shell without modifying the user's system mail- + box, his _m_b_o_x file, or his edit file in --ff. + + ffiillee (ffii) The same as ffoollddeerr. + + ffoollddeerrss List the names of the folders in your folder + directory. + + ffoollddeerr (ffoo) The ffoollddeerr command switches to a new mail + file or folder. With no arguments, it tells you + which file you are currently reading. If you + give it an argument, it will write out changes + (such as deletions) you have made in the current + file and read in the new file. Some special con- + ventions are recognized for the name. # means + the previous file, % means your system mailbox, + %user means user's system mailbox, & means your + ~/mbox file, and +folder means a file in your + folder directory. + + ffrroomm (ff) Takes a list of messages and prints their + message headers. + + hheeaaddeerrss (hh) Lists the current range of headers, which is + an 18 message group. If a ``+'' argument is + given, then the next 18 message group is + printed, and if a ``-'' argument is given, the + previous 18 message group is printed. + + hheellpp A synonym for ? + + hhoolldd (hhoo, also pprreesseerrvvee) Takes a message list and + marks each message therein to be saved in the + user's system mailbox instead of in _m_b_o_x. Does + not override the ddeelleettee command. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 4 + + + + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + + iiggnnoorree NN..BB..:: _I_g_n_o_r_e has been superseded by _r_e_t_a_i_n. + Add the list of header fields named to the + _i_g_n_o_r_e_d _l_i_s_t. Header fields in the ignore list + are not printed on your terminal when you print + a message. This command is very handy for + suppression of certain machine-generated header + fields. The TTyyppee and PPrriinntt commands can be used + to print a message in its entirety, including + ignored fields. If iiggnnoorree is executed with no + arguments, it lists the current set of ignored + fields. + + mmaaiill (mm) Takes as argument login names and distribu- + tion group names and sends mail to those people. + + mmbbooxx Indicate that a list of messages be sent to _m_b_o_x + in your home directory when you quit. This is + the default action for messages if you do _n_o_t + have the _h_o_l_d option set. + + nneexxtt (nn like ++ or CR) Goes to the next message in + sequence and types it. With an argument list, + types the next matching message. + + pprreesseerrvvee (pprree) A synonym for hhoolldd. + + pprriinntt (pp) Takes a message list and types out each mes- + sage on the user's terminal. + + qquuiitt (qq) Terminates the session, saving all + undeleted, unsaved messages in the user's _m_b_o_x + file in his login directory, preserving all mes- + sages marked with hhoolldd or pprreesseerrvvee or never + referenced in his system mailbox, and removing + all other messages from his system mailbox. If + new mail has arrived during the session, the + message ``You have new mail'' is given. If + given while editing a mailbox file with the --ff + flag, then the edit file is rewritten. A return + to the Shell is effected, unless the rewrite of + edit file fails, in which case the user can + escape with the eexxiitt command. + + rreeppllyy (rr) Takes a message list and sends mail to the + sender and all recipients of the specified mes- + sage. The default message must not be deleted. + + rreessppoonndd A synonym for rreeppllyy. + + rreettaaiinn Add the list of header fields named to the + _r_e_t_a_i_n_e_d _l_i_s_t. Only the header fields in the + retain list are shown on your terminal when you + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 5 + + + + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + + print a message. All other header fields are + suppressed. The TTyyppee and PPrriinntt commands can be + used to print a message in its entirety. If + rreettaaiinn is executed with no arguments, it lists + the current set of retained fields. + + ssaavvee (ss) Takes a message list and a filename and + appends each message in turn to the end of the + file. The filename in quotes, followed by the + line count and character count is echoed on the + user's terminal. + + sseett (ssee) With no arguments, prints all variable + values. Otherwise, sets option. Arguments are + of the form ``option=value'' (no space before or + after =) or ``option.'' + + sshheellll (sshh) Invokes an interactive version of the + shell. + + ssiizzee Takes a message list and prints out the size in + characters of each message. + + ssoouurrccee (ssoo) The ssoouurrccee command reads _m_a_i_l commands from + a file. + + ttoopp Takes a message list and prints the top few + lines of each. The number of lines printed is + controlled by the variable ttoopplliinneess and defaults + to five. + + ttyyppee (tt) A synonym for pprriinntt. + + uunnaalliiaass Takes a list of names defined by aalliiaass commands + and discards the remembered groups of users. + The group names no longer have any significance. + + uunnddeelleettee (uu) Takes a message list and marks each message + as _n_o_t being deleted. + + uunnrreeaadd (UU) Takes a message list and marks each message + as _n_o_t having been read. + + uunnsseett Takes a list of option names and discards their + remembered values; the inverse of sseett. + + vviissuuaall (vv) Takes a message list and invokes the display + editor on each message. + + wwrriittee (ww) Similar to ssaavvee, except that _o_n_l_y the mes- + sage body (_w_i_t_h_o_u_t the header) is saved. + Extremely useful for such tasks as sending and + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 6 + + + + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + + receiving source program text over the message + system. + + xxiitt (xx) A synonym for eexxiitt. + + zz _M_a_i_l presents message headers in windowfuls as + described under the hheeaaddeerrss command. You can + move _m_a_i_l's attention forward to the next window + with the zz command. Also, you can move to the + previous window by using zz--. + + Here is a summary of the tilde escapes, which are used when + composing messages to perform special functions. Tilde + escapes are only recognized at the beginning of lines. The + name ``tilde escape'' is somewhat of a misnomer since the + actual escape character can be set by the option eessccaappee.. + + ~~!!command Execute the indicated shell command, then return + to the message. + + ~~bb name ... Add the given names to the list of carbon copy + recipients but do not make the names visible in + the Cc: line ("blind" carbon copy). + + ~~cc name ... Add the given names to the list of carbon copy + recipients. + + ~~dd Read the file ``dead.letter'' from your home + directory into the message. + + ~~ee Invoke the text editor on the message collected + so far. After the editing session is finished, + you may continue appending text to the message. + + ~~ff messages Read the named messages into the message being + sent. If no messages are specified, read in the + current message. + + ~~hh Edit the message header fields by typing each + one in turn and allowing the user to append text + to the end or modify the field by using the + current terminal erase and kill characters. + + ~~mm messages Read the named messages into the message being + sent, shifted right one tab. If no messages are + specified, read the current message. + + ~~pp Print out the message collected so far, prefaced + by the message header fields. + + ~~qq Abort the message being sent, copying the mes- + sage to ``dead.letter'' in your home directory + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 7 + + + + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + + if ssaavvee is set. + + ~~rr filename Read the named file into the message. + + ~~ss string Cause the named string to become the current + subject field. + + ~~tt name ... Add the given names to the direct recipient + list. + + ~~vv Invoke an alternate editor (defined by the + VISUAL option) on the message collected so far. + Usually, the alternate editor will be a screen + editor. After you quit the editor, you may + resume appending text to the end of your mes- + sage. + + ~~ww filename Write the message onto the named file. + + ~~||command Pipe the message through the command as a + filter. If the command gives no output or ter- + minates abnormally, retain the original text of + the message. The command _f_m_t(1) is often used + as _c_o_m_m_a_n_d to rejustify the message. + + ~~~~string Insert the string of text in the message pre- + faced by a single ~. If you have changed the + escape character, then you should double that + character in order to send it. + + Options are controlled via the sseett and uunnsseett commands. + Options may be either binary, in which case it is only sig- + nificant to see whether they are set or not; or string, in + which case the actual value is of interest. The binary + options include the following: + + aappppeenndd Causes messages saved in _m_b_o_x to be appended + to the end rather than prepended. (This is + set in /usr/lib/Mail.rc on version 7 sys- + tems.) + + aasskk Causes _m_a_i_l to prompt you for the subject of + each message you send. If you respond with + simply a newline, no subject field will be + sent. + + aasskkcccc Causes you to be prompted for additional car- + bon copy recipients at the end of each mes- + sage. Responding with a newline indicates + your satisfaction with the current list. + + aauuttoopprriinntt Causes the ddeelleettee command to behave like ddpp - + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 8 + + + + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + + thus, after deleting a message, the next one + will be typed automatically. + + ddeebbuugg Setting the binary option _d_e_b_u_g is the same + as specifying --dd on the command line and + causes _m_a_i_l to output all sorts of informa- + tion useful for debugging _m_a_i_l. + + ddoott The binary option _d_o_t causes _m_a_i_l to inter- + pret a period alone on a line as the termina- + tor of a message you are sending. + + hhoolldd This option is used to hold messages in the + system mailbox by default. + + iiggnnoorree Causes interrupt signals from your terminal + to be ignored and echoed as @'s. + + iiggnnoorreeeeooff An option related to _d_o_t is _i_g_n_o_r_e_e_o_f which + makes _m_a_i_l refuse to accept a control-d as + the end of a message. _I_g_n_o_r_e_e_o_f also applies + to _m_a_i_l command mode. + + mmeettoooo Usually, when a group is expanded that con- + tains the sender, the sender is removed from + the expansion. Setting this option causes + the sender to be included in the group. + + nnoossaavvee Normally, when you abort a message with two + RUBOUT, _m_a_i_l copies the partial letter to the + file ``dead.letter'' in your home directory. + Setting the binary option _n_o_s_a_v_e prevents + this. + + RReeppllyyaallll Reverses the sense of _r_e_p_l_y and _R_e_p_l_y com- + mands. + + qquuiieett Suppresses the printing of the version when + first invoked. + + vveerrbboossee Setting the option _v_e_r_b_o_s_e is the same as + using the --vv flag on the command line. When + mail runs in verbose mode, the actual + delivery of messages is displayed on he users + terminal. + + The following options have string values: + + EDITOR Pathname of the text editor to use in the + eeddiitt command and ~e escape. If not defined, + then a default editor is used. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 9 + + + + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + + PAGER Pathname of the program to use in the mmoorree + command or when _c_r_t variable is set. A + default paginator is used if this option is + not defined. + + SHELL Pathname of the shell to use in the !! command + and the ~! escape. A default shell is used + if this option is not defined. + + VISUAL Pathname of the text editor to use in the + vviissuuaall command and ~v escape. + + ccrrtt The valued option _c_r_t is used as a threshold + to determine how long a message must be + before PPAAGGEERR is used to read it. + + eessccaappee If defined, the first character of this + option gives the character to use in the + place of ~ to denote escapes. + + ffoollddeerr The name of the directory to use for storing + folders of messages. If this name begins with + a `/', _m_a_i_l considers it to be an absolute + pathname; otherwise, the folder directory is + found relative to your home directory. + + rreeccoorrdd If defined, gives the pathname of the file + used to record all outgoing mail. If not + defined, then outgoing mail is not so saved. + + ttoopplliinneess If defined, gives the number of lines of a + message to be printed out with the ttoopp com- + mand; normally, the first five lines are + printed. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/spool/mail/* post office + ~/mbox your old mail + ~/.mailrc file giving initial mail commands + /tmp/R# temporary for editor escape + /usr/lib/Mail.help* help files + /usr/lib/Mail.rc system initialization file + Message* temporary for editing messages + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + binmail(1), fmt(1), newaliases(1), aliases(5), + mailaddr(7), sendmail(8) + `The Mail Reference Manual' + +BBUUGGSS + There are many flags that are not documented here. Most are + not useful to the general user. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 10 + + + + + + +MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1) + + + + Usually, _m_a_i_l is just a link to _M_a_i_l, which can be confus- + ing. + +AAUUTTHHOORR + Kurt Shoens + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 11 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/make.0 b/usr/man/cat1/make.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..24ff137976 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/make.0 @@ -0,0 +1,264 @@ + + + +MAKE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAKE(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + make - maintain program groups + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + mmaakkee [ --ff makefile ] [ option ] ... file ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _M_a_k_e executes commands in _m_a_k_e_f_i_l_e to update one or more + target _n_a_m_e_s. _N_a_m_e is typically a program. If no --ff option + is present, `makefile' and `Makefile' are tried in order. + If _m_a_k_e_f_i_l_e is `-', the standard input is taken. More than + one --ff option may appear. + + _M_a_k_e updates a target if it depends on prerequisite files + that have been modified since the target was last modified, + or if the target does not exist. + + _M_a_k_e_f_i_l_e contains a sequence of entries that specify depen- + dencies. The first line of an entry is a blank-separated + list of targets, then a colon, then a list of prerequisite + files. Text following a semicolon, and all following lines + that begin with a tab, are shell commands to be executed to + update the target. If a name appears on the left of more + than one `colon' line, then it depends on all of the names + on the right of the colon on those lines, but only one com- + mand sequence may be specified for it. If a name appears on + a line with a double colon :::: then the command sequence fol- + lowing that line is performed only if the name is out of + date with respect to the names to the right of the double + colon, and is not affected by other double colon lines on + which that name may appear. + + Two special forms of a name are recognized. A name like + _a(_b) means the file named _b stored in the archive named _a. A + name like _a((_b)) means the file stored in archive _a contain- + ing the entry point _b. + + Sharp and newline surround comments. + + The following makefile says that `pgm' depends on two files + `a.o' and `b.o', and that they in turn depend on `.c' files + and a common file `incl'. + + pgm: a.o b.o + cc a.o b.o -lm -o pgm + a.o: incl a.c + cc -c a.c + b.o: incl b.c + cc -c b.c + + _M_a_k_e_f_i_l_e entries of the form + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 August 24, 1987 1 + + + + + + +MAKE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAKE(1) + + + + string1 = string2 + + are macro definitions. Subsequent appearances of $(_s_t_r_i_n_g_1) + or ${_s_t_r_i_n_g_1} are replaced by _s_t_r_i_n_g_2. If _s_t_r_i_n_g_1 is a sin- + gle character, the parentheses or braces are optional. + + _M_a_k_e infers prerequisites for files for which _m_a_k_e_f_i_l_e gives + no construction commands. For example, a `.c' file may be + inferred as prerequisite for a `.o' file and be compiled to + produce the `.o' file. Thus the preceding example can be + done more briefly: + + pgm: a.o b.o + cc a.o b.o -lm -o pgm + a.o b.o: incl + + Prerequisites are inferred according to selected suffixes + listed as the `prerequisites' for the special name `.SUF- + FIXES'; multiple lists accumulate; an empty list clears what + came before. Order is significant; the first possible name + for which both a file and a rule as described in the next + paragraph exist is inferred. The default list is + + .SUFFIXES: .out .o .c .e .r .f .y .l .s .p + + The rule to create a file with suffix _s_2 that depends on a + similarly named file with suffix _s_1 is specified as an entry + for the `target' _s_1_s_2. In such an entry, the special macro + $* stands for the target name with suffix deleted, $@ for + the full target name, $< for the complete list of prere- + quisites, and $? for the list of prerequisites that are out + of date. For example, a rule for making optimized `.o' + files from `.c' files is + + .c.o: ; cc -c -O -o $@ $*.c + + Certain macros are used by the default inference rules to + communicate optional arguments to any resulting compila- + tions. In particular, `CFLAGS' is used for _c_c(1) options, + `FFLAGS' for _f_7_7(1) options, `PFLAGS' for _p_c(1) options, and + `LFLAGS' and `YFLAGS' for _l_e_x and _y_a_c_c(1) options. In addi- + tion, the macro `MFLAGS' is filled in with the initial com- + mand line options supplied to _m_a_k_e. This simplifies main- + taining a hierarchy of makefiles as one may then invoke _m_a_k_e + on makefiles in subdirectories and pass along useful options + such as --kk. + + The environment is read by _m_a_k_e. All variables are assumed + to be macro definitions and processed as such. The environ- + mental variables are processed before any makefile and after + the internal rules; thus, macro assignments in a makefile + override environmental variables. The --ee option causes the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 August 24, 1987 2 + + + + + + +MAKE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAKE(1) + + + + environment to override the macro assignments in a makefile. + As with macro assignments, environmental variables are + always overriden by the command line. + + Another special macro is `VPATH'. The `VPATH' macro should + be set to a list of directories separated by colons. When + _m_a_k_e searches for a file as a result of a dependency rela- + tion, it will first search the current directory and then + each of the directories on the `VPATH' list. If the file is + found, the actual path to the file will be used, rather than + just the filename. If `VPATH' is not defined, then only the + current directory is searched. + + One use for `VPATH' is when one has several programs that + compile from the same source. The source can be kept in one + directory and each set of object files (along with a + separate _m_a_k_e_f_i_l_e) would be in a separate subdirectory. The + `VPATH' macro would point to the source directory in this + case. + + Command lines are executed one at a time, each by its own + shell. A line is printed when it is executed unless the + special target `.SILENT' is in _m_a_k_e_f_i_l_e, or the first char- + acter of the command is `@'. + + Commands returning nonzero status (see _i_n_t_r_o(1)) cause _m_a_k_e + to terminate unless the special target `.IGNORE' is in + _m_a_k_e_f_i_l_e or the command begins with . + + Interrupt and quit cause the target to be deleted unless the + target is a directory or depends on the special name `.PRE- + CIOUS'. + + Other options: + + --ee Environmental variables override assignments within + makefiles. + + --ii Equivalent to the special entry `.IGNORE:'. + + --kk When a command returns nonzero status, abandon work on + the current entry, but continue on branches that do not + depend on the current entry. + + --nn Trace and print, but do not execute the commands needed + to update the targets. + + --tt Touch, i.e. update the modified date of targets, + without executing any commands. + + --rr Equivalent to an initial special entry `.SUFFIXES:' + with no list. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 August 24, 1987 3 + + + + + + +MAKE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAKE(1) + + + + --ss Equivalent to the special entry `.SILENT:'. + +FFIILLEESS + makefile, Makefile + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + sh(1), touch(1), f77(1), pc(1), getenv(3) + S. I. Feldman _M_a_k_e - _A _P_r_o_g_r_a_m _f_o_r _M_a_i_n_t_a_i_n_i_n_g _C_o_m_p_u_t_e_r _P_r_o_- + _g_r_a_m_s + +BBUUGGSS + Some commands return nonzero status inappropriately. Use --ii + to overcome the difficulty. + Commands that are directly executed by the shell, notably + _c_d(1), are ineffectual across newlines in _m_a_k_e. + + `VPATH' is intended to act like the System V `VPATH' sup- + port, but there is no guarantee that it functions identi- + cally. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 August 24, 1987 4 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/man.0 b/usr/man/cat1/man.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..264e98e8b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/man.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +MAN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAN(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + man - print out the manual + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + mmaann [ -- ] [ --aa ] [ --MM _p_a_t_h ] [ section ] title ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _M_a_n is the program which provides on-line access to the UNIX + manual. If a _s_e_c_t_i_o_n specifier is given, _m_a_n looks in that + section of the manual for the given _t_i_t_l_e(s). _S_e_c_t_i_o_n is + either an Arabic section number (``3'' for example), or one + of the words ``local'', ``new,'' or ``old''. (The abbrevia- + tions ``l'', ``n'', and ``o'' are also allowed.) If _s_e_c_t_i_o_n + is omitted, _m_a_n searches all sections of the manual, giving + preference to commands over library subroutines, and + displays the first manual page it finds, if any. If the -_a + option is supplied, _m_a_n displays all applicable manual + pages. + + Normally _m_a_n checks in standard locations (/usr/man and + /usr/local/man) for manual information. This can be changed + by supplying a search path (a la the Bourne shell) with the + --MM flag. The search path is a colon (``:'') separated list + of directories in which _m_a_n expects to find the standard + manual subdirectories. This search path can also be set + with the environmental variable _M_A_N_P_A_T_H. + + Since some manual pages are intended for use only on certain + machines, _m_a_n only searches those directories applicable to + the current machine. _M_a_n's determination of the current + machine type can be overridden by setting the environmental + variable _M_A_C_H_I_N_E. + + If the standard output is a teletype, and the -- flag is not + provided, _m_a_n uses _m_o_r_e(1), or the pager provided by the + environmental variable _P_A_G_E_R, to display the manual page. + + The FORTRAN version of section 3 of the manual may be speci- + fied by supplying _m_a_n with the _s_e_c_t_i_o_n ``3f''. Also, a + specific section of the local manual may be specified by + appending a number to the _s_e_c_t_i_o_n, i.e. ``l5'' would indi- + cate section 5 of the local manual. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/man standard manual area + /usr/man/cat?/* directories containing standard manual pages + /usr/local/man/cat?/* directories containing local manual pages + /usr/src/man directories containing unformatted manual pages + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + apropos(1), more(1), whatis(1), whereis(1) + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 19, 1988 1 + + + + + + +MAN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAN(1) + + + +BBUUGGSS + The manual is supposed to be reproducible either on the pho- + totypesetter or on a typewriter, however, on a typewriter, + some information is necessarily lost. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 19, 1988 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/mesg.0 b/usr/man/cat1/mesg.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0a620eeadb --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/mesg.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +MESG(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MESG(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + mesg - permit or deny messages + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + mmeessgg [ nn ] [ yy ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _M_e_s_g with argument nn forbids messages via _w_r_i_t_e and _t_a_l_k by + revoking non-user write permission on the user's terminal. + _M_e_s_g with argument yy reinstates permission. _M_e_s_g without + arguments reports the current state without changing it. + +FFIILLEESS + /dev/tty* + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + write(1), talk(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Exit status is 0 if messages are receivable, 1 if not, -1 on + error. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 July 9, 1988 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/mkdep.0 b/usr/man/cat1/mkdep.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4d6a747c0e --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/mkdep.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +MKDEP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MKDEP(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + mkdep - construct Makefile dependency list + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + mmkkddeepp [ --ff mmaakkeeffiillee ] [ --pp ] [ flags ] file ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _M_k_d_e_p takes a set of flags for the C compiler and a list of + C source files as arguments and constructs a set of include + file dependencies. It attaches this dependency list to the + end of the file ``Makefile''. An example of its use in a + makefile might be: + + CFLAGS= -O -I../include -I. + SRCS= file1.c file2.c + + depend: + mkdep ${CFLAGS} ${SRCS} + + where the macro SRCS is the list of C source files and the macro + CFLAGS is the list of flags for the C compiler. The --ff option + provides _m_k_d_e_p with a name other than ``Makefile'' to be edited. + If the --pp option is provided, _m_k_d_e_p produces dependencies + of the form ``program: program.c'' so that subsequent makes will + produce _p_r_o_g_r_a_m directly from its C module rather than using an + intermediate ._o module. This is useful in directories that + contain many programs, each of whose source is contained in a single + C module. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + cc(1), make(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 July 9, 1988 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/mkdir.0 b/usr/man/cat1/mkdir.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e3e5433cf3 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/mkdir.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +MKDIR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MKDIR(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + mkdir - make a directory + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + mmkkddiirr dirname ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _M_k_d_i_r creates specified directories in mode 777. Standard + entries, `..', for the directory itself, and ``..'' for its + parent, are made automatically. + + _M_k_d_i_r requires write permission in the parent directory. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + rmdir(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/mkstr.0 b/usr/man/cat1/mkstr.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..88470c4d80 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/mkstr.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +MKSTR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MKSTR(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + mkstr - create an error message file by massaging C source + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + mmkkssttrr [ -- ] messagefile prefix file ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _M_k_s_t_r is used to create files of error messages. Its use + can make programs with large numbers of error diagnostics + much smaller, and reduce system overhead in running the pro- + gram as the error messages do not have to be constantly + swapped in and out. + + _M_k_s_t_r will process each of the specified _f_i_l_e_s, placing a + massaged version of the input file in a file whose name con- + sists of the specified _p_r_e_f_i_x and the original name. A typ- + ical usage of _m_k_s_t_r would be + + mkstr pistrings xx *.c + + This command would cause all the error messages from the C + source files in the current directory to be placed in the + file _p_i_s_t_r_i_n_g_s and processed copies of the source for these + files to be placed in files whose names are prefixed with + _x_x. + + To process the error messages in the source to the message + file _m_k_s_t_r keys on the string `error("' in the input stream. + Each time it occurs, the C string starting at the `"' is + placed in the message file followed by a null character and + a new-line character; the null character terminates the mes- + sage so it can be easily used when retrieved, the new-line + character makes it possible to sensibly _c_a_t the error mes- + sage file to see its contents. The massaged copy of the + input file then contains a _l_s_e_e_k pointer into the file which + can be used to retrieve the message, i.e.: + + + cchhaarr efilname[] = "/usr/lib/pi_strings"; + iinntt efil = -1; + + error(a1, a2, a3, a4) + { + cchhaarr buf[256]; + + iiff (efil < 0) { + efil = open(efilname, 0); + iiff (efil < 0) { + oops: + perror(efilname); + exit(1); + } + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1 + + + + + + +MKSTR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MKSTR(1) + + + + } + iiff (lseek(efil, (long) a1, 0) || read(efil, buf, 256) <= 0) + ggoottoo oops; + printf(buf, a2, a3, a4); + } + + The optional -- causes the error messages to be placed at the + end of the specified message file for recompiling part of a + large _m_k_s_t_red program. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + lseek(2), xstr(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/more.0 b/usr/man/cat1/more.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f269e63ef9 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/more.0 @@ -0,0 +1,330 @@ + + + +MORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MORE(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + more, page - file perusal filter for crt viewing + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + mmoorree [ --ccddffllssuu ] [ --_n ] [ ++_l_i_n_e_n_u_m_b_e_r ] [ ++//_p_a_t_t_e_r_n ] [ name + ... ] + + ppaaggee _m_o_r_e _o_p_t_i_o_n_s + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _M_o_r_e is a filter which allows examination of a continuous + text one screenful at a time on a soft-copy terminal. It + normally pauses after each screenful, printing --More-- at + the bottom of the screen. If the user then types a carriage + return, one more line is displayed. If the user hits a + space, another screenful is displayed. Other possibilities + are enumerated later. + + The command line options are: + + -_n An integer which is the size (in lines) of the window + which _m_o_r_e will use instead of the default. + + --cc _M_o_r_e will draw each page by beginning at the top of the + screen and erasing each line just before it draws on + it. This avoids scrolling the screen, making it easier + to read while _m_o_r_e is writing. This option will be + ignored if the terminal does not have the ability to + clear to the end of a line. + + --dd _M_o_r_e will prompt the user with the message "Press space + to continue, 'q' to quit." at the end of each screen- + ful, and will respond to subsequent illegal user input + by printing "Press 'h' for instructions." instead of + ringing the bell. This is useful if _m_o_r_e is being used + as a filter in some setting, such as a class, where + many users may be unsophisticated. + + --ff This causes _m_o_r_e to count logical, rather than screen + lines. That is, long lines are not folded. This + option is recommended if _n_r_o_f_f output is being piped + through _u_l, since the latter may generate escape + sequences. These escape sequences contain characters + which would ordinarily occupy screen positions, but + which do not print when they are sent to the terminal + as part of an escape sequence. Thus _m_o_r_e may think + that lines are longer than they actually are, and fold + lines erroneously. + + --ll Do not treat ^L (form feed) specially. If this option + is not given, _m_o_r_e will pause after any line that con- + tains a ^L, as if the end of a screenful had been + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 1 + + + + + + +MORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MORE(1) + + + + reached. Also, if a file begins with a form feed, the + screen will be cleared before the file is printed. + + --ss Squeeze multiple blank lines from the output, producing + only one blank line. Especially helpful when viewing + _n_r_o_f_f output, this option maximizes the useful informa- + tion present on the screen. + + --uu Normally, _m_o_r_e will handle underlining such as produced + by _n_r_o_f_f in a manner appropriate to the particular ter- + minal: if the terminal can perform underlining or has + a stand-out mode, _m_o_r_e will output appropriate escape + sequences to enable underlining or stand-out mode for + underlined information in the source file. The -_u + option suppresses this processing. + + ++_l_i_n_e_n_u_m_b_e_r + Start up at _l_i_n_e_n_u_m_b_e_r. + + ++//_p_a_t_t_e_r_n + Start up two lines before the line containing the regu- + lar expression _p_a_t_t_e_r_n. + + If the program is invoked as _p_a_g_e, then the screen is + cleared before each screenful is printed (but only if a full + screenful is being printed), and _k - 1 rather than _k - 2 + lines are printed in each screenful, where _k is the number + of lines the terminal can display. + + _M_o_r_e looks in the file /_e_t_c/_t_e_r_m_c_a_p to determine terminal + characteristics, and to determine the default window size. + On a terminal capable of displaying 24 lines, the default + window size is 22 lines. + + _M_o_r_e looks in the environment variable _M_O_R_E to pre-set any + flags desired. For example, if you prefer to view files + using the -_c mode of operation, the _c_s_h command _s_e_t_e_n_v _M_O_R_E + -_c or the _s_h command sequence _M_O_R_E='-_c' ; _e_x_p_o_r_t _M_O_R_E would + cause all invocations of _m_o_r_e , including invocations by + programs such as _m_a_n and _m_s_g_s , to use this mode. Normally, + the user will place the command sequence which sets up the + _M_O_R_E environment variable in the ._c_s_h_r_c or ._p_r_o_f_i_l_e file. + + If _m_o_r_e is reading from a file, rather than a pipe, then a + percentage is displayed along with the --More-- prompt. + This gives the fraction of the file (in characters, not + lines) that has been read so far. + + Other sequences which may be typed when _m_o_r_e pauses, and + their effects, are as follows (_i is an optional integer + argument, defaulting to 1) : + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 2 + + + + + + +MORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MORE(1) + + + + _i + display _i more lines, (or another screenful if no argu- + ment is given) + + ^D display 11 more lines (a ``scroll''). If _i is given, + then the scroll size is set to _i. + + d same as ^D (control-D) + + _iz same as typing a space except that _i, if present, + becomes the new window size. + + _is skip _i lines and print a screenful of lines + + _if skip _i screenfuls and print a screenful of lines + + _ib skip back _i screenfuls and print a screenful of lines + + _i^B same as b + + q or Q + Exit from _m_o_r_e. + + = Display the current line number. + + v Start up the editor _v_i at the current line. + + h Help command; give a description of all the _m_o_r_e com- + mands. + + _i/expr + search for the _i-th occurrence of the regular expres- + sion _e_x_p_r. If there are less than _i occurrences of + _e_x_p_r, and the input is a file (rather than a pipe), + then the position in the file remains unchanged. Oth- + erwise, a screenful is displayed, starting two lines + before the place where the expression was found. The + user's erase and kill characters may be used to edit + the regular expression. Erasing back past the first + column cancels the search command. + + _in search for the _i-th occurrence of the last regular + expression entered. + + ' (single quote) Go to the point from which the last + search started. If no search has been performed in the + current file, this command goes back to the beginning + of the file. + + !command + invoke a shell with _c_o_m_m_a_n_d. The characters `%' and `!' + in "command" are replaced with the current file name + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 3 + + + + + + +MORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MORE(1) + + + + and the previous shell command respectively. If there + is no current file name, `%' is not expanded. The + sequences "\%" and "\!" are replaced by "%" and "!" + respectively. + + _i:n skip to the _i-th next file given in the command line + (skips to last file if n doesn't make sense) + + _i:p skip to the _i-th previous file given in the command + line. If this command is given in the middle of print- + ing out a file, then _m_o_r_e goes back to the beginning of + the file. If _i doesn't make sense, _m_o_r_e skips back to + the first file. If _m_o_r_e is not reading from a file, + the bell is rung and nothing else happens. + + :f display the current file name and line number. + + :q or :Q + exit from _m_o_r_e (same as q or Q). + + . (dot) repeat the previous command. + + The commands take effect immediately, i.e., it is not neces- + sary to type a carriage return. Up to the time when the + command character itself is given, the user may hit the line + kill character to cancel the numerical argument being + formed. In addition, the user may hit the erase character + to redisplay the --More--(xx%) message. + + At any time when output is being sent to the terminal, the + user can hit the quit key (normally control-\). _M_o_r_e will + stop sending output, and will display the usual --More-- + prompt. The user may then enter one of the above commands + in the normal manner. Unfortunately, some output is lost + when this is done, due to the fact that any characters wait- + ing in the terminal's output queue are flushed when the quit + signal occurs. + + The terminal is set to _n_o_e_c_h_o mode by this program so that + the output can be continuous. What you type will thus not + show on your terminal, except for the / and ! commands. + + If the standard output is not a teletype, then _m_o_r_e acts + just like _c_a_t, except that a header is printed before each + file (if there is more than one). + + A sample usage of _m_o_r_e in previewing _n_r_o_f_f output would be + + nroff -ms +2 doc.n | more -s + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/termcap Terminal data base + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 4 + + + + + + +MORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MORE(1) + + + + /usr/lib/more.help Help file + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + csh(1), man(1), msgs(1), script(1), sh(1), environ(7) + +BBUUGGSS + Skipping backwards is too slow on large files. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 5 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/mset.0 b/usr/man/cat1/mset.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f55ca9307a --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/mset.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +MSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MSET(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + mset - retrieve ASCII to IBM 3270 keyboard map + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + mmsseett + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _M_s_e_t retrieves mapping information for the ASCII keyboard to + IBM 3270 terminal special functions. Normally, these map- + pings are found in /_e_t_c/_m_a_p_3_2_7_0 (see _m_a_p_3_2_7_0(5)). This + information is used by the _t_n_3_2_7_0 command (see _t_n_3_2_7_0(1)). + + _M_s_e_t can be used store the mapping information in the pro- + cess environment in order to avoid scanning /_e_t_c/_m_a_p_3_2_7_0 + each time _t_n_3_2_7_0 is invoked. To do this, place the follow- + ing command in your ._l_o_g_i_n file: + + set noglob; setenv MAP3270 "`mset`"; unset noglob + + _M_s_e_t first determines the user's terminal type from the + environment variable TTEERRMM. Normally _m_s_e_t then uses the file + /_e_t_c/_m_a_p_3_2_7_0 to find the keyboard mapping for that terminal. + However, if the environment variable MMAAPP33227700 exists and con- + tains the entry for the specified terminal, then that defin- + ition is used. If the value of MMAAPP33227700 begins with a slash + (`/') then it is assumed to be the full pathname of an + alternate mapping file and that file is searched first. In + any case, if the mapping for the terminal is not found in + the environment, nor in an alternate map file, nor in the + standard map file, then the same search is performed for an + entry for a terminal type of uunnkknnoowwnn.. If that search also + fails, then a default mapping is used. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/map3270 keyboard mapping for known terminals + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + tn3270(1), map3270(5) + +BBUUGGSS + If the entry for the specific terminal exceeds 1024 bytes, + _c_s_h(1) will fail to set the environment variable. _M_s_e_t + should probably detect this case and output the path to the + _m_a_p_3_2_7_0 file instead of the terminal entry. + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 January 11, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/msgs.0 b/usr/man/cat1/msgs.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fb2f7cd3ed --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/msgs.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +MSGS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MSGS(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + msgs - system messages and junk mail program + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + mmssggss [ --ffhhllppqq ] [ number ] [ -number ] + + mmssggss --ss + + mmssggss --cc [ -days ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _M_s_g_s is used to read system messages. These messages are + sent by mailing to the login `msgs' and should be short + pieces of information which are suitable to be read once by + most users of the system. + + _M_s_g_s is normally invoked each time you login, by placing it + in the file ._l_o_g_i_n (._p_r_o_f_i_l_e if you use /_b_i_n/_s_h). It will + then prompt you with the source and subject of each new mes- + sage. If there is no subject line, the first few non-blank + lines of the message will be displayed. If there is more to + the message, you will be told how long it is and asked + whether you wish to see the rest of the message. The possi- + ble responses are: + + yy type the rest of the message. + + RETURN synonym for y. + + nn skip this message and go on to the next message. + + -- redisplay the last message. + + qq drops you out of _m_s_g_s; the next time you run the pro- + gram it will pick up where you left off. + + ss append the current message to the file ``Messages'' + in the current directory; `s-' will save the previ- + ously displayed message. A `s' or `s-' may be fol- + lowed by a space and a file name to receive the mes- + sage replacing the default ``Messages''. + + mm or `m-' causes a copy of the specified message to be + placed in a temporary mailbox and _m_a_i_l(1) to be + invoked on that mailbox. Both `m' and `s' accept a + numeric argument in place of the `-'. + + _M_s_g_s keeps track of the next message you will see by a + number in the file ._m_s_g_s_r_c in your home directory. In the + directory /_u_s_r/_m_s_g_s it keeps a set of files whose names are + the (sequential) numbers of the messages they represent. + The file /_u_s_r/_m_s_g_s/_b_o_u_n_d_s shows the low and high number of + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 1 + + + + + + +MSGS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MSGS(1) + + + + the messages in the directory so that _m_s_g_s can quickly + determine if there are no messages for you. If the contents + of _b_o_u_n_d_s is incorrect it can be fixed by removing it; _m_s_g_s + will make a new _b_o_u_n_d_s file the next time it is run. + + The --ss option is used for setting up the posting of mes- + sages. The line + + msgs: "| /usr/ucb/msgs -s" + + should be include in /_u_s_r/_l_i_b/_a_l_i_a_s_e_s to enable posting of + messages. + + The --cc option is used for performing cleanup on /_u_s_r/_m_s_g_s. + An entry with the --cc option should be placed in + /_u_s_r/_l_i_b/_c_r_o_n_t_a_b to run every night. This will remove all + messages over 21 days old. A different expiration may be + specified on the command line to override the default. + + Options when reading messages include: + + --ff which causes it not to say ``No new messages.''. + This is useful in your ._l_o_g_i_n file since this is + often the case here. + + --qq Queries whether there are messages, printing ``There + are new messages.'' if there are. The command ``msgs + -q'' is often used in login scripts. + + --hh causes _m_s_g_s to print the first part of messages only. + + --ll option causes only locally originated messages to be + reported. + + _n_u_m A message number can be given on the command line, + causing _m_s_g_s to start at the specified message rather + than at the next message indicated by your ._m_s_g_s_r_c + file. Thus + + msgs -h 1 + + prints the first part of all messages. + + -_n_u_m_b_e_r + will cause _m_s_g_s to start _n_u_m_b_e_r messages back from + the one indicated by your ._m_s_g_s_r_c file, useful for + reviews of recent messages. + + --pp causes long messages to be piped through _m_o_r_e(1). + + Within _m_s_g_s you can also go to any specific message by typ- + ing its number when _m_s_g_s requests input as to what to do. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 2 + + + + + + +MSGS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MSGS(1) + + + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/msgs/* database + ~/.msgsrc number of next message to be presented + +AAUUTTHHOORRSS + William Joy + David Wasley + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + aliases(5), crontab(5), mail(1), more(1) + +BBUUGGSS + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 3 + + + + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/mt.0 b/usr/man/cat1/mt.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..51895fb456 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/mt.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +MT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MT(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + mt - magnetic tape manipulating program + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + mmtt [ --ff _t_a_p_e_n_a_m_e ] _c_o_m_m_a_n_d [ _c_o_u_n_t ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _M_t is used to give commands to a magnetic tape drive. If a + tape name is not specified, the environment variable TAPE is + used; if TAPE does not exist, _m_t uses the device + /_d_e_v/_r_m_t_1_2. Note that _t_a_p_e_n_a_m_e must reference a raw (not + block) tape device. By default _m_t performs the requested + operation once. Operations may be performed multiple times + by specifying _c_o_u_n_t. + + The available commands are listed below. Only as many char- + acters as are required to uniquely identify a command need + be specified. + + eeooff, wweeooff + Write _c_o_u_n_t end-of-file marks at the current position + on the tape. + + ffssff Forward space _c_o_u_n_t files. + + ffssrr Forward space _c_o_u_n_t records. + + bbssff Back space _c_o_u_n_t files. + + bbssrr Back space _c_o_u_n_t records. + + rreewwiinndd + Rewind the tape (_C_o_u_n_t is ignored). + + oofffflliinnee, rreewwooffffll + Rewind the tape and place the tape unit off-line (_C_o_u_n_t + is ignored). + + ssttaattuuss + Print status information about the tape unit. + + _M_t returns a 0 exit status when the operation(s) were suc- + cessful, 1 if the command was unrecognized, and 2 if an + operation failed. + +FFIILLEESS + /dev/rmt* Raw magnetic tape interface + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + mtio(4), dd(1), ioctl(2), environ(7) + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/mv.0 b/usr/man/cat1/mv.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9526ab155a --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/mv.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +MV(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MV(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + mv - move or rename files + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + mmvv [ --ii ] [ --ff ] [ -- ] file1 file2 + + mmvv [ --ii ] [ --ff ] [ -- ] file ... directory + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _M_v moves (changes the name of) _f_i_l_e_1 to _f_i_l_e_2. + + If _f_i_l_e_2 already exists, it is removed before _f_i_l_e_1 is + moved. If _f_i_l_e_2 has a mode which forbids writing, _m_v prints + the mode (see _c_h_m_o_d(2)) and reads the standard input to + obtain a line; if the line begins with yy,, the move takes + place; if not, _m_v exits. + + In the second form, one or more _f_i_l_e_s (plain files or direc- + tories) are moved to the _d_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y with their original + file-names. + + _M_v refuses to move a file onto itself. + + Options: + + --ii stands for interactive mode. Whenever a move is to + supercede an existing file, the user is prompted by the + name of the file followed by a question mark. If he + answers with a line starting with 'y', the move contin- + ues. Any other reply prevents the move from occurring. + + --ff stands for force. This option overrides any mode res- + trictions or the -i switch. + + -- means interpret all the following arguments to _m_v as + file names. This allows file names starting with + minus. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + cp(1), ln(1) + +BBUUGGSS + If _f_i_l_e_1 and _f_i_l_e_2 lie on different file systems, _m_v must + copy the file and delete the original. In this case the + owner name becomes that of the copying process and any link- + ing relationship with other files is lost. + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/neqn.0 b/usr/man/cat1/neqn.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ee497f20d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/neqn.0 @@ -0,0 +1,246 @@ + + + +EQN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EQN(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + eqn, neqn, checkeq - typeset mathematics + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + eeqqnn [ --ddxy ] [ --ppn ] [ --ssn ] [ --ffn ] [ file ] ... + cchheecckkeeqq [ file ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _E_q_n is a troff(1) preprocessor for typesetting mathematics + on a Graphic Systems phototypesetter, _n_e_q_n on terminals. + Usage is almost always + + eqn file ... | troff + neqn file ... | nroff + + If no files are specified, these programs reads from the + standard input. A line beginning with `.EQ' marks the start + of an equation; the end of an equation is marked by a line + beginning with `.EN'. Neither of these lines is altered, so + they may be defined in macro packages to get centering, + numbering, etc. It is also possible to set two characters + as `delimiters'; subsequent text between delimiters is also + treated as _e_q_n input. Delimiters may be set to characters _x + and _y with the command-line argument --dd_x_y or (more commonly) + with `delim _x_y' between .EQ and .EN. The left and right + delimiters may be identical. Delimiters are turned off by + `delim off'. All text that is neither between delimiters + nor between .EQ and .EN is passed through untouched. + + The program _c_h_e_c_k_e_q reports missing or unbalanced delimiters + and .EQ/.EN pairs. + + Tokens within _e_q_n are separated by spaces, tabs, newlines, + braces, double quotes, tildes or circumflexes. Braces {} + are used for grouping; generally speaking, anywhere a single + character like _x could appear, a complicated construction + enclosed in braces may be used instead. Tilde ~ represents + a full space in the output, circumflex ^ half as much. + + Subscripts and superscripts are produced with the keywords + ssuubb and ssuupp.. Thus _x _s_u_b _i makes _x_i, _a _s_u_b _i _s_u_p _2 produces + _a_i + 2 + , and _e _s_u_p {_x _s_u_p _2 + _y _s_u_p _2} gives _e + _x2+_y2 + . + + + Fractions are made with oovveerr: _a _o_v_e_r _b yields + _b + + _a_. + + + ssqqrrtt makes square roots: _1 _o_v_e_r _s_q_r_t {_a_x _s_u_p _2 +_b_x+_c} + + results in + v/~~~~~~~~_a_x + 2 + +_b_x+_c + + 1_________ . + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 1 + + + + + + +EQN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EQN(1) + + + + The keywords ffrroomm and ttoo introduce lower and upper limits on + + arbitrary things: + _n->oo + lim + 0 + _>_~ + _n + _x_i is made with _l_i_m _f_r_o_m {_n-> _i_n_f } + + _s_u_m _f_r_o_m _0 _t_o _n _x _s_u_b _i. + + Left and right brackets, braces, etc., of the right height + are made with lleefftt and rriigghhtt:: _l_e_f_t [ _x _s_u_p _2 + _y _s_u_p _2 _o_v_e_r + + _a_l_p_h_a _r_i_g_h_t ] ~=~_1 produces + | + | + | + _x + 2 + + + _o( + + _y + 2 + __ + | + | + | + = 1. The rriigghhtt clause + + is optional. Legal characters after lleefftt and rriigghhtt are + braces, brackets, bars, cc and ff for ceiling and floor, and + "" for nothing at all (useful for a right-side-only + bracket). + + Vertical piles of things are made with ppiillee, llppiillee, ccppiillee, + + and rrppiillee: _p_i_l_e {_a _a_b_o_v_e _b _a_b_o_v_e _c} produces + _c + _b + _a + + . There can + + be an arbitrary number of elements in a pile. llppiillee left- + justifies, ppiillee and ccppiillee center, with different vertical + spacing, and rrppiillee right justifies. + + Matrices are made with mmaattrriixx: _m_a_t_r_i_x { _l_c_o_l { _x _s_u_b _i _a_b_o_v_e + + _y _s_u_b _2 } _c_c_o_l { _1 _a_b_o_v_e _2 } } produces + _y2 + + _x_i + + + 2 + + 1 + + . In addition, + + there is rrccooll for a right-justified column. + + Diacritical marks are made with ddoott, ddoottddoott, hhaatt, ttiillddee, + bbaarr, vveecc, ddyyaadd, and uunnddeerr: _x _d_o_t = _f(_t) _b_a_r is _x.=_f(_t)~~~~, _y + _d_o_t_d_o_t _b_a_r ~=~ _n _u_n_d_e_r is _y..~ = _n_, and _x _v_e_c ~=~ _y _d_y_a_d is + _x->= _y<-->. + + Sizes and font can be changed with ssiizzee _n or ssiizzee ++___n, rroommaann, + iittaalliicc, bboolldd, and ffoonntt _n. Size and fonts can be changed glo- + bally in a document by ggssiizzee _n and ggffoonntt _n, or by the + command-line arguments --ss_n and --ff_n. + + Normally subscripts and superscripts are reduced by 3 point + sizes from the previous size; this may be changed by the + command-line argument --pp_n. + + Successive display arguments can be lined up. Place mmaarrkk + before the desired lineup point in the first equation; place + lliinneeuupp at the place that is to line up vertically in subse- + quent equations. + + Shorthands may be defined or existing keywords redefined + with ddeeffiinnee: _d_e_f_i_n_e _t_h_i_n_g % _r_e_p_l_a_c_e_m_e_n_t % defines a new + token called _t_h_i_n_g which will be replaced by _r_e_p_l_a_c_e_m_e_n_t + + + +Printed 7/9/88 2 + + + + + + +EQN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EQN(1) + + + + whenever it appears thereafter. The % may be any character + that does not occur in _r_e_p_l_a_c_e_m_e_n_t. + + Keywords like _s_u_m (_>_~) _i_n_t () _i_n_f (oo) and shorthands like >= + (>_) -> (->), and != (=/) are recognized. Greek letters are + spelled out in the desired case, as in _a_l_p_h_a or _G_A_M_M_A. + Mathematical words like sin, cos, log are made Roman + automatically. _T_r_o_f_f(1) four-character escapes like \(bs () + can be used anywhere. Strings enclosed in double quotes + "..." are passed through untouched; this permits keywords to + be entered as text, and can be used to communicate with + _t_r_o_f_f when all else fails. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + troff(1), tbl(1), ms(7), eqnchar(7) + B. W. Kernighan and L. L. Cherry, _T_y_p_e_s_e_t_t_i_n_g _M_a_t_h_e_m_a_t_i_c_s- + _U_s_e_r'_s _G_u_i_d_e + J. F. Ossanna, _N_R_O_F_F/_T_R_O_F_F _U_s_e_r'_s _M_a_n_u_a_l + +BBUUGGSS + To embolden digits, parens, etc., it is necessary to quote + them, as in `bold "12.3"'. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/netstat.0 b/usr/man/cat1/netstat.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cc2b781f6f --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/netstat.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +NETSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual NETSTAT(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + netstat - show network status + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + nneettssttaatt [ --AAaann ] [ --ff _a_d_d_r_e_s_s__f_a_m_i_l_y ] [ _s_y_s_t_e_m ] [ _c_o_r_e ] + nneettssttaatt [ --hhiimmnnrrss ] [ --ff _a_d_d_r_e_s_s__f_a_m_i_l_y ] [ _s_y_s_t_e_m ] [ _c_o_r_e + ] + nneettssttaatt [ --nn ] [ --II _i_n_t_e_r_f_a_c_e ] _i_n_t_e_r_v_a_l [ _s_y_s_t_e_m ] [ _c_o_r_e ] + nneettssttaatt [ --pp _p_r_o_t_o_c_o_l ] [ _s_y_s_t_e_m ] [ _c_o_r_e ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + The _n_e_t_s_t_a_t command symbolically displays the contents of + various network-related data structures. There are a number + of output formats, depending on the options for the informa- + tion presented. The first form of the command displays a + list of active sockets for each protocol. The second form + presents the contents of one of the other network data + structures according to the option selected. Using the + third form, with an _i_n_t_e_r_v_a_l specified, _n_e_t_s_t_a_t will con- + tinuously display the information regarding packet traffic + on the configured network interfaces. The fourth form + displays statistics about the named protocol. + + The options have the following meaning: + + --AA With the default display, show the address of any pro- + tocol control blocks associated with sockets; used for + debugging. + + --aa With the default display, show the state of all sock- + ets; normally sockets used by server processes are not + shown. --dd With either interface display (option --ii or + an interval, as described below), show the number of + dropped packets. + + --hh Show the state of the IMP host table. + + --ii Show the state of interfaces which have been auto- + configured (interfaces statically configured into a + system, but not located at boot time are not shown). + + --II _i_n_t_e_r_f_a_c_e + Show information only about this interface; used with + an _i_n_t_e_r_v_a_l as described below. + + --mm Show statistics recorded by the memory management rou- + tines (the network manages a private pool of memory + buffers). + + --nn Show network addresses as numbers (normally _n_e_t_s_t_a_t + interprets addresses and attempts to display them sym- + bolically). This option may be used with any of the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 14, 1988 1 + + + + + + +NETSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual NETSTAT(1) + + + + display formats. + + --pp _p_r_o_t_o_c_o_l + Show statistics about _p_r_o_t_o_c_o_l, which is either a + well-known name for a protocol or an alias for it. + Some protocol names and aliases are listed in the file + /_e_t_c/_p_r_o_t_o_c_o_l_s. A null response typically means that + there are no interesting numbers to report. The pro- + gram will complain if _p_r_o_t_o_c_o_l is unknown or if there + is no statistics routine for it. + + --ss Show per-protocol statistics. + + --rr Show the routing tables. When --ss is also present, show + routing statistics instead. + + --ff _a_d_d_r_e_s_s__f_a_m_i_l_y + Limit statistics or address control block reports to + those of the specified _a_d_d_r_e_s_s _f_a_m_i_l_y. The following + address families are recognized: _i_n_e_t, for AAFF__IINNEETT, _n_s, + for AAFF__NNSS, and _u_n_i_x, for AAFF__UUNNIIXX. + + The arguments, _s_y_s_t_e_m and _c_o_r_e allow substitutes for the + defaults ``/vmunix'' and ``/dev/kmem''. + + The default display, for active sockets, shows the local and + remote addresses, send and receive queue sizes (in bytes), + protocol, and the internal state of the protocol. Address + formats are of the form ``host.port'' or ``network.port'' if + a socket's address specifies a network but no specific host + address. When known the host and network addresses are + displayed symbolically according to the data bases + /_e_t_c/_h_o_s_t_s and /_e_t_c/_n_e_t_w_o_r_k_s, respectively. If a symbolic + name for an address is unknown, or if the --nn option is + specified, the address is printed numerically, according to + the address family. For more information regarding the + Internet ``dot format,'' refer to _i_n_e_t(3N). Unspecified, or + ``wildcard'', addresses and ports appear as ``*''. + + The interface display provides a table of cumulative statis- + tics regarding packets transferred, errors, and collisions. + The network addresses of the interface and the maximum + transmission unit (``mtu'') are also displayed. + + The routing table display indicates the available routes and + their status. Each route consists of a destination host or + network and a gateway to use in forwarding packets. The + flags field shows the state of the route (``U'' if ``up''), + whether the route is to a gateway (``G''), whether the route + was created dynamically by a redirect (``D''), and whether + the route has been modified by a redirect (``M''). Direct + routes are created for each interface attached to the local + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 14, 1988 2 + + + + + + +NETSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual NETSTAT(1) + + + + host; the gateway field for such entries shows the address + of the outgoing interface. The refcnt field gives the + current number of active uses of the route. Connection + oriented protocols normally hold on to a single route for + the duration of a connection while connectionless protocols + obtain a route while sending to the same destination. The + use field provides a count of the number of packets sent + using that route. The interface entry indicates the network + interface utilized for the route. + + When _n_e_t_s_t_a_t is invoked with an _i_n_t_e_r_v_a_l argument, it + displays a running count of statistics related to network + interfaces. This display consists of a column for the pri- + mary interface (the first interface found during autoconfi- + guration) and a column summarizing information for all + interfaces. The primary interface may be replaced with + another interface with the -_I option. The first line of + each screen of information contains a summary since the sys- + tem was last rebooted. Subsequent lines of output show + values accumulated over the preceding interval. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + iostat(1), vmstat(1), hosts(5), networks(5), protocols(5), + services(5), trpt(8C) + +BBUUGGSS + The notion of errors is ill-defined. Collisions mean some- + thing else for the IMP. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 14, 1988 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/newaliases.0 b/usr/man/cat1/newaliases.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b13c7c851f --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/newaliases.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +NEWALIASES(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual NEWALIASES(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + newaliases - rebuild the data base for the mail aliases file + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + nneewwaalliiaasseess + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _N_e_w_a_l_i_a_s_e_s rebuilds the random access data base for the mail + aliases file /_u_s_r/_l_i_b/_a_l_i_a_s_e_s. It must be run each time + /_u_s_r/_l_i_b/_a_l_i_a_s_e_s is changed in order for the change to take + effect. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + aliases(5), sendmail(8) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/nice.0 b/usr/man/cat1/nice.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..45663d9652 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/nice.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +NICE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual NICE(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + nice, nohup - run a command at low priority (_s_h only) + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + nniiccee [ --_n_u_m_b_e_r ] command [ arguments ] + + nnoohhuupp command [ arguments ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _N_i_c_e executes _c_o_m_m_a_n_d with low scheduling priority. If the + _n_u_m_b_e_r argument is present, the priority is incremented + (higher numbers mean lower priorities) by that amount up to + a limit of 20. The default _n_u_m_b_e_r is 10. + + The super-user may run commands with priority higher than + normal by using a negative priority, e.g. `--10'. + + _N_o_h_u_p executes _c_o_m_m_a_n_d immune to hangup and terminate sig- + nals from the controlling terminal. The priority is incre- + mented by 5. _N_o_h_u_p should be invoked from the shell with + `&' in order to prevent it from responding to interrupts by + or stealing the input from the next person who logs in on + the same terminal. + +FFIILLEESS + nohup.out standard output and standard error file under + _n_o_h_u_p + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + csh(1), setpriority(2), renice(8) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + _N_i_c_e returns the exit status of the subject command. + +BBUUGGSS + _N_i_c_e and _n_o_h_u_p are particular to _s_h(1). If you use _c_s_h(1), + then commands executed with ``&'' are automatically immune + to hangup signals while in the background. There is a buil- + tin command _n_o_h_u_p which provides immunity from terminate, + but it does not redirect output to _n_o_h_u_p._o_u_t. + + _N_i_c_e is built into _c_s_h(1) with a slightly different syntax + than described here. The form ``nice +10'' nices to posi- + tive nice, and ``nice -10'' can be used by the super-user to + give a process more of the processor. + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 8, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/nm.0 b/usr/man/cat1/nm.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5d1feb9753 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/nm.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +NM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual NM(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + nm - print name list + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + nnmm [ --aaggnnoopprruu ] [ file ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _N_m prints the name list (symbol table) of each object _f_i_l_e + in the argument list. If an argument is an archive, a list- + ing for each object file in the archive will be produced. + If no _f_i_l_e is given, the symbols in "a.out" are listed. + + Each symbol name is preceded by its value (blanks if unde- + fined) and one of the letters UU (undefined), AA (absolute), TT + (text segment symbol), DD (data segment symbol), BB (bss seg- + ment symbol), CC (common symbol), ff file name, or -- for + debugger symbol table entries (see --aa below). If the symbol + is local (non-external) the type letter is in lower case. + The output is sorted alphabetically. + + Options are: + + --aa Print symbol table entries inserted for use by + debuggers. + + --gg Print only global (external) symbols. + + --nn Sort numerically rather than alphabetically. + + --oo Prepend file or archive element name to each output + line rather than only once. + + --pp Don't sort; print in symbol-table order. + + --rr Sort in reverse order. + + --uu Print only undefined symbols. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + ar(1), ar(5), a.out(5), stab(5) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/nohup.0 b/usr/man/cat1/nohup.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..45663d9652 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/nohup.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +NICE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual NICE(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + nice, nohup - run a command at low priority (_s_h only) + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + nniiccee [ --_n_u_m_b_e_r ] command [ arguments ] + + nnoohhuupp command [ arguments ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _N_i_c_e executes _c_o_m_m_a_n_d with low scheduling priority. If the + _n_u_m_b_e_r argument is present, the priority is incremented + (higher numbers mean lower priorities) by that amount up to + a limit of 20. The default _n_u_m_b_e_r is 10. + + The super-user may run commands with priority higher than + normal by using a negative priority, e.g. `--10'. + + _N_o_h_u_p executes _c_o_m_m_a_n_d immune to hangup and terminate sig- + nals from the controlling terminal. The priority is incre- + mented by 5. _N_o_h_u_p should be invoked from the shell with + `&' in order to prevent it from responding to interrupts by + or stealing the input from the next person who logs in on + the same terminal. + +FFIILLEESS + nohup.out standard output and standard error file under + _n_o_h_u_p + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + csh(1), setpriority(2), renice(8) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + _N_i_c_e returns the exit status of the subject command. + +BBUUGGSS + _N_i_c_e and _n_o_h_u_p are particular to _s_h(1). If you use _c_s_h(1), + then commands executed with ``&'' are automatically immune + to hangup signals while in the background. There is a buil- + tin command _n_o_h_u_p which provides immunity from terminate, + but it does not redirect output to _n_o_h_u_p._o_u_t. + + _N_i_c_e is built into _c_s_h(1) with a slightly different syntax + than described here. The form ``nice +10'' nices to posi- + tive nice, and ``nice -10'' can be used by the super-user to + give a process more of the processor. + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 8, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/nroff.0 b/usr/man/cat1/nroff.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a9b9bb44d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/nroff.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +NROFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual NROFF(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + nroff - text formatting + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + nnrrooffff [ option ] ... [ file ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _N_r_o_f_f formats text in the named _f_i_l_e_s for typewriter-like + devices. See also _t_r_o_f_f(_1). The full capabilities of _n_r_o_f_f + are described in the _N_r_o_f_f/_T_r_o_f_f _U_s_e_r'_s _M_a_n_u_a_l. + + If no _f_i_l_e argument is present, the standard input is read. + An argument consisting of a single minus (--) is taken to be + a file name corresponding to the standard input. + + The options, which may appear in any order so long as they + appear _b_e_f_o_r_e the files, are: + + --oo_l_i_s_t Print only pages whose page numbers appear in the + comma-separated _l_i_s_t of numbers and ranges. A range + _N--_M means pages _N through _M; an initial -_N means from + the beginning to page _N; and a final _N- means from _N + to the end. + + --nn_N Number first generated page _N. + + --ss_N Stop every _N pages. _N_r_o_f_f will halt prior to every _N + pages (default _N=1) to allow paper loading or chang- + ing, and will resume upon receipt of a newline. + + --mm_n_a_m_e Prepend the macro file //uussrr//lliibb//ttmmaacc//ttmmaacc.._n_a_m_e to the + input _f_i_l_e_s. + + --rr_a_N Set register _a (one-character) to _N. + + --ii Read standard input after the input files are + exhausted. + + --qq Invoke the simultaneous input-output mode of the rrdd + request. + + --TT_n_a_m_e Prepare output for specified terminal. Known _n_a_m_e_s + are: + + 3377 for the Teletype Corporation Model 37 terminal, + + ccrrtt the default; linked to lpr and tn300, for the GE + TermiNet 300 (or any terminal without reverse-line + or half-line capability), + + 330000 for the DTC 300, + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 17, 1987 1 + + + + + + +NROFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual NROFF(1) + + + + 330022 for the DTC 302S and the DTC 300S, + + 338822 for the DTC 382, + + 445500 for the DTC 450 and the IPSI 1622, + + 883333 for the AJ 832/833, + + eeppssoonn + for the Epson FX80, + + iittoohh for the C:ITOH Prowriter + + nneecc for the NEC-55?0/77?0 Spinwriter, with the + Courier-72/Manifold thimble, + + nneecc--tt + for the NEC-55?0/77?0 Spinwriter, with the Tech- + Math/Times-Roman thimble, + + nneecc2255--tt + for the NEC-5525/7725 Spinwriter, with the Tech- + Math/Times-Roman thimble, + + qquummee for the Qume Sprint 5 or 9, + + xx--eeccss + for the Xerox/Diablo 1730/630, extended character + set, + + xxeerrooxx + for the Xerox 17?0 or the Diablo 16?0. + + Most of these also have versions for 12 pitch; see + /_u_s_r/_l_i_b/_t_e_r_m/_R_E_A_D_M_E for more information. + + --ee Produce equally-spaced words in adjusted lines, using + full terminal resolution. + + --hh Use output tabs during horizontal spacing to speed out- + put and reduce output character count. Tab settings + are assumed to be every 8 nominal character widths. + +FFIILLEESS + /tmp/ta* temporary file + /usr/lib/tmac/tmac.* standard macro files + /usr/lib/term/* terminal driving tables for _n_r_o_f_f + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + J. F. Ossanna, _N_r_o_f_f/_T_r_o_f_f _u_s_e_r'_s _m_a_n_u_a_l + B. W. Kernighan, _A _T_R_O_F_F _T_u_t_o_r_i_a_l + troff(1), eqn(1), tbl(1), ms(7), me(7), man(7), col(1) + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 17, 1987 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/od.0 b/usr/man/cat1/od.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..17ad8fa0ec --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/od.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +OD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual OD(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + od - octal, decimal, hex, ascii dump + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + oodd [ -format ] [ file ] [ [++]offset[..][bb] [label] ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _O_d displays _f_i_l_e, or it's standard input, in one or more + dump formats as selected by the first argument. If the + first argument is missing, --oo is the default. Dumping con- + tinues until end-of-file. + + The meanings of the format argument characters are: + + aa Interpret bytes as characters and display them with + their ACSII names. If the pp character is given also, + then bytes with even parity are underlined. The PP + character causes bytes with odd parity to be under- + lined. Otherwise the parity bit is ignored. + + bb Interpret bytes as unsigned octal. + + cc Interpret bytes as ASCII characters. Certain non- + graphic characters appear as C escapes: null=\0, + backspace=\b, formfeed=\f, newline=\n, return=\r, + tab=\t; others appear as 3-digit octal numbers. Bytes + with the parity bit set are displayed in octal. + + dd Interpret (short) words as unsigned decimal. + + ff Interpret long words as floating point. + + hh Interpret (short) words as unsigned hexadecimal. + + ii Interpret (short) words as signed decimal. + + ll Interpret long words as signed decimal. + + oo Interpret (short) words as unsigned octal. + + ss[n] Look for strings of ascii graphic characters, ter- + minated with a null byte. _N specifies the minimum + length string to be recognized. By default, the + minimum length is 3 characters. + + vv Show all data. By default, display lines that are + identical to the last line shown are not output, but + are indicated with an ``*'' in column 1. + + ww[n] Specifies the number of input bytes to be interpreted + and displayed on each output line. If ww is not speci- + fied, 16 bytes are read for each display line. If _n is + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +OD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual OD(1) + + + + not specified, it defaults to 32. + + xx Interpret (short) words as hexadecimal. + + An upper case format character implies the long or double + precision form of the object. + + The _o_f_f_s_e_t argument specifies the byte offset into the file + where dumping is to commence. By default this argument is + interpreted in octal. A different radix can be specified; + If ``..'' is appended to the argument, then _o_f_f_s_e_t is inter- + preted in decimal. If _o_f_f_s_e_t begins with ``xx'' or ``00xx'', + it is interpreted in hexadecimal. If ``bb'' (``BB'') is + appended, the offset is interpreted as a block count, where + a block is 512 (1024) bytes. If the _f_i_l_e argument is omit- + ted, an _o_f_f_s_e_t argument must be preceded by ``++''. + + The radix of the displayed address will be the same as the + radix of the _o_f_f_s_e_t, if specified; otherwise it will be + octal. + + _L_a_b_e_l will be interpreted as a pseudo-address for the first + byte displayed. It will be shown in ``()'' following the + file offset. It is intended to be used with core images to + indicate the real memory address. The syntax for _l_a_b_e_l is + identical to that for _o_f_f_s_e_t. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + adb(1) + +BBUUGGSS + A file name argument can't start with ``+''. A hexadecimal + offset can't be a block count. Only one file name argument + can be given. + + It is an historical botch to require specification of + object, radix, and sign representation in a single character + argument. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/page.0 b/usr/man/cat1/page.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f269e63ef9 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/page.0 @@ -0,0 +1,330 @@ + + + +MORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MORE(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + more, page - file perusal filter for crt viewing + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + mmoorree [ --ccddffllssuu ] [ --_n ] [ ++_l_i_n_e_n_u_m_b_e_r ] [ ++//_p_a_t_t_e_r_n ] [ name + ... ] + + ppaaggee _m_o_r_e _o_p_t_i_o_n_s + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _M_o_r_e is a filter which allows examination of a continuous + text one screenful at a time on a soft-copy terminal. It + normally pauses after each screenful, printing --More-- at + the bottom of the screen. If the user then types a carriage + return, one more line is displayed. If the user hits a + space, another screenful is displayed. Other possibilities + are enumerated later. + + The command line options are: + + -_n An integer which is the size (in lines) of the window + which _m_o_r_e will use instead of the default. + + --cc _M_o_r_e will draw each page by beginning at the top of the + screen and erasing each line just before it draws on + it. This avoids scrolling the screen, making it easier + to read while _m_o_r_e is writing. This option will be + ignored if the terminal does not have the ability to + clear to the end of a line. + + --dd _M_o_r_e will prompt the user with the message "Press space + to continue, 'q' to quit." at the end of each screen- + ful, and will respond to subsequent illegal user input + by printing "Press 'h' for instructions." instead of + ringing the bell. This is useful if _m_o_r_e is being used + as a filter in some setting, such as a class, where + many users may be unsophisticated. + + --ff This causes _m_o_r_e to count logical, rather than screen + lines. That is, long lines are not folded. This + option is recommended if _n_r_o_f_f output is being piped + through _u_l, since the latter may generate escape + sequences. These escape sequences contain characters + which would ordinarily occupy screen positions, but + which do not print when they are sent to the terminal + as part of an escape sequence. Thus _m_o_r_e may think + that lines are longer than they actually are, and fold + lines erroneously. + + --ll Do not treat ^L (form feed) specially. If this option + is not given, _m_o_r_e will pause after any line that con- + tains a ^L, as if the end of a screenful had been + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 1 + + + + + + +MORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MORE(1) + + + + reached. Also, if a file begins with a form feed, the + screen will be cleared before the file is printed. + + --ss Squeeze multiple blank lines from the output, producing + only one blank line. Especially helpful when viewing + _n_r_o_f_f output, this option maximizes the useful informa- + tion present on the screen. + + --uu Normally, _m_o_r_e will handle underlining such as produced + by _n_r_o_f_f in a manner appropriate to the particular ter- + minal: if the terminal can perform underlining or has + a stand-out mode, _m_o_r_e will output appropriate escape + sequences to enable underlining or stand-out mode for + underlined information in the source file. The -_u + option suppresses this processing. + + ++_l_i_n_e_n_u_m_b_e_r + Start up at _l_i_n_e_n_u_m_b_e_r. + + ++//_p_a_t_t_e_r_n + Start up two lines before the line containing the regu- + lar expression _p_a_t_t_e_r_n. + + If the program is invoked as _p_a_g_e, then the screen is + cleared before each screenful is printed (but only if a full + screenful is being printed), and _k - 1 rather than _k - 2 + lines are printed in each screenful, where _k is the number + of lines the terminal can display. + + _M_o_r_e looks in the file /_e_t_c/_t_e_r_m_c_a_p to determine terminal + characteristics, and to determine the default window size. + On a terminal capable of displaying 24 lines, the default + window size is 22 lines. + + _M_o_r_e looks in the environment variable _M_O_R_E to pre-set any + flags desired. For example, if you prefer to view files + using the -_c mode of operation, the _c_s_h command _s_e_t_e_n_v _M_O_R_E + -_c or the _s_h command sequence _M_O_R_E='-_c' ; _e_x_p_o_r_t _M_O_R_E would + cause all invocations of _m_o_r_e , including invocations by + programs such as _m_a_n and _m_s_g_s , to use this mode. Normally, + the user will place the command sequence which sets up the + _M_O_R_E environment variable in the ._c_s_h_r_c or ._p_r_o_f_i_l_e file. + + If _m_o_r_e is reading from a file, rather than a pipe, then a + percentage is displayed along with the --More-- prompt. + This gives the fraction of the file (in characters, not + lines) that has been read so far. + + Other sequences which may be typed when _m_o_r_e pauses, and + their effects, are as follows (_i is an optional integer + argument, defaulting to 1) : + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 2 + + + + + + +MORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MORE(1) + + + + _i + display _i more lines, (or another screenful if no argu- + ment is given) + + ^D display 11 more lines (a ``scroll''). If _i is given, + then the scroll size is set to _i. + + d same as ^D (control-D) + + _iz same as typing a space except that _i, if present, + becomes the new window size. + + _is skip _i lines and print a screenful of lines + + _if skip _i screenfuls and print a screenful of lines + + _ib skip back _i screenfuls and print a screenful of lines + + _i^B same as b + + q or Q + Exit from _m_o_r_e. + + = Display the current line number. + + v Start up the editor _v_i at the current line. + + h Help command; give a description of all the _m_o_r_e com- + mands. + + _i/expr + search for the _i-th occurrence of the regular expres- + sion _e_x_p_r. If there are less than _i occurrences of + _e_x_p_r, and the input is a file (rather than a pipe), + then the position in the file remains unchanged. Oth- + erwise, a screenful is displayed, starting two lines + before the place where the expression was found. The + user's erase and kill characters may be used to edit + the regular expression. Erasing back past the first + column cancels the search command. + + _in search for the _i-th occurrence of the last regular + expression entered. + + ' (single quote) Go to the point from which the last + search started. If no search has been performed in the + current file, this command goes back to the beginning + of the file. + + !command + invoke a shell with _c_o_m_m_a_n_d. The characters `%' and `!' + in "command" are replaced with the current file name + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 3 + + + + + + +MORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MORE(1) + + + + and the previous shell command respectively. If there + is no current file name, `%' is not expanded. The + sequences "\%" and "\!" are replaced by "%" and "!" + respectively. + + _i:n skip to the _i-th next file given in the command line + (skips to last file if n doesn't make sense) + + _i:p skip to the _i-th previous file given in the command + line. If this command is given in the middle of print- + ing out a file, then _m_o_r_e goes back to the beginning of + the file. If _i doesn't make sense, _m_o_r_e skips back to + the first file. If _m_o_r_e is not reading from a file, + the bell is rung and nothing else happens. + + :f display the current file name and line number. + + :q or :Q + exit from _m_o_r_e (same as q or Q). + + . (dot) repeat the previous command. + + The commands take effect immediately, i.e., it is not neces- + sary to type a carriage return. Up to the time when the + command character itself is given, the user may hit the line + kill character to cancel the numerical argument being + formed. In addition, the user may hit the erase character + to redisplay the --More--(xx%) message. + + At any time when output is being sent to the terminal, the + user can hit the quit key (normally control-\). _M_o_r_e will + stop sending output, and will display the usual --More-- + prompt. The user may then enter one of the above commands + in the normal manner. Unfortunately, some output is lost + when this is done, due to the fact that any characters wait- + ing in the terminal's output queue are flushed when the quit + signal occurs. + + The terminal is set to _n_o_e_c_h_o mode by this program so that + the output can be continuous. What you type will thus not + show on your terminal, except for the / and ! commands. + + If the standard output is not a teletype, then _m_o_r_e acts + just like _c_a_t, except that a header is printed before each + file (if there is more than one). + + A sample usage of _m_o_r_e in previewing _n_r_o_f_f output would be + + nroff -ms +2 doc.n | more -s + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/termcap Terminal data base + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 4 + + + + + + +MORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MORE(1) + + + + /usr/lib/more.help Help file + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + csh(1), man(1), msgs(1), script(1), sh(1), environ(7) + +BBUUGGSS + Skipping backwards is too slow on large files. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 5 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/pagesize.0 b/usr/man/cat1/pagesize.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ca5c085ad6 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/pagesize.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +PAGESIZE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PAGESIZE(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + pagesize - print system page size + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ppaaggeessiizzee + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _P_a_g_e_s_i_z_e prints the size of a page of memory in bytes, as + returned by _g_e_t_p_a_g_e_s_i_z_e(2). This program is useful in con- + structing portable shell scripts. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + getpagesize(2) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/passwd.0 b/usr/man/cat1/passwd.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..aef47817e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/passwd.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +PASSWD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PASSWD(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + chfn, chsh, passwd - change password file information + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ppaasssswwdd [ --ff ] [ --ss ] [ name ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + This command changes (or installs) a password, login shell + (--ss option), or GECOS information field (--ff option) associ- + ated with the user _n_a_m_e (your own name by default). + + When altering a password, the program prompts for the + current password and then for the new one. The caller must + supply both. The new password must be typed twice to fore- + stall mistakes. + + New passwords must be at least four characters long if they + use a sufficiently rich alphabet and at least six characters + long if monocase. These rules are relaxed if you are + insistent enough. + + Only the owner of the name or the super-user may change a + password; the owner must prove he knows the old password. + + When altering a login shell, _p_a_s_s_w_d displays the current + login shell and then prompts for the new one. The new login + shell must be one of the approved shells listed in + /_e_t_c/_s_h_e_l_l_s unless you are the super-user. If /_e_t_c/_s_h_e_l_l_s + does not exist, the only shells that may be specified are + /_b_i_n/_s_h and /_b_i_n/_c_s_h. + + The super-user may change anyone's login shell; normal users + may only change their own login shell. + + When altering the GECOS information field, _p_a_s_s_w_d displays + the current information, broken into fields, as interpreted + by the _f_i_n_g_e_r(1) program, among others, and prompts for new + values. These fields include a user's ``real life'' name, + office room number, office phone number, and home phone + number. Included in each prompt is a default value, which + is enclosed between brackets. The default value is accepted + simply by typing a carriage return. To enter a blank field, + the word ``none'' may be typed. Below is a sample run: + + NNaammee [[BBiiffff SSttuuddsswwoorrtthh IIII]]:: + RRoooomm nnuummbbeerr ((EExxss:: 559977EE oorr 119977CC)) [[]]:: 521E + OOffffiiccee PPhhoonnee ((EExx:: 11663322)) [[]]:: 1863 + HHoommee PPhhoonnee ((EExx:: 998877553322)) [[55777711554466]]:: none + + + _P_a_s_s_w_d allows phone numbers to be entered with or without + hyphens. It is a good idea to run _f_i_n_g_e_r after changing the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 1 + + + + + + +PASSWD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PASSWD(1) + + + + GECOS information to make sure everything is setup properly. + + The super-user may change anyone's GECOS information; normal + users may only change their own. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/passwd The file containing all of this information + /etc/shells The list of approved shells + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + login(1), finger(1), passwd(5), crypt(3) + Robert Morris and Ken Thompson, _U_N_I_X _p_a_s_s_w_o_r_d _s_e_c_u_r_i_t_y + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/pc.0 b/usr/man/cat1/pc.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c39ca2161c --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/pc.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +PC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PC(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + pc - Pascal compiler + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ppcc [ option ] [ --ii name ... ] name ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _P_c is a Pascal compiler. If given an argument file ending + with ..pp, it will compile the file and load it into an exe- + cutable file called, by default, _a._o_u_t. + + A program may be separated into more than one ..pp file. _P_c + will compile a number of argument ..pp files into object files + (with the extension ..oo in place of ..pp). Object files may + then be loaded into an executable _a._o_u_t file. Exactly one + object file must supply a pprrooggrraamm statement to successfully + create an executable a.out file. The rest of the files must + consist only of declarations which logically nest within the + program. References to objects shared between separately + compiled files are allowed if the objects are declared in + iinncclluuddeed header files, whose names must end with ..hh. Header + files may only be included at the outermost level, and thus + declare only globally available objects. To allow ffuunnccttiioonns + and pprroocceedduurrees to be declared, an eexxtteerrnnaall directive has + been added, whose use is similar to the ffoorrwwaarrdd directive + but restricted to appear only in ..hh files. FFuunnccttiioonn and + pprroocceedduurree bodies may not appear in ..hh files. A binding + phase of the compiler checks that declarations are used con- + sistently, to enforce the type checking rules of Pascal. + + Object files created by other language processors may be + loaded together with object files created by _p_c. The ffuunncc-- + ttiioonns and pprroocceedduurrees they define must have been declared in + ..hh files included by all the ..pp files which call those rou- + tines. Calling conventions are as in C, with vvaarr parameters + passed by address. + + See the Berkeley Pascal User's Manual for details. + + The following options have the same meaning as in _c_c(1) and + _f_7_7(1). See _l_d(1) for load-time options. + + --cc Suppress loading and produce `.o' file(s) from source + file(s). + + --gg Have the compiler produce additional symbol table + information for _d_b_x(1). + + --ww Suppress warning messages. + + --pp Prepare object files for profiling, see _p_r_o_f(1). + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +PC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PC(1) + + + + --OO Invoke an object-code improver. + + --SS Compile the named program, and leave the assembler- + language output on the corresponding file suffixed + `.s'. (No `.o' is created.). + + --oo output + Name the final output file _o_u_t_p_u_t instead of _a._o_u_t. + + The following options are peculiar to _p_c. + + --CC Compile code to perform runtime checks, verify aasssseerrtt + calls, and initialize all variables to zero as in _p_i. + + --bb Block buffer the file _o_u_t_p_u_t. + + --ii Produce a listing for the specified procedures, func- + tions and iinncclluuddee files. + + --ll Make a program listing during translation. + + --ss Accept standard Pascal only; non-standard constructs + cause warning diagnostics. + + --tt directory + Use the given _d_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y for compiler temporary files. + + --zz Allow execution profiling with _p_x_p by generating + statement counters, and arranging for the creation of + the profile data file _p_m_o_n._o_u_t when the resulting + object is executed. + + Other arguments are taken to be loader option arguments, + perhaps libraries of _p_c compatible routines. Certain flags + can also be controlled in comments within the program as + described in the _B_e_r_k_e_l_e_y _P_a_s_c_a_l _U_s_e_r'_s _M_a_n_u_a_l. + +FFIILLEESS + file.p pascal source files + /usr/lib/pc0 compiler + /lib/f1 code generator + /usr/lib/pc2 runtime integrator (inline + expander) + /lib/c2 peephole optimizer + /usr/lib/pc3 separate compilation consistency + checker + /usr/lib/pc2.*strings text of the error messages + /usr/lib/how_pc basic usage explanation + /usr/lib/libpc.a intrinsic functions and I/O library + /usr/lib/libm.a math library + /lib/libc.a standard library, see _i_n_t_r_o(3) + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + + + + +PC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PC(1) + + + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + Berkeley Pascal User's Manual + pi(1), pxp(1), pxref(1), sdb(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + For a basic explanation do + + ppcc + + See _p_i(1). for an explanation of the error message format. + Internal errors cause messages containing the word SNARK. + +AAUUTTHHOORRSS + Charles B. Haley, William N. Joy, and Ken Thompson + Retargetted to the second pass of the portable _C compiler by + Peter Kessler + Runtime library and inline optimizer by M. Kirk McKusick + Separate compilation consistency checking by Louise Madrid + +BBUUGGSS + The keyword ppaacckkeedd is recognized but has no effect. + + The binder is not as strict as described here, with regard + to the rules about external declarations only in `.h' files + and including `.h' files only at the outermost level. It + will be made to perform these checks in its next incarna- + tion, so users are warned not to be sloppy. + + The --zz flag doesn't work for separately compiled files. + + Because the --ss option is usurped by the compiler, it is not + possible to pass the strip option to the loader. Thus pro- + grams which are to be stripped, must be run through _s_t_r_i_p(1) + after they are compiled. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/pdx.0 b/usr/man/cat1/pdx.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8004a4ef0a --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/pdx.0 @@ -0,0 +1,330 @@ + + + +PDX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PDX(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + pdx - pascal debugger + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + pdx [--rr] [_o_b_j_f_i_l_e] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _P_d_x is a tool for source level debugging and execution of + Pascal programs. The _o_b_j_f_i_l_e is an object file produced by + the Pascal translator _p_i(1). If no _o_b_j_f_i_l_e is specified, + _p_d_x looks for a file named ``obj'' in the current directory. + The object file contains a symbol table which includes the + name of the all the source files translated by _p_i to create + it. These files are available for perusal while using the + debugger. + + If the file ``.pdxinit'' exists in the current directory, + then the debugger commands in it are executed. + + The --rr option causes the _o_b_j_f_i_l_e to be executed immediately; + if it terminates successfully _p_d_x exits. Otherwise it + reports the reason for termination and offers the user the + option of entering the debugger or simply letting _p_x con- + tinue with a traceback. If --rr is not specified, _p_d_x just + prompts and waits for a command. + + The commands are: + + rruunn [_a_r_g_s] [<< _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e] [>> _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e] + Start executing _o_b_j_f_i_l_e, passing _a_r_g_s as command line + arguments; << or >> can be used to redirect input or out- + put in the usual manner. + + ttrraaccee [iinn _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e/_f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n] [iiff _c_o_n_d_i_t_i_o_n] + ttrraaccee _s_o_u_r_c_e-_l_i_n_e-_n_u_m_b_e_r [iiff _c_o_n_d_i_t_i_o_n] + ttrraaccee _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e/_f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n [iinn _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e/_f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n] [iiff _c_o_n_d_i_t_i_o_n] + ttrraaccee _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n aatt _s_o_u_r_c_e-_l_i_n_e-_n_u_m_b_e_r [iiff _c_o_n_d_i_t_i_o_n] + ttrraaccee _v_a_r_i_a_b_l_e [iinn _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e/_f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n] [iiff _c_o_n_d_i_t_i_o_n] + Have tracing information printed when the program is + executed. A number is associated with the command that + is used to turn the tracing off (see the ddeelleettee com- + mand). + + The first argument describes what is to be traced. If + it is a _s_o_u_r_c_e-_l_i_n_e-_n_u_m_b_e_r, then the line is printed + immediately prior to being executed. Source line + numbers in a file other than the current one must be + preceded by the name of the file and a colon, e.g. + ``mumble.p:17''. + + If the argument is a procedure or function name then + every time it is called, information is printed telling + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +PDX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PDX(1) + + + + what routine called it, from what source line it was + called, and what parameters were passed to it. In + addition, its return is noted, and if it's a function + then the value it is returning is also printed. + + If the argument is an _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n with an aatt clause then + the value of the expression is printed whenever the + identified source line is reached. + + If the argument is a variable then the name and value + of the variable is printed whenever it changes. Execu- + tion is substantially slower during this form of trac- + ing. + + If no argument is specified then all source lines are + printed before they are executed. Execution is sub- + stantially slower during this form of tracing. + + The clause ``iinn _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e/_f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n'' restricts tracing + information to be printed only while executing inside + the given procedure or function. + + _C_o_n_d_i_t_i_o_n is a Pascal boolean expression and is + evaluated prior to printing the tracing information; if + it is false then the information is not printed. + + There is no restriction on the amount of information + that can be traced. + + ssttoopp iiff _c_o_n_d_i_t_i_o_n + ssttoopp aatt _s_o_u_r_c_e-_l_i_n_e-_n_u_m_b_e_r [iiff _c_o_n_d_i_t_i_o_n] + ssttoopp iinn _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e/_f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n [iiff _c_o_n_d_i_t_i_o_n] + ssttoopp _v_a_r_i_a_b_l_e [iiff _c_o_n_d_i_t_i_o_n] + Stop execution when the given line is reached, pro- + cedure or function called, variable changed, or condi- + tion true. + + ddeelleettee _c_o_m_m_a_n_d-_n_u_m_b_e_r + The trace or stop corresponding to the given number is + removed. The numbers associated with traces and stops + are printed by the ssttaattuuss command. + + ssttaattuuss [>> _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e] + Print out the currently active ttrraaccee and ssttoopp commands. + + ccoonntt Continue execution from where it stopped. This can + only be done when the program was stopped by an inter- + rupt or through use of the ssttoopp command. + + sstteepp Execute one source line. + + nneexxtt Execute up to the next source line. The difference + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + + + + +PDX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PDX(1) + + + + between this and sstteepp is that if the line contains a + call to a procedure or function the sstteepp command will + stop at the beginning of that block, while the nneexxtt + command will not. + + pprriinntt _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n [,, _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n ...] + Print out the values of the Pascal expressions. Vari- + ables declared in an outer block but having the same + identifier as one in the current block may be refer- + enced as ``_b_l_o_c_k-_n_a_m_e .. _v_a_r_i_a_b_l_e''. + + wwhhaattiiss _i_d_e_n_t_i_f_i_e_r + Print the declaration of the given identifier. + + wwhhiicchh _i_d_e_n_t_i_f_i_e_r + Print the full qualification of the given identifer, + i.e. the outer blocks that the identifier is associ- + ated with. + + aassssiiggnn _v_a_r_i_a_b_l_e _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n + Assign the value of the expression to the variable. + + ccaallll _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e(_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s) + Execute the object code associated with the named pro- + cedure or function. + + hheellpp Print out a synopsis of _p_d_x commands. + + ggrriippee + Invokes a mail program to send a message to the person + in charge of _p_d_x. + + wwhheerree + Print out a list of the active procedures and functions + and the respective source line where they are called. + + ssoouurrccee _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e + Read _p_d_x commands from the given _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e. Especially + useful when the _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e has been created by redirect- + ing a ssttaattuuss command from an earlier debugging session. + + dduummpp [>> _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e] + Print the names and values of all active data. + + lliisstt [_s_o_u_r_c_e-_l_i_n_e-_n_u_m_b_e_r [,, _s_o_u_r_c_e-_l_i_n_e-_n_u_m_b_e_r]] + lliisstt _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e/_f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n + List the lines in the current source file from the + first line number to the second inclusive. As in the + editor ``$'' can be used to refer to the last line. If + no lines are specified, the entire file is listed. If + the name of a procedure or function is given lines _n-_k + to _n+_k are listed where _n is the first statement in the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 3 + + + + + + +PDX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PDX(1) + + + + procedure or function and _k is small. + + ffiillee [_f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e] + Change the current source file name to _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e. If + none is specified then the current source file name is + printed. + + eeddiitt [_f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e] + eeddiitt _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e/_f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n-_n_a_m_e + Invoke an editor on _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e or the current source file + if none is specified. If a _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e or _f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n name + is specified, the editor is invoked on the file that + contains it. Which editor is invoked by default + depends on the installation. The default can be over- + ridden by setting the environment variable EDITOR to + the name of the desired editor. + + ppii Recompile the program and read in the new symbol table + information. + + sshh _c_o_m_m_a_n_d-_l_i_n_e + Pass the command line to the shell for execution. The + SHELL environment variable determines which shell is + used. + + aalliiaass _n_e_w-_c_o_m_m_a_n_d-_n_a_m_e _o_l_d-_c_o_m_m_a_n_d-_n_a_m_e + This command makes _p_d_x respond to _n_e_w-_c_o_m_m_a_n_d-_n_a_m_e the + way it used to respond to _o_l_d-_c_o_m_m_a_n_d-_n_a_m_e. + + qquuiitt Exit _p_d_x. + + + + + + The following commands deal with the program at the _p_x + instruction level rather than source level. They are not + intended for general use. + + ttrraacceeii [_a_d_d_r_e_s_s] [iiff _c_o_n_d] + ttrraacceeii [_v_a_r_i_a_b_l_e] [aatt _a_d_d_r_e_s_s] [iiff _c_o_n_d] + ssttooppii [_a_d_d_r_e_s_s] [iiff _c_o_n_d] + ssttooppii [aatt] [_a_d_d_r_e_s_s] [iiff _c_o_n_d] + Turn on tracing or set a stop using a _p_x machine + instruction addresses. + + xxii _a_d_d_r_e_s_s [,, _a_d_d_r_e_s_s] + Print the instructions starting at the first _a_d_d_r_e_s_s. + Instructions up to the second _a_d_d_r_e_s_s are printed. + + xxdd _a_d_d_r_e_s_s [,, _a_d_d_r_e_s_s] + Print in octal the specified data location(s). + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 4 + + + + + + +PDX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PDX(1) + + + +FFIILLEESS + obj Pascal object file + .pdxinit _P_d_x initialization file + + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + pi(1), px(1) + _A_n _I_n_t_r_o_d_u_c_t_i_o_n _t_o _P_d_x + +BBUUGGSS + _P_d_x does not understand sets, and provides no information + about files. + + The _w_h_a_t_i_s command doesn't quite work for variant records. + + Bad things will happen if a procedure invoked with the ccaallll + command does a non-local goto. + + The commands sstteepp and nneexxtt should be able to take a _c_o_u_n_t + that specifies how many lines to execute. + + There should be commands sstteeppii and nneexxttii that correspond to + sstteepp and nneexxtt but work at the instruction level. + + There should be a way to get an address associated with a + line number, procedure or function, and variable. + + Most of the command names are too long. + + The alias facility is quite weak. + + A _c_s_h-like history capability would improve the situation. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 5 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/pi.0 b/usr/man/cat1/pi.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cb1e01be8d --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/pi.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +PI(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PI(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + pi - Pascal interpreter code translator + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ppii [ ooppttiioonn ] [ --ii name ... ] name.p + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _P_i translates the program in the file _n_a_m_e._p leaving inter- + preter code in the file _o_b_j in the current directory. The + interpreter code can be executed using _p_x. _P_i_x performs the + functions of _p_i and _p_x for `load and go' Pascal. + + The following flags are interpreted by _p_i; the associated + options can also be controlled in comments within the pro- + gram as described in the _B_e_r_k_e_l_e_y _P_a_s_c_a_l _U_s_e_r'_s _M_a_n_u_a_l. + + --bb Block buffer the file _o_u_t_p_u_t. + + --ii Enable the listing for any specified procedures and + functions and while processing any specified iinncclluuddee + files. + + --ll Make a program listing during translation. + + --nn Begin each listed iinncclluuddee file on a new page with a + banner line. + + --pp Suppress the post-mortem control flow backtrace if an + error occurs; suppress statement limit counting. + + --ss Accept standard Pascal only; non-standard constructs + cause warning diagnostics. + + --tt Suppress runtime tests of subrange variables and treat + aasssseerrtt statements as comments. + + --uu Card image mode; only the first 72 characters of input + lines are used. + + --ww Suppress warning diagnostics. + + --zz Allow execution profiling with _p_x_p by generating + statement counters, and arranging for the creation of + the profile data file _p_m_o_n._o_u_t when the resulting + object is executed. + +FFIILLEESS + file.p input file + file.i iinncclluuddee file(s) + /usr/lib/pi2.*strings text of the error messages + /usr/lib/how_pi* basic usage explanation + obj interpreter code output + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +PI(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PI(1) + + + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + Berkeley Pascal User's Manual + pix(1), px(1), pxp(1), pxref(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + For a basic explanation do + + ppii + + In the diagnostic output of the translator, lines containing + syntax errors are listed with a flag indicating the point of + error. Diagnostic messages indicate the action which the + recovery mechanism took in order to be able to continue + parsing. Some diagnostics indicate only that the input is + `malformed.' This occurs if the recovery can find no simple + correction to make the input syntactically valid. + + Semantic error diagnostics indicate a line in the source + text near the point of error. Some errors evoke more than + one diagnostic to help pinpoint the error; the follow-up + messages begin with an ellipsis `...'. + + The first character of each error message indicates its + class: + + E Fatal error; no code will be generated. + e Non-fatal error. + w Warning - a potential problem. + s Non-standard Pascal construct warning. + + If a severe error occurs which inhibits further processing, + the translator will give a diagnostic and then `QUIT'. + +AAUUTTHHOORRSS + Charles B. Haley, William N. Joy, and Ken Thompson + Ported to VAX-11 by Peter Kessler + +BBUUGGSS + The keyword ppaacckkeedd is recognized but has no effect. + + For clarity, semantic errors should be flagged at an + appropriate place in the source text, and multiple instances + of the `same' semantic error should be summarized at the end + of a pprroocceedduurree or ffuunnccttiioonn rather than evoking many diagnos- + tics. + + When iinncclluuddee files are present, diagnostics relating to the + last procedure in one file may appear after the beginning of + the listing of the next. + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/pix.0 b/usr/man/cat1/pix.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6ff359184f --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/pix.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +PIX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PIX(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + pix - Pascal interpreter and executor + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ppiixx [ --bbllnnppssttuuwwzz ] [ --ii name ... ] name.p [ argument ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _P_i_x is a `load and go' version of Pascal which combines the + functions of the interpreter code translator _p_i and the exe- + cutor _p_x. It uses _p_i to translate the program in the file + _n_a_m_e._p and, if there were no fatal errors during transla- + tion, causes the resulting interpreter code to be executed + by _p_x with the specified arguments. A temporary file is + used for the object code; the file _o_b_j is neither created + nor destroyed. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/ucb/pi Pascal translator + /usr/ucb/px Pascal executor + /tmp/pix* temporary + /usr/lib/how_pix basic explanation + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + Berkeley Pascal User's Manual + pi(1), px(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + For a basic explanation do + + ppiixx + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/plot.0 b/usr/man/cat1/plot.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e793b1cac6 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/plot.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +PLOT(1G) UNIX Programmer's Manual PLOT(1G) + + + +NNAAMMEE + plot - graphics filters + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + pplloott [ --TTterminal ] [ --rrresolution ] [ files... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + These commands read plotting instructions (see _p_l_o_t(5)) from + the standard input or the specified _f_i_l_e_s, and in general + produce plotting instructions suitable for a particular _t_e_r_- + _m_i_n_a_l on the standard output. The --rr flag may be used to + specify the device's output resolution (currently only the + Imagen laser printer understands this option). + + If no _t_e_r_m_i_n_a_l type is specified, the environment parameter + $TERM (see _e_n_v_i_r_o_n(7)) is used. Known _t_e_r_m_i_n_a_l_s are: + + 44001133 Tektronix 4013 storage scope. + + 44001144 or tteekk + Tektronix 4014 or 4015 storage scope with Enhanced + Graphics Module. (Use 4013 for Tektronix 4014 or 4015 + without the Enhanced Graphics Module). + + 445500 DASI Hyterm 450 terminal (Diablo mechanism). + + 330000 DASI 300 or GSI terminal (Diablo mechanism). + + 330000SS DASI 300S terminal (Diablo mechanism). + + aaeedd AED 512 color graphics terminal. + + bbiittggrraapphh or bbgg + BBN bitgraph graphics terminal. + + iimmaaggeenn oorr iipp + Imagen laser printer (default 240 dots-per-inch resolu- + tion). + + ccrrtt Any crt terminal capable of running _v_i(1). + + dduummbb Dumb terminals without cursor addressing or line + printers. + + vvtt112255 + DEC vt125 terminal. + + hhpp22664488 or hhpp or hhpp88 + Hewlett Packard 2648 graphics terminal. + + vveerr Versatec D1200A printer-plotter. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 21, 1985 1 + + + + + + +PLOT(1G) UNIX Programmer's Manual PLOT(1G) + + + + vvaarr Benson Varian printer-plotter. + + These versions of _p_l_o_t use the --gg option of _l_p_r(1) to + send the result directly to the plotter device rather + than to the standard output. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/bin/t4013 + /usr/bin/tek + /usr/bin/t450 + /usr/bin/t300 + /usr/bin/t300s + /usr/bin/aedplot + /usr/bin/bgplot + /usr/bin/crtplot + /usr/bin/dumbplot + /usr/bin/gigiplot + /usr/bin/hpplot + /usr/bin/implot + /usr/ucb/lpr + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + plot(3X), plot(3F), plot(5), lpr(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 21, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/pmerge.0 b/usr/man/cat1/pmerge.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..eaefd8fcc7 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/pmerge.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +PMERGE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PMERGE(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + pmerge - pascal file merger + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ppmmeerrggee name.p ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _P_m_e_r_g_e assembles the named Pascal files into a single stan- + dard Pascal program. The resulting program is listed on the + standard output. It is intended to be used to merge a col- + lection of separately compiled modules so that they can be + run through ppii , or exported to other sites. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/tmp/MG* default temporary files + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + pc(1), pi(1), + Auxiliary documentation _B_e_r_k_e_l_e_y _P_a_s_c_a_l _U_s_e_r'_s _M_a_n_u_a_l. + +AAUUTTHHOORR + M. Kirk McKusick + +BBUUGGSS + Very minimal error checking is done, so incorrect programs + will produce unpredictable results. Block comments should + be placed after the keyword to which they refer or they are + likely to end up in bizarre places. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/pr.0 b/usr/man/cat1/pr.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..871ef45767 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/pr.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +PR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PR(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + pr - print file + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + pprr [ option ] ... [ file ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _P_r produces a printed listing of one or more _f_i_l_e_s. The out- + put is separated into pages headed by a date, the name of + the file or a specified header, and the page number. If + there are no file arguments, _p_r prints its standard input. + + Options apply to all following files but may be reset + between files: + + --_n Produce _n-column output. + + ++_n Begin printing with page _n. + + --hh Take the next argument as a page header. + + --ww_n For purposes of multi-column output, take the width of + the page to be _n characters instead of the default 72. + + --ff Use formfeeds instead of newlines to separate pages. A + formfeed is assumed to use up two blank lines at the + top of a page. (Thus this option does not affect the + effective page length.) + + --ll_n Take the length of the page to be _n lines instead of + the default 66. + + --tt Do not print the 5-line header or the 5-line trailer + normally supplied for each page. + + --ss_c Separate columns by the single character _c instead of + by the appropriate amount of white space. A missing _c + is taken to be a tab. + + --mm Print all _f_i_l_e_s simultaneously, each in one column, + + Inter-terminal messages via _w_r_i_t_e(1) are forbidden during a + _p_r. + +FFIILLEESS + /dev/tty? to suspend messages. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + cat(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + There are no diagnostics when _p_r is printing on a terminal. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/printenv.0 b/usr/man/cat1/printenv.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4085de84ae --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/printenv.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +PRINTENV(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PRINTENV(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + printenv - print out the environment + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + pprriinntteennvv [ name ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _P_r_i_n_t_e_n_v prints out the values of the variables in the + environment. If a _n_a_m_e is specified, only its value is + printed. + + If a _n_a_m_e is specified and it is not defined in the environ- + ment, _p_r_i_n_t_e_n_v returns exit status 1, else it returns status + 0. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + sh(1), environ(7), csh(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/prof.0 b/usr/man/cat1/prof.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4d6e329cea --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/prof.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +PROF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PROF(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + prof - display profile data + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + pprrooff [ --aa ] [ --ll ] [ --nn ] [ --zz ] [ --ss ] [ --vv [ --_l_o_w [ --_h_i_g_h + ] ] ] [ a.out [ mon.out ... ] ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _P_r_o_f interprets the file produced by the _m_o_n_i_t_o_r subroutine. + Under default modes, the symbol table in the named object + file (_a._o_u_t default) is read and correlated with the profile + file (_m_o_n._o_u_t default). For each external symbol, the per- + centage of time spent executing between that symbol and the + next is printed (in decreasing order), together with the + number of times that routine was called and the number of + milliseconds per call. If more than one profile file is + specified, the output represents the sum of the profiles. + + In order for the number of calls to a routine to be tallied, + the --pp option of _c_c, _f_7_7 or _p_c must have been given when the + file containing the routine was compiled. This option also + arranges for the profile file to be produced automatically. + + Options are: + + --aa all symbols are reported rather than just external sym- + bols. + + --ll the output is sorted by symbol value. + + --nn the output is sorted by number of calls + + --ss a summary profile file is produced in _m_o_n._s_u_m. This is + really only useful when more than one profile file is + specified. + + --vv all printing is suppressed and a graphic version of the + profile is produced on the standard output for display + by the _p_l_o_t(1) filters. When plotting, the numbers _l_o_w + and _h_i_g_h, by default 0 and 100, may be given to cause a + selected percentage of the profile to be plotted with + accordingly higher resolution. + + --zz routines which have zero usage (as indicated by call + counts and accumulated time) are nevertheless printed + in the output. + +FFIILLEESS + mon.out for profile + a.out for namelist + mon.sum for summary profile + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +PROF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PROF(1) + + + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + monitor(3), profil(2), cc(1), plot(1G) + +BBUUGGSS + Beware of quantization errors. + + Is confused by _f_7_7 which puts the entry points at the bottom + of subroutines and functions. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/ps.0 b/usr/man/cat1/ps.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f73c15af02 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/ps.0 @@ -0,0 +1,264 @@ + + + +PS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PS(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + ps - process status + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ppss [ aacceeggkkllnnssttuuvvwwxxUU## ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _P_s prints information about processes. Normally, only your + processes are candidates to be printed by _p_s; specifying aa + causes other users' processes to be candidates to be + printed; specifying xx includes processes without control + terminals in the candidate pool. + + All output formats include, for each process, the process id + PID, control terminal of the process TT, cpu time used by + the process TIME (this includes both user and system time), + the state STAT of the process, and an indication of the COM- + MAND which is running. The state is given by a sequence of + letters, e.g. ``RWNA''. The first letter indicates the run- + nability of the process: R for runnable processes, T for + stopped processes, P for processes in page wait, D for those + in disk (or other short term) waits, S for those sleeping + for less than about 20 seconds, and I for idle (sleeping + longer than about 20 seconds) processes. Additional charac- + ters after these, if any, indicate additional state informa- + tion. The letter W indicates that a process is swapped out, + showing W if it is, or a blank if it is loaded (in-core). A + process which has specified a soft limit on memory require- + ments and which is exceeding that limit shows >; such a pro- + cess is (necessarily) not swapped. An additional letter may + indicate whether a process is running with altered CPU + scheduling priority (nice); if the process priority is + reduced, an N is shown, if the process priority has been + artificially raised then a `<' is shown. The final optional + letter indicates any special treatment of the process for + virtual memory replacement; the letters correspond to + options to the _v_a_d_v_i_s_e(2) call; currently the possibilities + are A standing for VA_ANOM and S for VA_SEQL. An A typi- + cally represents a _l_i_s_p(1) in garbage collection, and S is + typical of large image processing programs which are using + virtual memory to sequentially address voluminous data. + + Here are the options: + + aa asks for information about all processes with terminals + (ordinarily only one's own processes are displayed). + + cc prints the command name, as stored internally in the + system for purposes of accounting, rather than the com- + mand arguments, which are kept in the process' address + space. This is more reliable, if less informative, + since the process is free to destroy the latter + + + +Printed 7/9/88 March 10, 1988 1 + + + + + + +PS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PS(1) + + + + information. + + ee Asks for the environment to be printed as well as the + arguments to the command. + + gg Asks for all processes. Without this option, _p_s only + prints ``interesting'' processes. Processes are deemed + to be uninteresting if they are process group leaders. + This normally eliminates top-level command interpreters + and processes waiting for users to login on free termi- + nals. + + kk causes the file /_v_m_c_o_r_e is used in place of /_d_e_v/_k_m_e_m + and /_d_e_v/_m_e_m. This is used for postmortem system + debugging. + + ll asks for a long listing, with fields PPID, CP, PRI, NI, + ADDR, SIZE, RSS and WCHAN as described below. + + nn Asks for numerical output. In a long listing, the + WCHAN field is printed numerically rather than symboli- + cally, or, in a user listing, the USER field is + replaced by a UID field. + + ss Adds the size SSIZ of the kernel stack of each process + (for use by system maintainers) to the basic output + format. + + tt_x restricts output to processes whose controlling tty is + _x (which should be specified as printed by _p_s, e.g. _t_3 + for tty3, _t_c_o for console, _t_d_0 for ttyd0, _t? for + processes with no tty, _t for processes at the current + tty, etc). This option must be the last one given. + + uu A user oriented output is produced. This includes + fields USER, %CPU, NICE, SIZE, and RSS as described + below. + + vv A version of the output containing virtual memory + statistics is output. This includes fields RE, SL, + PAGEIN, SIZE, RSS, LIM, TSIZ, TRS, %CPU and %MEM, + described below. + + ww Use a wide output format (132 columns rather than 80); + if repeated, e.g. ww, use arbitrarily wide output. + This information is used to decide how much of long + commands to print. + + xx asks even about processes with no terminal. + + UU causes ps to update a private database where it keeps + system information. Thus ``ps U'' should be included + + + +Printed 7/9/88 March 10, 1988 2 + + + + + + +PS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PS(1) + + + + in the /etc/rc file. + + ## A process number may be given, (indicated here by #), + in which case the output is restricted to that process. + This option must also be last. + + A second argument is taken to be the file containing the + system's namelist. Otherwise, /vmunix is used. A third + argument tells _p_s where to look for _c_o_r_e if the kk option is + given, instead of /vmcore. If a fourth argument is given, + it is taken to be the name of a swap file to use instead of + the default /dev/drum. + + Fields which are not common to all output formats: + USER name of the owner of the process + %CPU cpu utilization of the process; this is a decaying + average over up to a minute of previous (real) + time. Since the time base over which this is com- + puted varies (since processes may be very young) + it is possible for the sum of all %CPU fields to + exceed 100%. + NICE (or NI) process scheduling increment (see _s_e_t_- + _p_r_i_o_r_i_t_y(2)) + SIZE virtual size of the process (in 1024 byte units) + RSS real memory (resident set) size of the process (in + 1024 byte units) + LIM soft limit on memory used, specified via a call to + _s_e_t_r_l_i_m_i_t(2); if no limit has been specified then + shown as _x_x + TSIZ size of text (shared program) image + TRS size of resident (real memory) set of text + %MEM percentage of real memory used by this process. + RE residency time of the process (seconds in core) + SL sleep time of the process (seconds blocked) + PAGEIN number of disk i/o's resulting from references by + the process to pages not loaded in core. + UID numerical user-id of process owner + PPID numerical id of parent of process + CP short-term cpu utilization factor (used in + scheduling) + PRI process priority (non-positive when in non- + interruptible wait) + ADDR swap address of the process + WCHAN event on which process is waiting (an address in + the system). A symbol is chosen that classifies + the address, unless numerical output is requested + (see the nn flag). In this case, the initial part + of the address is trimmed off and is printed hexa- + decimally, e.g., 0x80004000 prints as 4000. + + F flags associated with process as in <_s_y_s/_p_r_o_c._h>: + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 March 10, 1988 3 + + + + + + +PS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PS(1) + + + + SLOAD 000001 in core + SSYS 000002 swapper or pager process + SLOCK 000004 process being swapped out + SSWAP 000008 save area flag + STRC 000010 process is being traced + SWTED 000020 another tracing flag + SULOCK 000040 user settable lock in core + SPAGE 000080 process in page wait state + SKEEP 000100 another flag to prevent swap out + SDLYU 000200 delayed unlock of pages + SWEXIT 000400 working on exiting + SPHYSIO 000800 doing physical i/o (bio.c) + SVFORK 001000 process resulted from vfork() + SVFDONE 002000 another vfork flag + SNOVM 004000 no vm, parent in a vfork() + SPAGI 008000 init data space on demand from inode + SANOM 010000 system detected anomalous vm behavior + SUANOM 020000 user warned of anomalous vm behavior + STIMO 040000 timing out during sleep + SDETACH 080000 detached inherited by init + SOUSIG 100000 using old signal mechanism + + A process that has exited and has a parent that has not yet + waited for the process is marked ; a process which + is blocked trying to exit is marked ; _P_s makes an + educated guess as to the file name and arguments given when + the process was created by examining memory or the swap + area. The method is inherently somewhat unreliable and in + any event a process is entitled to destroy this information, + so the names cannot be counted on too much. + +FFIILLEESS + /vmunix system namelist + /dev/kmem kernel memory + /dev/drum swap device + /vmcore core file + /dev searched to find swap device and tty names + /etc/psdatabase system namelist, device, and wait channel + information + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + kill(1), w(1) + +BBUUGGSS + Things can change while _p_s is running; the picture it gives + is only a close approximation to reality. + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 March 10, 1988 4 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/ptx.0 b/usr/man/cat1/ptx.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..afcecda40f --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/ptx.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +PTX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PTX(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + ptx - permuted index + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ppttxx [ option ] ... [ input [ output ] ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _P_t_x generates a permuted index to file _i_n_p_u_t on file _o_u_t_p_u_t + (standard input and output default). It has three phases: + the first does the permutation, generating one line for each + keyword in an input line. The keyword is rotated to the + front. The permuted file is then sorted. Finally, the + sorted lines are rotated so the keyword comes at the middle + of the page. _P_t_x produces output in the form: + + .xx "tail" "before keyword" "keyword and after" "head" + + where .xx may be an _n_r_o_f_f or _t_r_o_f_f(1) macro for user-defined + formatting. The _b_e_f_o_r_e _k_e_y_w_o_r_d and _k_e_y_w_o_r_d _a_n_d _a_f_t_e_r fields + incorporate as much of the line as will fit around the key- + word when it is printed at the middle of the page. _T_a_i_l and + _h_e_a_d, at least one of which is an empty string "", are + wrapped-around pieces small enough to fit in the unused + space at the opposite end of the line. When original text + must be discarded, `/' marks the spot. + + The following options can be applied: + + --ff Fold upper and lower case letters for sorting. + + --tt Prepare the output for the phototypesetter; the default + line length is 100 characters. + + --ww _n Use the next argument, _n, as the width of the output + line. The default line length is 72 characters. + + --gg _n Use the next argument, _n, as the number of characters + to allow for each gap among the four parts of the line + as finally printed. The default gap is 3 characters. + + --oo only + Use as keywords only the words given in the _o_n_l_y file. + + --ii ignore + Do not use as keywords any words given in the _i_g_n_o_r_e + file. If the --ii and --oo options are missing, use + /_u_s_r/_l_i_b/_e_i_g_n as the _i_g_n_o_r_e file. + + --bb break + Use the characters in the _b_r_e_a_k file to separate words. + In any case, tab, newline, and space characters are + always used as break characters. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +PTX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PTX(1) + + + + --rr Take any leading nonblank characters of each input line + to be a reference identifier (as to a page or chapter) + separate from the text of the line. Attach that iden- + tifier as a 5th field on each output line. + + The index for this manual was generated using _p_t_x. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/bin/sort + /usr/lib/eign + +BBUUGGSS + Line length counts do not account for overstriking or pro- + portional spacing. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/pwd.0 b/usr/man/cat1/pwd.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b8a671fc12 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/pwd.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +PWD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PWD(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + pwd - working directory name + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ppwwdd + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _P_w_d prints the pathname of the working (current) directory. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + cd(1), csh(1), getwd(3) + +BBUUGGSS + In _c_s_h(1) the command _d_i_r_s is always faster (although it can + give a different answer in the rare case that the current + directory or a containing directory was moved after the + shell descended into it). + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/px.0 b/usr/man/cat1/px.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a809cf7d8a --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/px.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +PX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PX(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + px - Pascal interpreter + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ppxx [ obj [ argument ... ] ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _P_x interprets the abstract machine code generated by _p_i. The + first argument is the file to be interpreted, and defaults + to _o_b_j; remaining arguments are available to the Pascal pro- + gram using the built-ins _a_r_g_v and _a_r_g_c. _P_x is also invoked + by _p_i_x when running `load and go'. + + If the program terminates abnormally an error message and a + control flow backtrace are printed. The number of state- + ments executed and total execution time are printed after + normal termination. The pp option of _p_i suppresses all of + this except the message indicating the cause of abnormal + termination. + +FFIILLEESS + obj default object file + pmon.out profile data file + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + Berkeley Pascal User's Manual + pi(1), pix(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Most run-time error messages are self-explanatory. Some of + the more unusual ones are: + + Reference to an inactive file + A file other than _i_n_p_u_t or _o_u_t_p_u_t was used before a + call to _r_e_s_e_t or _r_e_w_r_i_t_e. + + Statement count limit exceeded + The limit of 500,000 executed statements (which + prevents excessive looping or recursion) has been + exceeded. + + Bad data found on integer read + Bad data found on real read + Usually, non-numeric input was found for a number. + For reals, Pascal requires digits before and after the + decimal point so that numbers like `.1' or `21.' evoke + the second diagnostic. + + panic: _S_o_m_e _m_e_s_s_a_g_e + Indicates an internal inconsistency detected in _p_x + probably due to a Pascal system bug. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 1 + + + + + + +PX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PX(1) + + + +AAUUTTHHOORRSS + Charles B. Haley, William Joy, and Ken Thompson + VAX-11 version by Kirk McKusick + +BBUUGGSS + Post-mortem traceback is not limited; infinite recursion + leads to almost infinite traceback. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/pxp.0 b/usr/man/cat1/pxp.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..99fe2210ba --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/pxp.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +PXP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PXP(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + pxp - Pascal execution profiler + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ppxxpp [ --aaccddeeffjjnnssttuuww__ ] [ --2233445566778899 ] [ --zz [ name ... ] ] + name.p + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _P_x_p can be used to obtain execution profiles of Pascal pro- + grams or as a pretty-printer. To produce an execution pro- + file all that is necessary is to translate the program + specifying the zz option to _p_i or _p_i_x, to execute the pro- + gram, and to then issue the command + + ppxxpp --zz name.p + + A reformatted listing is output if none of the cc, tt, or zz + options are specified; thus + + ppxxpp old.p > new.p + + places a pretty-printed version of the program in `old.p' in + the file `new.p'. + + The use of the following options of _p_x_p is discussed in sec- + tions 2.6, 5.4, 5.5 and 5.10 of the _B_e_r_k_e_l_e_y _P_a_s_c_a_l _U_s_e_r'_s + _M_a_n_u_a_l. + + --aa Print the bodies of all procedures and functions in + the profile; even those which were never executed. + + --cc Extract profile data from the file _c_o_r_e. + + --dd Include declaration parts in a profile. + + --ee Eliminate iinncclluuddee directives when reformatting a file; + the iinncclluuddee is replaced by the reformatted contents of + the specified file. + + --ff Fully parenthesize expressions. + + --jj Left justify all procedures and functions. + + --nn Eject a new page as each file is included; in pro- + files, print a blank line at the top of the page. + + --ss Strip comments from the input text. + + --tt Print a table summarizing pprroocceedduurree and ffuunnccttiioonn call + counts. + + --uu Card image mode; only the first 72 characters of input + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +PXP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PXP(1) + + + + lines are used. + + --ww Suppress warning diagnostics. + + --zz Generate an execution profile. If no _n_a_m_es, are given + the profile is of the entire program. If a list of + names is given, then only any specified pprroocceedduurrees or + ffuunnccttiioonns and the contents of any specified iinncclluuddee + files will appear in the profile. + + --__ Underline keywords. + + --_d With _d a digit, 2 <_ _d <_ 9, causes _p_x_p to use _d spaces + as the basic indenting unit. The default is 4. + +FFIILLEESS + name.p input file + name.i include file(s) + pmon.out profile data + core profile data source with --cc + /usr/lib/how_pxp information on basic usage + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + Berkeley Pascal User's Manual + pi(1), px(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + For a basic explanation do + + ppxxpp + + Error diagnostics include `No profile data in file' with the + cc option if the zz option was not enabled to _p_i; `Not a Pas- + cal system core file' if the core is not from a _p_x execu- + tion; `Program and count data do not correspond' if the pro- + gram was changed after compilation, before profiling; or if + the wrong program is specified. + +AAUUTTHHOORR + William Joy + +BBUUGGSS + Does not place multiple statements per line. + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/pxref.0 b/usr/man/cat1/pxref.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3ba1c57fea --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/pxref.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +PXREF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PXREF(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + pxref - Pascal cross-reference program + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ppxxrreeff [ -- ] name + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _P_x_r_e_f makes a line numbered listing and a cross-reference of + identifier usage for the program in _n_a_m_e. The optional `--' + argument suppresses the listing. The keywords ggoottoo and + llaabbeell are treated as identifiers for the purpose of the + cross-reference. IInncclluuddee directives are not processed, but + cause the placement of an entry indexed by `#include' in the + cross-reference. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + Berkeley Pascal User's Manual + +AAUUTTHHOORR + Niklaus Wirth + +BBUUGGSS + Identifiers are trimmed to 10 characters. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/quota.0 b/usr/man/cat1/quota.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..33b52230e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/quota.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +QUOTA(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual QUOTA(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + quota - display disc usage and limits + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + qquuoottaa [ --qqvv ] [ user ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _Q_u_o_t_a displays users' disc usage and limits. Only the + super-user may use the optional _u_s_e_r argument to view the + limits of users other than himself. + + The --qq flag prints a more terse message, containing only + information on file systems where usage is over quota. + + If a --vv flag is supplied, _q_u_o_t_a will also display user's + quotas on file systems where no storage is allocated. + + _Q_u_o_t_a reports only on file systems which have disc quotas. + If _q_u_o_t_a exits with a non-zero status, one or more file sys- + tems are over quota. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + quota(2), quotaon(8) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 July 9, 1988 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/ranlib.0 b/usr/man/cat1/ranlib.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4b22d426b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/ranlib.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +RANLIB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RANLIB(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + ranlib - convert archives to random libraries + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + rraannlliibb [ --tt ] archive ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _R_a_n_l_i_b converts each _a_r_c_h_i_v_e to a form which the loader can + load more rapidly. _R_a_n_l_i_b does this by adding a table of + contents called ____..SSYYMMDDEEFF to the beginning of the archive. + _R_a_n_l_i_b uses _a_r(1) to reconstruct the archive, so that suffi- + cient temporary file space must be available in the file + system which contains the current directory. + + If given the --tt option, ranlib only "touches" the archives + and does not modify them. This is useful after copying an + archive or using the --tt option of _m_a_k_e(1) in order to avoid + having _l_d(1) complain about an "out of date" symbol table. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + ld(1), ar(1), lorder(1), make(1) + +BBUUGGSS + Because generation of a library by _a_r and randomization of + the library by _r_a_n_l_i_b are separate processes, phase errors + are possible. The loader, _l_d, warns when the modification + date of a library is more recent than the creation date of + its dictionary; but this means that you get the warning + even if you only copy the library. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 3, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/ratfor.0 b/usr/man/cat1/ratfor.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..756b5d02da --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/ratfor.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +RATFOR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RATFOR(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + ratfor - rational Fortran dialect + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + rraattffoorr [ option ... ] [ filename ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _R_a_t_f_o_r converts a rational dialect of Fortran into ordinary + irrational Fortran. _R_a_t_f_o_r provides control flow constructs + essentially identical to those in C: + + statement grouping: + { statement; statement; statement } + + decision-making: + if (condition) statement [ else statement ] + switch (integer value) { + case integer: statement + ... + [ default: ] statement + } + + loops: + while (condition) statement + for (expression; condition; expression) statement + do limits statement + repeat statement [ until (condition) ] + break + next + + and some syntactic sugar to make programs easier to read and write: + + free form input: + multiple statements/line; automatic continuation + + comments: + # this is a comment + + translation of relationals: + >, >=, etc., become .GT., .GE., etc. + + return (expression) + returns expression to caller from function + + define: + define name replacement + + include: + include filename + + _R_a_t_f_o_r is best used with _f_7_7(1). + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +RATFOR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RATFOR(1) + + + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + f77(1) + B. W. Kernighan and P. J. Plauger, _S_o_f_t_w_a_r_e _T_o_o_l_s, Addison- + Wesley, 1976. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/rcp.0 b/usr/man/cat1/rcp.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4bca4e1076 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/rcp.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +RCP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual RCP(1C) + + + +NNAAMMEE + rcp - remote file copy + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + rrccpp [ --pp ] file1 file2 + rrccpp [ --pp ] [ --rr ] file ... directory + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _R_c_p copies files between machines. Each _f_i_l_e or _d_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y + argument is either a remote file name of the form + ``rhost:path'', or a local file name (containing no `:' + characters, or a `/' before any `:'s). + + If the --rr option is specified and any of the source files + are directories, _r_c_p copies each subtree rooted at that + name; in this case the destination must be a directory. + + By default, the mode and owner of _f_i_l_e_2 are preserved if it + already existed; otherwise the mode of the source file modi- + fied by the _u_m_a_s_k(2) on the destination host is used. The + --pp option causes _r_c_p to attempt to preserve (duplicate) in + its copies the modification times and modes of the source + files, ignoring the _u_m_a_s_k. + + If _p_a_t_h is not a full path name, it is interpreted relative + to your login directory on _r_h_o_s_t. A _p_a_t_h on a remote host + may be quoted (using \, ", or ') so that the metacharacters + are interpreted remotely. + + _R_c_p does not prompt for passwords; your current local user + name must exist on _r_h_o_s_t and allow remote command execution + via _r_s_h(1C). + + _R_c_p handles third party copies, where neither source nor + target files are on the current machine. Hostnames may also + take the form ``rname@rhost'' to use _r_n_a_m_e rather than the + current user name on the remote host. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + cp(1), ftp(1C), rsh(1C), rlogin(1C) + +BBUUGGSS + Doesn't detect all cases where the target of a copy might be + a file in cases where only a directory should be legal. + + Is confused by any output generated by commands in a .login, + .profile, or .cshrc file on the remote host. + + The destination user and hostname may have to be specified + as ``rhost.rname'' when the destination machine is running + the 4.2BSD version of _r_c_p. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 16, 1987 1 + + + + + + +RCP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual RCP(1C) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 16, 1987 2 + + + + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/rdist.0 b/usr/man/cat1/rdist.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fdd16727e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/rdist.0 @@ -0,0 +1,396 @@ + + + +RDIST(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RDIST(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + rdist - remote file distribution program + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + rrddiisstt [ -nqbRhivwy ] [ -f distfile ] [ -d var=value ] [ -m + host ] [ name ... ] + + rrddiisstt [ -nqbRhivwy ] -c name ... [login@]host[:dest] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _R_d_i_s_t is a program to maintain identical copies of files + over multiple hosts. It preserves the owner, group, mode, + and mtime of files if possible and can update programs that + are executing. _R_d_i_s_t reads commands from _d_i_s_t_f_i_l_e to direct + the updating of files and/or directories. If _d_i_s_t_f_i_l_e is + `-', the standard input is used. If no --ff option is + present, the program looks first for `distfile', then `Dist- + file' to use as the input. If no names are specified on the + command line, _r_d_i_s_t will update all of the files and direc- + tories listed in _d_i_s_t_f_i_l_e. Otherwise, the argument is taken + to be the name of a file to be updated or the label of a + command to execute. If label and file names conflict, it is + assumed to be a label. These may be used together to update + specific files using specific commands. + + The --cc option forces _r_d_i_s_t to interpret the remaining argu- + ments as a small _d_i_s_t_f_i_l_e. The equivalent distfile is as + follows. + + ( _n_a_m_e ... ) -> [_l_o_g_i_n@]_h_o_s_t + install [_d_e_s_t] ; + + + Other options: + + --dd Define _v_a_r to have _v_a_l_u_e. The --dd option is used to + define or override variable definitions in the _d_i_s_t_- + _f_i_l_e. _V_a_l_u_e can be the empty string, one name, or a + list of names surrounded by parentheses and separated + by tabs and/or spaces. + + --mm Limit which machines are to be updated. Multiple --mm + arguments can be given to limit updates to a subset of + the hosts listed the _d_i_s_t_f_i_l_e. + + --nn Print the commands without executing them. This option + is useful for debugging _d_i_s_t_f_i_l_e. + + --qq Quiet mode. Files that are being modified are normally + printed on standard output. The --qq option suppresses + this. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 13, 1986 1 + + + + + + +RDIST(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RDIST(1) + + + + --RR Remove extraneous files. If a directory is being + updated, any files that exist on the remote host that + do not exist in the master directory are removed. This + is useful for maintaining truely identical copies of + directories. + + --hh Follow symbolic links. Copy the file that the link + points to rather than the link itself. + + --ii Ignore unresolved links. _R_d_i_s_t will normally try to + maintain the link structure of files being transfered + and warn the user if all the links cannot be found. + + --vv Verify that the files are up to date on all the hosts. + Any files that are out of date will be displayed but no + files will be changed nor any mail sent. + + --ww Whole mode. The whole file name is appended to the des- + tination directory name. Normally, only the last com- + ponent of a name is used when renaming files. This + will preserve the directory structure of the files + being copied instead of flattening the directory struc- + ture. For example, renaming a list of files such as ( + dir1/f1 dir2/f2 ) to dir3 would create files + dir3/dir1/f1 and dir3/dir2/f2 instead of dir3/f1 and + dir3/f2. + + --yy Younger mode. Files are normally updated if their _m_t_i_m_e + and _s_i_z_e (see _s_t_a_t(2)) disagree. The --yy option causes + _r_d_i_s_t not to update files that are younger than the + master copy. This can be used to prevent newer copies + on other hosts from being replaced. A warning message + is printed for files which are newer than the master + copy. + + --bb Binary comparison. Perform a binary comparison and + update files if they differ rather than comparing dates + and sizes. + + _D_i_s_t_f_i_l_e contains a sequence of entries that specify the + files to be copied, the destination hosts, and what opera- + tions to perform to do the updating. Each entry has one of + the following formats. + + `=' + [ label: ] `->' + [ label: ] `::' + + The first format is used for defining variables. The second + format is used for distributing files to other hosts. The + third format is used for making lists of files that have + been changed since some given date. The _s_o_u_r_c_e _l_i_s_t + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 13, 1986 2 + + + + + + +RDIST(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RDIST(1) + + + + specifies a list of files and/or directories on the local + host which are to be used as the master copy for distribu- + tion. The _d_e_s_t_i_n_a_t_i_o_n _l_i_s_t is the list of hosts to which + these files are to be copied. Each file in the source list + is added to a list of changes if the file is out of date on + the host which is being updated (second format) or the file + is newer than the time stamp file (third format). + + Labels are optional. They are used to identify a command for + partial updates. + + Newlines, tabs, and blanks are only used as separators and + are otherwise ignored. Comments begin with `#' and end with + a newline. + + Variables to be expanded begin with `$' followed by one + character or a name enclosed in curly braces (see the exam- + ples at the end). + + The source and destination lists have the following format: + + + or + `(' `)' + + The shell meta-characters `[', `]', `{', `}', `*', and `?' + are recognized and expanded (on the local host only) in the + same way as _c_s_h(1). They can be escaped with a backslash. + The `~' character is also expanded in the same way as _c_s_h + but is expanded separately on the local and destination + hosts. When the --ww option is used with a file name that + begins with `~', everything except the home directory is + appended to the destination name. File names which do not + begin with `/' or `~' use the destination user's home direc- + tory as the root directory for the rest of the file name. + + The command list consists of zero or more commands of the + following format. + + `install' opt_dest_name `;' + `notify' `;' + `except' `;' + `except_pat' `;' + `special' string `;' + + + The _i_n_s_t_a_l_l command is used to copy out of date files and/or + directories. Each source file is copied to each host in the + destination list. Directories are recursively copied in the + same way. _O_p_t__d_e_s_t__n_a_m_e is an optional parameter to rename + files. If no _i_n_s_t_a_l_l command appears in the command list or + the destination name is not specified, the source file name + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 13, 1986 3 + + + + + + +RDIST(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RDIST(1) + + + + is used. Directories in the path name will be created if + they do not exist on the remote host. To help prevent + disasters, a non-empty directory on a target host will never + be replaced with a regular file or a symbolic link. How- + ever, under the `-R' option a non-empty directory will be + removed if the corresponding filename is completely absent + on the master host. The _o_p_t_i_o_n_s are `-R', `-h', `-i', `-v', + `-w', `-y', and `-b' and have the same semantics as options + on the command line except they only apply to the files in + the source list. The login name used on the destination + host is the same as the local host unless the destination + name is of the format ``login@host". + + The _n_o_t_i_f_y command is used to mail the list of files updated + (and any errors that may have occured) to the listed names. + If no `@' appears in the name, the destination host is + appended to the name (e.g., name1@host, name2@host, ...). + + The _e_x_c_e_p_t command is used to update all of the files in the + source list eexxcceepptt for the files listed in _n_a_m_e _l_i_s_t. This + is usually used to copy everything in a directory except + certain files. + + The _e_x_c_e_p_t__p_a_t command is like the _e_x_c_e_p_t command except + that _p_a_t_t_e_r_n _l_i_s_t is a list of regular expressions (see + _e_d(1) for details). If one of the patterns matches some + string within a file name, that file will be ignored. Note + that since `\' is a quote character, it must be doubled to + become part of the regular expression. Variables are + expanded in _p_a_t_t_e_r_n _l_i_s_t but not shell file pattern matching + characters. To include a `$', it must be escaped with `\'. + + The _s_p_e_c_i_a_l command is used to specify _s_h(1) commands that + are to be executed on the remote host after the file in _n_a_m_e + _l_i_s_t is updated or installed. If the _n_a_m_e _l_i_s_t is omitted + then the shell commands will be executed for every file + updated or installed. The shell variable `FILE' is set to + the current filename before executing the commands in + _s_t_r_i_n_g. _S_t_r_i_n_g starts and ends with `"' and can cross mul- + tiple lines in _d_i_s_t_f_i_l_e. Multiple commands to the shell + should be separated by `;'. Commands are executed in the + user's home directory on the host being updated. The _s_p_e_- + _c_i_a_l command can be used to rebuild private databases, etc. + after a program has been updated. + + The following is a small example. + + HOSTS = ( matisse root@arpa) + + FILES = ( /bin /lib /usr/bin /usr/games + /usr/include/{*.h,{stand,sys,vax*,pascal,machine}/*.h} + /usr/lib /usr/man/man? /usr/ucb /usr/local/rdist ) + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 13, 1986 4 + + + + + + +RDIST(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RDIST(1) + + + + EXLIB = ( Mail.rc aliases aliases.dir aliases.pag crontab dshrc + sendmail.cf sendmail.fc sendmail.hf sendmail.st uucp vfont ) + + ${FILES} -> ${HOSTS} + install -R ; + except /usr/lib/${EXLIB} ; + except /usr/games/lib ; + special /usr/lib/sendmail "/usr/lib/sendmail -bz" ; + + srcs: + /usr/src/bin -> arpa + except_pat ( \\.o\$ /SCCS\$ ) ; + + IMAGEN = (ips dviimp catdvi) + + imagen: + /usr/local/${IMAGEN} -> arpa + install /usr/local/lib ; + notify ralph ; + + ${FILES} :: stamp.cory + notify root@cory ; + + +FFIILLEESS + distfile input command file + /tmp/rdist* temporary file for update lists + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + sh(1), csh(1), stat(2) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + A complaint about mismatch of rdist version numbers may + really stem from some problem with starting your shell, + e.g., you are in too many groups. + +BBUUGGSS + Source files must reside on the local host where rdist is + executed. + + There is no easy way to have a special command executed + after all files in a directory have been updated. + + Variable expansion only works for name lists; there should + be a general macro facility. + + _R_d_i_s_t aborts on files which have a negative mtime (before + Jan 1, 1970). + + There should be a `force' option to allow replacement of + non-empty directories by regular files or symlinks. A means + of updating file modes and owners of otherwise identical + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 13, 1986 5 + + + + + + +RDIST(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RDIST(1) + + + + files is also needed. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 13, 1986 6 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/refer.0 b/usr/man/cat1/refer.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1ed94477dc --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/refer.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +REFER(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual REFER(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + refer - find and insert literature references in documents + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + rreeffeerr [ --aa ] [ --bb ] [ --cc ] [ --ee ] [ --ff_n ] [ --kk_x ] [ --ll_m,_n ] + [ --nn ] [ --pp bib ] [ --ss_k_e_y_s ] [ --BB_l._m ] [ --PP ] [ --SS ] [ file + ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _R_e_f_e_r is a preprocessor for _n_r_o_f_f or _t_r_o_f_f(1) that finds and + formats references for footnotes or endnotes. It is also + the base for a series of programs designed to index, search, + sort, and print stand-alone bibliographies, or other data + entered in the appropriate form. + + Given an incomplete citation with sufficiently precise key- + words, _r_e_f_e_r will search a bibliographic database for refer- + ences containing these keywords anywhere in the title, + author, journal, etc. The input file (or standard input) is + copied to standard output, except for lines between .[ and + .] delimiters, which are assumed to contain keywords, and + are replaced by information from the bibliographic database. + The user may also search different databases, override par- + ticular fields, or add new fields. The reference data, from + whatever source, are assigned to a set of _t_r_o_f_f strings. + Macro packages such as _m_s(7) print the finished reference + text from these strings. By default references are flagged + by footnote numbers. + + The following options are available: + + --aa_n Reverse the first _n author names (Jones, J. A. instead + of J. A. Jones). If _n is omitted all author names are + reversed. + + --bb Bare mode: do not put any flags in text (neither + numbers nor labels). + + --cc_k_e_y_s + Capitalize (with CAPS SMALL CAPS) the fields whose + key-letters are in _k_e_y_s. + + --ee Instead of leaving the references where encountered, + accumulate them until a sequence of the form + .[ + $LIST$ + .] + is encountered, and then write out all references col- + lected so far. Collapse references to same source. + + --ff_n Set the footnote number to _n instead of the default of + 1 (one). With labels rather than numbers, this flag + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 1 + + + + + + +REFER(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual REFER(1) + + + + is a no-op. + + --kk_x Instead of numbering references, use labels as speci- + fied in a reference data line beginning %_x; by default + _x is LL.. + + --ll_m,,_n Instead of numbering references, use labels made from + the senior author's last name and the year of publica- + tion. Only the first _m letters of the last name and + the last _n digits of the date are used. If either _m + or _n is omitted the entire name or date respectively + is used. + + --nn Do not search the default file /usr/dict/papers/Ind. + If there is a REFER environment variable, the speci- + fied file will be searched instead of the default + file; in this case the --nn flag has no effect. + + --pp _b_i_b + Take the next argument _b_i_b as a file of references to + be searched. The default file is searched last. + + --ss_k_e_y_s + Sort references by fields whose key-letters are in the + _k_e_y_s string; permute reference numbers in text accord- + ingly. Implies --ee. The key-letters in _k_e_y_s may be + followed by a number to indicate how many such fields + are used, with ++ taken as a very large number. The + default is AADD which sorts on the senior author and + then date; to sort, for example, on all authors and + then title, use --ssAA++TT. + + --BB_l._m Bibliography mode. Take a file composed of records + separated by blank lines, and turn them into _t_r_o_f_f + input. Label _l will be turned into the macro ._m with + _l defaulting to %%XX and ._m defaulting to ..AAPP (annota- + tion paragraph). + + --PP Place punctuation marks .,:;?! after the reference + signal, rather than before. (Periods and commas used + to be done with strings.) + + --SS Produce references in the Natural or Social Science + format. + + To use your own references, put them in the format described + below. They can be searched more rapidly by running _i_n_d_x_- + _b_i_b(1) on them before using _r_e_f_e_r; failure to index results + in a linear search. When _r_e_f_e_r is used with the _e_q_n, _n_e_q_n + or _t_b_l preprocessors _r_e_f_e_r should be first, to minimize the + volume of data passed through pipes. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 2 + + + + + + +REFER(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual REFER(1) + + + + The _r_e_f_e_r preprocessor and associated programs expect input + from a file of references composed of records separated by + blank lines. A record is a set of lines (fields), each con- + taining one kind of information. Fields start on a line + beginning with a ``%'', followed by a key-letter, then a + blank, and finally the contents of the field, and continue + until the next line starting with ``%''. The output order- + ing and formatting of fields is controlled by the macros + specified for _n_r_o_f_f/_t_r_o_f_f (for footnotes and endnotes) or + _r_o_f_f_b_i_b (for stand-alone bibliographies). For a list of the + most common key-letters and their corresponding fields, see + _a_d_d_b_i_b(1). An example of a _r_e_f_e_r entry is given below. + +EEXXAAMMPPLLEE + %A M. E. Lesk + %T Some Applications of Inverted Indexes on the UNIX System + %B UNIX Programmer's Manual + %V 2b + %I Bell Laboratories + %C Murray Hill, NJ + %D 1978 + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/dict/papers directory of default publication lists + /usr/lib/refer directory of companion programs + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + addbib(1), sortbib(1), roffbib(1), indxbib(1), lookbib(1) + +AAUUTTHHOORR + Mike Lesk + +BBUUGGSS + Blank spaces at the end of lines in bibliography fields will + cause the records to sort and reverse incorrectly. Sorting + large numbers of references causes a core dump. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/reset.0 b/usr/man/cat1/reset.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..14c6a507ef --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/reset.0 @@ -0,0 +1,396 @@ + + + +TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + tset - terminal dependent initialization + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttsseett [ options ] [ --mm [ident][test baudrate]:type ] ... [ + type ] + + rreesseett [ options ] [ --mm [ident][test baudrate]:type ] ... [ + type ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_s_e_t sets up your terminal when you first log in to a UNIX + system. It does terminal dependent processing such as set- + ting erase and kill characters, setting or resetting delays, + sending any sequences needed to properly initialized the + terminal, and the like. It first determines the _t_y_p_e of + terminal involved, and then does necessary initializations + and mode settings. The type of terminal attached to each + UNIX port is specified in the /_e_t_c/_t_t_y_s(5) database. Type + names for terminals may be found in the _t_e_r_m_c_a_p(5) database. + If a port is not wired permanently to a specific terminal + (not hardwired) it will be given an appropriate generic + identifier such as _d_i_a_l_u_p. + + In the case where no arguments are specified, _t_s_e_t simply + reads the terminal type out of the environment variable TERM + and re-initializes the terminal. The rest of this manual + concerns itself with mode and environment initialization, + typically done once at login, and options used at initiali- + zation time to determine the terminal type and set up termi- + nal modes. + + When used in a startup script (._p_r_o_f_i_l_e for _s_h(1) users or + ._l_o_g_i_n for _c_s_h(1) users) it is desirable to give information + about the type of terminal you will usually use on ports + which are not hardwired. These ports are identified in + /_e_t_c/_t_t_y_s as _d_i_a_l_u_p or _p_l_u_g_b_o_a_r_d or _a_r_p_a_n_e_t, etc. To + specify what terminal type you usually use on these ports, + the --mm (map) option flag is followed by the appropriate port + type identifier, an optional baud rate specification, and + the terminal type. (The effect is to ``map'' from some con- + ditions to a terminal type, that is, to tell _t_s_e_t ``If I'm + on this kind of port, guess that I'm on that kind of termi- + nal''.) If more than one mapping is specified, the first + applicable mapping prevails. A missing port type identifier + matches all identifiers. Any of the alternate generic names + given in _t_e_r_m_c_a_p may be used for the identifier. + + A _b_a_u_d_r_a_t_e is specified as with _s_t_t_y(1), and is compared + with the speed of the diagnostic output (which should be the + control terminal). The baud rate _t_e_s_t may be any combina- + tion of: >>, @@, <<, and !!; @@ means ``at'' and !! inverts the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1 + + + + + + +TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1) + + + + sense of the test. To avoid problems with metacharacters, + it is best to place the entire argument to --mm within ``''' + characters; users of _c_s_h(1) must also put a ``\'' before any + ``!'' used here. + + Thus + + tset -m 'dialup>300:adm3a' -m dialup:dw2 -m + 'plugboard:?adm3a' + + causes the terminal type to be set to an _a_d_m_3_a if the port + in use is a dialup at a speed greater than 300 baud; to a + _d_w_2 if the port is (otherwise) a dialup (i.e. at 300 baud or + less). (NNOOTTEE:: the examples given here appear to take up + more than one line, for text processing reasons. When you + type in real _t_s_e_t commands, you must enter them entirely on + one line.) If the _t_y_p_e finally determined by _t_s_e_t begins + with a question mark, the user is asked if s/he really wants + that type. A null response means to use that type; other- + wise, another type can be entered which will be used + instead. Thus, in the above case, the user will be queried + on a plugboard port as to whether they are actually using an + _a_d_m_3_a. + + If no mapping applies and a final _t_y_p_e option, not preceded + by a --mm, is given on the command line then that type is + used; otherwise the type found in the /_e_t_c/_t_t_y_s database + will be taken to be the terminal type. This should always + be the case for hardwired ports. + + It is usually desirable to return the terminal type, as + finally determined by _t_s_e_t, and information about the + terminal's capabilities to a shell's environment. This can + be done using the -- option; using the Bourne shell, _s_h(1): + + export TERM; TERM=`tset - _o_p_t_i_o_n_s...` + + or using the C shell, _c_s_h(1): + + setenv TERM `tset - _o_p_t_i_o_n_s...` + + With _c_s_h it is preferable to use the following command in + your .login file to initialize the TERM and TERMCAP environ- + ment variables at the same time. + + eval `tset -s _o_p_t_i_o_n_s...` + + It is also convenient to make an alias in your .cshrc: + + alias tset 'eval `tset -s \!*`' + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2 + + + + + + +TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1) + + + + This allows the command: + + tset 2621 + + to be invoked at any time to set the terminal and environ- + ment. NNoottee ttoo BBoouurrnnee SShheellll uusseerrss:: It is nnoott possible to get + this aliasing effect with a shell script, because shell + scripts cannot set the environment of their parent. (If a + process could set its parent's environment, none of this + nonsense would be necessary in the first place.) + + These commands cause _t_s_e_t to place the name of your terminal + in the variable TERM in the environment; see _e_n_v_i_r_o_n(7). + + Once the terminal type is known, _t_s_e_t engages in terminal + driver mode setting. This normally involves sending an ini- + tialization sequence to the terminal, setting the single + character erase (and optionally the line-kill (full line + erase)) characters, and setting special character delays. + Tab and newline expansion are turned off during transmission + of the terminal initialization sequence. + + On terminals that can backspace but not overstrike (such as + a CRT), and when the erase character is the default erase + character (`#' on standard systems), the erase character is + changed to BACKSPACE (Control-H). + + The options are: + + --ee_c set the erase character to be the named character _c on + all terminals, the default being the backspace charac- + ter on the terminal, usually ^H. The character _c can + either be typed directly, or entered using the hat + notation used here. + + --kk_c is similar to --ee but for the line kill character rather + than the erase character; _c defaults to ^X (for purely + historical reasons). The kill characters is left alone + if --kk is not specified. The hat notation can also be + used for this option. + + --ii_c is similar to --ee but for the interrupt character rather + than the erase character; _c defaults to ^C. The hat + notation can also be used for this option. + + -- The name of the terminal finally decided upon is output + on the standard output. This is intended to be cap- + tured by the shell and placed in the environment vari- + able TERM. + + --ss Print the sequence of _c_s_h commands to initialize the + environment variables TERM and TERMCAP based on the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3 + + + + + + +TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1) + + + + name of the terminal finally decided upon. + + --nn On systems with the Berkeley 4BSD tty driver, specifies + that the new tty driver modes should be initialized for + this terminal. For a CRT, the CRTERASE and CRTKILL + modes are set only if the baud rate is 1200 or greater. + See tty(4) for more detail. + + --II suppresses transmitting terminal initialization + strings. + + --QQ suppresses printing the ``Erase set to'' and ``Kill set + to'' messages. + + If ttsseett is invoked as rreesseett, it will set cooked and echo + modes, turn off cbreak and raw modes, turn on newline trans- + lation, and restore special characters to a sensible state + before any terminal dependent processing is done. Any spe- + cial character that is found to be NULL or ``-1'' is reset + to its default value. All arguments to _t_s_e_t may be used + with reset. + + This is most useful after a program dies leaving a terminal + in a funny state. You may have to type ``reset'' to + get it to work since may not work in this state. Often + none of this will echo. + +EEXXAAMMPPLLEESS + These examples all assume the Bourne shell and use the - + option. If you use _c_s_h, use one of the variations described + above. Note that a typical use of _t_s_e_t in a .profile or + .login will also use the --ee and --kk options, and often the --nn + or --QQ options as well. These options have not been included + here to keep the examples small. (NNOOTTEE:: some of the exam- + ples given here appear to take up more than one line, for + text processing reasons. When you type in real _t_s_e_t com- + mands, you must enter them entirely on one line.) + + At the moment, you are on a 2621. This is suitable for typ- + ing by hand but not for a .profile, unless you are _a_l_w_a_y_s on + a 2621. + + export TERM; TERM=`tset - 2621` + + You have an h19 at home which you dial up on, but your + office terminal is hardwired and known in /etc/ttys. + + export TERM; TERM=`tset - -m dialup:h19` + + You have a switch which connects everything to everything, + making it nearly impossible to key on what port you are com- + ing in on. You use a vt100 in your office at 9600 baud, and + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4 + + + + + + +TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1) + + + + dial up to switch ports at 1200 baud from home on a 2621. + Sometimes you use someone elses terminal at work, so you + want it to ask you to make sure what terminal type you have + at high speeds, but at 1200 baud you are always on a 2621. + Note the placement of the question mark, and the quotes to + protect the greater than and question mark from interpreta- + tion by the shell. + + export TERM; TERM=`tset - -m 'switch>1200:?vt100' -m + 'switch<=1200:2621' + + All of the above entries will fall back on the terminal type + specified in /_e_t_c/_t_t_y_s if none of the conditions hold. The + following entry is appropriate if you always dial up, always + at the same baud rate, on many different kinds of terminals. + Your most common terminal is an adm3a. It always asks you + what kind of terminal you are on, defaulting to adm3a. + + export TERM; TERM=`tset - ?adm3a` + + If the file /_e_t_c/_t_t_y_s is not properly installed and you want + to key entirely on the baud rate, the following can be used: + + export TERM; TERM=`tset - -m '>1200:vt100' 2621` + + Here is a fancy example to illustrate the power of _t_s_e_t and + to hopelessly confuse anyone who has made it this far. You + dial up at 1200 baud or less on a concept100, sometimes over + switch ports and sometimes over regular dialups. You use + various terminals at speeds higher than 1200 over switch + ports, most often the terminal in your office, which is a + vt100. However, sometimes you log in from the university + you used to go to, over the ARPANET; in this case you are on + an ALTO emulating a dm2500. You also often log in on vari- + ous hardwired ports, such as the console, all of which are + properly entered in /_e_t_c/_t_t_y_s. You want your erase charac- + ter set to control H, your kill character set to control U, + and don't want _t_s_e_t to print the ``Erase set to Backspace, + Kill set to Control U'' message. + + export TERM; TERM=`tset -e -k^U -Q - -m + 'switch<=1200:concept100' -m 'switch:?vt100' -m + dialup:concept100 -m arpanet:dm2500` + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/ttys port name to terminal type mapping database + /etc/termcap terminal capability database + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + csh(1), sh(1), stty(1), ttys(5), termcap(5), environ(7) + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 5 + + + + + + +TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1) + + + +BBUUGGSS + The _t_s_e_t command is one of the first commands a user must + master when getting started on a UNIX system. Unfor- + tunately, it is one of the most complex, largely because of + the extra effort the user must go through to get the + environment of the login shell set. Something needs to be + done to make all this simpler, either the _l_o_g_i_n(1) program + should do this stuff, or a default shell alias should be + made, or a way to set the environment of the parent should + exist. + + This program can't intuit personal choices for erase, inter- + rupt and line kill characters, so it leaves these set to the + local system standards. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 6 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/rev.0 b/usr/man/cat1/rev.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a5ca6102c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/rev.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +REV(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual REV(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + rev - reverse lines of a file + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + rreevv [ file ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _R_e_v copies the named files to the standard output, reversing + the order of characters in every line. If no file is speci- + fied, the standard input is copied. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/rlogin.0 b/usr/man/cat1/rlogin.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..61aef2adc7 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/rlogin.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +RLOGIN(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual RLOGIN(1C) + + + +NNAAMMEE + rlogin - remote login + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + rrllooggiinn rhost [ --ee_c ] [ --88 ] [ --LL ] [ --ll username ] + rhost [ --ee_c ] [ --88 ] [ --LL ] [ --ll username ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _R_l_o_g_i_n connects your terminal on the current local host sys- + tem _l_h_o_s_t to the remote host system _r_h_o_s_t. + + Each host has a file /_e_t_c/_h_o_s_t_s._e_q_u_i_v which contains a list + of _r_h_o_s_t's with which it shares account names. (The host + names must be the standard names as described in _r_s_h(1C).) + When you _r_l_o_g_i_n as the same user on an equivalent host, you + don't need to give a password. Each user may also have a + private equivalence list in a file .rhosts in his login + directory. Each line in this file should contain an _r_h_o_s_t + and a _u_s_e_r_n_a_m_e separated by a space, giving additional cases + where logins without passwords are to be permitted. If the + originating user is not equivalent to the remote user, then + a login and password will be prompted for on the remote + machine as in _l_o_g_i_n(1). To avoid some security problems, + the .rhosts file must be owned by either the remote user or + root. + + The remote terminal type is the same as your local terminal + type (as given in your environment TERM variable). The ter- + minal or window size is also copied to the remote system if + the server supports the option, and changes in size are + reflected as well. All echoing takes place at the remote + site, so that (except for delays) the rlogin is transparent. + Flow control via ^S and ^Q and flushing of input and output + on interrupts are handled properly. The optional argument + --88 allows an eight-bit input data path at all times; other- + wise parity bits are stripped except when the remote side's + stop and start characters are other than ^S/^Q. The argu- + ment --LL allows the rlogin session to be run in litout mode. + A line of the form ``~.'' disconnects from the remote host, + where ``~'' is the escape character. Similarly, the line + ``~^Z'' (where ^Z, control-Z, is the suspend character) will + suspend the rlogin session. Substitution of the delayed- + suspend character (normally ^Y) for the suspend character + suspends the send portion of the rlogin, but allows output + from the remote system. A different escape character may be + specified by the --ee option. There is no space separating + this option flag and the argument character. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + rsh(1C) + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 1 + + + + + + +RLOGIN(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual RLOGIN(1C) + + + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/hosts/* for _r_h_o_s_t version of the command + +BBUUGGSS + More of the environment should be propagated. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/rm.0 b/usr/man/cat1/rm.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bfc1b2f238 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/rm.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +RM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RM(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + rm, rmdir - remove (unlink) files or directories + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + rrmm [ --ff ] [ --rr ] [ --ii ] [ -- ] file ... + + rrmmddiirr dir ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _R_m removes the entries for one or more files from a direc- + tory. If an entry was the last link to the file, the file + is destroyed. Removal of a file requires write permission + in its directory, but neither read nor write permission on + the file itself. + + If a file has no write permission and the standard input is + a terminal, its permissions are printed and a line is read + from the standard input. If that line begins with `y' the + file is deleted, otherwise the file remains. No questions + are asked and no errors are reported when the --ff (force) + option is given. + + If a designated file is a directory, an error comment is + printed unless the optional argument --rr has been used. In + that case, _r_m recursively deletes the entire contents of the + specified directory, and the directory itself. + + If the --ii (interactive) option is in effect, _r_m asks whether + to delete each file, and, under --rr, whether to examine each + directory. + + The null option -- indicates that all the arguments following + it are to be treated as file names. This allows the specif- + ication of file names starting with a minus. + + _R_m_d_i_r removes entries for the named directories, which must + be empty. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + rm(1), unlink(2), rmdir(2) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/rmail.0 b/usr/man/cat1/rmail.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a0856045da --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/rmail.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +RMAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RMAIL(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + rmail - handle remote mail received via uucp + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + rrmmaaiill user ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _R_m_a_i_l interprets incoming mail received via _u_u_c_p(1C), col- + lapsing ``From'' lines in the form generated by _b_i_n_m_a_i_l(1) + into a single line of the form ``return-path!sender'', and + passing the processed mail on to _s_e_n_d_m_a_i_l(8). + + _R_m_a_i_l is explicitly designed for use with _u_u_c_p and _s_e_n_d_m_a_i_l. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + binmail(1), uucp(1C), sendmail(8) + +BBUUGGSS + _R_m_a_i_l should not reside in /bin. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/rmdir.0 b/usr/man/cat1/rmdir.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..594637b496 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/rmdir.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +RMDIR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RMDIR(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + rmdir, rm - remove (unlink) directories or files + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + rrmmddiirr dir ... + + rrmm [ --ff ] [ --rr ] [ --ii ] [ -- ] file ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _R_m_d_i_r removes entries for the named directories, which must + be empty. + + _R_m removes the entries for one or more files from a direc- + tory. If an entry was the last link to the file, the file + is destroyed. Removal of a file requires write permission + in its directory, but neither read nor write permission on + the file itself. + + If a file has no write permission and the standard input is + a terminal, its permissions are printed and a line is read + from the standard input. If that line begins with `y' the + file is deleted, otherwise the file remains. No questions + are asked and no errors are reported when the --ff (force) + option is given. + + If a designated file is a directory, an error comment is + printed unless the optional argument --rr has been used. In + that case, _r_m recursively deletes the entire contents of the + specified directory, and the directory itself. + + If the --ii (interactive) option is in effect, _r_m asks whether + to delete each file, and, under --rr, whether to examine each + directory. + + The null option -- indicates that all the arguments following + it are to be treated as file names. This allows the specif- + ication of file names starting with a minus. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + rm(1), unlink(2), rmdir(2) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/roffbib.0 b/usr/man/cat1/roffbib.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..36fe2bced6 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/roffbib.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +ROFFBIB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ROFFBIB(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + roffbib - run off bibliographic database + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + rrooffffbbiibb [ --ee ] [ --hh ] [ --nn ] [ --oo ] [ --rr ] [ --ss ] [ --TT_t_e_r_m ] + [ --xx ] [ --mm _m_a_c ] [ --VV ] [ --QQ ] [ file ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _R_o_f_f_b_i_b prints out all records in a bibliographic database, + in bibliography format rather than as footnotes or endnotes. + Generally it is used in conjunction with _s_o_r_t_b_i_b: + + sortbib database | roffbib + + _R_o_f_f_b_i_b accepts most of the options understood by _n_r_o_f_f(1), + most importantly the --TT flag to specify terminal type. + + If abstracts or comments are entered following the %X field + key, _r_o_f_f_b_i_b will format them into paragraphs for an anno- + tated bibliography. Several %X fields may be given if + several annotation paragraphs are desired. The --xx flag will + suppress the printing of these abstracts. + + A user-defined set of macros may be specified after the --mm + option. There should be a space between the --mm and the + macro filename. This set of macros will replace the ones + defined in /usr/lib/tmac/tmac.bib. The --VV flag will send + output to the Versatec; the --QQ flag will queue output for + the phototypesetter. + + Four command-line registers control formatting style of the + bibliography, much like the number registers of _m_s(7). The + command-line argument --rrN1 will number the references start- + ing at one (1). The flag --rrV2 will double space the biblio- + graphy, while --rrV1 will double space references but single + space annotation paragraphs. The line length can be changed + from the default 6.5 inches to 6 inches with the --rrL6i argu- + ment, and the page offset can be set from the default of 0 + to one inch by specifying --rrO1i (capital O, not zero). + Note: with the --VV and --QQ flags the default page offset is + already one inch. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/lib/tmac/tmac.bib file of macros used by _n_r_o_f_f/_t_r_o_f_f + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + refer(1), addbib(1), sortbib(1), indxbib(1), lookbib(1) + +BBUUGGSS + Users have to rewrite macros to create customized formats. + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/rsh.0 b/usr/man/cat1/rsh.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ee9886edee --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/rsh.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +RSH(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual RSH(1C) + + + +NNAAMMEE + rsh - remote shell + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + rrsshh host [ --ll username ] [ --nn ] command + host [ --ll username ] [ --nn ] command + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _R_s_h connects to the specified _h_o_s_t, and executes the speci- + fied _c_o_m_m_a_n_d. _R_s_h copies its standard input to the remote + command, the standard output of the remote command to its + standard output, and the standard error of the remote com- + mand to its standard error. Interrupt, quit and terminate + signals are propagated to the remote command; _r_s_h normally + terminates when the remote command does. + + The remote username used is the same as your local username, + unless you specify a different remote name with the --ll + option. This remote name must be equivalent (in the sense + of _r_l_o_g_i_n(1C)) to the originating account; no provision is + made for specifying a password with a command. + + If you omit _c_o_m_m_a_n_d, then instead of executing a single com- + mand, you will be logged in on the remote host using + _r_l_o_g_i_n(1C). + + Shell metacharacters which are not quoted are interpreted on + local machine, while quoted metacharacters are interpreted + on the remote machine. Thus the command + + rsh otherhost cat remotefile >> localfile + + appends the remote file _r_e_m_o_t_e_f_i_l_e to the localfile _l_o_c_a_l_- + _f_i_l_e, while + + rsh otherhost cat remotefile ">>" otherremotefile + + appends _r_e_m_o_t_e_f_i_l_e to _o_t_h_e_r_r_e_m_o_t_e_f_i_l_e. + + Host names are given in the file /etc/hosts. Each host has + one standard name (the first name given in the file), which + is rather long and unambiguous, and optionally one or more + nicknames. The host names for local machines are also com- + mands in the directory /usr/hosts; if you put this directory + in your search path then the rrsshh can be omitted. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/hosts + /usr/hosts/* + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + rlogin(1C) + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +RSH(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual RSH(1C) + + + +BBUUGGSS + If you are using _c_s_h(1) and put a _r_s_h(1C) in the background + without redirecting its input away from the terminal, it + will block even if no reads are posted by the remote com- + mand. If no input is desired you should redirect the input + of _r_s_h to /dev/null using the --nn option. + + You cannot run an interactive command (like _r_o_g_u_e(6) or + _v_i(1)); use _r_l_o_g_i_n(1C). + + Stop signals stop the local _r_s_h process only; this is argu- + ably wrong, but currently hard to fix for reasons too com- + plicated to explain here. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/ruptime.0 b/usr/man/cat1/ruptime.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..96df60a1de --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/ruptime.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +RUPTIME(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual RUPTIME(1C) + + + +NNAAMMEE + ruptime - show host status of local machines + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + rruuppttiimmee [ --aa ] [ --rr ] [ --ll ] [ --tt ] [ --uu ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _R_u_p_t_i_m_e gives a status line like _u_p_t_i_m_e for each machine on + the local network; these are formed from packets broadcast + by each host on the network once a minute. + + Machines for which no status report has been received for 11 + minutes are shown as being down. + + Users idle an hour or more are not counted unless the --aa + flag is given. + + Normally, the listing is sorted by host name. The --ll ,, --tt ,, + and --uu flags specify sorting by load average, uptime, and + number of users, respectively. The --rr flag reverses the + sort order. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/spool/rwho/whod.* data files + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + rwho(1C) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/rwho.0 b/usr/man/cat1/rwho.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..038eac0e03 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/rwho.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +RWHO(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual RWHO(1C) + + + +NNAAMMEE + rwho - who's logged in on local machines + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + rrwwhhoo [ --aa ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + The _r_w_h_o command produces output similar to _w_h_o, but for all + machines on the local network. If no report has been + received from a machine for 5 minutes then _r_w_h_o assumes the + machine is down, and does not report users last known to be + logged into that machine. + + If a users hasn't typed to the system for a minute or more, + then _r_w_h_o reports this idle time. If a user hasn't typed to + the system for an hour or more, then the user will be omit- + ted from the output of _r_w_h_o unless the --aa flag is given. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/spool/rwho/whod.* information about other machines + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + ruptime(1C), rwhod(8C) + +BBUUGGSS + This is unwieldy when the number of machines on the local + net is large. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/sccs.0 b/usr/man/cat1/sccs.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..132a793065 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/sccs.0 @@ -0,0 +1,264 @@ + + + +SCCS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SCCS(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + sccs - front end for the SCCS subsystem + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ssccccss [ --rr ] [ --dd_p_a_t_h ] [ --pp_p_a_t_h ] command [ flags ] [ args ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_c_c_s is a front end to the SCCS programs that helps them + mesh more cleanly with the rest of UNIX. It also includes + the capability to run ``set user id'' to another user to + provide additional protection. + + Basically, _s_c_c_s runs the _c_o_m_m_a_n_d with the specified _f_l_a_g_s + and _a_r_g_s. Each argument is normally modified to be prepended + with ``SCCS/s.''. + + Flags to be interpreted by the _s_c_c_s program must be before + the _c_o_m_m_a_n_d argument. Flags to be passed to the actual SCCS + program must come after the _c_o_m_m_a_n_d argument. These flags + are specific to the command and are discussed in the docu- + mentation for that command. + + Besides the usual SCCS commands, several ``pseudo-commands'' + can be issued. These are: + + edit Equivalent to ``get -e''. + + delget Perform a delta on the named files and then get + new versions. The new versions will have id key- + words expanded, and will not be editable. The -m, + -p, -r, -s, and -y flags will be passed to delta, + and the -b, -c, -e, -i, -k, -l, -s, and -x flags + will be passed to get. + + deledit Equivalent to ``delget'' except that the ``get'' + phase includes the ``-e'' flag. This option is + useful for making a ``checkpoint'' of your current + editing phase. The same flags will be passed to + delta as described above, and all the flags listed + for ``get'' above except -e and -k are passed to + ``edit''. + + create Creates an SCCS file, taking the initial contents + from the file of the same name. Any flags to + ``admin'' are accepted. If the creation is suc- + cessful, the files are renamed with a comma on the + front. These should be removed when you are con- + vinced that the SCCS files have been created suc- + cessfully. + + fix Must be followed by a --rr flag. This command + essentially removes the named delta, but leaves + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 1 + + + + + + +SCCS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SCCS(1) + + + + you with a copy of the delta with the changes that + were in it. It is useful for fixing small com- + piler bugs, etc. Since it doesn't leave audit + trails, it should be used carefully. + + clean This routine removes everything from the current + directory that can be recreated from SCCS files. + It will not remove any files being edited. If the + --bb flag is given, branches are ignored in the + determination of whether they are being edited; + this is dangerous if you are keeping the branches + in the same directory. + + unedit This is the opposite of an ``edit'' or a ``get + -e''. It should be used with extreme caution, + since any changes you made since the get will be + irretrievably lost. + + info Gives a listing of all files being edited. If the + --bb flag is given, branches (i.e., SID's with two + or fewer components) are ignored. If the --uu flag + is given (with an optional argument) then only + files being edited by you (or the named user) are + listed. + + check Like ``info'' except that nothing is printed if + nothing is being edited, and a non-zero exit + status is returned if anything is being edited. + The intent is to have this included in an + ``install'' entry in a makefile to insure that + everything is included into the SCCS file before a + version is installed. + + tell Gives a newline-separated list of the files being + edited on the standard output. Takes the --bb and + --uu flags like ``info'' and ``check''. + + diffs Gives a ``diff'' listing between the current ver- + sion of the program(s) you have out for editing + and the versions in SCCS format. The --rr,, --cc,, --ii,, + --xx,, and --tt flags are passed to _g_e_t; the --ll,, --ss,, + --ee,, --ff,, --hh,, and --bb options are passed to _d_i_f_f. The + --CC flag is passed to _d_i_f_f as --cc.. + + print This command prints out verbose information about + the named files. + + The --rr flag runs _s_c_c_s as the real user rather than as what- + ever effective user _s_c_c_s is ``set user id'' to. The --dd flag + gives a root directory for the SCCS files. The default is + the current directory. The --pp flag defines the pathname of + the directory in which the SCCS files will be found; + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 2 + + + + + + +SCCS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SCCS(1) + + + + ``SCCS'' is the default. The --pp flag differs from the --dd + flag in that the --dd argument is prepended to the entire + pathname and the --pp argument is inserted before the final + component of the pathname. For example, ``sccs -d/x -py get + a/b'' will convert to ``get /x/a/y/s.b''. The intent here + is to create aliases such as ``alias syssccs sccs + -d/usr/src'' which will be used as ``syssccs get + cmd/who.c''. Also, if the environment variable PROJECT is + set, its value is used to determine the --dd ffllaagg.. If it + begins with a slash, it is taken directly; otherwise, the + home directory of a user of that name is examined for a sub- + directory ``src'' or ``source''. If such a directory is + found, it is used. + + Certain commands (such as _a_d_m_i_n) cannot be run ``set user + id'' by all users, since this would allow anyone to change + the authorizations. These commands are always run as the + real user. + +EEXXAAMMPPLLEESS + To get a file for editing, edit it, and produce a new delta: + + sccs get -e file.c + ex file.c + sccs delta file.c + + To get a file from another directory: + + sccs -p/usr/src/sccs/s. get cc.c + + or + + sccs get /usr/src/sccs/s.cc.c + + To make a delta of a large number of files in the current + directory: + + sccs delta *.c + + To get a list of files being edited that are not on + branches: + + sccs info -b + + To delta everything being edited by you: + + sccs delta `sccs tell -u` + + In a makefile, to get source files from an SCCS file if it + does not already exist: + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 3 + + + + + + +SCCS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SCCS(1) + + + + SRCS = + $(SRCS): + sccs get $(REL) $@ + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + admin(SCCS), chghist(SCCS), comb(SCCS), delta(SCCS), + get(SCCS), help(SCCS), prt(SCCS), rmdel(SCCS), + sccsdiff(SCCS), what(SCCS) + Eric Allman, _A_n _I_n_t_r_o_d_u_c_t_i_o_n _t_o _t_h_e _S_o_u_r_c_e _C_o_d_e _C_o_n_t_r_o_l _S_y_s_- + _t_e_m + +BBUUGGSS + It should be able to take directory arguments on pseudo- + commands like the SCCS commands do. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 4 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/script.0 b/usr/man/cat1/script.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2419ba51ae --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/script.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +SCRIPT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SCRIPT(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + script - make typescript of terminal session + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ssccrriipptt [ --aa ] [ file ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_c_r_i_p_t makes a typescript of everything printed on your ter- + minal. The typescript is written to _f_i_l_e, or appended to + _f_i_l_e if the --aa option is given. It can be sent to the line + printer later with _l_p_r. If no file name is given, the + typescript is saved in the file _t_y_p_e_s_c_r_i_p_t. + + The script ends when the forked shell exits. + + This program is useful when using a crt and a hard-copy + record of the dialog is desired, as for a student handing in + a program that was developed on a crt when hard-copy termi- + nals are in short supply. + +BBUUGGSS + _S_c_r_i_p_t places eevveerryytthhiinngg in the log file. This is not what + the naive user expects. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/sed.0 b/usr/man/cat1/sed.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8ec078a901 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/sed.0 @@ -0,0 +1,264 @@ + + + +SED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SED(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + sed - stream editor + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + sseedd [ --nn ] [ --ee script ] [ --ff sfile ] [ file ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_e_d copies the named _f_i_l_e_s (standard input default) to the + standard output, edited according to a script of commands. + The --ff option causes the script to be taken from file _s_f_i_l_e; + these options accumulate. If there is just one --ee option + and no --ff's, the flag --ee may be omitted. The --nn option + suppresses the default output. + + A script consists of editing commands, one per line, of the + following form: + + [address [, address] ] function [arguments] + + In normal operation _s_e_d cyclically copies a line of input + into a _p_a_t_t_e_r_n _s_p_a_c_e (unless there is something left after a + `D' command), applies in sequence all commands whose + _a_d_d_r_e_s_s_e_s select that pattern space, and at the end of the + script copies the pattern space to the standard output + (except under --nn) and deletes the pattern space. + + An _a_d_d_r_e_s_s is either a decimal number that counts input + lines cumulatively across files, a `$' that addresses the + last line of input, or a context address, `/regular expres- + sion/', in the style of _e_d(1) modified thus: + + The escape sequence `\n' matches a newline embedded in + the pattern space. + + A command line with no addresses selects every pattern + space. + + A command line with one address selects each pattern space + that matches the address. + + A command line with two addresses selects the inclusive + range from the first pattern space that matches the first + address through the next pattern space that matches the + second. (If the second address is a number less than or + equal to the line number first selected, only one line is + selected.) Thereafter the process is repeated, looking again + for the first address. + + Editing commands can be applied only to non-selected pattern + spaces by use of the negation function `!' (below). + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 1 + + + + + + +SED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SED(1) + + + + In the following list of functions the maximum number of + permissible addresses for each function is indicated in + parentheses. + + An argument denoted _t_e_x_t consists of one or more lines, all + but the last of which end with `\' to hide the newline. + Backslashes in text are treated like backslashes in the + replacement string of an `s' command, and may be used to + protect initial blanks and tabs against the stripping that + is done on every script line. + + An argument denoted _r_f_i_l_e or _w_f_i_l_e must terminate the com- + mand line and must be preceded by exactly one blank. Each + _w_f_i_l_e is created before processing begins. There can be at + most 10 distinct _w_f_i_l_e arguments. + + (1)a\ + _t_e_x_t + Append. Place _t_e_x_t on the output before reading the + next input line. + + (2)b _l_a_b_e_l + Branch to the `:' command bearing the _l_a_b_e_l. If _l_a_b_e_l + is empty, branch to the end of the script. + + (2)c\ + _t_e_x_t + Change. Delete the pattern space. With 0 or 1 address + or at the end of a 2-address range, place _t_e_x_t on the + output. Start the next cycle. + + (2)d Delete the pattern space. Start the next cycle. + + (2)D Delete the initial segment of the pattern space through + the first newline. Start the next cycle. + + (2)g Replace the contents of the pattern space by the con- + tents of the hold space. + + (2)G Append the contents of the hold space to the pattern + space. + + (2)h Replace the contents of the hold space by the contents + of the pattern space. + + (2)H Append the contents of the pattern space to the hold + space. + + (1)i\ + _t_e_x_t + Insert. Place _t_e_x_t on the standard output. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 2 + + + + + + +SED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SED(1) + + + + (2)n Copy the pattern space to the standard output. Replace + the pattern space with the next line of input. + + (2)N Append the next line of input to the pattern space with + an embedded newline. (The current line number + changes.) + + (2)p Print. Copy the pattern space to the standard output. + + (2)P Copy the initial segment of the pattern space through + the first newline to the standard output. + + (1)q Quit. Branch to the end of the script. Do not start a + new cycle. + + (2)r _r_f_i_l_e + Read the contents of _r_f_i_l_e. Place them on the output + before reading the next input line. + + (2)s/_r_e_g_u_l_a_r _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n/_r_e_p_l_a_c_e_m_e_n_t/_f_l_a_g_s + Substitute the _r_e_p_l_a_c_e_m_e_n_t string for instances of the + _r_e_g_u_l_a_r _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n in the pattern space. Any character + may be used instead of `/'. For a fuller description + see _e_d(1). _F_l_a_g_s is zero or more of + + g Global. Substitute for all nonoverlapping + instances of the _r_e_g_u_l_a_r _e_x_p_r_e_s_s_i_o_n rather than + just the first one. + + p Print the pattern space if a replacement was made. + + w _w_f_i_l_e + Write. Append the pattern space to _w_f_i_l_e if a + replacement was made. + + (2)t _l_a_b_e_l + Test. Branch to the `:' command bearing the _l_a_b_e_l if + any substitutions have been made since the most recent + reading of an input line or execution of a `t'. If + _l_a_b_e_l is empty, branch to the end of the script. + + (2)w _w_f_i_l_e + Write. Append the pattern space to _w_f_i_l_e. + + (2)x Exchange the contents of the pattern and hold spaces. + + (2)y/_s_t_r_i_n_g_1/_s_t_r_i_n_g_2/ + Transform. Replace all occurrences of characters in + _s_t_r_i_n_g_1 with the corresponding character in _s_t_r_i_n_g_2. + The lengths of _s_t_r_i_n_g_1 and _s_t_r_i_n_g_2 must be equal. + + (2)! _f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 3 + + + + + + +SED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SED(1) + + + + Don't. Apply the _f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n (or group, if _f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n is + `{') only to lines _n_o_t selected by the address(es). + + (0): _l_a_b_e_l + This command does nothing; it bears a _l_a_b_e_l for `b' and + `t' commands to branch to. + + (1)= Place the current line number on the standard output as + a line. + + (2){ Execute the following commands through a matching `}' + only when the pattern space is selected. + + (0) An empty command is ignored. + + (0)# If a # appears as the first character on a line of a + script, then that entire line is treated as a comment, + with one exception. If the first line of the script + starts with the characters ``#n'', then the default + output will be suppressed. The rest of the line after + ``#n'' will also be ignored. A script file must con- + tain at least one non-comment line. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + ed(1), grep(1), awk(1), lex(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 4 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/sendbug.0 b/usr/man/cat1/sendbug.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..dcf3f7818b --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/sendbug.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +SENDBUG(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SENDBUG(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + sendbug - mail a system bug report to 4bsd-bugs + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + sseennddbbuugg [[ aaddddrreessss ]] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + Bug reports sent to `4bsd-bugs@Berkeley.EDU' are intercepted + by a program which expects bug reports to conform to a stan- + dard format. _S_e_n_d_b_u_g is a shell script to help the user + compose and mail bug reports in the correct format. _S_e_n_d_b_u_g + works by invoking the editor specified by the environment + variable _E_D_I_T_O_R on a temporary copy of the bug report format + outline. The user must fill in the appropriate fields and + exit the editor. The default editor is _v_i(1). _S_e_n_d_b_u_g then + mails the completed report to `4bsd-bugs@Berkeley.EDU' or + the address specified on the command line. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/ucb/bugformat contains the bug report outline + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + vi(1), environ(7), bugfiler(8), sendmail(8) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 July 26, 1987 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/sh.0 b/usr/man/cat1/sh.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..faac4cd331 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/sh.0 @@ -0,0 +1,594 @@ + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + sh, for, case, if, while, ::, .., break, continue, cd, eval, + exec, exit, export, login, read, readonly, set, shift, + times, trap, umask, wait - command language + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + sshh [ --cceeiikknnrrssttuuvvxx ] [ arg ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_h is a command programming language that executes commands + read from a terminal or a file. See iinnvvooccaattiioonn for the + meaning of arguments to the shell. + + CCoommmmaannddss.. + A _s_i_m_p_l_e-_c_o_m_m_a_n_d is a sequence of non blank _w_o_r_d_s separated + by blanks (a blank is a ttaabb or a ssppaaccee). The first word + specifies the name of the command to be executed. Except as + specified below the remaining words are passed as arguments + to the invoked command. The command name is passed as argu- + ment 0 (see _e_x_e_c_v_e(2)). The _v_a_l_u_e of a simple-command is + its exit status if it terminates normally or 200+_s_t_a_t_u_s if + it terminates abnormally (see _s_i_g_v_e_c(2) for a list of status + values). + + A _p_i_p_e_l_i_n_e is a sequence of one or more _c_o_m_m_a_n_d_s separated + by ||.. The standard output of each command but the last is + connected by a _p_i_p_e(2) to the standard input of the next + command. Each command is run as a separate process; the + shell waits for the last command to terminate. + + A _l_i_s_t is a sequence of one or more _p_i_p_e_l_i_n_e_s separated by + ;;, &&, &&&& or |||| and optionally terminated by ;; or &&. ;; and && + have equal precedence which is lower than that of &&&& and ||||, + &&&& and |||| also have equal precedence. A semicolon causes + sequential execution; an ampersand causes the preceding + _p_i_p_e_l_i_n_e to be executed without waiting for it to finish. + The symbol &&&& (||||) causes the _l_i_s_t following to be executed + only if the preceding _p_i_p_e_l_i_n_e returns a zero (non zero) + value. Newlines may appear in a _l_i_s_t, instead of semi- + colons, to delimit commands. + + A _c_o_m_m_a_n_d is either a simple-command or one of the follow- + ing. The value returned by a command is that of the last + simple-command executed in the command. + + ffoorr _n_a_m_e [iinn _w_o_r_d ...] ddoo _l_i_s_t ddoonnee + Each time a ffoorr command is executed _n_a_m_e is set to the + next word in the ffoorr word list. If iinn _w_o_r_d ... is + omitted, iinn ""$$@@"" is assumed. Execution ends when there + are no more words in the list. + + ccaassee _w_o_r_d iinn [_p_a_t_t_e_r_n [ || _p_a_t_t_e_r_n ] ... )) _l_i_s_t ;;;;] ... eessaacc + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + A ccaassee command executes the _l_i_s_t associated with the + first pattern that matches _w_o_r_d. The form of the pat- + terns is the same as that used for file name genera- + tion. + + iiff _l_i_s_t tthheenn _l_i_s_t [eelliiff _l_i_s_t tthheenn _l_i_s_t] ... [eellssee _l_i_s_t] ffii + The _l_i_s_t following iiff is executed and if it returns + zero the _l_i_s_t following tthheenn is executed. Otherwise, + the _l_i_s_t following eelliiff is executed and if its value is + zero the _l_i_s_t following tthheenn is executed. Failing that + the eellssee _l_i_s_t is executed. + + wwhhiillee _l_i_s_t [ddoo _l_i_s_t] ddoonnee + A wwhhiillee command repeatedly executes the wwhhiillee _l_i_s_t and + if its value is zero executes the ddoo _l_i_s_t; otherwise + the loop terminates. The value returned by a wwhhiillee + command is that of the last executed command in the ddoo + _l_i_s_t. uunnttiill may be used in place of wwhhiillee to negate the + loop termination test. + + (( _l_i_s_t )) + Execute _l_i_s_t in a subshell. + + {{ _l_i_s_t }} + _l_i_s_t is simply executed. + + The following words are only recognized as the first word of + a command and when not quoted. + + iiff tthheenn eellssee eelliiff ffii ccaassee iinn eessaacc ffoorr wwhhiillee uunnttiill ddoo + ddoonnee {{ }} + + CCoommmmaanndd ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonn.. + The standard output from a command enclosed in a pair of + back quotes (````) may be used as part or all of a word; + trailing newlines are removed. + + PPaarraammeetteerr ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonn.. + The character $$ is used to introduce substitutable parame- + ters. Positional parameters may be assigned values by sseett. + Variables may be set by writing + + _n_a_m_e==_v_a_l_u_e [ _n_a_m_e==_v_a_l_u_e ] ... + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r}} + A _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is a sequence of letters, digits or under- + scores (a _n_a_m_e), a digit, or any of the characters ** @@ + ## ?? -- $$ !!.. The value, if any, of the parameter is sub- + stituted. The braces are required only when _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r + is followed by a letter, digit, or underscore that is + not to be interpreted as part of its name. If _p_a_r_a_m_e_- + _t_e_r is a digit, it is a positional parameter. If + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is ** or @@ then all the positional parameters, + starting with $$11, are substituted separated by spaces. + $$00 is set from argument zero when the shell is invoked. + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r-_w_o_r_d}} + If _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is set, substitute its value; otherwise + substitute _w_o_r_d. + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r=_w_o_r_d}} + If _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is not set, set it to _w_o_r_d; the value of + the parameter is then substituted. Positional parame- + ters may not be assigned to in this way. + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r?_w_o_r_d}} + If _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is set, substitute its value; otherwise, + print _w_o_r_d and exit from the shell. If _w_o_r_d is omit- + ted, a standard message is printed. + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r+_w_o_r_d}} + If _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is set, substitute _w_o_r_d; otherwise substi- + tute nothing. + + In the above _w_o_r_d is not evaluated unless it is to be used + as the substituted string. (So that, for example, echo + ${d-'pwd'} will only execute _p_w_d if _d is unset.) + + The following _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s are automatically set by the shell. + + ## The number of positional parameters in decimal. + -- Options supplied to the shell on invocation or by + sseett. + ?? The value returned by the last executed command in + decimal. + $$ The process number of this shell. + !! The process number of the last background command + invoked. + + The following _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s are used but not set by the shell. + + HHOOMMEE The default argument (home directory) for the ccdd + command. + PPAATTHH The search path for commands (see eexxeeccuuttiioonn). + MMAAIILL If this variable is set to the name of a mail + file, the shell informs the user of the arrival of + mail in the specified file. + PPSS11 Primary prompt string, by default '$ '. + PPSS22 Secondary prompt string, by default '> '. + IIFFSS Internal field separators, normally ssppaaccee, ttaabb, + and nneewwlliinnee. IIFFSS is ignored if _s_h is running as + root or if the effective user id differs from the + real user id. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + BBllaannkk iinntteerrpprreettaattiioonn.. + After parameter and command substitution, any results of + substitution are scanned for internal field separator char- + acters (those found in $$IIFFSS) and split into distinct argu- + ments where such characters are found. Explicit null argu- + ments ("" or '') are retained. Implicit null arguments + (those resulting from _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s that have no values) are + removed. + + FFiillee nnaammee ggeenneerraattiioonn.. + Following substitution, each command word is scanned for the + characters **, ?? and [[.. If one of these characters appears, + the word is regarded as a pattern. The word is replaced + with alphabetically sorted file names that match the pat- + tern. If no file name is found that matches the pattern, + the word is left unchanged. The character .. at the start of + a file name or immediately following a //, and the character + //, must be matched explicitly. + + ** Matches any string, including the null string. + ?? Matches any single character. + [[......]] + Matches any one of the characters enclosed. A pair of + characters separated by -- matches any character lexi- + cally between the pair. + + QQuuoottiinngg.. + The following characters have a special meaning to the shell + and cause termination of a word unless quoted. + + ;; && (( )) || << >> nneewwlliinnee ssppaaccee ttaabb + + A character may be _q_u_o_t_e_d by preceding it with a \\.. \\nneeww-- + lliinnee is ignored. All characters enclosed between a pair of + quote marks (''''), except a single quote, are quoted. Inside + double quotes ("""") parameter and command substitution occurs + and \\ quotes the characters \\ '' "" and $$. + + ""$$**"" is equivalent to ""$$11 $$22 ......"" whereas + ""$$@@"" is equivalent to ""$$11"" ""$$22"" ...... .. + + PPrroommppttiinngg.. + When used interactively, the shell prompts with the value of + PS1 before reading a command. If at any time a newline is + typed and further input is needed to complete a command, the + secondary prompt ($$PPSS22) is issued. + + IInnppuutt oouuttppuutt.. + Before a command is executed its input and output may be + redirected using a special notation interpreted by the + shell. The following may appear anywhere in a simple- + command or may precede or follow a _c_o_m_m_a_n_d and are not + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + passed on to the invoked command. Substitution occurs + before _w_o_r_d or _d_i_g_i_t is used. + + <_w_o_r_d + Use file _w_o_r_d as standard input (file descriptor 0). + + >_w_o_r_d + Use file _w_o_r_d as standard output (file descriptor 1). + If the file does not exist, it is created; otherwise it + is truncated to zero length. + + >>_w_o_r_d + Use file _w_o_r_d as standard output. If the file exists, + output is appended (by seeking to the end); otherwise + the file is created. + + <<_w_o_r_d + The shell input is read up to a line the same as _w_o_r_d, + or end of file. The resulting document becomes the + standard input. If any character of _w_o_r_d is quoted, no + interpretation is placed upon the characters of the + document; otherwise, parameter and command substitution + occurs, \\nneewwlliinnee is ignored, and \\ is used to quote the + characters \\ $$ '' and the first character of _w_o_r_d. + + <&_d_i_g_i_t + The standard input is duplicated from file descriptor + _d_i_g_i_t; see _d_u_p(2). Similarly for the standard output + using >. + + <&- The standard input is closed. Similarly for the stan- + dard output using >. + + If one of the above is preceded by a digit, the file + descriptor created is that specified by the digit (instead + of the default 0 or 1). For example, + + ... 2>&1 + + creates file descriptor 2 to be a duplicate of file descrip- + tor 1. + + If a command is followed by && then the default standard + input for the command is the empty file (/dev/null). Other- + wise, the environment for the execution of a command con- + tains the file descriptors of the invoking shell as modified + by input output specifications. + + EEnnvviirroonnmmeenntt.. + The environment is a list of name-value pairs that is passed + to an executed program in the same way as a normal argument + list; see _e_x_e_c_v_e(2) and _e_n_v_i_r_o_n(7). The shell interacts + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 5 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + with the environment in several ways. On invocation, the + shell scans the environment and creates a _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r for each + name found, giving it the corresponding value. Executed + commands inherit the same environment. If the user modifies + the values of these _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s or creates new ones, none of + these affects the environment unless the eexxppoorrtt command is + used to bind the shell's _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r to the environment. The + environment seen by any executed command is thus composed of + any unmodified name-value pairs originally inherited by the + shell, plus any modifications or additions, all of which + must be noted in eexxppoorrtt commands. + + The environment for any _s_i_m_p_l_e-_c_o_m_m_a_n_d may be augmented by + prefixing it with one or more assignments to _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s. + Thus these two lines are equivalent + + TERM=450 cmd args + (export TERM; TERM=450; cmd args) + + If the --kk flag is set, _a_l_l keyword arguments are placed in + the environment, even if the occur after the command name. + The following prints 'a=b c' and 'c': + echo a=b c + set -k + echo a=b c + + SSiiggnnaallss.. + The INTERRUPT and QUIT signals for an invoked command are + ignored if the command is followed by &&; otherwise signals + have the values inherited by the shell from its parent. + (But see also ttrraapp..) + + EExxeeccuuttiioonn.. + Each time a command is executed the above substitutions are + carried out. Except for the 'special commands' listed below + a new process is created and an attempt is made to execute + the command via an _e_x_e_c_v_e(2). + + The shell parameter $$PPAATTHH defines the search path for the + directory containing the command. Each alternative direc- + tory name is separated by a colon (::). The default path is + :://bbiinn:://uussrr//bbiinn. If the command name contains a /, the + search path is not used. Otherwise, each directory in the + path is searched for an executable file. If the file has + execute permission but is not an _a._o_u_t file, it is assumed + to be a file containing shell commands. A subshell (i.e., a + separate process) is spawned to read it. A parenthesized + command is also executed in a subshell. + + SSppeecciiaall ccoommmmaannddss.. + The following commands are executed in the shell process and + except where specified no input output redirection is + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 6 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + permitted for such commands. + + ## For non-interactive shells, everything following the ## + is treated as a comment, i.e. the rest of the line is + ignored. For interactive shells, the ## has no special + effect. + + :: No effect; the command does nothing. + .. _f_i_l_e + Read and execute commands from _f_i_l_e and return. The + search path $$PPAATTHH is used to find the directory con- + taining _f_i_l_e. + bbrreeaakk [_n] + Exit from the enclosing ffoorr or wwhhiillee loop, if any. If + _n is specified, break _n levels. + ccoonnttiinnuuee [_n] + Resume the next iteration of the enclosing ffoorr or wwhhiillee + loop. If _n is specified, resume at the _n-th enclosing + loop. + ccdd [_a_r_g] + Change the current directory to _a_r_g. The shell parame- + ter $$HHOOMMEE is the default _a_r_g. + eevvaall [_a_r_g ...] + The arguments are read as input to the shell and the + resulting command(s) executed. + eexxeecc [_a_r_g ...] + The command specified by the arguments is executed in + place of this shell without creating a new process. + Input output arguments may appear and if no other argu- + ments are given cause the shell input output to be + modified. + eexxiitt [_n] + Causes a non interactive shell to exit with the exit + status specified by _n. If _n is omitted, the exit status + is that of the last command executed. (An end of file + will also exit from the shell.) + eexxppoorrtt [_n_a_m_e ...] + The given names are marked for automatic export to the + _e_n_v_i_r_o_n_m_e_n_t of subsequently-executed commands. If no + arguments are given, a list of exportable names is + printed. + llooggiinn [_a_r_g ...] + Equivalent to 'exec login arg ...'. + rreeaadd _n_a_m_e ... + One line is read from the standard input; successive + words of the input are assigned to the variables _n_a_m_e + in order, with leftover words to the last variable. + The return code is 0 unless the end-of-file is encoun- + tered. + rreeaaddoonnllyy [_n_a_m_e ...] + The given names are marked readonly and the values of + the these names may not be changed by subsequent + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 7 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + assignment. If no arguments are given, a list of all + readonly names is printed. + sseett [--eekknnppttuuvvxx [_a_r_g ...]] + --ee If non interactive, exit immediately if a command + fails. + --kk All keyword arguments are placed in the environment + for a command, not just those that precede the com- + mand name. + --nn Read commands but do not execute them. + --tt Exit after reading and executing one command. + --uu Treat unset variables as an error when substituting. + --vv Print shell input lines as they are read. + --xx Print commands and their arguments as they are exe- + cuted. + -- Turn off the --xx and --vv options. + + These flags can also be used upon invocation of the + shell. The current set of flags may be found in $$--. + + Remaining arguments are positional parameters and are + assigned, in order, to $$11, $$22, etc. If no arguments + are given, the values of all names are printed. + + sshhiifftt + The positional parameters from $$22... are renamed $$11... + + ttiimmeess + Print the accumulated user and system times for + processes run from the shell. + + ttrraapp [_a_r_g] [_n] ... + _A_r_g is a command to be read and executed when the shell + receives signal(s) _n. (Note that _a_r_g is scanned once + when the trap is set and once when the trap is taken.) + Trap commands are executed in order of signal number. + If _a_r_g is absent, all trap(s) _n are reset to their ori- + ginal values. If _a_r_g is the null string, this signal + is ignored by the shell and by invoked commands. If _n + is 0, the command _a_r_g is executed on exit from the + shell, otherwise upon receipt of signal _n as numbered + in _s_i_g_v_e_c(2). _T_r_a_p with no arguments prints a list of + commands associated with each signal number. + + uummaasskk [ _n_n_n ] + The user file creation mask is set to the octal value + _n_n_n (see _u_m_a_s_k(2)). If _n_n_n is omitted, the current + value of the mask is printed. + + wwaaiitt [_n] + Wait for the specified process and report its termina- + tion status. If _n is not given, all currently active + child processes are waited for. The return code from + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 8 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + this command is that of the process waited for. + + IInnvvooccaattiioonn.. + If the first character of argument zero is --, commands are + read from $$HHOOMMEE//..pprrooffiillee, if such a file exists. Commands + are then read as described below. The following flags are + interpreted by the shell when it is invoked. + --cc _s_t_r_i_n_g If the --cc flag is present, commands are read from + _s_t_r_i_n_g. + --ss If the --ss flag is present or if no arguments + remain then commands are read from the standard + input. Shell output is written to file descrip- + tor 2. + --ii If the --ii flag is present or if the shell input + and output are attached to a terminal (as told by + _g_t_t_y) then this shell is _i_n_t_e_r_a_c_t_i_v_e. In this + case the terminate signal SIGTERM (see _s_i_g_v_e_c(2)) + is ignored (so that 'kill 0' does not kill an + interactive shell) and the interrupt signal SIG- + INT is caught and ignored (so that wwaaiitt is inter- + ruptible). In all cases SIGQUIT is ignored by + the shell. + + The remaining flags and arguments are described under the + sseett command. + +FFIILLEESS + $HOME/..profile + /tmp/sh* + /dev/null + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + csh(1), test(1), execve(2), environ(7) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Errors detected by the shell, such as syntax errors cause + the shell to return a non zero exit status. If the shell is + being used non interactively then execution of the shell + file is abandoned. Otherwise, the shell returns the exit + status of the last command executed (see also eexxiitt). + +BBUUGGSS + If << is used to provide standard input to an asynchronous + process invoked by &, the shell gets mixed up about naming + the input document. A garbage file /tmp/sh* is created, and + the shell complains about not being able to find the file by + another name. + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 9 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/size.0 b/usr/man/cat1/size.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bb9d7ddeef --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/size.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +SIZE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SIZE(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + size - size of an object file + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ssiizzee [ object ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_i_z_e prints the (decimal) number of bytes required by the + text, data, and bss portions, and their sum in hex and + decimal, of each object-file argument. If no file is speci- + fied, aa..oouutt is used. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + a.out(5) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/sleep.0 b/usr/man/cat1/sleep.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6edaa9228b --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/sleep.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +SLEEP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SLEEP(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + sleep - suspend execution for an interval + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + sslleeeepp time + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_l_e_e_p suspends execution for _t_i_m_e seconds. It is used to + execute a command after a certain amount of time as in: + + (sleep 105; command)& + + or to execute a command every so often, as in: + + while true + do + command + sleep 37 + done + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + setitimer(2), alarm(3C), sleep(3) + +BBUUGGSS + _T_i_m_e must be less than 2,147,483,647 seconds. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/soelim.0 b/usr/man/cat1/soelim.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..08b6f70b51 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/soelim.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +SOELIM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SOELIM(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + soelim - eliminate .so's from nroff input + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ssooeelliimm [ file ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_o_e_l_i_m reads the specified files or the standard input and + performs the textual inclusion implied by the _n_r_o_f_f direc- + tives of the form + + .so somefile + + when they appear at the beginning of input lines. This is + useful since programs such as _t_b_l do not normally do this; + it allows the placement of individual tables in separate + files to be run as a part of a large document. + + An argument consisting of a single minus (--) is taken to be + a file name corresponding to the standard input. + + Note that inclusion can be suppressed by using `'' instead + of `.', i.e. + + 'so /usr/lib/tmac.s + + A sample usage of _s_o_e_l_i_m would be + + soelim exum?.n | tbl | nroff -ms | col | lpr + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + colcrt(1), more(1) + +BBUUGGSS + The format of the source commands must involve no strange- + ness - exactly one blank must precede and no blanks follow + the file name. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/sort.0 b/usr/man/cat1/sort.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e05a96121e --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/sort.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +SORT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SORT(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + sort - sort or merge files + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ssoorrtt [ -_m_u_b_d_f_i_n_r_t_x ] [ ++_p_o_s_1 [ --_p_o_s_2 ] ] ... [ --oo name ] [ + --TT directory ] [ name ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_o_r_t sorts lines of all the named files together and writes + the result on the standard output. The name `-' means the + standard input. If no input files are named, the standard + input is sorted. + + The default sort key is an entire line. Default ordering is + lexicographic by bytes in machine collating sequence. The + ordering is affected globally by the following options, one + or more of which may appear. + + bb Ignore leading blanks (spaces and tabs) in field com- + parisons. + + dd `Dictionary' order: only letters, digits and blanks are + significant in comparisons. + + ff Fold upper case letters onto lower case. + + ii Ignore characters outside the ASCII range 040-0176 in + nonnumeric comparisons. + + nn An initial numeric string, consisting of optional + blanks, optional minus sign, and zero or more digits + with optional decimal point, is sorted by arithmetic + value. (Note that --00 is considered equal to 00.) Option + nn implies option bb.. + + rr Reverse the sense of comparisons. + + tt_x `Tab character' separating fields is _x. + + The notation ++_p_o_s_1 --_p_o_s_2 restricts a sort key to a field + beginning at _p_o_s_1 and ending just before _p_o_s_2. _P_o_s_1 and + _p_o_s_2 each have the form _m.._n, optionally followed by one or + more of the flags bbddffiinnrr,, where _m tells a number of fields + to skip from the beginning of the line and _n tells a number + of characters to skip further. If any flags are present + they override all the global ordering options for this key. + If the bb option is in effect _n is counted from the first + nonblank in the field; bb is attached independently to _p_o_s_2. + A missing .._n means .0; a missing --_p_o_s_2 means the end of the + line. Under the --tt_x option, fields are strings separated by + _x; otherwise fields are nonempty nonblank strings separated + by blanks. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 1 + + + + + + +SORT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SORT(1) + + + + When there are multiple sort keys, later keys are compared + only after all earlier keys compare equal. Lines that oth- + erwise compare equal are ordered with all bytes significant. + + These option arguments are also understood: + + cc Check that the input file is sorted according to the + ordering rules; give no output unless the file is out + of sort. + + mm Merge only, the input files are already sorted. + + oo The next argument is the name of an output file to use + instead of the standard output. This file may be the + same as one of the inputs. + + TT The next argument is the name of a directory in which + temporary files should be made. + + uu Suppress all but one in each set of equal lines. + Ignored bytes and bytes outside keys do not participate + in this comparison. + +EEXXAAMMPPLLEESS + Print in alphabetical order all the unique spellings in a + list of words. Capitalized words differ from uncapitalized. + + sort -u +0f +0 list + + Print the password file (_p_a_s_s_w_d(5)) sorted by user id number + (the 3rd colon-separated field). + + sort -t: +2n /etc/passwd + + Print the first instance of each month in an already sorted + file of (month day) entries. The options --uumm with just one + input file make the choice of a unique representative from a + set of equal lines predictable. + + sort -um +0 -1 dates + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/tmp/stm*, /tmp/* first and second tries for tem- + porary files + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + uniq(1), comm(1), rev(1), join(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Comments and exits with nonzero status for various trouble + conditions and for disorder discovered under option --cc. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 2 + + + + + + +SORT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SORT(1) + + + +BBUUGGSS + Very long lines are silently truncated. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/sortbib.0 b/usr/man/cat1/sortbib.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d5d6371113 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/sortbib.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +SORTBIB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SORTBIB(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + sortbib - sort bibliographic database + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ssoorrttbbiibb [ --ssKEYS ] database ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_o_r_t_b_i_b sorts files of records containing _r_e_f_e_r key-letters + by user-specified keys. Records may be separated by blank + lines, or by .[ and .] delimiters, but the two styles may + not be mixed together. This program reads through each + _d_a_t_a_b_a_s_e and pulls out key fields, which are sorted + separately. The sorted key fields contain the file pointer, + byte offset, and length of corresponding records. These + records are delivered using disk seeks and reads, so _s_o_r_t_b_i_b + may not be used in a pipeline to read standard input. + + By default, _s_o_r_t_b_i_b alphabetizes by the first %A and the %D + fields, which contain the senior author and date. The --ss + option is used to specify new _K_E_Y_S. For instance, --ssATD + will sort by author, title, and date, while --ssA+D will sort + by all authors, and date. Sort keys past the fourth are not + meaningful. No more than 16 databases may be sorted + together at one time. Records longer than 4096 characters + will be truncated. + + _S_o_r_t_b_i_b sorts on the last word on the %A line, which is + assumed to be the author's last name. A word in the final + position, such as ``jr.'' or ``ed.'', will be ignored if the + name beforehand ends with a comma. Authors with two-word + last names or unusual constructions can be sorted correctly + by using the _n_r_o_f_f convention ``\0'' in place of a blank. A + %Q field is considered to be the same as %A, except sorting + begins with the first, not the last, word. _S_o_r_t_b_i_b sorts on + the last word of the %D line, usually the year. It also + ignores leading articles (like ``A'' or ``The'') when sort- + ing by titles in the %T or %J fields; it will ignore arti- + cles of any modern European language. If a sort-significant + field is absent from a record, _s_o_r_t_b_i_b places that record + before other records containing that field. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + refer(1), addbib(1), roffbib(1), indxbib(1), lookbib(1) + +AAUUTTHHOORRSS + Greg Shenaut, Bill Tuthill + +BBUUGGSS + Records with missing author fields should probably be sorted + by title. + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/spell.0 b/usr/man/cat1/spell.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..07c1834387 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/spell.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +SPELL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SPELL(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + spell, spellin, spellout - find spelling errors + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ssppeellll [ --vv ] [ --bb ] [ --xx ] [ --dd hlist ] [ --ss hstop ] [ --hh + spellhist ] [ file ] ... + + ssppeelllliinn [ list ] + + ssppeelllloouutt [ --dd ] list + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_p_e_l_l collects words from the named documents, and looks + them up in a spelling list. Words that neither occur among + nor are derivable (by applying certain inflections, prefixes + or suffixes) from words in the spelling list are printed on + the standard output. If no files are named, words are col- + lected from the standard input. + + _S_p_e_l_l ignores most _t_r_o_f_f, _t_b_l and _e_q_n(1) constructions. + + Under the --vv option, all words not literally in the spelling + list are printed, and plausible derivations from spelling + list words are indicated. + + Under the --bb option, British spelling is checked. Besides + preferring _c_e_n_t_r_e, _c_o_l_o_u_r, _s_p_e_c_i_a_l_i_t_y, _t_r_a_v_e_l_l_e_d, etc., this + option insists upon -_i_s_e in words like _s_t_a_n_d_a_r_d_i_s_e, Fowler + and the OED to the contrary notwithstanding. + + Under the --xx option, every plausible stem is printed with + `=' for each word. + + The spelling list is based on many sources. While it is + more haphazard than an ordinary dictionary, it is also more + effective with proper names and popular technical words. + Coverage of the specialized vocabularies of biology, medi- + cine and chemistry is light. + + The auxiliary files used for the spelling list, stop list, + and history file may be specified by arguments following the + --dd, --ss, and --hh options. The default files are indicated + below. Copies of all output may be accumulated in the his- + tory file. The stop list filters out misspellings (e.g. + thier=thy-y+ier) that would otherwise pass. + + Two routines help maintain the hash lists used by _s_p_e_l_l. + Both expect a set of words, one per line, from the standard + input. _S_p_e_l_l_i_n combines the words from the standard input + and the preexisting _l_i_s_t file and places a new list on the + standard output. If no _l_i_s_t file is specified, the new list + is created from scratch. _S_p_e_l_l_o_u_t looks up each word from + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +SPELL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SPELL(1) + + + + the standard input and prints on the standard output those + that are missing from (or present on, with option --dd) the + hashed _l_i_s_t file. For example, to verify that _h_o_o_k_e_y is not + on the default spelling list, add it to your own private + list, and then use it with _s_p_e_l_l, + + echo hookey | spellout /usr/dict/hlista + echo hookey | spellin /usr/dict/hlista > myhlist + spell -d myhlist huckfinn + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/dict/hlist[ab] hashed spelling lists, American & Brit- + ish, default for --dd + /usr/dict/hstop hashed stop list, default for --ss + /dev/null history file, default for --hh + /tmp/spell.$$* temporary files + /usr/lib/spell + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + deroff(1), sort(1), tee(1), sed(1) + +BBUUGGSS + The spelling list's coverage is uneven; new installations + will probably wish to monitor the output for several months + to gather local additions. + British spelling was done by an American. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/spellin.0 b/usr/man/cat1/spellin.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..07c1834387 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/spellin.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +SPELL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SPELL(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + spell, spellin, spellout - find spelling errors + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ssppeellll [ --vv ] [ --bb ] [ --xx ] [ --dd hlist ] [ --ss hstop ] [ --hh + spellhist ] [ file ] ... + + ssppeelllliinn [ list ] + + ssppeelllloouutt [ --dd ] list + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_p_e_l_l collects words from the named documents, and looks + them up in a spelling list. Words that neither occur among + nor are derivable (by applying certain inflections, prefixes + or suffixes) from words in the spelling list are printed on + the standard output. If no files are named, words are col- + lected from the standard input. + + _S_p_e_l_l ignores most _t_r_o_f_f, _t_b_l and _e_q_n(1) constructions. + + Under the --vv option, all words not literally in the spelling + list are printed, and plausible derivations from spelling + list words are indicated. + + Under the --bb option, British spelling is checked. Besides + preferring _c_e_n_t_r_e, _c_o_l_o_u_r, _s_p_e_c_i_a_l_i_t_y, _t_r_a_v_e_l_l_e_d, etc., this + option insists upon -_i_s_e in words like _s_t_a_n_d_a_r_d_i_s_e, Fowler + and the OED to the contrary notwithstanding. + + Under the --xx option, every plausible stem is printed with + `=' for each word. + + The spelling list is based on many sources. While it is + more haphazard than an ordinary dictionary, it is also more + effective with proper names and popular technical words. + Coverage of the specialized vocabularies of biology, medi- + cine and chemistry is light. + + The auxiliary files used for the spelling list, stop list, + and history file may be specified by arguments following the + --dd, --ss, and --hh options. The default files are indicated + below. Copies of all output may be accumulated in the his- + tory file. The stop list filters out misspellings (e.g. + thier=thy-y+ier) that would otherwise pass. + + Two routines help maintain the hash lists used by _s_p_e_l_l. + Both expect a set of words, one per line, from the standard + input. _S_p_e_l_l_i_n combines the words from the standard input + and the preexisting _l_i_s_t file and places a new list on the + standard output. If no _l_i_s_t file is specified, the new list + is created from scratch. _S_p_e_l_l_o_u_t looks up each word from + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +SPELL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SPELL(1) + + + + the standard input and prints on the standard output those + that are missing from (or present on, with option --dd) the + hashed _l_i_s_t file. For example, to verify that _h_o_o_k_e_y is not + on the default spelling list, add it to your own private + list, and then use it with _s_p_e_l_l, + + echo hookey | spellout /usr/dict/hlista + echo hookey | spellin /usr/dict/hlista > myhlist + spell -d myhlist huckfinn + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/dict/hlist[ab] hashed spelling lists, American & Brit- + ish, default for --dd + /usr/dict/hstop hashed stop list, default for --ss + /dev/null history file, default for --hh + /tmp/spell.$$* temporary files + /usr/lib/spell + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + deroff(1), sort(1), tee(1), sed(1) + +BBUUGGSS + The spelling list's coverage is uneven; new installations + will probably wish to monitor the output for several months + to gather local additions. + British spelling was done by an American. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/spellout.0 b/usr/man/cat1/spellout.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..07c1834387 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/spellout.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +SPELL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SPELL(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + spell, spellin, spellout - find spelling errors + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ssppeellll [ --vv ] [ --bb ] [ --xx ] [ --dd hlist ] [ --ss hstop ] [ --hh + spellhist ] [ file ] ... + + ssppeelllliinn [ list ] + + ssppeelllloouutt [ --dd ] list + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_p_e_l_l collects words from the named documents, and looks + them up in a spelling list. Words that neither occur among + nor are derivable (by applying certain inflections, prefixes + or suffixes) from words in the spelling list are printed on + the standard output. If no files are named, words are col- + lected from the standard input. + + _S_p_e_l_l ignores most _t_r_o_f_f, _t_b_l and _e_q_n(1) constructions. + + Under the --vv option, all words not literally in the spelling + list are printed, and plausible derivations from spelling + list words are indicated. + + Under the --bb option, British spelling is checked. Besides + preferring _c_e_n_t_r_e, _c_o_l_o_u_r, _s_p_e_c_i_a_l_i_t_y, _t_r_a_v_e_l_l_e_d, etc., this + option insists upon -_i_s_e in words like _s_t_a_n_d_a_r_d_i_s_e, Fowler + and the OED to the contrary notwithstanding. + + Under the --xx option, every plausible stem is printed with + `=' for each word. + + The spelling list is based on many sources. While it is + more haphazard than an ordinary dictionary, it is also more + effective with proper names and popular technical words. + Coverage of the specialized vocabularies of biology, medi- + cine and chemistry is light. + + The auxiliary files used for the spelling list, stop list, + and history file may be specified by arguments following the + --dd, --ss, and --hh options. The default files are indicated + below. Copies of all output may be accumulated in the his- + tory file. The stop list filters out misspellings (e.g. + thier=thy-y+ier) that would otherwise pass. + + Two routines help maintain the hash lists used by _s_p_e_l_l. + Both expect a set of words, one per line, from the standard + input. _S_p_e_l_l_i_n combines the words from the standard input + and the preexisting _l_i_s_t file and places a new list on the + standard output. If no _l_i_s_t file is specified, the new list + is created from scratch. _S_p_e_l_l_o_u_t looks up each word from + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +SPELL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SPELL(1) + + + + the standard input and prints on the standard output those + that are missing from (or present on, with option --dd) the + hashed _l_i_s_t file. For example, to verify that _h_o_o_k_e_y is not + on the default spelling list, add it to your own private + list, and then use it with _s_p_e_l_l, + + echo hookey | spellout /usr/dict/hlista + echo hookey | spellin /usr/dict/hlista > myhlist + spell -d myhlist huckfinn + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/dict/hlist[ab] hashed spelling lists, American & Brit- + ish, default for --dd + /usr/dict/hstop hashed stop list, default for --ss + /dev/null history file, default for --hh + /tmp/spell.$$* temporary files + /usr/lib/spell + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + deroff(1), sort(1), tee(1), sed(1) + +BBUUGGSS + The spelling list's coverage is uneven; new installations + will probably wish to monitor the output for several months + to gather local additions. + British spelling was done by an American. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/spline.0 b/usr/man/cat1/spline.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5c6f3acf86 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/spline.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +SPLINE(1G) UNIX Programmer's Manual SPLINE(1G) + + + +NNAAMMEE + spline - interpolate smooth curve + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + sspplliinnee [ option ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_p_l_i_n_e takes pairs of numbers from the standard input as + abcissas and ordinates of a function. It produces a similar + set, which is approximately equally spaced and includes the + input set, on the standard output. The cubic spline output + (R. W. Hamming, _N_u_m_e_r_i_c_a_l _M_e_t_h_o_d_s _f_o_r _S_c_i_e_n_t_i_s_t_s _a_n_d + _E_n_g_i_n_e_e_r_s, 2nd ed., 349ff) has two continuous derivatives, + and sufficiently many points to look smooth when plotted, + for example by _g_r_a_p_h(1G). + + The following options are recognized, each as a separate + argument. + + --aa Supply abscissas automatically (they are missing from + the input); spacing is given by the next argument, or + is assumed to be 1 if next argument is not a number. + + --kk The constant _k used in the boundary value computation + + + (2nd deriv. at end) = k*(2nd deriv. next to end) + + + is set by the next argument. By default _k = 0. + + --nn Space output points so that approximately _n intervals + occur between the lower and upper _x limits. (Default _n + = 100.) + + --pp Make output periodic, i.e. match derivatives at ends. + First and last input values should normally agree. + + --xx Next 1 (or 2) arguments are lower (and upper) _x limits. + Normally these limits are calculated from the data. + Automatic abcissas start at lower limit (default 0). + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + graph(1G), plot(1G) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + When data is not strictly monotone in _x, _s_p_l_i_n_e reproduces + the input without interpolating extra points. + +BBUUGGSS + A limit of 1000 input points is enforced silently. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/split.0 b/usr/man/cat1/split.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b687d7185e --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/split.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +SPLIT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SPLIT(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + split - split a file into pieces + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + sspplliitt [ -nn ] [ -bb byte_cnt ] [ file [ name ] ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_p_l_i_t reads _f_i_l_e and writes it in _n-line pieces or in + _b_y_t_e__c_n_t byte pieces to a set of output files. The default + is in 1000 line pieces. The name of the first output file + is _n_a_m_e with "aa" appended, and so on, lexicographically, to + "zz". If no output name is given, "x" is the default, in + which case _s_p_l_i_t will create files from "xaa" to "zzz". + + If no input file is given, or if -- is given in its stead, + then the standard input file is used. + +BBUUGGSS + If you provide _n_a_m_e, _s_p_l_i_t can only create 676 separate + files. The default naming convention allows 2028 separate + files. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 November 20, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/strings.0 b/usr/man/cat1/strings.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ac7bea9cfd --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/strings.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +STRINGS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual STRINGS(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + strings - find the printable strings in a file + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ssttrriinnggss [ --aaoo ] [ --_n_u_m_b_e_r ] [ file ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_t_r_i_n_g_s looks for ascii strings in each of the specified + files, or from the standard input. A string is any sequence + of 4 or more printing characters. Unless the --aa flag is + given, _s_t_r_i_n_g_s only looks in the initialized data space of + object files. If the --oo flag is given, then each string is + preceded by its decimal offset in the file. If the --_n_u_m_b_e_r + flag is given, then _n_u_m_b_e_r is used as the minimum string + length rather than 4. + + _S_t_r_i_n_g_s is useful for identifying random object files and + many other things. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + od(1) + +BBUUGGSS + The algorithm for identifying strings is extremely primi- + tive. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 December 3, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/strip.0 b/usr/man/cat1/strip.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..997bedf324 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/strip.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +STRIP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual STRIP(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + strip - remove symbols and relocation bits + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ssttrriipp name ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_t_r_i_p removes the symbol table and relocation bits ordi- + narily attached to the output of the assembler and loader. + This is useful to save space after a program has been + debugged. + + The effect of _s_t_r_i_p is the same as use of the --ss option of + _l_d. + +FFIILLEESS + /tmp/stm? temporary file + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + ld(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/struct.0 b/usr/man/cat1/struct.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5229af5938 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/struct.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +STRUCT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual STRUCT(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + struct - structure Fortran programs + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ssttrruucctt [ option ] ... file + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_t_r_u_c_t translates the Fortran program specified by _f_i_l_e + (standard input default) into a Ratfor program. Wherever + possible, Ratfor control constructs replace the original + Fortran. Statement numbers appear only where still neces- + sary. Cosmetic changes are made, including changing Holler- + ith strings into quoted strings and relational operators + into symbols (.e.g. ".GT." into ">"). The output is + appropriately indented. + + The following options may occur in any order. + + --ss Input is accepted in standard format, i.e. comments + are specified by a c, C, or * in column 1, and con- + tinuation lines are specified by a nonzero, nonblank + character in column 6. Normally input is in the form + accepted by _f_7_7(1) + + --ii Do not turn computed goto statements into switches. + (Ratfor does not turn switches back into computed goto + statements.) + + --aa Turn sequences of else ifs into a non-Ratfor switch of + the form + + + switch + { case pred1: code + case pred2: code + case pred3: code + default: code + } + + The case predicates are tested in order; the code + appropriate to only one case is executed. This gen- + eralized form of switch statement does not occur in + Ratfor. + + --bb Generate goto's instead of multilevel break statements. + + --nn Generate goto's instead of multilevel next statements. + + --tt_n Make the nonzero integer _n the lowest valued label in + the output program (default 10). + + --cc_n Increment successive labels in the output program by + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +STRUCT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual STRUCT(1) + + + + the nonzero integer _n (default 1). + + --ee_n If _n is 0 (default), place code within a loop only if + it can lead to an iteration of the loop. If _n is + nonzero, admit a small code segments to a loop if oth- + erwise the loop would have exits to several places + including the segment, and the segment can be reached + only from the loop. `Small' is close to, but not equal + to, the number of statements in the code segment. + Values of n under 10 are suggested. + +FFIILLEESS + /tmp/struct* + /usr/lib/struct/* + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + f77(1) + +BBUUGGSS + Struct knows Fortran 66 syntax, but not full Fortran 77. + If an input Fortran program contains identifiers which are + reserved words in Ratfor, the structured version of the pro- + gram will not be a valid Ratfor program. + The labels generated cannot go above 32767. + If you get a goto without a target, try --ee .. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/stty.0 b/usr/man/cat1/stty.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7ebd13f2dc --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/stty.0 @@ -0,0 +1,264 @@ + + + +STTY(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual STTY(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + stty - set terminal options + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ssttttyy [ option ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_t_t_y sets certain I/O options on the current output termi- + nal, placing its output on the diagnostic output. With no + argument, it reports the speed of the terminal and the set- + tings of the options which are different from their + defaults. Use of one of the following options modifies the + output as described: + + aallll All normally used option settings are reported. + + eevveerryytthhiinngg + Everything _s_t_t_y knows about is printed. + + ssppeeeedd The terminal speed alone is printed on the stan- + dard output. + + ssiizzee The terminal (window) sizes are printed on the + standard output, first rows and then columns. + + The option strings are selected from the following + set: + + eevveenn allow even parity input + --eevveenn disallow even parity input + oodddd allow odd parity input + --oodddd disallow odd parity input + rraaww raw mode input (nnoo input processing (erase, kill, + interrupt, ...); parity bit passed back) + --rraaww negate raw mode + ccooookkeedd same as `-raw' + ccbbrreeaakk make each character available to _r_e_a_d(2) as + received; no erase and kill processing, but all + other processing (interrupt, suspend, ...) is per- + formed + --ccbbrreeaakk make characters available to _r_e_a_d only when new- + line is received + --nnll allow carriage return for new-line, and output + CR-LF for carriage return or new-line + nnll accept only new-line to end lines + eecchhoo echo back every character typed + --eecchhoo do not echo characters + llccaassee map upper case to lower case + --llccaassee do not map case + ttaannddeemm enable flow control, so that the system sends out + the stop character when its internal queue is in + danger of overflowing on input, and sends the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1 + + + + + + +STTY(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual STTY(1) + + + + start character when it is ready to accept further + input + --ttaannddeemm disable flow control + --ttaabbss replace tabs by spaces when printing + ttaabbss preserve tabs + eekk set erase and kill characters to # and @ + For the following commands which take a character argument + _c, you may also specify _c as the ``u'' or ``undef'', to set + the value to be undefined. A value of ``^x'', a 2 character + sequence, is also interpreted as a control character, with + ``^?'' representing delete. + + eerraassee _c set erase character to _c (default `#', but often + reset to ^H.) + kkiillll _c set kill character to _c (default `@', but often + reset to ^U.) + iinnttrr _c set interrupt character to _c (default DEL or ^? + (delete), but often reset to ^C.) + qquuiitt _c set quit character to _c (default control \.) + ssttaarrtt _c set start character to _c (default control Q.) + ssttoopp _c set stop character to _c (default control S.) + eeooff _c set end of file character to _c (default control + D.) + bbrrkk _c set break character to _c (default undefined.) This + character is an additional character causing + wakeup. + ccrr00 ccrr11 ccrr22 ccrr33 + select style of delay for carriage return (see + _i_o_c_t_l(2)) + nnll00 nnll11 nnll22 nnll33 + select style of delay for linefeed + ttaabb00 ttaabb11 ttaabb22 ttaabb33 + select style of delay for tab + ffff00 ffff11 select style of delay for form feed + bbss00 bbss11 select style of delay for backspace + + ttttyy3333 set all modes suitable for the Teletype Corpora- + tion Model 33 terminal. + ttttyy3377 set all modes suitable for the Teletype Corpora- + tion Model 37 terminal. + vvtt0055 set all modes suitable for Digital Equipment Corp. + VT05 terminal + ddeecc set all modes suitable for Digital Equipment Corp. + operating systems users; (erase, kill, and inter- + rupt characters to ^?, ^U, and ^C, decctlq and + ``newcrt''.) + + ttnn330000 set all modes suitable for a General Electric Ter- + miNet 300 + ttii770000 set all modes suitable for Texas Instruments 700 + series terminal + tteekk set all modes suitable for Tektronix 4014 terminal + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2 + + + + + + +STTY(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual STTY(1) + + + + 00 hang up phone line immediately + 5500 7755 111100 113344 115500 220000 330000 660000 11220000 11880000 22440000 44880000 99660000 eexxttaa eexxttbb + Set terminal baud rate to the number given, if + possible. (These are the speeds supported by the + DH-11 interface). + + rroowwss _n The terminal size is recorded as having _n rows. + + ccoolluummnnss _n The terminal size is recorded as having _n columns. + + ccoollss _n is an alias for _c_o_l_u_m_n_s. + + A teletype driver which supports the job control processing + of _c_s_h(1) and more functionality than the basic driver is + fully described in _t_t_y(4). The following options apply only + to it. + + nneeww Use new driver (switching flushes typeahead). + ccrrtt Set options for a CRT (crtbs, ctlecho and, if >= + 1200 baud, crterase and crtkill.) + ccrrttbbss Echo backspaces on erase characters. + pprrtteerraassee For printing terminal echo erased characters back- + wards within ``\'' and ``/''. + ccrrtteerraassee Wipe out erased characters with ``backspace- + space-backspace.'' + --ccrrtteerraassee Leave erased characters visible; just backspace. + ccrrttkkiillll Wipe out input on like kill ala ccrrtteerraassee.. + --ccrrttkkiillll Just echo line kill character and a newline on + line kill. + ccttlleecchhoo Echo control characters as ``^_x'' (and delete as + ``^?''.) Print two backspaces following the EOT + character (control D). + --ccttlleecchhoo Control characters echo as themselves; in cooked + mode EOT (control-D) is not echoed. + + ddeeccccttllqq After output is suspended (normally by ^S), only a + start character (normally ^Q) will restart it. + This is compatible with DEC's vendor supplied sys- + tems. + + --ddeeccccttllqq After output is suspended, any character typed + will restart it; the start character will restart + output without providing any input. (This is the + default.) + ttoossttoopp Background jobs stop if they attempt terminal out- + put. + --ttoossttoopp Output from background jobs to the terminal is + allowed. + ttiillddee Convert ``~'' to ```'' on output (for Hazeltine + terminals). + --ttiillddee Leave poor ``~'' alone. + fflluusshhoo Output is being discarded usually because user hit + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3 + + + + + + +STTY(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual STTY(1) + + + + control O (internal state bit). + --fflluusshhoo Output is not being discarded. + ppeennddiinn Input is pending after a switch from cbreak to + cooked and will be re-input when a read becomes + pending or more input arrives (internal state + bit). + --ppeennddiinn Input is not pending. + ppaassss88 Passes all 8 bits through on input, in any mode. + --ppaassss88 Strips the 0200 bit on input except in raw mode. + mmddmmbbuuff Start/stop output on carrier transitions (not + implemented). + --mmddmmbbuuff Return error if write attempted after carrier + drops. + lliittoouutt Send output characters without any processing. + --lliittoouutt Do normal output processing, inserting delays, + etc. + nnoohhaanngg Don't send hangup signal if carrier drops. + --nnoohhaanngg Send hangup signal to control process group when + carrier drops. + eettxxaacckk Diablo style etx/ack handshaking (not imple- + mented). + + The following special characters are applicable only to the + new teletype driver and are not normally changed. + + ssuusspp _c set suspend process character to _c (default con- + trol Z). + ddssuusspp _c set delayed suspend process character to _c + (default control Y). + rrpprrnntt _c set reprint line character to _c (default control + R). + fflluusshh _c set flush output character to _c (default control + O). + wweerraassee _c set word erase character to _c (default control W). + llnneexxtt _c set literal next character to _c (default control + V). + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + ioctl(2), tabs(1), tset(1), tty(4) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/style.0 b/usr/man/cat1/style.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d3cc5ac652 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/style.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +STYLE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual STYLE(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + style - analyze surface characteristics of a document + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ssttyyllee [ --mmll ] [ --mmmm ] [ --aa ] [ --ee ] [ --ll num ] [ --rr num ] [ + --pp ] [ --PP ] file ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_t_y_l_e analyzes the surface characteristics of the writing + style of a document. It reports on readability, sentence + length and structure, word length and usage, verb type, and + sentence openers. Because _s_t_y_l_e runs _d_e_r_o_f_f before looking + at the text, formatting header files should be included as + part of the input. The default macro package --mmss may be + overridden with the flag --mmmm.. The flag --mmll, which causes + ddeerrooffff to skip lists, should be used if the document con- + tains many lists of non-sentences. The other options are + used to locate sentences with certain characteristics. + + --aa print all sentences with their length and readability + index. + + --ee print all sentences that begin with an expletive. + + --pp print all sentences that contain a passive verb. + + --ll_n_u_m + print all sentences longer than _n_u_m. + + --rr_n_u_m + print all sentences whose readability index is greater + than _n_u_m. + + --PP print parts of speech of the words in the document. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + deroff(1), diction(1) + +BBUUGGSS + Use of non-standard formatting macros may cause incorrect + sentence breaks. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/su.0 b/usr/man/cat1/su.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bd6e464f04 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/su.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +SU(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SU(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + su - substitute user id temporarily + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ssuu [ -f ] [ - ] [ userid ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_u demands the password of the specified _u_s_e_r_i_d, and if it + is given, changes to that _u_s_e_r_i_d and invokes the Shell _s_h(1) + or _c_s_h(1) without changing the current directory. The user + environment is unchanged except for HOME and SHELL, which + are taken from the password file for the user being substi- + tuted (see _e_n_v_i_r_o_n(7)). The new user ID stays in force + until the Shell exits. + + If no _u_s_e_r_i_d is specified, ``root'' is assumed. Only users + in the ``wheel'' group (group 0) can _s_u to ``root'', even + with the root password. To remind the super-user of his + responsibilities, the Shell substitutes `#' for its usual + prompt. + + The --ff option prevents _c_s_h(1) from executing the .cshrc + file; thus making _s_u start up faster. + + The -- option simulates a full login. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + sh(1), csh(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/sum.0 b/usr/man/cat1/sum.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f64713ba20 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/sum.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +SUM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SUM(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + sum - sum and count blocks in a file + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ssuumm file + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_u_m calculates and prints a 16-bit checksum for the named + file, and also prints the number of blocks in the file. It + is typically used to look for bad spots, or to validate a + file communicated over some transmission line. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + wc(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + `Read error' is indistinguishable from end of file on most + devices; check the block count. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/symorder.0 b/usr/man/cat1/symorder.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9590a4845e --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/symorder.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +SYMORDER(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYMORDER(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + symorder - rearrange name list + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ssyymmoorrddeerr orderlist symbolfile + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _O_r_d_e_r_l_i_s_t is a file containing symbols to be found in sym- + bolfile, 1 symbol per line. + + _S_y_m_b_o_l_f_i_l_e is updated in place to put the requested symbols + first in the symbol table, in the order specified. This is + done by swapping the old symbols in the required spots with + the new ones. If all of the order symbols are not found, an + error is generated. + + This program was specifically designed to cut down on the + overhead of getting symbols from /vmunix. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + nlist(3) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/sysline.0 b/usr/man/cat1/sysline.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4474a45408 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/sysline.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +SYSLINE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYSLINE(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + sysline - display system status on status line of a terminal + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ssyysslliinnee [ --bbccddeewwhhDDiillmmppqqrrssjj ] [ --HH rreemmoottee ] [ ++NN ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_y_s_l_i_n_e runs in the background and periodically displays + system status information on the status line of the termi- + nal. Not all terminals contain a status line. Those that + do include the h19, concept 108, Ann Arbor Ambassador, + vt100, Televideo 925/950 and Freedom 100. If no flags are + given, _s_y_s_l_i_n_e displays the time of day, the current load + average, the change in load average in the last 5 minutes, + the number of users (followed by a `u'), the number of runn- + able process (followed by a `r')[VAX only], the number of + suspended processes (followed by a `s')[VAX only], and the + users who have logged on and off since the last status + report. Finally, if new mail has arrived, a summary of it + is printed. If there is unread mail in your mailbox, an + asterisk will appear after the display of the number of + users. The display is normally in reverse video (if your + terminal supports this in the status line) and is right jus- + tified to reduce distraction. Every fifth display is done + in normal video to give the screen a chance to rest. + + If you have a file named .who in your home directory, then + the contents of that file is printed first. One common use + of this feature is to alias chdir, pushd, and popd to place + the current directory stack in ~/.who after it changes the + new directory. + + The following flags may be given on the command line. + + --bb Beep once every half hour and twice every hour, + just like those obnoxious watches you keep hear- + ing. + + --cc Clear the status line for 5 seconds before each + redisplay. + + --dd Debug mode -- print status line data in human + readable format. + + --DD Print out the current day/date before the time. + + --ee Print out only the information. Do not print + out the control commands necessary to put the + information on the bottom line. This option is + useful for putting the output of _s_y_s_l_i_n_e onto + the mode line of an emacs window. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 1 + + + + + + +SYSLINE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYSLINE(1) + + + + --ww Window mode -- print the status on the current + line of the terminal, suitable for use inside a + one line window. + + --HH rreemmoottee Print the load average on the remote host _r_e_m_o_t_e + [VAX only]. If the host is down, or is not + sending out _r_w_h_o_d packets, then the down time is + printed instead. If the prefix "ucb" is + present, then it is removed. + + --hh Print out the host machine's name after the time + [VAX only]. + + --ll Don't print the names of people who log in and + out. + + --mm Don't check for mail. + + --pp Don't report the number of process which are + runnable and suspended. + + --rr Don't display in reverse video. + + ++NN Update the status line every N seconds. The + default is 60 seconds. + + --qq Don't print out diagnostic messages if something + goes wrong when starting up. + + --ii Print out the process id of the _s_y_s_l_i_n_e process + onto standard output upon startup. With this + information you can send the alarm signal to the + _s_y_s_l_i_n_e process to cause it to update immedi- + ately. _s_y_s_l_i_n_e writes to the standard error, so + you can redirect the standard output into a file + to catch the process id. + + --ss Print "short" form of line by left-justifying + _i_f_f escapes are not allowed in the status line. + Some terminals (the Televideos and Freedom 100 + for example) do not allow cursor movement (or + other "intelligent" operations) in the status + line. For these terminals, _s_y_s_l_i_n_e normally + uses blanks to cause right-justification. This + flag will disable the adding of the blanks. + + --jj Force the sysline output to be left justified + even on terminals capable of cursor movement on + the status line. + + If you have a file .syslinelock in your home directory, then + _s_y_s_l_i_n_e will not update its statistics and write on your + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 2 + + + + + + +SYSLINE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYSLINE(1) + + + + screen, it will just go to sleep for a minute. This is use- + ful if you want to momentarily disable _s_y_s_l_i_n_e. Note that it + may take a few seconds from the time the lock file is + created until you are guaranteed that _s_y_s_l_i_n_e will not write + on the screen. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/utmp names of people who are logged in + /dev/kmem contains process table [VAX only] + /usr/spool/rwho/whod.* who/uptime information for remote hosts [VAX only] + ${HOME}/.who information to print on bottom line + ${HOME}/.syslinelock when it exists, sysline will not print + +AAUUTTHHOORRSS + John Foderaro + Tom Ferrin converted it to use termcap. + Mark Horton added terminfo capability. + +BBUUGGSS + If you interrupt the display then you may find your cursor + missing or stuck on the status line. The best thing to do + is reset the terminal. + If there is too much for one line, the excess is thrown + away. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/systat.0 b/usr/man/cat1/systat.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..169314bf2c --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/systat.0 @@ -0,0 +1,462 @@ + + + +SYSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYSTAT(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + systat - display system statistics on a crt + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ssyyssttaatt [ -_d_i_s_p_l_a_y ] [ refresh-interval ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + SSyyssttaatt displays various system statistics in a screen + oriented fashion using the curses screen display library, + _c_u_r_s_e_s(3X). + + While _s_y_s_t_a_t is running the screen is usually divided into + two windows (an exception is the vmstat display which uses + the entire screen). The upper window depicts the current + system load average. The information displayed in the lower + window may vary, depending on user commands. The last line + on the screen is reserved for user input and error messages. + + By default _s_y_s_t_a_t displays the processes getting the largest + percentage of the processor in the lower window. Other + displays show swap space usage, disk i/o statistics (a la + _i_o_s_t_a_t(1)), virtual memory statistics (a la _v_m_s_t_a_t(1)), net- + work ``mbuf'' utilization, and network connections (a la + _n_e_t_s_t_a_t(1)). + + Input is interpreted at two different levels. A ``global'' + command interpreter processes all keyboard input. If this + command interpreter fails to recognize a command, the input + line is passed to a per-display command interpreter. This + allows each display to have certain display-specific com- + mands. + + Certain characters cause immediate action by _s_y_s_t_a_t. These + are + + ^L Refresh the screen. + + ^G Print the name of the current ``display'' being shown + in the lower window and the refresh interval. + + ^Z Stop _s_y_s_t_a_t. + + : Move the cursor to the command line and interpret the + input line typed as a command. While entering a com- + mand the current character erase, word erase, and line + kill characters may be used. + + The following commands are interpreted by the ``global'' + command interpreter. + + help + Print the names of the available displays on the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 October 3, 1987 1 + + + + + + +SYSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYSTAT(1) + + + + command line. + + load + Print the load average over the past 1, 5, and 15 + minutes on the command line. + + stop + Stop refreshing the screen. + + [ start ] [ number ] + Start (continue) refreshing the screen. If a second, + numeric, argument is provided it is interpreted as a + refresh interval (in seconds). Supplying only a number + will set the refresh interval to this value. + + quit + Exit _s_y_s_t_a_t. (This may be abbreviated to _q.) + + The available displays are: + + pigs + Display, in the lower window, those processes resident + in main memory and getting the largest portion of the + processor (the default display). When less than 100% of + the processor is scheduled to user processes, the + remaining time is accounted to the ``idle'' process. + + iostat + Display, in the lower window, statistics about proces- + sor use and disk throughput. Statistics on processor + use appear as bar graphs of the amount of time execut- + ing in user mode (``user''), in user mode running low + priority processes (``nice''), in system mode (``sys- + tem''), and idle (``idle''). Statistics on disk + throughput show, for each drive, kilobytes of data + transferred, number of disk transactions performed, and + average seek time (in milliseconds). This information + may be displayed as bar graphs or as rows of numbers + which scroll downward. Bar graphs are shown by + default; commands specific to this display are dis- + cussed below. + + swap + Display, in the lower window, swap space in use on each + swap device configured. Two sets of bar graphs are + shown. The upper graph displays swap space allocated + to pure text segments (code), the lower graph displays + space allocated to stack and data segments. Allocated + space is sorted by its size into buckets of size dmmin, + dmmin*2, dmmin*4, up to dmmax (to reflect allocation + policies imposed by the system). The disk segment + size, in sectors, is displayed along the left hand side + + + +Printed 7/9/88 October 3, 1987 2 + + + + + + +SYSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYSTAT(1) + + + + of the text, and data and stack graphs. Space allo- + cated to the user structure and page tables is not + currently accounted for. + + mbufs + Display, in the lower window, the number of mbufs allo- + cated for particular uses, i.e. data, socket struc- + tures, etc. + + vmstat + Take over the entire display and show a (rather + crowded) compendium of statistics related to virtual + memory usage, process scheduling, device interrupts, + system name translation cacheing, disk i/o, etc. + + The upper left quadrant of the screen shows the number + of users logged in and the load average over the last + one, five, and fifteen minute intervals. Below this + line are statistics on memory utilization. The first + row of the table reports memory usage only among active + processes, that is processes that have run in the pre- + vious twenty seconds. The second row reports on memory + usage of all processes. The first column reports on + the number of physical pages claimed by processes. The + second column reports the number of physical pages that + are devoted to read only text pages. The third and + fourth columns report the same two figures for virtual + pages, that is the number of pages that would be needed + if all processes had all of their pages. Finally the + last column shows the number of physical pages on the + free list. + + Below the memory display is the disk usage display. It + reports the number of seeks, transfers, and number of + kilobyte blocks transferred per second averaged over + the refresh period of the display (by default, five + seconds). For some disks it also reports the average + milliseconds per seek. Note that the system only keeps + statistics on at most four disks. + + Below the disk display is a list of the average number + of processes (over the last refresh interval) that are + runnable (`r'), in page wait (`p'), in disk wait other + than paging (`d'), sleeping (`s'), and swapped out but + desiring to run (`w'). Below the queue length listing + is a numerical listing and a bar graph showing the + amount of system (shown as `='), user (shown as `>'), + nice (shown as `-'), and idle time (shown as ` '). + + At the bottom left are statistics on name translations. + It lists the number of names translated in the previous + interval, the number and percentage of the translations + + + +Printed 7/9/88 October 3, 1987 3 + + + + + + +SYSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYSTAT(1) + + + + that were handled by the system wide name translation + cache, and the number and percentage of the transla- + tions that were handled by the per process name trans- + lation cache. + + Under the date in the upper right hand quadrant are + statistics on paging and swapping activity. The first + two columns report the average number of pages brought + in and out per second over the last refresh interval + due to page faults and the paging daemon. The third + and fourth columns report the average number of pages + brought in and out per second over the last refresh + interval due to swap requests initiated by the + scheduler. The first row of the display shows the + average number of disk transfers per second over the + last refresh interval; the second row of the display + shows the average number of pages transferred per + second over the last refresh interval. + + Below the paging statistics is a line listing the aver- + age number of total reclaims ('Rec'), intransit block- + ing page faults (`It'), swap text pages found in free + list (`F/S'), file system text pages found in free list + (`F/F'), reclaims from free list (`RFL'), pages freed + by the clock daemon (`Fre'), and sequential process + pages freed (`SFr') per second over the refresh inter- + val. + + Below this line are statistics on the average number of + zero filled pages (`zf') and demand filled text pages + (`xf') per second over the refresh period. The first + row indicates the number of requests that were + resolved, the second row shows the number that were set + up, and the last row shows the percentage of setup + requests were actually used. Note that this percentage + is usually less than 100%, however it may exceed 100% + if a large number of requests are actually used long + after they were set up during a period when no new + pages are being set up. Thus this figure is most + interesting when observed over a long time period, such + as from boot time (see below on getting such a + display). + + Below the page fill statistics is a column that lists + the average number of context switches (`Csw'), traps + (`Trp'; includes page faults), system calls (`Sys'), + interrupts (`Int'), characters output to DZ ports using + pseudo-DMA (`Pdm'), network software interrupts + (`Sof'), page faults (`Flt'), pages scanned by the page + daemon (`Scn'), and revolutions of the page daemon's + hand (`Rev') per second over the refresh interval. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 October 3, 1987 4 + + + + + + +SYSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYSTAT(1) + + + + Running down the right hand side of the display is a + breakdown of the interrupts being handled by the sys- + tem. At the top of the list is the total interrupts + per second over the time interval. The rest of the + column breaks down the total on a device by device + basis. Only devices that have interrupted at least once + since boot time are shown. + + netstat + Display, in the lower window, network connections. By + default, network servers awaiting requests are not + displayed. Each address is displayed in the format + ``host.port'', with each shown symbolically, when pos- + sible. It is possible to have addresses displayed + numerically, limit the display to a set of ports, + hosts, and/or protocols; see the list of commands + below. + + Commands to switch between displays may be abbreviated to + the minimum unambiguous prefix; for example, ``io'' for + ``iostat''. Certain information may be discarded when the + screen size is insufficient for display. For example, on a + machine with 10 drives the _i_o_s_t_a_t bar graph displays only 3 + drives on a 24 line terminal. When a bar graph would over- + flow the allotted screen space it is truncated and the + actual value is printed ``over top'' of the bar. + + The following commands are specific to the _i_o_s_t_a_t display; + the minimum unambiguous prefix may be supplied. + + numbers + Show the disk i/o statistics in numeric form. Values + are displayed in numeric columns which scroll downward. + + bars Show the disk i/o statistics in bar graph form + (default). + + msps Toggle the display of average seek time (the default is + to not display seek times). + + The following commands are specific to the _v_m_s_t_a_t display; + the minimum unambiguous prefix may be supplied. + + boot Display cumulative statistics since the system was + booted. + + run Display statistics as a running total from the point + this command is given. + + time Display statistics averaged over the refresh interval + (the default). + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 October 3, 1987 5 + + + + + + +SYSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYSTAT(1) + + + + zero Reset running statistics to zero. + + The following commands are common to each display which + shows information about disk drives. These commands are + used to select a set of drives to report on, should your + system have more drives configured than can normally be + displayed on the screen. + + ignore [ drives ] + Do not display information about the drives indicated. + Multiple drives may be specified, separated by spaces. + + display [ drives ] + Display information about the drives indicated. Multi- + ple drives may be specified, separated by spaces. + + The following command is specific to the _n_e_t_s_t_a_t display; + the minimum unambiguous prefix may be supplied. + + all Toggle the displaying of server processes awaiting + requests (this is the equivalent of the --aa flag to + _n_e_t_s_t_a_t(1)). + + numbers + Display network addresses numerically. + + names + Display network addresses symbolically. + + The remaining commands are common to displays which report + network connections (currently only the _n_e_t_s_t_a_t display). + These commands may be used to select a specific set of con- + nections for _s_y_s_t_a_t to report on. + + _p_r_o_t_o_c_o_l + Display only network connections using the indicated + protocol (currently either ``tcp'' or ``udp''). + + ignore [items] + Do not display information about connections associated + with the specified hosts or ports. Hosts and ports may + be specified by name (``ucbmonet'', ``ftp''), or numer- + ically. Host addresses use the Internet dot notation + (``128.32.0.9''). Multiple items may be specified with + a single command by separating them with spaces. + + display [items] + Display information about the connections associated + with the specified hosts or ports. As for _i_g_n_o_r_e, + _i_t_e_m_s may be names or numbers. + + show [ports|hosts] + + + +Printed 7/9/88 October 3, 1987 6 + + + + + + +SYSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYSTAT(1) + + + + Show, on the command line, the currently selected pro- + tocols, hosts, and ports. Hosts and ports which are + being ignored are prefixed with a `!'. If _p_o_r_t_s or + _h_o_s_t_s is supplied as an argument to _s_h_o_w, then only the + requested information will be displayed. + + reset + Reset the port, host, and protocol matching mechanisms + to the default (any protocol, port, or host). + +FFIILLEESS + /vmunix for the namelist + /dev/kmem for information in main memory + /dev/drum for information about swapped out processes + /etc/hosts for host names + /etc/networks for network names + /etc/services for port names + +AAUUTTHHOORR + The unknown hacker. The _p_i_g_s display is derived from a pro- + gram of the same name written by Bill Reeves. + +BBUUGGSS + Takes 2-10 percent of the cpu. Certain displays presume a + 24 line by 80 character terminal. The swap space display + should account for space allocated to the user structure and + page tables. The _v_m_s_t_a_t display looks out of place because + it is (it was added in as a separate display rather than + create a new program). + + The whole thing is pretty hokey and was included in the dis- + tribution under serious duress. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 October 3, 1987 7 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/tabs.0 b/usr/man/cat1/tabs.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c4c1bf1654 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/tabs.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +TABS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TABS(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + tabs - set terminal tabs + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttaabbss [ --nn ] [ terminal ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_a_b_s sets the tabs on a variety of terminals. Various ter- + minal names given in _t_e_r_m(7) are recognized; the default is, + however, suitable for most 300 baud terminals. If the --nn + flag is present then the left margin is not indented as is + normal. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + stty(1), term(7) + +BBUUGGSS + It's much better to use _t_s_e_t(1). + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/tail.0 b/usr/man/cat1/tail.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..66cdf4d73b --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/tail.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +TAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TAIL(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + tail - deliver the last part of a file + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttaaiill [++--]nnuummbbeerr[llbbcc][rrff] [ffiillee] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_a_i_l copies the named file to the standard output beginning + at a designated place. If no file is named, the standard + input is used. + + Copying begins at distance +_n_u_m_b_e_r from the beginning, or + -_n_u_m_b_e_r from the end of the input. _N_u_m_b_e_r is counted in + units of lines, blocks or characters, according to the + appended option ll,, bb or cc.. When no units are specified, + counting is by lines. + + Specifying rr causes tail to print lines from the end of the + file in reverse order. The default for rr is to print the + entire file this way. Specifying ff causes _t_a_i_l to not quit + at end of file, but rather wait and try to read repeatedly + in hopes that the file will grow. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + dd(1) + +BBUUGGSS + Tails relative to the end of the file are treasured up in a + buffer, and thus are limited in length. + + Various kinds of anomalous behavior may happen with charac- + ter special files. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 29, 1987 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/talk.0 b/usr/man/cat1/talk.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e2a07fcf3f --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/talk.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +TALK(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TALK(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + talk - talk to another user + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttaallkk person [ ttyname ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_a_l_k is a visual communication program which copies lines + from your terminal to that of another user. + + If you wish to talk to someone on your own machine, then + _p_e_r_s_o_n is just the person's login name. If you wish to talk + to a user on another host, then _p_e_r_s_o_n is of the form + _u_s_e_r@_h_o_s_t. + + If you want to talk to a user who is logged in more than + once, the _t_t_y_n_a_m_e argument may be used to indicate the + appropriate terminal name, where _t_t_y_n_a_m_e is of the form + ``ttyXX''. + + When first called, _t_a_l_k sends the message + + Message from TalkDaemon@his_machine... + talk: connection requested by your_name@your_machine. + talk: respond with: talk your_name@your_machine + + to the user you wish to talk to. At this point, the reci- + pient of the message should reply by typing + + talk your_name@your_machine + + It doesn't matter from which machine the recipient replies, + as long as his login-name is the same. Once communication + is established, the two parties may type simultaneously, + with their output appearing in separate windows. Typing + control L (^L) will cause the screen to be reprinted, while + your erase, kill, and word kill characters will behave nor- + mally. To exit, just type your interrupt character; _t_a_l_k + then moves the cursor to the bottom of the screen and + restores the terminal to its previous state. + + Permission to talk may be denied or granted by use of the + _m_e_s_g command. At the outset talking is allowed. Certain + commands, in particular _n_r_o_f_f and _p_r, disallow messages in + order to prevent messy output. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/hosts to find the recipient's machine + /etc/utmp to find the recipient's tty + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + mail(1), mesg(1), who(1), write(1) + + + +Printed 7/9/88 November 24, 1987 1 + + + + + + +TALK(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TALK(1) + + + +BBUUGGSS + The version of _t_a_l_k(1) released with 4.3BSD uses a protocol + that is incompatible with the protocol used in the version + released with 4.2BSD. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 November 24, 1987 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/tar.0 b/usr/man/cat1/tar.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d15a78e5ca --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/tar.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +TAR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TAR(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + tar - tape archiver + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttaarr [ key ] [ name ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_a_r saves and restores multiple files on a single file (usu- + ally a magnetic tape, but it can be any file). _T_a_r's actions + are controlled by the _k_e_y argument. The _k_e_y is a string of + characters containing at most one function letter and possi- + bly one or more function modifiers. Other arguments to _t_a_r + are file or directory names specifying which files to dump + or restore. In all cases, appearance of a directory name + refers to the files and (recursively) subdirectories of that + directory. + + The function portion of the key is specified by one of the + following letters: + + rr The named files are written on the end of the tape. + The cc function implies this. + + xx The named files are extracted from the tape. If the + named file matches a directory whose contents had + been written onto the tape, this directory is + (recursively) extracted. The owner, modification + time, and mode are restored (if possible). If no + file argument is given, the entire content of the + tape is extracted. Note that if multiple entries + specifying the same file are on the tape, the last + one overwrites all earlier. + + tt The names of the specified files are listed each + time they occur on the tape. If no file argument is + given, all of the names on the tape are listed. + + uu The named files are added to the tape if either they + are not already there or have been modified since + last put on the tape. + + cc Create a new tape; writing begins on the beginning + of the tape instead of after the last file. This + command implies rr. + + The following characters may be used in addition to the + letter which selects the function desired. + + oo On output, tar normally places information speci- + fying owner and modes of directories in the + archive. Former versions of tar, when encounter- + ing this information will give error message of + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 23, 1988 1 + + + + + + +TAR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TAR(1) + + + + the form + "/: cannot create". + This modifier will suppress the directory informa- + tion. + + pp This modifier says to restore files to their ori- + ginal modes, ignoring the present _u_m_a_s_k(2). + Setuid and sticky information will also be + restored to the super-user. + + 00,, ......,, 99 This modifier selects an alternate drive on which + the tape is mounted. The default is drive 0 at + 1600 bpi, which is normally /dev/rmt8. + + vv Normally _t_a_r does its work silently. The vv (ver- + bose) option makes _t_a_r print the name of each file + it treats preceded by the function letter. With + the tt function, the verbose option gives more + information about the tape entries than just their + names. + + ww _T_a_r prints the action to be taken followed by file + name, then wait for user confirmation. If a word + beginning with `y' is given, the action is done. + Any other input means don't do it. + + ff _T_a_r uses the next argument as the name of the + archive instead of /dev/rmt?. If the name of the + file is `-', tar writes to standard output or + reads from standard input, whichever is appropri- + ate. Thus, _t_a_r can be used as the head or tail of + a filter chain. _T_a_r can also be used to move + hierarchies with the command + cd fromdir; tar cf - . | (cd todir; tar xf -) + + bb _T_a_r uses the next argument as the blocking factor + for tape records. The default is 20 (the maximum). + This option should only be used with raw magnetic + tape archives (See ff above). The block size is + determined automatically when reading tapes (key + letters `x' and `t'). + + ss tells tar to strip off any leading slashes from + pathnames. + + ll tells _t_a_r to complain if it cannot resolve all of + the links to the files dumped. If this is not + specified, no error messages are printed. + + mm tells _t_a_r not to restore the modification times. + The modification time will be the time of extrac- + tion. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 23, 1988 2 + + + + + + +TAR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TAR(1) + + + + hh Force _t_a_r to follow symbolic links as if they were + normal files or directories. Normally, _t_a_r does + not follow symbolic links. + + BB Forces input and output blocking to 20 blocks per + record. This option was added so that _t_a_r can + work across a communications channel where the + blocking may not be maintained. + + CC If a file name is preceded by --CC, then _t_a_r will + perform a _c_h_d_i_r(2) to that file name. This allows + multiple directories not related by a close common + parent to be archived using short relative path + names. For example, to archive files from + /usr/include and from /etc, one might use + tar c -C /usr include -C / etc + + Previous restrictions dealing with _t_a_r's inability to prop- + erly handle blocked archives have been lifted. + +FFIILLEESS + /dev/rmt? + /tmp/tar* + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + tar(5) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Complaints about bad key characters and tape read/write + errors. + Complaints if enough memory is not available to hold the + link tables. + +BBUUGGSS + There is no way to ask for the _n-th occurrence of a file. + Tape errors are handled ungracefully. + The uu option can be slow. + The current limit on file name length is 100 characters. + There is no way selectively to follow symbolic links. + When extracting tapes created with the rr or uu options, + directory modification times may not be set correctly. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 23, 1988 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/tbl.0 b/usr/man/cat1/tbl.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..05a10a4bad --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/tbl.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +TBL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TBL(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + tbl - format tables for nroff or troff + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttbbll [ files ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_b_l is a preprocessor for formatting tables for _n_r_o_f_f or + _t_r_o_f_f(1). The input files are copied to the standard out- + put, except for lines between and are reformatted. Details + are given in the _t_b_l(1) reference manual. + +EEXXAAMMPPLLEE + As an example, letting \t represent a tab (which should be + typed as a genuine tab) the input + + .TS + c s s + c c s + c c c + l n n. + Household Population + Town\tHouseholds + \tNumber\tSize + Bedminster\t789\t3.26 + Bernards Twp.\t3087\t3.74 + Bernardsville\t2018\t3.30 + Bound Brook\t3425\t3.04 + Branchburg\t1644\t3.49 + Bridgewater\t7897\t3.81 + Far Hills\t240\t3.19 + .TE + + yields + + + Household Population + Town Households + Number Size + Bedminster 789 3.26 + Bernards Twp. 3087 3.74 + Bernardsville 2018 3.30 + Bound Brook 3425 3.04 + Branchburg 1644 3.49 + Bridgewater 7897 3.81 + Far Hills 240 3.19 + + If no arguments are given, _t_b_l reads the standard input, so + it may be used as a filter. When _t_b_l is used with _e_q_n or + _n_e_q_n the _t_b_l command should be first, to minimize the volume + of data passed through pipes. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +TBL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TBL(1) + + + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + troff(1), eqn(1) + M. E. Lesk, _T_B_L. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/tc.0 b/usr/man/cat1/tc.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e37974bece --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/tc.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +TC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TC(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + tc - photoypesetter simulator + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttcc [ --tt ] [ --ssN ] [ --ppL ] [ file ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_c interprets its input (standard input default) as device + codes for a Graphic Systems phototypesetter (cat). The + standard output of _t_c is intended for a Tektronix 4015 (a + 4014 terminal with ASCII and APL character sets). The six- + teen typesetter sizes are mapped into the 4014's four sizes; + the entire TROFF character set is drawn using the 4014's + character generator, using overstruck combinations where + necessary. Typical usage: + + troff -t file | tc + + At the end of each page _t_c waits for a newline (empty line) + from the keyboard before continuing on to the next page. In + this wait state, the command ee will suppress the screen + erase before the next page; ssN will cause the next N pages + to be skipped; and !!line will send line to the shell. + + The command line options are: + + --tt Don't wait between pages; for directing output into a + file. + + --ssN Skip the first N pages. + + --ppL Set page length to L. L may include the scale factors + pp (points), ii (inches), cc (centimeters), and PP (picas); + default is picas. + + ''--_l _w'' + Multiply the default aspect ratio, 1.5, of a displayed + page by _l/_w. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + troff(1), plot(1G) + +BBUUGGSS + Font distinctions are lost. + _t_c's character set is limited to ASCII in just one size. + The aspect ratio option is unbelievable. + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/tcopy.0 b/usr/man/cat1/tcopy.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9747a70670 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/tcopy.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +TCOPY(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TCOPY(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + tcopy - copy and/or verify mag tapes + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttccooppyy [ -cv ] [ -s maxblk ] [src [ dest ]] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_c_o_p_y is designed to copy magnetic tapes. The only assump- + tion made about the tape is that there are two tape marks at + the end. _T_c_o_p_y with only a source tape (rrmmtt00 by default) + specified will print information about the sizes of records + and tape files. If a destination is specified a copy will + be made of the source tape. The blocking on the destination + tape will be identical to that used on the source tape. + Copying a tape will yield the same output as if just print- + ing the sizes. + + The --ss option allows you to specify a maximum block size. + The --vv option verifies that two tapes are identical. The --cc + option does the copy and then verifies that the two tapes + are identical. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + mtio(4) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 July 9, 1988 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/tee.0 b/usr/man/cat1/tee.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ce06581cbc --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/tee.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +TEE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TEE(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + tee - pipe fitting + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + tteeee [ --ii ] [ --aa ] [ file ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_e_e transcribes the standard input to the standard output + and makes copies in the _f_i_l_e_s. Option --ii ignores interrupts; + option --aa causes the output to be appended to the _f_i_l_e_s + rather than overwriting them. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/telnet.0 b/usr/man/cat1/telnet.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a191216440 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/telnet.0 @@ -0,0 +1,396 @@ + + + +TELNET(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TELNET(1C) + + + +NNAAMMEE + telnet - user interface to the TELNET protocol + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + telnet [ host [ port ] ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_e_l_n_e_t is used to communicate with another host using the + TTEELLNNEETT protocol. If _t_e_l_n_e_t is invoked without arguments, it + enters command mode, indicated by its prompt ("telnet>"). + In this mode, it accepts and executes the commands listed + below. If it is invoked with arguments, it performs an ooppeenn + command (see below) with those arguments. + + Once a connection has been opened, _t_e_l_n_e_t enters an input + mode. The input mode entered will be either "character at a + time" or "line by line" depending on what the remote system + supports. + + In "character at a time" mode, most text typed is immedi- + ately sent to the remote host for processing. + + In "line by line" mode, all text is echoed locally, and + (normally) only completed lines are sent to the remote host. + The "local echo character" (initially "^E") may be used to + turn off and on the local echo (this would mostly be used to + enter passwords without the password being echoed). + + In either mode, if the _l_o_c_a_l_c_h_a_r_s toggle is TRUE (the + default in line mode; see below), the user's _q_u_i_t, _i_n_t_r, and + _f_l_u_s_h characters are trapped locally, and sent as TTEELLNNEETT + protocol sequences to the remote side. There are options + (see ttooggggllee _a_u_t_o_f_l_u_s_h and ttooggggllee _a_u_t_o_s_y_n_c_h below) which + cause this action to flush subsequent output to the terminal + (until the remote host acknowledges the TTEELLNNEETT sequence) and + flush previous terminal input (in the case of _q_u_i_t and + _i_n_t_r). + + While connected to a remote host, _t_e_l_n_e_t command mode may be + entered by typing the _t_e_l_n_e_t "escape character" (initially + "^]"). When in command mode, the normal terminal editing + conventions are available. + + CCOOMMMMAANNDDSS + + The following commands are available. Only enough of each + command to uniquely identify it need be typed (this is also + true for arguments to the mmooddee, sseett, ttooggggllee, and ddiissppllaayy + commands). + + ooppeenn _h_o_s_t [ _p_o_r_t ] + Open a connection to the named host. If no port number + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 1 + + + + + + +TELNET(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TELNET(1C) + + + + is specified, _t_e_l_n_e_t will attempt to contact a TTEELLNNEETT + server at the default port. The host specification may + be either a host name (see _h_o_s_t_s(5)) or an Internet + address specified in the "dot notation" (see _i_n_e_t(3N)). + + cclloossee + Close a TTEELLNNEETT session and return to command mode. + + qquuiitt + Close any open TTEELLNNEETT session and exit _t_e_l_n_e_t. An end + of file (in command mode) will also close a session and + exit. + + zz + Suspend _t_e_l_n_e_t. This command only works when the user + is using the _c_s_h(1). + + mmooddee _t_y_p_e + _T_y_p_e is either _l_i_n_e (for "line by line" mode) or _c_h_a_r_- + _a_c_t_e_r (for "character at a time" mode). The remote + host is asked for permission to go into the requested + mode. If the remote host is capable of entering that + mode, the requested mode will be entered. + + ssttaattuuss + Show the current status of _t_e_l_n_e_t. This includes the + peer one is connected to, as well as the current mode. + + ddiissppllaayy [ _a_r_g_u_m_e_n_t... ] + Displays all, or some, of the sseett and ttooggggllee values + (see below). + + ?? [ _c_o_m_m_a_n_d ] + Get help. With no arguments, _t_e_l_n_e_t prints a help sum- + mary. If a command is specified, _t_e_l_n_e_t will print the + help information for just that command. + + sseenndd _a_r_g_u_m_e_n_t_s + Sends one or more special character sequences to the + remote host. The following are the arguments which may + be specified (more than one argument may be specified + at a time): + + _e_s_c_a_p_e + Sends the current _t_e_l_n_e_t escape character (ini- + tially "^]"). + + _s_y_n_c_h + Sends the TTEELLNNEETT SSYYNNCCHH sequence. This sequence + causes the remote system to discard all previously + typed (but not yet read) input. This sequence is + sent as TCP urgent data (and may not work if the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 2 + + + + + + +TELNET(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TELNET(1C) + + + + remote system is a 4.2 BSD system -- if it doesn't + work, a lower case "r" may be echoed on the termi- + nal). + + _b_r_k + Sends the TTEELLNNEETT BBRRKK (Break) sequence, which may + have significance to the remote system. + + _i_p + Sends the TTEELLNNEETT IIPP (Interrupt Process) sequence, + which should cause the remote system to abort the + currently running process. + + _a_o + Sends the TTEELLNNEETT AAOO (Abort Output) sequence, which + should cause the remote system to flush all output + ffrroomm the remote system ttoo the user's terminal. + + _a_y_t + Sends the TTEELLNNEETT AAYYTT (Are You There) sequence, to + which the remote system may or may not choose to + respond. + + _e_c + Sends the TTEELLNNEETT EECC (Erase Character) sequence, + which should cause the remote system to erase the + last character entered. + + _e_l + Sends the TTEELLNNEETT EELL (Erase Line) sequence, which + should cause the remote system to erase the line + currently being entered. + + _g_a + Sends the TTEELLNNEETT GGAA (Go Ahead) sequence, which + likely has no significance to the remote system. + + _n_o_p + Sends the TTEELLNNEETT NNOOPP (No OPeration) sequence. + + ? + Prints out help information for the sseenndd command. + + sseett _a_r_g_u_m_e_n_t _v_a_l_u_e + Set any one of a number of _t_e_l_n_e_t variables to a + specific value. The special value "off" turns off the + function associated with the variable. The values of + variables may be interrogated with the ddiissppllaayy command. + The variables which may be specified are: + + _e_c_h_o + This is the value (initially "^E") which, when in + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 3 + + + + + + +TELNET(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TELNET(1C) + + + + "line by line" mode, toggles between doing local + echoing of entered characters (for normal process- + ing), and suppressing echoing of entered charac- + ters (for entering, say, a password). + + _e_s_c_a_p_e + This is the _t_e_l_n_e_t escape character (initially + "^[") which causes entry into _t_e_l_n_e_t command mode + (when connected to a remote system). + + _i_n_t_e_r_r_u_p_t + If _t_e_l_n_e_t is in _l_o_c_a_l_c_h_a_r_s mode (see ttooggggllee _l_o_c_a_l_- + _c_h_a_r_s below) and the _i_n_t_e_r_r_u_p_t character is typed, + a TTEELLNNEETT IIPP sequence (see sseenndd _i_p above) is sent + to the remote host. The initial value for the + interrupt character is taken to be the terminal's + iinnttrr character. + + _q_u_i_t + If _t_e_l_n_e_t is in _l_o_c_a_l_c_h_a_r_s mode (see ttooggggllee _l_o_c_a_l_- + _c_h_a_r_s below) and the _q_u_i_t character is typed, a + TTEELLNNEETT BBRRKK sequence (see sseenndd _b_r_k above) is sent + to the remote host. The initial value for the + quit character is taken to be the terminal's qquuiitt + character. + + _f_l_u_s_h_o_u_t_p_u_t + If _t_e_l_n_e_t is in _l_o_c_a_l_c_h_a_r_s mode (see ttooggggllee _l_o_c_a_l_- + _c_h_a_r_s below) and the _f_l_u_s_h_o_u_t_p_u_t character is + typed, a TTEELLNNEETT AAOO sequence (see sseenndd _a_o above) is + sent to the remote host. The initial value for + the flush character is taken to be the terminal's + fflluusshh character. + + _e_r_a_s_e + If _t_e_l_n_e_t is in _l_o_c_a_l_c_h_a_r_s mode (see ttooggggllee _l_o_c_a_l_- + _c_h_a_r_s below), aanndd if _t_e_l_n_e_t is operating in "char- + acter at a time" mode, then when this character is + typed, a TTEELLNNEETT EECC sequence (see sseenndd _e_c above) is + sent to the remote system. The initial value for + the erase character is taken to be the terminal's + eerraassee character. + + _k_i_l_l + If _t_e_l_n_e_t is in _l_o_c_a_l_c_h_a_r_s mode (see ttooggggllee _l_o_c_a_l_- + _c_h_a_r_s below), aanndd if _t_e_l_n_e_t is operating in "char- + acter at a time" mode, then when this character is + typed, a TTEELLNNEETT EELL sequence (see sseenndd _e_l above) is + sent to the remote system. The initial value for + the kill character is taken to be the terminal's + kkiillll character. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 4 + + + + + + +TELNET(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TELNET(1C) + + + + _e_o_f + If _t_e_l_n_e_t is operating in "line by line" mode, + entering this character as the first character on + a line will cause this character to be sent to the + remote system. The initial value of the eof char- + acter is taken to be the terminal's eeooff character. + + ttooggggllee _a_r_g_u_m_e_n_t_s... + Toggle (between TRUE and FALSE) various flags that con- + trol how _t_e_l_n_e_t responds to events. More than one + argument may be specified. The state of these flags + may be interrogated with the ddiissppllaayy command. Valid + arguments are: + + _l_o_c_a_l_c_h_a_r_s + If this is TRUE, then the _f_l_u_s_h, _i_n_t_e_r_r_u_p_t, _q_u_i_t, + _e_r_a_s_e, and _k_i_l_l characters (see sseett above) are + recognized locally, and transformed into (hope- + fully) appropriate TTEELLNNEETT control sequences + (respectively _a_o, _i_p, _b_r_k, _e_c, and _e_l; see sseenndd + above). The initial value for this toggle is TRUE + in "line by line" mode, and FALSE in "character at + a time" mode. + + _a_u_t_o_f_l_u_s_h + If _a_u_t_o_f_l_u_s_h and _l_o_c_a_l_c_h_a_r_s are both TRUE, then + when the _a_o, _i_n_t_r, or _q_u_i_t characters are recog- + nized (and transformed into TTEELLNNEETT sequences; see + sseett above for details), _t_e_l_n_e_t refuses to display + any data on the user's terminal until the remote + system acknowledges (via a TTEELLNNEETT _T_i_m_i_n_g _M_a_r_k + option) that it has processed those TTEELLNNEETT + sequences. The initial value for this toggle is + TRUE if the terminal user had not done an "stty + noflsh", otherwise FALSE (see _s_t_t_y(_1)). + + _a_u_t_o_s_y_n_c_h + If _a_u_t_o_s_y_n_c_h and _l_o_c_a_l_c_h_a_r_s are both TRUE, then + when either the _i_n_t_r or _q_u_i_t characters is typed + (see sseett above for descriptions of the _i_n_t_r and + _q_u_i_t characters), the resulting TTEELLNNEETT sequence + sent is followed by the TTEELLNNEETT SSYYNNCCHH sequence. + This procedure sshhoouulldd cause the remote system to + begin throwing away all previously typed input + until both of the TTEELLNNEETT sequences have been read + and acted upon. The initial value of this toggle + is FALSE. + + _c_r_m_o_d + Toggle carriage return mode. When this mode is + enabled, most carriage return characters received + from the remote host will be mapped into a + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 5 + + + + + + +TELNET(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TELNET(1C) + + + + carriage return followed by a line feed. This + mode does not affect those characters typed by the + user, only those received from the remote host. + This mode is not very useful unless the remote + host only sends carriage return, but never line + feed. The initial value for this toggle is FALSE. + + _d_e_b_u_g + Toggles socket level debugging (useful only to the + _s_u_p_e_ruser). The initial value for this toggle is + FALSE. + + _o_p_t_i_o_n_s + Toggles the display of some internal _t_e_l_n_e_t proto- + col processing (having to do with TTEELLNNEETT options). + The initial value for this toggle is FALSE. + + _n_e_t_d_a_t_a + Toggles the display of all network data (in hexa- + decimal format). The initial value for this tog- + gle is FALSE. + + ? + Displays the legal ttooggggllee commands. + +BBUUGGSS + There is no adequate way for dealing with flow control. + + On some remote systems, echo has to be turned off manually + when in "line by line" mode. + + There is enough settable state to justify a ._t_e_l_n_e_t_r_c file. + + No capability for a ._t_e_l_n_e_t_r_c file is provided. + + In "line by line" mode, the terminal's _e_o_f character is only + recognized (and sent to the remote system) when it is the + first character on a line. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 6 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/test.0 b/usr/man/cat1/test.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..56949d8bad --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/test.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +TEST(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TEST(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + test - condition command + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + tteesstt expr + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _t_e_s_t evaluates the expression _e_x_p_r, and if its value is true + then returns zero exit status; otherwise, a non zero exit + status is returned. _t_e_s_t returns a non zero exit if there + are no arguments. + + The following primitives are used to construct _e_x_p_r. + + --rr file true if the file exists and is readable. + + --ww file true if the file exists and is writable. + + --ff file true if the file exists and is not a directory. + + --dd file true if the file exists and is a directory. + + --ss file true if the file exists and has a size greater than + zero. + + --tt [ fildes ] + true if the open file whose file descriptor number + is _f_i_l_d_e_s (1 by default) is associated with a ter- + minal device. + + --zz s1 true if the length of string _s_1 is zero. + + --nn s1 true if the length of the string _s_1 is nonzero. + + s1 == s2 true if the strings _s_1 and _s_2 are equal. + + s1 !!== s2 true if the strings _s_1 and _s_2 are not equal. + + s1 true if _s_1 is not the null string. + + n1 --eeqq n2 + true if the integers _n_1 and _n_2 are algebraically + equal. Any of the comparisons --nnee, --ggtt, --ggee, --lltt, + or --llee may be used in place of --eeqq. + + These primaries may be combined with the following opera- + tors: + + !! unary negation operator + + --aa binary _a_n_d operator + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 22, 1987 1 + + + + + + +TEST(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TEST(1) + + + + --oo binary _o_r operator + + (( expr )) + parentheses for grouping. + + --aa has higher precedence than --oo.. Notice that all the opera- + tors and flags are separate arguments to _t_e_s_t. Notice also + that parentheses are meaningful to the Shell and must be + escaped. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + sh(1), find(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 September 22, 1987 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/tftp.0 b/usr/man/cat1/tftp.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..efaca1c9da --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/tftp.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +TFTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TFTP(1C) + + + +NNAAMMEE + tftp - trivial file transfer program + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttffttpp [ host ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_f_t_p is the user interface to the Internet TFTP (Trivial + File Transfer Protocol), which allows users to transfer + files to and from a remote machine. The remote _h_o_s_t may be + specified on the command line, in which case _t_f_t_p uses _h_o_s_t + as the default host for future transfers (see the ccoonnnneecctt + command below). + +CCOOMMMMAANNDDSS + Once _t_f_t_p is running, it issues the prompt ttffttpp>> and recog- + nizes the following commands: + + ccoonnnneecctt _h_o_s_t-_n_a_m_e [ _p_o_r_t ] + Set the _h_o_s_t (and optionally _p_o_r_t) for transfers. Note + that the TFTP protocol, unlike the FTP protocol, does + not maintain connections betweeen transfers; thus, the + _c_o_n_n_e_c_t command does not actually create a connection, + but merely remembers what host is to be used for + transfers. You do not have to use the _c_o_n_n_e_c_t command; + the remote host can be specified as part of the _g_e_t or + _p_u_t commands. + + mmooddee _t_r_a_n_s_f_e_r-_m_o_d_e + Set the mode for transfers; _t_r_a_n_s_f_e_r-_m_o_d_e may be one of + _a_s_c_i_i or _b_i_n_a_r_y. The default is _a_s_c_i_i. + + ppuutt _f_i_l_e + ppuutt _l_o_c_a_l_f_i_l_e _r_e_m_o_t_e_f_i_l_e + ppuutt _f_i_l_e_1 _f_i_l_e_2 ... _f_i_l_e_N _r_e_m_o_t_e-_d_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y + Put a file or set of files to the specified remote file + or directory. The destination can be in one of two + forms: a filename on the remote host, if the host has + already been specified, or a string of the form + _h_o_s_t:_f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e to specify both a host and filename at + the same time. If the latter form is used, the host- + name specified becomes the default for future + transfers. If the remote-directory form is used, the + remote host is assumed to be a _U_N_I_X machine. + + ggeett _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e + ggeett _r_e_m_o_t_e_n_a_m_e _l_o_c_a_l_n_a_m_e + ggeett _f_i_l_e_1 _f_i_l_e_2 ... _f_i_l_e_N + Get a file or set of files from the specified _s_o_u_r_c_e_s. + _S_o_u_r_c_e can be in one of two forms: a filename on the + remote host, if the host has already been specified, or + a string of the form _h_o_s_t:_f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e to specify both a + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 20, 1986 1 + + + + + + +TFTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TFTP(1C) + + + + host and filename at the same time. If the latter form + is used, the last hostname specified becomes the + default for future transfers. + + qquuiitt Exit _t_f_t_p. An end of file also exits. + + vveerrbboossee + Toggle verbose mode. + + ttrraaccee + Toggle packet tracing. + + ssttaattuuss + Show current status. + + rreexxmmtt _r_e_t_r_a_n_s_m_i_s_s_i_o_n-_t_i_m_e_o_u_t + Set the per-packet retransmission timeout, in seconds. + + ttiimmeeoouutt _t_o_t_a_l-_t_r_a_n_s_m_i_s_s_i_o_n-_t_i_m_e_o_u_t + Set the total transmission timeout, in seconds. + + aasscciiii + Shorthand for "mode ascii" + + bbiinnaarryy + Shorthand for "mode binary" + + ?? [ _c_o_m_m_a_n_d-_n_a_m_e ... ] + Print help information. + +BBUUGGSS + Because there is no user-login or validation within the _T_F_T_P + protocol, the remote site will probably have some sort of + file-access restrictions in place. The exact methods are + specific to each site and therefore difficult to document + here. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 20, 1986 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/time.0 b/usr/man/cat1/time.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f1e9607035 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/time.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +TIME(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIME(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + time - time a command + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttiimmee [-l] command + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + The given command is executed; after it is complete, _t_i_m_e + prints the elapsed time during the command, the time spent + in the system, and the time spent in execution of the com- + mand. Times are reported in seconds. If the --ll option is + supplied, the contents of the _r_u_s_a_g_e structure are printed + as well. + + On a PDP-11, the execution time can depend on what kind of + memory the program happens to land in; the user time in MOS + is often half what it is in core. + + The times are printed on the diagnostic output stream, + ``stderr''. + + _T_i_m_e is a built-in command to _c_s_h(1), with a much different + syntax. This command is available as ``/bin/time'' to _c_s_h + users. + +BBUUGGSS + Elapsed time is accurate to the second, while the CPU times + are measured to the 100th second. Thus the sum of the CPU + times can be up to a second larger than the elapsed time. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + include/sys/h/resource.h + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 November 17, 1987 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/tip.0 b/usr/man/cat1/tip.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3cb1c859d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/tip.0 @@ -0,0 +1,396 @@ + + + +TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C) + + + +NNAAMMEE + tip, cu - connect to a remote system + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttiipp [ --vv ] [ --_s_p_e_e_d ] system-name + ttiipp [ --vv ] [ --_s_p_e_e_d ] phone-number + ccuu phone-number [ --tt ] [ --ss _s_p_e_e_d ] [ --aa _a_c_u ] [ --ll _l_i_n_e ] + [ --## ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_i_p and _c_u establish a full-duplex connection to another + machine, giving the appearance of being logged in directly + on the remote cpu. It goes without saying that you must + have a login on the machine (or equivalent) to which you + wish to connect. The preferred interface is _t_i_p. The _c_u + interface is included for those people attached to the + ``call UNIX'' command of version 7. This manual page + describes only _t_i_p. + + Typed characters are normally transmitted directly to the + remote machine (which does the echoing as well). A tilde + (`~') appearing as the first character of a line is an + escape signal; the following are recognized: + + ~~^^DD ~~.. Drop the connection and exit (you may still be + logged in on the remote machine). + + ~~cc [_n_a_m_e] + Change directory to name (no argument implies + change to your home directory). + + ~~!! Escape to a shell (exiting the shell will return + you to tip). + + ~~>> Copy file from local to remote. _T_i_p prompts for + the name of a local file to transmit. + + ~~<< Copy file from remote to local. _T_i_p prompts first + for the name of the file to be sent, then for a + command to be executed on the remote machine. + + ~~pp _f_r_o_m [ _t_o ] + Send a file to a remote UNIX host. The put com- + mand causes the remote UNIX system to run the com- + mand string ``cat > 'to''', while _t_i_p sends it the + ``from'' file. If the ``to'' file isn't specified + the ``from'' file name is used. This command is + actually a UNIX specific version of the ``~>'' + command. + + ~~tt _f_r_o_m [ _t_o ] + Take a file from a remote UNIX host. As in the put + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1 + + + + + + +TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C) + + + + command the ``to'' file defaults to the ``from'' + file name if it isn't specified. The remote host + executes the command string ``cat 'from';echo ^A'' + to send the file to _t_i_p. + + ~~|| Pipe the output from a remote command to a local + UNIX process. The command string sent to the + local UNIX system is processed by the shell. + + ~~$$ Pipe the output from a local UNIX process to the + remote host. The command string sent to the local + UNIX system is processed by the shell. + + ~~## Send a BREAK to the remote system. For systems + which don't support the necessary _i_o_c_t_l call the + break is simulated by a sequence of line speed + changes and DEL characters. + + ~~ss Set a variable (see the discussion below). + + ~~^^ZZ Stop _t_i_p (only available with job control). + + ~~^^YY Stop only the ``local side'' of _t_i_p (only avail- + able with job control); the ``remote side'' of + _t_i_p, the side that displays output from the remote + host, is left running. + + ~~?? Get a summary of the tilde escapes + + + _T_i_p uses the file /etc/remote to find how to reach a partic- + ular system and to find out how it should operate while + talking to the system; refer to _r_e_m_o_t_e(5) for a full + description. Each system has a default baud rate with which + to establish a connection. If this value is not suitable, + the baud rate to be used may be specified on the command + line, e.g. ``tip -300 mds''. + + When _t_i_p establishes a connection it sends out a connection + message to the remote system; the default value, if any, is + defined in /etc/remote. + + When _t_i_p prompts for an argument (e.g. during setup of a + file transfer) the line typed may be edited with the stan- + dard erase and kill characters. A null line in response to + a prompt, or an interrupt, will abort the dialogue and + return you to the remote machine. + + _T_i_p guards against multiple users connecting to a remote + system by opening modems and terminal lines with exclusive + access, and by honoring the locking protocol used by + _u_u_c_p(1C). + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2 + + + + + + +TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C) + + + + During file transfers _t_i_p provides a running count of the + number of lines transferred. When using the ~> and ~< com- + mands, the ``eofread'' and ``eofwrite'' variables are used + to recognize end-of-file when reading, and specify end-of- + file when writing (see below). File transfers normally + depend on tandem mode for flow control. If the remote sys- + tem does not support tandem mode, ``echocheck'' may be set + to indicate _t_i_p should synchronize with the remote system on + the echo of each transmitted character. + + When _t_i_p must dial a phone number to connect to a system it + will print various messages indicating its actions. _T_i_p + supports the DEC DN-11 and Racal-Vadic 831 auto-call-units; + the DEC DF02 and DF03, Ventel 212+, Racal-Vadic 3451, and + Bizcomp 1031 and 1032 integral call unit/modems. + + VVAARRIIAABBLLEESS + + _T_i_p maintains a set of _v_a_r_i_a_b_l_e_s which control its opera- + tion. Some of these variable are read-only to normal users + (root is allowed to change anything of interest). Variables + may be displayed and set through the ``s'' escape. The syn- + tax for variables is patterned after _v_i(1) and _M_a_i_l(1). + Supplying ``all'' as an argument to the set command displays + all variables readable by the user. Alternatively, the user + may request display of a particular variable by attaching a + `?' to the end. For example ``escape?'' displays the + current escape character. + + Variables are numeric, string, character, or boolean values. + Boolean variables are set merely by specifying their name; + they may be reset by prepending a `!' to the name. Other + variable types are set by concatenating an `=' and the + value. The entire assignment must not have any blanks in + it. A single set command may be used to interrogate as well + as set a number of variables. Variables may be initialized + at run time by placing set commands (without the ``~s'' pre- + fix in a file ._t_i_p_r_c in one's home directory). The --vv + option causes _t_i_p to display the sets as they are made. + Certain common variables have abbreviations. The following + is a list of common variables, their abbreviations, and + their default values. + + bbeeaauuttiiffyy + (bool) Discard unprintable characters when a session is + being scripted; abbreviated _b_e. + + bbaauuddrraattee + (num) The baud rate at which the connection was esta- + blished; abbreviated _b_a. + + ddiiaallttiimmeeoouutt + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3 + + + + + + +TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C) + + + + (num) When dialing a phone number, the time (in + seconds) to wait for a connection to be established; + abbreviated _d_i_a_l. + + eecchhoocchheecckk + (bool) Synchronize with the remote host during file + transfer by waiting for the echo of the last character + transmitted; default is _o_f_f. + + eeooffrreeaadd + (str) The set of characters which signify and end-of- + tranmission during a ~< file transfer command; abbrevi- + ated _e_o_f_r. + + eeooffwwrriittee + (str) The string sent to indicate end-of-transmission + during a ~> file transfer command; abbreviated _e_o_f_w. + + eeooll + (str) The set of characters which indicate an end-of- + line. _T_i_p will recognize escape characters only after + an end-of-line. + + eessccaappee + (char) The command prefix (escape) character; abbrevi- + ated _e_s; default value is `~'. + + eexxcceeppttiioonnss + (str) The set of characters which should not be dis- + carded due to the beautification switch; abbreviated + _e_x; default value is ``\t\n\f\b''. + + ffoorrccee + (char) The character used to force literal data + transmission; abbreviated _f_o; default value is `^P'. + + ffrraammeessiizzee + (num) The amount of data (in bytes) to buffer between + file system writes when receiving files; abbreviated + _f_r. + + hhoosstt + (str) The name of the host to which you are connected; + abbreviated _h_o. + + pprroommpptt + (char) The character which indicates and end-of-line on + the remote host; abbreviated _p_r; default value is `\n'. + This value is used to synchronize during data + transfers. The count of lines transferred during a + file transfer command is based on recipt of this char- + acter. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4 + + + + + + +TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C) + + + + rraaiissee + (bool) Upper case mapping mode; abbreviated _r_a; default + value is _o_f_f. When this mode is enabled, all lower + case letters will be mapped to upper case by _t_i_p for + transmission to the remote machine. + + rraaiisseecchhaarr + (char) The input character used to toggle upper case + mapping mode; abbreviated _r_c; default value is `^A'. + + rreeccoorrdd + (str) The name of the file in which a session script is + recorded; abbreviated _r_e_c; default value is + ``tip.record''. + + ssccrriipptt + (bool) Session scripting mode; abbreviated _s_c; default + is _o_f_f. When _s_c_r_i_p_t is _t_r_u_e, _t_i_p will record every- + thing transmitted by the remote machine in the script + record file specified in _r_e_c_o_r_d. If the _b_e_a_u_t_i_f_y + switch is on, only printable ASCII characters will be + included in the script file (those characters betwee + 040 and 0177). The variable _e_x_c_e_p_t_i_o_n_s is used to + indicate characters which are an exception to the nor- + mal beautification rules. + + ttaabbeexxppaanndd + (bool) Expand tabs to spaces during file transfers; + abbreviated _t_a_b; default value is _f_a_l_s_e. Each tab is + expanded to 8 spaces. + + vveerrbboossee + (bool) Verbose mode; abbreviated _v_e_r_b; default is _t_r_u_e. + When verbose mode is enabled, _t_i_p prints messages while + dialing, shows the current number of lines transferred + during a file transfer operations, and more. + + SSHHEELLLL + (str) The name of the shell to use for the ~! command; + default value is ``/bin/sh'', or taken from the + environment. + + HHOOMMEE + (str) The home directory to use for the ~c command; + default value is taken from the environment. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/remote global system descriptions + /etc/phones global phone number data base + ${REMOTE} private system descriptions + ${PHONES} private phone numbers + ~/.tiprc initialization file. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 5 + + + + + + +TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C) + + + + /usr/spool/uucp/LCK..* lock file to avoid conflicts with _u_u_c_p + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Diagnostics are, hopefully, self explanatory. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + remote(5), phones(5) + +BBUUGGSS + The full set of variables is undocumented and should, prob- + ably, be paired down. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 6 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/tk.0 b/usr/man/cat1/tk.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f093ce0e54 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/tk.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +TK(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TK(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + tk - paginator for the Tektronix 4014 + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttkk [ --tt ] [ --_N ] [ --pp_L ] [ file ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + The output of _t_k is intended for a Tektronix 4014 terminal. + _T_k arranges for 66 lines to fit on the screen, divides the + screen into _N columns, and contributes an eight space page + offset in the (default) single-column case. Tabs, spaces, + and backspaces are collected and plotted when necessary. + Teletype Model 37 half- and reverse-line sequences are + interpreted and plotted. At the end of each page _t_k waits + for a newline (empty line) from the keyboard before continu- + ing on to the next page. In this wait state, the command + !!_c_o_m_m_a_n_d will send the _c_o_m_m_a_n_d to the shell. + + The command line options are: + + --tt Don't wait between pages; for directing output into a + file. + + --_N Divide the screen into _N columns and wait after the + last column. + + --pp_L Set page length to _L lines. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + pr(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/tn3270.0 b/usr/man/cat1/tn3270.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5f2f4e5d0c --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/tn3270.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +TN3270(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TN3270(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + tn3270 - full-screen remote login to IBM VM/CMS + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttnn33227700 sysname + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_n_3_2_7_0 permits a full-screen, full-duplex connection from a + VAX UNIX machine to an IBM machine running VM/CMS giving the + appearance of being logged in directly to the remote machine + on an IBM 3270 terminal. Of course you must have an account + on the machine to which you wish to connect in order to log + in. _T_n_3_2_7_0 looks to the user in many respects like the Yale + ASCII Terminal Communication System II. _T_n_3_2_7_0 is actually + a modification of the Arpanet TELNET user interface (see + _t_e_l_n_e_t(1)) that interprets and generates raw 3270 control + streams. + + Emulation of the 3270 terminal is done in the Unix process. + This emulation involves mapping 3270-style commands from the + host into appropriate sequences to control the user's termi- + nal screen. _T_n_3_2_7_0 uses _c_u_r_s_e_s(3x) and the /_e_t_c/_t_e_r_m_c_a_p + file to do this. The emulation also involves simulating the + special 3270 keyboard keys (program function keys, etc.) by + mapping sequences of keystrokes from the ASCII keyboard into + appropriate 3270 control strings. This mapping is terminal + dependent and is specified in a description file, + /_e_t_c/_m_a_p_3_2_7_0, (see _m_a_p_3_2_7_0(5)) or in an environment variable + _M_A_P_3_2_7_0 (see _m_s_e_t(1)). Any special function keys on the + ASCII keyboard are used whenever possible. If an entry for + the user's terminal is not found, _t_n_3_2_7_0 looks for an entry + for the terminal type uunnkknnoowwnn.. If this is not found, _t_n_3_2_7_0 + uses a default keyboard mapping (see _m_a_p_3_2_7_0(5)). + + The first character of each special keyboard mapping + sequence is either an ASCII escape (ESC), a control charac- + ter, or an ASCII delete (DEL). If the user types an + unrecognized function key sequence, _t_n_3_2_7_0 sends an ASCII + bell (BEL), or a visual bell if defined in the user's + termcap entry, to the user's terminal and nothing is sent to + the IBM host. + + If _t_n_3_2_7_0 is invoked without specifying a remote host system + name, it enters local command mode, indicated by the prompt + ``tn3270>''. In this mode, _t_n_3_2_7_0 accepts and executes the + following commands: + + open connect to a remote host + close close the current connection + quit exit tn3270 + z suspend tn3270 + status print connection status + + + +Printed 7/9/88 January 11, 1986 1 + + + + + + +TN3270(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TN3270(1) + + + + ? print help information + + Other common _t_e_l_n_e_t commands are not available in _t_n_3_2_7_0. + _T_n_3_2_7_0 command mode may also be entered, after connecting to + a host, by typing a special escape character (typically + control-C). + + While in command mode, any host login session is still alive + but temporarily suspended. The host login session may be + resumed by entering an empty line (press the RETURN key) in + response to the command prompt. A session may be terminated + by logging off the foreign host, or by typing ``quit'' or + ``close'' while in local command mode. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/termcap + /etc/map3270 + +AAUUTTHHOORR + Greg Minshall + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + mset(1), telnet(1), termcap(3x), termcap(5), map3270(5), + _Y_a_l_e _A_S_C_I_I _T_e_r_m_i_n_a_l _C_o_m_m_u_n_i_c_a_t_i_o_n _S_y_s_t_e_m _I_I _P_r_o_g_r_a_m + _D_e_s_c_r_i_p_t_i_o_n/_O_p_e_r_a_t_o_r'_s _M_a_n_u_a_l (IBM SB30-1911) + +BBUUGGSS + Performance is slow and uses system resources prodigiously. + + Not all 3270 functions are supported, nor all Yale enhance- + ments. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 January 11, 1986 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/touch.0 b/usr/man/cat1/touch.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6379463626 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/touch.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +TOUCH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TOUCH(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + touch - update date last modified of a file + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttoouucchh [ --cc ] [ --ff ] file ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_o_u_c_h attempts to set the modified date of each _f_i_l_e. If a + _f_i_l_e exists, this is done by reading a character from the + file and writing it back. If a _f_i_l_e does not exist, an + attempt will be made to create it unless the --cc option is + specified. The --ff option will attempt to force the touch in + spite of read and write permissions on a _f_i_l_e. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + utimes(2) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/tp.0 b/usr/man/cat1/tp.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5c1187a401 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/tp.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +TP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TP(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + tp - manipulate tape archive + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttpp [ key ] [ name ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_p saves and restores files on DECtape or magtape. Its + actions are controlled by the _k_e_y argument. The key is a + string of characters containing at most one function letter + and possibly one or more function modifiers. Other argu- + ments to the command are file or directory names specifying + which files are to be dumped, restored, or listed. In all + cases, appearance of a directory name refers to the files + and (recursively) subdirectories of that directory. + + The function portion of the key is specified by one of the + following letters: + + rr The named files are written on the tape. If files + with the same names already exist, they are + replaced. `Same' is determined by string com- + parison, so `./abc' can never be the same as + `/usr/dmr/abc' even if `/usr/dmr' is the current + directory. If no file argument is given, `..' is the + default. + + uu updates the tape. uu is like rr,, but a file is + replaced only if its modification date is later than + the date stored on the tape; that is to say, if it + has changed since it was dumped. uu is the default + command if none is given. + + dd deletes the named files from the tape. At least one + name argument must be given. This function is not + permitted on magtapes. + + xx extracts the named files from the tape to the file + system. The owner and mode are restored. If no + file argument is given, the entire contents of the + tape are extracted. + + tt lists the names of the specified files. If no file + argument is given, the entire contents of the tape + is listed. + + The following characters may be used in addition to the + letter which selects the function desired. + + mm Specifies magtape as opposed to DECtape. + + 00,,......,,77 This modifier selects the drive on which the tape + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +TP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TP(1) + + + + is mounted. For DECtape, xx is default; for + magtape `0' is the default. + + vv Normally _t_p does its work silently. The vv (ver- + bose) option causes it to type the name of each + file it treats preceded by the function letter. + With the tt function, vv gives more information + about the tape entries than just the name. + + cc means a fresh dump is being created; the tape + directory is cleared before beginning. Usable + only with rr and uu.. This option is assumed with + magtape since it is impossible to selectively + overwrite magtape. + + ii Errors reading and writing the tape are noted, but + no action is taken. Normally, errors cause a + return to the command level. + + ff Use the first named file, rather than a tape, as + the archive. This option currently acts like mm; + _i._e. rr implies cc, and neither dd nor uu are permit- + ted. + + ww causes _t_p to pause before treating each file, type + the indicative letter and the file name (as with + vv) and await the user's response. Response yy + means `yes', so the file is treated. Null + response means `no', and the file does not take + part in whatever is being done. Response xx means + `exit'; the _t_p command terminates immediately. In + the xx function, files previously asked about have + been extracted already. With rr,, uu,, and dd no + change has been made to the tape. + +FFIILLEESS + /dev/tap? + /dev/rmt? + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + ar(1), tar(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Several; the non-obvious one is `Phase error', which means + the file changed after it was selected for dumping but + before it was dumped. + +BBUUGGSS + A single file with several links to it is treated like + several files. + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + + + + +TP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TP(1) + + + + Binary-coded control information makes magnetic tapes writ- + ten by _t_p difficult to carry to other machines; _t_a_r(1) + avoids the problem. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/tr.0 b/usr/man/cat1/tr.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f88201a685 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/tr.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +TR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TR(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + tr - translate characters + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttrr [ --ccddss ] [ string1 [ string2 ] ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_r copies the standard input to the standard output with + substitution or deletion of selected characters. Input + characters found in _s_t_r_i_n_g_1 are mapped into the correspond- + ing characters of _s_t_r_i_n_g_2. When _s_t_r_i_n_g_2 is short it is pad- + ded to the length of _s_t_r_i_n_g_1 by duplicating its last charac- + ter. Any combination of the options --ccddss may be used: --cc + complements the set of characters in _s_t_r_i_n_g_1 with respect to + the universe of characters whose ASCII codes are 01 through + 0377 octal; --dd deletes all input characters in _s_t_r_i_n_g_1; --ss + squeezes all strings of repeated output characters that are + in _s_t_r_i_n_g_2 to single characters. + + In either string the notation _a--_b means a range of charac- + ters from _a to _b in increasing ASCII order. The character + `\' followed by 1, 2 or 3 octal digits stands for the char- + acter whose ASCII code is given by those digits. A `\' fol- + lowed by any other character stands for that character. + + The following example creates a list of all the words in + `file1' one per line in `file2', where a word is taken to be + a maximal string of alphabetics. The second string is + quoted to protect `\' from the Shell. 012 is the ASCII code + for newline. + + tr -cs A-Za-z '\012' file2 + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + ed(1), ascii(7), expand(1) + +BBUUGGSS + Won't handle ASCII NUL in _s_t_r_i_n_g_1 or _s_t_r_i_n_g_2; always deletes + NUL from input. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/troff.0 b/usr/man/cat1/troff.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e058c291e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/troff.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +TROFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TROFF(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + troff, nroff - text formatting and typesetting + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttrrooffff [ option ] ... [ file ] ... + + nnrrooffff [ option ] ... [ file ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_r_o_f_f formats text in the named _f_i_l_e_s for printing on a + Graphic Systems C/A/T phototypesetter; _n_r_o_f_f is used for for + typewriter-like devices. Their capabilities are described + in the _N_r_o_f_f/_T_r_o_f_f _u_s_e_r'_s _m_a_n_u_a_l. + + If no _f_i_l_e argument is present, the standard input is read. + An argument consisting of a single minus (--) is taken to be + a file name corresponding to the standard input. The + options, which may appear in any order so long as they + appear before the files, are: + + --oo_l_i_s_t Print only pages whose page numbers appear in the + comma-separated _l_i_s_t of numbers and ranges. A range + _N--_M means pages _N through _M; an initial -_N means from + the beginning to page _N; and a final _N- means from _N + to the end. + + --nn_N Number first generated page _N. + + --ss_N Stop every _N pages. _N_r_o_f_f will halt prior to every _N + pages (default _N=1) to allow paper loading or chang- + ing, and will resume upon receipt of a newline. + _T_r_o_f_f will stop the phototypesetter every _N pages, + produce a trailer to allow changing cassettes, and + resume when the typesetter's start button is pressed. + + --mm_n_a_m_e Prepend the macro file //uussrr//lliibb//ttmmaacc//ttmmaacc.._n_a_m_e to the + input _f_i_l_e_s. + + --rr_a_N Set register _a (one-character) to _N. + + --ii Read standard input after the input files are + exhausted. + + --qq Invoke the simultaneous input-output mode of the rrdd + request. + + _T_r_o_f_f _o_n_l_y + + --tt Direct output to the standard output instead of the + phototypesetter. + + --ff Refrain from feeding out paper and stopping + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +TROFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TROFF(1) + + + + phototypesetter at the end of the run. + + --ww Wait until phototypesetter is available, if currently + busy. + + --bb Report whether the phototypesetter is busy or avail- + able. No text processing is done. + + --aa Send a printable ASCII approximation of the results + to the standard output. + + --ppN Print all characters in point size _N while retaining + all prescribed spacings and motions, to reduce photo- + typesetter elapsed time. + + --FF_f_o_n_t_d_i_r + The directory _f_o_n_t_d_i_r contains the font width tables + instead of the default directory /usr/lib/fonts. This + option can be used to produce output for devices + besides the phototypesetter. + + If the file /_u_s_r/_a_d_m/_t_r_a_c_c_t is writable, _t_r_o_f_f keeps photo- + typesetter accounting records there. The integrity of that + file may be secured by making _t_r_o_f_f a 'set user-id' program. + +FFIILLEESS + /tmp/ta* temporary file + /usr/lib/tmac/tmac.* standard macro files + /usr/lib/term/* terminal driving tables for _n_r_o_f_f + /usr/lib/font/* font width tables for _t_r_o_f_f + /dev/cat phototypesetter + /usr/adm/tracct accounting statistics for /dev/cat + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + J. F. Ossanna, _N_r_o_f_f/_T_r_o_f_f _u_s_e_r'_s _m_a_n_u_a_l + B. W. Kernighan, _A _T_R_O_F_F _T_u_t_o_r_i_a_l + eqn(1), tbl(1), ms(7), me(7), man(7), col(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/true.0 b/usr/man/cat1/true.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..50d18c9f07 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/true.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +TRUE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TRUE(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + true, false - provide truth values + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttrruuee + + ffaallssee + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_r_u_e and _f_a_l_s_e are usually used in a Bourne shell script. + They test for the appropriate status "true" or "false" + before running (or failing to run) a list of commands. + +EEXXAAMMPPLLEE + + while true + do + command list + done + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + csh(1), sh(1), false(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + _T_r_u_e has exit status zero. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/tset.0 b/usr/man/cat1/tset.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..14c6a507ef --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/tset.0 @@ -0,0 +1,396 @@ + + + +TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + tset - terminal dependent initialization + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttsseett [ options ] [ --mm [ident][test baudrate]:type ] ... [ + type ] + + rreesseett [ options ] [ --mm [ident][test baudrate]:type ] ... [ + type ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_s_e_t sets up your terminal when you first log in to a UNIX + system. It does terminal dependent processing such as set- + ting erase and kill characters, setting or resetting delays, + sending any sequences needed to properly initialized the + terminal, and the like. It first determines the _t_y_p_e of + terminal involved, and then does necessary initializations + and mode settings. The type of terminal attached to each + UNIX port is specified in the /_e_t_c/_t_t_y_s(5) database. Type + names for terminals may be found in the _t_e_r_m_c_a_p(5) database. + If a port is not wired permanently to a specific terminal + (not hardwired) it will be given an appropriate generic + identifier such as _d_i_a_l_u_p. + + In the case where no arguments are specified, _t_s_e_t simply + reads the terminal type out of the environment variable TERM + and re-initializes the terminal. The rest of this manual + concerns itself with mode and environment initialization, + typically done once at login, and options used at initiali- + zation time to determine the terminal type and set up termi- + nal modes. + + When used in a startup script (._p_r_o_f_i_l_e for _s_h(1) users or + ._l_o_g_i_n for _c_s_h(1) users) it is desirable to give information + about the type of terminal you will usually use on ports + which are not hardwired. These ports are identified in + /_e_t_c/_t_t_y_s as _d_i_a_l_u_p or _p_l_u_g_b_o_a_r_d or _a_r_p_a_n_e_t, etc. To + specify what terminal type you usually use on these ports, + the --mm (map) option flag is followed by the appropriate port + type identifier, an optional baud rate specification, and + the terminal type. (The effect is to ``map'' from some con- + ditions to a terminal type, that is, to tell _t_s_e_t ``If I'm + on this kind of port, guess that I'm on that kind of termi- + nal''.) If more than one mapping is specified, the first + applicable mapping prevails. A missing port type identifier + matches all identifiers. Any of the alternate generic names + given in _t_e_r_m_c_a_p may be used for the identifier. + + A _b_a_u_d_r_a_t_e is specified as with _s_t_t_y(1), and is compared + with the speed of the diagnostic output (which should be the + control terminal). The baud rate _t_e_s_t may be any combina- + tion of: >>, @@, <<, and !!; @@ means ``at'' and !! inverts the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1 + + + + + + +TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1) + + + + sense of the test. To avoid problems with metacharacters, + it is best to place the entire argument to --mm within ``''' + characters; users of _c_s_h(1) must also put a ``\'' before any + ``!'' used here. + + Thus + + tset -m 'dialup>300:adm3a' -m dialup:dw2 -m + 'plugboard:?adm3a' + + causes the terminal type to be set to an _a_d_m_3_a if the port + in use is a dialup at a speed greater than 300 baud; to a + _d_w_2 if the port is (otherwise) a dialup (i.e. at 300 baud or + less). (NNOOTTEE:: the examples given here appear to take up + more than one line, for text processing reasons. When you + type in real _t_s_e_t commands, you must enter them entirely on + one line.) If the _t_y_p_e finally determined by _t_s_e_t begins + with a question mark, the user is asked if s/he really wants + that type. A null response means to use that type; other- + wise, another type can be entered which will be used + instead. Thus, in the above case, the user will be queried + on a plugboard port as to whether they are actually using an + _a_d_m_3_a. + + If no mapping applies and a final _t_y_p_e option, not preceded + by a --mm, is given on the command line then that type is + used; otherwise the type found in the /_e_t_c/_t_t_y_s database + will be taken to be the terminal type. This should always + be the case for hardwired ports. + + It is usually desirable to return the terminal type, as + finally determined by _t_s_e_t, and information about the + terminal's capabilities to a shell's environment. This can + be done using the -- option; using the Bourne shell, _s_h(1): + + export TERM; TERM=`tset - _o_p_t_i_o_n_s...` + + or using the C shell, _c_s_h(1): + + setenv TERM `tset - _o_p_t_i_o_n_s...` + + With _c_s_h it is preferable to use the following command in + your .login file to initialize the TERM and TERMCAP environ- + ment variables at the same time. + + eval `tset -s _o_p_t_i_o_n_s...` + + It is also convenient to make an alias in your .cshrc: + + alias tset 'eval `tset -s \!*`' + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2 + + + + + + +TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1) + + + + This allows the command: + + tset 2621 + + to be invoked at any time to set the terminal and environ- + ment. NNoottee ttoo BBoouurrnnee SShheellll uusseerrss:: It is nnoott possible to get + this aliasing effect with a shell script, because shell + scripts cannot set the environment of their parent. (If a + process could set its parent's environment, none of this + nonsense would be necessary in the first place.) + + These commands cause _t_s_e_t to place the name of your terminal + in the variable TERM in the environment; see _e_n_v_i_r_o_n(7). + + Once the terminal type is known, _t_s_e_t engages in terminal + driver mode setting. This normally involves sending an ini- + tialization sequence to the terminal, setting the single + character erase (and optionally the line-kill (full line + erase)) characters, and setting special character delays. + Tab and newline expansion are turned off during transmission + of the terminal initialization sequence. + + On terminals that can backspace but not overstrike (such as + a CRT), and when the erase character is the default erase + character (`#' on standard systems), the erase character is + changed to BACKSPACE (Control-H). + + The options are: + + --ee_c set the erase character to be the named character _c on + all terminals, the default being the backspace charac- + ter on the terminal, usually ^H. The character _c can + either be typed directly, or entered using the hat + notation used here. + + --kk_c is similar to --ee but for the line kill character rather + than the erase character; _c defaults to ^X (for purely + historical reasons). The kill characters is left alone + if --kk is not specified. The hat notation can also be + used for this option. + + --ii_c is similar to --ee but for the interrupt character rather + than the erase character; _c defaults to ^C. The hat + notation can also be used for this option. + + -- The name of the terminal finally decided upon is output + on the standard output. This is intended to be cap- + tured by the shell and placed in the environment vari- + able TERM. + + --ss Print the sequence of _c_s_h commands to initialize the + environment variables TERM and TERMCAP based on the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3 + + + + + + +TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1) + + + + name of the terminal finally decided upon. + + --nn On systems with the Berkeley 4BSD tty driver, specifies + that the new tty driver modes should be initialized for + this terminal. For a CRT, the CRTERASE and CRTKILL + modes are set only if the baud rate is 1200 or greater. + See tty(4) for more detail. + + --II suppresses transmitting terminal initialization + strings. + + --QQ suppresses printing the ``Erase set to'' and ``Kill set + to'' messages. + + If ttsseett is invoked as rreesseett, it will set cooked and echo + modes, turn off cbreak and raw modes, turn on newline trans- + lation, and restore special characters to a sensible state + before any terminal dependent processing is done. Any spe- + cial character that is found to be NULL or ``-1'' is reset + to its default value. All arguments to _t_s_e_t may be used + with reset. + + This is most useful after a program dies leaving a terminal + in a funny state. You may have to type ``reset'' to + get it to work since may not work in this state. Often + none of this will echo. + +EEXXAAMMPPLLEESS + These examples all assume the Bourne shell and use the - + option. If you use _c_s_h, use one of the variations described + above. Note that a typical use of _t_s_e_t in a .profile or + .login will also use the --ee and --kk options, and often the --nn + or --QQ options as well. These options have not been included + here to keep the examples small. (NNOOTTEE:: some of the exam- + ples given here appear to take up more than one line, for + text processing reasons. When you type in real _t_s_e_t com- + mands, you must enter them entirely on one line.) + + At the moment, you are on a 2621. This is suitable for typ- + ing by hand but not for a .profile, unless you are _a_l_w_a_y_s on + a 2621. + + export TERM; TERM=`tset - 2621` + + You have an h19 at home which you dial up on, but your + office terminal is hardwired and known in /etc/ttys. + + export TERM; TERM=`tset - -m dialup:h19` + + You have a switch which connects everything to everything, + making it nearly impossible to key on what port you are com- + ing in on. You use a vt100 in your office at 9600 baud, and + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4 + + + + + + +TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1) + + + + dial up to switch ports at 1200 baud from home on a 2621. + Sometimes you use someone elses terminal at work, so you + want it to ask you to make sure what terminal type you have + at high speeds, but at 1200 baud you are always on a 2621. + Note the placement of the question mark, and the quotes to + protect the greater than and question mark from interpreta- + tion by the shell. + + export TERM; TERM=`tset - -m 'switch>1200:?vt100' -m + 'switch<=1200:2621' + + All of the above entries will fall back on the terminal type + specified in /_e_t_c/_t_t_y_s if none of the conditions hold. The + following entry is appropriate if you always dial up, always + at the same baud rate, on many different kinds of terminals. + Your most common terminal is an adm3a. It always asks you + what kind of terminal you are on, defaulting to adm3a. + + export TERM; TERM=`tset - ?adm3a` + + If the file /_e_t_c/_t_t_y_s is not properly installed and you want + to key entirely on the baud rate, the following can be used: + + export TERM; TERM=`tset - -m '>1200:vt100' 2621` + + Here is a fancy example to illustrate the power of _t_s_e_t and + to hopelessly confuse anyone who has made it this far. You + dial up at 1200 baud or less on a concept100, sometimes over + switch ports and sometimes over regular dialups. You use + various terminals at speeds higher than 1200 over switch + ports, most often the terminal in your office, which is a + vt100. However, sometimes you log in from the university + you used to go to, over the ARPANET; in this case you are on + an ALTO emulating a dm2500. You also often log in on vari- + ous hardwired ports, such as the console, all of which are + properly entered in /_e_t_c/_t_t_y_s. You want your erase charac- + ter set to control H, your kill character set to control U, + and don't want _t_s_e_t to print the ``Erase set to Backspace, + Kill set to Control U'' message. + + export TERM; TERM=`tset -e -k^U -Q - -m + 'switch<=1200:concept100' -m 'switch:?vt100' -m + dialup:concept100 -m arpanet:dm2500` + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/ttys port name to terminal type mapping database + /etc/termcap terminal capability database + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + csh(1), sh(1), stty(1), ttys(5), termcap(5), environ(7) + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 5 + + + + + + +TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1) + + + +BBUUGGSS + The _t_s_e_t command is one of the first commands a user must + master when getting started on a UNIX system. Unfor- + tunately, it is one of the most complex, largely because of + the extra effort the user must go through to get the + environment of the login shell set. Something needs to be + done to make all this simpler, either the _l_o_g_i_n(1) program + should do this stuff, or a default shell alias should be + made, or a way to set the environment of the parent should + exist. + + This program can't intuit personal choices for erase, inter- + rupt and line kill characters, so it leaves these set to the + local system standards. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 6 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/tsort.0 b/usr/man/cat1/tsort.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6ed5f0638f --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/tsort.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +TSORT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSORT(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + tsort - topological sort + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttssoorrtt [ file ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_s_o_r_t produces on the standard output a totally ordered list + of items consistent with a partial ordering of items men- + tioned in the input _f_i_l_e. If no _f_i_l_e is specified, the + standard input is understood. + + The input consists of pairs of items (nonempty strings) + separated by blanks. Pairs of different items indicate ord- + ering. Pairs of identical items indicate presence, but not + ordering. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + lorder(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Odd data: there is an odd number of fields in the input + file. + +BBUUGGSS + Uses a quadratic algorithm; not worth fixing for the typical + use of ordering a library archive file. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/tty.0 b/usr/man/cat1/tty.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..31ccb35d3e --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/tty.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +TTY(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TTY(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + tty - get terminal name + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ttttyy [ -s ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _T_t_y prints the pathname of the user's terminal unless the -s + (silent) is given. In either case, the exit value is zero if + the standard input is a terminal and one if it is not. + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + `not a tty' if the standard input file is not a terminal. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/ul.0 b/usr/man/cat1/ul.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..47c7afb416 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/ul.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +UL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual UL(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + ul - do underlining + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + uull [ --ii ] [ --tt _t_e_r_m_i_n_a_l ] [ _n_a_m_e ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _U_l reads the named files (or standard input if none are + given) and translates occurrences of underscores to the + sequence which indicates underlining for the terminal in + use, as specified by the environment variable TERM. The --tt + option overrides the terminal kind specified in the environ- + ment. The file /_e_t_c/_t_e_r_m_c_a_p is read to determine the + appropriate sequences for underlining. If the terminal is + incapable of underlining, but is capable of a standout mode + then that is used instead. If the terminal can overstrike, + or handles underlining automatically, _u_l degenerates to + _c_a_t(1). If the terminal cannot underline, underlining is + ignored. + + The --ii option causes _u_l to indicate underlining onto by a + separate line containing appropriate dashes `-'; this is + useful when you want to look at the underlining which is + present in an _n_r_o_f_f output stream on a crt-terminal. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + man(1), nroff(1), colcrt(1) + +BBUUGGSS + _N_r_o_f_f usually outputs a series of backspaces and underlines + intermixed with the text to indicate underlining. No + attempt is made to optimize the backward motion. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/uncompress.0 b/usr/man/cat1/uncompress.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ef84c3c2e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/uncompress.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +COMPRESS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COMPRESS(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + compress, uncompress, zcat - compress and expand data + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ccoommpprreessss [ --ff ] [ --vv ] [ --cc ] [ --bb _b_i_t_s ] [ _n_a_m_e ... ] + uunnccoommpprreessss [ --ff ] [ --vv ] [ --cc ] [ _n_a_m_e ... ] + zzccaatt [ _n_a_m_e ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _C_o_m_p_r_e_s_s reduces the size of the named files using adaptive + Lempel-Ziv coding. Whenever possible, each file is replaced + by one with the extension ..ZZ,, while keeping the same owner- + ship modes, access and modification times. If no files are + specified, the standard input is compressed to the standard + output. Compressed files can be restored to their original + form using _u_n_c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s or _z_c_a_t. + + The --ff option will force compression of _n_a_m_e, even if it + does not actually shrink or the corresponding _n_a_m_e.Z file + already exists. Except when run in the background under + /_b_i_n/_s_h, if --ff is not given the user is prompted as to + whether an existing _n_a_m_e.Z file should be overwritten. + + The --cc (``cat'') option makes _c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s/_u_n_c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s write to + the standard output; no files are changed. The nondestruc- + tive behavior of _z_c_a_t is identical to that of _u_n_c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s --cc.. + + _C_o_m_p_r_e_s_s uses the modified Lempel-Ziv algorithm popularized + in "A Technique for High Performance Data Compression", + Terry A. Welch, _I_E_E_E _C_o_m_p_u_t_e_r, vol. 17, no. 6 (June 1984), + pp. 8-19. Common substrings in the file are first replaced + by 9-bit codes 257 and up. When code 512 is reached, the + algorithm switches to 10-bit codes and continues to use more + bits until the limit specified by the --bb flag is reached + (default 16). _B_i_t_s must be between 9 and 16. The default + can be changed in the source to allow _c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s to be run on + a smaller machine. + + After the _b_i_t_s limit is attained, _c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s periodically + checks the compression ratio. If it is increasing, _c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s + continues to use the existing code dictionary. However, if + the compression ratio decreases, _c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s discards the table + of substrings and rebuilds it from scratch. This allows the + algorithm to adapt to the next "block" of the file. + + Note that the --bb flag is omitted for _u_n_c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s, since the + _b_i_t_s parameter specified during compression is encoded + within the output, along with a magic number to ensure that + neither decompression of random data nor recompression of + compressed data is attempted. + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 11, 1986 1 + + + + + + +COMPRESS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COMPRESS(1) + + + + The amount of compression obtained depends on the size of + the input, the number of _b_i_t_s per code, and the distribution + of common substrings. Typically, text such as source code + or English is reduced by 50-60%. Compression is generally + much better than that achieved by Huffman coding (as used in + _p_a_c_k), or adaptive Huffman coding (_c_o_m_p_a_c_t), and takes less + time to compute. + + The --vv option causes the printing of the percentage reduc- + tion of each file. + + If an error occurs, exit status is 1, else if the last file + was not compressed because it became larger, the status is + 2; else the status is 0. + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Usage: compress [-fvc] [-b maxbits] [file ...] + Invalid options were specified on the command line. + Missing maxbits + Maxbits must follow --bb. + _f_i_l_e: not in compressed format + The file specified to _u_n_c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s has not been + compressed. + _f_i_l_e: compressed with _x_x bits, can only handle _y_y bits + _F_i_l_e was compressed by a program that could deal + with more _b_i_t_s than the compress code on this + machine. Recompress the file with smaller _b_i_t_s. + _f_i_l_e: already has .Z suffix -- no change + The file is assumed to be already compressed. + Rename the file and try again. + _f_i_l_e: filename too long to tack on .Z + The file cannot be compressed because its name is + longer than 12 characters. Rename and try again. + This message does not occur on BSD systems. + _f_i_l_e already exists; do you wish to overwrite (y or n)? + Respond "y" if you want the output file to be + replaced; "n" if not. + uncompress: corrupt input + A SIGSEGV violation was detected which usually means + that the input file is corrupted. + Compression: _x_x._x_x% + Percentage of the input saved by compression. + (Relevant only for --vv.) + -- not a regular file: unchanged + When the input file is not a regular file, (e.g. a + directory), it is left unaltered. + -- has _x_x other links: unchanged + The input file has links; it is left unchanged. See + _l_n(1) for more information. + -- file unchanged + No savings is achieved by compression. The input + remains virgin. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 11, 1986 2 + + + + + + +COMPRESS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COMPRESS(1) + + + +BBUUGGSS + Although compressed files are compatible between machines + with large memory, --bb12 should be used for file transfer to + architectures with a small process data space (64KB or less, + as exhibited by the DEC PDP series, the Intel 80286, etc.) + + _c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s should be more flexible about the existence of the + `.Z' suffix. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 11, 1986 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/unexpand.0 b/usr/man/cat1/unexpand.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c7e7d328ce --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/unexpand.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +EXPAND(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EXPAND(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + expand, unexpand - expand tabs to spaces, and vice versa + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + eexxppaanndd [ -tabstop ] [ -tab1,tab2,...,tabn ] [ file ... ] + uunneexxppaanndd [ --aa ] [ file ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _E_x_p_a_n_d processes the named files or the standard input writ- + ing the standard output with tabs changed into blanks. + Backspace characters are preserved into the output and + decrement the column count for tab calculations. _E_x_p_a_n_d is + useful for pre-processing character files (before sorting, + looking at specific columns, etc.) that contain tabs. + + If a single _t_a_b_s_t_o_p argument is given, then tabs are set + _t_a_b_s_t_o_p spaces apart instead of the default 8. If multiple + tabstops are given then the tabs are set at those specific + columns. + + _U_n_e_x_p_a_n_d puts tabs back into the data from the standard + input or the named files and writes the result on the stan- + dard output. By default, only leading blanks and tabs are + reconverted to maximal strings of tabs. If the --aa option is + given, then tabs are inserted whenever they would compress + the resultant file by replacing two or more characters. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/unifdef.0 b/usr/man/cat1/unifdef.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..de6b2d478d --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/unifdef.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +UNIFDEF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual UNIFDEF(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + unifdef - remove ifdef'ed lines + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + uunniiffddeeff [ --tt --ll --cc --DD_s_y_m --UU_s_y_m --iidd_s_y_m --iiuu_s_y_m ] ... [ file ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _U_n_i_f_d_e_f is useful for removing ifdef'ed lines from a file + while otherwise leaving the file alone. _U_n_i_f_d_e_f is like a + stripped-down C preprocessor: it is smart enough to deal + with the nested ifdefs, comments, single and double quotes + of C syntax so that it can do its job, but it doesn't do any + including or interpretation of macros. Neither does it + strip out comments, though it recognizes and ignores them. + You specify which symbols you want defined --DD_s_y_m or unde- + fined --UU_s_y_m and the lines inside those ifdefs will be copied + to the output or removed as appropriate. The ifdef, ifndef, + else, and endif lines associated with _s_y_m will also be + removed. Ifdefs involving symbols you don't specify are + untouched and copied out along with their associated ifdef, + else, and endif lines. If an ifdef X occurs nested inside + another ifdef X, then the inside ifdef is treated as if it + were an unrecognized symbol. If the same symbol appears in + more than one argument, only the first occurrence is signi- + ficant. + + The --ll option causes _u_n_i_f_d_e_f to replace removed lines with + blank lines instead of deleting them. + + If you use ifdefs to delimit non-C lines, such as comments + or code which is under construction, then you must tell + _u_n_i_f_d_e_f which symbols are used for that purpose so that it + won't try to parse for quotes and comments in those ifdef'ed + lines. You specify that you want the lines inside certain + ifdefs to be ignored but copied out with --iidd_s_y_m and --iiuu_s_y_m + similar to --DD_s_y_m and --UU_s_y_m above. + + If you want to use _u_n_i_f_d_e_f for plain text (not C code), use + the --tt option. This makes _u_n_i_f_d_e_f refrain from attempting + to recognize comments and single and double quotes. + + _U_n_i_f_d_e_f copies its output to _s_t_d_o_u_t and will take its input + from _s_t_d_i_n if no _f_i_l_e argument is given. If the --cc argument + is specified, then the operation of _u_n_i_f_d_e_f is complemented, + i.e. the lines that would have been removed or blanked are + retained and vice versa. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + diff(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Premature EOF, inappropriate else or endif. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +UNIFDEF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual UNIFDEF(1) + + + + Exit status is 0 if output is exact copy of input, 1 if not, + 2 if trouble. + +BBUUGGSS + Does not know how to deal with _c_p_p consructs such as + + #if defined(X) || defined(Y) + + +AAUUTTHHOORR + Dave Yost + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/uniq.0 b/usr/man/cat1/uniq.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4c182dd7f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/uniq.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +UNIQ(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual UNIQ(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + uniq - report repeated lines in a file + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + uunniiqq [ --uuddcc [ ++n ] [ --n ] ] [ input [ output ] ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _U_n_i_q reads the input file comparing adjacent lines. In the + normal case, the second and succeeding copies of repeated + lines are removed; the remainder is written on the output + file. Note that repeated lines must be adjacent in order to + be found; see _s_o_r_t(1). If the --uu flag is used, just the + lines that are not repeated in the original file are output. + The --dd option specifies that one copy of just the repeated + lines is to be written. The normal mode output is the union + of the --uu and --dd mode outputs. + + The --cc option supersedes --uu and --dd and generates an output + report in default style but with each line preceded by a + count of the number of times it occurred. + + The _n arguments specify skipping an initial portion of each + line in the comparison: + + --_n The first _n fields together with any blanks before + each are ignored. A field is defined as a string of + non-space, non-tab characters separated by tabs and + spaces from its neighbors. + + ++_n The first _n characters are ignored. Fields are + skipped before characters. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + sort(1), comm(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/units.0 b/usr/man/cat1/units.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..10045d9458 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/units.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +UNITS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual UNITS(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + units - conversion program + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + uunniittss + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _U_n_i_t_s converts quantities expressed in various standard + scales to their equivalents in other scales. It works + interactively in this fashion: + + _Y_o_u _h_a_v_e: inch + _Y_o_u _w_a_n_t: cm + * _2._5_4_0_0_0_e+_0_0 + / _3._9_3_7_0_1_e-_0_1 + + A quantity is specified as a multiplicative combination of + units optionally preceded by a numeric multiplier. Powers + are indicated by suffixed positive integers, division by the + usual sign: + + _Y_o_u _h_a_v_e: 15 pounds force/in2 + _Y_o_u _w_a_n_t: atm + * _1._0_2_0_6_9_e+_0_0 + / _9._7_9_7_3_0_e-_0_1 + + _U_n_i_t_s only does multiplicative scale changes. Thus it can + convert Kelvin to Rankine, but not Centigrade to Fahrenheit. + Most familiar units, abbreviations, and metric prefixes are + recognized, together with a generous leavening of exotica + and a few constants of nature including: + + pi ratio of circumference to diameter + c speed of light + e charge on an electron + g acceleration of gravity + force same as g + mole Avogadro's number + water pressure head per unit height of water + au astronomical unit + + `Pound' is a unit of mass. Compound names are run together, + e.g. `lightyear'. British units that differ from their US + counterparts are prefixed thus: `brgallon'. Currency is + denoted `belgiumfranc', `britainpound', ... + + For a complete list of units, `cat /usr/lib/units'. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/lib/units + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +UNITS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual UNITS(1) + + + +BBUUGGSS + Don't base your financial plans on the currency conversions. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/uptime.0 b/usr/man/cat1/uptime.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2b8a1623d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/uptime.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +UPTIME(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual UPTIME(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + uptime - show how long system has been up + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + uuppttiimmee + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + Uptime prints the current time, the length of time the sys- + tem has been up, and the average number of jobs in the run + queue over the last 1, 5 and 15 minutes. It is, essen- + tially, the first line of a _w(1) command. + +FFIILLEESS + /vmunix system name list + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + w(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/users.0 b/usr/man/cat1/users.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e7b570e117 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/users.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +USERS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual USERS(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + users - compact list of users who are on the system + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + uusseerrss + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _U_s_e_r_s lists the login names of the users currently on the + system in a compact, one-line format. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/utmp + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + finger(1), last(1), who(1), utmp(5) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 January 28, 1987 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/uucp.0 b/usr/man/cat1/uucp.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9408313519 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/uucp.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +UUCP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUCP(1C) + + + +NNAAMMEE + uucp - unix to unix copy + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + uuuuccpp [ --aaccCCddffmmrr ] [ --nn_u_s_e_r ] [ --gg_g_r_a_d_e ] [ --ss_s_p_o_o_l ] [ --xx_d_e_- + _b_u_g ] source-file.... destination-file + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _U_u_c_p copies files named by the source-file arguments to the + destination-file argument. A file name may be a pathname on + your machine, or may have the form + + system-name!pathname + + where `system-name' is taken from a list of system names + that _u_u_c_p knows about. Shell metacharacters ?*[] appearing + in the pathname part will be expanded on the appropriate + system. + + Pathnames may be one of: + + (1) a full pathname; + + (2) a pathname preceded by ~~_u_s_e_r; where _u_s_e_r is a userid on + the specified system and is replaced by that user's + login directory; + + (3) a pathname prefixed by ~~, where ~~ is expanded into the + system's public directory (usually + /usr/spool/uucppublic); + + (4) a partial pathname, which is prefixed by the current + directory. + + If the result is an erroneous pathname for the remote sys- + tem, the copy will fail. If the destination-file is a + directory, the last part of the source-file name is used. + + _U_u_c_p preserves execute permissions across the transmission + and gives 0666 read and write permissions (see _c_h_m_o_d(2)). + + The following options are interpreted by _u_u_c_p. + + --aa Avoid doing a _g_e_t_w_d to find the current directory. + (This is sometimes used for efficiency.) + + --cc Use the source file when copying out rather than copy- + ing the file to the spool directory. (This is the + default.) + + --CC Copy the source file to the spool directory and + transmit the copy. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 1 + + + + + + +UUCP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUCP(1C) + + + + --dd Make all necessary directories for the file copy. + (This is the default.) + + --ff Do not make intermediate directories for the file copy. + + --gg_g_r_a_d_e + _G_r_a_d_e is a single letter/number; lower ASCII sequence + characters will cause a job to be transmitted earlier + during a particular conversation. Default is `n'. By + way of comparison, _u_u_x(1C) defaults to `A'; mail is + usually sent at `C'. + + --mm Send mail to the requester when the copy is complete. + + --nn_u_s_e_r + Notify _u_s_e_r on remote system (i.e., send _u_s_e_r mail) + that a file was sent. + + --rr Do not start the transfer, just queue the job. + + --ss_s_p_o_o_l + Use _s_p_o_o_l as the spool directory instead of the + default. + + --xx_d_e_b_u_g + Turn on the debugging at level _d_e_b_u_g. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/spool/uucp - spool directory + /usr/lib/uucp/* - other data and program files + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + uux(1C), mail(1) + + D. A. Nowitz and M. E. Lesk, _A _D_i_a_l-_U_p _N_e_t_w_o_r_k _o_f _U_N_I_X _S_y_s_- + _t_e_m_s. + + D. A. Nowitz, _U_u_c_p _I_m_p_l_e_m_e_n_t_a_t_i_o_n _D_e_s_c_r_i_p_t_i_o_n. + +WWAARRNNIINNGG + The domain of remotely accessible files can (and for obvious + security reasons, usually should) be severely restricted. + You will very likely not be able to fetch files by pathname; + ask a responsible person on the remote system to send them + to you. For the same reasons you will probably not be able + to send files to arbitrary pathnames. + +BBUUGGSS + All files received by _u_u_c_p will be owned by the uucp + administrator (usually UID 5). + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 2 + + + + + + +UUCP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUCP(1C) + + + + The --mm option will only work sending files or receiving a + single file. (Receiving multiple files specified by special + shell characters ?*[] will not activate the --mm option.) + + At present _u_u_c_p cannot copy to a system several "hops" away, + that is, a command of the form + + uucp myfile system1!system2!system3!yourfile + + is not permitted. Use _u_u_s_e_n_d(1C) instead. + + When invoking _u_u_c_p from _c_s_h(1), the `!' character must be + prefixed by the `\' escape to inhibit _c_s_h's history mechan- + ism. (Quotes are not sufficient.) + + _U_u_c_p refuses to copy a file that does not give read access + to ``other''; that is, the file must have at least 0444 + modes. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/uudecode.0 b/usr/man/cat1/uudecode.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..90640f5e55 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/uudecode.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +UUENCODE(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUENCODE(1C) + + + +NNAAMMEE + uuencode, uudecode - encode/decode a binary file for + transmission via mail + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + uuuueennccooddee [ source ] remotedest | mmaaiill sys1!sys2!..!decode + uuuuddeeccooddee [ file ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _U_u_e_n_c_o_d_e and _u_u_d_e_c_o_d_e are used to send a binary file via + uucp (or other) mail. This combination can be used over + indirect mail links even when _u_u_s_e_n_d(1C) is not available. + + _U_u_e_n_c_o_d_e takes the named source file (default standard + input) and produces an encoded version on the standard out- + put. The encoding uses only printing ASCII characters, and + includes the mode of the file and the _r_e_m_o_t_e_d_e_s_t for recrea- + tion on the remote system. + + _U_u_d_e_c_o_d_e reads an encoded file, strips off any leading and + trailing lines added by mailers, and recreates the original + file with the specified mode and name. + + The intent is that all mail to the user ``decode'' should be + filtered through the _u_u_d_e_c_o_d_e program. This way the file is + created automatically without human intervention. This is + possible on the uucp network by either using _s_e_n_d_m_a_i_l or by + making _r_m_a_i_l be a link to _M_a_i_l instead of _m_a_i_l. In each + case, an alias must be created in a master file to get the + automatic invocation of _u_u_d_e_c_o_d_e. + + If these facilities are not available, the file can be sent + to a user on the remote machine who can uudecode it manu- + ally. + + The encode file has an ordinary text form and can be edited + by any text editor to change the mode or remote name. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + atob(n), uusend(1C), uucp(1C), uux(1C), mail(1), uuencode(5) + +BBUUGGSS + The file is expanded by 35% (3 bytes become 4 plus control + information) causing it to take longer to transmit. + + The user on the remote system who is invoking _u_u_d_e_c_o_d_e + (often _u_u_c_p) must have write permission on the specified + file. + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/uuencode.0 b/usr/man/cat1/uuencode.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..90640f5e55 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/uuencode.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +UUENCODE(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUENCODE(1C) + + + +NNAAMMEE + uuencode, uudecode - encode/decode a binary file for + transmission via mail + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + uuuueennccooddee [ source ] remotedest | mmaaiill sys1!sys2!..!decode + uuuuddeeccooddee [ file ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _U_u_e_n_c_o_d_e and _u_u_d_e_c_o_d_e are used to send a binary file via + uucp (or other) mail. This combination can be used over + indirect mail links even when _u_u_s_e_n_d(1C) is not available. + + _U_u_e_n_c_o_d_e takes the named source file (default standard + input) and produces an encoded version on the standard out- + put. The encoding uses only printing ASCII characters, and + includes the mode of the file and the _r_e_m_o_t_e_d_e_s_t for recrea- + tion on the remote system. + + _U_u_d_e_c_o_d_e reads an encoded file, strips off any leading and + trailing lines added by mailers, and recreates the original + file with the specified mode and name. + + The intent is that all mail to the user ``decode'' should be + filtered through the _u_u_d_e_c_o_d_e program. This way the file is + created automatically without human intervention. This is + possible on the uucp network by either using _s_e_n_d_m_a_i_l or by + making _r_m_a_i_l be a link to _M_a_i_l instead of _m_a_i_l. In each + case, an alias must be created in a master file to get the + automatic invocation of _u_u_d_e_c_o_d_e. + + If these facilities are not available, the file can be sent + to a user on the remote machine who can uudecode it manu- + ally. + + The encode file has an ordinary text form and can be edited + by any text editor to change the mode or remote name. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + atob(n), uusend(1C), uucp(1C), uux(1C), mail(1), uuencode(5) + +BBUUGGSS + The file is expanded by 35% (3 bytes become 4 plus control + information) causing it to take longer to transmit. + + The user on the remote system who is invoking _u_u_d_e_c_o_d_e + (often _u_u_c_p) must have write permission on the specified + file. + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/uulog.0 b/usr/man/cat1/uulog.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..665ee9ef96 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/uulog.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +UULOG(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UULOG(1C) + + + +NNAAMMEE + uulog - display UUCP log files + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + uuuulloogg [ --ss _s_y_s ] [ --uu _u_s_e_r ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _U_u_l_o_g queries a log of _u_u_c_p(1C) and _u_u_x(1C) transactions in + the file //uussrr//ssppooooll//uuuuccpp//LLOOGGFFIILLEE.. + + The options command _u_u_l_o_g to print logging information: + + --ss_s_y_s Print information about work involving system _s_y_s. + + --uu_u_s_e_r Print information about work done for the specified + _u_s_e_r. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/spool/uucp/LOGFILE + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + uucp(1C), uux(1C). + +NNOOTTEESS + Very early releases of UUCP used separate log files for each + of the UUCP utilities; _u_u_l_o_g was used to merge the indivi- + dual logs into a master file. This capability has not been + necessary for some time and is no longer supported. + +BBUUGGSS + UUCP's recording of which user issued a request is unreli- + able. + + _U_u_l_o_g is little more than an overspecialized version of + _g_r_e_p(1). + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/uuname.0 b/usr/man/cat1/uuname.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..df00e11f86 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/uuname.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +UUNAME(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUNAME(1C) + + + +NNAAMMEE + uuname - list names of UUCP hosts + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + uuuunnaammee [ --ll ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _U_u_n_a_m_e lists the UUCP names of known systems. The --ll option + returns the local system name; this may differ from the + _h_o_s_t_n_a_m_e(1) for the system if the _h_o_s_t_n_a_m_e is very long. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + uucp(1C), uux(1C). + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/uuq.0 b/usr/man/cat1/uuq.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6339681dfe --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/uuq.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +UUQ(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUQ(1C) + + + +NNAAMMEE + uuq - examine or manipulate the uucp queue + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + uuuuqq [ --ll ] [ --hh ] [ --ss_s_y_s_t_e_m ] [ --uu_u_s_e_r ] [ --dd_j_o_b_n_o ] [ -- + rr_s_d_i_r ] [ --bb_b_a_u_d ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _U_u_q is used to examine (and possibly delete) entries in the + uucp queue. + + When listing jobs, _u_u_q uses a format reminiscent of _l_s. For + the long format, information for each job listed includes + job number, number of files to transfer, user who spooled + the job, number of bytes to send, type of command requested + (S for sending files, R for receiving files, X for remote + uucp), and file or command desired. + + Several options are available: + + --hh Print only the summary lines for each system. + Summary lines give system name, number of jobs for + the system, and total number of bytes to send. + + --ll Specifies a long format listing. The default is + to list only the job numbers sorted across the + page. + + --ss_s_y_s_t_e_m Limit output to jobs for systems whose system + names begin with _s_y_s_t_e_m. + + --uu_u_s_e_r Limit output to jobs for users whose login names + begin with _u_s_e_r. + + --dd_j_o_b_n_o Delete job number _j_o_b_n_o (as obtained from a previ- + ous _u_u_q command) from the uucp queue. Only the + UUCP Administrator is permitted to delete jobs. + + --rr_s_d_i_r Look for files in the spooling directory _s_d_i_r + instead of the default directory. + + --bb_b_a_u_d Use _b_a_u_d to compute the transfer time instead of + the default 1200 baud. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/spool/uucp/ Default spool directory + /usr/spool/uucp/C./C.* Control files + /usr/spool/uucp/D_h_o_s_t_n_a_m_e./D.* Outgoing data files + /usr/spool/uucp/X./X.* Outgoing execution files + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + uucp(1C), uux(1C), uulog(1C), uusnap(8C) + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 1 + + + + + + +UUQ(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUQ(1C) + + + +BBUUGGSS + No information is available on work requested by the remote + machine. + + The user who requests a remote uucp command is unknown. + + UUuuqq --ll can be horrendously slow. + +AAUUTTHHOORR + Lou Salkind, New York University + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/uusend.0 b/usr/man/cat1/uusend.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6f5dfe4daf --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/uusend.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +UUSEND(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUSEND(1C) + + + +NNAAMMEE + uusend - send a file to a remote host + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + uuuusseenndd [ --mm mode ] sourcefile sys1!sys2!..!remotefile + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _U_u_s_e_n_d sends a file to a given location on a remote system. + The system need not be directly connected to the local sys- + tem, but a chain of _u_u_c_p(1) links needs to connect the two + systems. + + If the --mm option is specified, the mode of the file on the + remote end will be taken from the octal number given. Oth- + erwise, the mode of the input file will be used. + + The sourcefile can be ``-'', meaning to use the standard + input. Both of these options are primarily intended for + internal use of _u_u_s_e_n_d. + + The remotefile can include the ~userid syntax. + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + If anything goes wrong any further away than the first sys- + tem down the line, you will never hear about it. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + uux(1), uucp(1), uuencode(1) + +BBUUGGSS + This command should not exist, since _u_u_c_p should handle it. + + All systems along the line must have the _u_u_s_e_n_d command + available and allow remote execution of it. + + Some uucp systems have a bug where binary files cannot be + the input to a _u_u_x command. If this bug exists in any sys- + tem along the line, the file will show up severly munged. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/uux.0 b/usr/man/cat1/uux.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d43d9b91db --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/uux.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +UUX(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUX(1C) + + + +NNAAMMEE + uux - unix to unix command execution + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + uuuuxx [ -- ] [ --ccCCllLLnnpprrzz ] [ --aa_n_a_m_e ] [ --gg_g_r_a_d_e ] [ --xx_d_e_b_u_g ] + command-string + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _U_u_x will gather zero or more files from various systems, + execute a command on a specified system and then send stan- + dard output to a file on a specified system. + + The _c_o_m_m_a_n_d-_s_t_r_i_n_g is made up of one or more arguments that + look like a Shell command line, except that the command and + file names may be prefixed by _s_y_s_t_e_m-_n_a_m_e!!. A null _s_y_s_t_e_m- + _n_a_m_e is interpreted as the local system. + + File names may be one of + + (1) a full path name; + + (2) a path name preceded by ~~_u_s_e_r where _u_s_e_r is a login + name on the specified system and is replaced by that + user's login directory; + + (3) a path name prefixed by ~~;; where ~~ is expanded to + the system's public directory (usually + /usr/spool/uucppublic); + + (4) a partial pathname, which is prefixed by the + current directory. + + As an example, the command + + uux "!diff usg!/usr/dan/file1 pwba!/a4/dan/file2 > + !~/dan/file.diff" + + will get the ffiillee11 and ffiillee22 files from the ``usg'' and + ``pwba'' machines, execute a _d_i_f_f(1) command and put the + results in ffiillee..ddiiffff in the local /usr/spool/uucppublic/dan/ + directory. + + Any special shell characters, such as <<>>;;||, should be quoted + either by quoting the entire _c_o_m_m_a_n_d-_s_t_r_i_n_g, or quoting the + special characters as individual arguments. + + _U_u_x will attempt to get all files to the execution system. + For files that are output files, the file name must be + escaped using parentheses. For example, the command + + uux a!wc b!/usr/file1 \(c!/usr/file2 \) + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 1 + + + + + + +UUX(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUX(1C) + + + + get //uussrr//ffiillee11 from system ``b'' and send it to system + ``a'', perform a _w_c command on that file and send the result + of the _w_c command to system ``c''. + + _U_u_x will notify you by mail if the requested command on the + remote system was disallowed. This notification can be + turned off by the --nn option. + + The following _o_p_t_i_o_n_s are interpreted by _u_u_x: + + -- The standard input to _u_u_x is made the standard input to + the _c_o_m_m_a_n_d-_s_t_r_i_n_g. + + --aa_n_a_m_e + Use _n_a_m_e as the user identification replacing the ini- + tiator user-id. + + --cc Do not copy local file to the spool directory for + transfer to the remote machine (this is the default). + + --CC Force the copy of local files to the spool directory + for transfer. + + --gg_g_r_a_d_e + _G_r_a_d_e is a single letter/number, from 00 to 99, AA to ZZ, + or aa to zz; 00 is the highest, and zz is the lowest grade. + The default is AA; by comparison _u_u_c_p(1C) defaults to nn + and mail is usually sent at grade CC. Lower grades + should be specified for high-volume jobs, such as news. + + --ll Try and make a link from the original file to the spool + directory. If the link cannot be made, copy the file. + + --nn Do not notify the user when the command completes. + + --pp Same as -: The standard input to _u_u_x is made the stan- + dard input to the _c_o_m_m_a_n_d-_s_t_r_i_n_g. + + --rr Do not start the file transfer, just queue the job. + + --xx_d_e_b_u_g + Produce debugging output on stdout. The debug is a + number between 0 and 9; higher numbers give more + detailed information. Debugging is permitted only for + privileged users (specifically, those with read access + to _L._s_y_s(5). + + --zz Notify the user only if the command fails. + + --LL Start up _u_u_c_i_c_o with the --LL flag. This will force calls + to be made to local sites only (see _u_u_c_i_c_o(8C)). + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 2 + + + + + + +UUX(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUX(1C) + + + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/spool/uucp spool directories + /usr/lib/uucp/* UUCP configuration data and daemons + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + uucp(1C), uucico(8C), uuxqt(8C). + +WWAARRNNIINNGG + For security reasons, many installations will limit the list + of commands executable on behalf of an incoming request from + _u_u_x. Many sites will permit little more than the receipt of + mail (see _m_a_i_l(1)) via _u_u_x. + +BBUUGGSS + Only the first command of a shell pipeline may have a + _s_y_s_t_e_m-_n_a_m_e!!. All other commands are executed on the system + of the first command. + + The use of the shell metacharacter ** will probably not do + what you want it to do. + + The shell tokens <<<< and >>>> are not implemented. + + When invoking _u_u_x from _c_s_h(1), the `!' character must be + prefixed by the `\' escape to inhibit _c_s_h's history mechan- + ism. (Quotes are not sufficient.) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/vacation.0 b/usr/man/cat1/vacation.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..036460b21b --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/vacation.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +VACATION(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual VACATION(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + vacation - return ``I am not here'' indication + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + vvaaccaattiioonn --ii + vvaaccaattiioonn [ --aa alias ] login + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _V_a_c_a_t_i_o_n returns a message to the sender of a message tel- + ling them that you are currently not reading your mail. The + intended use is in a ._f_o_r_w_a_r_d file. For example, your ._f_o_r_- + _w_a_r_d file might have: + + \eric, "|/usr/ucb/vacation -a allman eric" + + which would send messages to you (assuming your login name + was eric) and reply to any messages for ``eric'' or ``all- + man''. + + No message will be sent unless _l_o_g_i_n or an _a_l_i_a_s supplied + using the --aa option is a substring of either the ``To:'' or + ``Cc:'' headers of the mail. No messages from ``???- + REQUEST'', ``Postmaster'', ``UUCP'', ``MAILER'', or + ``MAILER-DAEMON'' will be replied to, nor is a notification + sent if a ``Precedence: bulk'' or ``Precedence: junk'' line + is included in the mail headers. Only one message per week + will be sent to each unique sender. The people who have + sent you messages are maintained as an _n_d_b_m(3) database in + the files ._v_a_c_a_t_i_o_n._p_a_g and ._v_a_c_a_t_i_o_n._d_i_r in your home + directory. + + The --ii flag initializes the vacation database files. It + should be used before you modify your ._f_o_r_w_a_r_d file. + + _V_a_c_a_t_i_o_n expects a file ._v_a_c_a_t_i_o_n._m_s_g, in your home direc- + tory, containing a message to be sent back to each sender. + It should be an entire message (including headers). For + example, it might say: + + From: eric@ucbmonet.Berkeley.EDU (Eric Allman) + Subject: I am on vacation + Delivered-By-The-Graces-Of: The Vacation program + Precedence: bulk + + I am on vacation until July 22. If you have something urgent, + please contact Joe Kalash . + --eric + + _V_a_c_a_t_i_o_n reads the first line from the standard input for a + UNIX-style ``From'' line to determine the sender. _S_e_n_d_- + _m_a_i_l(8) includes this ``From'' line automatically. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 July 9, 1988 1 + + + + + + +VACATION(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual VACATION(1) + + + + Fatal errors, such as calling _v_a_c_a_t_i_o_n with incorrect argu- + ments, or with non-existent _l_o_g_i_ns, are logged in the system + log file, using _s_y_s_l_o_g(8). + +FFIILLEESS + ~/.vacation.dir database file + ~/.vacation.msg message to send + ~/.vacation.pag database file + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + sendmail(8), syslog(8) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 July 9, 1988 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/vgrind.0 b/usr/man/cat1/vgrind.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e26e247d33 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/vgrind.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +VGRIND(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual VGRIND(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + vgrind - grind nice listings of programs + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + vvggrriinndd [ --ff ] [ -- ] [ --tt ] [ --nn ] [ --xx ] [ --WW ] [ --ssnn ] [ --hh + header ] [ --dd file ] [ --ll_l_a_n_g_u_a_g_e ] name ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _V_g_r_i_n_d formats the program sources which are arguments in a + nice style using _t_r_o_f_f(1) Comments are placed in italics, + keywords in bold face, and the name of the current function + is listed down the margin of each page as it is encountered. + + _V_g_r_i_n_d runs in two basic modes, filter mode or regular mode. + In filter mode _v_g_r_i_n_d acts as a filter in a manner similar + to _t_b_l(1). The standard input is passed directly to the + standard output except for lines bracketed by the _t_r_o_f_f-_l_i_k_e + macros: + + .vS - starts processing + + .vE - ends processing + + These lines are formatted as described above. The output + from this filter can be passed to _t_r_o_f_f for output. There + need be no particular ordering with _e_q_n(1) or _t_b_l(1). + + In regular mode _v_g_r_i_n_d accepts input files, processes them, + and passes them to _t_r_o_f_f(1) for output. + + In both modes _v_g_r_i_n_d passes any lines beginning with a + decimal point without conversion. + + The options are: + + --ff forces filter mode + + -- forces input to be taken from standard input (default + if --ff is specified ) + + --tt similar to the same option in _t_r_o_f_f causing formatted + text to go to the standard output + + --nn forces no keyword bolding + + --xx outputs the index file in a ``pretty'' format. The + index file itself is produced whenever _v_g_r_i_n_d is run + with a file called _i_n_d_e_x in the current directory. The + index of function definitions can then be run off by + giving _v_g_r_i_n_d the --xx option and the file _i_n_d_e_x as argu- + ment. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1 + + + + + + +VGRIND(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual VGRIND(1) + + + + --WW forces output to the (wide) Versatec printer rather + than the (narrow) Varian + + --ss specifies a point size to use on output (exactly the + same as the argument of a .ps) + + --hh specifies a particular header to put on every output + page (default is the file name) + + --dd specifies an alternate language definitions file + (default is /usr/lib/vgrindefs) + + --ll specifies the language to use. Currently known are + PASCAL (--llpp), MODEL (--llmm),CC (--llcc or the default), CSH + (--llccsshh), SHELL (--llsshh), RATFOR (--llrr), MODULA2 (--llmmoodd22), + YACC (--llyyaacccc), ISP (--lliisspp), and ICON (--llII). + +FFIILLEESS + index file where source for index is created + /usr/lib/tmac/tmac.vgrindmacro package + /usr/lib/vfontedpr preprocessor + /usr/lib/vgrindefs language descriptions + +AAUUTTHHOORR + Dave Presotto & William Joy + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + vlp(1), vtroff(1), vgrindefs(5) + +BBUUGGSS + Vfontedpr assumes that a certain programming style is fol- + lowed: + + For CC - function names can be preceded on a line only by + spaces, tabs, or an asterisk. The parenthesized arguments + must also be on the same line. + + For PPAASSCCAALL - function names need to appear on the same line + as the keywords _f_u_n_c_t_i_o_n or _p_r_o_c_e_d_u_r_e. + + For MMOODDEELL - function names need to appear on the same line + as the keywords _i_s _b_e_g_i_n_p_r_o_c. + + If these conventions are not followed, the indexing and mar- + ginal function name comment mechanisms will fail. + + More generally, arbitrary formatting styles for programs + mostly look bad. The use of spaces to align source code + fails miserably; if you plan to _v_g_r_i_n_d your program you + should use tabs. This is somewhat inevitable since the font + used by _v_g_r_i_n_d is variable width. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2 + + + + + + +VGRIND(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual VGRIND(1) + + + + The mechanism of ctags in recognizing functions should be + used here. + + Filter mode does not work in documents using the -me or -ms + macros. (So what use is it anyway?) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/vi.0 b/usr/man/cat1/vi.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3ec4ec06eb --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/vi.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +VI(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual VI(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + vi - screen oriented (visual) display editor based on ex + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + vvii [ --tt tag ] [ --rr ] [ ++_c_o_m_m_a_n_d ] [ --ll ] [ --ww_n ] name ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _V_i (visual) is a display oriented text editor based on + _e_x(1). _E_x and _v_i run the same code; it is possible to get + to the command mode of _e_x from within _v_i and vice-versa. + + The _V_i _Q_u_i_c_k _R_e_f_e_r_e_n_c_e card and the _I_n_t_r_o_d_u_c_t_i_o_n _t_o _D_i_s_p_l_a_y + _E_d_i_t_i_n_g _w_i_t_h _V_i provide full details on using _v_i. + +FFIILLEESS + See _e_x(1). + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + ex (1), edit (1), ``Vi Quick Reference'' card, ``An Intro- + duction to Display Editing with Vi''. + +AAUUTTHHOORR + William Joy + Mark Horton added macros to _v_i_s_u_a_l mode and is maintaining + version 3 + +BBUUGGSS + Software tabs using ^^TT work only immediately after the + _a_u_t_o_i_n_d_e_n_t. + + Left and right shifts on intelligent terminals don't make + use of insert and delete character operations in the termi- + nal. + + The _w_r_a_p_m_a_r_g_i_n option can be fooled since it looks at output + columns when blanks are typed. If a long word passes + through the margin and onto the next line without a break, + then the line won't be broken. + + Insert/delete within a line can be slow if tabs are present + on intelligent terminals, since the terminals need help in + doing this correctly. + + Saving text on deletes in the named buffers is somewhat + inefficient. + + The _s_o_u_r_c_e command does not work when executed as ::ssoouurrccee; + there is no way to use the ::aappppeenndd, ::cchhaannggee, and ::iinnsseerrtt + commands, since it is not possible to give more than one + line of input to a :: escape. To use these on a ::gglloobbaall you + must QQ to _e_x command mode, execute them, and then reenter + the screen editor with _v_i or _o_p_e_n. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/vlp.0 b/usr/man/cat1/vlp.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..abb3ddcbcf --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/vlp.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +VLP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual VLP(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + vlp - Format Lisp programs to be printed with nroff, vtroff, + or troff + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + vvllpp [ --pp _p_o_i_n_t_s_i_z_e ] [ --dd ] [ --ff ] [ --ll ] [ --vv ] [ --TT _t_i_t_l_e_1 + ] file1 [ --TT _t_i_t_l_e_2 ] file2 ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _V_l_p formats the named files so that they can be run through + nroff, vtroff, or troff to produce listings that line-up and + are attractive. The first non-blank character of each line + is lined-up vertically, as in the source file. Comments + (text beginning with a semicolon) are printed in italics. + Each function's name is printed in bold face next to the + function. This format makes Lisp code look attractive when + it is printed with a variable width font. + + Normally, _v_l_p works as a filter and sends its output to the + standard output. However, the --vv switch pipes the output + directly to vtroff. If no files are specified, then _v_l_p + reads from the standard input. + + The following options are available: + + --pp The --pp switch changes the size of the text from its + default value of 8 points to one of 6, 8, 10, or 12 + points. Once set, the point size is used for all sub- + sequent files. This point size does not apply to + embedded text (see -_f below). + + --dd The --dd switch puts _v_l_p into debugging mode. + + --ff _V_l_p has a filtered mode in which all lines are passed + unmodified, except those lines between the directives + ..LLss and ..LLee. This mode can be used to format Lisp code + that is embedded in a document. The directive ..LLss + takes an optional argument that gives the point size + for the embedded code. If not size is specified, the + size of the surrounding text is used. + + --ll The --ll switch prevents _v_l_p from placing labels next to + functions. This switch is useful for embedded Lisp + code, where the labels would be distracting. + + --vv This switch cause _v_l_p to send its output to vtroff + rather than the standard output. + + --TT A title to be printed on each page may be specified by + using the --TT switch. The --TT switch applies only to the + next file name given. Titles are not printed for + embedded text (see --ff, above). This switch may not be + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + +VLP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual VLP(1) + + + + used if _v_l_p is reading from the standard input. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/lib/vlpmacs troff/nroff macros + +AAUUTTHHOORR + Originally written by John K. Foderaro, with additional + changes by Kevin Layer and James Larus. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + vgrind(1), lisp(1) + +BBUUGGSS + _v_l_p transforms \ into \\ so that it will be printed out. + Hence, troff commands cannot be embedded in Lisp code. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/vmstat.0 b/usr/man/cat1/vmstat.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b193ea4f86 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/vmstat.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +VMSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual VMSTAT(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + vmstat - report virtual memory statistics + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + vvmmssttaatt [ --ffssiimm ] [ drives ] [ interval [ count ] ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _V_m_s_t_a_t delves into the system and normally reports certain + statistics kept about process, virtual memory, disk, trap + and cpu activity. If given a --ff argument, it instead + reports on the number of _f_o_r_k_s and _v_f_o_r_k_s since system + startup and the number of pages of virtual memory involved + in each kind of fork. If given a --ss argument, it instead + prints the contents of the _s_u_m structure, giving the total + number of several kinds of paging related events which have + occurred since boot. If given a --ii argument, it instead + reports on the number of _i_n_t_e_r_r_u_p_t_s taken by each device + since system startup. If given a --mm argument, it instead + reports on the usage of kernel dynamic memory listed first + by _s_i_z_e of allocation and then by _t_y_p_e of usage. + + If none of these options are given, _v_m_s_t_a_t will report in + the first line a summary of the virtual memory activity + since the system has been booted. If _i_n_t_e_r_v_a_l is specified, + then successive lines are summaries over the last _i_n_t_e_r_v_a_l + seconds. ``vmstat 5'' will print what the system is doing + every five seconds; this is a good choice of printing inter- + val since this is how often some of the statistics are sam- + pled in the system; others vary every second, running the + output for a while will make it apparent which are recom- + puted every second. If a _c_o_u_n_t is given, the statistics are + repeated _c_o_u_n_t times. The format fields are: + + Procs: information about numbers of processes in various + states. + + r in run queue + b blocked for resources (i/o, paging, etc.) + w runnable or short sleeper (< 20 secs) but swapped + + Memory: information about the usage of virtual and real + memory. Virtual pages are considered active if they belong + to processes which are running or have run in the last 20 + seconds. A ``page'' here is 1024 bytes. + + avm active virtual pages + fre size of the free list + + Page: information about page faults and paging activity. + These are averaged each five seconds, and given in units per + second. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 February 27, 1988 1 + + + + + + +VMSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual VMSTAT(1) + + + + re page reclaims (simulating reference bits) + at pages attached (found in free list) + pi pages paged in + po pages paged out + fr pages freed per second + de anticipated short term memory shortfall + sr pages scanned by clock algorithm, per-second + + up/hp/rk/ra: Disk operations per second (this field is sys- + tem dependent). Typically paging will be split across + several of the available drives. The number under each of + these is the unit number. + + Faults: trap/interrupt rate averages per second over last 5 + seconds. + + in (non clock) device interrupts per second + sy system calls per second + cs cpu context switch rate (switches/sec) + + Cpu: breakdown of percentage usage of CPU time + + us user time for normal and low priority processes + sy system time + id cpu idle + + If more than 4 disk drives are configured in the system, + _v_m_s_t_a_t displays only the first 4 drives, with priority given + to Massbus disk drives (i.e. if both Unibus and Massbus + drives are present and the total number of drives exceeds 4, + then some number of Unibus drives will not be displayed in + favor of the Massbus drives). To force _v_m_s_t_a_t to display + specific drives, their names may be supplied on the command + line. + +FFIILLEESS + /dev/kmem, /vmunix + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + _s_y_s_t_a_t(1), _i_o_s_t_a_t(1) + + The sections starting with ``Interpreting system activity'' + in _I_n_s_t_a_l_l_i_n_g _a_n_d _O_p_e_r_a_t_i_n_g _4._2_b_s_d. + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 February 27, 1988 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/w.0 b/usr/man/cat1/w.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5b72951714 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/w.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +W(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual W(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + w - who is on and what they are doing + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ww [ --hhllss ] [ user ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _W prints a summary of the current activity on the system, + including what each user is doing. The heading line shows + the current time of day, how long the system has been up, + the number of users logged into the system, and the load + averages. The load average numbers give the number of jobs + in the run queue averaged over 1, 5 and 15 minutes. + + The fields output are: the users login name, the name of the + tty the user is on, the host from which the user is logged + in, the time the user logged on, the time since the user + last typed anything, the CPU time used by all processes and + their children on that terminal, the CPU time used by the + currently active processes, the name and arguments of the + current process. + + The --hh flag suppresses the heading. The --ss flag asks for a + short form of output. In the short form, the tty is abbre- + viated, the login time and cpu times are left off, as are + the arguments to commands. --ll gives the long output, which + is the default. The --ff option suppresses the ``from'' + field. + + If a _u_s_e_r name is included, the output will be restricted to + that user. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/utmp + /dev/kmem + /dev/drum + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + who(1), finger(1), ps(1) + +AAUUTTHHOORR + Mark Horton + +BBUUGGSS + The notion of the ``current process'' is muddy. The current + algorithm is ``the highest numbered process on the terminal + that is not ignoring interrupts, or, if there is none, the + highest numbered process on the terminal''. This fails, for + example, in critical sections of programs like the shell and + editor, or when faulty programs running in the background + fork and fail to ignore interrupts. (In cases where no pro- + cess can be found, _w prints ``-''.) + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 28, 1987 1 + + + + + + +W(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual W(1) + + + + The CPU time is only an estimate, in particular, if someone + leaves a background process running after logging out, the + person currently on that terminal is ``charged'' with the + time. + + Background processes are not shown, even though they account + for much of the load on the system. + + Sometimes processes, typically those in the background, are + printed with null or garbaged arguments. In these cases, + the name of the command is printed in parentheses. + + W does not know about the new conventions for detection of + background jobs. It will sometimes find a background job + instead of the right one. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 28, 1987 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/wait.0 b/usr/man/cat1/wait.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..81a59d3506 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/wait.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +WAIT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WAIT(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + wait - await completion of process + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + wwaaiitt + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + Wait until all processes started with && have completed, and + report on abnormal terminations. + + Because the _w_a_i_t(2) system call must be executed in the + parent process, the Shell itself executes _w_a_i_t, without + creating a new process. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + sh(1) + +BBUUGGSS + Not all the processes of a 3- or more-stage pipeline are + children of the Shell, and thus can't be waited for. (This + bug does not apply to _c_s_h(1).) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/wall.0 b/usr/man/cat1/wall.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9589aa8c8a --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/wall.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +WALL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WALL(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + wall - write to all users + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + wwaallll + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _W_a_l_l reads its standard input until an end-of-file. It then + sends this message, preceded by `Broadcast Message ...', to + all logged in users. + + The sender should be super-user to override any protections + the users may have invoked. + +FFIILLEESS + /dev/tty? + /etc/utmp + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + mesg(1), write(1) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + `Cannot send to ...' when the open on a user's tty file + fails. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/wc.0 b/usr/man/cat1/wc.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f07a2d6b37 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/wc.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +WC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WC(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + wc - word count + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + wwcc [ --llwwcc ] [ name ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _W_c counts lines, words and characters in the named files, or + in the standard input if no name appears. A word is a maxi- + mal string of characters delimited by spaces, tabs or new- + lines. + + If an argument beginning with one of ``lwc'' is present, the + specified counts (lines, words, or characters) are selected + by the letters ll, ww, or cc. The default is --llwwcc. + +BBUUGGSS + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/whatis.0 b/usr/man/cat1/whatis.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..49306fb6ca --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/whatis.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +WHATIS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WHATIS(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + whatis - describe what a command is + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + wwhhaattiiss [ --MM _p_a_t_h ] command ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _W_h_a_t_i_s looks up a given command and gives the header line + from the manual page. You can then use the _m_a_n(1) command + to get more information. + + Normally _w_h_a_t_i_s checks in a standard location (/usr/man) for + its database ``whatis''. This can be changed by supplying a + _p_a_t_h (a la the Bourne shell) with the --MM flag. This search + path must be a colon (``:'') separated list of directories + which _w_h_a_t_i_s will search for files named ``whatis''. The + path can also be set with the environmental variable _M_A_N_- + _P_A_T_H. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/man/whatis data base + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + apropos(1), man(1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 30, 1987 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/whereis.0 b/usr/man/cat1/whereis.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a2fba85ca3 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/whereis.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +WHEREIS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WHEREIS(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + whereis - locate source, binary, and or manual for program + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + wwhheerreeiiss [ --ssbbmm ] [ --uu ] [ --SSBBMM dir ... --ff ] name ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _W_h_e_r_e_i_s locates source/binary and manuals sections for + specified files. The supplied names are first stripped of + leading pathname components and any (single) trailing exten- + sion of the form ``.ext'', e.g. ``.c''. Prefixes of ``s.'' + resulting from use of source code control are also dealt + with. _W_h_e_r_e_i_s then attempts to locate the desired program + in a list of standard places. If any of the --bb,, --ss or --mm + flags are given then _w_h_e_r_e_i_s searches only for binaries, + sources or manual sections respectively (or any two + thereof). The --uu flag may be used to search for unusual + entries. A file is said to be unusual if it does not have + one entry of each requested type. Thus ``whereis -m -u *'' + asks for those files in the current directory which have no + documentation. + + Finally, the --BB --MM and --SS flags may be used to change or + otherwise limit the places where _w_h_e_r_e_i_s searches. The --ff + file flags is used to terminate the last such directory list + and signal the start of file names. + +EEXXAAMMPPLLEE + The following finds all the files in /usr/bin which are not + documented in /usr/man/man1 with source in /usr/src/cmd: + + cd /usr/ucb + whereis -u -M /usr/man/man1 -S /usr/src/cmd -f * + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/src/* + /usr/{doc,man}/* + /lib, /etc, /usr/{lib,bin,ucb,old,new,local} + +BBUUGGSS + Since the program uses _c_h_d_i_r(2) to run faster, pathnames + given with the --MM --SS and --BB must be full; i.e. they must + begin with a ``/''. + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/which.0 b/usr/man/cat1/which.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..eac49974ad --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/which.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +WHICH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WHICH(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + which - locate a program file including aliases and paths + (_c_s_h only) + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + wwhhiicchh [ name ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _W_h_i_c_h takes a list of names and looks for the files which + would be executed had these names been given as commands. + Each argument is expanded if it is aliased, and searched for + along the user's path. Both aliases and path are taken from + the user's .cshrc file. + +FFIILLEESS + ~/.cshrc source of aliases and path values + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + A diagnostic is given for names which are aliased to more + than a single word, or if an executable file with the argu- + ment name was not found in the path. + +BBUUGGSS + Must be executed by a csh, since only csh's know about + aliases. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/while.0 b/usr/man/cat1/while.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..faac4cd331 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/while.0 @@ -0,0 +1,594 @@ + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + sh, for, case, if, while, ::, .., break, continue, cd, eval, + exec, exit, export, login, read, readonly, set, shift, + times, trap, umask, wait - command language + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + sshh [ --cceeiikknnrrssttuuvvxx ] [ arg ] ... + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _S_h is a command programming language that executes commands + read from a terminal or a file. See iinnvvooccaattiioonn for the + meaning of arguments to the shell. + + CCoommmmaannddss.. + A _s_i_m_p_l_e-_c_o_m_m_a_n_d is a sequence of non blank _w_o_r_d_s separated + by blanks (a blank is a ttaabb or a ssppaaccee). The first word + specifies the name of the command to be executed. Except as + specified below the remaining words are passed as arguments + to the invoked command. The command name is passed as argu- + ment 0 (see _e_x_e_c_v_e(2)). The _v_a_l_u_e of a simple-command is + its exit status if it terminates normally or 200+_s_t_a_t_u_s if + it terminates abnormally (see _s_i_g_v_e_c(2) for a list of status + values). + + A _p_i_p_e_l_i_n_e is a sequence of one or more _c_o_m_m_a_n_d_s separated + by ||.. The standard output of each command but the last is + connected by a _p_i_p_e(2) to the standard input of the next + command. Each command is run as a separate process; the + shell waits for the last command to terminate. + + A _l_i_s_t is a sequence of one or more _p_i_p_e_l_i_n_e_s separated by + ;;, &&, &&&& or |||| and optionally terminated by ;; or &&. ;; and && + have equal precedence which is lower than that of &&&& and ||||, + &&&& and |||| also have equal precedence. A semicolon causes + sequential execution; an ampersand causes the preceding + _p_i_p_e_l_i_n_e to be executed without waiting for it to finish. + The symbol &&&& (||||) causes the _l_i_s_t following to be executed + only if the preceding _p_i_p_e_l_i_n_e returns a zero (non zero) + value. Newlines may appear in a _l_i_s_t, instead of semi- + colons, to delimit commands. + + A _c_o_m_m_a_n_d is either a simple-command or one of the follow- + ing. The value returned by a command is that of the last + simple-command executed in the command. + + ffoorr _n_a_m_e [iinn _w_o_r_d ...] ddoo _l_i_s_t ddoonnee + Each time a ffoorr command is executed _n_a_m_e is set to the + next word in the ffoorr word list. If iinn _w_o_r_d ... is + omitted, iinn ""$$@@"" is assumed. Execution ends when there + are no more words in the list. + + ccaassee _w_o_r_d iinn [_p_a_t_t_e_r_n [ || _p_a_t_t_e_r_n ] ... )) _l_i_s_t ;;;;] ... eessaacc + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + A ccaassee command executes the _l_i_s_t associated with the + first pattern that matches _w_o_r_d. The form of the pat- + terns is the same as that used for file name genera- + tion. + + iiff _l_i_s_t tthheenn _l_i_s_t [eelliiff _l_i_s_t tthheenn _l_i_s_t] ... [eellssee _l_i_s_t] ffii + The _l_i_s_t following iiff is executed and if it returns + zero the _l_i_s_t following tthheenn is executed. Otherwise, + the _l_i_s_t following eelliiff is executed and if its value is + zero the _l_i_s_t following tthheenn is executed. Failing that + the eellssee _l_i_s_t is executed. + + wwhhiillee _l_i_s_t [ddoo _l_i_s_t] ddoonnee + A wwhhiillee command repeatedly executes the wwhhiillee _l_i_s_t and + if its value is zero executes the ddoo _l_i_s_t; otherwise + the loop terminates. The value returned by a wwhhiillee + command is that of the last executed command in the ddoo + _l_i_s_t. uunnttiill may be used in place of wwhhiillee to negate the + loop termination test. + + (( _l_i_s_t )) + Execute _l_i_s_t in a subshell. + + {{ _l_i_s_t }} + _l_i_s_t is simply executed. + + The following words are only recognized as the first word of + a command and when not quoted. + + iiff tthheenn eellssee eelliiff ffii ccaassee iinn eessaacc ffoorr wwhhiillee uunnttiill ddoo + ddoonnee {{ }} + + CCoommmmaanndd ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonn.. + The standard output from a command enclosed in a pair of + back quotes (````) may be used as part or all of a word; + trailing newlines are removed. + + PPaarraammeetteerr ssuubbssttiittuuttiioonn.. + The character $$ is used to introduce substitutable parame- + ters. Positional parameters may be assigned values by sseett. + Variables may be set by writing + + _n_a_m_e==_v_a_l_u_e [ _n_a_m_e==_v_a_l_u_e ] ... + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r}} + A _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is a sequence of letters, digits or under- + scores (a _n_a_m_e), a digit, or any of the characters ** @@ + ## ?? -- $$ !!.. The value, if any, of the parameter is sub- + stituted. The braces are required only when _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r + is followed by a letter, digit, or underscore that is + not to be interpreted as part of its name. If _p_a_r_a_m_e_- + _t_e_r is a digit, it is a positional parameter. If + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is ** or @@ then all the positional parameters, + starting with $$11, are substituted separated by spaces. + $$00 is set from argument zero when the shell is invoked. + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r-_w_o_r_d}} + If _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is set, substitute its value; otherwise + substitute _w_o_r_d. + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r=_w_o_r_d}} + If _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is not set, set it to _w_o_r_d; the value of + the parameter is then substituted. Positional parame- + ters may not be assigned to in this way. + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r?_w_o_r_d}} + If _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is set, substitute its value; otherwise, + print _w_o_r_d and exit from the shell. If _w_o_r_d is omit- + ted, a standard message is printed. + + ${{_p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r+_w_o_r_d}} + If _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r is set, substitute _w_o_r_d; otherwise substi- + tute nothing. + + In the above _w_o_r_d is not evaluated unless it is to be used + as the substituted string. (So that, for example, echo + ${d-'pwd'} will only execute _p_w_d if _d is unset.) + + The following _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s are automatically set by the shell. + + ## The number of positional parameters in decimal. + -- Options supplied to the shell on invocation or by + sseett. + ?? The value returned by the last executed command in + decimal. + $$ The process number of this shell. + !! The process number of the last background command + invoked. + + The following _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s are used but not set by the shell. + + HHOOMMEE The default argument (home directory) for the ccdd + command. + PPAATTHH The search path for commands (see eexxeeccuuttiioonn). + MMAAIILL If this variable is set to the name of a mail + file, the shell informs the user of the arrival of + mail in the specified file. + PPSS11 Primary prompt string, by default '$ '. + PPSS22 Secondary prompt string, by default '> '. + IIFFSS Internal field separators, normally ssppaaccee, ttaabb, + and nneewwlliinnee. IIFFSS is ignored if _s_h is running as + root or if the effective user id differs from the + real user id. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + BBllaannkk iinntteerrpprreettaattiioonn.. + After parameter and command substitution, any results of + substitution are scanned for internal field separator char- + acters (those found in $$IIFFSS) and split into distinct argu- + ments where such characters are found. Explicit null argu- + ments ("" or '') are retained. Implicit null arguments + (those resulting from _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s that have no values) are + removed. + + FFiillee nnaammee ggeenneerraattiioonn.. + Following substitution, each command word is scanned for the + characters **, ?? and [[.. If one of these characters appears, + the word is regarded as a pattern. The word is replaced + with alphabetically sorted file names that match the pat- + tern. If no file name is found that matches the pattern, + the word is left unchanged. The character .. at the start of + a file name or immediately following a //, and the character + //, must be matched explicitly. + + ** Matches any string, including the null string. + ?? Matches any single character. + [[......]] + Matches any one of the characters enclosed. A pair of + characters separated by -- matches any character lexi- + cally between the pair. + + QQuuoottiinngg.. + The following characters have a special meaning to the shell + and cause termination of a word unless quoted. + + ;; && (( )) || << >> nneewwlliinnee ssppaaccee ttaabb + + A character may be _q_u_o_t_e_d by preceding it with a \\.. \\nneeww-- + lliinnee is ignored. All characters enclosed between a pair of + quote marks (''''), except a single quote, are quoted. Inside + double quotes ("""") parameter and command substitution occurs + and \\ quotes the characters \\ '' "" and $$. + + ""$$**"" is equivalent to ""$$11 $$22 ......"" whereas + ""$$@@"" is equivalent to ""$$11"" ""$$22"" ...... .. + + PPrroommppttiinngg.. + When used interactively, the shell prompts with the value of + PS1 before reading a command. If at any time a newline is + typed and further input is needed to complete a command, the + secondary prompt ($$PPSS22) is issued. + + IInnppuutt oouuttppuutt.. + Before a command is executed its input and output may be + redirected using a special notation interpreted by the + shell. The following may appear anywhere in a simple- + command or may precede or follow a _c_o_m_m_a_n_d and are not + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + passed on to the invoked command. Substitution occurs + before _w_o_r_d or _d_i_g_i_t is used. + + <_w_o_r_d + Use file _w_o_r_d as standard input (file descriptor 0). + + >_w_o_r_d + Use file _w_o_r_d as standard output (file descriptor 1). + If the file does not exist, it is created; otherwise it + is truncated to zero length. + + >>_w_o_r_d + Use file _w_o_r_d as standard output. If the file exists, + output is appended (by seeking to the end); otherwise + the file is created. + + <<_w_o_r_d + The shell input is read up to a line the same as _w_o_r_d, + or end of file. The resulting document becomes the + standard input. If any character of _w_o_r_d is quoted, no + interpretation is placed upon the characters of the + document; otherwise, parameter and command substitution + occurs, \\nneewwlliinnee is ignored, and \\ is used to quote the + characters \\ $$ '' and the first character of _w_o_r_d. + + <&_d_i_g_i_t + The standard input is duplicated from file descriptor + _d_i_g_i_t; see _d_u_p(2). Similarly for the standard output + using >. + + <&- The standard input is closed. Similarly for the stan- + dard output using >. + + If one of the above is preceded by a digit, the file + descriptor created is that specified by the digit (instead + of the default 0 or 1). For example, + + ... 2>&1 + + creates file descriptor 2 to be a duplicate of file descrip- + tor 1. + + If a command is followed by && then the default standard + input for the command is the empty file (/dev/null). Other- + wise, the environment for the execution of a command con- + tains the file descriptors of the invoking shell as modified + by input output specifications. + + EEnnvviirroonnmmeenntt.. + The environment is a list of name-value pairs that is passed + to an executed program in the same way as a normal argument + list; see _e_x_e_c_v_e(2) and _e_n_v_i_r_o_n(7). The shell interacts + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 5 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + with the environment in several ways. On invocation, the + shell scans the environment and creates a _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r for each + name found, giving it the corresponding value. Executed + commands inherit the same environment. If the user modifies + the values of these _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s or creates new ones, none of + these affects the environment unless the eexxppoorrtt command is + used to bind the shell's _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r to the environment. The + environment seen by any executed command is thus composed of + any unmodified name-value pairs originally inherited by the + shell, plus any modifications or additions, all of which + must be noted in eexxppoorrtt commands. + + The environment for any _s_i_m_p_l_e-_c_o_m_m_a_n_d may be augmented by + prefixing it with one or more assignments to _p_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s. + Thus these two lines are equivalent + + TERM=450 cmd args + (export TERM; TERM=450; cmd args) + + If the --kk flag is set, _a_l_l keyword arguments are placed in + the environment, even if the occur after the command name. + The following prints 'a=b c' and 'c': + echo a=b c + set -k + echo a=b c + + SSiiggnnaallss.. + The INTERRUPT and QUIT signals for an invoked command are + ignored if the command is followed by &&; otherwise signals + have the values inherited by the shell from its parent. + (But see also ttrraapp..) + + EExxeeccuuttiioonn.. + Each time a command is executed the above substitutions are + carried out. Except for the 'special commands' listed below + a new process is created and an attempt is made to execute + the command via an _e_x_e_c_v_e(2). + + The shell parameter $$PPAATTHH defines the search path for the + directory containing the command. Each alternative direc- + tory name is separated by a colon (::). The default path is + :://bbiinn:://uussrr//bbiinn. If the command name contains a /, the + search path is not used. Otherwise, each directory in the + path is searched for an executable file. If the file has + execute permission but is not an _a._o_u_t file, it is assumed + to be a file containing shell commands. A subshell (i.e., a + separate process) is spawned to read it. A parenthesized + command is also executed in a subshell. + + SSppeecciiaall ccoommmmaannddss.. + The following commands are executed in the shell process and + except where specified no input output redirection is + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 6 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + permitted for such commands. + + ## For non-interactive shells, everything following the ## + is treated as a comment, i.e. the rest of the line is + ignored. For interactive shells, the ## has no special + effect. + + :: No effect; the command does nothing. + .. _f_i_l_e + Read and execute commands from _f_i_l_e and return. The + search path $$PPAATTHH is used to find the directory con- + taining _f_i_l_e. + bbrreeaakk [_n] + Exit from the enclosing ffoorr or wwhhiillee loop, if any. If + _n is specified, break _n levels. + ccoonnttiinnuuee [_n] + Resume the next iteration of the enclosing ffoorr or wwhhiillee + loop. If _n is specified, resume at the _n-th enclosing + loop. + ccdd [_a_r_g] + Change the current directory to _a_r_g. The shell parame- + ter $$HHOOMMEE is the default _a_r_g. + eevvaall [_a_r_g ...] + The arguments are read as input to the shell and the + resulting command(s) executed. + eexxeecc [_a_r_g ...] + The command specified by the arguments is executed in + place of this shell without creating a new process. + Input output arguments may appear and if no other argu- + ments are given cause the shell input output to be + modified. + eexxiitt [_n] + Causes a non interactive shell to exit with the exit + status specified by _n. If _n is omitted, the exit status + is that of the last command executed. (An end of file + will also exit from the shell.) + eexxppoorrtt [_n_a_m_e ...] + The given names are marked for automatic export to the + _e_n_v_i_r_o_n_m_e_n_t of subsequently-executed commands. If no + arguments are given, a list of exportable names is + printed. + llooggiinn [_a_r_g ...] + Equivalent to 'exec login arg ...'. + rreeaadd _n_a_m_e ... + One line is read from the standard input; successive + words of the input are assigned to the variables _n_a_m_e + in order, with leftover words to the last variable. + The return code is 0 unless the end-of-file is encoun- + tered. + rreeaaddoonnllyy [_n_a_m_e ...] + The given names are marked readonly and the values of + the these names may not be changed by subsequent + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 7 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + assignment. If no arguments are given, a list of all + readonly names is printed. + sseett [--eekknnppttuuvvxx [_a_r_g ...]] + --ee If non interactive, exit immediately if a command + fails. + --kk All keyword arguments are placed in the environment + for a command, not just those that precede the com- + mand name. + --nn Read commands but do not execute them. + --tt Exit after reading and executing one command. + --uu Treat unset variables as an error when substituting. + --vv Print shell input lines as they are read. + --xx Print commands and their arguments as they are exe- + cuted. + -- Turn off the --xx and --vv options. + + These flags can also be used upon invocation of the + shell. The current set of flags may be found in $$--. + + Remaining arguments are positional parameters and are + assigned, in order, to $$11, $$22, etc. If no arguments + are given, the values of all names are printed. + + sshhiifftt + The positional parameters from $$22... are renamed $$11... + + ttiimmeess + Print the accumulated user and system times for + processes run from the shell. + + ttrraapp [_a_r_g] [_n] ... + _A_r_g is a command to be read and executed when the shell + receives signal(s) _n. (Note that _a_r_g is scanned once + when the trap is set and once when the trap is taken.) + Trap commands are executed in order of signal number. + If _a_r_g is absent, all trap(s) _n are reset to their ori- + ginal values. If _a_r_g is the null string, this signal + is ignored by the shell and by invoked commands. If _n + is 0, the command _a_r_g is executed on exit from the + shell, otherwise upon receipt of signal _n as numbered + in _s_i_g_v_e_c(2). _T_r_a_p with no arguments prints a list of + commands associated with each signal number. + + uummaasskk [ _n_n_n ] + The user file creation mask is set to the octal value + _n_n_n (see _u_m_a_s_k(2)). If _n_n_n is omitted, the current + value of the mask is printed. + + wwaaiitt [_n] + Wait for the specified process and report its termina- + tion status. If _n is not given, all currently active + child processes are waited for. The return code from + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 8 + + + + + + +SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1) + + + + this command is that of the process waited for. + + IInnvvooccaattiioonn.. + If the first character of argument zero is --, commands are + read from $$HHOOMMEE//..pprrooffiillee, if such a file exists. Commands + are then read as described below. The following flags are + interpreted by the shell when it is invoked. + --cc _s_t_r_i_n_g If the --cc flag is present, commands are read from + _s_t_r_i_n_g. + --ss If the --ss flag is present or if no arguments + remain then commands are read from the standard + input. Shell output is written to file descrip- + tor 2. + --ii If the --ii flag is present or if the shell input + and output are attached to a terminal (as told by + _g_t_t_y) then this shell is _i_n_t_e_r_a_c_t_i_v_e. In this + case the terminate signal SIGTERM (see _s_i_g_v_e_c(2)) + is ignored (so that 'kill 0' does not kill an + interactive shell) and the interrupt signal SIG- + INT is caught and ignored (so that wwaaiitt is inter- + ruptible). In all cases SIGQUIT is ignored by + the shell. + + The remaining flags and arguments are described under the + sseett command. + +FFIILLEESS + $HOME/..profile + /tmp/sh* + /dev/null + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + csh(1), test(1), execve(2), environ(7) + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Errors detected by the shell, such as syntax errors cause + the shell to return a non zero exit status. If the shell is + being used non interactively then execution of the shell + file is abandoned. Otherwise, the shell returns the exit + status of the last command executed (see also eexxiitt). + +BBUUGGSS + If << is used to provide standard input to an asynchronous + process invoked by &, the shell gets mixed up about naming + the input document. A garbage file /tmp/sh* is created, and + the shell complains about not being able to find the file by + another name. + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 9 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/who.0 b/usr/man/cat1/who.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1b21b854f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/who.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +WHO(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WHO(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + who - who is on the system + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + wwhhoo [ who-file ] [ aamm II ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _W_h_o, without any argument, reads the /etc/utmp file, and + lists the login name, terminal name, and login time for each + user currently logged into the system. If a single argument + is given, _w_h_o uses that file instead of /etc/utmp. Typi- + cally, that file will be /usr/adm/wtmp, which contains a + record of all the logins, logouts, crashes, shutdowns and + time changes since it was created. In either case, each + login will be listed with the user name, the terminal name + (with "/dev/" suppressed), login date and time, and, if + applicable, the host logged in from. + + If /usr/adm/wtmp is being used as the file, the user name + may be empty or one of the special characters '|', '}' and + '~'. Logouts produce an output line without any user name. + For more information on the special characters, see utmp(5). + + With two arguments, as in `who am I' (and also `who are + you'), _w_h_o tells you who you are logged in as. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/utmp + /usr/adm/wtmp + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + last(1), users(1), getuid(2), utmp(5) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 December 10, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/whoami.0 b/usr/man/cat1/whoami.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..41a80107bb --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/whoami.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +WHOAMI(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WHOAMI(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + whoami - print effective current user id + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + wwhhooaammii + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _W_h_o_a_m_i prints who you are. It works even if you are su'd, + while `who am i' does not since it uses /etc/utmp. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/passwd Name data base + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + who (1) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/whois.0 b/usr/man/cat1/whois.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e342404cd7 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/whois.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +WHOIS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WHOIS(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + whois - DARPA Internet user name directory service + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + wwhhooiiss name + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + whois help + Produces a helpful message similar to the following: + + Please enter a name or a handle (``ident"), such as ``Smith" + or ``SRI-NIC". Starting with a period forces a name-only + search; starting with exclamation point forces handle-only. + Examples: + Smith [looks for name or handle SMITH ] + !SRI-NIC [looks for handle SRI-NIC only ] + .Smith, John [looks for name JOHN SMITH only ] + Adding ``..." to the argument will match anything from that + point, e.g. ``ZU..." will match ZUL, ZUM, etc. + + To have the ENTIRE membership list of a group or organiza- + tion, if you are asking about a group or org, shown with the + record, use an asterisk character `*' directly preceding the + given argument. [CAUTION: If there are a lot of members + this will take a long time!] You may of course use exclama- + tion point and asterisk, or a period and asterisk together. + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + RFC 812: Nicname/Whois + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 June 6, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/window.0 b/usr/man/cat1/window.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..dca990ec43 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/window.0 @@ -0,0 +1,726 @@ + + + +WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + window - window environment + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + wwiinnddooww [ --tt ] [ --ff ] [ --dd ] [ --ee eessccaappee--cchhaarr ] [ --cc ccoommmmaanndd + ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _W_i_n_d_o_w implements a window environment on ASCII terminals. + + A window is a rectangular portion of the physical terminal + screen associated with a set of processes. Its size and + position can be changed by the user at any time. Processes + communicate with their window in the same way they normally + interact with a terminal--through their standard input, out- + put, and diagnostic file descriptors. The window program + handles the details of redirecting input an output to and + from the windows. At any one time, only one window can + receive input from the keyboard, but all windows can simul- + taneously send output to the display. + + Windows can overlap and are framed as necessary. Each win- + dow is named by one of the digits ``1'' to ``9''. This one + character identifier, as well as a user definable label + string, are displayed with the window on the top edge of its + frame. A window can be designated to be in the _f_o_r_e_g_r_o_u_n_d, + in which case it will always be on top of all normal, non- + foreground windows, and can be covered only by other fore- + ground windows. A window need not be completely within the + edges of the terminal screen. Thus a large window (possibly + larger than the screen) may be positioned to show only a + portion of its full size. + + Each window has a cursor and a set of control functions. + Most intelligent terminal operations such as line and char- + acter deletion and insertion are supported. Display modes + such as underlining and reverse video are available if they + are supported by the terminal. In addition, similar to ter- + minals with multiple pages of memory, each window has a text + buffer which can have more lines than the window itself. + +OOPPTTIIOONNSS + When _w_i_n_d_o_w starts up, the commands (see long commands + below) contained in the file ._w_i_n_d_o_w_r_c in the user's home + directory are executed. If it does not exist, two equal + sized windows spanning the terminal screen are created by + default. + + The command line options are + + --tt Turn on terse mode (see _t_e_r_s_e command below). + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 1 + + + + + + +WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1) + + + + --ff Fast. Don't perform any startup action. + + --dd Ignore ._w_i_n_d_o_w_r_c and create the two default windows + instead. + + --ee eessccaappee--cchhaarr + Set the escape character to _e_s_c_a_p_e-_c_h_a_r. _E_s_c_a_p_e-_c_h_a_r + can be a single character, or in the form ^_X where _X is + any character, meaning control-_X. + + --cc ccoommmmaanndd + Execute the string _c_o_m_m_a_n_d as a long command (see + below) before doing anything else. + +PPRROOCCEESSSS EENNVVIIRROONNMMEENNTT + With each newly created window, a shell program is spawned + with its process environment tailored to that window. Its + standard input, output, and diagnostic file descriptors are + bound to one end of either a pseudo-terminal (_p_t_y (4)) or a + UNIX domain socket (_s_o_c_k_e_t_p_a_i_r (4)). If a pseudo-terminal + is used, then its special characters and modes (see _s_t_t_y + (1)) are copied from the physical terminal. A _t_e_r_m_c_a_p (5) + entry tailored to this window is created and passed as + environment (_e_n_v_i_r_o_n (5)) variable _T_E_R_M_C_A_P. The termcap + entry contains the window's size and characteristics as well + as information from the physical terminal, such as the + existence of underline, reverse video, and other display + modes, and the codes produced by the terminal's function + keys, if any. In addition, the window size attributes of + the pseudo-terminal are set to reflect the size of this win- + dow, and updated whenever it is changed by the user. In + particular, the editor _v_i (1) uses this information to + redraw its display. + +OOPPEERRAATTIIOONN + During normal execution, _w_i_n_d_o_w can be in one of two states: + conversation mode and command mode. In conversation mode, + the terminal's real cursor is placed at the cursor position + of a particular window--called the current window--and input + from the keyboard is sent to the process in that window. + The current window is always on top of all other windows, + except those in foreground. In addition, it is set apart by + highlighting its identifier and label in reverse video. + + Typing _w_i_n_d_o_w's escape character (normally ^P) in conversa- + tion mode switches it into command mode. In command mode, + the top line of the terminal screen becomes the command + prompt window, and _w_i_n_d_o_w interprets input from the keyboard + as commands to manipulate windows. + + There are two types of commands: short commands are usually + one or two key strokes; long commands are strings either + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 2 + + + + + + +WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1) + + + + typed by the user in the command window (see the ``:'' com- + mand below), or read from a file (see _s_o_u_r_c_e below). + +SSHHOORRTT CCOOMMMMAANNDDSS + Below, # represents one of the digits ``1'' to ``9'' + corresponding to the windows 1 to 9. ^_X means control-_X, + where _X is any character. In particular, ^^ is control-^. + _E_s_c_a_p_e is the escape key, or ^[. + + ## Select window # as the current window and return to + conversation mode. + + %%## Select window # but stay in command mode. + + ^^^^ Select the previous window and return to conversation + mode. This is useful for toggling between two windows. + + eessccaappee + Return to conversation mode. + + ^^PP Return to conversation mode and write ^P to the current + window. Thus, typing two ^P's in conversation mode + sends one to the current window. If the _w_i_n_d_o_w escape + is changed to some other character, that character + takes the place of ^P here. + + ?? List a short summary of commands. + + ^^LL Redraw the screen. + + qq Exit _w_i_n_d_o_w. Confirmation is requested. + + ^^ZZ Suspend _w_i_n_d_o_w. + + ww Create a new window. The user is prompted for the + positions of the upper left and lower right corners of + the window. The cursor is placed on the screen and the + keys ``h'', ``j'', ``k'', and ``l'' move the cursor + left, down, up, and right, respectively. The keys + ``H'', ``J'', ``K'', and ``L'' move the cursor to the + respective limits of the screen. Typing a number + before the movement keys repeats the movement that + number of times. Return enters the cursor position as + the upper left corner of the window. The lower right + corner is entered in the same manner. During this pro- + cess, the placement of the new window is indicated by a + rectangular box drawn on the screen, corresponding to + where the new window will be framed. Typing escape at + any point cancels this command. + + This window becomes the current window, and is given + the first available ID. The default buffer size is + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 3 + + + + + + +WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1) + + + + used (see _n_l_i_n_e command below). + + Only fully visible windows can be created this way. + + cc## Close window #. The process in the window is sent the + hangup signal (see _k_i_l_l (1)). _C_s_h (1) should handle + this signal correctly and cause no problems. + + mm## Move window # to another location. A box in the shape + of the window is drawn on the screen to indicate the + new position of the window, and the same keys as those + for the _w command are used to position the box. The + window can be moved partially off-screen. + + MM## Move window # to its previous position. + + ss## Change the size of window #. The user is prompted to + enter the new lower right corner of the window. A box + is drawn to indicate the new window size. The same + keys used in _w and _m are used to enter the position. + + SS## Change window # to its previous size. + + ^^YY Scroll the current window up by one line. + + ^^EE Scroll the current window down by one line. + + ^^UU Scroll the current window up by half the window size. + + ^^DD Scroll the current window down by half the window size. + + ^^BB Scroll the current window up by the full window size. + + ^^FF Scroll the current window down by the full window size. + + hh Move the cursor of the current window left by one + column. + + jj Move the cursor of the current window down by one line. + + kk Move the cursor of the current window up by one line. + + ll Move the cursor of the current window right by one + column. + + ^^SS Stop output in the current window. + + ^^QQ Start output in the current window. + + :: Enter a line to be executed as long commands. Normal + line editing characters (erase character, erase word, + erase line) are supported. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 4 + + + + + + +WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1) + + + +LLOONNGG CCOOMMMMAANNDDSS + Long commands are a sequence of statements parsed much like + a programming language, with a syntax similar to that of C. + Numeric and string expressions and variables are supported, + as well as conditional statements. + + There are two data types: string and number. A string is a + sequence of letters or digits beginning with a letter. + ``_'' and ``.'' are considered letters. Alternately, non- + alphanumeric characters can be included in strings by quot- + ing them in ``"'' or escaping them with ``\''. In addition, + the ``\'' sequences of C are supported, both inside and out- + side quotes (e.g., ``\n'' is a new line, ``\r'' a carriage + return). For example, these are legal strings: abcde01234, + "&#$^*&#", ab"$#"cd, ab\$\#cd, "/usr/ucb/window". + + A number is an integer value in one of three forms: a + decimal number, an octal number preceded by ``0'', or a hex- + adecimal number preceded by ``0x'' or ``0X''. The natural + machine integer size is used (i.e., the signed integer type + of the C compiler). As in C, a non-zero number represents a + boolean true. + + The character ``#'' begins a comment which terminates at the + end of the line. + + A statement is either a conditional or an expression. + Expression statements are terminated with a new line or + ``;''. To continue an expression on the next line, ter- + minate the first line with ``\''. + +CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNAALL SSTTAATTEEMMEENNTT + _W_i_n_d_o_w has a single control structure: the fully bracketed + if statement in the form + if then + + . . . + elsif then + + . . . + else + + . . . + endif + The _e_l_s_e and _e_l_s_i_f parts are optional, and the latter can be + repeated any number of times. <_E_x_p_r> must be numeric. + +EEXXPPRREESSSSIIOONNSS + Expressions in _w_i_n_d_o_w are similar to those in the C + language, with most C operators supported on numeric + operands. In addition, some are overloaded to operate on + strings. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 5 + + + + + + +WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1) + + + + When an expression is used as a statement, its value is dis- + carded after evaluation. Therefore, only expressions with + side effects (assignments and function calls) are useful as + statements. + + Single valued (no arrays) variables are supported, of both + numeric and string values. Some variables are predefined. + They are listed below. + + The operators in order of increasing precedence: + + <> == <> + Assignment. The variable of name <_e_x_p_r_1>, which must + be string valued, is assigned the result of <_e_x_p_r_2>. + Returns the value of <_e_x_p_r_2>. + + <> ?? <> :: <> + Returns the value of <_e_x_p_r_2> if <_e_x_p_r_1> evaluates true + (non-zero numeric value); returns the value of <_e_x_p_r_3> + otherwise. Only one of <_e_x_p_r_2> and <_e_x_p_r_3> is + evaluated. <_E_x_p_r_1> must be numeric. + + <> |||| <> + Logical or. Numeric values only. Short circuit + evaluation is supported (i.e., if <_e_x_p_r_1> evaluates + true, then <_e_x_p_r_2> is not evaluated). + + <> &&&& <> + Logical and with short circuit evaluation. Numeric + values only. + + <> || <> + Bitwise or. Numeric values only. + + <> ^^ <> + Bitwise exclusive or. Numeric values only. + + <> && <> + Bitwise and. Numeric values only. + + <> ==== <>,, <> !!== <> + Comparison (equal and not equal, respectively). The + boolean result (either 1 or 0) of the comparison is + returned. The operands can be numeric or string + valued. One string operand forces the other to be con- + verted to a string in necessary. + + <> << <>,, <> >> <>,, + Less than, greater than, less than or equal to, greater + than or equal to. Both numeric and string values, with + automatic conversion as above. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 6 + + + + + + +WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1) + + + + <> <<<< <>,, <> >>>> <> + If both operands are numbers, <_e_x_p_r_1> is bit shifted + left (or right) by <_e_x_p_r_2> bits. If <_e_x_p_r_1> is a + string, then its first (or last) <_e_x_p_r_2> characters are + returns (if <_e_x_p_r_2> is also a string, then its length + is used in place of its value). + + <> ++ <>,, <> -- <> + Addition and subtraction on numbers. For ``+'', if one + argument is a string, then the other is converted to a + string, and the result is the concatenation of the two + strings. + + <> ** <>,, <> // <>,, + Multiplication, division, modulo. Numbers only. + + --<>,, ~~<>,, !!<>,, $$<>,, $$??<> + The first three are unary minus, bitwise complement and + logical complement on numbers only. The operator, + ``$'', takes <_e_x_p_r> and returns the value of the vari- + able of that name. If <_e_x_p_r> is numeric with value _n + and it appears within an alias macro (see below), then + it refers to the nth argument of the alias invocation. + ``$?'' tests for the existence of the variable <_e_x_p_r>, + and returns 1 if it exists or 0 otherwise. + + <>((<>)) + Function call. <_E_x_p_r> must be a string that is the + unique prefix of the name of a builtin _w_i_n_d_o_w function + or the full name of a user defined alias macro. In the + case of a builtin function, <_a_r_g_l_i_s_t> can be in one of + two forms: + , , . . . + argname1 = , argname2 = , . . . + The two forms can in fact be intermixed, but the result + is unpredictable. Most arguments can be omitted; + default values will be supplied for them. The _a_r_g_n_a_m_e_s + can be unique prefixes of the the argument names. The + commas separating arguments are used only to disambigu- + ate, and can usually be omitted. + + Only the first argument form is valid for user defined + aliases. Aliases are defined using the _a_l_i_a_s builtin + function (see below). Arguments are accessed via a + variant of the variable mechanism (see ``$'' operator + above). + + Most functions return value, but some are used for side + effect only and so must be used as statements. When a + function or an alias is used as a statement, the + parenthesis surrounding the argument list may be omit- + ted. Aliases return no value. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 7 + + + + + + +WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1) + + + +BBUUIILLTTIINN FFUUNNCCTTIIOONNSS + The arguments are listed by name in their natural order. + Optional arguments are in square brackets (``[ ]''). Argu- + ments that have no names are in angle brackets (``<>''). + + aalliiaass(([[<>]],, [[<>]])) + If no argument is given, all currently defined alias + macros are listed. Otherwise, <_s_t_r_i_n_g> is defined as + an alias, with expansion <_s_t_r_i_n_g-_l_i_s_t>. The previous + definition of <_s_t_r_i_n_g>, if any, is returned. Default + for <_s_t_r_i_n_g-_l_i_s_t> is no change. + + cclloossee((<>)) + Close the windows specified in <_w_i_n_d_o_w-_l_i_s_t>. If + <_w_i_n_d_o_w-_l_i_s_t> is the word _a_l_l, than all windows are + closed. No value is returned. + + ccuurrssoorrmmooddeess(([[mmooddeess]])) + Set the window cursor to _m_o_d_e_s. _M_o_d_e_s is the bitwise + or of the mode bits defined as the variables _m__u_l + (underline), _m__r_e_v (reverse video), _m__b_l_k (blinking), + and _m__g_r_p (graphics, terminal dependent). Return value + is the previous modes. Default is no change. For + example, cursor($m_rev|$m_blk) sets the window cursors + to blinking reverse video. + + eecchhoo(([[wwiinnddooww]],, [[<>]])) + Write the list of strings, <_s_t_r_i_n_g-_l_i_s_t>, to _w_i_n_d_o_w, + separated by spaces and terminated with a new line. + The strings are only displayed in the window, the + processes in the window are not involved (see _w_r_i_t_e + below). No value is returned. Default is the current + window. + + eessccaappee(([[eessccaappeecc]])) + Set the escape character to _e_s_c_a_p_e-_c_h_a_r. Returns the + old escape character as a one character string. + Default is no change. _E_s_c_a_p_e_c can be a string of a + single character, or in the form ^_X, meaning control-_X. + + ffoorreeggrroouunndd(([[wwiinnddooww]],, [[ffllaagg]])) + Move _w_i_n_d_o_w in or out of foreground. _F_l_a_g can be one + of _o_n, _o_f_f, _y_e_s, _n_o, _t_r_u_e, or _f_a_l_s_e, with obvious mean- + ings, or it can be a numeric expression, in which case + a non-zero value is true. Returns the old foreground + flag as a number. Default for _w_i_n_d_o_w is the current + window, default for _f_l_a_g is no change. + + llaabbeell(([[wwiinnddooww]],, [[llaabbeell]])) + Set the label of _w_i_n_d_o_w to _l_a_b_e_l. Returns the old + label as a string. Default for _w_i_n_d_o_w is the current + window, default for _l_a_b_e_l is no change. To turn off a + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 8 + + + + + + +WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1) + + + + label, set it to an empty string (""). + + lliisstt(()) + No arguments. List the identifiers and labels of all + windows. No value is returned. + + nnlliinnee(([[nnlliinnee]])) + Set the default buffer size to _n_l_i_n_e. Initially, it is + 48 lines. Returns the old default buffer size. + Default is no change. Using a very large buffer can + slow the program down considerably. + + sseelleecctt(([[wwiinnddooww]])) + Make _w_i_n_d_o_w the current window. The previous current + window is returned. Default is no change. + + sshheellll(([[<>]])) + Set the default window shell program to <_s_t_r_i_n_g-_l_i_s_t>. + Returns the first string in the old shell setting. + Default is no change. Initially, the default shell is + taken from the environment variable _S_H_E_L_L. + + ssoouurrccee((ffiilleennaammee)) + Read and execute the long commands in _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e. + Returns -1 if the file cannot be read, 0 otherwise. + + tteerrssee(([[ffllaagg]])) + Set terse mode to _f_l_a_g. In terse mode, the command + window stays hidden even in command mode, and errors + are reported by sounding the terminal's bell. _F_l_a_g can + take on the same values as in _f_o_r_e_g_r_o_u_n_d above. + Returns the old terse flag. Default is no change. + + uunnaalliiaass((aalliiaass)) + Undefine _a_l_i_a_s. Returns -1 if _a_l_i_a_s does not exist, 0 + otherwise. + + uunnsseett((vvaarriiaabbllee)) + Undefine _v_a_r_i_a_b_l_e. Returns -1 if _v_a_r_i_a_b_l_e does not + exist, 0 otherwise. + + vvaarriiaabblleess(()) + No arguments. List all variables. No value is + returned. + + wwiinnddooww(([[rrooww]],, [[ccoolluummnn]],, [[nnrrooww]],, [[nnccooll]],, [[nnlliinnee]],, [[ffrraammee]],, + [[ppttyy]],, [[mmaappnnll]],, [[sshheellll]])) + Open a window with upper left corner at _r_o_w, _c_o_l_u_m_n and + size _n_r_o_w, _n_c_o_l. If _n_l_i_n_e is specified, then that many + lines are allocated for the text buffer. Otherwise, + the default buffer size is used. Default values for + _r_o_w, _c_o_l_u_m_n, _n_r_o_w, and _n_c_o_l are, respectively, the + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 9 + + + + + + +WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1) + + + + upper, left-most, lower, or right-most extremes of the + screen. _F_r_a_m_e, _p_t_y, and _m_a_p_n_l are flag values inter- + preted in the same way as the argument to _f_o_r_e_g_r_o_u_n_d + (see above); they mean, respectively, put a frame + around this window (default true), allocate pseudo- + terminal for this window rather than socketpair + (default true), and map new line characters in this + window to carriage return and line feed (default true + if socketpair is used, false otherwise). _S_h_e_l_l is a + list of strings that will be used as the shell program + to place in the window (default is the program speci- + fied by _s_h_e_l_l, see below). The created window's iden- + tifier is returned as a number. + + wwrriittee(([[wwiinnddooww]],, [[<>]])) + Send the list of strings, <_s_t_r_i_n_g-_l_i_s_t>, to _w_i_n_d_o_w, + separated by spaces but not terminated with a new line. + The strings are actually given to the window as input. + No value is returned. Default is the current window. + +PPRREEDDEEFFIINNEEDD VVAARRIIAABBLLEESS + These variables are for information only. Redefining them + does not affect the internal operation of _w_i_n_d_o_w. + + bbaauudd The baud rate as a number between 50 and 38400. + + mmooddeess + The display modes (reverse video, underline, blinking, + graphics) supported by the physical terminal. The + value of _m_o_d_e_s is the bitwise or of some of the one bit + values, _m__b_l_k, _m__g_r_p, _m__r_e_v, and _m__u_l (see below). + These values are useful in setting the window cursors' + modes (see _c_u_r_s_o_r_m_o_d_e_s above). + + mm__bbllkk + The blinking mode bit. + + mm__ggrrpp + The graphics mode bit (not very useful). + + mm__rreevv + The reverse video mode bit. + + mm__uull The underline mode bit. + + nnccooll The number of columns on the physical screen. + + nnrrooww The number of rows on the physical screen. + + tteerrmm The terminal type. The standard name, found in the + second name field of the terminal's _T_E_R_M_C_A_P entry, is + used. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 10 + + + + + + +WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1) + + + +FFIILLEESS + ~/.windowrc startup command file. + /dev/[pt]ty[pq]?pseudo-terminal devices. + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Should be self explanatory. + +BBUUGGSS + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 11 + + + + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/write.0 b/usr/man/cat1/write.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..be8dc90eca --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/write.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +WRITE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WRITE(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + write - write to another user + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + wwrriittee user [ ttyname ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _W_r_i_t_e copies lines from your terminal to that of another + user. When first called, it sends the message + + Message from yourname@yoursystem on yourttyname at + time... + + The recipient of the message should write back at this + point. Communication continues until an end of file is read + from the terminal or an interrupt is sent. At that point + _w_r_i_t_e writes `EOT' on the other terminal and exits. + + If you want to write to a user who is logged in more than + once, the _t_t_y_n_a_m_e argument may be used to indicate the + appropriate terminal name. + + Permission to write may be denied or granted by use of the + _m_e_s_g command. At the outset writing is allowed. Certain + commands, in particular _n_r_o_f_f and _p_r(1) disallow messages in + order to prevent messy output. + + If the character `!' is found at the beginning of a line, + _w_r_i_t_e calls the shell to execute the rest of the line as a + command. + + The following protocol is suggested for using _w_r_i_t_e: when + you first write to another user, wait for him to write back + before starting to send. Each party should end each message + with a distinctive signal-((oo)) for `over' is conventional- + that the other may reply. ((oooo)) for `over and out' is sug- + gested when conversation is about to be terminated. + +FFIILLEESS + /etc/utmp to find user + /bin/sh to execute `!' + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + mesg(1), who(1), mail(1) + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/xget.0 b/usr/man/cat1/xget.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..af0c4a9bcc --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/xget.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +XSEND(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual XSEND(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + xsend, xget, enroll - secret mail + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + xxsseenndd person + xxggeett + eennrroollll + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + These commands implement a secure communication channel; it + is like _m_a_i_l(1), but no one can read the messages except the + intended recipient. The method embodies a public-key cryp- + tosystem using knapsacks. + + To receive messages, use _e_n_r_o_l_l; it asks you for a password + that you must subsequently quote in order to receive secret + mail. + + To receive secret mail, use _x_g_e_t. It asks for your pass- + word, then gives you the messages. + + To send secret mail, use _x_s_e_n_d in the same manner as the + ordinary mail command. (However, it will accept only one + target). A message announcing the receipt of secret mail is + also sent by ordinary mail. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/spool/secretmail/*.key: keys + /usr/spool/secretmail/*.[0-9]: messages + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + mail (1) + +BBUUGGSS + It should be integrated with ordinary mail. The announce- + ment of secret mail makes traffic analysis possible. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/xsend.0 b/usr/man/cat1/xsend.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..af0c4a9bcc --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/xsend.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +XSEND(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual XSEND(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + xsend, xget, enroll - secret mail + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + xxsseenndd person + xxggeett + eennrroollll + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + These commands implement a secure communication channel; it + is like _m_a_i_l(1), but no one can read the messages except the + intended recipient. The method embodies a public-key cryp- + tosystem using knapsacks. + + To receive messages, use _e_n_r_o_l_l; it asks you for a password + that you must subsequently quote in order to receive secret + mail. + + To receive secret mail, use _x_g_e_t. It asks for your pass- + word, then gives you the messages. + + To send secret mail, use _x_s_e_n_d in the same manner as the + ordinary mail command. (However, it will accept only one + target). A message announcing the receipt of secret mail is + also sent by ordinary mail. + +FFIILLEESS + /usr/spool/secretmail/*.key: keys + /usr/spool/secretmail/*.[0-9]: messages + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + mail (1) + +BBUUGGSS + It should be integrated with ordinary mail. The announce- + ment of secret mail makes traffic analysis possible. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/xstr.0 b/usr/man/cat1/xstr.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..46b0507164 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/xstr.0 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + +XSTR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual XSTR(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + xstr - extract strings from C programs to implement shared + strings + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + xxssttrr [ --cc ] [ -- ] [ file ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _X_s_t_r maintains a file _s_t_r_i_n_g_s into which strings in com- + ponent parts of a large program are hashed. These strings + are replaced with references to this common area. This + serves to implement shared constant strings, most useful if + they are also read-only. + + The command + + xxssttrr --cc name + + will extract the strings from the C source in name, replac- + ing string references by expressions of the form + (&xstr[number]) for some number. An appropriate declaration + of _x_s_t_r is prepended to the file. The resulting C text is + placed in the file _x._c, to then be compiled. The strings + from this file are placed in the _s_t_r_i_n_g_s data base if they + are not there already. Repeated strings and strings which + are suffices of existing strings do not cause changes to the + data base. + + After all components of a large program have been compiled a + file _x_s._c declaring the common _x_s_t_r space can be created by + a command of the form + + xxssttrr + + This _x_s._c file should then be compiled and loaded with the + rest of the program. If possible, the array can be made + read-only (shared) saving space and swap overhead. + + _X_s_t_r can also be used on a single file. A command + + xxssttrr name + + creates files _x._c and _x_s._c as before, without using or + affecting any _s_t_r_i_n_g_s file in the same directory. + + It may be useful to run _x_s_t_r after the C preprocessor if any + macro definitions yield strings or if there is conditional + code which contains strings which may not, in fact, be + needed. _X_s_t_r reads from its standard input when the argu- + ment `-' is given. An appropriate command sequence for run- + ning _x_s_t_r after the C preprocessor is: + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1 + + + + + + +XSTR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual XSTR(1) + + + + cccc --EE name.c | xxssttrr --cc - + cccc --cc x.c + mmvv x.o name.o + + _X_s_t_r does not touch the file _s_t_r_i_n_g_s unless new items are + added, thus _m_a_k_e can avoid remaking _x_s._o unless truly neces- + sary. + +FFIILLEESS + strings Data base of strings + x.c Massaged C source + xs.c C source for definition of array `xstr' + /tmp/xs* Temp file when `xstr name' doesn't touch _s_t_r_i_n_g_s + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + mkstr(1) + +BBUUGGSS + If a string is a suffix of another string in the data base, + but the shorter string is seen first by _x_s_t_r both strings + will be placed in the data base, when just placing the + longer one there will do. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 2 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/yacc.0 b/usr/man/cat1/yacc.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8a5faa60bf --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/yacc.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +YACC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual YACC(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + yacc - yet another compiler-compiler + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + yyaacccc [ --vvdd ] grammar + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _Y_a_c_c converts a context-free grammar into a set of tables + for a simple automaton which executes an LR(1) parsing algo- + rithm. The grammar may be ambiguous; specified precedence + rules are used to break ambiguities. + + The output file, _y._t_a_b._c, must be compiled by the C compiler + to produce a program _y_y_p_a_r_s_e. This program must be loaded + with the lexical analyzer program, _y_y_l_e_x, as well as _m_a_i_n + and _y_y_e_r_r_o_r, an error handling routine. These routines must + be supplied by the user; _L_e_x(1) is useful for creating lexi- + cal analyzers usable by _y_a_c_c. + + If the --vv flag is given, the file _y._o_u_t_p_u_t is prepared, + which contains a description of the parsing tables and a + report on conflicts generated by ambiguities in the grammar. + + If the -dd flag is used, the file _y._t_a_b._h is generated with + the _d_e_f_i_n_e statements that associate the _y_a_c_c-assigned + `token codes' with the user-declared `token names'. This + allows source files other than _y._t_a_b._c to access the token + codes. + +FFIILLEESS + y.output + y.tab.c + y.tab.h defines for token names + yacc.tmp, yacc.acts temporary files + /usr/lib/yaccpar parser prototype for C programs + +SSEEEE AALLSSOO + _l_e_x(1) + _L_R _P_a_r_s_i_n_g by A. V. Aho and S. C. Johnson, Computing Sur- + veys, June, 1974. + _Y_A_C_C - _Y_e_t _A_n_o_t_h_e_r _C_o_m_p_i_l_e_r _C_o_m_p_i_l_e_r by S. C. Johnson. + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + The number of reduce-reduce and shift-reduce conflicts is + reported on the standard output; a more detailed report is + found in the _y._o_u_t_p_u_t file. Similarly, if some rules are + not reachable from the start symbol, this is also reported. + +BBUUGGSS + Because file names are fixed, at most one _y_a_c_c process can + be active in a given directory at a time. + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/yes.0 b/usr/man/cat1/yes.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..77bbdc26ab --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/yes.0 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + +YES(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual YES(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + yes - be repetitively affirmative + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + yyeess [ _e_x_p_l_e_t_i_v_e ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _Y_e_s outputs _e_x_p_l_e_t_i_v_e, or, by default, "y", forever. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 January 9, 1988 1 + + + diff --git a/usr/man/cat1/zcat.0 b/usr/man/cat1/zcat.0 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ef84c3c2e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/usr/man/cat1/zcat.0 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + +COMPRESS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COMPRESS(1) + + + +NNAAMMEE + compress, uncompress, zcat - compress and expand data + +SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS + ccoommpprreessss [ --ff ] [ --vv ] [ --cc ] [ --bb _b_i_t_s ] [ _n_a_m_e ... ] + uunnccoommpprreessss [ --ff ] [ --vv ] [ --cc ] [ _n_a_m_e ... ] + zzccaatt [ _n_a_m_e ... ] + +DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN + _C_o_m_p_r_e_s_s reduces the size of the named files using adaptive + Lempel-Ziv coding. Whenever possible, each file is replaced + by one with the extension ..ZZ,, while keeping the same owner- + ship modes, access and modification times. If no files are + specified, the standard input is compressed to the standard + output. Compressed files can be restored to their original + form using _u_n_c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s or _z_c_a_t. + + The --ff option will force compression of _n_a_m_e, even if it + does not actually shrink or the corresponding _n_a_m_e.Z file + already exists. Except when run in the background under + /_b_i_n/_s_h, if --ff is not given the user is prompted as to + whether an existing _n_a_m_e.Z file should be overwritten. + + The --cc (``cat'') option makes _c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s/_u_n_c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s write to + the standard output; no files are changed. The nondestruc- + tive behavior of _z_c_a_t is identical to that of _u_n_c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s --cc.. + + _C_o_m_p_r_e_s_s uses the modified Lempel-Ziv algorithm popularized + in "A Technique for High Performance Data Compression", + Terry A. Welch, _I_E_E_E _C_o_m_p_u_t_e_r, vol. 17, no. 6 (June 1984), + pp. 8-19. Common substrings in the file are first replaced + by 9-bit codes 257 and up. When code 512 is reached, the + algorithm switches to 10-bit codes and continues to use more + bits until the limit specified by the --bb flag is reached + (default 16). _B_i_t_s must be between 9 and 16. The default + can be changed in the source to allow _c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s to be run on + a smaller machine. + + After the _b_i_t_s limit is attained, _c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s periodically + checks the compression ratio. If it is increasing, _c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s + continues to use the existing code dictionary. However, if + the compression ratio decreases, _c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s discards the table + of substrings and rebuilds it from scratch. This allows the + algorithm to adapt to the next "block" of the file. + + Note that the --bb flag is omitted for _u_n_c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s, since the + _b_i_t_s parameter specified during compression is encoded + within the output, along with a magic number to ensure that + neither decompression of random data nor recompression of + compressed data is attempted. + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 11, 1986 1 + + + + + + +COMPRESS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COMPRESS(1) + + + + The amount of compression obtained depends on the size of + the input, the number of _b_i_t_s per code, and the distribution + of common substrings. Typically, text such as source code + or English is reduced by 50-60%. Compression is generally + much better than that achieved by Huffman coding (as used in + _p_a_c_k), or adaptive Huffman coding (_c_o_m_p_a_c_t), and takes less + time to compute. + + The --vv option causes the printing of the percentage reduc- + tion of each file. + + If an error occurs, exit status is 1, else if the last file + was not compressed because it became larger, the status is + 2; else the status is 0. + +DDIIAAGGNNOOSSTTIICCSS + Usage: compress [-fvc] [-b maxbits] [file ...] + Invalid options were specified on the command line. + Missing maxbits + Maxbits must follow --bb. + _f_i_l_e: not in compressed format + The file specified to _u_n_c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s has not been + compressed. + _f_i_l_e: compressed with _x_x bits, can only handle _y_y bits + _F_i_l_e was compressed by a program that could deal + with more _b_i_t_s than the compress code on this + machine. Recompress the file with smaller _b_i_t_s. + _f_i_l_e: already has .Z suffix -- no change + The file is assumed to be already compressed. + Rename the file and try again. + _f_i_l_e: filename too long to tack on .Z + The file cannot be compressed because its name is + longer than 12 characters. Rename and try again. + This message does not occur on BSD systems. + _f_i_l_e already exists; do you wish to overwrite (y or n)? + Respond "y" if you want the output file to be + replaced; "n" if not. + uncompress: corrupt input + A SIGSEGV violation was detected which usually means + that the input file is corrupted. + Compression: _x_x._x_x% + Percentage of the input saved by compression. + (Relevant only for --vv.) + -- not a regular file: unchanged + When the input file is not a regular file, (e.g. a + directory), it is left unaltered. + -- has _x_x other links: unchanged + The input file has links; it is left unchanged. See + _l_n(1) for more information. + -- file unchanged + No savings is achieved by compression. The input + remains virgin. + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 11, 1986 2 + + + + + + +COMPRESS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COMPRESS(1) + + + +BBUUGGSS + Although compressed files are compatible between machines + with large memory, --bb12 should be used for file transfer to + architectures with a small process data space (64KB or less, + as exhibited by the DEC PDP series, the Intel 80286, etc.) + + _c_o_m_p_r_e_s_s should be more flexible about the existence of the + `.Z' suffix. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printed 7/9/88 May 11, 1986 3 + + + -- 2.20.1